This is a modern-English version of In the forbidden land : an account of a journey into Tibet, capture by the Tibetan lamas and soldiers, imprisonment, torture and ultimate release, originally written by Landor, Arnold Henry Savage. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


[i]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

IN THE FORBIDDEN LAND



[ii]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

IN THE FORBIDDEN LAND

[iii]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Times: "The ordinary reader will be struck with the portraits, which show that in a very few weeks he must have endured a lifetime of concentrated misery. Other travellers, no doubt, have gone further, but none who have escaped with their lives have fared worse.... Mr. Landor tells a plain and manly tale, without affectation or bravado. It is a book, certainly, that will be read with interest and excitement."

Times: "The average reader will be impressed by the portraits, which reveal that in just a few weeks he must have experienced a lifetime of intense suffering. Other travelers may have ventured further, but none who survived have had it worse.... Mr. Landor shares a straightforward and honest story, without pretense or exaggeration. This is definitely a book that will be read with interest and excitement."

Athenæum: "The account he has written of his travels and adventures is vivid and often fascinating. His frequent notices of curious customs are full of interest, and numerous illustrations from photographs or sketches taken on the spot render this one of the most attractive records of travel published recently."

Athenæum: "His account of his travels and adventures is lively and often captivating. His frequent observations of unique customs are really engaging, and many photos or sketches taken on-site make this one of the most appealing travel records published recently."

Guardian: "Life, according to Mr. Landor, has 'barely a dull moment,' and the gloomiest of us will admit that this is at least true of that part of life which may be devoted to the reading of his latest book."

Guardian: "According to Mr. Landor, life has 'barely a dull moment,' and even the most pessimistic among us will agree that this is certainly true for the time spent reading his latest book."

World: "He has contrived, even in circumstances of cruel disadvantage, to present a wonderfully minute and impressive series of pictures of the life, manners, and customs of the Tibetans. No less powerful and vivid are his descriptions of the scenery and natural phenomena of the Forbidden Land, which are reinforced by an ample series of illustrations that attain a high standard of artistic excellence. Mr. Landor's bitter experiences have had at least the advantage of providing him with material for the most absorbing travel book produced within recent times."

World: "He has managed, even in tough situations, to create a remarkably detailed and impressive collection of images depicting the life, habits, and customs of the Tibetans. His descriptions of the landscape and natural wonders of the Forbidden Land are equally powerful and vivid, supported by a comprehensive set of illustrations that reach a high standard of artistic quality. Mr. Landor's harsh experiences have at least given him material for the most captivating travel book released in recent years."

Daily Telegraph: "Mr. Landor's story is one of the most extraordinary tales of modern times, yet even the most sceptical reader will admire the vigour with which it is told, and the endurance with which the explorer and his faithful servants bore up against their savage captors."

Daily Telegraph: "Mr. Landor's story is one of the most remarkable tales of our time, yet even the most doubtful reader will appreciate the energy with which it is narrated and the resilience with which the explorer and his loyal servants faced their wild captors."

Standard: "The book fascinates ... The verbal pictures it gives are extremely vivid, and the effect of them is greatly heightened by the numerous drawings and photographs by the author. Mr. Landor is an artist as well as traveller and writer, and he knows how to use his pencil and brush to emphasise his letter-press. Whatever may be said of the wisdom of his enterprises, his book is certainly a remarkable contribution to the literature of modern travel."

Standard: "The book is captivating ... The descriptions are incredibly vivid, and the impact is enhanced by the many drawings and photos by the author. Mr. Landor is not just a traveler and writer; he's also an artist, and he knows how to use his pencil and brush to highlight his text. Regardless of the opinions on the wisdom of his ventures, his book is undoubtedly an impressive addition to contemporary travel literature."

Daily News: "The great library of travel in the East has not received for many a year a more important addition than this bright, picturesque, and instructive volume."

Daily News: "The major travel library on the East hasn't added anything this important in years—this vibrant, colorful, and informative book."

Daily Chronicle: "Mr. Landor is an artist as well as a writer, and this handsome volume is most lavishly illustrated with sketches and photographs. Apart from its intense interest as a story of stirring adventure, the book is a valuable storehouse of information on Southern Tibet and its people, and on the little known Indian district of Northern Kumaon. This is surely a record of devotion to geographical science such as no previous explorer has been able to show."

Daily Chronicle: "Mr. Landor is both an artist and a writer, and this beautiful book is richly illustrated with sketches and photos. Beyond its captivating story of thrilling adventure, the book serves as a valuable resource of information about Southern Tibet and its people, as well as the lesser-known Indian region of Northern Kumaon. This is undoubtedly a testament to dedication to geographical science that no previous explorer has matched."


[iv]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

A. Henry Savage Landor and his Two Faithful Servants

A. Henry Savage Landor and His Two Loyal Servants


[v]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

IN THE FORBIDDEN LAND

AN ACCOUNT OF A JOURNEY IN TIBET

CAPTURE BY THE TIBETAN AUTHORITIES

IMPRISONMENT, TORTURE, AND

ULTIMATE RELEASE

BY

A. HENRY SAVAGE LANDOR

AUTHOR OF

"COREA, OR THE LAND OF THE MORNING CALM,"

"ALONE WITH THE HAIRY AINU," ETC.


also various official documents, including the inquiry

and report by J. Larkin, Esq., appointed

by the Indian government

With Two Hundred and Fifty-one Illustrations And a Map

LONDON

WILLIAM HEINEMANN

1899


[vi]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

First Edition (2 Vols. 8vo), October 1898

First Edition (2 Vols. 8vo), October 1898

New Impression (2 Vols. 8vo), November 1898

New Impression (2 Vols. 8vo), November 1898

New Edition (1 Vol. 8vo), May 1899

New Edition (1 Vol. 8vo), May 1899

 

 

 

 

 

 

This Edition enjoys copyright in all
Countries signatory to the Berne
Treaty, and is not to be imported into
the United States of America.

This edition is protected by copyright in all
countries that are signatories to the Berne
Treaty, and it cannot be imported into
the United States of America.


[vii]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

I DEDICATE THIS BOOK

TO

MY FATHER & MOTHER

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]


[ix]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

PREFACE

In this book I have set down the record of a journey in Tibet undertaken by me during the spring, summer and autumn of 1897. It is illustrated partly from my photographs and partly from sketches made by me on the spot. Only as regards the torture scenes have I had to draw from memory, but it will be easily conceded that their impression must be vivid enough with me.

In this book, I have documented a journey I took in Tibet during the spring, summer, and fall of 1897. It includes illustrations from my photographs and sketches I made on-site. I only had to rely on memory for the torture scenes, but it's easy to agree that those memories would be quite vivid for me.

The map is made entirely from my surveys of an area of twelve thousand five hundred square miles in Tibet proper. In Chapter VI. the altitudes of such high peaks in India as Nanda Devi and others are taken from the Trigonometrical Survey, and so are the positions fixed by astronomical observations of the starting and terminating points of my surveys at the places where I entered and left Tibet.

The map is created entirely from my surveys of an area of twelve thousand five hundred square miles in Tibet. In Chapter VI, the altitudes of high peaks in India like Nanda Devi and others come from the Trigonometrical Survey, as do the locations established by astronomical observations at the starting and ending points of my surveys where I entered and exited Tibet.

In the orthography of geographical names I have adopted the course advised by the Royal Geographical Society—viz., to give the names their true sound as they are locally pronounced, and I have made no exception even for the grand and poetic "Himahlya" which is in English usually distorted into the unmusical and unromantic word "Himalayas."

In writing geographical names, I've followed the recommendation of the Royal Geographical Society—to represent the names as they are pronounced locally. I haven't made any exceptions, even for the grand and poetic "Himahlya," which is often mispronounced in English as the dull and unromantic "Himalayas."

[x] I submit with all deference the following geographical results of my expedition:

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] I respectfully present the following geographical findings from my expedition:

The solution of the uncertainty regarding the division of the Mansarowar and Rakstal Lakes.

The resolution of the uncertainty about the division of Mansarowar and Rakstal Lakes.

The ascent to so great an altitude as 22,000 feet, and the pictures of some of the great Himahlyan glaciers.

The climb to such a high altitude as 22,000 feet, and the images of some of the massive Himalayan glaciers.

The visit to and the fixing of the position of the two principal sources of the Brahmaputra, never before reached by a European.

The trip to locate and determine the positions of the two main sources of the Brahmaputra, which had never been visited by a European before.

The fact that with only two men I was able to travel for so long in the most populated part of Tibet.

The fact that with just two men I was able to travel for so long in the most populated area of Tibet.

In addition to the above, I am glad to state that owing to the publicity which I gave on my return to the outrageous Tibetan abuses taking place on British soil, the Government of India at last, in the summer of 1898, notified the Tibetan authorities that they will no longer be permitted to collect Land Revenue from British subjects there. This fact gives me special satisfaction, because of the exceptional courtesy and kindness bestowed on me by our mountain tribesmen, the Shokas.

In addition to the above, I'm happy to say that thanks to the publicity I generated upon my return regarding the horrible abuses happening in Tibet on British territory, the Government of India finally informed the Tibetan authorities in the summer of 1898 that they would no longer be allowed to collect land revenue from British citizens there. This is particularly satisfying to me because of the exceptional kindness and hospitality shown to me by our mountain tribesmen, the Shokas.

The Government Report of the official Investigation of my case, as well as other documents substantiating the details of my narrative, are printed in an appendix.

The Government Report of the official investigation into my case, along with other documents that support the details of my story, is included in an appendix.

A. H. S. L.

A. H. S. L.

May 1899

May 1899


[xi]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CONTENTS

ChapterPage
 Introductionix
 List of Imagesxxii
IFrom London to Nainital1-3
IILoads—A set of useful pack-saddle cases—Provisions and scientific outfit—Clothes and shoes—Medicines—Under way—The first march—Servants—How I came to employ faithful Chanden Sing4-10
IIIPithoragarh—Fakir women—A well-ventilated abode—Askote—The Rajiwar and his people11-16
IVThe Raots—A slippery journey—Superstitious notions—Anger and jealousy—Friends—To the homes of the savages—Photography—Habitations17-26
VA pilgrim from Mansarowar Lake—The spirits of the mountains—A safeguard against them—Tibetan encampments—The Rajiwar—A waterfall—Watermills27-34
VIHighways and trade routes—The Darma route—The Dholi River—A rough track connecting two valleys—Glaciers—Three ranges and their peaks—Altitudes—Darma, Johar, and the Painkhanda Parganas—The highest peak in the British Empire—Natural boundaries35-40
VIIThe word Bhot and its meaning—Tibetan influence—Tibetan abuses—The ever-helpful Chanden Sing—The first Shoka village—Chanden Sing in disgrace—Weaving-loom—Fabrics—All's well that ends well41-45
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]VIIIPrayers by wind-power—Photography under difficulties—A night of misery—Drying up—Two lady missionaries—Their valuable work—An interesting dinner party—An "eccentric" man's tea party46-52
IXDiscouraging reports—A steep ascent—How I came to deserve the name of "monkey"—Hard at work—Promoted in rank—Collapse in a gale of wind—Time and labour lost53-56
XThe Nerpani, or "waterless track"—Exaggerated accounts—A long shot—The rescue of two coolies—Picturesque Nature—An involuntary shower-bath—The Chai Pass57-62
XIA series of misfortunes—Tibetan atrocities on British subjects—Tibetan exactions—Revolting cruelty to one of her Majesty's subjects—Assault on a British officer—A smart British Envoy63-68
XIITibetan threats—My birthday—Ravenous dogs—A big dinner—Shoka hospitality69-73
XIIIShoka hospitality—How I obtained much information—On a reconnoitring trip—A terrible slide74-80
XIVA palaver—To see is to believe—Dangers and perils on the snow and ice—Thar and Ghural—Stalking—A tiring climb to 16,000 feet—The collapse of a snow bridge81-85
XVAn earthquake—Curious notions of the natives—A Shoka tailor and his ways—The arrival of silver cash—Two rocks in the Kali—Arrogance of a Tibetan spy86-91
XVIThe Rambang—Shoka music—Love-songs—Doleful singing—Abrupt ending—Solos—Smoking—When marriage is contemplated—The Delang—Adultery—Punishment92-97
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]XVIIFuneral Services: Departure of the Soul—Cremation—Amusement of the dead man's soul—The lay figure—Feasting—Doleful dance—Transmigration of the soul—Expensive ceremonies—Offerings before the lay figure—Dancing and contortions—Martial dances—Solo dances—The animal to be sacrificed and the lay figure—Chasing the animal from the village—Tearing out its heart—The yak driven over a precipice—Head shaving—A sacred cave98-110
XVIIITouching Shoka farewell—Feelings curiously expressed—Sobs and tears—The start—A funereal procession—Distressed father and mother—Kachi and Dola the worse for drink—Anxious moments—The bridge destroyed111-115
XIXA dangerous track—Perilous passage—A curious bridge over a precipice—Pathetic Shoka custom—Small misadventures—A grand reception—Tea for all tastes116-119
XXDr. Wilson joins my expedition for a few marches—What misdeeds a photographic camera can do—Weighing, dividing, and packing provisions—Two extra men wanted—The last friendly faces120-122
XXIThe Kuti Castle—Under way—Our first disaster—A cheerful and a sulky coolie—Mansing—A brigand—A strange medley of followers—A character—Tailoring—Fields of stones—Troublesome rivers—The Jolinkan or Lebung Pass—Sense of humour—Pleased with small comforts123-130
XXIIWant of fuel—Cooking under difficulty—Mansing lost and found—Saved from summary justice—Tibetan visitors—We purchase sheep—The snow-line—Cold streams—The petrified chapati and human hand131-136
XXIIIThe scout's return—A small exploring party—The Mangshan glacier137-140
XXIVSnow and troublesome débris—The doctor's sufferings—Kachi disabled—Further trials—A weird apparition—Delirium—All safe—The descent141-147
XXVThe sources of the Kuti River—The Lumpiya glacier—The summit of the range—Bird's-eye view of Tibet—Rubso frozen almost to death—The Lumpiya Pass—Two coolies in distress148-153
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]XXVIMysterious footprints—Brigand or spy?—Passes and tracks—Intense cold—No fuel—A high flat plateau—Fuel at last!—Two spies in disguise—What they took us for154-157
XXVIILama Chokden—A Tibetan guard—The sacred Kelas—Reverence of my men for the sacred Mountain—Trying hard to keep friends with the gods—Obos—Water flowing to us158-161
XXVIIIAn extensive valley—Kiang, or wild horse—Their strange ways—The Gyanema fort—Apprehension at our appearance—A parley—"Cut off our heads!"—Revolt and murder contemplated—Hypocritica ways of Tibetan officials—Help summoned from everywhere—Preparing for war162-166
XXIXArrival of a high official—The Barca Tarjum—A tedious palaver—The Tarjum's anxiety—Permission to proceed—A traitor—Entreated to retrace our steps—Thirty armed horsemen—A pretty speech167-173
XXXSpying our movements—Disguised sepoys—A gloomy look-out—Troublesome followers—Another march back—An amusing incident174-177
XXXIAn attempt that failed—A resolution—A smart Shoka lad—The plucky Chanden Sing proposes to accompany me—Mansing the leper becomes my servant's servant178-181
XXXII"Devil's Camp"—A fierce snowstorm—Abandoning our tents—Dangers and perils in prospect—Collecting the men—One load too many!—Another man wanted and found—A propitious night—Good-bye to Wilson—The escape—Brigands182-186
XXXIIIS.E. wind—Hungry and half frozen—Lakes at 18,960 feet above sea-level—Cold food at high altitudes—Buried in snow—Mansing's sufferings—Fuel at last187-191
XXXIVDacoits—No nonsense allowed—A much-frequented region—A plateau—The Gyanema-Taklakot track—A dangerous spot—Soldiers waiting for us—Burying our baggage—Out of provisions—A fall into the Gakkon River—A bright idea—Nettles our only diet192-197
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]XXXVAll that remained of my men's provisions—The plan to enter the fort—Appearance of yaks—A band of brigands—Erecting fortifications—Changes in the temperature—Soldiers in search of us198-201
XXXVI"Terror Camp"—Two more messengers leave camp—A tribe of Dogpas—A strange sahib—Our messengers return from Taklakot—The account and adventures of their mission—In great distress—Two fakirs who suffered through me—Five hundred rupees offered for my head—The Shokas want to abandon me—A plot—How it failed202-206
XXXVIIA Tibetan guard's encampment—Nattoo volunteers to be a guide—Treachery and punishment of the Shokas—All ways forward barred to me—Evading the soldiers by another perilous march at night—Mansing again lost—A marvellous phenomenon—Sufferings of my men—Severe cold207-210
XXXVIIINight marching—The Lafan and Mafan Lakes—Tize, the sacred Kelas—Rhubarb—Butterflies—A hermit Lama—More Dacoits—Surrounded by them—Routed211-216
XXXIXSpied and followed by robbers—Jogpas' hospitality—Hares—Tibetan charms resisted—Attempt to snatch Chanden Sing's rifle out of his hands—The ridge between the Rakas and Mansarowar Lakes217-219
XLMore robbers—The friends of Tibetan authorities—A snap-shot—A meek lot—Prepossessing female and her curious ways—The purchase of two yaks220-224
XLITibetan coats, hats, and boots—Why a Tibetan prefers to leave half the chest and one arm bare—Ornamentations—Manner and speech—Ignorance and superstition—Way of eating—Jogpa women and children—Head-dress225-230
XLIIA Daku's strange ideas—The ridge between the two lakes—Black tents—Confronting the two lakes—A chain of high peaks—Gombas—Change in the weather231-234
XLIIIThe Langa Tsangpo—A terrific storm—Drenched to the skin—Heavy marching—Against the gods—Difficulty in finding the Lamasery and village—A bark!—Arrival at last—Gentle tapping—Under a roof235-238
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]XLIVThe interior of a serai—Vermin—Fish, local jewellery, and pottery for sale—Favourite shapes and patterns—How pottery is made239-241
XLVFriendly Lamas—Chanden Sing and Mansing purified—Mansing's sarcasm—Pilgrims to Mansarowar and their privileges—For luck!—Outside the Gomba242-244
XLVIEntering the Lamasery—The Lama's dwelling—Novices—Were we in a trap?—Images—Oblations—Urghin—The holy water, the veil of friendship, and absolution—Musical instruments, books, &c.—God and the Trinity—Heaven and hell—A mystery245-248
XLVIIThe Jong Pen's statements regarding me—Sects of Lamas—Lamaseries—Government allowance—Ignorance of the crowds—How Lamas are recruited—Lamas, novices, and menials—Dances and hypnotism—Infallibility—Celibacy and vice—Sculptors—Prayer-wheels and revolving instruments—Nunneries—Human bones for eating vessels and musical instruments—Blood-drinking249-256
XLVIIIIllnesses and remedies—Curious theories about fever—Evil spirits—Blacksmith and dentist—Exorcisms—Surgical operations—Massage and cupping—Incurable illnesses—Deformities—Deafness—Fits and insanity—Melancholia—Suicides257-264
XLIXA Tibetan medicine-man—Lumbago, and a startling cure for it—Combustible fuses—Fire and butter—Prayers, agony and distortions—Strange ideas on medicine265-267
LTucker village—Chokdens—Houses—Flying prayers—Soldiers or robbers?—A stampede—Fresh provisions—Disappointment—Treachery—Shokas leave me—Observations—Five men, all counted!268-270
LIThe start with a further reduced party—A reconnaissance—Natural fortress—Black tents and animals—On the wrong tack—Slings and their use—A visit to a Tibetan camp—Mistaken for brigands—Bargaining and begging271-275
LIIWhat the men were like—Their timidity—Leather work—Metal work—Blades and swords—Filigree—Saddles and harness—Pack saddles276-279
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]LIIIRain in torrents—A miserable night—A gorge—A gigantic inscription—Sheltered under boulders—A fresh surprise—Only two followers left280-282
LIVMy time fully occupied—Our own yak drivers—A heavy blow—Along the stream—Soldiers in pursuit of us—Discovered283-286
LVAn interview—Peace or war?—Gifts and the scarf of friendship—The Kata—The end of a friendly visit287-289
LVIRain in torrents—A swampy plain—The sun at last—Our yaks stolen and recovered290-294
LVIITravelling Tibetans—Over a high pass—A friendly meeting—A proffered banquet—Ascent to 20,000 feet—Looking for the Gunkyo Lake—Surprised by a phantom army295-297
LVIIIA sleepless night—Watching our enemy—A picturesque sight—A messenger—Soldiers from Lhassa—Taken for a Kashmeree—The Gunkyo Lake298-301
LIXIn pleasant company—Unpopularity of the Lamas—Soldiers—Towards the Maium Pass—Grass—Threats—Puzzled Tibetans—The Maium Pass—Obos302-305
LXThe Maium Pass—Into the Yutzang province—Its capital—The Doktol province—Orders disregarded—The sources of the Brahmaputra—Change in the climate—The valley of the Brahmaputra—Running risks306-308
LXIExpecting trouble—Along the Brahmaputra—A thunderstorm—A dilemma—A dangerous river—Swamped—Saved—Night disturbers—A new friend309-312
LXIILeaving the course of the river—A pass—An arid plain—More vanishing soldiers—Another river—A mani wall—Mirage?—A large Tibetan encampment—The chain of mountains north of us313-315
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]LXIIIA commotion—An invitation declined—The tents—Delicacies—The Chokseh316-320
LXIVRefusal to sell food—Women—Their looks and characteristics—The Tchukti—A Lhassa lady321-326
LXVPolyandry—Marriage ceremonies—Jealousy—Divorce—Identification of children—Courtship—Illegitimacy—Adultery327-333
LXVITibetan funerals—Disposal of their dead—By cremation—By water—Cannibalism—Strange beliefs—Revolting barbarity—Drinking human blood—The saints of Tibet334-337
LXVIIAnother commotion—Two hundred soldiers—A stampede—Easy travelling—A long mani wall—Mosquitoes338-341
LXVIIIWashing-day—A long march—Kiang and antelope—Benighted—The purchase of a goat—Ramifications of the Brahmaputra—A détour—Through a swamp—Mansing again lost and found342-345
LXIXThe alarm given—Our bad manners—A peaceful settlement—A large river—Gigantic peak—Again on marshy soil346-348
LXXAnother Tibetan encampment—Uncontrollable animals—A big stream—Washed away—In dreadful suspense—Rescuing the yak—Diving at great altitudes and its effects—How my two followers got across—A precarious outlook and a little comfort349-351
LXXIHungry and worn—A sense of humour—Two buckets of milk—No food to be obtained—Chanden Sing and Mansing in a wretched state—Their fidelity—Exhaustion352-354
LXXIIEighty black tents—Starved—Kindly natives—Presents—Ando and his promises—A Friendly Lama—A low pass—My plans355-357
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]LXXIIIStrange noises—Ando the traitor—Purchasing provisions and ponies—A handsome pony—Decoyed away from my tent and rifles—Pounced upon—The fight—A prisoner358-361
LXXIVChanden Sing's plucky resistance—Mansing secured—A signal—A treacherous Lama—Confiscation of baggage—Watches, compasses and aneroids—Fear and avidity—The air-cushion—Dragged into the encampment362-366
LXXVA warning to my men—Calm and coolness—The Pombo's tent—Chanden Sing cross-examined and flogged367-369
LXXVILed before the tribunal—The Pombo—Classical Tibetan beyond me—Chanden Sing lashed—The Lamas puzzled—A sudden change in the Pombo's attitude370-373
LXXVIIMy note-books and maps—What the Lamas wanted me to say—My refusal—Anger and threats—Ando the traitor—Chanden Sing's heroism—A scene of cruelty—Rain374-376
LXXVIIIA high military officer—A likely friend—A soldier and not a Lama—His sympathy—Facts about the Tibetan army377-379
LXXIXSarcasm appreciated—Kindness—A change for the worse—The place for an Englishman—Vermin—A Tibetan prayer380-382
LXXXThe Rupun as a friend—Treated with respect and deference—Fed by the Rupun and soldiers—Improving my knowledge of Tibetan383-385
LXXXIA bearer of bad news—Marched off to the mud-house—Mansing—Insults and humiliations—Iron handcuffs instead of ropes—The Rupun's sympathy—No more hope—In the hands of the mob386-389
LXXXIIA pitiful scene—A struggle to get to Chanden Sing—Brutally treated—A torturing saddle—Across country at a gallop—A spirited pony—Sand deposits and hills—Speculation—More horsemen coming towards us390-392
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]LXXXIIIAt an unpleasant pace—Drawing near the cavalcade—A picturesque sight—A shot fired at me—Terrible effects of the spikes along my spine—The rope breaks—An ill omen—A second shot misses me—Arrows—The end of my terrible ride393-397
LXXXIVIntense pain—Hustled to the execution-ground—Stretched and tied—Thirsting for blood—A parade of torturing appliances—The music—The Taram398-401
LXXXVBleeding all over—Insulted and spat upon—"Kill him!"—Urging on the executioner—Refusal to stoop—An unpleasant sword exercise—The execution suspended402-405
LXXXVIMansing arrives—A pretence of killing him—Our execution postponed—Fed by the Lamas406-407
LXXXVIIHappiness checked—Stretched on the rack—Mansing shares my fate—Drenched and in rags—An unsolved mystery408-410
LXXXVIIIMansing partially untied after twelve hours on the rack—Numbed—How the brain works under such circumstances—My scientific instruments—The end of my photographic plates—A paint-box accused of occult powers—An offer refused—Courtesy and cruelty combined411-412
LXXXIXAn unknown article in Tibet—My sponge bewitched—A Lama fires my Martini-Henry—The rifle bursts413-415
XCA consultation—Untied from the rack—The most terrible twenty-four hours of my life—I lose the use of my feet—Circulation returning—Intense pain—Sports416-417
XCIA great relief—The Pombo's attentions—A weird hypnotic dance418-420
XCIICompliments exchanged—A poisoned drink proffered—In acute pain—Uncertainty as to our fate—Working the oracle—My webbed fingers421-423
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]XCIIIOur lives to be spared—An unpleasant march—Chanden Sing still alive—A sleepless night—Towards the frontier—Long and painful marches—How we slept at night—A map drawn with blood424-428
XCIVSouth of the outward journey—Severity of our guard—Ventriloquism and its effects—Terrible but instructive days—The Southern source of the Brahmaputra—Leaving Yutzang429-430
XCVEasier times—Large encampments—Suffocating a goat—A Tarjum's encampment—Tokchim—Old friends—Musicians—Charity431-434
XCVITowards Mansarowar—Mansing's vision—Bathing in Mansarowar435-437
XCVIISuna—Wilson and the Political Peshkar across the frontier—A messenger—Our progress stopped—Diverting us over the Lumpiya Pass—Condemned to certain death—We attack our guard—Lapsang and the Jong Pen's private secretary—A document—Nearing Kardam—Retracing our steps—Dogmar438-444
XCVIIIA Commotion—The arrival of an army—Elected General-in-chief—How we were to slaughter the Jong Pen's soldiers—My men lay down their arms—Towards Taklakot—Delaling and Sibling—Taklakot at last445-449
XCIXFree at last—Among friends—Forgetting our past troubles—Confiscated baggage returned—A scene with Nerba—Suna's message delivered—How our release was brought about—Across the frontier—Photography at Gungi450-456
CCivilisation once more—Paralysis—The Tinker Pass in Nepal—Kindly natives—Mr. Larkin—Government Inquiry—Back to Tibet—Final good-bye to the Forbidden Land—The return journey—Farewell to Mansing—Home again457-470
 Appendix471-501
 Index503-508
 Heinemann News and UpdatesAd 1

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]


[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

 Page
A. Henry Savage Landor and his Two Faithful ServantsFrontispiece
A Chinese Passport1
My Faithful Companion7
My Start from Naini Tal9
Castle at Pithoragarh12
Lepers13
My Abode at Askote14
A Young Man17
Raot on Tree18
Raots19
Head of Young Man21
Two Men with Children sitting down22
A Young Man24
Raot Women of the Forest26
The Rajiwar of Askote, his Brother and Son27
Fakir Returning from Mansarowar28
The Rajiwar and his Brother in Dandies32
View of the Himahlyas—showing Nanda Devi and Trisul Peaks35
Darma Shokas and Tibetans36
View of the Himahlyas. Showing Nanda Devi and Trisul Peaks37
Shoka Weavers42
Shrine and Flying Prayers46
Wrinkled Shoka48
Lal Sing Tokudar and his Brother49
House of a Wealthy Shoka51
The Tent55
Nerpani Road57
The Nerpani Road58
The Nerpani Track59
The Nerpani Road59
The Chai-Lek (Pass)60
A Narrow Gorge between Two Mountains61
The Gates of Garbyang64
Matan Sing Chaprassi66
Narenghiri Chaprassi66
Garbyang67
The House where I Stayed at Garbyang69
Shoka House with Strange Ladder71
Shoka Houses72
Shoka Child Smeared with Butter which is Left to be Absorbed in the Sun73
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Shoka Child being Smeared with Butter75
The Master of a High School, Altitude 10,940 Feet76
Gungi Shankom77
Zazzela Mount, near Gungi78
Involuntary Tobogganing79
Chiram80
Kuti82
Snow Bridges over the Kuti River83
Old Shoka Woman Smoking84
A Well-attended School87
My Banker and Agent88
The Valley of Garbyang89
Chanden Sing and the Daku Rolling up my Bedding91
Motema, a Shoka Beauty92
On the Way to the Rambang93
Shoka Earrings94
Silver Earrings of Tibetan Origin with Coral Beads95
Shoka Woman Weaving96
Rambang Girls with Ornaments97
Weeping Women under White Cloth99
Shoka Funeral Pile100
Women Dusting and Caressing the Lay Figure101
Women Dancing Round the Lay Figure102
Dance in Front of Deceased Man's House103
The Goat with Soul of Deceased being Fed104
Goat with Soul and Clothes of Deceased105
Sending the Goat away from the Village106
Martial Dance round Lay Figure107
Tearing out the Heart of the Goat108
Yak driven over Precipice109
Kachi and his Relations111
The Patan Summoning my Coolies from the Roof of his House112
The Chongur Bridge Previous to being Destroyed114
A Perilous Passage117
The Photograph that Caused the Child's Death121
Plan of Kuti Castle123
The Kuti Castle125
Mansing the Leper showing his Hands126
The Jolinkan or Lebung Pass128
Camping in Snow133
The Snow-Line at 16,000 Feet135
The Mangshan Glacier139
The Spectre and Circular Rainbow145
"I Roused the Rongba"146
Ascending the Lumpiya Pass149
The Lumpiya Glacier and Pass151
Spied155
My Men Salaaming Kelas at Lama Chokden159
The Arrival of Reinforcements169
The Barca Tarjum and his Officers171
"At Night I led my men up the mountain in a fierce snowstorm"183
Buried in Snow189
Sheep Carrying Load193
Dacoits with a Booty of Sheep195
Behind our Bulwarks199
Our First View of Rakastal212
Rakastal and Mansarowar Lakes214
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]A Dacoit219
The Bandits laid down their Arms221
Pack-saddles for Yaks223
White Woollen Coat and Sashes226
Woollen Socks226
Man's Boot, Made at Sigatz; Snow Boot227
Woman's Boot; Boot Made in Lhassa227
Hat, as Worn by Officials228
A Black Yak232
A Tibetan Fortune Teller234
My Two Yaks237
Silver Lhassa Coins239
Copper Coins; Earring Worn by Men240
Silver Charm240
Gold and Malachite Brooch240
Mansarowar Pottery241
Entrance to the Tucker Temple246
Tucker Village and Gomba251
Stone with Inscription254
Prayer-wheels—Ancient and Modern. Showing Rolls of Prayers to Go Inside255
Stone with Inscription256
Branch with Thorns to Prevent Return of Evil Spirits260
The Tokchim Tarjum264
A Medicine-man267
The Panku Gomba269
Sling272
A Natural Castle273
Woman carrying Child in Basket274
Tibetan Young Man277
Swords278
Saddle279
Camp with Gigantic Inscription281
Yak with Cases of Scientific Instruments284
With only Two Men I proceeded towards Lhassa285
A Kala288
Torrential Rain291
Head of Brigand292
Brigands with Sheep293
Saddle Bags294
Phantom-like Visitors296
The Gunkyo Lake299
"I am only a Messenger"300
Flying Prayers on the Maium Pass303
Matchlocks304
Source of the Brahmaputra307
Tibetan Dog310
Small Mani Wall311
An Effect of Mirage314
Black Tent317
A Dongbo, or Tea Churn318
The Interior of a Tent319
Tsamgo320
Small Tsamba Bag, carried on the Person by Tibetans320
Tibetan Hair-brushes and Flint-and-steel Pouch322
Tibetan Women and Children323
The Tchukti324
A Lady from Lhassa325
Money Bags326
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Woman whose Face is Smeared with Black Ointment328
Tibetan Woman329
The Lady in Question330
Tibetan Children331
A Young Lama334
A Red Lama335
Cup made of a Human Skull336
Chokden, or Tomb of a Saint336
A Mani Wall on the Road to Lhassa339
"And I give you this to make you go back"340
Kiang343
Our Yaks Sinking in Mud344
Carpenter and Saddle-maker347
Old Woman348
Contrivance for Carrying Loads349
Rescuing a Yak350
Drinking out of a Bucket353
Shrine inside Tent354
Mud Guard-house356
Tibetan Bellows357
A Distaff358
Purchasing Ponies359
I was a Prisoner360
Rope Riding-whip361
Earring worn by High Officials362
Dragged into the Settlement363
A Spear364
Tibetans overhauling our Baggage365
The Pombo's Tent368
Chanden Sing being Lashed371
The Pombo372
A Soldier374
Soldier with Pigtail wound round his Head375
An Officer376
Purse; Flint and Steel; Snuff-box377
Flint-and-steel Pouch378
Leather Horse-whip379
Charm-box380
Pukus, or Wooden Cups383
Soldier laying before me the Programme of Tortures387
Handcuffs388
Padlock and Key389
"Sir, sir, I am dying"391
Spiked Saddle392
Nerba Firing at Me394
The Ride on a Spiked Saddle395
Coat I Wore at the Time of My Capture, Showing Effect of Spikes396
A Display of Various Instruments of Torture398
Lama Musicians399
The Hot Iron Torture399
The Taram400
A Bannerman403
The Executioner Brought the Sword Down to My Neck404
Thus Elapsed Twenty-four terrible Hours409
Belt, with Bullet and Powder Pouches, Dagger, Needle-case, and Flint and Steel414
Martini-Henry Exploded415
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]The Pombo's Contortions419
The Finale of the Dance420
Chanden Sing tied to a Post425
A White Yak426
Map Drawn with Blood during Captivity427
One of Our Guard430
Soldier Suffocating Goat432
Strolling Musicians433
Old Beggar434
A Tibetan Shepherd436
Interior of a Serai437
Tea Churn (open)438
A Bearer of Bad News439
A Shoka Tibetan Half-caste440
Sheep Loads for Borax and Grain441
A Jumli Shed442
We Attacked our Guard with Stones443
Lapsang and the Jong Pen's Private Secretary444
Jumli Trader and His Wife in Tibet446
Cliff Habitations447
Chokdens near Taklakot448
Taklakot Fort449
Pundit Gobaria450
Dr. Wilson451
Karak Sing Pal, the Political Peshkar452
Mansing Showing Cuts under his Feet453
A Glance at the Forbidden Land from the Lippu Pass454
The Author, February and October455
Chanden Sing's Legs, Showing Marks of Lashes and Wounds Healed456
Mr. J. Larkin457
Chanden Sing and Mansing enjoying their first Meal according to the Rules of their Castes458
A Tibetan Temporary Shed459
A Shaky Passage on the Nerpani Road460
View of Askote, Showing Rajiwar's Palace461
Snapshot of Shoka Villagers being Routed461
Dr. Wilson, Myself, Mr. Larkin, the Political Peshkar, and Jagat Sing ready to ascend the Lippu Pass462
Tinker in Nepal463
On the Lippu Pass464
Mr. Larkin's Party and Mine Halting near the Lippu Pass465
Mr. Larkin looking out for the Jong Pen from the Lippu Pass466
Bathing at 16,300 Feet467
Dharchula. Deserted Habitations of Shokas467
"I told you," exclaimed the old savage, "that whoever visits the home of the Raots will have misfortune"468
A Picturesque Bit of Almora469
Raots Listening to the Account of My Misfortunes470
Map of South-Western Tibet, showing Author's Route and Return, Journey470

[1]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER I

FROM LONDON TO NAINI TAL

A Chinese Passport

A Chinese passport


On leaving London, I intended to proceed viâ Germany to Russia, traverse Russian Turkestan, Bokhara and Chinese Turkestan, and from there enter Tibet. The Russian Government had readily granted me a special permission to take free of duty through their territory my firearms, ammunition, provisions, photographic cameras, surveying and other scientific instruments, and moreover informed me, through H.E. Sir Nicholas O'Conor, then our Ambassador in St. Petersburg, that I should be privileged to travel on the military railway through Turkestan, as far as the terminus at Samarakand. I feel under a great obligation to the Russian Embassy in London for the extreme courtesy shown me, and I desire to acknowledge this at the outset, especially [2] because that route might very likely have saved me much of the suffering and disappointment I was subjected to through going by way of India.

Upon leaving London, I planned to travel via Germany to Russia, go through Russian Turkestan, Bokhara, and Chinese Turkestan, and then enter Tibet. The Russian government had kindly granted me special permission to take my firearms, ammunition, provisions, cameras, surveying tools, and other scientific instruments through their territory without duty. They also informed me, through H.E. Sir Nicholas O'Conor, who was our Ambassador in St. Petersburg at the time, that I would be allowed to travel on the military railway through Turkestan, all the way to the terminus at Samarkand. I feel a great sense of gratitude toward the Russian Embassy in London for their exceptional courtesy, and I want to acknowledge this from the beginning, especially [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] because that route likely could have spared me much of the suffering and disappointment I experienced by going through India.

I was provided with introductions and credentials from the Marquis of Salisbury, the British Museum of Natural History, etc., I was carrying scientific instruments for the Royal Geographical Society, and I had a British and two Chinese passports.

I was given introductions and credentials from the Marquis of Salisbury, the British Museum of Natural History, etc. I was carrying scientific instruments for the Royal Geographical Society, and I had a British passport and two Chinese passports.

Having forwarded all my explosives by an ammunition vessel to Russia (the German railways absolutely refusing to carry cartridges), I heard to my dismay, only a few days previous to leaving London, that the steamer had stranded just before reaching her port of destination, and that grave doubts were entertained as to the possibility of saving even a portion of her cargo. This was at the time of the outbreak of the Turco-Greek War, and the Russians were reported to be mobilising their troops along the Afghan frontier. I did not wish to delay my journey, and although my preparations were complete for going through Russia, I nevertheless decided to abandon that plan and go to India, with a view to penetrating over the Himahlya into Tibet. I sailed for India on March 19, on the P. and O. ss. Peninsular, and reached Bombay three weeks later.

Having sent all my explosives by an ammo ship to Russia (since the German railways completely refused to transport cartridges), I was dismayed to hear, just a few days before leaving London, that the steamer had run aground right before reaching its destination, and there were serious doubts about whether any of its cargo could be salvaged. This was during the outbreak of the Turco-Greek War, and reports indicated that the Russians were mobilizing their troops along the Afghan border. I didn't want to delay my trip, and even though I was fully prepared to travel through Russia, I decided to change my plans and go to India instead, aiming to cross the Himalayas into Tibet. I sailed for India on March 19, on the P. and O. ss. Peninsular, and arrived in Bombay three weeks later.

It was my first visit to India, and my first impression was certainly not a good one. The heat was intense, and signs of the plague were discernible everywhere. The streets were deserted and the hotels bad and dirty for want of servants, who had abandoned the town in fear of the scourge.

It was my first visit to India, and my first impression was definitely not a good one. The heat was brutal, and signs of the plague were visible everywhere. The streets were empty and the hotels were awful and dirty because there were no servants, who had left the town out of fear of the epidemic.

Accompanied by a Parsee friend, I went to several of the districts of Bombay chiefly affected by the disease, but I noticed, wherever I went, little else than a strong odour of disinfectants. It is true there were few houses in those parts which had not ten, twenty, and even more circular red marks, denoting as many deaths, and on one door, which I photographed, I counted no less than forty-nine circles. But I was unable to gauge personally with any sort of accuracy the nature or extent of the disease, beyond seeing in the hospitals a few violent cases of bubonic attacks.

Accompanied by a Parsee friend, I visited several areas of Bombay that were mostly impacted by the disease, but I noticed that everywhere I went, there was just a strong smell of disinfectants. It's true there were few houses in those areas without ten, twenty, or even more circular red marks indicating that many deaths had occurred. On one door that I photographed, I counted no less than forty-nine circles. However, I couldn't personally assess the nature or extent of the disease with any accuracy, beyond observing a few severe cases of bubonic attacks in the hospitals.

On the day following my arrival in Bombay, I proceeded by rail to Bareilly, which was reached in three days, and from there one more night brought me to Kathgodam, the terminus of the railway line. Travelling partly by Tonga (a two-wheeled vehicle drawn by two horses) and partly on horseback, I found myself at last at Naini Tal, a hill station in the lower Himahlyas and the summer seat of the Govern[3]ment of the North-West Provinces and Oudh, from whence I wrote to the Lieutenant-Governor, informing him of my intention to proceed to Tibet. I also called on the Deputy-Commissioner and made him fully acquainted with my plans. Neither one nor the other of these gentlemen raised the slightest objection to my intended journey into the sacred Land of the Lamas.

On the day after I arrived in Bombay, I took a train to Bareilly, which took three days to reach, and after one more night of travel, I arrived at Kathgodam, the end of the railway line. Traveling partly by Tonga (a two-wheeled carriage pulled by two horses) and partly on horseback, I finally made it to Naini Tal, a hill station in the lower Himalayas and the summer residence of the Government of the North-West Provinces and Oudh, from where I wrote to the Lieutenant-Governor to inform him of my plan to go to Tibet. I also met with the Deputy-Commissioner and fully briefed him on my plans. Neither of them expressed any objections to my intended journey into the sacred Land of the Lamas.


[4]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER II

Loads—A set of useful pack-saddle cases—Provisions and scientific outfit—Clothes and shoes—Medicines—Under way—The first march—Servants—How I came to employ faithful Chanden Sing.

I knew that from Naini Tal, 6407 feet (sixty feet above lake level), all my loads would have to be transported on the backs of coolies, and therefore they had to be divided into equal weights not exceeding twenty-five seers, or fifty pounds. I packed instruments, negatives, and articles liable to get damaged, in cases of my own make designed especially for rough usage. A set of four such cases, of well-seasoned deal wood, carefully joined and fitted, zinc-lined, and soaked in a special preparation of mine by which they were rendered water and air tight, could be made useful in many ways. Taken separately, they could be used as seats; four placed in a row answered the purpose of bedstead; three could be used as seat and table; and the combination of four used in a certain manner made a punt or boat of quick, solid, and easy construction, by which an unfordable river could be crossed or soundings taken in the still waters of a lake. The cases could also be used as baths for myself and my followers (if I could induce these to so far indulge), and also in the developing of my negatives as tanks to properly wash my plates. I conjectured even that in case of emergency they might serve as water casks in arid regions, if I should have to traverse any. One of these boxes packed was exactly a coolie load, and two could be easily slung over a pack-saddle by means of straps and rings. It was due mainly to the stoutness and strength of these cases that, notwithstanding the amount of knocking about they got, my photographic and painting work, as well as my maps, instruments, etc., were really in no way injured until we fell into the hands of [5] the Tibetans. Fortunately, the most important part of my work, from a scientific point of view, had already been accomplished. My provisions were prepared for me by the Bovril Company after instructions furnished by me, with a view to the severe Tibetan climate and the altitudes we should find ourselves in. They contained a vast amount of fat and carbonaceous food, as well as ingredients easily digestible and calculated to maintain one's strength even in moments of unusual stress. I had them packed in tin cases and skin bags. I carried in a water-tight box 1000 cartridges for my 256° Mannlicher rifle, besides 500 cartridges for my revolver, and a number of hunting knives, skinning implements, wire traps of several sizes for capturing small mammals, butterfly nets, bottles for preserving reptiles in alcohol, insect-killing bottles (cyanide of potassium), a quantity of arsenical soap, bone nippers, scalpels, and all other accessories necessary for the collection of natural history specimens. There were three sets of photographic apparatus in my outfit, and one hundred and fifty-eight dozen dry plates, as well as all adjuncts for the developing, fixing, etc. of the negatives as they were taken. The collecting materials were given me by the British Museum of Natural History, to which institution I had promised to present all specimens of fauna and flora I might collect during my journey. I had two sets of instruments for astronomical observation and for use in surveying (one of which had been furnished me by the Royal Geographical Society), such as the six-inch sextant, hypsometrical apparatus for measuring heights, with boiling-point thermometers specially constructed for very great altitudes; two aneroids, one to 20,000 feet, the other to 25,000 feet; three artificial horizons (one mercury, the others plate-glass with levels); a powerful telescope with astronomical eyepiece and stand; a prismatic, a luminous, a floating, and two pocket compasses; maximum and minimum thermometers, a case of drawing instruments, protractors, parallel rules, tape rules, a silver water-tight half-chronometer watch and three other watches, section paper in books and in large sheets, Raper's and the Nautical Almanac for 1897 and 1898.

I knew. that from Naini Tal, 6407 feet (sixty feet above lake level), all my gear would have to be carried by coolies, so I had to split everything into equal weights of no more than twenty-five seers, or fifty pounds. I packed instruments, negatives, and fragile items into cases I made specifically for rough handling. A set of four of these cases, made from quality deal wood and carefully constructed, zinc-lined, and treated with a special preparation of mine to make them water and air-tight, could be useful in many ways. Individually, they could serve as seats; lined up in a row, they could function as a bed; and three could be used for seating and table space. When arranged correctly, four cases could be combined to form a solid and efficient punt or boat, allowing me to cross rivers I couldn't ford or take readings in the calm waters of a lake. The cases could also serve as baths for me and my followers (if I could persuade them to indulge in that), and as tanks for properly washing my photographic plates while developing my negatives. I even thought they could come in handy as water containers in dry areas I might have to pass through. Each packed box equated to a coolie load, and two could easily be strapped onto a pack-saddle using straps and rings. Thanks to the durability of these cases, my photography and painting supplies, along with my maps, instruments, and the like, remained unharmed until we were taken by the Tibetans. Luckily, the crucial part of my work, scientifically speaking, had already been finished. The Bovril Company prepared my provisions based on my instructions, tailored for the harsh Tibetan climate and the altitudes we would encounter. They included a high amount of fats and energy-dense foods, along with easily digestible ingredients to help maintain strength during tough times. I stored these in tin cases and skin bags. I had a water-tight box containing 1000 cartridges for my 256° Mannlicher rifle, plus 500 for my revolver, several hunting knives, skinning tools, various wire traps for trapping small animals, butterfly nets, bottles to preserve reptiles in alcohol, insect-killing bottles (cyanide of potassium), a quantity of arsenical soap, bone nippers, scalpels, and all other supplies necessary for collecting natural history specimens. My setup had three sets of photographic equipment, one hundred and fifty-eight dozen dry plates, and all the necessary tools for developing and fixing the negatives as we went. The collection materials were provided to me by the British Museum of Natural History, to which I had promised to donate all the flora and fauna specimens I collected during my trip. I also had two sets of instruments for astronomy and surveying (one of which the Royal Geographical Society supplied), including a six-inch sextant, equipment for measuring heights with boiling-point thermometers specially made for very high altitudes; two aneroids, one for 20,000 feet, the other for 25,000 feet; three artificial horizons (one with mercury, the others with plate glass and levels); a powerful telescope with an astronomical eyepiece and stand; a prismatic, a luminous, a floating, and two pocket compasses; maximum and minimum thermometers, a case of drawing instruments, protractors, parallel rules, tape measures, a silver water-tight half-chronometer watch and three other watches, section paper in books and large sheets, Raper's and the Nautical Almanac for 1897 and 1898.

Not to neglect the artistic aspect of my expedition, I had provided myself with ample painting and drawing materials, and I trust to the appearance of my sketches in these volumes to prove that I did not carry them in vain.

Not to overlook the artistic side of my journey, I packed plenty of painting and drawing supplies, and I hope the sketches in these volumes will show that I didn't bring them for nothing.

I was provided with a very light mountain tente-d'abri seven feet long, four feet wide, and three feet high. Well accustomed to the sort of travelling I was in for, I decided [6] that I required for myself only a camel-hair blanket in the way of bedding. I reduced my clothing also to a minimum and made no difference in it from start to finish. The only thing I ever missed was my straw hat, which I wore up in the Himahlyas just as I had worn it in the broiling plains, because it seemed to me always the most comfortable headgear. It was rendered unwearable through the clumsiness of one of my Shokas to whom I had lent it to carry in it some swan eggs (presented by a friendly Shoka), and who fell with it, or on it, to the detriment and destruction both of vessel and load. After that I generally went about with my head uncovered, as I only had a small cap left, which was not comfortable. I wore medium thick shoes without nails, and never carried a stick, and I think it was due largely to the simplicity of my personal equipment that I was able, as will be seen presently, to climb to one of the greatest altitudes ever reached by a human being.[1]

I was given a lightweight mountain tente-d'abri that was seven feet long, four feet wide, and three feet tall. Since I was used to this kind of travel, I figured all I needed for bedding was a camel-hair blanket. I also kept my clothing to a minimum and wore the same outfit from start to finish. The only thing I really missed was my straw hat, which I wore in the Himalayas just like I did in the scorching plains, as it always felt like the most comfortable headwear. Unfortunately, it became useless when one of my Shokas, to whom I had lent it to carry some swan eggs (given to me by a friendly Shoka), fell with it, ruining both the hat and the eggs. After that, I mostly went around with my head uncovered since I only had a small cap left that wasn’t comfortable. I wore medium-thick shoes without nails and didn’t carry a stick, and I believe it was mainly because of the simplicity of my gear that I was able, as you will see shortly, to reach one of the highest altitudes ever achieved by a human being.[1]

My provision of medicines cost me only half-a-crown, firm as I am in the belief that man, living naturally under natural conditions, and giving himself plenty of exercise, can be helped very little by drugs.

My supply of medicine cost me just half a crown, as I firmly believe that a person, living naturally and under natural conditions, and getting plenty of exercise, can be helped very little by medications.

And thus I started.

And that's how I began.

On the first day I rode from Naini Tal to Almora, thirty miles by the lower and well-known road viâ Khairna.

On the first day, I rode from Naini Tal to Almora, thirty miles along the lower and well-known road via Khairna.

Almora (5510 feet) is the last hill station towards the frontier where I expected to find a European, or rather an Anglo-Indian, community, and I made it my headquarters for a few days. It was my intention to obtain some reliable hill men, possibly Gourkhas, to accompany me. I applied in vain for this purpose to the Lieut.-Colonel of the 1st 3rd Gourkha Regiment quartered in the station, duly showing letters, introductions, and documents from the highest authorities and institutions in England, plainly demonstrating the scientific object of my journey to Tibet.

Almora (5,510 feet) is the last hill station near the frontier where I thought I would find a European, or more accurately, an Anglo-Indian community, so I made it my base for a few days. I intended to hire some trustworthy local men, possibly Gurkhas, to accompany me. I asked in vain for this from the Lieutenant Colonel of the 1st 3rd Gurkha Regiment stationed there, showing my letters, introductions, and documents from top authorities and institutions in England, clearly outlining the scientific purpose of my journey to Tibet.

The superior authorities seemed open to negotiations had I been able to afford a wait of several months; but, as this would have involved the postponement of my journey for a year on account of the passes leading into Tibet becoming impassable at the end of the summer, I decided to snap my fingers at all the red tape the job required, and to start on my journey without the Gourkhas.

The higher-ups seemed willing to negotiate if I could afford to wait several months; however, since that would delay my trip by a year due to the passes into Tibet becoming impassable at the end of summer, I decided to ignore all the bureaucracy the job required and start my journey without the Gurkhas.

As luck would have it, I came across a gentleman at Almora, a Mr. J. Larkin, who showed me great politeness [7] and gave me much useful information with regard to the roads, the mode of travelling, etc. on the British side of the Tibetan frontier. He had himself travelled nearly up to the boundary the previous year, and knew that part of Kumaon better than any Anglo-Indian in the province. In fact, with the exception of Colonel Grigg, Commissioner of Kumaon, Mr. Larkin is the only other official who has any knowledge at all of the north-east of Kumaon, now so neglected by the Government of the N.W.P.

As luck would have it, I met a gentleman in Almora, Mr. J. Larkin, who was very polite and provided me with a lot of helpful information about the roads, how to travel, and more on the British side of the Tibetan border. He had traveled close to the boundary the previous year and knew that part of Kumaon better than any Anglo-Indian in the province. In fact, aside from Colonel Grigg, the Commissioner of Kumaon, Mr. Larkin is the only other official who knows anything at all about the northeast of Kumaon, which is now largely ignored by the Government of the N.W.P. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

My Faithful Companion
My Faithful Companion

Gourkhas being unobtainable, the question weighed heavily on my mind of obtaining plucky, honest, wiry, healthy servants, of whatever caste they might be, who would be ready for the sake of a good salary and a handsome reward to brave the many discomforts, hardships, and perils my expedition was likely to involve. Both at Naini Tal and here scores of servants and Shikaris (sporting attendants) offered themselves. They one and all produced "certificates" of good conduct, irreproachable honesty, good-nature and willingness to work, and praises unbounded of all possible virtues that a servant could possess. Each certificate was duly ornamented with the signature of a General, a Captain, a Lieut.-Governor, or some other considerable personage, but each bearer of such testimonial seemed sadly neglected by those who had been so enthusiastically pleased with his services, for he invariably commenced by asking for a loan of several rupees to purchase boots and blankets, and to enable him to support a wife with or without a family whom he would be leaving behind.

With Gourkhas unavailable, I was constantly worried about finding brave, honest, lean, healthy workers, no matter their background, who would be willing to face the many discomforts, hardships, and dangers my expedition would likely bring in exchange for a good salary and a nice reward. At both Naini Tal and here, dozens of servants and Shikaris (sports attendants) came forward. Each one flaunted "certificates" of good conduct, impeccable honesty, a strong work ethic, and endless praises for all the qualities a good worker should have. Every certificate was signed by a General, a Captain, a Lieutenant Governor, or some other important figure, but each person presenting such a recommendation seemed to have been ignored by those who had previously praised their services. They would always start by asking for a loan of several rupees to buy boots and blankets and to help support a wife, with or without kids, whom they would be leaving behind.

I decided that my means did not permit of my supporting "the dear ones at home" of the two or three dozen followers I should require, and I made up my mind to wait and see [8] whether I could not find men to suit me farther on my road without involving myself in the liability of supporting the entire population I left behind me. I made only one exception. I was sitting one fine day in my room at the Dâk Bungalow (post resting-house) when an odd creature entered and offered his services, salaaming me.

I figured that I couldn't afford to support "the loved ones at home" or the two or three dozen followers I would need, so I decided to wait and see [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] if I could find people that fit what I was looking for further down my path without taking on the responsibility of supporting the whole community I was leaving behind. I made only one exception. I was sitting one nice day in my room at the Dâk Bungalow (post resting-house) when a strange person walked in and offered his help, bowing to me.

"Where are your certificates?" I asked.

"Where are your certificates?" I asked.

"Sahib, hum 'certificates' ne hai!" ("Sir, I have no certificates.")

"Sahib, main 'certificates' nahi hai!" ("Sir, I have no certificates.")

"Well, then I may employ you."

"Well, then I might hire you."

I had previously had a good look at the fellow. His facial lines showed considerably more character and force than I had noticed in the features of other local natives. His attire was peculiar. He wore a white turban, and from under a short velvet waistcoat there protruded a gaudy flannel shirt in yellow and black stripes, which he wore oddly outside of his pyjamas instead of in them. He had no shoes, and carried in his right hand an old cricket stump, with which he "presented arms," as it were, every time that I came in and went out of the room. I at once decided to try him. It was about nine o'clock in the morning, when I, having many people to see, handed Chanden Sing, for that was his name, a pair of shoes and some blacking.

I had taken a good look at the guy before. His facial features had a lot more character and strength than I’d noticed in the other locals. His outfit was unusual. He wore a white turban, and from under a short velvet vest, a bright flannel shirt in yellow and black stripes stuck out, which he bizarrely wore over his pajamas instead of tucked in. He was barefoot and carried an old cricket stump in his right hand, which he would "salute" with every time I came in and out of the room. I decided to give him a try. It was about nine in the morning when I, needing to meet with a lot of people, handed Chanden Sing—his name—some shoes and shoe polish.

"Mind I find them clean when I return."

"Make sure I find them clean when I get back."

"Acha, Sahib." ("All right, sir!")

"Okay, sir!"

"You will find some brushes in my room."

You’ll find some brushes in my room.

"Bahut acha, Sahib." ("Very good, sir!")

"Very good, sir!"

I left. At six p.m. when I returned to my quarters I found Chanden Sing still polishing my footgear with all his might. He had been at it the whole day and had used for the purpose my best hair and clothes brushes.

I left. At 6 p.m. when I came back to my room, I found Chanden Sing still polishing my shoes with all his energy. He had been at it all day and had used my best hair and clothes brushes for the job.

"Oh, you budmash! crab log, pagal!" ("Oh! you bad character! bad man, fool!") I exclaimed, disgusted, making as much display as possible of the only three or four words I then knew of Hindustani. I snatched the blackened articles of toilet out of his hands, while he, with an air of wounded feelings, pointed out the wonderful results he had achieved.

"Oh, you bad character! jerk, idiot!" I exclaimed, disgusted, showing off the only three or four words I knew in Hindustani. I snatched the dirty toiletries out of his hands, while he, acting all hurt, pointed out the amazing results he had achieved.

It was clear that Chanden Sing was not much of a valet, neither was he a master at opening soda-water bottles. He generally managed to give you a spray bath if he did not actually shoot the flying cork in your face. It was owing to one (by no means the first) of these accidents that Chanden Sing, having hit me full, was a few days later flung bodily out of the front door. I am very adverse to the habit of punishing the natives injudiciously and unjustly, but I believe that firm if not too severe a punishment administered in time

It was obvious that Chanden Sing wasn't much of a valet, and he definitely wasn't skilled at opening soda bottles. Most of the time, he'd manage to give you a spray bath, if he didn't actually shoot the cork right in your face. Because of one (not the first) of these incidents, Chanden Sing ended up getting thrown out of the front door a few days later. I'm not fond of punishing people unjustly or carelessly, but I think that a firm, though not overly harsh, consequence is necessary when it’s due.

[9]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

My Start from Naini Tal

My Journey from Naini Tal


[10] is absolutely necessary with native servants, and generally saves much trouble and unpleasantness in the end. Anyhow Chanden Sing, none the worse, returned the next day to fetch his cricket stump which he had forgotten in his hurried and involuntary departure. He seized this opportunity to offer his humblest apologies for his clumsiness, and produced the following letter which he had got written in English by a Babu in the Bazaar:

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] is absolutely necessary with local workers and usually prevents a lot of trouble and awkwardness later on. Anyway, Chanden Sing, none the worse for wear, came back the next day to grab his cricket bat, which he had left behind in his hasty and unexpected exit. He took this chance to sincerely apologize for his awkwardness and handed over the following letter, which he had written in English by a clerk in the market:

"Dear Sir,—I am a stupid man, but I hear you intend to take two Gourkha soldiers with you to Tibet. I am a good and very stout man and therefore far superior to any Gourkha. Please employ me.

"Dear Sir,,—I may not be the brightest, but I hear you plan to take two Gurkha soldiers with you to Tibet. I’m a strong and very fit man, so I’m definitely better than any Gurkha. Please hire me."

"Your faithful servant,

"Your loyal servant,"

"Chanden Sing."

"Chanden Sing."

This was touching, and I forgave him and allowed him to stay. He improved as time went on, and after a while became quite tolerable. One morning Mr. Larkin called when Chanden Sing happened to be about.

This was heartfelt, and I forgave him and let him stay. He got better over time, and after a while, he became pretty bearable. One morning, Mr. Larkin stopped by while Chanden Sing was around.

"Who is that?" said Larkin.

"Who’s that?" said Larkin.

"That is my bearer."

"That's my carrier."

"But he is not a bearer! He was once a policeman, and a smart fellow too. He worked out a good case in his own village and had many people arrested and convicted for theft. As a reward they sacked him."

"But he isn’t a carrier! He used to be a police officer, and a clever one at that. He solved a solid case in his own village and had a number of people arrested and convicted for theft. As a reward, they fired him."

"I am thinking of taking him with me."

"I’m thinking of bringing him along."

"He is a good lad," replied Mr. Larkin. "You can anyhow take him as far as the frontier, but I would not advise you to take him into Tibet."

"He’s a good kid," Mr. Larkin replied. "You can at least take him as far as the border, but I wouldn’t recommend taking him into Tibet."

Mr. Larkin counselled Chanden Sing to be diligent and attentive, and the ex-policeman beamed all over with joy when I told him definitely that he might accompany me to Bhot. He turned out to be the one plucky man among all my followers, and he stood by me through thick and thin.

Mr. Larkin advised Chanden Sing to be hardworking and focused, and the former policeman lit up with happiness when I confirmed that he could join me on the trip to Bhot. He ended up being the bravest person among all my followers, and he stood by me through good times and bad.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[1] See Appendix. Letter by Dr. H. Wilson.

[1] See Appendix. Letter from Dr. H. Wilson.


[11]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER III

Pithoragarh—Fakir women—A well-ventilated abode—Askote—The Rajiwar and his people.

The country up to Bhot is comparatively well-known, therefore I will not dwell at length on the first portion of my journey.

The country up to Bhot is fairly well-known, so I won’t spend much time on the first part of my trip.

On May 9 all my baggage, accompanied by two Chaprassis, left on its way to the frontier, and I followed on the next day. Two days' marching, at the rate of twenty-five miles a day, brought me to Shor, otherwise called Pithoragarh.

On May 9, all my luggage, along with two Chaprassis, set off for the border, and I followed the next day. After two days of marching, covering about twenty-five miles each day, I arrived at Shor, also known as Pithoragarh.

The road is good all the way, running through thick forests of pine and fir trees, and you get here and there pretty views of wooded mountain ranges. Nevertheless, it is tiring owing to the many ascents and descents, as will be seen from the following figures showing the principal elevations. From 5510 feet we climbed to 7650 feet, descended to 2475 feet, climbed again up to 6020 feet at Gangoli Hat, and re-descended by a steep incline to 2500 feet. The intense heat prevented me from walking at my usual pace, and I did not, therefore, reach my destination before sundown. Walking on in the dark, we saw the distant flickering forest fires crawling here and there like incandescent snakes along or up the mountain-side: these are caused by the igniting of the grass, shrubs, and undergrowth by the natives, the flames not unfrequently spreading and playing havoc among the finest trees of the forest.

The road is decent the whole way, winding through dense forests of pine and fir trees, and you catch glimpses of beautiful views of wooded mountain ranges here and there. However, it’s exhausting because of the many ups and downs, which can be seen in the figures showing the main elevations. We climbed from 5,510 feet to 7,650 feet, descended to 2,475 feet, climbed back up to 6,020 feet at Gangoli Hat, and then went down a steep slope to 2,500 feet. The intense heat made it hard for me to walk at my usual pace, so I didn’t reach my destination before sunset. As we continued on in the dark, we spotted distant flickering forest fires crawling around like glowing snakes along the mountainside: these are started by locals igniting the grass, shrubs, and underbrush, with the flames often spreading and causing devastation among the finest trees in the forest.

At Pithoragarh (6650 feet) there is the old London Gourkha fort to be seen, on a hilltop, also a well-kept leper hospital, a school, and a mission-house. The soil is fertile and there are many stretches of well-cultivated land dotted with habitations. Water is plentiful, and though the scenery certainly lacks trees except in the immediate neighbourhood of the villages and houses, it has, neverthe[12]less, a certain picturesqueness on account of its background of wooded mountains. I started from Pithoragarh at 6.30 a.m.; leaving the road to Tal on the left, I followed the track at a medium elevation of 6250 feet, arriving at Shadgora (6350 feet) just in time to witness the blessing of a calf by a Brahmin. Inside a diminutive shrine—into the door of which I was curious enough to peep—I discovered two skinny, repulsive old women, with sunken, discoloured eyes, untidy locks of scanty hair, long unwashed, bony arms and legs, and finger and toe nails of abnormal length. They were clad in a few dirty rags, and were busily attending to the lights burning on several primitive stone candlesticks along the walls of the shrine. There were also some curiously-shaped stones standing upright among the candlesticks. The ceiling of this place of worship was not high enough to allow the women to stand, and they were compelled to crawl about inside on all fours. When they saw me they stretched out their angular arms towards me, begging for money. I gave them a silver coin, which they shoved under one of the peculiar stones, and then, turning round, immediately made violent gestures suggesting to me that I was to depart.

At Pithoragarh (6650 feet), you can see the old London Gurkha fort on a hilltop, along with a well-maintained leper hospital, a school, and a mission house. The soil is fertile, and there are many fields of well-cultivated land with homes scattered throughout. Water is abundant, and while the scenery lacks trees except near the villages and houses, it still has a certain charm because of its backdrop of wooded mountains. I left Pithoragarh at 6:30 a.m.; I took the path at a moderate elevation of 6250 feet instead of the road to Tal, reaching Shadgora (6350 feet) just in time to see a Brahmin bless a calf. Inside a small shrine—where I curiously peered in—I found two thin, unappealing old women with sunken, discolored eyes, messy tufts of sparse hair, long, unwashed limbs, and nails that were excessively long. They wore a few dirty rags and were busy tending to the lights burning on several simple stone candlesticks along the walls of the shrine. There were also some oddly shaped stones standing upright among the candlesticks. The ceiling of this place of worship was so low that the women had to crawl around on all fours. When they saw me, they reached out their bony arms, begging for money. I gave them a silver coin, which they tucked under one of the strange stones, and then, turning around, they made aggressive gestures indicating that I should leave.

Castle at Pithoragarh

Castle in Pithoragarh


Farther on I came upon a point where three roads branched off to Deolthal (six miles) on the left, to Askote (twelve and three-quarter miles) in the centre, and to Pithoragarh (eleven and a quarter miles), a different route from the one followed, on the right. I took the middle one, and travelled on in a storm of hail and wind with a constant deafening roar of thunder and splendid flashes of lightning, which produced magical effects on the ever-changing and fantastic clouds and the weird mountain-sides along which I ploughed my way.

Farther up, I reached a point where three roads split off: one to Deolthal (six miles) on the left, one to Askote (twelve and three-quarter miles) in the center, and one to Pithoragarh (eleven and a quarter miles) on the right, which was a different route. I chose the middle road and continued on through a storm of hail and wind, with the constant loud roar of thunder and impressive flashes of lightning creating magical effects on the ever-changing and surreal clouds and the strange mountain slopes I passed.

[13]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Lepers showing stumps of Limbs

Lepers with missing limbs


[14]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

My Abode at Askote
My Abode at Askote

I arrived late in the evening at Askote, where there is neither Dâk Bungalow nor Daramsalla,[2] and found to my disgust that none of my carriers had yet arrived. I was offered hospitality by Pundit Jibanand, who put me up in his schoolroom, a structure consisting of a number of planks put together regardless of width, height, length, or shape, and supporting a roof of straw and grass. The ventilation of my abode was all one could wish for, and as during the night I lay wrapped up in my blanket under the sheltering roof, I could admire through the disconnected portions of the walls the brilliancy of the star-studded heaven above. When the sun arose, bits of scenery appeared between plank and plank, until by degrees the gaps were all stopped up by figures of natives, who took possession of these points of vantage to gaze to their hearts' content on the sahib, who, with signs of evident suspense on the part of these spectators, managed even to shave. Hilarity, on the other hand, was caused when I smeared myself all over with soap while bathing. Admiration followed at my putting on my last starched shirt and other mysterious garments, but the excitement grew almost to fever-heat when I went through the daily nuisance of winding up my watches and registering daily observations of temperature, etc. The strain was too much, I fancy, and a general stampede followed the moment I touched my unloaded rifle.

I arrived late in the evening at Askote, where there's no Dâk Bungalow or Daramsalla,[2] and, to my dismay, found that none of my carriers had shown up yet. Pundit Jibanand offered me hospitality and let me stay in his schoolroom, a building made of random planks thrown together without much thought to width, height, length, or shape, and covered with a roof made of straw and grass. The ventilation in my place was just what I needed, and as I lay wrapped in my blanket under the improvised roof, I admired the brilliant stars shining through the gaps in the walls. When the sun rose, bits of scenery appeared between the planks, gradually filling up with locals who took the opportunity to stare at the sahib, who, despite the evident nervousness of the spectators, managed to shave. Laughter erupted when I covered myself in soap while bathing. There was admiration as I put on my last starched shirt and other curious clothes, but the excitement peaked almost to a frenzy when I went through the daily hassle of winding my watches and recording temperature readings, etc. It seemed to be too much, and a complete stampede happened the moment I touched my unloaded rifle.

The town of Askote is not unlike an old feudal castle such as are found in many parts of Central Italy. Perched on the crown of a central hill, the Rajiwar's palace overlooks a fine panorama of mountains encircling it on all sides. Among the higher peaks discernible from the palace are the Chipla Mountain and the Dafia. Then across the Kali River, [15] forming the boundary of Nepal, is Mount Dooti. The "gown" or town itself numbers some two hundred houses scattered on the slope of the hill, and includes a school, a post-office, and two Mahommedan shops. The Rajiwar had on my arrival just completed building a new Court, a simple and dignified structure of brown stone, with fine wooden carvings on the windows and doors, and with chimneys in European fashion in each room. One wall in each room was left open, and formed a charming verandah, commanding a magnificent view of mountain scenery.

The town of Askote is similar to an old feudal castle found in many parts of Central Italy. Sitting atop a central hill, the Rajiwar's palace overlooks a beautiful view of the mountains that surround it on all sides. Among the higher peaks visible from the palace are Chipla Mountain and Dafia. Across the Kali River, which forms the border of Nepal, is Mount Dooti. The "gown" or town itself has about two hundred houses scattered down the slope of the hill, including a school, a post office, and two Muslim shops. When I arrived, the Rajiwar had just finished building a new Court, a simple and elegant structure made of brown stone, featuring beautiful wooden carvings on the windows and doors, and European-style chimneys in each room. One wall in each room was left open, creating a lovely verandah that offered a spectacular view of the mountain scenery.

The Rajiwar of Askote occupies a unique position in Kumaon. Having repurchased his right to the tenure of land in the Askote Pargana as late as 1855, he now possesses the right of zamindar (translated literally, landed proprietor), and he is the only person to whom has been granted to retain this privilege in the Kumaon Division. Jagat Sing Pal, the Rajiwar's nephew, assured me that the people of the Askote Pargana are brave and good-natured. They never give any trouble to the Rajiwar, who, on the other hand, is almost a father to them. They apply to him in every difficulty, in sickness and distress, and he looks after them in true patriarchal fashion. The Rajiwar is not rich, probably because he spends so much for the benefit of his people and of the strangers who pass through Askote. Many of these are little more than beggars, of course, even when they travel as fakirs, or other religious fanatics, going to or returning from the sacred Mansarowar Lake in Tibet. The present Rajiwar,[3] Pushkar Pal, belongs to the Ramchanda family, and he is a descendant of the Solar dynasty. His ancestors lived in Aoudh or Ayodye (as it was formerly called), whence they migrated to the hills of Katyur in Kumaon, where they built a palace. The hill regions up to Killakanjia and the Jumua River were under the Raja of Katyur's rule, he assuming the title of Maharaja. A branch of the family came from Katyur to Askote, its chief retaining the hereditary title of Rajiwar beside that of Pal, which each male assumes. The Rajiwar pays a yearly tribute of 1800 rupees to the Government of India. In the time of the Gourkhas he paid nothing except occasional gifts of Nafas or musk-deer to his neighbour the King of Nepal, with whom he is still in very close relation. He was then practically an independent king. Still Rajiwar Pushkar Pal has always been perfectly loyal to the Government of India.

The Rajiwar of Askote holds a unique position in Kumaon. After buying back his right to land tenure in the Askote Pargana as recently as 1855, he now has the status of a zamindar (literally meaning landed proprietor), and he is the only one allowed to keep this privilege in the Kumaon Division. Jagat Sing Pal, the Rajiwar's nephew, told me that the people of the Askote Pargana are brave and kind. They never trouble the Rajiwar, who, in turn, takes care of them almost like a father. They turn to him in every hardship, in sickness and distress, and he looks after them in a true patriarchal manner. The Rajiwar isn't wealthy, likely because he spends so much on his people and the travelers passing through Askote. Many of these travelers are barely more than beggars, despite traveling as fakirs or other religious devotees heading to or returning from the sacred Mansarowar Lake in Tibet. The current Rajiwar, [3] Pushkar Pal, belongs to the Ramchanda family and is a descendant of the Solar dynasty. His ancestors lived in Aoudh or Ayodye (as it was formerly called), from where they moved to the hills of Katyur in Kumaon, where they constructed a palace. The hilly regions up to Killakanjia and the Jumua River fell under the Raja of Katyur's authority, who assumed the title of Maharaja. A branch of the family came from Katyur to Askote, with its chief keeping the hereditary title of Rajiwar alongside that of Pal, which each male adopts. The Rajiwar pays a yearly tribute of 1800 rupees to the Government of India. During the time of the Gourkhas, he paid nothing except for occasional gifts of Nafas or musk-deer to his neighbor, the King of Nepal, with whom he still has a very close relationship. At that time, he was practically an independent king. Nevertheless, Rajiwar Pushkar Pal has always remained completely loyal to the Government of India.

"Are the people very obsequious to the Rajiwar?" I asked of Jagat Sing Pal.

"Are the people very eager to please the Rajiwar?" I asked Jagat Sing Pal.

[16] "Yes, sir. For instance, when the Rajiwar sits on his Karoka (a kind of throne) he is saluted with a particularly respectful salaam. His subjects bring their hand up to the forehead and support the elbow with the left hand, as a sign that this salutation is so weighty that it requires the support of the other hand."

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] "Yes, sir. For example, when the Rajiwar sits on his Karoka (a kind of throne), he is greeted with a very respectful salute. His subjects raise their hand to their forehead and support their elbow with their left hand, indicating that this greeting is so significant it needs the support of the other hand."

At Court functions, the male relatives, friends, and servants sit near the Rajiwar, his brother first, his son next, then his nephews, etc. Women are of course not admitted, and although no strict code of etiquette exists, the Rajiwar and his family are nevertheless always treated with Eastern deference.

At Court events, male relatives, friends, and servants sit close to the Rajiwar, with his brother first, his son next, then his nephews, and so on. Women are not allowed, and while there isn't a strict code of etiquette, the Rajiwar and his family are always treated with a sense of Eastern respect.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[2] Daramsalla, a stone-walled shelter for the use of travellers and natives.

[2] Daramsalla, a stone-walled refuge for travelers and locals.

[3] Rajiwar: head of kingdom.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Rajiwar: ruler of the kingdom.


[17]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER IV

The Raots—A slippery journey—Superstitious notions—Anger and jealousy—Friends—To the homes of the savages—Photography—Habitations.
A Young Man
A Young Man

We had walked seventy-eight miles in three marches, and my men being footsore, I gave them a day's rest, which I employed in going to the haunts of the "Wild men of the forest," or Raots or Rajis, as they style themselves. They live in the woods several miles off, and to reach them I had to descend a steep incline covered by an uncommonly slippery carpet of dried grass and pine needles. I had to take off shoes and stockings to get along, and even bare-footed I found it difficult to maintain my hold. I was accompanied by one of my chaprassis and a man from Askote, and we were forced down more swiftly than comfortably till we reached a faint track, which we followed until we came upon a man hiding behind some trees. He was a wild-looking creature, naked and unkempt, with flowing hair and scanty beard and moustache, and, regarding us with an air of suspicion, he was most reluctant to show us the way to the homes of his tribe. He was a Raot, and his reluctance to let us approach his home seemed justified enough when he said to my guide, "No white man has ever visited our home, and should one ever come we shall all die. The spirits of the mountains will prevent your progress—not we. You will suffer pain, for the spirit who watches over the Raots will let no one enter their homes."

We had walked seventy-eight miles over three days, and since my men were sore from the journey, I gave them a day's rest. I used that day to explore the territories of the "Wild Men of the Forest," or Raots and Rajis, as they call themselves. They live several miles deep in the woods, and to get to them, I had to go down a steep slope covered with a particularly slippery layer of dried grass and pine needles. I had to take off my shoes and socks to make it down, and even then, going barefoot was tricky. I was accompanied by one of my assistants and a man from Askote, and we ended up sliding down faster than we were comfortable with until we found a faint trail. We followed it until we came across a man hiding behind some trees. He looked wild, bare and disheveled, with long hair and a sparse beard and mustache. He looked at us suspiciously and was very hesitant to guide us to his tribe's home. He was a Raot, and his reluctance made sense when he told my guide, "No white man has ever visited our home, and if one ever does, we will all perish. The mountain spirits will stop you—not us. You will suffer, for the spirit who protects the Raots will not allow anyone to enter our homes."

I gave the man a rupee, which he turned and weighed in his hand.

I gave the guy a rupee, and he turned it over and weighed it in his hand.

[18] "You can come," he muttered, "but you will regret it. You will have great misfortune."

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] "You can come," he whispered, "but you'll regret it. You'll face a lot of bad luck."

Raot on Tree

Raot on Tree


There was something so weirdly peculiar in the tone of voice in which the man spoke, as if he had been in a trance, himself only the channel through which the threat of some occult being was conveyed to us, that for some minutes I could not get his words out of my head. I followed him as best I could, for he climbed up huge boulders with the agility of a monkey. It was no easy job, for we bounded and leapt from rock to rock and vaulted over fallen trees. The track became more marked and went up along the incline of a steep ravine. We continued until, hot and panting, we arrived at a large hollow high up in the cliff of clay. There, on a semicircular platform with entrenchments of felled trees, were about a dozen men almost devoid of clothing, some sitting on their heels and resting their arms on their knees, others lying down flat. One fellow smoked dry leaves inside a pipe of Hindoo origin. I snatched a photo of the group as, with an air of suspicion mingled with surprise and sadness, but no apparent fear, they stared at the unexpected visitors. Two of the elder men having overcome their first stupor sprang to their feet and with mad gesticulations refused to let me come nearer. But I penetrated right into their circle, and found myself surrounded by a sulky and angry crowd.

There was something really strange about the way the man spoke, almost as if he was in a trance, just a channel for some kind of supernatural threat directed at us. For a few minutes, I couldn't shake his words from my mind. I tried to keep up with him as he scaled huge boulders quickly, like a monkey. It wasn't easy; we jumped from rock to rock and vaulted over fallen trees. The path became clearer as it ascended the steep ravine. We pressed on until we were hot and out of breath, arriving at a large hollow high up the clay cliff. There, on a semicircular platform surrounded by fallen trees, sat about a dozen nearly naked men—some were sitting on their heels with their arms resting on their knees, while others lay flat. One guy was smoking dried leaves from a pipe of Hindu origin. I took a photo of the group as they looked at us with a mix of suspicion, surprise, and sadness, but no visible fear. Two older men, snapping out of their initial shock, jumped to their feet and frantically gestured for me not to come any closer. But I stepped right into their circle and found myself facing a grumpy and angry crowd.

"No man has ever been here but a Raot. You will soon die. You have offended God!" screamed an old man, in a sudden outburst of temper. He bent his knees and curved his spine, protruding his head towards me. He shook his fists in my face, waved them about in the air, opened and tightly clenched them, digging his nails furiously into his palms. Instead of contracting the scalp of his forehead, the old

"No man has ever been here except for a Raot. You will soon die. You’ve offended God!" shouted an old man in a sudden fit of rage. He bent his knees and hunched his back, leaning his head toward me. He shook his fists in my face, waved them around in the air, opened and squeezed them tightly, digging his nails furiously into his palms. Instead of wrinkling his forehead, the old

[19]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Raots

Raots


[20] Raot raised his eyebrows and turned his polished forehead into a succession of deep wrinkles, stretching in a straight line across almost from ear to ear, and showing only a dark dimple over his nose. His nostrils, flat and broad to begin with, became widely expanded and raised so as to cause two deep lines to diverge from the nose along his cheeks. His mouth was open and a peculiar vacillation of the lower lip demonstrated plainly that its owner had but little command over speech and articulation. His eyes, which may have been brown originally, were discoloured, probably through the abuse of excessive animal powers, to the possession of which the formation of his skull strongly testified, but they assumed extraordinary brilliancy as his fury increased. He opened them wide, apparently with an effort, and showed the entire circle of his iris. The pupils were dilated, notwithstanding that the light upon his face was strong at the time.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Raot raised his eyebrows, creating deep wrinkles across his polished forehead that stretched almost from ear to ear, with only a dark dimple showing over his nose. His nostrils, which were already flat and broad, flared widely, creating two deep lines that extended from his nose along his cheeks. His mouth was open, and the unusual movement of his lower lip clearly indicated that he struggled with speech and articulation. His eyes, which might have originally been brown, were discolored, likely due to the excessive use of raw power, as suggested by the shape of his skull. However, they became strikingly bright as his anger grew. He opened them wide, seemingly with effort, revealing the full circle of his iris. Despite the strong light on his face, his pupils were dilated.

Following his example, some of the rest displayed their discontent in a similar fashion, but others, among whom I especially noticed two youths with sad languishing faces, drooping large eyes, and luxuriant growth of black hair, stood apathetically apart, with head reclining towards the right shoulder, their features perfectly composed, and supporting their chins on their hands. Even if they had overcome their stupor, they did certainly not betray it, and appeared perfectly emotionless as far as their countenances were concerned.

Following his lead, some others showed their discontent in a similar way, but others—especially two young men I noticed with sad, droopy faces, large eyes, and long black hair—stood quietly to the side, their heads leaning towards their right shoulders. Their expressions were completely still, and they rested their chins on their hands. Even if they had shaken off their stupor, they didn’t show it; they looked completely emotionless as far as their faces went.

One fellow with an extraordinary head, a mixture it seemed of a Mongolian and a Negroid type, was the first to calm himself of those who were so madly excited. With piercing though unsteady eyes, and with nervous twitching movements, he scrutinised my face more closely than the others, and seemed to reassure them all that I had not come to hurt them. He made signs to the rest to desist from their threats, and then, squatting down himself, invited me to follow his example, by sitting on my heels. When the storm had subsided and they had all sat down, I drew out of my pocket some coins and gave one to each of them, with the exception of one man on whom I thought I might study the passion of jealousy in its most primitive form. I watched the man closely, and soon saw him draw apart from the others and become sulky. The others were by now comparatively calm. They seemed predisposed towards sadness, and I could with difficulty extract from any of them more than a very faint sort of a smile. They turned and twisted the coins in their hands, and compared them among one another, jabbering and apparently content. The jealous man kept [21] his head turned away from them determinedly, pretending not to see what was going on, and, resting his chin on his hand, he began to sing a weird, melancholy, guttural song, assuming an air of contempt, especially when the others chaffed him. Having allowed him to suffer enough, I gave him two coins instead of one, and with them the satisfaction of the last grin.

One guy with a really unique face, a mix of what looked like Mongolian and Black features, was the first to calm down among those who were super excited. With piercing but shaky eyes and twitchy movements, he examined my face more closely than the others and seemed to reassure them that I wasn’t there to hurt them. He gestured to the rest to stop their threats and then sat down, inviting me to do the same and sit on my heels. Once the chaos settled and they all took a seat, I pulled some coins out of my pocket and gave one to each of them, except for one guy whom I thought I could study jealousy in its purest form. I kept a close eye on him and soon noticed him separating himself from the group and getting sulky. By then, the others were much calmer. They seemed a bit sad, and I could barely get more than a faint smile from any of them. They were turning the coins over in their hands and comparing them, chatting and seeming happy enough. The jealous guy kept his head turned away from them, acting like he didn’t want to see what was happening, propping his chin on his hand as he started to sing a strange, sad song in a guttural voice, putting on a look of disdain, especially when the others teased him. After letting him stew for a bit, I gave him two coins instead of one, along with the satisfaction of the last grin.

Head of Young Man
Head of Young Man

I then tried to photograph them, but my camera was looked upon with suspicion, and as plate after plate was exposed in portraying single individuals or groups, they shuddered at each "click" of the spring.

I then tried to take their pictures, but my camera was viewed with suspicion, and with each shot I took of individuals or groups, they flinched at every "click" of the shutter.

"The gods will be angry with you for doing that," said a Raot, pointing at the camera, "unless you give us a large white coin."

"The gods will be mad at you for doing that," said a Raot, pointing at the camera, "unless you give us a big white coin."

I took advantage of this, and promised them as best I could through my guide "two large coins" if they would take me to their huts, some few hundred yards below the lofty eyrie in the cliff, but I must for the sum be allowed not only to see but to touch and have explained to me anything I liked.

I made the most of this and promised them as best as I could through my guide "two large coins" if they would take me to their huts, a few hundred yards down from the high nest in the cliff. However, for that amount, I insisted that I be allowed not just to see but also to touch and have explained to me anything I wanted.

They consented, and we began our descent of the precipitous track leading to their habitations, a track fit really only for monkeys. Several women and children, who had come up attracted by the sight of strangers, joined with the men in giving us a helping hand, and in fact, I believe there cannot have been a single paw in the company that did not at one time or other during the descent clutch some portion of my clothing in the friendliest spirit. Holding on to one another, we proceeded in a body, not always at a pleasant pace, down the dangerous cliff. Two or three times one of the natives or myself tripped and almost dragged the remainder of the party over the precipice, while the piercing yells and screams of the women seemed to echo back for [22] miles around. I was not sorry when we at last reached the small huts by the river which made up their village.

They agreed, and we started our descent down the steep path leading to their homes, a path that really seemed meant for monkeys. Several women and children, drawn by the presence of strangers, joined the men in giving us a hand, and honestly, I think there wasn’t a single person in the group who didn’t at some point during the descent grab onto some part of my clothing in a friendly way. Holding onto each other, we made our way down together, not always at a comfortable pace, down the risky cliff. A couple of times, either one of the locals or I stumbled, nearly pulling the rest of the group over the edge, while the piercing cries and screams of the women echoed back for miles around. I was relieved when we finally reached the small huts by the river that made up their village.

Two Men sitting down with Children

Two men sitting down with children


The habitations were squalid beyond measure. Constructed with a rough frame of tree-branches, fortified by wooden posts and rafters, roofed over with a thatch of dried grass, the majority of them measured about ten feet. They were built against the hillside, a strong bi-forked pole in the centre of the structure supporting the roof, and were usually divided into two sections, so as to give shelter each of them to two families. They contained no furniture, and but few utensils of the most primitive make. There were circular wooden bowls scooped out in the past by means of sharp-edged stones, and more recently by cheap blades, which were of Indian manufacture. For such cultivation as they were capable of these people used primitive earth rakes, and they also possessed coarse mallets, sticks, and net bags in which they kept their stores. Their staple food in former days was river fish, flesh of wild animals, and roots of certain trees; but they now eat grain also, and, like all savages, [23] they have a craving for liquor. The interior of Raot habitations was so primitive and lacking of furniture, that it hardly requires to be described, and the odours that emanated from these huts are also better left to the imagination of the reader.

The living conditions were incredibly filthy. Built with a rough structure of tree branches, reinforced by wooden posts and rafters, and topped with a roof of dried grass, most of them were about ten feet in size. They were constructed against the hillside, with a sturdy bifurcated pole in the center supporting the roof, and were typically divided into two sections to provide shelter for two families each. There was no furniture and very few basic utensils. They had round wooden bowls carved out long ago using sharp stones, and more recently with cheap blades made in India. For any farming they did, these people used basic earth rakes, along with crude mallets, sticks, and net bags to store their supplies. Their main food sources used to be river fish, wild animal meat, and tree roots; however, they now also eat grains and, like all primitive people, have a desire for alcohol. The interiors of Raot’s homes were so basic and lacking in furnishings that they hardly need description, and the smells coming from these huts are best left to the reader's imagination.

Entering one of the dwellings, I found squatted round a fire of wood some women and men, the women wearing silver bangles and glass bead necklaces, the men very little more than string earrings. Only one of the men had on as much as a diminutive loin-cloth, and the women had scanty dresses of Indian manufacture, obtained in Askote.

Entering one of the homes, I found some women and men gathered around a wooden fire. The women were wearing silver bangles and glass bead necklaces, while the men had little more than string earrings. Only one of the men wore a small loincloth, and the women had minimal dresses made in India, which they had gotten in Askote.

Scanning their features carefully, it struck me that in their facial lines many points could be traced which would make one feel inclined to attribute to them a remote Mongolian origin, modified largely by the climate, the nature of the country, and probably by intermarriage. In the scale of standard human races the Raots stood extremely low, as can be judged from the accompanying photographs. The women, as will be seen, had abnormally small skulls with low foreheads, and although they looked devoid even of a glint of reason, they were actually fairly intelligent. They had high cheek-bones; long, flattish noses, broad and rounded as in the Mongolian type. The chin was in most instances round, very receding, though the lips were in their normal position, thin, and very tightly closed with up-turned corners to the mouth. The lower jaw was extremely short and narrow, whereas the upper one seemed quite out of proportion to the size of the skull. Their ears were large, outstanding, and unmodelled, but capable of catching sounds at great distances.

Scanning their features carefully, I noticed that their facial lines hinted at a distant Mongolian ancestry, likely shaped by the climate, the landscape, and probably by intermarriage. On the scale of standard human races, the Raots ranked very low, as can be seen from the accompanying photographs. The women, as you'll notice, had unusually small skulls with low foreheads, and while they seemed utterly lacking in reason, they were actually quite intelligent. They had high cheekbones; long, flat noses that were broad and rounded, typical of the Mongolian type. The chin was generally round and very receding, though the lips sat normally, thin and tightly closed with upturned corners of the mouth. The lower jaw was extremely short and narrow, while the upper one appeared disproportionately large compared to the skull. Their ears were large, protruding, and unshaped but capable of picking up sounds from far away.

The men had better heads than the women, underdeveloped yet comparatively well balanced. They had higher and broader foreheads, similar though shorter noses, chins not quite so receding, the whole lower jaw extraordinarily narrow, but the upper lip, as with the women, huge and out of all proportion.

The men had better heads than the women, underdeveloped yet relatively well balanced. They had higher and broader foreheads, similar but shorter noses, chins that weren't as receding, and the entire lower jaw was extremely narrow, but the upper lip, like the women's, was huge and completely out of proportion.

Undoubtedly the Raots are not a pure race, and even among the few I came across variations so considerable occurred as to puzzle one in tracing their origin. They invariably possess luxuriant coal-black hair, which never attains more than a moderate length. It is not coarse in texture, but is usually so dirty that it appears coarser than it really is. They have very little hair on their bodies except in the arm-pits, and their moustaches and beards hardly deserve the name.

Undoubtedly, the Raots are not a pure race, and even among the few I encountered, there were variations significant enough to make it hard to trace their origins. They consistently have thick, jet-black hair that never grows longer than a moderate length. The texture isn’t coarse, but it’s usually so dirty that it looks rougher than it actually is. They have very little body hair apart from their armpits, and their mustaches and beards hardly qualify as such.

[24] The men generally part the crop on their head in the middle, so that it flows on either side of the skull, just covering the ears, and I found the same strange custom that I observed years ago among the Ainu of Yezo of shaving a lozenge-shaped portion of the scalp in the centre of the forehead directly above the nose. The women, using their fingers as a comb, draw their hair to the back of the head and tie it in a knot.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] The men usually part their hair down the middle, allowing it to flow on both sides of their heads, just covering their ears. I noticed the same odd tradition I observed years ago among the Ainu of Yezo, where they shave a diamond-shaped patch of hair in the center of the forehead right above the nose. The women use their fingers like a comb to pull their hair back and tie it in a knot.

The bodies of the better specimens I saw were slight and agile, with no superfluous fat or flesh. Supple to a degree, yet solid and muscular, with well-proportioned limbs and a skin of a rich tinge between bronze and terra-cotta colour, these savages, dirty and unclothed as they were, certainly appealed to the artistic side of my temperament, particularly on account of their very majestic deportment. I noticed their regular breathing, which they usually did through the nose, keeping their mouths tightly closed, and also one very curious peculiarity about their feet, viz., the length of the second toe, protruding considerably beyond the others, and giving them no doubt the power of using their toes almost as we should our fingers. The palms of their hands were almost without lines, the finger-nails flat, and their thumbs stumpy with the last phalange curiously short.

The bodies of the better specimens I saw were slim and agile, with no excess fat or flesh. Flexible yet solid and muscular, with well-proportioned limbs and skin that had a rich tint between bronze and terracotta, these people, dirty and unclothed as they were, definitely appealed to my artistic side, especially because of their very majestic posture. I noticed their regular breathing, which they typically did through their noses, keeping their mouths tightly closed, and one very curious thing about their feet: the second toe was noticeably longer than the others, likely giving them the ability to use their toes almost like we would use our fingers. The palms of their hands had almost no lines, the fingernails were flat, and their thumbs were short with the last segment quite small.

A Young Man
A Young Man

If the Raots to-day have adopted some articles of clothing and ornament, besides altering their diet to a certain extent, it is due entirely to the Rajiwar of Askote, who, taking a great interest in the tribes he rules over, provides them in a patriarchal way with all sorts of necessaries of life. Very few Raots have of late years visited Askote, as they are of a retiring nature and seem contented with their primitive abodes in the forests of Chipula, which they claim as their own. Their only occupations are fishing and hunting, and they are said to have a predilection for the flesh of the larger Himahlyan monkey, although from my own observation I should have said that they would eat almost anything they could get. It has generally been assumed that the Raot women are kept in strict seclusion and hidden from strangers, and I cannot better prove the absurdity of this than by reproducing in these pages one of several photographs of the [25] Raot women, for which they posed at my request without the slightest objection from the men. They are generally believed to be chaste, and my photographs prove, I think, that whatever charm they may possess for the Raot men, their peculiar beauty offers but little temptation to others.

If the Raots today have adopted some clothing and jewelry styles and made some changes to their diet, it's entirely thanks to the Rajiwar of Askote. He takes a genuine interest in the tribes he oversees and provides them with all kinds of essentials in a nurturing way. Very few Raots have visited Askote in recent years because they tend to be reserved and seem satisfied with their basic homes in the forests of Chipula, which they consider their own. Their main activities are fishing and hunting, and while it's said they prefer the meat of the larger Himalayan monkey, from what I've observed, they'll eat just about anything they can find. People usually think that Raot women are kept in strict seclusion and hidden from outsiders. I can best illustrate the absurdity of this by including one of several photographs of a Raot woman who posed for me at my request with no objections from the men. They’re generally thought to be chaste, and I believe my photographs show that while they may have some appeal to the Raot men, their unique beauty holds little attraction for anyone else.

They are rapidly diminishing in numbers, chiefly no doubt on account of constant intermarriage. I was assured that the women are not sterile, but that there is enormous mortality among the young children. They bury their dead, and for several days afterwards offer food and water to the spirit of the departed.

They are quickly declining in numbers, likely due to constant intermarriage. I was told that the women are not infertile, but that there is very high mortality among young children. They bury their dead, and for several days afterward, they offer food and water to the spirit of the deceased.

I was unable to ascertain what their marriage ceremonies were like, or if they had any to speak of, but it appeared that there was a considerable family feeling among couples living maritally together. They are superstitious and hold in curious awe the spirits of the mountains, the sun, the moon, fire, water, and wind. Whether this amounts to a definite form of worship I cannot say: I certainly saw no signs of the offering of prayers or sacrifices.

I couldn't figure out what their marriage ceremonies were like, or if they even had any, but it seemed that there was a strong sense of family among couples living together. They are superstitious and regard the spirits of the mountains, sun, moon, fire, water, and wind with a kind of reverence. Whether this counts as a specific form of worship, I can't say: I definitely didn't see any signs of prayers or sacrifices being made.

The Raots claim to be the descendants of kings, and they refuse allegiance to any one. They will neither salute you nor bow to you.

The Raots say they descend from kings and won't pledge loyalty to anyone. They won't greet you or show you any respect.

"It is for other people to salute us. Our blood is the blood of kings, and though for choice we have for centuries retired to the jungle, we are none the less the sons of kings."

"It’s up to others to recognize us. Our blood comes from kings, and even though we’ve chosen to live in the jungle for centuries, we are still the descendants of kings."

After a while, and when I had spent some considerable time among them, these royal savages seemed uncomfortable and apprehensive. I had turned over, examined, drawn or photographed every household article I had seen, had measured every one, male and female, who consented to be measured, and paid them the stipulated money. As I was about to leave, the grey-haired man approached me again.

After a while, and after I had spent quite a bit of time with them, these royal savages appeared uneasy and nervous. I had looked at, examined, sketched, or photographed every household item I had encountered, had measured everyone, both male and female, who agreed to be measured, and paid them the agreed amount. Just as I was about to leave, the grey-haired man came up to me again.

"You have seen the home of the Raots. You are the first stranger who has done so, and you will suffer much. The gods are very angry with you."

"You've seen the Raots' home. You're the first outsider to do that, and you're going to face a lot of trouble. The gods are really angry with you."

"Yes," rejoined another savage, pointing at the ravine, "whoever treads along that track and is not a Raot will be afflicted by a great calamity."

"Yes," replied another savage, pointing at the ravine, "anyone who walks along that path and isn’t a Raot will face a serious disaster."

"Kush paruani, Sahib" ("Never mind, sir"), interrupted the guide, "they are only barbarians, they know no better. I have myself never been here, so I suppose I shall also come in for my share."

"Kush paruani, Sahib" ("Never mind, sir"), interrupted the guide, "they're just barbarians, they don't know any better. I've never been here myself, so I guess I'll also be part of it."

"You too will suffer," said the old Raot, with self-assurance.

"You'll suffer too," said the old Raot, confidently.

[26] The Raots stood round me silently as I packed up the camera, and I felt that they looked upon me as a man whose fate was settled. They did not acknowledge my farewell, and, had I been in the least superstitious, might have made me thoroughly uncomfortable with their solemn, stolid gravity.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] The Raots stood around me quietly as I packed the camera, and I sensed that they saw me as someone whose fate was already decided. They didn’t respond to my goodbye, and if I had been even a little superstitious, their serious, heavy demeanor might have made me really uncomfortable.

Raot Women of the Forest

Raot Women of the Forest


[27]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER V

A pilgrim from Mansarowar Lake—The spirits of the mountains—A safeguard against them—Tibetan encampments—The Rajiwar—A waterfall—Watermills.

Having returned to Askote from my excursion, I saw while going round the town with Jagat Sing, in a low stone shed by the side of the palace, the tall gaunt figure of a man emerging from a cloud of smoke.

After getting back to Askote from my trip, I noticed while walking around the town with Jagat Sing, the tall, thin silhouette of a man stepping out from a cloud of smoke in a small stone shed next to the palace.

"Who is that?" I inquired of my companion.

"Who is that?" I asked my friend.

"Oh, that is a fakir returning from a pilgrimage to the sacred lake of Mansarowar in Tibet. Many of these fanatics pass through here during the summer on their religious journeys."

"Oh, that’s a fakir coming back from a pilgrimage to the holy lake of Mansarowar in Tibet. A lot of these fanatics pass through here in the summer on their religious journeys."

The Rajiwar of Askote, his Brother and Son

The Rajiwar of Askote, his brother, and son


My curiosity drew me towards the weird individual. He was over six feet in height, and his slim body had been covered with ashes, giving the dark skin a tinge of ghastly grey. I asked him to come out into the light. His masses of long hair had been plaited into small tresses which were wound round his head in the fashion of a turban—the "Tatta." The hair, too, had been whitened, while the long thin beard had been dyed bright red. His eyes were sunken and, apparently to add to the ghastly and decidedly repulsive effect, his forehead and cheeks were plastered with a thick white paint. He seemed half stupefied, and had very little [28] to say for himself. As can be seen by the illustration, he was scantily clothed, but he wore the Kamarjuri or fakir's chain about his loins, and he had a bead bracelet round his arm above the elbow. His waist was encircled with a belt of wooden beads, and a necklace of plaited hair ornamented his neck. He spent his days rolling himself in ashes and enduring self-imposed bodily privations, with a view to attain a state of sanctification.

My curiosity led me to the strange individual. He stood over six feet tall, and his slim body was covered in ashes, giving his dark skin a spooky gray hue. I asked him to step into the light. His long hair was braided into small tresses, wrapped around his head like a turban—the "Tatta." The hair was also whitened, while his long, thin beard was dyed bright red. His eyes were sunken, and to enhance the eerie and definitely off-putting look, his forehead and cheeks were smeared with thick white paint. He seemed somewhat dazed and had very little to say for himself. As shown in the illustration, he was barely dressed, but he wore the Kamarjuri or fakir's chain around his waist, and he had a bead bracelet on his arm above the elbow. His waist was wrapped with a belt of wooden beads, and a necklace of braided hair adorned his neck. He spent his days rolling in ashes and enduring self-imposed hardships in hopes of reaching a state of sanctification.

Fakir Returning from Mansarowar

Fakir Back from Mansarowar


Rumours had reached me of some curious superstitions prevalent among these mountain folk.

Rumors had reached me about some strange superstitions common among these mountain people.

"Tell me," I said to Jagat Sing, "are there 'spirits of the mountain' in these ranges? And do the people really believe in them?"

"Tell me," I said to Jagat Sing, "are there 'spirits of the mountain' in these mountains? And do the people actually believe in them?"

"Yes, sir," replied the young fellow, "there certainly are a number of them, and they are often very troublesome, especially to certain people. They are seldom known, however, to kill any one."

"Yeah, sir," replied the young guy, "there definitely are a lot of them, and they can be really annoying, especially for certain people. But they’re rarely known to actually kill anyone."

"Then they are not quite so bad as some human beings," I replied.

"Then they're not as bad as some people," I replied.

"Well, sir, they are very bad. They seize sleeping people by the throat with claws like iron, sitting on the chests of their victims."

"Well, sir, they are really bad. They grab sleeping people by the throat with claws like iron, sitting on the victims' chests."

[29] "Does not that sound more like an attack of indigestion?"

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] "Doesn’t that sound more like indigestion?"

"No, sir. The ghosts of the mountains are the spirits of people that have not gone to heaven. They are to be found in swarms at night in the forest. The people are terrified of them. They haunt the mountain-tops and slopes, and they can assume the semblance of a cat, a mouse, or any other animal; in fact they are said to frequently change their appearance. Where no man can tread, among rocks and precipices, or in the thick jungle, the spirits seek their retreat, but often they abandon their haunts to seek for men. The person who becomes possessed generally remains in a semi-conscious condition and ejaculates mad cries and unintelligible words. There are men who profess to know charms to draw them out. Some remedies are for that purpose commonly used by the natives with more or less success. A grass called Bichna (nettles) has the faculty of frightening the spirits away when applied on the body of the sufferer, but the most effective remedy is to make pretence to beat with a red-hot iron the person possessed. The spirits seem to fear that more than anything else."

"No, sir. The spirits of the mountains are the souls of people who haven't gone to heaven. They're found in swarms at night in the forest. People are scared of them. They haunt the mountain tops and slopes, and they can take the shape of a cat, a mouse, or any other animal; in fact, they often change their appearance. In places where no one can go, among rocks and cliffs, or in thick jungles, the spirits seek their hideouts, but they often leave their lairs to look for humans. Someone who gets possessed usually remains in a semi-conscious state and shouts out crazy cries and gibberish. There are people who claim to know spells to lure them out. Some remedies are commonly used by the locals for this purpose with varying degrees of success. A grass called Bichna (nettles) can scare the spirits away when applied to the body of the afflicted, but the most effective remedy is to pretend to strike the possessed person with a red-hot iron. The spirits seem to fear that more than anything else."

"Do the spirits ever speak?" I inquired, interested in the curious superstitions of these hill men.

"Do the spirits ever talk?" I asked, curious about the strange beliefs of these mountain people.

"No, sir, not often, nor usually directly, but they do it through people who are possessed by them. It is they who tell many strange tales of the spirits. One curious point about them is that they only seize people who are afraid of them. If defied they vanish."

"No, sir, not really, and not usually directly, but they do it through people who are possessed by them. These are the ones who share many strange stories about the spirits. One interesting thing about them is that they only take control of people who are scared of them. If someone stands up to them, they disappear."

"Do the natives adopt any special method to protect themselves from these mountain demons?"

"Do the locals have any special way to protect themselves from these mountain demons?"

"Fire is the only sure protection. Any one sleeping near a fire is safe, and as long as there is a flame blazing the spirits keep away."

"Fire is the only guaranteed protection. Anyone sleeping near a fire is safe, and as long as there’s a blazing flame, the spirits stay away."

"Do you know any one who has seen them?"

"Do you know anyone who has seen them?"

"Yes. A chaprassi called Joga tells of having been compelled to travel at night through a forest: he heard a voice calling him by name. Terrified, he stopped, and for some moments his voice failed him. At last, trembling all over, he replied, and instantly a swarm of spirits appeared and challenged him to do them harm. Joga ran for his life and the demons vanished. Spirits have been known to throw stones at passers-by."

"Yes. A watchman named Joga talked about being forced to walk through a forest at night: he heard someone calling his name. Scared, he stopped, and for a moment he couldn’t speak. Finally, shaking all over, he answered, and suddenly a bunch of spirits showed up and challenged him to do them harm. Joga ran for his life, and the demons disappeared. Spirits are known to throw stones at people passing by."

"Have you ever seen a spirit, Jagat Sing?"

"Have you ever seen a ghost, Jagat Sing?"

"Only once. I was returning to the palace late in the evening when up the steep road I perceived a woman's figure. It was a beautiful moonlight night. I walked up, [30] and as I passed, the face of the strange being appeared black, inhuman and ghastly. I staggered when I saw the weird apparition approach, my blood ran cold with fear. I struck a mighty blow with my stick, but behold! the cane whirled through the air and hit nothing. Instantly the ghost vanished."

"Only once. I was heading back to the palace late at night when I spotted a woman’s figure up the steep road. It was a beautiful moonlit night. I walked closer, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and as I passed by, the face of the strange figure looked dark, inhuman, and terrifying. I stumbled when I saw the eerie apparition approach, and my blood ran cold with fear. I swung my stick with all my might, but, to my surprise, the cane flew through the air and hit nothing. Suddenly, the ghost disappeared."

"I wish, Jagat Sing, that you could show me some of these spirits; I would give anything to make a sketch of them."

"I wish, Jagat Sing, that you could show me some of these spirits; I’d give anything to make a sketch of them."

"You cannot always see them when you want, sir, but they are always to be avoided. They are evil spirits and can do nothing but harm."

"You can't always see them when you want, sir, but you should always steer clear of them. They're evil spirits and can only bring harm."


Leaving Askote (4600 feet) by the winding road through a dense forest, I crossed by a suspension bridge the Gori River at Gargia (2450 feet). The track was along the low and unpleasantly hot valley of the Kali River, a raging stream flowing with indescribable rapidity in the opposite direction to that in which I was travelling. It formed the boundary line between Nepal and Kumaon. Huts and patches of cultivation were to be seen on the Nepalese side, whereas on our side we came upon deserted and roofless winter dwellings of Shokas (usually but not correctly called Botiyas) and Tibetans, who migrate to these warmer regions to graze their sheep during the colder months of the year. The Shoka summer residences are at greater elevations, mostly along the highways to Tibet and nearer the Tibetan boundary. On arriving at the Kutzia Daramsalla, a messenger brought me the news that the Rajiwar, whom I had missed seeing at Askote, was now here for the purpose of making offerings to certain deities. He would call upon me at 3 p.m., so, having some time to spare, I went to bathe in the deliciously cold though, as I found, dangerously rapid stream. Swimming was out of the question, and even an immersion bath was attended with a certain amount of risk. The current caused me to lose my footing, and I soon found myself washed with great force against some rocks thirty or forty yards down stream. I came out of the water minus a few patches of skin on my knees and shins, and while drying myself in the sun, received a deputation of the Patan (head village man) and other natives, conveying with their most respectful salaams gifts of milk, kielas (bananas), kakri (gigantic cucumbers), and nuts. These hill fellows impressed me as being of a far superior standard to the Hindoos of the plains. They were lightly yet strongly built, and showed evidence of both character and dignity. With their fair complexion and luxuriant black [31] hair and moustache they resembled Spaniards or Southern Italians. They lacked entirely the affected manner and falseness of speech and demeanour, so common among the natives who are constantly in contact with Europeans.

Leaving Askote (4600 feet) via the winding road through a dense forest, I crossed the Gori River at Gargia (2450 feet) by a suspension bridge. The path wound along the low and uncomfortably hot valley of the Kali River, a raging stream flowing incredibly fast in the opposite direction of my travel. It marked the boundary between Nepal and Kumaon. I spotted huts and fields on the Nepalese side, while on our side, we encountered abandoned and roofless winter homes of the Shokas (often incorrectly called Botiyas) and Tibetans, who migrate to these warmer areas to graze their sheep during the colder months. The Shoka summer homes are situated at higher elevations, mostly along the routes to Tibet and closer to the Tibetan border. When I arrived at the Kutzia Daramsalla, a messenger informed me that the Rajiwar, who I had missed at Askote, was now here to make offerings to certain deities. He would visit me at 3 PM, so, with some time to spare, I went to bathe in the refreshingly cold but, as I found out, dangerously swift stream. Swimming was not an option, and even a quick dip posed some risk. The current knocked me off my feet, and I quickly found myself swept against some rocks thirty or forty yards downstream. I emerged from the water minus a few patches of skin on my knees and shins, and while drying off in the sun, I was approached by the Patan (headman) and other locals, who, with their most respectful greetings, brought gifts of milk, kielas (bananas), kakri (huge cucumbers), and nuts. These hill people struck me as being of a much higher caliber than the Hindus of the plains. They were lightly but sturdily built and exhibited a sense of character and dignity. With their fair skin and thick black hair and moustaches, they resembled Spaniards or Southern Italians. They completely lacked the pretentious mannerisms and insincerity that are so common among those who are always in contact with Europeans.

Below the Daramsalla, near the water-side, was a large Tibetan encampment of some twenty or thirty tents which had all originally been white, but were now black with smoke. In these were men, women, and children, with all their paraphernalia; and the first thing that attracted my eye in each tent was the quantity of shiny brass bowls strewn upon the ground, the entire energy of the tent-owners seemingly being spent in keeping these utensils clean and bright, to the utter neglect of their other property. Walls of sheep-loads were erected either inside the tent or directly outside, covered in the latter case with cloths in order to protect them from the rain.

Below the Daramsalla, by the water's edge, there was a large Tibetan camp with about twenty or thirty tents that had all initially been white but were now blackened with smoke. Inside were men, women, and children, along with all their belongings; the first thing that caught my eye in each tent was the number of shiny brass bowls scattered across the ground. It seemed that the tent owners focused all their energy on keeping these utensils clean and bright, completely ignoring their other possessions. Walls made of sheep loads were built either inside the tent or right outside, covered with cloths to protect them from the rain.

Punctually at 3 p.m. the Rajiwar arrived, carried in a dandy, and followed by his brother, who sat in a mountain dandy. The Rajiwar's son and heir rode a splendid grey pony. I went to assist the old Rajiwar to alight, as for some years he had been paralysed. We shook hands heartily, and I led him into the Daramsalla (2875 feet), where in default of furniture we all sat on packing-cases. His refined, well-cut features, his attractive manner, and the soft, dignified voice in which he spoke clearly indicated a man of superior blood and uncommon ability. His modesty and simplicity were delightful.

Punctually at 3 PM, the Rajiwar arrived, being carried in a dandy, followed by his brother, who rode in a mountain dandy. The Rajiwar's son and heir rode a beautiful grey pony. I went to help the old Rajiwar get down, as he had been paralyzed for several years. We shook hands warmly, and I led him into the Daramsalla (2875 feet), where, due to the lack of furniture, we all sat on packing boxes. His refined, well-defined features, charming manner, and the soft, dignified voice with which he spoke clearly indicated a man of noble lineage and exceptional talent. His modesty and simplicity were refreshing.

"I hope that your health is good and that you have not suffered too much on your journey. I was grieved not to be in Askote to receive you. Are your dear parents alive? Have you any brothers and sisters? Are you married? I would much like to visit England. It must be a wonderful country, and so much do I admire it that I have given my nephews a British education, and one of them is now serving the Maharanee (Queen) Victoria as Political Peshkar."

"I hope you're doing well and that your journey wasn't too tough. I was sad to miss welcoming you in Askote. Are your parents still alive? Do you have any siblings? Are you married? I'd really love to visit England. It must be an amazing country, and I admire it so much that I've given my nephews a British education; one of them is currently working for Queen Victoria as a Political Peshkar."

I answered his questions as best I could with the aid of a Hindustani dictionary, expressive gestures, and quick sketches. He spoke of many of our latest inventions with marked interest and intelligence.

I answered his questions as best as I could using a Hindustani dictionary, expressive gestures, and quick sketches. He talked about many of our latest inventions with great interest and intelligence.

He seemed greatly struck with my scientific instruments, but he and his people were more particularly attracted by my rifles, revolvers, and other weapons, especially the 256° Mannlicher, sighted to 1000 yards.

He seemed really impressed with my scientific instruments, but he and his group were especially drawn to my rifles, revolvers, and other weapons, particularly the 256° Mannlicher, which was sighted in for 1000 yards.

The Rajiwar pressed me to return with him to Askote, where he offered to give me tiger, bear, and leopard shoot[32]ing. Tempting as the invitation was, I could not accept it, for my plans would lead me in the opposite direction. His visit lasted for more than three hours; and I was pleased to feel that we parted great friends.

The Rajiwar urged me to go back with him to Askote, where he promised to take me on a tiger, bear, and leopard hunting trip[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]. As tempting as the offer was, I couldn't accept it since my plans were taking me the other way. His visit lasted over three hours, and I was happy to feel that we parted as great friends.

The Rajiwar and his Brother in Dandies.

The Rajiwar and His Brother in Dandies.


On the road to Dharchula, along the low-lying valley, the heat was unbearable, although the sun was near the horizon. We came upon a waterfall falling from a great height over a series of umbrella-like stalactites covered with moss. The last rays of the sun shone on the dropping water, brilliant and sparkling as a shower of diamonds. Several small rainbows added to the beauty of the scene. I rested some time in this cool and beautiful retreat. There were birds singing and monkeys playing among the trees. Farther on, where the river bends, there are two large caves hollowed in the rock; the smoke-blackened ceilings prove that these are used as camping grounds by travelling Shokas and Hunyas (Tibetans). Large black-faced, white-bearded monkeys swarmed everywhere, frankly and gladly mischievous. They throw or roll stones down upon the passers-by, often causing accidents, the track being rather narrow and sheer above the river.

On the road to Dharchula, through the low-lying valley, the heat was unbearable, even though the sun was close to the horizon. We stumbled upon a waterfall cascading from a great height over a series of umbrella-like stalactites covered in moss. The last rays of the sun illuminated the falling water, making it look brilliant and sparkling like a shower of diamonds. Several small rainbows enhanced the beauty of the scene. I took a moment to relax in this cool and lovely spot. Birds were singing, and monkeys were playing among the trees. Further along, where the river curves, there are two large caves carved into the rock; the smoke-blackened ceilings indicate that these are used as camping spots by traveling Shokas and Hunyas (Tibetans). Large black-faced, white-bearded monkeys were everywhere, openly and joyfully mischievous. They threw or rolled stones down onto passers-by, often causing accidents, as the path was quite narrow and steep above the river.

Previous to arriving at the spot where the Tsuagar flows into the Kali River one meets with many Tibetan, Humli and Rongba encampments.

Before reaching the point where the Tsuagar flows into the Kali River, you come across many camps of Tibetans, Humlis, and Rongbas.

I camped at Kalika (3205 feet) by the side of a gigantic tree with boughs spreading well over the road, the cha[33]prassis and men erecting a comfortable chöpper of mats, foliage, and branches.

I camped at Kalika (3205 feet) next to a huge tree with branches that stretched far over the road, while the locals and men set up a cozy chöpper made of mats, leaves, and branches.

I was anxious to get through the hot valley with the greatest possible speed, so, notwithstanding that we had halted very late at night, I roused my men at 3 a.m. and again set forth on the march. Here and there along the road we passed deserted winter dwellings of Shokas, nearly all with broken thatched roofs. Some, however, were roofed with slate, the distinctive mark of residence of the Darma Shokas.

I was eager to get through the hot valley as quickly as possible, so even though we had stopped very late at night, I woke my team up at 3 AM and we set off on our march again. Along the way, we passed abandoned winter homes of the Shokas, most of them with damaged thatched roofs. However, a few were covered with slate, which is a clear sign of being owned by the Darma Shokas.

The primitive Shoka water-mills were curious. By a very ingenious contrivance the water of a stream propelled a heavy cylindrical stone revolving on the top of another. The grain fell slowly from a magazine above into a hole pierced in the centre of the upper wheel, and finding its way through a channel between the two cylinders, was ground into fine flour.

The basic Shoka water mills were quite interesting. Through a clever design, water from a stream turned a large cylindrical stone that spun on top of another. Grain slowly dropped from a container above into a hole in the center of the upper wheel and then flowed through a channel between the two cylinders, getting ground into fine flour.

Dharchula (3550 feet) the largest Shoka winter settlement, is situated on a fine stretch of flat land some hundred feet above the river; the village consists of twelve long rows of roofless houses very similar in size and shape. Four larger buildings at the extreme limit of the settlement attract notice. One of these is a Daramsalla. The others, two high stone buildings, are a school, hospital and dispensary belonging to the Methodist Episcopal Mission and under the careful supervision of Miss Sheldon, M.D., Miss Brown, and that wonderful pioneer, Dr. H. Wilson. A bungalow of the same mission is built higher up on the hillside.

Dharchula (3550 feet), the largest winter settlement of the Shoka people, is located on a nice flat area a hundred feet above the river. The village has twelve long rows of roofless houses that are quite similar in size and shape. Four larger buildings at the far end of the settlement stand out. One of these is a Daramsalla. The other three, which are two tall stone buildings, house a school, hospital, and dispensary run by the Methodist Episcopal Mission, all under the careful supervision of Miss Sheldon, M.D., Miss Brown, and the remarkable pioneer, Dr. H. Wilson. A bungalow from the same mission is built higher up on the hillside.

Between the two spots where from Nepal the Lachu and the Shakta join the Kali, was Dubart (3700 feet), and from thence one gradually rose to 4120 feet at the Relegar River, also a tributary of the larger stream. Having crossed the Rankuti River I ascended still higher by zigzag walking, slowly leaving behind me range after range of mountains beyond the valley of the river; while on the Nepal side, beyond the three nearer ranges, snow peaks of great height and beauty stood out against the sky-line. The highest point on the road was 5450 feet, after which we descended to 5275 feet at Khela Daramsalla, which we did not reach till late at night.

Between the two places where the Lachu and the Shakta rivers meet the Kali in Nepal, there was Dubart (3700 feet), and from there, the elevation gradually climbed to 4120 feet at the Relegar River, which is also a tributary of the larger river. After crossing the Rankuti River, I continued to ascend higher by walking in a zigzag pattern, slowly leaving behind range after range of mountains beyond the river valley. On the Nepal side, beyond the three nearest ranges, towering snow-capped peaks stood out against the skyline. The highest point along the road was 5450 feet, after which we descended to 5275 feet at Khela Daramsalla, which we didn't reach until late at night.

Near Khela on the top of a high mountain stood a tall quadrangular rock not unlike a tower. The natives say that a mere touch causes it to shake and revolve, but this belief is not general, for others deny that it ever moves. I could not spare the time to go and test the facts, nor could I obtain reliable information from any one who had had [34] actual experience. So far as I could see with the aid of my telescope, the rock seemed to be standing firmly on a very solid base. To my regret also, I was unable to visit the curious hot sulphur springs on the Darma Ganga, and the strange cave in which much animal life is lost owing to the noxious gases rising from the ground. I gathered from various reports that this cave or grotto is packed with skeletons of birds and quadrupeds who have unknowingly entered this chamber of death.

Near Khela, on top of a high mountain, there was a tall, square rock that looked a lot like a tower. The locals say that just touching it makes it shake and spin, but not everyone believes that; some people insist it never moves. I didn’t have the time to go check it out for myself, and I also couldn't find anyone who had reliable information from actual experience. As far as I could tell with my telescope, the rock appeared to be standing firmly on a solid base. Unfortunately, I also couldn't make it to the interesting hot sulfur springs on the Darma Ganga or the peculiar cave where a lot of animal life is lost due to the toxic gases coming from the ground. I gathered from various reports that this cave or grotto is filled with the skeletons of birds and mammals that have unknowingly wandered into this deadly place.


[35]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER VI

Highways and trade routes—The Darma route—The Dholi River—A rough track connecting two valleys—Glaciers—Three ranges and their peaks—Altitudes—Darma, Johar, and the Painkhanda Parganas—The highest peak in the British Empire—Natural boundaries.

There are two principal highways from Khela to Hundes: one by the valley of the Dholi or Darma River, the other along the Kali River and over the Lippu Pass.

There are two main highways from Khela to Hundes: one through the valley of the Dholi or Darma River, and the other along the Kali River and over the Lippu Pass.

View of the Himahlyas—showing Nanda Devi and Trisul Peaks

View of the Himalayas—showing Nanda Devi and Trisul Peaks


The trade route viâ Darma is less frequented than the one by the Lippu, but it is nevertheless of considerable importance, inasmuch as a certain portion of the trade of South-west Tibet with India is carried on through the medium of the Darma Shokas. It consists mainly of borax, salt, wool, skins, cloth, and utensils, in exchange for which the Tibetans take silver, wheat, rice, satoo, ghur, lump candied sugar, pepper, beads of all kinds, and articles of Indian manufacture. For a mountain track, and considering the altitudes to which it rises, the Darma way is comparatively good and safe, notwithstanding that in following upwards the course of the Dholi River the narrow path in many places overhangs deep ravines and precipices. There are many Shoka villages and settlements on the banks of the stream, the most important ones being the Nyu, Sobala, Sela, Nagling (9520 feet), Bahling (10,230 feet), Sona and Tuktung (10,630 feet), Dansu and Yansu, where there is a bridge. On the north-east bank is Goa, facing Dakar, and farther up, at an elevation of 10,400 feet, the Lissar, a rapid tributary with muddy water.

The trade route via Darma sees less traffic than the one through Lippu, but it remains very important since part of the trade between South-west Tibet and India goes through the Darma Shokas. The main goods traded include borax, salt, wool, skins, cloth, and utensils, which the Tibetans exchange for silver, wheat, rice, satoo, ghur, lump candied sugar, pepper, various beads, and items made in India. For a mountain path, and given the high altitudes it reaches, the Darma route is relatively good and safe, even though parts of the narrow trail along the Dholi River often hang over steep ravines and cliffs. There are numerous Shoka villages and settlements along the riverbanks, with the most significant ones being Nyu, Sobala, Sela, Nagling (9,520 feet), Bahling (10,230 feet), Sona, and Tuktung (10,630 feet), as well as Dansu and Yansu, where there is a bridge. On the north-east bank is Goa, facing Dakar, and further up, at an elevation of 10,400 feet, is the Lissar, a fast, muddy tributary.

The Dholi springs from a series of comparatively small glaciers north-east of a range forming a branch of the higher Himahlyan chain, and extending in a south-easterly direction as far as the point where the two streams meet. It receives, [36] on its precipitous descent, many small snow-fed tributaries, those from the Katz snowfields and the Nui glacier being the most important. Its way lies in a tortuous channel amidst rocks and ravines, first tending towards the South-East, then due South, and last South-West down to the point where it is joined by the Lissar, coming from the North-West along a line almost parallel on the opposite watershed of the range.

The Dholi comes from a series of relatively small glaciers located northeast of a range that is part of the higher Himalayan chain, stretching in a southeast direction until the point where the two streams converge. As it rushes down, it picks up many small snow-fed tributaries, with the ones from the Katz snowfields and the Nui glacier being the most significant. Its path winds through rocks and ravines, initially heading southeast, then straight south, and finally southwest until it meets the Lissar, which flows in from the northwest along a line that is almost parallel with the opposite watershed of the range.

Darma Shokas and Tibetans

Dharma Shokas and Tibetans


Tyang, Sipu (11,400 feet), and Marcha (10,890 feet), are the three most important Shoka villages on the Lissar.

Tyang, Sipu (11,400 feet), and Marcha (10,890 feet) are the three most important Shoka villages in the Lissar.

From Marcha there is a track connecting the valleys of the Lissar and Gori. You ascend the high mountain range west of the Lissar by skirting the northern edge of the Nipchung Kang glacier and keeping south of the Kharsa glacier, and, on a route that is unpopular on account of its constant difficulties and perils, you pass, as you descend in a westerly direction, the Tertcha glacier. South of the Shun Kalpa glacier you reach first Ralem and then Sumdu, which is situated on a tributary of the Gori River, itself a tributary

From Marcha, there's a path that connects the valleys of the Lissar and Gori. You climb the high mountain range west of the Lissar by going around the northern edge of the Nipchung Kang glacier and staying south of the Kharsa glacier. This route, which is avoided because of its constant challenges and dangers, takes you past the Tertcha glacier as you head downwards to the west. South of the Shun Kalpa glacier, you first reach Ralem, and then Sumdu, which is located on a tributary of the Gori River, itself a tributary.

[37]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

View of the Himahlyas. Showing Nanda Devi and Trisul Peaks.

View of the Himalayas. Showing Nanda Devi and Trisul Peaks.


[38] of the Kali. The rugged, barren chain of mountains separating the Gori from the Lissar extends in a general direction from S.S.E. to N.N.E. up to the Ralfo glacier, and there turns in a curve North-West among a succession of perpetual snow-fields and glaciers. The glaciers to the North-East and East of the range outnumber those on the West, but there is one of importance called in its different sections the Kala Baland, the Shun Kalpa, and the Tertcha. There are, along the fifteen most northerly miles of the range, south of the point where it joins the Himahlyan chain, other glaciers of considerable size and importance, but I was not able to ascertain their names, excepting that of the Lissar seva, the most northern of all, forming the source of the Lissar. The inter-Lissar-Gori range is of considerable geographical importance, not only because it forms the boundary between the two parts of Bhot called Darma and Johar, but also because of the magnificent peaks reaching in the Bambadhura an elevation of 20,760 feet, and in a higher unnamed peak, South-East of it, 21,470 feet. There are also the two Kharsa peaks, the one North-West of the glacier bearing its name being 19,650 feet, the one South-West of it slightly over 20,900 feet, and S.S.W. one peak 21,360 feet, another 21,520 feet, and farther still, North of the Telkot glacier, the highest of all, 22,660 feet. In a South-East direction there are peaks 20,700 feet, 20,783 feet, and 21,114 feet high. At the point where the ridge turns South the elevations become lower, the two highest being 19,923 feet and 19,814 feet, the latter situated at the point where a smaller range branches off to the South-East, the principal range running South for the next eleven or twelve miles, with no very remarkable elevations. In the side range there are peaks of 18,280 feet, 17,062 feet, 14,960 feet, 14,960 feet respectively.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] of the Kali. The rough, barren mountain range separating the Gori from the Lissar runs generally from S.S.E. to N.N.E. up to the Ralfo glacier, then curves northwest through a series of permanent snowfields and glaciers. The glaciers to the north-east and east of the range outnumber those to the west, but one major glacier is significant, known in its different sections as the Kala Baland, the Shun Kalpa, and the Tertcha. Along the fifteen northernmost miles of the range, south of where it meets the Himalayan chain, there are other glaciers of notable size, but I couldn’t find out their names, except for the Lissar seva, which is the northernmost and forms the source of the Lissar. The inter-Lissar-Gori range is geographically important, not just because it divides the two parts of Bhot called Darma and Johar, but also due to the impressive peaks, with Bambadhura reaching 20,760 feet, and a higher unnamed peak southeast of it at 21,470 feet. Additionally, there are two Kharsa peaks: the one northwest of the glacier carrying its name stands at 19,650 feet, while the one southwest of it is slightly over 20,900 feet, and to the S.S.W. are peaks at 21,360 feet, 21,520 feet, and further north of the Telkot glacier, the highest of all, at 22,660 feet. In a southeast direction, there are peaks of 20,700 feet, 20,783 feet, and 21,114 feet. Where the ridge turns south, the elevations decrease, with the two highest being 19,923 feet and 19,814 feet, the latter located where a smaller range branches off to the southeast, while the main range runs south for the next eleven or twelve miles without any particularly notable heights. In the side range, there are peaks at 18,280 feet, 17,062 feet, and 14,960 feet, respectively.

In Lat. 29° 59′ 10″ N. and Long. 80° 31′ 45″ E. the range again separates into two secondary ridges, one extending South-East, the other South-West, and in turn both these are again subdivided into minor hill ridges, along which no summits are found surpassing 13,000 feet, except the Basili, 13,244 feet.

In latitude 29° 59′ 10″ N and longitude 80° 31′ 45″ E, the range splits again into two secondary ridges—one extending southeast and the other southwest. Both of these are further divided into smaller hill ridges, with no peaks exceeding 13,000 feet, except for Basili, which is at 13,244 feet.

The Bungadhura Mountain (9037 feet), in close proximity to Khela, terminates the South-Easterly division of the range, separating the Pargana of Darma from that of Askote. The actual boundary line, however, does not follow the higher mountain range as far as the Kali River, but swerves to the south along the ridge overlooking the valley of the River Relegar. These mountains are called the Mangthil.

The Bungadhura Mountain (9,037 feet), near Khela, marks the end of the southeastern part of the range, dividing the Pargana of Darma from Askote. However, the actual boundary line doesn't follow the high mountain range all the way to the Kali River; instead, it curves south along the ridge that overlooks the valley of the River Relegar. These mountains are known as the Mangthil.

[39] There is west of the above ridge a second and even more important chain, running out parallel to it from the backbone of the Himahlyan great mountain system. This second ridge contains the highest mountain in the British Empire, Nanda Devi (25,660 feet) with its second peak (24,380 feet), also Trisul (23,406 feet), East Trisul (22,360 feet), and Nanda Kot (22,530 feet). This range and its ramifications divide the valleys of the Gori River (the Pargana of Johar) from the most Western portion of Bhot, the Painkhanda Pargana.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] To the west of the ridge mentioned above, there’s a second, even more significant mountain range that runs parallel to it, extending from the backbone of the Himalayas. This second ridge is home to the highest mountain in the British Empire, Nanda Devi (25,660 feet), along with its second peak (24,380 feet), as well as Trisul (23,406 feet), East Trisul (22,360 feet), and Nanda Kot (22,530 feet). This range and its branches separate the valleys of the Gori River (the Pargana of Johar) from the far western part of Bhot, the Painkhanda Pargana.

The well-known Milam and Pindari glaciers are one on the Eastern, the other on the South-West side of this range. The Milam highway to Tibet, frequented by the Johari traders, traverses over the Kungribingri Pass (18,300 feet), and the Uttadhura (17,590 feet) directly S.S.W. of it into Hundes.

The famous Milam and Pindari glaciers are located on the Eastern and South-West sides of this mountain range. The Milam highway to Tibet, often used by the Johari traders, goes over the Kungribingri Pass (18,300 feet) and the Uttadhura (17,590 feet) directly S.S.W. of it into Hundes.

The Pargana Painkhanda, a region equally Alpine, similarly covered with vast stretches of perpetual snow and extensive glaciers, is in the North-East corner of Garwhal, bordering on Tibet, and along the Dhauli River; intersecting it, another trade route finds its way into Western Tibet by the Niti Pass. Leaving the course of the Dhauli at Jelam (10,100 feet), this track proceeds almost due east, rising to an altitude of 16,600 feet on the Niti, in Lat. 30° 57′ 59″ N. and Long. 79° 55′ 3″ E., which is, from all accounts, a very easy pass, and quite free from snow during the summer months. The people of the Painkhanda Pargana use this pass as well as the other passes of Malla Shilanch and Tumzun, besides the Shorhoti, visited by H. R. Strachey some years ago, over which, however, only a small portion of the trade with Hundes is carried, for it is considered the most dangerous of the three. The cold and turbid waters of the Dhauli, swollen by dozens of equally foaming and muddy tributaries, become ultimately the sacred waters of the Ganges.

The Pargana Painkhanda, a region that's quite alpine, is similarly blanketed in vast areas of permanent snow and extensive glaciers. It's located in the northeastern corner of Garwhal, near the border with Tibet, along the Dhauli River. There’s another trade route that connects to western Tibet via the Niti Pass. Leaving the Dhauli's route at Jelam (10,100 feet), this path heads almost directly east, climbing to an altitude of 16,600 feet at the Niti, situated at Lat. 30° 57′ 59″ N. and Long. 79° 55′ 3″ E. Reports suggest that this is a very straightforward pass and generally free of snow during the summer months. The residents of Painkhanda Pargana use this pass, along with the other routes like Malla Shilanch and Tumzun, in addition to the Shorhoti, which H. R. Strachey visited years ago. However, the Shorhoti is used for only a small fraction of the trade with Hundes, as it's regarded as the most dangerous of the three. The cold, murky waters of the Dhauli, swollen by numerous equally turbulent and muddy tributaries, ultimately merge to become the sacred waters of the Ganges.

The three Alpine Parganas, viz., the Painkhanda, Johar, and Darma (Darma, Chaudas, and Bias) are inhabited by races closely allied and akin to those of Tibet proper. The region is collectively named Bhot, although that designation is more particularly applied by the natives of India to that portion of the country which includes Darma, Bias, and Chaudas, and which has for natural boundaries the Kali River to the South-East, separating it from Nepal and the great Himahlyan chain to the North-East, extending from the Lissar Peak in a general direction of about 115°.

The three Alpine Parganas, namely Painkhanda, Johar, and Darma (Darma, Chaudas, and Bias), are home to groups that are closely related to those of Tibet. This area is collectively known as Bhot, although locals in India specifically refer to the part of the region that includes Darma, Bias, and Chaudas. Its natural boundaries are defined by the Kali River to the southeast, which separates it from Nepal, and the great Himalayan range to the northeast, extending from Lissar Peak in a general direction of about 115°.

A ramification leaving the main range at the Darma Pass stretches across from N.N.W. to S.S.E., separating the [40] above-mentioned Darma Ganga from the Kuti River, along which I eventually travelled on my way to Tibet. The main elevations found on this ridge are 18,510 feet on the Darma Pass; north-east of the Rama glacier a peak 20,760 feet; the Gurma Mountain 20,320 feet; and others south of them as high as 20,380 feet, 20,330 feet, 20,260 feet. East of the latter summit is one 20,455 feet.

A branch off the main range at the Darma Pass extends from northwest to southeast, separating the previously mentioned Darma Ganga from the Kuti River, which I eventually followed on my journey to Tibet. The main elevations along this ridge include 18,510 feet at the Darma Pass; northeast of the Rama glacier is a peak at 20,760 feet; Gurma Mountain stands at 20,320 feet; and other peaks to the south reach heights of 20,380 feet, 20,330 feet, and 20,260 feet. East of the latter summit is another peak at 20,455 feet.


[41]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER VII

The word Bhot and its meaning—Tibetan influence—Tibetan abuses—The ever-helpful Chanden Sing—The first Shoka village—Chanden Sing in disgrace—Weaving-loom—Fabrics—All's well that ends well!

The name Bhot, pronounced Bod, Pote, Tüpöt, or Taipöt, by which this inter-Alpine region is called, means Tibet. In fact Tibet is probably merely a corruption of Tüpöt. These lofty "pattis" of Darma, Bias, and Chaudas nominally form part of the British Empire, our geographical boundary with Nari Khorsum or Hundes (Great Tibet), being the main Himahlyan chain forming the watershed between the two countries. In spite of this actual territorial right, I found at the time of my visit in 1897 that it was impossible not to agree with the natives in asserting that British prestige and protection in those regions were mere myths; that Tibetan influence alone was dominant and prevailing, and Tibetan law enforced and feared. The natives invariably showed abject obsequiousness and servile submission to Tibetans, being at the same time compelled to display actual disrespect to British officials. They were driven to bring the greater number of civil and criminal cases before Tibetan magistrates in preference to having them tried in a British court.

The name Bhot, pronounced Bod, Pote, Tüpöt, or Taipöt, refers to Tibet. In fact, Tibet is probably just a mispronunciation of Tüpöt. These high "pattis" of Darma, Bias, and Chaudas technically belong to the British Empire, with our geographical border with Nari Khorsum or Hundes (Great Tibet) being the main Himalayan mountain range that forms the watershed between the two countries. Despite this territorial claim, during my visit in 1897, I found it hard to disagree with the locals who insisted that British prestige and protection in these areas were just myths; that Tibetan influence was the only real power, and Tibetan law was enforced and feared. The locals consistently displayed extreme obsequiousness and servile submission to Tibetans, while feeling compelled to show actual disrespect toward British officials. They were pushed to bring most civil and criminal cases before Tibetan magistrates rather than having them heard in a British court.

The Tibetans, in fact, openly claimed possession of the "pattis" bordering on Nari Khorsum; and the more obviously to impress our natives with their influence as superior to British, they came over to hibernate on our side, and made themselves quite at home in the warmer valleys and in the larger bazaars. They brought their families with them, and drove before them thousands and thousands of sheep to graze on our pasture-lands; they gradually destroyed our forests in Bias to supply South-[42]Western Tibet with fuel for the summer months. For this they not only paid nothing, but our native subjects had to convey the timber over the high passes without remuneration. Necessarily such unprincipled task-masters did not draw the line at extorting from our natives under any pretence money, food, clothes, and everything else they could possibly levy. Some were known to travel yearly as far south as Lucknow, Calcutta, and Bombay.

The Tibetans openly claimed ownership of the "pattis" next to Nari Khorsum; and to impress our locals with their authority as superior to the British, they crossed over to hibernate on our side, making themselves quite comfortable in the warmer valleys and bigger markets. They brought their families along and drove thousands of sheep to graze on our pastures; they gradually stripped our forests in Bias to supply South-Western Tibet with firewood for the summer. For this, they not only paid nothing, but our local people had to transport the timber over the high passes without any compensation. Naturally, these unscrupulous taskmasters didn't hesitate to extort money, food, clothing, and anything else they could from our locals under any pretext. Some were known to travel as far south as Lucknow, Calcutta, and Bombay each year.

Shoka Weavers

Shoka Weavers


So much for the gentleness of the Tibetans—a hermit nation living in a closed country!

So much for the kindness of the Tibetans—a secluded nation in a closed-off country!

Chanden Sing, ever anxious to be polite and helpful, would not hear of my carrying my own sketch and note books as had always been my custom, but insisted on doing so himself.

Chanden Sing, always eager to be polite and helpful, wouldn't let me carry my own sketch and notebooks like I usually did, but insisted on carrying them himself.

"Hum pagal neh!" ("I am no fool!") said he with an expression of wounded feelings. "I will take great care of them."

"I'm no fool!" he said with a look of hurt feelings. "I will take great care of them."

We started up the steep road, having first descended to the level of the River Dholi, 800 feet lower than Khela, [43] crossing by a wooden bridge. The zigzag up the mountain-side seemed endless. Here and there a cool spring of crystal water quenched our thirst, welcome indeed on that tedious ascent in the broiling sun. Six miles above Khela we had risen to 7120 feet, and from this point the incline became less trying. Still we rose to 7450 feet two miles farther on, where under the shade of some magnificent old trees, at Pungo, I halted for lunch. We had entered the first inhabited village of the Shokas, visually but erroneously called Botiyas, and were now in that part of their country called Chaudas.

We started up the steep road after first heading down to the level of the River Dholi, which is 800 feet lower than Khela, crossing over a wooden bridge. The zigzag path up the mountainside felt never-ending. Every now and then, a cool spring of crystal-clear water quenched our thirst, which was so welcome during that tiring climb in the blazing sun. Six miles above Khela, we reached an elevation of 7,120 feet, and from there, the incline became easier. However, we still climbed to 7,450 feet two miles later, where I stopped for lunch in the shade of some magnificent old trees at Pungo. We had entered the first inhabited village of the Shokas, misleadingly referred to as Botiyas, and we were now in the area of their country called Chaudas.

A pleasant surprise awaited me. A smart-looking lad in European clothes came boldly forward, and, stretching out his hand, shook mine for some considerable time in a jovial and friendly fashion.

A nice surprise was in store for me. A well-dressed young man in European clothes stepped forward confidently and, extending his hand, shook mine for quite a while in a cheerful and friendly way.

"I am a Christian," said he.

"I'm a Christian," he said.

"I should say that you were by the way you shake hands."

"I have to mention that you can tell a lot about someone by the way they shake hands."

"Yes, sir," he proceeded. "I have prepared for you some milk, some chapatis (native bread), and some nuts. Please accept them."

"Yes, sir," he continued. "I've prepared some milk, some chapatis (local bread), and some nuts for you. Please enjoy them."

"Thank you," I said. "You do not seem to be a bad Christian. What is your name?"

"Thanks," I said. "You don't seem like a bad Christian. What's your name?"

"Master G. B. Walter, sir. I teach in the school."

"Master G. B. Walter, sir. I teach at the school."

A crowd of Shokas had collected. Their first shyness having worn off, they proved to be polite and kind. The naïve nature and graceful manner of the Shoka girls struck me particularly on this my first introduction to them. Much less shy than the men, they came forward, and joked and laughed as if they had known me all their lives. I wished to sketch two or three of the more attractive.

A crowd of Shokas had gathered. Once their initial shyness faded, they turned out to be polite and friendly. The naïve nature and graceful demeanor of the Shoka girls really stood out to me during my first meeting with them. Much less timid than the men, they approached me, joking and laughing as if they had known me forever. I wanted to sketch two or three of the more appealing ones.

"Where is my book, Chanden Sing?" I inquired of my bearer.

"Where's my book, Chanden Sing?" I asked my bearer.

"Hazur hum mallum neh!" ("I do not know, sir!") was his melancholy answer as he searched his empty pockets.

"Hazur hum mallum neh!" ("I do not know, sir!") was his sad reply as he rummaged through his empty pockets.

"Ah! you villain! Is that the care you take of my notes and sketches? What have you done with them?"

"Ah! you jerk! Is that how much you care about my notes and sketches? What did you do with them?"

"Oh Sahib, I drank some water at the Dholi River. I had the book then in my hand. I must have left it on a stone when I stooped to drink water from the stream," the wretched man explained.

"Oh Sir, I drank some water at the Dholi River. I had the book in my hand back then. I must have left it on a stone when I bent down to drink from the stream," the miserable man explained.

It is hardly necessary to say that Chanden Sing was promptly despatched to the spot he had named, with strict orders not to appear before me again without the book. [44] I spent two or three pleasant hours in having the primitive Shoka weaving-looms, the processes of spinning and cloth manufacture, explained to me. As can be seen from the illustration on p. 42, the weaving looms of the Shokas are in every way similar to those used by the Tibetans proper, and are quite simple in construction. The warp is kept at great tension, and the cloth-beam on which the woven tissue is rolled rests on the woman's lap during the process of weaving. There are no treadles in the Shoka loom, by which the two sets of warp threads are alternately raised or depressed between each time that the transverse thread is passed, and all work is done by hand. The transverse thread is beaten firmly home by means of a heavy prismatic piece of wood. The material used in weaving is yak or sheep's wool, either in its natural colour or dyed in the primary colours of red and blue and yellow, and one secondary only, green. Blue and red are used in the greater and equal proportion; then green. Yellow is very parsimoniously used. The thread is well twisted and is subjected to no preparation before spinning, leaving thus a certain greasiness in the closely-woven material that renders it waterproof. In weaving colour fabrics several shuttles are used.

It’s hardly necessary to say that Chanden Sing was quickly sent to the location he mentioned, with strict instructions not to return to me without the book. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] I spent two or three enjoyable hours learning about the basic Shoka weaving looms and the processes of spinning and cloth manufacturing. As seen in the illustration on p. 42, the weaving looms of the Shokas are very similar to those used by the Tibetans and are quite simple in design. The warp is kept under great tension, and the cloth beam, where the woven fabric is rolled, rests on the woman’s lap during weaving. There are no treadles in the Shoka loom to alternate the two sets of warp threads, which are manually raised or lowered each time the cross thread is passed through, with all the work done by hand. The cross thread is firmly beaten into place with a heavy prismatic piece of wood. The material used for weaving is yak or sheep's wool, either in its natural color or dyed in primary colors of red, blue, and yellow, along with one secondary color, green. Blue and red are used in greater and equal amounts, then green. Yellow is used very sparingly. The thread is tightly twisted and isn’t prepared before spinning, which gives the closely woven material a certain greasiness that makes it waterproof. When weaving colored fabrics, multiple shuttles are used.

Shoka women are very adept at this ancient art, and they patiently sit out of doors day after day weaving most intricate and artistic patterns. These coloured tissues, if we except the simpler ones with blue ground and lines for women's garments, are usually very narrow (about seven inches in width), whereas the less elaborate ones, such as the white material of which men's clothes are made, average sixteen inches.

Shoka women are really skilled at this ancient craft, and they patiently sit outside day after day creating intricate and artistic patterns. These colorful fabrics, except for the simpler ones with a blue background and stripes for women's clothing, are typically quite narrow (about seven inches wide), while the less complex ones, like the white material used for men's clothing, average sixteen inches.

The patterns in these many-coloured materials are woven from memory, and do not contain curves or circles, but are entirely composed of lines and angles, combinations of small lozenges and squares separated by long tri-coloured parallel lines, forming, so far as weaving is concerned, the main Shoka ideas of decoration and ornament. The fabrics are extraordinarily strong. The narrow coloured cloth of better quality is used mostly for making bags in which money and food are carried; the coarser kind for the double sheep-loads.

The patterns in these colorful materials are created from memory, featuring no curves or circles, only lines and angles, made up of small diamonds and squares divided by long tri-colored parallel lines, representing the main Shoka concepts of decoration and ornament in weaving. The fabrics are incredibly strong. The narrower, higher-quality colored cloth is mainly used for making bags to carry money and food; the rougher type is used for double sheep loads.

The more talented of the Shoka young women show much ingenuity in carpet or rather rug making. They have copied the idea from old Chinese rugs which have found their way here viâ Lhassa, and though upon close examination it is true they differ considerably in quality and manufacture, they are pleasing enough to the eye. These rugs are woven [45] upon coarse thread matting, the coloured material being let in vertically. A soft surface is obtained not unlike in general appearance to that of Persian carpets, but not quite so pleasant to the touch. These small rectangular rugs are offered in the house of Shoka gentlemen to guests to sit on, and are also used to render the Tibetan saddles less uncomfortable.

The more skilled young women of Shoka show a lot of creativity in making carpets, or rather rugs. They've taken inspiration from traditional Chinese rugs that arrived here through Lhassa. While it's true that they vary quite a bit in quality and craftsmanship upon closer inspection, they still look quite nice. These rugs are woven on coarse thread matting, with the colored material inserted vertically. The surface is soft and somewhat resembles Persian carpets, although it’s not as nice to the touch. These small rectangular rugs are offered to guests in Shoka homes for sitting, and they are also used to make Tibetan saddles a bit more comfortable.

As time went on I became very anxious as to the missing book, for it contained all my notes of the journey. The thought of its being deposited on a rock washed by a rapid stream into which it might easily slip and be carried away kept me in a state of suspense. At last a staggering figure approached; it was Chanden Sing waving the book triumphantly in the air. He had run the distance of many miles down to the river and back so quickly that when he reached me he was utterly exhausted. He handed me the book, and once more we started, followed by Walter and the whole community, down the steep incline to the river. At this place some of the Shokas seized my hands and placed them on their foreheads, at the same time making deep bows. Others embraced my feet, while the women folks bade me the usual Hindustani "Acha giao" ("Go well").

As time passed, I became really anxious about the missing book because it had all my notes from the journey. The idea that it could be left on a rock by a fast-moving stream, easily slipping away, kept me on edge. Finally, a wobbly figure appeared; it was Chanden Sing, waving the book triumphantly in the air. He had sprinted several miles to the river and back so quickly that he was completely worn out when he reached me. He handed me the book, and we set off again, followed by Walter and the whole community, down the steep slope to the river. At this spot, some of the Shokas took my hands and placed them on their foreheads, bowing deeply. Others touched my feet, while the women wished me the usual Hindustani "Acha giao" ("Go well").

After some time had been wasted, or at least spent, in receiving these odd salutations, I persuaded them to retrace their steps, and they left me.

After wasting some time, or at least spending it, on these strange greetings, I convinced them to turn back, and they left me.


[46]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER VIII

Prayer by wind-power—Photography under difficulties—A night of misery—Drying up—Two lady missionaries—Their valuable work—An interesting dinner party—An "eccentric" man's tea party.
Shrine and Flying Prayers
Shrine and Flying Prayers

To reach Shosha I had to climb a further three miles, which proved almost as steep as the previous ascent to Pungo.

To reach Shosha, I had to climb another three miles, which was almost as steep as the earlier climb to Pungo.

A curious custom of praying by wind-power, probably borrowed from the Tibetans, prevails among the Shokas. The Tibetans, with a more intense religion than the Shokas, use for this purpose not only the wind but even water to propel their praying machines. Let me explain these simple mechanical contrivances for prayers. One or more rags or pieces of cloth, usually white, but on occasions red or blue, are fastened and hung by one end to a string stretched across a road, a pass, or a path. On crossing a pass for the first time Shokas invariably cut a strip of cloth and place it so that it will flap in the breeze. Also when materials for a [47] new dress are purchased or manufactured, it is customary for them to tear off a narrow strip of the stuff and make a flying prayer of it. As long as there is motion in it there is prayer, so that the natives tie them very fast to sticks, poles, or branches of trees; and certain shrubs and trees in weird romantic spots on the mountains are covered with these religious signs. Moreover, on the top of nearly every Shoka dwelling a vast number of similar little flags can be seen, as well as near their shrines and at the outer gates of a village.

A curious custom of praying using the wind, likely borrowed from the Tibetans, is common among the Shokas. The Tibetans, who have a more intense form of religion than the Shokas, use both wind and water to operate their prayer machines. Let me explain these simple mechanical devices for prayers. One or more rags or pieces of cloth, usually white but sometimes red or blue, are attached and hung by one end to a string stretched across a road, a pass, or a path. When crossing a pass for the first time, Shokas always cut a strip of cloth and hang it so that it flaps in the breeze. Additionally, when materials for a [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] new outfit are bought or made, it's customary for them to tear off a narrow strip of the fabric and create a flying prayer from it. As long as it’s moving, there’s prayer, so the locals tie them securely to sticks, poles, or tree branches; and certain shrubs and trees in unusual, romantic spots on the mountains are covered with these religious symbols. Furthermore, on the roof of almost every Shoka home, you can see a large number of these little flags, as well as near their shrines and at the village entrances.

I put up at the Titela Daramsalla, one mile above Shosha village. The weather had been threatening for several days, and a steady downpour came upon us during the evening. Work had been accumulating daily. I decided to develop the large number of plates I had taken on my journey, a job hateful beyond measure when you are on the move. Having duly unpacked all the developing dishes and prepared the different solutions, I set to work to make the shelter completely dark. The next important item required was water, and of this there was plenty in that wretched shanty! I had just developed half-a-dozen negatives, and was delighted at the excellent results, when, in consequence of the storm having grown more violent, the rain began dripping on my head through the leaky roof of the Daramsalla. To move all the trays of developers, baths, and fixing solution would have been a nuisance; besides, I was too interested in my work to be put out by such small trifles, so I patiently stood this new discomfort. I shifted my position continually, merely with the result that the rain dripped alternately on my back, my legs, or my shoulders, according to my position. It fell in torrents, and the roof over me was so leaky that I might as well have been out in the open. I was sitting in a pool of water and could not lay my hands upon anything that was not drenched. Fortunately my boxes and cases were water-tight, or all the instruments and plates would have been damaged.

I stayed at the Titela Daramsalla, a mile above Shosha village. The weather had been looking bad for several days, and a steady downpour hit us that evening. Work had been piling up daily. I decided to develop the many plates I had taken on my trip, a task that’s incredibly frustrating when you’re on the go. After unpacking all the developing trays and preparing the different solutions, I got to work making the space completely dark. The next crucial thing I needed was water, and there was plenty of it in that miserable shanty! I had just developed half a dozen negatives and was thrilled with the great results when, due to the storm getting worse, rain started dripping on my head through the leaky roof of the Daramsalla. Moving all the trays of developers, baths, and fixing solution would have been annoying; besides, I was too focused on my work to let such small things bother me, so I patiently dealt with this new discomfort. I kept shifting my position, which only resulted in the rain dripping alternately on my back, legs, or shoulders, depending on how I sat. It poured down, and the roof above me was so leaky that I might as well have been outside. I was sitting in a pool of water and couldn’t find anything that wasn’t soaked. Luckily, my boxes and cases were waterproof, or all my instruments and plates would have been ruined.

Annoying as it was, I had to give up work. The best thing to do was to go to sleep. Easier said than done. My bedding and blanket were soaked. The attempts to lie under a waterproof sheet failed, for I felt suffocated, so I passed the cover to my servant, who, rolling himself in it, was soon in the arms of Morpheus. Tired and disgusted, I crouched myself up and eventually fell asleep. I woke up in the morning with a biting pain in my toes. I had been lying face downwards, and had involuntarily stretched my legs during the night. I discovered to my horror that one [48] foot rested in the developing bath and the other in the fixing solution, which I had forgotten to empty out of the large celluloid trays.

As annoying as it was, I had to quit working. The best thing to do was go to sleep. Easier said than done. My bedding and blanket were soaked. Trying to lie under a waterproof sheet didn’t work because I felt suffocated, so I gave the cover to my servant, who wrapped himself in it and was soon fast asleep. Tired and frustrated, I curled up and eventually dozed off. I woke up in the morning with a sharp pain in my toes. I had been lying face down and had inadvertently stretched my legs during the night. To my horror, I found that one foot was in the developing bath and the other in the fixing solution, which I had forgotten to empty from the large celluloid trays.

The morning was spent in drying up things in the sun, including our clothes, while we, clad in a "doti" (large loin-cloth as used by the natives of India), squatted down in the warmth in order to restore our saturated skins to their natural condition.

The morning was spent drying things in the sun, including our clothes, while we, dressed in a "doti" (large loin-cloth worn by the natives of India), squatted in the warmth to get our soaked skin back to its normal state.

I was in the meantime interviewed by many Shokas, applying for medicines, and wishing to sell their native wares.

I was interviewed by many Shokas in the meantime, asking for medicines and hoping to sell their local goods.

A pretty girl, from whom I bought a curious set of neck hangings made of musk-deer teeth, wished to be cured of the goître, a complaint too common, alas! on these hills. Then a child was brought with a nasty tumour in a state of suppuration inside his left ear. Others wished to be cured of pains in the stomach and liver, which are very general among them owing to their abuse of liquor.

A pretty girl, from whom I bought an interesting set of neck hangings made of musk-deer teeth, wanted to be treated for the goiter, a condition that, unfortunately, is quite common in these hills. Then, a child was brought in with a nasty tumor that's been festering inside his left ear. Others were looking for relief from stomach and liver pains, which are quite widespread among them due to their excessive drinking.

Upon hearing that two lady missionaries lived a mile and a half farther on, at Sirka, I gave myself the pleasure of calling upon them. They possessed a nice bungalow at an elevation of 8900 feet above sea level, by the side of which was another structure for the accommodation of converts and servants. Lower on the hillside they had built a dispensary and hospital.

Upon hearing that two female missionaries lived a mile and a half further on, at Sirka, I took the opportunity to visit them. They had a nice bungalow at an elevation of 8,900 feet above sea level, next to which was another building for the accommodation of converts and staff. Lower on the hillside, they had constructed a dispensary and hospital.

Wrinkled Shoka

Wrinkled Shoka


I was received with the utmost courtesy by Miss Sheldon, M.D., and Miss Brown, of the Methodist Episcopal Mission. I have in my lifetime met with many missionaries of all creeds in nearly every part of the globe, but never has it been my luck before to meet two such charming, open-minded, and really hard-working ladies as the two who now so kindly received me.

I was welcomed with great courtesy by Miss Sheldon, M.D., and Miss Brown, from the Methodist Episcopal Mission. Throughout my life, I've encountered many missionaries of various beliefs in almost every corner of the world, but I’ve never had the fortune to meet two such delightful, open-minded, and genuinely dedicated women as those who welcomed me so kindly.

"Come right in, Mr. Landor," said Miss Sheldon with her delightful American accent, and she shook hands with me in a good, hearty fashion.

"Come on in, Mr. Landor," said Miss Sheldon with her charming American accent, and she shook my hand in a warm, friendly way.

The natives had praised to me the charity and helpfulness of this lady. I found this more than justified. By night or day she would never refuse help to the sick, and her deeds of kindness which became [49] known to me are far too numerous to detail in these pages. Perhaps her most valuable quality is her perfect tact—a quality I have found none too common among missionaries. Her patience, her kindly manner towards the Shokas, her good heart, the wonderful cures she wrought among the sick, were items of which these honest mountaineers had everlasting praises to sing. A Shoka was telling me that it was not an uncommon thing for Miss Sheldon to give away all her own food supplies, and even the clothes from her back—courting for herself discomfort, yet happy in her good work.

The locals spoke highly of this lady's generosity and willingness to help. I quickly saw that this was completely true. Whether day or night, she never turned down an opportunity to assist the sick, and her acts of kindness, which I learned about, are way too many to list here. Perhaps her best quality is her perfect tact—a trait I haven't found much among missionaries. Her patience, her friendly demeanor towards the Shokas, her compassionate nature, and the incredible healings she performed on the sick earned her endless praise from these sincere mountaineers. A Shoka told me that it wasn't unusual for Miss Sheldon to give away all her food supplies and even the clothes off her back—putting herself in discomfort, yet finding joy in her good work.

With it was combined a charming modesty. No word about herself or her actions ever passed her lips. A pioneer in these parts, she evidently must have encountered much difficulty in the beginning. At present her good influence over the Shokas is very considerable. The same can be said of Miss Brown, who was in every way a worthy comrade of Miss Sheldon.

With it came a lovely sense of modesty. She never spoke about herself or her actions. As a pioneer in this area, she must have faced a lot of challenges at first. Right now, her positive impact on the Shokas is quite significant. The same goes for Miss Brown, who was in every way a deserving companion of Miss Sheldon.

Lal Sing Tokudar and his Brother

Lal Sing Tokudar and His Brother


They have both in a comparatively short time become fully acquainted with the Shoka language, and can converse in it as fluently as in English, this fact alone endearing them greatly to the natives.

They have both quickly become fully fluent in the Shoka language and can speak it as easily as they do English, which has made them very popular with the locals.

They were kind enough to ask me to dinner. "It is Sunday," said Miss Sheldon, "and we shall have all our Christians dining with us. You will not mind, I am sure."

They were nice enough to invite me to dinner. "It's Sunday," Miss Sheldon said, "and we’ll have all our Christian friends dining with us. You won’t mind, I'm sure."

I assured her that nothing would interest me more.

I promised her that nothing would interest me more.

I arrived punctually at the hour appointed, and on the verandah of the bungalow were laid some nice clean mats upon which we all sat cross-legged in native fashion. We three Europeans were provided with knife and fork, but all the natives helped themselves with their fingers, which they used with much dexterity. There were among the converts some Hindoos, some Shokas, some Humlis, and a Tibetan [50] woman. All counted, I suppose they were about twenty, and it would be impossible to find a better behaved set of Christians anywhere. They ate heartily and only spoke when they were spoken to.

I arrived right on time, and on the porch of the bungalow were some nice clean mats where we all sat cross-legged like the locals. The three of us Europeans were given a knife and fork, but the locals used their fingers to eat, and they did it with impressive skill. Among the converts were some Hindus, some Shokas, some Humlis, and a Tibetan woman. All together, there were about twenty of them, and you couldn’t find a better-behaved group of Christians anywhere. They ate enthusiastically and only spoke when addressed.

"I doubt whether I have ever dined with so many good Christians," said I jokingly to Miss Sheldon. "It is delightful."

"I don't think I've ever had dinner with so many good Christians," I joked with Miss Sheldon. "It's wonderful."

"They would much like to hear some of the experiences of your travels if you would be kind enough to tell them. That is to say, if you are not too tired and do not mind."

"They would really like to hear about some of your travel experiences if you would be nice enough to share. That is, if you’re not too tired and don’t mind."

Interpreted by Miss Brown, I related some of my adventures in the country of the Ainu. Rarely have I had such an interested audience. When the story ended they all salaamed me, and an old veteran Gourkha, one of the converts, took my hand and shook it warmly.

Interpreted by Miss Brown, I shared some of my experiences in Ainu country. I’ve rarely had such an engaged audience. When the story wrapped up, they all bowed to me, and an old veteran Gurkha, one of the converts, took my hand and shook it warmly.

"You must not mind, Mr. Landor: you see, we treat our Christians like ourselves,"[4] quickly interrupted Miss Sheldon.

"You shouldn't take offense, Mr. Landor: you see, we treat our Christians like we treat ourselves," [4] quickly interrupted Miss Sheldon.

"Oh no, I do not mind," I replied. "On the contrary, I am glad to see it done."

"Oh no, I don't mind," I replied. "Actually, I'm happy to see it done."

I took my leave and asked the ladies to come to tea with me the next day. The afternoon came and they arrived, when to my horror it flashed across my mind that I had neither cups, nor saucers, nor spoons. I had some tea, but I had no idea in which box it was, and to save my life I could not lay my hands upon it. This caused a frank and delightful remark on the part of Miss Sheldon to Miss Brown.

I said goodbye and invited the ladies to join me for tea the next day. When the afternoon came, they arrived, and to my shock, I suddenly realized I had no cups, no saucers, and no spoons. I had some tea, but I had no clue which box it was in, and no matter how hard I tried, I couldn’t find it. This led to a candid and charming comment from Miss Sheldon to Miss Brown.

"Does not Mr. Landor remind you of 'that other' eccentric gentleman that came through here last year?"

"Doesn't Mr. Landor remind you of 'that other' quirky guy who came through here last year?"

The moment she had uttered the words Miss Sheldon saw what she had said, and we all laughed heartily.

The moment she said those words, Miss Sheldon realized what she had just said, and we all burst out laughing.

"You know, Mr. Landor," put in Miss Brown, "we half foresaw that you would not be provided with these articles of luxury, and we brought our own cups and saucers."

"You know, Mr. Landor," added Miss Brown, "we kind of expected that you wouldn't have these luxury items, so we brought our own cups and saucers."

The news was a great relief to me.

The news was a huge relief to me.

"Well now, let me persuade you to take some delicious chocolate instead of tea."

"Well now, let me convince you to have some tasty chocolate instead of tea."

"Very good, we would prefer it. We have not had chocolate for a long time."

"Sounds great, we’d prefer that. We haven’t had chocolate in a long time."

A solid block of chocolate was produced weighing twenty-eight pounds, and Chanden Sing set to chip off bits with a stone—a primitive but effective method. In the

A solid block of chocolate was produced weighing twenty-eight pounds, and Chanden Sing started chipping off pieces with a stone—a basic but effective method. In the

[51]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

House of a Wealthy Shoka

Rich Shoka's House


[52] meantime the kettle was boiling, while my two visitors made themselves as comfortable as was possible under the circumstances on pack-saddle cases.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] In the meantime, the kettle was boiling as my two guests tried to make themselves as comfortable as they could on the packed saddle cases.

The tea party went off well, for the ladies, evidently suspecting the "eccentricity" of their host, had come provided not only with cups and saucers, but with spoons, cake, bread, butter, and biscuits!

The tea party went smoothly, as the ladies, clearly suspicious of their host's "eccentricity," had shown up with not just cups and saucers, but also spoons, cake, bread, butter, and biscuits!

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[4] N.B.—Anglo-Indians very rarely condescend to shake hands with the natives.

[4] Note—Anglo-Indians hardly ever bother to shake hands with the locals.


[53]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER IX

Discouraging reports—A steep ascent—How I came to deserve the name of "monkey"—Hard at work—Promoted in rank—Collapse in a gale of wind—Time and labour lost.

The weather again became rainy and cold. The reports that I received of the state of the roads farther up were not encouraging.

The weather turned rainy and cold again. The updates I got about the road conditions farther up were not looking good.

"The track is impassable," said an old Shoka who had just arrived from Garbyang. "The Lippu Pass by which you wish to enter Tibet is still closed, and there is much snow on it still. Then the Jong Pen of Taklakot in Tibet, having been left unpunished for his last years' attack on Lieutenant Gaussen, has now a strong guard of three hundred men to prevent foreigners entering the country. The Dakus (brigands) infesting the region of the Mansarowar Lake seem to be more numerous this year than ever."

"The road is blocked," said an old Shoka who had just come from Garbyang. "The Lippu Pass, which you want to use to enter Tibet, is still closed and there's a lot of snow on it. Plus, the Jong Pen of Taklakot in Tibet, having faced no consequences for his recent attack on Lieutenant Gaussen, now has a strong guard of three hundred men to stop foreigners from entering the country. The Dakus (bandits) around Mansarowar Lake appear to be more numerous this year than ever."

I shall come in for a lively time, I thought to myself.

I thought to myself, I'm going to have a great time.

My next camp was at Shankula, 7450 feet above the sea level. It was reached by going over a delightfully cool track, not unlike a shady path through a picturesque park, among tall cedars of Lebanon, beeches and maples, with here and there a stream or spring of water, and hundreds of black-faced, white-bearded monkeys playing and leaping from tree to tree.

My next camp was at Shankula, 7450 feet above sea level. It was reached by following a pleasantly cool trail, similar to a shaded pathway through a beautiful park, surrounded by tall cedars of Lebanon, beeches, and maples, with streams or springs of water scattered around, and hundreds of black-faced, white-bearded monkeys playing and jumping from tree to tree.

I encamped by the river. The day was glorious. In front of me, north-east by east, stood, gigantic and majestic, some high snowy peaks. The valley was narrow, and the remainder of the snowy range of mountains was hidden from sight. What a lovely subject for a picture! I was tempted to halt and get out my paint-box and sketch-book; and abandoning my lunch, which was being cooked, I climbed to the summit of a high peak in order to obtain a more extensive view. The ascent, first on slippery grass, then over slaty rocks, was by no means easy, nor devoid of a certain amount of danger; [54] but so keen was I to get to the top that I reached the summit very quickly, leaving half-way down the mountain slope the two men who had followed me. In places near the top there were rocks to climb that stood almost perpendicular, and it was necessary to use hands as well as feet. It was not unlike climbing up a rough wall. I was nevertheless well repaid for my trouble. The view from that high point of vantage was magnificent, and I confess that I felt almost too ambitious when, having unslung my paint-box, I attempted to reproduce on paper the scene before me.

I set up camp by the river. The day was beautiful. In front of me, northeast by east, were some massive, stunning snowy peaks. The valley was narrow, and the rest of the snowy mountain range was out of sight. What a great subject for a painting! I was tempted to stop and pull out my paint box and sketchbook; abandoning my lunch, which was cooking, I climbed to the top of a high peak to get a better view. The climb, first on slippery grass and then over slate rocks, was definitely challenging and a bit risky; [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] but I was so eager to reach the top that I got there quickly, leaving the two men who followed me partway down the slope. Near the top, there were almost vertical rocks to climb, so I had to use both my hands and feet. It was a bit like climbing a rough wall. However, it was worth the effort. The view from that high point was breathtaking, and I admit I felt a bit overambitious when I finally set up my paint box and tried to capture the scene on paper.

"I am a fool," said I to myself, "to try and paint that! What painter could do those mountains justice?"

"I’m such a fool," I said to myself, "to think I can paint that! What artist could really capture those mountains?"

I dashed off the picture as usual very hastily, but never was a rash venture rewarded with poorer result, and those eternal giants remained unpainted.

I quickly sketched the picture as I always do, but never has a hasty effort produced such a disappointing result, and those timeless giants stayed unpainted.

Disconsolate, I made my way down. It was more difficult even than the climb up. A false step, a slip, and it might have cost my life, especially along the steep precipice, where I had to cling to anything projecting in the wall-like rock. I had gone four thousand feet higher than the camp, reaching an elevation of 11,450 feet above sea level.

Disheartened, I made my way down. It was even harder than climbing up. A wrong step or a slip could have cost me my life, especially near the steep cliff, where I had to grip onto anything sticking out from the rocky wall. I had ascended four thousand feet above the camp, reaching an altitude of 11,450 feet above sea level.

It was this performance, watched anxiously from my camp down below, as well as by the army of men belonging to the Deputy Commissioner of Almora, who was also here encamped, that won me the name among the natives of "Chota Sahib," the "Langur," the "small sir," the "monkey," a name of which I have been proud ever since.

It was this performance, anxiously observed from my camp below, as well as by the army of men belonging to the Deputy Commissioner of Almora, who was also camped here, that earned me the name among the locals of "Chota Sahib," the "Langur," the "small sir," the "monkey," a name I have been proud of ever since.

Some seventy-three miles from Pithoragarh the Shankula River enters the Kali, the course of the Shankula being roughly from N.N.W. to S.S.E.

Some seventy-three miles from Pithoragarh, the Shankula River flows into the Kali, with the Shankula's course generally going from northwest to southeast.

The track once crossed, the Shankula stream tends towards the South-East and with a gentle incline rises to 8570 feet at Gibti, where I encamped somewhat above the Gala Daramsalla. I had gone through forests of maple, beech, oak and rhododendrons, with a thick undergrowth of scrub and bamboo.

The trail crossed, the Shankula stream flows southeast and gradually climbs to 8,570 feet at Gibti, where I set up camp just above the Gala Daramsalla. I passed through forests of maple, beech, oak, and rhododendron, with a dense underbrush of scrub and bamboo.

The Kali River, about two thousand feet down below my camp, marks the boundary between Nepal and Kumaon. From this high point the foaming stream can be seen for miles, winding between thickly wooded hills and mountains like a silver ribbon on a dark reposeful background.

The Kali River, about two thousand feet below my camp, marks the border between Nepal and Kumaon. From this high vantage point, the bubbling stream can be seen for miles, winding through densely forested hills and mountains like a silver ribbon on a dark, serene backdrop.

The march from my last camp was a very short one, so I had the greater part of the day left for work. Previously I had usually halted in Daramsallas (stone-walled shelters), and in default of these my men put up for me a neatly-made [55] "Chahna"[5] or "chöpper," a hut of mats and branches of trees, in the construction of which the Paharis are wonderfully dexterous. I had also my small "mountain tent," a tente d'abri, quite comfortable enough for ordinary requirements.

The walk from my last camp was really short, so I had most of the day left to work. Normally, I would stop in Daramsallas (stone-walled shelters), and when those weren't available, my men would set up a well-made "Chahna" or "chöpper," a hut made of mats and branches, which the Paharis are really good at building. I also had my small "mountain tent," a tente d'abri, which was quite comfortable for what I needed.

The Tent

The Tent


It seems, however, that this style of travelling is not considered comme il faut by the officials of India. It is the number and size of one's tents, according to these authorities, that make one a greater or a smaller gentleman! I had put up my tent—three feet high, seven feet long, and four feet wide—by the side of the two double-leaf eighty pound tents of the Deputy Commissioner, but this official and his companions were far from pleased with this act of familiarity. For a double-tented sahib to be seen in company of another sahib whose bijou tent rose from the ground hardly up to one's waist, was infra dig and a serious threat to the prestige of the British in India. I was therefore politely requested to move from my cosy quarters to a more dignified abode [56] lent me by the one-eyed Lal Sing, a Tokudar[6] and brother of the Patwari.[7]

It seems, however, that this way of traveling isn't seen as appropriate by the officials in India. According to these authorities, the number and size of your tents determine how much of a gentleman you are! I had set up my tent—three feet high, seven feet long, and four feet wide—next to the two large double-leaf eighty-pound tents belonging to the Deputy Commissioner, but this official and his friends were far from happy about this familiar gesture. For a double-tented official to be seen with another official whose small tent barely reached waist height was considered beneath them and a serious threat to British prestige in India. I was therefore politely asked to move from my cozy spot to a more respectable place lent to me by the one-eyed Lal Sing, a Tokudar[6] and brother of the Patwari.[7]

Being thus promoted in everybody's estimation except my own, I wrote and copied out my first article for The Daily Mail, and, having done this, I dined and spent a pleasant evening with Mr. G.

Being promoted in everyone else's view except my own, I wrote and copied my first article for The Daily Mail, and after that, I had dinner and enjoyed a nice evening with Mr. G.

The night was stormy; the wind shook my tent. I went to sleep wrapped in my solitary camel-hair blanket. Some hours later a sharp knock on my head woke me. It was the centre pole of the tent that had moved out of its sockets and had fallen on me. This was followed by a rushing noise of canvas, and I found myself in a moment uncovered and gazing at the stars.

The night was stormy; the wind rattled my tent. I fell asleep wrapped in my lonely camel-hair blanket. A few hours later, a hard thump on my head woke me up. The center pole of the tent had shifted out of its sockets and had collapsed on me. Then there was a loud whooshing sound of canvas, and suddenly I was exposed, staring up at the stars.

There were white things flying about in the air, and, to my horror, I discovered the leaves of my Daily Mail article scattered in the wind.

There were white things floating around in the air, and, to my shock, I realized the leaves of my Daily Mail article were scattered in the wind.

I jumped up, but of the ten or twelve foolscap leaves on very thin paper, I only managed to recover two or three. The others soared gracefully to and fro in the air, and I suppose settled eventually in the Kali. This meant recopying the article next day, a tedious job when you are burning to get on.

I jumped up, but of the ten or twelve sheets of very thin paper, I only managed to grab two or three. The others floated gracefully in the air, and I guess they eventually landed in the Kali. This meant I had to rewrite the article the next day, a tedious task when you’re eager to move forward.

The sun rose. The camp began to wake up. All were shivering with cold. I took my usual cold bath surrounded by a half-frozen crowd of astonished onlookers, wrapped up in their thick woollen blankets, crouching round me with their chins on their knees.

The sun came up. The camp started to wake up. Everyone was shivering from the cold. I took my usual cold shower in front of a half-frozen group of amazed onlookers, all bundled up in their thick wool blankets, huddled around me with their chins on their knees.

The tent was recovered after a while, and soon all was ready to start.

The tent was found after some time, and soon everything was ready to go.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[5] Chahna—Pahari. Chöpper, Dehsi—Hindustani.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Chahna—Pahari. Chöpper, Dehsi—Hindustani.

[6] Tokudar—Head-village man.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Tokudar—Village chief.

[7] Patwari—Accountant for a Pargana.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Patwari—Accountant for a district.


[57]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER X

The Nerpani, or "waterless track"—Exaggerated accounts—A long shot—The rescue of two coolies—Picturesque Nature—An involuntary shower-bath—The Chai Pass.

The renowned Nerpani, or Nerpania, "waterless track," begins at Gibti. Very few travellers have been on this road, and by the accounts brought back many people have been prevented from imitating their example.

The famous Nerpani, or Nerpania, "waterless track," starts at Gibti. Only a handful of travelers have taken this route, and from what they’ve shared, it’s discouraged many others from following in their footsteps.

The Nerpani Road

Nerpani Road


Personally I found the track far better than I anticipated. I have been on worse mountain roads among less precipitous cliffs. From what I had heard it seemed as if the greater part of the road for several miles was supported on crowbars fixed in the rock, but such is not the case. Here and there, however, are found along the track spots overhanging precipices; and where the perpendicular cliff did not allow of a road to be cut except at great expense, crowbars have been more or less firmly planted horizontally in the rock, and a narrow path made over them with large slabs of stone. The drop from the path to the river is often from eighteen hundred to two thousand feet, and the path is in many places no wider than six inches. But to any surefooted traveller that would not constitute a real danger. The road is tedious, for the Nerpania cliff along which it has been [58] constructed is subdivided into three smaller cliffs, separated in turn one from the other by ravines. It is thus troublesome to climb up and down some thousands of feet, each time along interminable and badly put together flights of steps, only to descend again on the other side. Some of the descents, especially the last to Gulamla, are precipitous, but with no nails in one's shoes and no stick in one's hand, there is really very little danger for people accustomed to mountaineering.

Personally, I found the trail much better than I expected. I’ve been on worse mountain roads among less steep cliffs. From what I had heard, it seemed like most of the road for several miles was propped up by crowbars anchored in the rock, but that’s not the case. Here and there, though, you do find spots along the trail that hang over cliffs; where the sheer rock face didn't allow for a road to be cut without huge expense, crowbars have been planted more or less securely in the rock, and a narrow path has been made over them using large stone slabs. The drop from the path to the river is often between eighteen hundred and two thousand feet, and in many places, the path is just six inches wide. But for any surefooted traveler, that wouldn’t pose a real danger. The road is tedious since the Nerpania cliff it’s built along is split into three smaller cliffs, each separated by ravines. So, it’s a hassle to climb up and down several thousand feet, each time along long and poorly constructed flights of steps, only to go down again on the other side. Some of the descents, especially the last one to Gulamla, are steep, but without nails in your shoes and without a stick in your hand, there’s really very little danger for people used to mountaineering.

These are the main elevations on the road: Gibti, 8650 feet, 6750 feet, 7600 feet, 6700 feet, 7100 feet, 6600 feet from Gulamla. At bearings magnetic 350°, going close to the river-bed through a gorge, one obtains a fine view of a huge gneiss peak towering on the left side of the Neganza or Nejangar Mountain. This peculiar rock, shaped like a fortress, goes by the name of the Ladjekut Peak and rises where the Nejangar River meets the Kali. Here we pitched our tents.

These are the main elevations along the road: Gibti, 8,650 feet, 6,750 feet, 7,600 feet, 6,700 feet, 7,100 feet, and 6,600 feet from Gulamla. At a magnetic bearing of 350°, as you approach the riverbed through a gorge, there's a great view of a massive gneiss peak towering on the left side of the Neganza or Nejangar Mountain. This unique rock formation, which resembles a fortress, is called Ladjekut Peak and rises where the Nejangar River meets the Kali. Here, we set up our tents.

The Nerpani Road

Nerpani Road


Towards sunset there was much agitation in camp over [59] the appearance of wild goats on the other side of the Kali River in Nepal.

Towards sunset, there was a lot of excitement in camp about the sighting of wild goats on the other side of the Kali River in Nepal.

"Your rifle, Sahib, your rifle!" shouted a chorus of impatient natives. "Quick, quick, your rifle!"

"Your rifle, sir, your rifle!" shouted a crowd of impatient locals. "Hurry, hurry, your rifle!"

I seized my Mannlicher and followed the excited gang to a place some hundred yards away, where a large boisterous crowd had collected to watch the game.

I grabbed my Mannlicher and followed the excited group to a spot about a hundred yards away, where a large, noisy crowd had gathered to watch the game.

The Nerpani Road

Nerpani Road


"Where are they?" said I, as I could not see anything.

"Where are they?" I asked, since I couldn't see anything.

"There, there!" they all screamed at the top of their voices, pointing to the summit of the opposite cliff over four hundred yards distant.

"There, there!" they all yelled at the top of their lungs, pointing to the top of the cliff across more than four hundred yards away.

"Oh, that is too far."

"Oh, that’s too far."

"No, no, Sahib, please shoot," they all implored.

"No, no, Sir, please shoot," they all begged.

The Nerpani Track

The Nerpani Trail


I put up the Lyman back-sight to four hundred yards, took aim and fired. Down came rolling from rock to rock the poor wild goat, amid the frantic excitement of the crowd around me. It rolled down until it came to the shrub and vegetation, where its progress became slower. It fell on [60] the small trees and, bending them by its weight, it would drop a few seconds later on to a lower one. The trepidation on our side was intense. At last the graceful body stuck across a bigger tree and swung on it for some minutes. The oscillation slowly ceased, and tree and goat became motionless. There our prey stuck fast.

I adjusted the Lyman back-sight to four hundred yards, took aim, and fired. The poor wild goat tumbled down from rock to rock, with the crowd around me in a frenzy of excitement. It rolled until it reached the shrubs and vegetation, where its descent slowed. It crashed into the small trees, bending them under its weight, then dropped a few seconds later onto a lower one. The tension on our side was intense. Finally, the agile body got caught across a larger tree and hung there for a few minutes. The swaying gradually stopped, and both the tree and the goat became still. That's where our target came to a halt.

The Chai-lek Pass

The Chai-lek Pass


Hatchets were immediately produced, and two tall trees hurriedly cut and felled. A bridge was being spanned to cross the dangerous cold and swift waters of the Kali. A tree was thrown across, and its point just about reached a high rock on the other side. Then, amidst a dead silence, a coolie balanced himself over it. He had nearly reached the opposite bank when there was a crash. The tree broke, and the man was in the water, frightened and screaming pitifully, clutching a branch with convulsive fingers.

Hatchets were quickly grabbed, and two tall trees were hurriedly chopped down. A bridge was being built to cross the dangerous, cold, and fast waters of the Kali. A tree was laid across, almost touching a high rock on the other side. Then, in a dead silence, a worker balanced himself on it. He had almost reached the other bank when there was a loud crash. The tree snapped, and the man fell into the water, scared and screaming helplessly, gripping a branch with frantic fingers.

Another coolie went to his rescue, but the tree being now swung by the current, he also was pitched into the water. It was only after a terrible moment of suspense that our men had the common sense to draw the tree back towards the [61] shore. One and all joined in a supreme effort, and the two men were eventually saved.

Another worker went to help him, but as the tree swung with the current, he was thrown into the water too. It was only after a tense moment that our team had the sense to pull the tree back toward the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] shore. Everyone came together for one last effort, and both men were eventually rescued.

A Narrow Gorge between Two Mountains

A Narrow Gorge between Two Mountains


Our way to the next camp was first through a high narrow gorge. A beautiful waterfall on terraces faced us. From 6700 feet, the road ascended to 7650 feet, then on flights of steps and in places over crowbars the weary traveller descended to 7000 feet, where at Malpa the road was for a space nearly level. The Malpa River, running from North to South, was crossed. On the Nepal side across the Kali the vegetation was luxuriant, while on the Kumaon side it was sparse and bare. Farther on another beautiful waterfall.

Our journey to the next camp started through a steep, narrow gorge. A stunning waterfall on terraces was in front of us. From 6700 feet, the path climbed to 7650 feet, then the tired traveler went down on a series of steps and sometimes using crowbars to help, reaching 7000 feet, where the road was almost flat for a while at Malpa. We crossed the Malpa River, which flows from north to south. On the Nepal side across the Kali, the vegetation was lush, while on the Kumaon side, it was sparse and bare. Further along, we encountered another beautiful waterfall.

The track now rose on a steep incline to 8120 feet among huge rocks and boulders. What with the gigantic snow-peaks, the pretty waterfalls, the weird character of the country traversed, one got so interested in one's surroundings that one forgot all about any difficulty of climbing. From barren hills and rocks the track suddenly became clayish and sandy, and in a series of zigzags well shaded by Tchuk, Utish, and Ritch trees, with a thick undergrowth of scrub wood and stunted vegetation, we found ourselves down as low as 6750 feet, ascending immediately after in a very short distance to 8100 feet to Camp Lahmari.

The trail now climbed steeply to 8120 feet, surrounded by massive rocks and boulders. With the towering snow-capped peaks, beautiful waterfalls, and the unique landscape we were navigating, we became so absorbed in our surroundings that we forgot about the challenge of the climb. From barren hills and rocks, the trail suddenly turned into a mix of clay and sand, and in a series of zigzags shaded by Tchuk, Utish, and Ritch trees, along with a dense underbrush of scrub and stunted plants, we found ourselves as low as 6750 feet before quickly rising again to 8100 feet at Camp Lahmari.

In olden times the path went over the highest part of the cliff, and it took a good walker the whole day to reach from one spring of water to the next, hence the name of "waterless."

In ancient times, the path ran along the highest part of the cliff, and it took a skilled walker an entire day to get from one water spring to the next, which is why it was called "waterless."

Here practically ended the Nerpani (waterless track), [62] and an involuntary shower-bath soon awaited the passer-by, drenching him to the skin, unless he was provided with waterproof and umbrella. The spray descended from a great height for a length of some thirty or forty yards, the road being very narrow and very slippery, so that progress was particularly slow. The name of the waterfall was Takti.

Here is where the Nerpani (waterless track) practically ended, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and an unexpected shower was soon waiting for anyone passing by, soaking them to the skin unless they had a waterproof coat and an umbrella. The spray fell from a great height over a stretch of about thirty or forty yards, with the road being very narrow and slippery, making it especially difficult to move forward. The waterfall was called Takti.

The track, if not more level, was nevertheless better after this to the sore-footed walker. It was less rocky and devoid of the tiresome flights of steps.

The path, if not smoother, was still better for the sore-footed walker after this. It had fewer rocks and was free of the annoying flights of steps.

On leaving Lahmari we immediately had a steep rise to 9600 feet. Then a drop of 400 feet, and we found ourselves on the Buddi River, a tributary of the Kali. Just above the bridge was a magnificent waterfall, by the left side of which we found a kind of grotto hollowed out under a rock. The Shokas and Tibetans used it as a camping ground.

On leaving Lahmari, we quickly climbed to 9,600 feet. Then we descended 400 feet and found ourselves by the Buddi River, which is a tributary of the Kali. Just above the bridge, there was a stunning waterfall, and to the left of it, we discovered a grotto carved out under a rock. The Shokas and Tibetans used this spot as a campsite.

To our right, high up on the cliffside, was the picturesque village of Buddi (9300 feet), with its two- and three-storeyed houses. Below and over it in long zigzags could be seen the track ascending to the top of Chai-Lek, or Tcheto Pass as the Shokas call it. At bearings magnetic 170° we had the towering Namjun peak, so high that I was told it could be seen even from Almora and Ranikhet.

To our right, high up on the cliffside, was the charming village of Buddi (9300 feet), with its two- and three-story houses. Below and above it, you could see the winding track leading up to the top of Chai-Lek, or Tcheto Pass, as the Shokas call it. At a magnetic bearing of 170°, we saw the impressive Namjun peak, so tall that I was told it could be seen even from Almora and Ranikhet.

Then as we proceeded up the steep clayish track, I could not, on looking back, help admiring the magnificent Kali valley with its gigantic cliffs and gorges surmounted by lofty snow peaks. On the Chai Pass the two aneroids I had on me registered an altitude of 11,190 feet. I was now on a small flat tableland. Darcy Bura, the richest Shoka trader from Buddi, had erected here a bargain-house for the purchase and exchange of borax, salt, wool, and other articles from Tibet. On the left side of the road a large cave in the rock had been walled and partly roofed over for the use of wife-seekers from the villages of Buddi and Garbyang. These houses were called Rambangs, and were an old institution among the Shokas, of which I shall have occasion to speak at length later on. As everywhere else, a few high poles with flying prayers and a bell had been placed near the pass.

Then as we climbed up the steep, clayey path, I couldn't help but admire the stunning Kali valley with its huge cliffs and gorges topped by tall snow-capped peaks when I looked back. At the Chai Pass, the two altimeters I had with me showed an elevation of 11,190 feet. I was now on a small, flat area. Darcy Bura, the wealthiest Shoka trader from Buddi, had set up a trading post here for buying and exchanging borax, salt, wool, and other goods from Tibet. On the left side of the road, a large cave in the rock had been walled off and partially roofed for the use of men looking for wives from the villages of Buddi and Garbyang. These places were called Rambangs and were an old tradition among the Shokas, which I will discuss in detail later on. Like everywhere else, a few tall poles with fluttering prayer flags and a bell had been placed near the pass.


[63]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XI

A series of misfortunes—Tibetan atrocities on British subjects—Tibetan exactions—Revolting cruelty to one of her Majesty's subjects—Assault on a British officer—A smart British Envoy.

My arrival at Garbyang was watched by hundreds of men, women, and children, all squatting on the edge of the flat mud roofs of their habitations, while a few dozen people followed me respectfully to my camping ground beyond the village. A large tent had been put up for me by Pundit Gobaria's brother, who had been informed of my coming by Anti Ram Sah, my banker at Almora. Mr. G., Deputy Commissioner, arrived later.

My arrival at Garbyang was observed by hundreds of men, women, and children, all sitting on the flat mud roofs of their homes, while a few dozen people followed me respectfully to my campsite just outside the village. A large tent had been set up for me by Pundit Gobaria's brother, who had learned of my arrival from Anti Ram Sah, my banker in Almora. Mr. G., the Deputy Commissioner, showed up later.

I was very anxious to make immediate arrangements to enter Tibet, but all my efforts to obtain reliable followers were of little avail.

I was really eager to quickly make plans to enter Tibet, but all my attempts to find trustworthy companions were pretty much useless.

I heard to my regret, a day or two later, that the plan of my journey, which with so much trouble and care I had kept secret, had been divulged to the Tibetan authorities. Misfortunes never come singly! Against my will I had been advised to pay a certain sum at Almora, in exchange for which I received a letter of credit on Pundit Gobaria, a rich trader of Garbyang, who was to pay me the amount in silver. Unluckily, Gobaria was still absent in Nepal, and no one else could cash a cheque for the amount I wanted. This was tiresome—all the more so as I had counted on the money. I immediately sent a runner to Almora to have the sum in silver sent at once. This involved much publicity and considerable risk.

I unfortunately heard a day or two later that the details of my trip, which I had worked so hard to keep secret, had been revealed to the Tibetan authorities. Misfortunes never happen alone! Against my wishes, I was advised to pay a certain amount in Almora, and in return, I got a letter of credit for Pundit Gobaria, a wealthy trader from Garbyang, who was supposed to give me the money in silver. Unfortunately, Gobaria was still in Nepal, and no one else could cash a check for the amount I needed. This was really frustrating, especially since I had been counting on that money. I quickly sent a runner to Almora to have the silver sent immediately. This involved a lot of attention and significant risk.

Also delay was inevitable. All the passes were closed and fresh snow was falling daily. It was just possible with much difficulty for a man to cross the Lippu Pass, but no baggage could be taken through. I made up my mind to remain a few days in Garbyang, and took this opportunity to have a large Tibetan tent manufactured to shelter my [64] future followers—if ever I could find any—and it might help me, I calculated, to become friendly with the natives, among whom I hoped to find some willing followers.

Also, the delay was unavoidable. All the passes were closed, and fresh snow was falling every day. It was only possible, with great difficulty, for a person to cross the Lippu Pass, but no luggage could be taken through. I decided to stay a few days in Garbyang and took this opportunity to have a large Tibetan tent made to shelter my future followers—if I ever found any—and I thought it might help me become friendly with the locals, among whom I hoped to find some willing followers.

The Gates of Garbyang

The Garbyang Gates


Doctor H. Wilson, of the Methodist Evangelical Mission, went to much trouble in trying to get together men for me, but though his influence was and is considerable in Bias and Chaudas, his efforts were not crowned with success. The Shokas know well how terribly cruel the Tibetans are. They have suffered at their hands more than once, and even of recent years the Government of India has had reported by its own officers cases of horrible tortures inflicted by the Tibetan authorities on British subjects captured by them on our side of the frontier. Some of the atrocities committed by the Lamas on British subjects are revolting, and it is a matter of great regret and indignation to the Englishmen who visit these regions to think that the weakness of our officials in Kumaon has allowed and is allowing such proceedings still to go on. So incapable are they, in [65] fact, that the Jong Pen of Taklakot in Tibet sends over, "with the sanction of the Government of India," his yearly emissaries to collect Land Revenue[8] from British subjects living on British soil. The Shokas have to pay this tribute, and do so out of fear—in addition to other taxes and trade dues iniquitously exacted by the Tibetans.

Doctor H. Wilson from the Methodist Evangelical Mission put in a lot of effort to gather men for me, but despite his significant influence in Bias and Chaudas, he wasn't successful. The Shokas are well aware of how brutally cruel the Tibetans can be. They have experienced suffering at their hands multiple times, and even in recent years, the Government of India has received reports from its own officials about horrifying tortures inflicted by the Tibetan authorities on British subjects captured on our side of the border. Some of the atrocities committed by the Lamas against British subjects are shocking, and it's a source of great regret and anger for the Englishmen who visit these areas to realize that the incompetence of our officials in Kumaon has allowed such actions to continue. They are so ineffective that the Jong Pen of Taklakot in Tibet sends, "with the approval of the Government of India," his annual emissaries to collect Land Revenue from British subjects living on British soil. The Shokas have to pay this tribute, out of fear, in addition to other unjust taxes and trade dues imposed by the Tibetans.

On the slightest pretext the Tibetans arrest, torture mercilessly, fine, and confiscate property of, British subjects on British territory.

On the smallest excuse, the Tibetans arrest, torture without mercy, fine, and take the property of British citizens on British land.

At the time of my visit there could be seen, in Garbyang and other villages, British subjects (Shokas) who had been mutilated by the Tibetan authorities.

At the time I visited, you could see British subjects (Shokas) in Garbyang and other villages who had been mutilated by the Tibetan authorities.

Even Dr. H. Wilson, who had erected a dispensary at Gungi (one march beyond Garbyang), was lately threatened with confiscation—and worse perhaps—if he did not immediately comply with the exactions of the Tibetans. He declined to do so and reported the matter to the Government, relying on a good rifle in the house and his many servants. His determination not to be intimidated seems to have given him temporary security, for the Tibetans are as cowardly, when they think themselves matched, as they are cruel.

Even Dr. H. Wilson, who had set up a dispensary at Gungi (just one march beyond Garbyang), was recently threatened with confiscation—or possibly worse—if he didn't immediately meet the demands of the Tibetans. He refused to comply and reported the issue to the Government, counting on a good rifle in the house and his many servants for support. His refusal to be intimidated appears to have given him temporary safety, as the Tibetans are as cowardly when they believe they are matched as they are cruel.

Let me quote one example of cruelty which occurred as late as 1896. A Shoka trader, undeniably a British subject, had gone over the border, as is customary with them during the summer, to dispose of his merchandise on the Tibetan market. He and another Shoka, also a British subject, had a quarrel. Aware that the first Shoka was wealthy, the Tibetan authorities took this pretext to arrest him and impose upon him an exorbitant fine, besides the additional punishment of two hundred lashes to be administered to him by order of the Jong Pen. The Shoka remonstrated on the plea that he had done no harm, and that being a British subject they had no right to so punish him. The Jong Pen saw his orders executed, and further commanded his men to cut off the wretched prisoner's hands. He was made over to two soldiers entrusted with the carrying out of the sentence. They led him away to the place of punishment. The Shoka was of a powerful build and possessed courage. Though half dead and covered with wounds, he overcame his guardians and escaped. The alarm was instantly given and a large party of horsemen sent to capture him.

Let me share an example of cruelty that happened as recently as 1896. A Shoka trader, who was definitely a British citizen, had crossed the border, as they usually do in the summer, to sell his goods in the Tibetan market. He got into an argument with another Shoka, also a British subject. Knowing the first Shoka was wealthy, the Tibetan authorities used this as an excuse to arrest him and imposed a huge fine on him, plus a punishment of two hundred lashes ordered by the Jong Pen. The Shoka protested, arguing that he had done nothing wrong and that, as a British subject, they had no right to punish him like that. The Jong Pen had his orders carried out and further instructed his men to cut off the poor prisoner’s hands. He was handed over to two soldiers who were responsible for enforcing the sentence. They took him to the place where he would be punished. The Shoka was strong and brave. Even though he was half-dead and covered in wounds, he fought off his guards and escaped. An alarm was immediately raised, and a large group of horsemen was sent out to capture him.

[66]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

They caught him up, and when at close range fired on him and wounded him in the knee, smashing the kneecap. He was surrounded, pounced upon, beaten mercilessly, and last but not least, all his fingers were one by one crushed into pulp between two heavy stones. In this condition he was dragged before the Lamas, only to be decapitated! Mr. Sturt, an able and just officer, who was then Deputy Commissioner at Almora, became acquainted with these facts, and, having fully ascertained their accuracy, reported them to the Government, strongly advising immediate action against the Tibetans for this and other cruelties that were constantly taking place on our frontier. Though it was undeniably proved that the victim was a British subject, the Government of India took no steps in the matter.

They caught up with him, and when they were close, they shot him and injured his knee, shattering the kneecap. He was surrounded, attacked, beaten ruthlessly, and finally, every one of his fingers was crushed into pulp between two heavy stones. In that state, he was dragged before the Lamas, only to be executed! Mr. Sturt, a skilled and fair officer who was then the Deputy Commissioner at Almora, learned of these events, and after confirming their accuracy, reported them to the Government, strongly recommending immediate action against the Tibetans for this and other ongoing cruelties at our border. Even though it was clear that the victim was a British citizen, the Government of India took no action on the matter.

The same year, 1896, Lieutenant Gaussen, who on a shooting trip tried to enter Tibet by the Lippu Pass, was surrounded by Tibetan soldiers, and he and his servants were seriously ill-treated. The British officer received a nasty wound on his forehead, and one of his servants, who behaved heroically, was so cruelly handled that to-day, two years later, I hear he is still an invalid.

The same year, 1896, Lieutenant Gaussen, while on a hunting trip, attempted to enter Tibet via the Lippu Pass, but was surrounded by Tibetan soldiers who treated him and his servants very poorly. The British officer got a bad wound on his forehead, and one of his servants, who acted bravely, was treated so harshly that I understand, two years later, he is still disabled.

Matan Sing ChaprassiNarenghiri Chaprassi
Matan Singh JanitorNarenghiri Messenger

Mr. J. Larkin, Deputy Collector at Almora, was then despatched to the frontier. No better man could have been sent. Firm, just, and painstaking, he became popular and much respected among the Shokas. He listened to their troubles and sufferings; he administered justice wherever possible. He refused audience to no one, and during his flying visit became well acquainted with the country, the people, and all that went on. The poor Shokas felt much relieved, thinking that at last the Tibetan abuses would be put an end to. They were not mistaken, at least for a

Mr. J. Larkin, the Deputy Collector in Almora, was then sent to the frontier. No better person could have been chosen. He was firm, fair, and diligent, gaining respect and popularity among the Shokas. He listened to their problems and hardships; he provided justice whenever he could. He turned away no one seeking an audience, and during his brief visit, he became well-acquainted with the area, the people, and everything happening around him. The struggling Shokas felt a significant sense of relief, believing that the Tibetan abuses would finally come to an end. They were not wrong, at least for a

[67]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Garbyang

Garbyang


[68] time. The Jong Pen of Taklakot was called upon to answer for his many misdeeds. He refused an interview. Mr. Larkin sent word across the border that he would have no trifling and that he must come, upon which the Jong Pen, with his officers and Lamas, crossed the snowy Lippu Pass. Trembling with fear and bending low to the ground, the Tibetans, with abject servility, entered the tent of our British envoy. The account of the interview, which I received in full from a Shoka gentleman who was present as interpreter, is amusing and curious, showing the mutability and hypocrisy of the Tibetans. In the long run, and being well acquainted with the cowardice of his visitors, Mr. Larkin not only obtained redress on every point but gave the Jong Pen and his officers a severe harangue. The result of the interview was that the collection of the Land Revenue should be put a stop to, and that Tibetan law should no more be administered on our side of the frontier.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] time. The Jong Pen of Taklakot was called to account for his numerous wrongdoings. He declined an interview. Mr. Larkin sent a message across the border stating that he wouldn’t tolerate any nonsense and that the Jong Pen had to come, which led the Jong Pen, along with his officers and Lamas, to cross the snowy Lippu Pass. Shaking with fear and bowing low to the ground, the Tibetans entered the tent of our British envoy with extreme subservience. The account of the meeting I received from a Shoka gentleman who served as the interpreter is both amusing and intriguing, highlighting the fickleness and insincerity of the Tibetans. In the end, knowing his visitors' cowardice, Mr. Larkin not only secured redress on all issues but also gave the Jong Pen and his officers a stern lecture. The outcome of the meeting was that the collection of Land Revenue would cease, and Tibetan law would no longer be enforced on our side of the border.

Mr. Larkin's visit to Bhot was cut short by urgent orders to return immediately to Almora.

Mr. Larkin's trip to Bhot was suddenly interrupted by urgent orders to head back to Almora right away.

The following year (the year of my visit, 1897), Mr. G., Deputy Commissioner, undid much that the previous officer had accomplished. The Jong Pen, when summoned, declined to come, and sent over deputies in his place. The upshot of it is, that Land Revenue is again paid by the Shokas to the Tibetan tax-collectors through the Peshkar.

The following year (the year of my visit, 1897), Mr. G., Deputy Commissioner, reversed much of what the previous officer had achieved. The Jong Pen, when called, refused to come and instead sent deputies. As a result, the Shokas are once again paying Land Revenue to the Tibetan tax-collectors through the Peshkar.

I have mentioned these facts as representative of many, and to show how it came that the natives, who had never had any protection from our Government, were disinclined, notwithstanding the temptations I offered them, to brave the dangers of Tibet. I, who later on suffered so much through being betrayed by Shokas, am the first to forgive and not to blame them. Though nominally our subjects, their actual rulers are the Tibetans, and we do nothing to protect them against the exactions and tortures of the intruders. Why then should we expect them to be faithful to us? The Shokas are not treacherous by nature, but they are compelled to be deceitful to protect their lives and their homes. Properly treated, these honest, gentle, good-natured mountaineers would assuredly become loyal and trustworthy subjects of her Majesty.

I’ve shared these points as examples of many, to illustrate why the locals, who had never received any protection from our Government, were unwilling, despite the incentives I offered, to face the risks of Tibet. I, who later experienced significant hardship due to betrayal by the Shokas, am the first to forgive and not blame them. Although they are technically our subjects, their real rulers are the Tibetans, and we do nothing to shield them from the demands and abuses of the intruders. So why should we expect them to remain loyal to us? The Shokas aren’t naturally deceitful; they’re forced to be underhanded to protect their lives and their homes. If treated properly, these honest, kind, good-natured mountain people would definitely become loyal and reliable subjects of Her Majesty.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[8] The sums are now collected by the Political Peskhar and handed over in Garbyang to the Tibetans.

[8] The amounts are now gathered by the Political Peskhar and delivered in Garbyang to the Tibetans.


[69]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XII

Tibetan threats—My birthday—Ravenous dogs—A big dinner—Shoka hospitality.

The Jong Pen of Taklakot, on hearing of my proposed visit, sent threats that he would confiscate the land of any man who came in my employ, besides menaces of "flogging" and subsequent "beheading" of myself and any one caught with me. Personally I paid little attention to these intimidations.

The Jong Pen of Taklakot, upon learning about my planned visit, threatened to take the land of anyone who worked for me, along with threats of "whipping" and eventual "beheading" for me and anyone who was with me. Personally, I didn't pay much attention to these threats.

Consulting the calendar one day—a thing I did with great regularity in these regions—I made out that it was the first of June, and I then remembered that the following day would be my birthday. Feasts were scarce in these high altitudes, and the prospect before me was that they would in the near future be even scarcer. It therefore occurred to me that I could not better while away a day at least of this weary waiting than by treating myself to a real big feast.

Consulting the calendar one day—which I did regularly in this area—I realized it was June 1st, and then I remembered that the next day would be my birthday. Celebrations were rare in these high altitudes, and it seemed they would soon become even rarer. So, it occurred to me that I couldn’t think of a better way to pass the time during this exhausting wait than by treating myself to a big feast.

The House where I Stayed at Garbyang

The House where I Stayed at Garbyang


Chanden Sing was despatched round the village to summon up to my tent all the local Bunyas (tradespeople). [70] Rice, flour, eight pounds of butter (ghi), a large quantity of lump sugar, pepper, salt, and a fat sheep were purchased. The latter was forthwith beheaded, skinned, and dressed in the approved fashion by the faithful Chanden Sing, who was indeed a jack of all trades.

Chanden Sing was sent around the village to gather all the local Bunyas (tradespeople) to my tent. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] We bought rice, flour, eight pounds of butter (ghi), a large amount of lump sugar, pepper, salt, and a fat sheep. The sheep was promptly killed, skinned, and prepared properly by the reliable Chanden Sing, who was truly a jack of all trades.

Unfortunately, I am a careless house or rather tent keeper, and I entrusted my chaprassis with the job of stowing away the provisions, for which purpose a recess under the native low bedstead served to perfection, holding as it did the different-sized vessels, with the bachri (sheep) in pieces, and the rice, flour, butter, etc.

Unfortunately, I'm a careless house, or rather tent,keeper, and I trusted my attendants with the job of storing away the supplies. For that purpose, a recess under the native low bed served perfectly, holding various-sized containers with pieces of sheep, rice, flour, butter, and so on.

While this was being done, I worked away hard at writing, and getting interested, continued at it till an early hour of the morning; I got tired at last, and, wrapping myself up in my blanket, I soon went to sleep next to a heap of stones piled up by the cautious Chanden Sing.

While this was happening, I worked hard on my writing, getting really into it, and continued until early morning. Eventually, I got tired and, wrapping myself up in my blanket, quickly fell asleep next to a pile of stones stacked up by the careful Chanden Sing.

"Sahib," had been his warning, "there are many hungry dogs about. If they come, here are a few missiles ready for them!" and he pointed at the ammunition.

"Sahib," he had warned, "there are a lot of hungry dogs around. If they show up, here are some missiles ready for them!" and he pointed at the ammunition.

"All right; good-night."

"Okay; good night."

The wisdom of this was soon apparent, for I had not slept long when I was aroused by the hollow sound of lip-smacking, apparently arising from more than one mouth, accompanied by the movement of the stretched canvas bed on which I was lying. Jumping to my feet, I alighted upon a living mass of unwelcome guests; but before I even realised what had been going on, they had scampered away, the brutes! carrying between their tightly-closed jaws a last mouthful of my dainties.

The wisdom of this was soon clear, because I hadn’t been asleep for long when I was jolted awake by the hollow sound of lip-smacking, apparently coming from more than one mouth, along with the movement of the stretched canvas bed I was lying on. I jumped to my feet and found myself surrounded by a mass of unwelcome guests; but before I even understood what was happening, they had scurried away, those brutes! carrying the last bite of my treats between their tightly-closed jaws.

The ammunition at my disposal was quickly used up—a poor revenge, even when I heard the yell of a dog I happened to hit in the dark. On striking a match, I found the large brass bowls emptied, the rice and flour scattered all over the tent, and the sheep practically vanished.

The ammo I had ran out fast—a weak form of revenge, even when I heard the yelp of a dog I accidentally hit in the dark. When I struck a match, I saw the big brass bowls were empty, the rice and flour were all over the tent, and the sheep were basically gone.

I determined not to be done out of this piece of indulgence, which now seemed desirable beyond words, although I crawled back into my blanket, and found for a while oblivion in sleep. I was no sooner up in the morning than I planned a new banquet. But in the nick of time, Mr. G., who had gone a march farther, returned with his escort of policemen, moonshees, pundits, and chaprassis.

I decided I wasn’t going to miss out on this treat, which now seemed incredibly appealing, even though I crawled back under my blanket and found some escape in sleep for a while. As soon as I woke up in the morning, I started planning a new feast. But just then, Mr. G., who had marched ahead a bit, came back with his group of police officers, guides, scholars, and helpers.

"Never mind, Landor," said he kindly, when I had told him of my trouble, "you come and dine with me. These chaps shall get you up a special dinner in their own way."

"Don't worry about it, Landor," he said kindly after I shared my trouble with him. "Come have dinner with me. These guys will whip up a special meal just for you."

[71] My stores were put under tribute, instead of the native Bunyas, and we had a very excellent meal indeed. We had Bovril soup and Irish stew, roast mutton, potted tongue, roast chicken, gigantic swan eggs poached on anchovy toast, jam omelette, chow-chow preserves, ginger biscuits, boiled rhubarb, and I must not forget, by the way, an excellent plum cake of no small dimensions, crammed full of raisins and candy, which I had brought from Mrs. G. at Almora to her husband, and to which we did, with blessings for her, the fullest justice.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Instead of the local Bunyas, we were served a feast from my stores, and it was an amazing meal. We had Bovril soup and Irish stew, roast mutton, potted tongue, roast chicken, huge swan eggs poached on anchovy toast, jam omelette, chow-chow preserves, ginger biscuits, boiled rhubarb, and I must not forget to mention an incredible plum cake, quite large, packed with raisins and candy that I had brought from Mrs. G. at Almora for her husband, which we enjoyed thoroughly while sending her our best wishes.

Shoka House with Strange Ladder

Shoka House with Odd Ladder


Thanks to Mr. G. and also to the fortunate coincidence of receiving a batch of letters from parents and friends, which reached me on that day by runner from Khela, I do not think that I could have spent a happier birthday anywhere, and I knew well enough that these were to be the last moments of contentment—an end to the fleshpots of Egypt. After this I should be cut off from civilisation, from comfort even in its primitive form; and to emphasise this fact, it happened that on the very morning follow[72]ing my birthday, Mr. G. left and continued his journey to Almora.

Thanks to Mr. G. and the lucky coincidence of getting a bunch of letters from parents and friends, which reached me that day by messenger from Khela, I don't think I could have spent a happier birthday anywhere. I knew well enough that these were going to be the last moments of happiness—an end to the comforts of home. After this, I would be cut off from civilization, even from comfort in its most basic form; and to make this clear, it turned out that on the very morning after my birthday, Mr. G. left and continued his journey to Almora.

Shoka Houses

Shoka Homes


The weather was cold and rain fell in torrents, the thermometer being never above 52° during the warmest hours of the day. My soaked tent stood in a regular pool of water, notwithstanding the double trenches round it, and several Shoka gentlemen had before asked me to abandon it and live in a house. They were all most anxious to extend to me hospitality, which I, not wishing to trouble them, and in order at all hazards to be entirely free and unhampered in my actions, courteously but firmly declined. Nevertheless, quite a deputation arrived on June 4, renewing their request; but I was determined to have my way. In vain! They would not see a Sahib under cold canvas while they themselves had comfortable homes. They held a consultation. Unexpectedly, and notwithstanding my remonstrances, my loads were suddenly seized and carried triumphantly on the backs of a long row of powerful Shokas towards the village. I had to follow nolens volens, and from that day on I grew through constant contact daily more [73] convinced of the genuine friendliness and kindheartedness of these people.

The weather was cold, and heavy rain poured down, with the temperature never rising above 52° even during the warmest parts of the day. My drenched tent was basically in a pool of water, despite the double trenches around it, and several Shoka gentlemen had previously encouraged me to leave it and stay in a house. They were all very eager to offer me hospitality, which I, not wanting to inconvenience them and determined to stay completely free and unrestrained in my actions, politely but firmly turned down. However, a delegation showed up on June 4, repeating their request; but I was set on my decision. It was no use! They didn’t want to see a Sahib stuck under a cold tent while they had comfortable homes. They held a meeting. Surprisingly, and despite my objections, my loads were suddenly taken and triumphantly carried by a long line of strong Shokas toward the village. I had to follow nolens volens, and from that day on, I became increasingly convinced of the genuine friendliness and kindness of these people through our daily interactions.

To prevent my coming back, they even pulled down the tent, and, wet as it was, carried it away. Zeheram and Jaimal, two leading Shokas, held my hands and patted me on the back as they led me with every sign of courtesy to my new dwelling.

To keep me from coming back, they even took down the tent and, despite it being wet, carried it away. Zeheram and Jaimal, two prominent Shokas, held my hands and patted me on the back as they graciously led me to my new place.

This turned out to be a fine two-storeyed building with nicely carved wooden door and windows coloured red and green. So great was the anxiety and fear of these good people that I should turn back at this juncture, that some twenty outstretched hands seized me by the arms, while others pushed me from behind up a flight of ten or twelve steps into the house, where I found myself the guest of my good friend Zeheram. I was given the front of the first floor, consisting of two large clean rooms, with a very fair native bedstead, a table and two or more moras (round cane stools covered with skin); and I had no sooner realised that I must stay than presents of sweets, preserved fruit, dried dates, and tea were brought for my acceptance—tea made in the Tibetan fashion with butter and salt in it.

This turned out to be a nice two-story building with beautifully carved wooden doors and windows painted red and green. The concern and fear of these kind people that I might turn back at this point was so intense that about twenty outstretched hands grabbed my arms, while others pushed me from behind up a flight of ten or twelve steps into the house, where I found myself a guest of my good friend Zeheram. I was given a room at the front of the first floor, which had two large clean rooms, a decent native bed, a table, and two or more moras (round cane stools covered with skin); and as soon as I realized I was staying, they brought me gifts of sweets, preserved fruit, dried dates, and tea—made in the Tibetan style with butter and salt.

Even if at first I had had slight apprehensions at the expression of such very unusual hospitality, these were soon dispelled, and I was proud to be assured by my host that I was the first Englishman (or for that, European or American) who had been allowed to enter the living part of a Shoka house and partake of food in a Shoka dwelling. The opportunity was too good to be lost, and I was sorely tempted to tarry among them, so as really to get an insight into their mode of living, their customs and manners.

Even though I initially had some concerns about such an unusual display of hospitality, those feelings quickly went away. I was honored when my host told me that I was the first Englishman (or, for that matter, European or American) ever allowed to enter the living part of a Shoka house and share a meal in a Shoka home. The chance was too great to pass up, and I was really tempted to stay longer with them to gain a true understanding of their way of life, customs, and manners.

Shoka Child Smeared with Butter which is Left to be Absorbed in the Sun

Shoka Child Covered in Butter Left to Soak in the Sun


[74]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XIII

Shoka hospitality—How I obtained much information—On a reconnoitring trip—A terrible slide.

They are indeed Nature's gentlemen, these worthy Shokas, and as such they did all in their power to make my stay among them pleasant. It was a contest between them as to who should entertain me first, and who should be the next. Invitations to breakfast and dinner literally poured in; and those convenient "sick headaches," "colds," and "previous engagements," so opportune in more conventional parts, were of no avail here. No card—no friendly note bade one to come and be merry. They generally arrived en masse to fetch me. Pulling and pushing played a not unimportant part in their urging, and to decline was thus out of the question. Indeed I must confess there was but little inclination to decline on my part. When you arrived, your host spread out fine mats and rugs, of Tibetan and ancient Chinese manufacture, and often of great value. In front of a raised seat were displayed in shiny brass bowls the various viands and delicacies which constituted the meal. There was rice always; there was curried mutton, milk and curd with sugar; then chapatis made in Hindustani fashion and Shale, a kind of sweet pancake made of flour, ghi (butter), sugar or honey, also Parsad, a thick paste of honey, burnt sugar, butter and flour, all well cooked together—a dainty morsel even for a jaded palate.

They are truly gentlemen of Nature, these admirable Shokas, and they did everything possible to make my time with them enjoyable. It became a friendly competition among them to see who would host me first and who would follow next. Invitations to breakfast and dinner came pouring in, and those convenient excuses like "sick headaches," "colds," and "previous engagements," which are so handy in more typical situations, were useless here. No card or friendly note invited anyone to come and have fun. They generally arrived en masse to take me along. Pulling and pushing played a significant role in their encouragement, making it impossible to say no. In fact, I have to admit I had little desire to decline. When you arrived, your host spread out beautiful mats and rugs, made in Tibet and ancient China, often quite valuable. In front of a raised seat, shiny brass bowls displayed the various dishes and treats that made up the meal. There was always rice; there was curried mutton, milk and curd with sugar; then chapatis made in the Hindustani style and Shale, a type of sweet pancake made from flour, ghi (butter), sugar or honey, as well as Parsad, a thick mixture of honey, burnt sugar, butter, and flour, all well-cooked together—a delightful treat even for a weary palate.

I was invariably made to sit on the raised seat, which I did cross-legged, while the crowd squatted respectfully on the floor round the room, forming a semicircle with me in the center. I generally ate with my fingers in their own manner, a courtesy they particularly appreciated, and although I must have seemed awkward to them at first, I soon acquired a sort of dexterity in manipulating hot food—meat and vegetables, for instance—with my hand. The trick [75] is not very difficult, but it requires practice. You gather up your five fingers downwards in the dish, seizing a mouthful, and with a rapid circular twist of the hand you collect as much sauce as you can round the morsel you have caught. With a still more rapid movement, and before anything has time to drip between your fingers, you half drop and half throw it into your mouth.

I was always made to sit on the raised seat, which I did cross-legged, while the crowd squatted respectfully on the floor around the room, forming a semicircle with me in the center. I usually ate with my fingers in their own style, a courtesy they particularly appreciated, and even though I must have seemed awkward to them at first, I quickly picked up a kind of skill in handling hot food—meat and vegetables, for example—with my hand. The trick isn't very hard, but it requires practice. You scoop your five fingers down into the dish, grabbing a mouthful, and with a quick circular twist of the hand, you gather as much sauce as possible around the piece you've caught. With an even quicker movement, before anything has a chance to drip between your fingers, you half drop, half throw it into your mouth.

Shoka Child being Smeared with Butter

Shoka Child covered in butter


I soon found that I could, during these cordial repasts, enlivened as they were by moderate libations of chökti and syrap (wine and spirit distilled from wheat), acquire considerable knowledge of anthropological and ethnological interest, and gather also much valuable information about Tibet and its people. They became, in fact, in the few days I spent among them, confiding to such a degree, and looked upon me so much as one of themselves, that I soon obtained the run of the whole place. They came to confide their grievances and troubles; they related to me their legends and folk-lore. They sang to me their weird songs and taught me their dances. They brought me to their marriages and strange funerals; they took me to their sick men, women, and children, or conveyed them to me for cure. Thus, to my delight, and with such unique chances, my observations of a pathological, physiological, and anatomical character became more interesting to me day by day, and [76] I have attempted to describe in a later chapter some of the things I was able to note.

I quickly realized that during these friendly meals, enhanced by a few drinks of chökti and syrap (wine and a spirit made from wheat), I could gather a lot of interesting knowledge about anthropology and ethnology, as well as valuable information about Tibet and its people. In the few days I spent with them, they started to open up to me to such an extent and saw me as one of their own that I quickly got to know everything about the place. They shared their problems and worries with me; they told me their stories and folk tales. They sang their unique songs and taught me their dances. They invited me to their weddings and unusual funerals; they brought me to visit their sick men, women, and children, or sent them to me for treatment. To my delight, these unique opportunities made my observations of a pathological, physiological, and anatomical nature increasingly fascinating day by day, and [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] I have tried to describe some of the things I was able to note in a later chapter.

The Master of a High School Altitude 10,940 Feet

The Principal of a High School at an Elevation of 10,940 Feet


After lingering in Garbyang for several days, I paid off my two chaprassis, Matan Sing and Narenghiri, and they returned to Almora.

After staying in Garbyang for several days, I settled up with my two porters, Matan Sing and Narenghiri, and they went back to Almora.

On June 6 I started on a journey towards the frontier, with a view to reconnoitre.

On June 6, I set out on a journey to the frontier to explore.

Crossing into Nepal territory below Chongur village, and following upwards the right bank of the Kali River in a direction of 320° (bearings magnetic) I reached Kanwa, a Shoka village on a high cliff-like plateau under which meet the three rivers Kali, Taki, and Kuti. The Kali turns suddenly to 37° (bearings magnetic), while the Kuti River keeps a general direction of 325° (bearings magnetic).

Crossing into Nepal below Chongur village and following the right bank of the Kali River at a direction of 320° (magnetic bearings), I arrived at Kanwa, a Shoka village on a high cliff-like plateau where the three rivers Kali, Taki, and Kuti converge. The Kali suddenly turns to 37° (magnetic bearings), while the Kuti River generally flows at 325° (magnetic bearings).

Having crossed again into Kumaon, I struck camp at Gungi. Before entering the village, I passed Dr. Wilson's dispensary, not then completed. In the village the houses were decorated with long poles joined by strings, from which hung and flew gaily in the breeze hundreds of wind prayers. The dwellings were mostly of the ancient, pure Shoka architecture, and not so fine or so clean as those in Garbyang. The place was picturesque, clear-cut against the curious background of the dome-like mountain, the Nabi Shankom, a peak of uncommon beauty with its grey and reddish striped strata. Near it on another mountain is the Gungi Shankom, a gigantic quadrangular rock of a warm yellow and reddish colour, not unlike a huge tower. When I reached its foot, the sun was casting his last dying rays on it, and the picture was so magical that I was tempted to sketch it. As I sat there, the shadow of the coming night rose higher and [77]higher on the mountain-side, tinting it violet blue, and above it the Gungi Shankom stood resplendent in all its glory like a tower of fire—till night descended covering the mountain first, and little by little the Gungi Shankom itself. I shall not easily forget this sight.

Having crossed back into Kumaon, I set up camp at Gungi. Before entering the village, I passed Dr. Wilson's dispensary, which was not yet finished. In the village, the houses were adorned with long poles connected by strings, from which hundreds of wind prayers hung and fluttered happily in the breeze. The homes were mostly built in the ancient, pure Shoka style and were not as fine or clean as those in Garbyang. The place was picturesque, sharply contrasting against the unique backdrop of the dome-like mountain, Nabi Shankom, a peak of unusual beauty with its grey and reddish striped layers. Nearby, on another mountain, stood Gungi Shankom, a massive quadrangular rock of warm yellow and reddish tones, resembling a giant tower. When I reached its base, the sun was casting its last fading rays on it, and the scene was so enchanting that I felt inspired to sketch it. As I sat there, the shadow of the approaching night climbed higher and higher on the mountain side, tinting it violet blue, while above it, Gungi Shankom shone brilliantly like a tower of fire—until night fell, first covering the mountain, and gradually enveloping Gungi Shankom itself. I won’t easily forget this sight.

Gungi Shankom

Gungi Shankom


I slept under my little tente d'abri and found it delightfully cosy and warm.

I slept under my little tente d'abri and found it wonderfully cozy and warm.

At 10 a.m. the next day I raised camp. The elevation here was 10,940 feet. Interesting was the Chiram, a collection of tombs, five in number, made of slabs of white stone with poles placed vertically upon them, and from the summit of which hung flying prayers. The Kuti River to my left was wide and rapid. On the opposite bank the village of Ronkan (11,100 feet) made a pretty vis-à-vis to the Nabi village on our side of the stream, at the same elevation, and directly under the lee of the Nabi Shankom.

At 10 morning the next day, I packed up camp. The altitude here was 10,940 feet. It was interesting to see the Chiram, a group of five tombs made of white stone slabs, with poles standing vertically on them, from which flying prayers hung down. The Kuti River to my left was wide and flowing quickly. On the other side, the village of Ronkan (11,100 feet) looked nice across from Nabi village on our side of the river, at the same altitude, and right under the shelter of Nabi Shankom.

As I rose gradually along the river course the vegetation grew sparse, and in front of me there remained nothing but barren rocks and high snowy peaks. The spot where, from opposite sides, the Gunkan River and the Nail River throw themselves into the Kuti River is most picturesque. There are on the water's edge a few pine-trees, but above there is nothing but wilderness—rock and ice and snow.

As I made my way up the river, the plants became less and less frequent, and all that was left in front of me were bare rocks and tall, snowy peaks. The place where the Gunkan River and the Nail River meet the Kuti River is really beautiful. There are a few pine trees by the water's edge, but above it stretches nothing but wilderness—rock, ice, and snow.

I soon came upon much snow, and places where the track along the mountain-side was undiscoverable. Walking was tiresome enough on the loose shingle and shale, but it became worse when I actually had to cut each step into the frozen snow. The work was tedious to a degree, and the [78] progress slow. After a while I noticed a series of lofty snow tunnels over the raging stream, which is earlier in the season covered entirely by a vault of ice and snow. The higher I got the harder and more slippery grew the snow. The soles of my shoes having become soaked and frozen made walking very difficult. At 12,000 feet, being about three hundred feet above the stream, I had to cross a particularly extensive snow-field, hard frozen and rising at a very steep angle. Some of my coolies had gone ahead, the others were behind. Notwithstanding the track cut by those ahead, it was necessary to re-cut each step with one's own feet, so as to prevent slipping. This was best done by hammering several times into the white sheet with the point of one's shoe until a cavity was made deep enough to contain the foot and to support one upright. It ought to be done carefully each time, but I fear I had not the patience for that. I thought I had found a quicker method, and by raising my knee high, I struck the snow with my heel, leaving my foot planted until the other one had by the same process cut the next step.

I quickly encountered a lot of snow, and areas where the path along the mountainside was impossible to find. Walking was already tiring on the loose gravel and shale, but it became even harder when I had to create each step in the frozen snow. The work was incredibly tedious, and the progress was slow. After a while, I noticed a series of tall snow tunnels over the rushing stream, which earlier in the season was completely covered by a layer of ice and snow. The higher I climbed, the harder and more slippery the snow became. The soles of my shoes had gotten soaked and frozen, making it really difficult to walk. At 12,000 feet, about three hundred feet above the stream, I had to cross a particularly large snowfield, which was hard and sloped at a steep angle. Some of my porters had gone ahead, while the others were behind. Despite the tracks made by those in front, I had to carve out each step myself to avoid slipping. The best way to do this was by striking the white surface multiple times with the tip of my shoe until I made a depression deep enough to fit my foot and keep me balanced. It was important to do this carefully each time, but I was afraid I didn’t have the patience for that. I thought I found a faster way, and by lifting my knee high, I hit the snow with my heel, leaving my foot in place until the other foot completed the next step in the same manner.

Zazzela Mount, near Gungi

Zazzela Mountain, near Gungi


It was in giving one of these vigorous thumps that I hit a spot where, under a thin coating of snow, was hard ice.

It was while giving one of these strong thumps that I struck a spot where, underneath a thin layer of snow, was solid ice.

[79]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Involuntary Tobogganing

Unintentional Sledding


[80]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

My foot, failing in its grip, slipped, and the impulse caused me to lose my balance. I slid down the steep incline at a terrific pace, accompanied in my involuntary tobogganing over ice and snow by the screams of my horror-stricken coolies. I realised that in another moment I should be pitched into the stream, which would have meant being carried under the long tunnel of ice to meet certain death beneath it. In those few seconds I found time to speculate even as to whether those stones by the water's edge would stop me, or whether the impetus must fling me past them into the river. I attempted to get a grip in the snow with my frozen fingers, to stem myself with my heels, but with no success, when I saw ahead of me a large stone rising above the snow. With desperate tension of every nerve and muscle, I knew as I approached it, with the foaming water yonder, that it was my only hope. I consciously straightened my legs for the contact. The bump was tremendous, and seemed to shatter every bone in my body. But it stopped me, and I was saved only a few feet from the water's edge—miraculously, although fearfully bruised, with no bones broken.

My foot lost its grip, and I fell off balance. I slid down the steep slope at breakneck speed, hearing the terrified screams of my panicking porters as I involuntarily rode down the ice and snow. I realized that in just a moment, I would go tumbling into the stream, which would mean being swept under the long tunnel of ice to my certain death. In those few seconds, I even had time to wonder if the stones at the water's edge would stop me or if the force would send me crashing past them into the river. I tried to dig my frozen fingers into the snow and stop myself with my heels, but it was no use. Then I saw a large rock ahead, rising from the snow. With every nerve and muscle tensed, I knew as I approached it, with the raging water nearby, that it was my only chance. I braced myself for impact. The jolt was enormous and felt like it shattered every bone in my body. But it worked—I stopped just a few feet from the water's edge—miraculously, though painfully bruised, and without any broken bones.

Chiram

Chiram


My fingers were cut by the ice and bleeding. When I was able to stand, I signalled to the frightened and wailing coolies above to go on, and I myself proceeded along the watercourse until I found a spot from which I could regain the upper track.

My fingers were sliced by the ice and bleeding. When I managed to stand up, I signaled to the scared and crying coolies above to continue, and I made my way along the watercourse until I found a place where I could get back to the upper path.


[81]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XIV

A palaver—To see is to believe—Dangers and perils on the snow and ice—Thar and Ghural—Stalking—A tiring climb to 16,000 feet—The collapse of a snow bridge.

At Kuti I halted and summoned the leading natives to my tent.

At Kuti I stopped and called the local leaders to my tent.

Would it be possible, I asked them, to get over the Lumpiya Pass or the still higher Mangshan? The first is a rarely frequented pass on the way to Gyanema, the other a high and most difficult pass by which it is possible, though not easy, to reach the Rakstal Lake by the jungle without going near a Tibetan settlement or encampment.

Would it be possible, I asked them, to cross the Lumpiya Pass or the even higher Mangshan? The first is a rarely used pass on the way to Gyanema, while the other is a very high and challenging pass that, although difficult, allows access to Rakstal Lake through the jungle without coming close to any Tibetan settlement or camp.

"No," was the decided answer from all the Shokas. "The snow is now too deep. Fresh snow falls daily. For another fortnight at least no human being can get across. To attempt it will mean losing one's life. At their best during one month in summer, those two passes are arduous and dangerous. Now it would be mere folly to attempt their ascent."

"No," was the firm response from all the Shokas. "The snow is way too deep now. Fresh snow falls every day. For at least another two weeks, no one can get across. Trying to do so would mean risking your life. Even in the best conditions during one month in summer, those two passes are tough and dangerous. Now, it would be pure madness to try and climb them."

With my distressingly sceptical nature I believe little that I do not see. I started next morning to observe for myself. My bearings were roughly North-West. Seeing me determined, several of the Kutial Shokas changed their mind and volunteered to follow me. They were of considerable help in many dangerous places. Here and there a few paces of narrow track were uncovered, otherwise we went long distances on frozen snow, over precipices down which it was almost fatal to look.

With my annoyingly skeptical nature, I believe little of what I can't see. The next morning, I set out to observe for myself. My general direction was North-West. Seeing that I was determined, several of the Kutial Shokas decided to join me. They were quite helpful in many risky spots. Occasionally, a few stretches of narrow track were visible; otherwise, we traveled long distances on frozen snow, over cliffs that it was nearly deadly to look down.

The lucky hairbreadth escape of the previous day contributed to make me lose confidence, not in myself, but in that white emblem of purity and innocence, in reality the most treacherous substance in creation. I soon found that wherever there was snow there was trouble. In spots where the snow was particularly hard frozen we dared not attempt [82] to walk on the steep slippery surface, and we had to descend to the river, which was here bridged over completely with ice and snow. Crossing, we would attempt progress on the other side, and having proceeded with difficulty for a few hundred yards, had to retrace our steps and try the first bank again. We thus crossed and recrossed the Kuti River more than half-a-dozen times, each crossing being preceded by a precipitous descent and immediately followed by a steep ascent. The cracks in the ice by the water-side were constant and perilous, and we did not risk remaining near them longer than was necessary. In six or seven hours we had walked a distance of less than four miles. Leaving the Kuti River and following due North the course of a tributary, the Kambelshio, we crossed over to its farther bank and pitched our tents at an altitude of 13,420 feet.

The close call I had the day before made me lose confidence, not in myself, but in that white symbol of purity and innocence, which is actually the most deceitful substance on earth. I quickly realized that wherever there was snow, there was trouble. In places where the snow was particularly hard and frozen, we were too afraid to walk on the steep, slippery surface, and we had to go down to the river, which was completely covered in ice and snow at this point. After crossing, we tried to make progress on the other side, but after moving a few hundred yards with great difficulty, we had to turn back and try the first bank again. We ended up crossing and recrossing the Kuti River more than six times, each crossing followed by a steep descent and then a steep climb. The cracks in the ice along the water's edge were constant and dangerous, and we didn’t stay near them any longer than necessary. In six or seven hours, we covered less than four miles. After leaving the Kuti River and heading north along a tributary, the Kambelshio, we crossed over to the other bank and set up our tents at an elevation of 13,420 feet.

Kuti

Kuti


There remained a few hours of daylight when we arrived, and I employed them by going after Thar or Tehr and Ghural (Himahlyan chamois) a couple of miles farther. I rose to 15,000 feet on a needle-like peak towering over the spot where, in a narrow picturesque gorge, the Tongzu

There were still a few hours of daylight left when we got there, so I used that time to go after Thar or Tehr and Ghural (Himalayan chamois) a couple of miles farther. I climbed up to 15,000 feet on a sharp peak that loomed over the area where, in a narrow, scenic gorge, the Tongzu

[83]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Snow Bridges over the Kuti River

Snow Bridges over the Kuti River


[84] pangti enters the Kuti River. The sources of the Tongzu pangti are about a thousand feet higher than the spot where it meets the Kuti River, and the stream has its birth from the melting snows, descending precipitously and in a very short distance into the larger river.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Pangti flows into the Kuti River. The origins of the Tongzu pangti are roughly a thousand feet higher than where it merges with the Kuti River, fed by melting snow as it descends rapidly over a short distance into the larger river.

The rocks are here furred with saltpetre, and it is said to be a favourite spot for Thar.[9]

The rocks are covered in saltpeter, and it's said to be a favorite spot for Thar.[9]

Old Shoka Woman Smoking

Elderly Woman Smoking


I enjoyed my trip so much that, rising with the sun, I started on the following morning to repeat my experience. Moreover, I wanted to climb to some high point wherefrom [85] I could make certain whether it was possible to proceed immediately across the Himahlyan range, or whether it was advisable to wait patiently until the snow had to some extent disappeared. I walked four miles from camp, reaching an altitude of 16,000 feet. The ascent was rather tiring. Having wounded a Thar, I went after it up a fatiguing snow-field at a speed too great to be comfortable at such a very high elevation. When I reached the top, I was out of breath and the Thar too far off for a second shot.

I enjoyed my trip so much that, rising with the sun, I set out the next morning to relive my experience. Also, I wanted to climb to a high point where I could determine whether it was possible to cross the Himalayan range immediately or if I should wait patiently until the snow had mostly melted. I walked four miles from camp, reaching an altitude of 16,000 feet. The climb was quite tiring. After injuring a Thar, I chased it up a challenging snowfield at a pace that felt uncomfortable at such a high elevation. By the time I reached the top, I was out of breath, and the Thar was too far away for a second shot.

The view this high point commanded was stupendous. For miles and miles—and it seemed hundreds of miles—snow, snow, nothing but snow! There stood Jolinkan Mount rising above 19,000 feet. On either side of the Kuti River were peaks as high as 20,000 feet and more. Here and there the white sheet that covered the surrounding country seemed almost greenish. Those spots were glaciers, and I saw many of them, feeding as they do the numerous streams flowing into the Kuti River. I returned to camp for lunch. It was useless to proceed and even more useless remaining still. I gave orders to raise the camp, and at 2 p.m. we were under way back to Kuti.

The view from this high point was amazing. For miles and miles—and it felt like hundreds of miles—there was nothing but snow! Jolinkan Mount rose above 19,000 feet. On either side of the Kuti River were peaks that soared to 20,000 feet and beyond. Here and there, the white blanket covering the landscape appeared almost greenish. Those patches were glaciers, and I spotted many of them, feeding the numerous streams flowing into the Kuti River. I went back to camp for lunch. It was pointless to keep going and even more pointless to stay put. I instructed the team to pack up the camp, and at 2 PM we set off back to Kuti.

The day had been an unusually warm one, and the surface of the snow, so hard the previous day, was now soft and watery. Several of the snow bridges had already disappeared.

The day had been surprisingly warm, and the snow, which was so hard the day before, was now soft and slushy. Several of the snow bridges had already melted away.

I had descended to the river preceded by some of my coolies. Two of them just in front of me were crossing over the stream on a thick and broad archway of ice. I was waiting for them to be safely across. When the men had nearly reached the other side they noticed a peculiar vibration underfoot. Scrambling away as best they could, they gave the alarm.

I had gone down to the river, followed by a few of my workers. Two of them, walking just ahead of me, were crossing the stream on a thick, wide sheet of ice. I was waiting for them to get across safely. When the men were almost at the other side, they felt a strange vibration beneath their feet. They scrambled away as best they could and raised the alarm.

I drew back hastily. In the nick of time! for with a deafening roar like magnified thunder echoed from cliff to cliff, down went the bridge. The huge pieces of ice, only a moment before forming part of the vault, were now swept away by the furious stream and thrown with tremendous force against the next bridge, which quivered under the terrible clash.

I pulled back quickly. Just in time! Because with a thunderous boom that sounded like amplified thunder echoing from one cliff to another, the bridge collapsed. The massive chunks of ice that had just seconds ago been part of the arch were now swept away by the raging current and slammed violently against the next bridge, which shook from the impact.

Three days' marching over the same route brought me back to Garbyang.

Three days of marching along the same route brought me back to Garbyang.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[9] The Gural is the Himahlyan chamois found at even comparatively low elevations. They are generally seen in herds, with the exception of the oldest males, which are usually met with alone. It is not uncommon to see as many as eight or ten together, especially during their feeding time, shortly after sunrise and an hour or two before sunset.

[9] The Gural is the Himalayan chamois that can be found at relatively low elevations. They are usually spotted in groups, except for the oldest males, who are typically seen alone. It's not unusual to observe as many as eight or ten of them together, especially during their feeding time, shortly after sunrise and an hour or two before sunset.

Tehr or Thar (male) and Jahral (female) is the true and proper wild goat of the higher Himahlyan range. It is rarely found lower than 7000 feet and often as high as 15,000 feet above sea level. Those found at lower elevations do not possess quite such a luxuriant growth of hair, nor, I am told, are their curved horns quite so long. They climb about precipices and dangerous spots with the greatest ease.

Tehr or Thar (male) and Jahral (female) is the genuine wild goat of the higher Himalayan range. It's seldom found below 7,000 feet and often as high as 15,000 feet above sea level. Those located at lower elevations don't have as thick a coat of hair, and, from what I've heard, their curved horns aren't quite as long. They navigate cliffs and risky areas with remarkable ease.


[86]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XV

An earthquake—Curious notions of the natives—A Shoka tailor and his ways—The arrival of silver cash—Two rocks in the Kali—Arrogance of a Tibetan spy.

On hearing that Dr. Wilson was now in Garbyang I went to call upon him. Squatted on soft Chinese and Tibetan mats and rugs, we were enjoying cup after cup of tea and devouring chapatis, when suddenly the whole building began to shake and rumble in the queerest manner, upsetting teapot and milk and sending the chapatis roaming to and fro all over the room.

When I heard that Dr. Wilson was in Garbyang, I decided to pay him a visit. Sitting on comfy Chinese and Tibetan mats and rugs, we were savoring cup after cup of tea and munching on chapatis, when suddenly the whole building started shaking and rumbling in the strangest way, knocking over the teapot and milk and sending the chapatis flying all over the room.

Leaving Dr. Wilson to save our precious beverage, I pulled out watch and compass to notice duration and direction of the shock. It was undulatory, very violent, and oscillating from S.S.W. to N.N.E. The duration was exactly four minutes two seconds. The earthquake began at 5.20 p.m. and ended at 5h. 24m. 2s.

Leaving Dr. Wilson to save our precious drink, I pulled out my watch and compass to track the duration and direction of the shock. It was undulating, very violent, and oscillating from S.S.W. to N.N.E. The duration was exactly four minutes and two seconds. The earthquake started at 5:20 PM and ended at 5:24:02.

"It strikes me that it would have been wise to have gone out of the house," said I. "It is a wonder the building did not collapse. My cup is full of mud and débris from the ceiling."[10]

"It occurs to me that it would have been smart to leave the house," I said. "It's amazing the building didn't fall down. My cup is filled with mud and debris from the ceiling."[10]

"I have saved the tea for you!" said the Doctor, triumphantly lifting in his muscular hands the teapot, which he had carefully nursed. He had soon discovered my devotion to the yellow liquid.

"I've saved the tea for you!" said the Doctor, proudly lifting the teapot with his strong hands, which he had carefully looked after. He quickly realized how much I loved the golden liquid.

We were quietly going on with our refreshment when a band of excited Shokas broke into the room.

We were quietly enjoying our snacks when a group of excited Shokas burst into the room.

"Sahib! Sahib! where has it gone?" cried they in a chorus, stretching their hands towards me and then folding them in sign of prayer. "Sahib! tell us where it has gone!"

"Sahib! Sahib! Where did it go?" they cried in unison, reaching out their hands toward me and then folding them in a gesture of prayer. "Sahib! Please tell us where it has gone!"

[87] "What?" rejoined I, amused at their suspense.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] "What?" I replied, finding their anticipation entertaining.

"Did you not feel the earth shake and quiver?" exclaimed the astounded visitors.

"Did you not feel the ground shake and tremble?" exclaimed the amazed visitors.

"Oh yes, but that is nothing."

"Oh yeah, but that's no big deal."

"Oh no, Sahib! That is the precursory notice of some great calamity. The 'spirit' under the earth is waking up and is shaking its back."

"Oh no, Sir! That's a warning of some major disaster. The 'spirit' underground is stirring and shaking itself awake."

"I would rather it shook its back than mine," said I jokingly.

"I'd prefer it to shake its back instead of mine," I said jokingly.

A Well-attended School

A Popular School


"Or mine," added the Doctor lightly, much to the astonishment of our awestricken callers.

"Or mine," the Doctor added casually, much to the surprise of our amazed guests.

"Which way did it go?" repeated the impatient Shokas.

"Which way did it go?" Shokas asked again, showing his impatience.

I pointed towards the N.N.E. and they gave a sigh of satisfaction. It must have proceeded to the other side of the Himahlyas.

I pointed to the N.N.E. and they sighed with satisfaction. It probably made its way to the other side of the Himalayas.

It appears, according to the primitive notions of the Shokas, that inside the earth lives in a torpid condition an evil spirit in the shape of a gigantic reptile. The rumbling preceding an earthquake is, to the Shoka mind, nothing else than the heavy breathing of the monster previous to waking, whereas the actual shock is caused by the brute stretching its limbs. When fully awake the serpent-like demon darts and forces its way in one direction, compelling the earth to quake all along its subterranean passage, often causing by so violent a procedure great damage to property and loss of life, not to speak of the fear and terror which it strikes in man and beast, should the capricious spirit by chance make a return journey to the spot below the earth's crust directly [88] underfoot. It is curious and interesting, in analysing these crude notions, to find that, independently of the cause attributed to its origin, the Shokas are aware of the fact that an earthquake "travels" in a certain direction. Moreover, common symptoms of the approach of a violent earthquake, such as depression and heaviness in the atmosphere, which they attribute to a feverish state of the giant reptile, are readily recognised by them.

According to the basic beliefs of the Shokas, there’s an evil spirit living in a dormant state inside the earth, appearing as a huge reptile. The rumbling that comes before an earthquake is, in the eyes of the Shoka people, just the heavy breathing of this monster as it wakes up, while the actual shock is caused by the beast stretching its limbs. When fully awake, the serpent-like demon moves forcefully in one direction, making the earth shake all along its underground path, often resulting in significant property damage and loss of life, not to mention the fear and panic it instills in people and animals, especially if the unpredictable spirit happens to return to the spot directly beneath someone’s feet. It’s interesting to note that, despite their simplistic beliefs about its origin, the Shokas recognize that an earthquake "travels" in a specific direction. Additionally, they easily identify common signs that a violent earthquake is approaching, like a feeling of heaviness in the atmosphere, which they attribute to the giant reptile being in a feverish state.

My Banker and Agent
My Banker and Agent

On my return to civilisation some months later I discovered that on the same day a violent shock was felt all over India, causing considerable damage, especially in Calcutta.

On my return to civilization a few months later, I found out that on the same day, a strong shock was felt all over India, causing significant damage, especially in Calcutta.

I had on first arriving in Garbyang ordered a tent, and the tailor who was entrusted with its manufacture had, after several days' intoxication, completed it. It was on the Tibetan pattern, with picturesque ornaments in blue. He had also been making me some Nepalese clothes, and these really turned out quite a success, no small wonder considering the way he went to work. I had given him cloth and lining, which he took away with him, but he never troubled to take my measure! He simply assured me that the suit would be ready on the following day. This was of course not the case, and on the next afternoon and for six consecutive days he placed himself in a state of hopeless intoxication under my window, singing, and making comical salaams each time I, after the custom of the country, threw something at him to induce him to go away. On the seventh day I caught him and shook him by the ears, explaining that if the clothes were not ready before nightfall, I would, in default of other tailors, sew them myself.

When I first arrived in Garbyang, I ordered a tent, and the tailor assigned to make it had, after several days of drinking, finally finished it. It was designed in the Tibetan style, featuring colorful blue decorations. He was also making me some Nepalese clothes, which actually turned out pretty well, not surprising considering his approach to the task. I had given him the fabric and lining, which he took with him, but he never bothered to take my measurements! He just promised that the outfit would be ready the next day. Of course, that wasn’t true, and for the next six days, he sat in a drunken stupor outside my window, singing and doing silly bows every time I threw something at him, as is customary in the region, to get him to leave. On the seventh day, I grabbed him by the ears and told him that if the clothes weren’t ready by nightfall, I would, lacking other tailors, sew them myself.

"I have a drop too much in me," confessed the amusing rascal. "I will go to sleep now. When I wake in the afternoon I shall be sober and will finish my work. Do not be angry, Sahib. If only you drank yourself, Sahib, you would know how lovely it is to be drunk." His philosophy [89] did not agree with mine. But I felt sure that I had so far impressed him, that he knew he must risk some personal violence if he delayed much longer. Sure enough, late in the evening he came with his work.

"I've had a bit too much to drink," the funny guy admitted. "I’m going to sleep now. When I wake up in the afternoon, I’ll be sober and will finish my work. Please don’t be mad, Sahib. If you drank too, Sahib, you’d understand how wonderful it is to be drunk." His way of thinking didn’t match mine. But I was confident that I had made enough of an impression on him that he knew he had to risk some trouble if he waited much longer. Sure enough, later in the evening, he showed up with his work.

"How they will fit I do not dare to guess," I remarked to Dr. Wilson, "considering the condition the man has been in while making them, and taking into account that he never measured me nor tried them on. After all, Nepalese clothes should be tight-fitting all over."

"How they're going to fit, I can't even guess," I said to Dr. Wilson, "especially given the state the guy was in while making them, and the fact that he never measured me or tried them on. After all, Nepalese clothes are supposed to be snug all around."

The Valley of Garbyang

The Garbyang Valley


Wonderful as it may seem, the clothes fitted like a glove. Clearly, that man was a genius. Anyhow he was intemperate enough to have been one.

Wonderful as it may seem, the clothes fit perfectly. Clearly, that man was a genius. Anyway, he was reckless enough to have been one.


One day I had gone for a walk along the deserted road from the village. I was about a mile and a half from the inhabited part, when three men, who had been fast approaching, stood with blunt swords in front of me. They waved their blades clumsily and shouted at the top of their voices in an excited manner: "Rupiya! Rupiya!" ("Rupees! [90] Rupees!") Without thinking of the money that I had sent for and expected to receive, I took their attitude as a threatening demand for the cash I might have on me. They were really grotesque in their gesticulations, and I brusquely pushed by them and continued my constitutional. When they saw me depart, they scurried away hastily towards Garbyang, and I gave the occurrence no further thought. On my return to the village, however, some hours later, a crowd of Shokas came up to me announcing that my money had arrived, and that the scared messengers, not daring to come near me a second time, had gone to Dr. Wilson's house. There I found a peon and two chaprassis, the three men I had met on the road. They had brought a sum of eighteen hundred rupees in silver, nearly all in two-anna and four-anna pieces (sixteen annas to a rupee), which I had sent for from my banker, Anti Ram Sah, at Almora, and which it had taken three men to carry, owing to its weight.

One day, I took a walk along the deserted road away from the village. I was about a mile and a half from the populated area when three men, who had been approaching quickly, stood in front of me with blunt swords. They waved their blades awkwardly and shouted excitedly, "Rupiya! Rupiya!" ("Rupees! [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Rupees!") Without thinking about the money I had ordered and was expecting, I took their behavior as a threatening demand for any cash I might have on me. They looked ridiculous with their wild gestures, and I quickly pushed past them and continued my walk. When they saw me leave, they hurried off towards Garbyang, and I didn't think about it again. However, when I returned to the village a few hours later, a group of Shokas approached me to let me know that my money had arrived. The frightened messengers, too scared to come near me again, had gone to Dr. Wilson's house. There, I found a peon and two chaprassis, the same three men I had encountered on the road. They had brought a total of eighteen hundred rupees in silver, mostly in two-anna and four-anna coins (sixteen annas make a rupee), which I had requested from my banker, Anti Ram Sah, in Almora, and it took three of them to carry it because of its weight.

After an easy explanation with these three very peaceful highwaymen, the silver was conveyed to my room, and the greater part of the night had to be spent in counting the diminutive coins and packing them up in rolls of ten rupees each.

After a quick chat with these three calm highwaymen, the silver was taken to my room, and I had to spend most of the night counting the small coins and packing them into rolls of ten rupees each.


Just below Garbyang in the Kali River were, among a mass of others, two large rocks in the centre of the stream. These two rocks were constantly watched by the Shokas. The Kali, though named after a small spring below its real source, is, like most of its tributaries, mainly fed by melting snows. The greater quantity of water descends from the Jolinkan, the Lumpiya, the Mangshan, the Lippu, and the Tinker passes. The first four are in Kumaon, the last in Nepal. It stands to reason that the warmer the weather the greater is the quantity of snow melting on the passes, and therefore the higher the level of the river. When the two rocks are altogether under water all the passes are known to be open.[11]

Just below Garbyang in the Kali River, there were two large rocks in the middle of the stream, among many others. The Shokas kept a constant watch on these two rocks. The Kali, named after a small spring that’s actually downstream from its true source, is mostly fed by melting snow, like many of its tributaries. The majority of the water comes from the Jolinkan, the Lumpiya, the Mangshan, the Lippu, and the Tinker passes. The first four are in Kumaon, and the last is in Nepal. It makes sense that as the weather gets warmer, more snow melts on the passes, raising the river's level. When the two rocks are completely submerged, it signifies that all the passes are open.[11]

During the time I was in Garbyang I never had the luck to see this, but the level of the river was daily rising, and the time of tiresome expectation was certainly relieved by many amusing, and a few awkward incidents.

During my time in Garbyang, I never got the chance to see this, but the river level was rising every day, and the long wait was definitely lightened by many amusing moments and a few awkward ones.

Having once been informed of my plans, the Jong Pen of Taklakot in Tibet was kept fully acquainted with my movements. His spies went daily backwards and forwards with [91] details about me. This my friends confided to me regularly. One of these emissaries, a stalwart Tibetan, more daring than the rest, actually had the impudence to enter my room, and to address me in a boisterous tone of voice. At first I treated him kindly, but he became more and more arrogant, and informed me, before several frightened Shokas to whom he was showing off, that the British soil I was standing on was Tibetan property. The British, he said, were usurpers and only there on sufferance. He declared that the English were cowards and afraid of the Tibetans, even if they oppressed the Shokas.

Once I informed him of my plans, the Jong Pen of Taklakot in Tibet was kept fully updated on my movements. His spies went back and forth daily with details about me. My friends shared this information with me regularly. One of these agents, a robust Tibetan, bolder than the others, had the nerve to walk into my room and speak to me in a loud, brash manner. At first, I treated him kindly, but he grew increasingly arrogant and told me, in front of several frightened Shokas whom he was trying to impress, that the British land I was on belonged to Tibet. He claimed the British were invaders, only there by permission. He insisted that the English were cowards scared of the Tibetans, even though they oppressed the Shokas.

This remark was too much for me, and it might anyhow have been unwise to allow it to pass unchallenged. Throwing myself on him, I grabbed him by his pigtail and landed in his face a number of blows straight from the shoulder. When I let him go, he threw himself down crying, and implored my pardon. Once and for all to disillusion the Tibetan on one or two points, I made him lick my shoes clean with his tongue, in the presence of the assembled Shokas. This done, he tried to scamper away, but I caught him once more by his pigtail, and kicked him down the front steps which he had dared to come up unasked.

This comment was too much for me, and it would have been unwise to let it slide. I lunged at him, grabbed his pigtail, and delivered a series of punches straight to his face. When I finally let him go, he collapsed in tears and begged for my forgiveness. To set the record straight with the Tibetan on a couple of points, I made him clean my shoes with his tongue in front of the gathered Shokas. After that, he tried to escape, but I caught him again by his pigtail and kicked him down the front steps that he had dared to come up without permission.

Chanden Sing happened to be basking in the sun at the foot, and seeing the hated foreigner make so contemptible an exit, leapt on him like a cat. He had heard me say, "Ye admi bura crab!" ("That man is very bad.") That was enough for him, and before the Tibetan had regained his feet, my bearer covered his angular features with a perfect shower of blows. In the excitement of the moment, Chanden Sing, thinking himself quite the hero, began even to shy huge stones at his terror-stricken victim, and at last, getting hold of his pigtail, to drag him round the yard—until I interfered and stopped the sport.

Chanden Sing was soaking up the sun at the bottom when he saw the despised foreigner make such a pathetic exit, and he jumped on him like a cat. He had heard me say, "That man is very bad." That was enough for him, and before the Tibetan could get back on his feet, my bearer unleashed a flurry of punches on his sharp features. Caught up in the excitement, Chanden Sing, feeling like a hero, even started throwing big stones at his terrified victim, and finally, grabbing his pigtail, he dragged him around the yard—until I stepped in and put an end to the fun.

Chanden Sing and the Daku Rolling up my Bedding

Chanden Sing and the Daku Rolling Up My Bedding


FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[10] The ceilings of Shoka houses are plastered with mud.

[10] The ceilings of Shoka houses are coated with mud.

[11] N.B. The Lippu Pass, the lowest of all, may be crossed, with difficulty, nearly all the year round.

[11] Note: The Lippu Pass, the lowest of all, can be crossed, though with difficulty, almost year-round.


[92]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XVI

The Rambang—Shoka music—Love-songs—Doleful singing—Abrupt ending—Solos—Smoking—When marriage is contemplated—The Delang—Adultery—Punishment.

Motema, a Shoka Beauty

Motema, a Shoka beauty


One Shoka institution, surprising in a primitive people, but nevertheless, to my way of thinking, eminently sensible and advantageous, is the Rambang, a meeting-place or club where girls and young men come together at night, for the sake of better acquaintance, prior to entering into matrimony. Each village possesses one or more institutions of this kind, and they are indiscriminately patronised by all well-to-do people, who recognise the institution as a sound basis on which marriage can be arranged. The Rambang houses are either in the village itself, or half way between one village and the next, the young women of one village thus entering into amicable relations with the young men of the other and vice versâ. I visited many of these in company with Shokas, and found them very interesting. Round a big fire in the centre of the room men and women sat in couples, spinning wool and chatting merrily, for everything appeared decorous and cheerful. With the small hours of the morning, they seemed to become more sentimental, and began singing songs without instrumental [93] accompaniment, the rise and fall of the voices sounding weird and haunting to a degree. The Shoka men and women possess soft, musical voices, and the sounds which they utter are not simply a series of notes emitted through the throat, but, as it were, the vibration of impressions coming from the heart, and transmitted by means of their voices to others. Eastern in its character, the Shoka music is pleasing to the Western ear, not because it possesses quick progressions, flourishes, or any elaborate technicalities, but because it conveys the impression of reality and feeling. The responsive duets, sung by a young man and answered by a girl, pleased me most.

One Shoka institution, which is surprising for a primitive people but is, in my opinion, very sensible and beneficial, is the Rambang. This is a gathering place or club where girls and young men meet at night to get to know each other better before considering marriage. Each village has one or more of these establishments, and they are frequented by all well-off individuals who see it as a solid foundation for arranging marriages. The Rambang houses are typically located either in the village or halfway between neighboring villages, allowing young women from one village to connect with young men from another, and vice versa. I visited many of these places with Shokas and found them quite fascinating. Around a large fire in the middle of the room, men and women sat in pairs, spinning wool and chatting happily, creating a decorous and cheerful atmosphere. As the early hours of the morning approached, they seemed to get more sentimental and started singing songs without any musical accompaniment, the rise and fall of their voices sounding eerily beautiful. The Shoka men and women have soft, melodic voices, and what they sing isn't just a series of notes but rather an expression of emotions coming from the heart, conveyed through their voices to others. Characteristically Eastern, Shoka music appeals to Western ears not because it includes fast sequences, embellishments, or complex techniques, but because it conveys a sense of authenticity and emotion. I particularly enjoyed the responsive duets, where a young man would sing and a girl would respond.

On the Way to the Rambang

On the Way to the Rambang


All their songs are plaintive, and contain modulations of the voice so mysteriously charming in effect, and so good in tone, that they really affect one profoundly. They only sing when the mood takes them; never with a view to please others, but always simply to give vent to their emotions. Their love-songs generally open with a sentimental recitative, and then change into actual singing, with frequent modulations from one key into another. The [94] time is irregular, and though certain rhythmical peculiarities recur constantly, yet each performer gives to what he sings so strong a personality of execution as to make it almost an individual composition. Any one hearing Shokas sing for the first time would imagine that each singer was improvising as he went along, but on closer comparison it will be found that musical phrases, certain favourite passages and modulations in the voice, constantly recur not only in each song, but in all songs. They seem all of them based on the same doleful tune, probably a very ancient one, and only the different time in which it is given, and the eccentricities of the singer, give it a separate and special character. One characteristic of Shoka songs—as of so many other Oriental tunes—is that they have no rounded ending, and this, to my ears, rather spoiled them. A similar abrupt break is a feature of their dances and their drum-beating. The song suddenly stops in the middle of the air with a curious grating sound of the voice, and I could not obtain any entirely satisfactory explanation of this: the only answer given me was that the singer could not go on for ever, and that as long as he stopped it did not matter how he did it. Further, they considered an abrupt ending most suitable to music (or dancing), as it immediately brought you back to your normal state, should your mind have been carried away. One pleasant feature was that their songs were never sung in a loud tone of voice, nor did they aim at notes too high or too low for their voices, but kept themselves well within their compass.

All their songs are emotional and feature voice modulations that are mysteriously captivating and have a beautiful tone, which truly touches you deeply. They only sing when they feel like it; it's never to please others but simply to express their feelings. Their love songs usually start with a sentimental recitative and then shift into actual singing, often changing keys. The timing is irregular, and while certain rhythmic patterns repeat, each performer gives their singing such a personal touch that it almost feels like a unique composition. Anyone hearing Shokas sing for the first time might think each singer is improvising, but upon closer examination, you'll notice that musical phrases, favorite lines, and voice modulations often recur in each song and across all songs. They all seem to be based on the same sorrowful melody, likely a very old one, with the different timing and quirky styles of the singers giving each rendition a unique character. One notable feature of Shoka songs—like many other Oriental melodies—is that they don't have a smooth ending, which, to my ear, made them somewhat less enjoyable. A similar sharp break is evident in their dances and drumming. The song suddenly stops halfway through with a strange, grating voice sound, and I couldn't get a clear explanation for this; the only reason I was given was that the singer can't go on forever, and as long as they stop, it doesn't matter how they do it. Additionally, they found that an abrupt ending was the best way to finish music (or dance) since it quickly brings you back to reality if your mind has wandered. One nice aspect was that their songs were never sung loudly, nor did they try to hit notes that were too high or too low for their voices; they always stayed well within their range.

Shoka EarringsShoka Earrings
Shoka Earrings

The only difference between solos given by men, and those sung by women, was that the former showed more plaintiveness and sentimentality, and greater mutability of thought, whereas the latter were more uniform, more lively, and less imaginative in their representation of feelings. The words of the love-songs, nearly always impromptu, can hardly be set down in these pages. From our standard of morality, and away from their own special surroundings, they might seem almost lewd, while in their place they certainly did [95] not impress me as offensive. When singing, the Shokas usually raise the end of their white shawl or dress, and hold it by the side of the head.

The only difference between solos sung by men and those sung by women was that the former expressed more sadness and sentimentality, and showed more changeability in thoughts, while the latter were more consistent, livelier, and less creative in conveying emotions. The lyrics of the love songs, almost always impromptu, can hardly be included here. From our moral perspective, and outside of their specific context, they might seem almost inappropriate, while in their original setting they certainly didn’t strike me as offensive. When singing, the Shokas usually lift the end of their white shawl or dress and hold it to the side of their head.

Silver Earrings of Tibetan Origin, with Coral BeadsSilver Earring of Tibetan Origin, with Coral Beads
Tibetan Silver Earrings with Coral Beads

Smoking was general, each couple sharing the same pipe. A few burning sticks of pine stuck in the rough wall formed the only illumination, save the fire in the centre of the room slowly burning out. Signs of sleepiness became evident as morning came, and soon they all retired in couples, and went to sleep in their clothes on a soft layer of straw and grass. There they slept peacefully in a row, and I retraced my steps to my diggings amidst a deafening barking of pariah dogs. At these gatherings every Shoka girl regularly meets with young men, and while she entertains the idea of selecting among them a suitable partner for life, she also does a considerable quantity of work with her spinning-wheel. Eventually, when a couple consider marriage advisable, the young man, dressed in his best clothes, proceeds to the house of his intended father-in-law, carrying with him a pot of chökti (wine), dried fruit, ghur (sweet paste), miseri (sugar-candy), and grilled grain. If the bridegroom is considered a suitable match, the parents of the girl receive the young man with due consideration, and partake heartily of the food and drink proffered by him. The marriage is there and then arranged, the bridegroom further disbursing to the father a sum of not less than five rupees and not more than one hundred. This is the etiquette of good Shoka society, and of all people who can afford it, the payment being called "milk-money," or money equivalent to the sum spent by the girl's relations in bringing her up. The marriage ceremony is simple enough. A cake called Delang is baked, of which the friends of the two families partake. If either the bridegroom or bride refuses to eat a share of the cake, the marriage is broken off; if they both eat some of the [96] cake, and later any dissension arises between them, all those who assisted at the function are called as witnesses that the marriage took place. Often even this primitive ceremony of eating cake is dispensed with, and Shoka marriages begin and continue as happy and faithful unions, without any special form of service or rite to solemnise the tie.

Smoking was common, with each couple sharing the same pipe. A few burning sticks of pine stuck in the rough wall provided the only light, aside from the fire in the center of the room that was slowly burning out. Signs of sleepiness appeared as morning approached, and soon they all paired up and fell asleep in their clothes on a soft layer of straw and grass. They slept peacefully in a row, and I retraced my steps to my diggings amid the deafening barking of stray dogs. At these gatherings, every Shoka girl regularly meets young men, and while she considers choosing a suitable life partner among them, she also does quite a bit of work with her spinning wheel. Eventually, when a couple thinks marriage is a good idea, the young man, dressed in his best clothes, goes to the house of his prospective father-in-law, bringing with him a pot of chökti (wine), dried fruit, ghur (sweet paste), miseri (sugar-candy), and grilled grain. If the bridegroom is deemed a good match, the girl's parents welcome him with due respect and happily share the food and drink he has brought. The marriage is arranged right then and there, with the bridegroom giving the father a sum of no less than five rupees and no more than one hundred. This is the custom of accepted Shoka society, and for everyone who can afford it, this payment is referred to as "milk-money," or money equivalent to what the girl's family spent raising her. The marriage ceremony is quite simple. A cake called Delang is baked, and friends from both families share it. If either the bridegroom or bride refuses to eat a piece, the marriage is called off; if they both partake and later have any disagreements, all the attendees serve as witnesses that the marriage took place. Often, even this basic cake-eating ceremony is skipped altogether, and Shoka marriages start and continue as happy and faithful unions without any special service or rite to formalize their bond.

Shoka Woman Weaving

Shoka Woman Weaving


They not only visit adultery on the guilty man himself by beating him, but the men proceed en masse to the house of his parents and denude it of all furniture, stores of grain, and merchandise. They confiscate the sheep, goats, yaks, and all their valuable saddles and loads, and present the whole proceeds to the man whose wife has been seduced—a recompense for the shame suffered. Frequently the unfortunate and innocent relations of the evil-doer are bound and even beaten to death by the villagers. These severe measures are resorted to in order to maintain a high standard of morality and honour, and there is little doubt that, primitive as these methods may seem, the good results [97] obtained more than justify them. There are very few illegitimate births, with the exception of occasional Rambang children, and their arrival is a matter of such disgrace that they cannot be looked upon as seriously discrediting the social value of the Rambang.

They not only punish the guilty man directly by beating him, but the men also go in a group to his parents' house and strip it of all its furniture, food supplies, and goods. They take the sheep, goats, yaks, and all their valuable saddles and loads, and give everything to the man whose wife was seduced as compensation for the shame he endured. Often, the innocent family members of the wrongdoer are bound and even beaten to death by the villagers. These harsh actions are taken to uphold a strong sense of morality and honor, and there’s little doubt that, while these methods may seem primitive, the positive outcomes achieved more than warrant them. There are very few illegitimate births, except for the occasional Rambang children, and their existence is such a disgrace that they aren’t seen as seriously damaging the social standing of the Rambang.

Rambang Girls with Ornaments

Rambang Girls Wearing Ornaments


[98]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XVII

FUNERAL RITES

Departure of the Soul—Cremation—Amusement of the dead man's soul—The lay figure—Feasting—Doleful dance—Transmigration of the soul—Expensive ceremonies—Offerings before the lay figure—Dancing and contortions—Martial dances—Solo dances—The animal to be sacrificed and the lay figure—Chasing the animal from the village—Tearing out its heart—The yak driven over a precipice—Head shaving—A sacred cave.

The Shokas ascribe death to the departure of the soul from the body, and to this notion is due the curious reverence they show for the spirit or memory of their dead. I witnessed a funeral ceremony quaint enough to deserve record.

The Shokas believe that death happens when the soul leaves the body, and this idea explains the unique respect they have for the spirit or memory of those who have passed away. I saw a funeral ceremony that was unusual enough to be worth noting.

A man had died a painful death, the result of an accident. His friends were immediately sent for, and the corpse, having been smeared with butter (ghi), was dressed in his best clothes. They bent his body double before the rigor set in, and placed him on a hurriedly constructed wooden hearse. He was covered with a blue-and-gold embroidered cloth, and a white one over it. At sunrise, the funeral procession left the house for the place of cremation. First came a row of ten women, their heads covered with a long strip of white cotton cloth, one end of which was tied to the hearse. Among these were the near relations of the deceased, including his wife and daughters, crying and wailing the words, "Oh bajo! Oh bajo!" (Oh father! oh father!), the rest of them sobbing and making great show of grief. The deceased having been somewhat of a favourite in Garbyang, the villagers turned out in force to render him this last tribute, and they took their place in the procession as it slowly wound down the cliff towards the river. The hearse was [99] carried by two men, and each male Shoka following bore a log or bundle of firewood. We reached the Kali. The body was temporarily laid on the bank of the stream, while all the men, with heads uncovered, collected large stones and pieces of wood. With the stones a circular crematory oven, five feet high, six feet in diameter, with an opening on the side facing the wind, was erected by the water-side. The wife and daughters of the departed, with their hoods turned inside out and with covered faces, squatted down meanwhile by the hearse, moaning and keeping a small fire alight. When all preparations were made, the oven being heaped up with logs of wood, the body was untied from the stretcher and lifted by two intimates of the departed on to the funeral pile.

A man had died a painful death due to an accident. His friends were called immediately, and his body, which had been smeared with butter (ghi), was dressed in his best clothes. They bent his body before the rigor mortis set in and placed him on a quickly made wooden hearse. He was covered with a blue-and-gold embroidered cloth, with a white one on top of it. At sunrise, the funeral procession left the house for the cremation site. Leading the way were ten women, their heads covered with long strips of white cotton cloth, one end tied to the hearse. Among them were the deceased's close relatives, including his wife and daughters, crying and wailing, "Oh bajo! Oh bajo!" (Oh father! oh father!), while the others sobbed, putting on a great show of grief. The deceased had been somewhat of a favorite in Garbyang, so the villagers showed up in large numbers to pay their respects, joining the procession as it slowly made its way down the cliff toward the river. The hearse was [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] carried by two men, and each male Shoka followed, carrying a log or bundle of firewood. We reached the Kali. The body was temporarily placed on the bank of the stream, while all the men, with their heads uncovered, gathered large stones and pieces of wood. Using the stones, they built a circular crematory oven, five feet high and six feet in diameter, with an opening on the side facing the wind by the water's edge. The wife and daughters of the deceased, with their hoods turned inside out and faces covered, sat by the hearse, moaning and keeping a small fire burning. Once all preparations were complete, with the oven piled high with logs, the body was untied from the stretcher and lifted by two close friends onto the funeral pyre.

Weeping Women under White Cloth

Crying Women under White Cloth


All valuables were removed, his gold earrings, his silver locket and bracelets; and a large knife was used for some purpose or other which I could not quite see, except in slitting the lobes of the corpse's ears to remove his earrings more quickly. Branches of pine-tree were deposited on the body, and a large pot of butter was set by its side. A brass bowl of chökti (wine) was poured on the head, and then, in profound silence, fire was set to the pile.

All valuables were taken, including his gold earrings, silver locket, and bracelets; a large knife was used for something I couldn't quite see, except for cutting the lobes of the corpse's ears to remove his earrings faster. Pine branches were placed on the body, and a big pot of butter was set beside it. A brass bowl of chökti (wine) was poured over the head, and then, in complete silence, the fire was lit on the pile.

[100] A few white puffs showed that it had caught fire, and then a dense column of black smoke rose from it, filling the atmosphere with a sickening smell of singed hair and burning flesh. The wind blew the smoke towards me, and I was enveloped in it for some moments, during which I could see nothing of what was going on, and I felt my eyes smart and my nostrils fill with the smoke and the stench. Gradually a tall flame, over twenty feet high, leaked out, consuming the body and showing me, as the atmosphere cleared, the Shokas down by the river washing their hands and faces to cleanse themselves of what they look upon as unclean, the contact with a corpse. Retracing their steps to the village, the women cried and moaned, carrying back to the house the clothes of the deceased and his brass bowls.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] A few white puffs indicated it had caught fire, and then a thick column of black smoke rose from it, filling the air with an awful smell of burnt hair and flesh. The wind blew the smoke toward me, and I was surrounded by it for a few moments, during which I couldn't see anything and felt my eyes sting and my nose fill with smoke and the stench. Gradually, a tall flame, over twenty feet high, burst out, consuming the body and revealing to me, as the air cleared, the Shokas down by the river washing their hands and faces to rid themselves of what they considered unclean—the contact with a corpse. As they walked back to the village, the women cried and moaned, carrying the deceased's clothes and brass bowls back home.

Shoka Funeral Pile

Shoka Funeral Pyre


Reaching home, it was incumbent on them to provide lavishly for the amusement of the dead man's soul. A lay figure crudely constructed of straw and sticks was attired by them in the clothes of the departed, and covered over with Indian fabrics embroidered in gold and red and blue, and a turban was stuck on the head, with a panache made of a [101] branch of fir-tree. The Kalihé was at the side of the image. When the fire was extinguished, a visit was paid to the cremation spot by the relatives of the deceased, and such pieces of bone as the knee-joints, elbows, and the larger vertebræ of the spine, usually left undestroyed by the flames, were collected and deposited inside the clothes of the image.

Reaching home, they had to provide generously for the entertainment of the deceased's soul. They fashioned a rough figure out of straw and sticks, dressing it in the dead person's clothes and covering it with Indian fabrics embroidered in gold, red, and blue. A turban was placed on its head, topped with a feather from a fir branch. The Kalihé stood beside the figure. Once the fire was out, the deceased's relatives visited the cremation site to gather any bone fragments, like knee joints, elbows, and larger vertebrae, that the flames had typically left intact, and they placed these pieces inside the figure's clothing.

Women Dusting and Caressing the Lay Figure

Women Dusting and Caressing the Lay Figure


Wheat, rice, and flour were purchased in large quantities and cooked to provide food for the multitude of friends who remained the guests of the family during the whole time of the funeral. A sheep a day is usually killed and eaten on such occasions, and cask after cask of chökti (wine), zahn (a liquor distilled from barley, rice and wheat), and anag (from fermented grain of various kinds) are emptied by the mourning crowd. The women folk of the dead man mourned round the effigy, resting their heads on it, crying and imploring the beloved one to return to life. Other rows of women, with their hoods turned inside out in sign of mourning, danced gracefully in circles round the dressed-up figure, left the house by one door in the basement, described an arc in the open, and returned by another door, while men were dancing a doleful dance outside the house. Beating of drums went on the whole day—languid and sad at moments; excited, violent and rowdy at others, according [102] to the mood of the musicians and the quantity of liquor consumed by them. On each day of these proceedings, which lasted for three or four days, rice, baked wheat, and wine were placed before the effigy, until, when it was assumed that the soul of the dead had had a sufficiently amusing time, arrangements were made for its transmigration from the lay figure into a live sheep or yak. If the deceased is a man, the animal chosen to represent him is a male; if a woman, a female; but no ceremony of this sort follows the cremation of children under ten or twelve. In the case of the old man whose funeral I witnessed, a sheep was chosen, instead of the time-hallowed yak, the procuring of which from Tibet used to be a very costly business. The use of a sheep for these sacrifices is quite a recent innovation, brought into fashion by the greatest Shoka trader in Garbyang, called Gobaria, whose intention it was to put down the unnecessary waste of these ceremonies; but many pious Shokas, I was assured, are not satisfied with so small an offering as a single sheep, and slaughter two or even more on these occasions.

Wheat, rice, and flour were bought in large amounts and cooked to feed the many friends who stayed with the family throughout the funeral. A sheep is typically killed and consumed each day during these events, and cask after cask of chökti (wine), zahn (a liquor made from barley, rice, and wheat), and anag (from fermented grains of various types) are drained by the grieving crowd. The women related to the deceased mourned around the effigy, resting their heads on it, crying and begging their loved one to return to life. Other groups of women, with their hoods turned inside out as a sign of mourning, danced gracefully in circles around the dressed figure, leaving the house through one door in the basement, moving in an arc outside, and coming back through another door, while men danced a sorrowful dance outside. The sound of drums continued all day—slow and sad at times; energetic, loud, and chaotic at others, depending on the mood of the musicians and how much alcohol they had consumed. Each day of these events, which lasted three to four days, rice, baked wheat, and wine were placed before the effigy until it was believed the soul of the deceased had enjoyed itself enough. Then, preparations were made for its transition from the effigy into a live sheep or yak. If the deceased is a man, a male animal is chosen to represent him; if a woman, a female animal is selected; however, no ceremony of this type follows the cremation of children under ten or twelve. In the case of the elderly man whose funeral I attended, a sheep was chosen instead of the traditional yak, which was historically very expensive to obtain from Tibet. The use of a sheep for these sacrifices is a fairly recent change, popularized by the leading Shoka trader in Garbyang, known as Gobaria, who aimed to reduce the unnecessary waste of these ceremonies; however, many devout Shokas, I was told, are not satisfied with just one sheep as an offering and will sacrifice two or even more during these occasions.

Women Dancing Round the Lay Figure

Women Dancing Around the Lay Figure


After several days' dancing and gorging indoors, a crowd collects, to the sound of the drums, outside the habitation.

After several days of dancing and feasting indoors, a crowd gathers outside the place, accompanied by the sound of drums.

[103]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Dance in Front of Deceased Man's House

Dance in Front of the Dead Man's House


[104] The lay figure is from the room transported either directly outside the dwelling or to some picturesque spot in the woods. This is generally on the fourth day. Bowls with food are placed in front of it, and the dancing is begun, to a curious sentimental strain, with a graceful series of contortions, by girls and women waving large pieces of white material. The legs keep time with the arms, and each leg is alternately bent at the knee until it nearly touches the ground. The head is inclined to the right or left, and thrown backwards or forwards according to the beating of the drum. The circular motion in the dancing begins first very slowly, and the speed then increases by degrees, abruptly ending in odd and suggestive postures. During the intervals of dancing the relatives go round and round the lay figure, dusting and fanning it with their white cloths.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] The lay figure is brought from the room either directly outside the house or to a scenic spot in the woods. This usually happens on the fourth day. Bowls of food are placed in front of it, and the dancing begins to a curious sentimental tune, featuring a graceful series of movements by girls and women waving large pieces of white fabric. The legs move in sync with the arms, with each leg bending at the knee until it nearly touches the ground. The head tilts to the right or left and is thrown back or forward according to the rhythm of the drum. The circular motion of the dance starts off slowly and gradually increases in speed, ending abruptly in unusual and suggestive poses. During breaks in the dancing, the relatives circle around the lay figure, dusting and fanning it with their white cloths.

The Goat with Soul of Deceased being Fed

The Goat with the Soul of the Deceased Being Fed


In the afternoon the men join the performance, and though their dancing has practically the same characteristics and motions as the women's dance, it is usually so much [105] more violent that it almost partakes of the character of a war-dance. They hold in their right hands a sword, in the left a circular shield, and some of the younger men show great skill in the rapid manipulation of their blades, twirling them round their heads and behind their backs. There are solos, duets and trios, in which the drummer or drummers take part, and when the dancing is collective, they head the procession, contorting their bodies and beating their drums with a stick on one side and the palm of the hand on the other.

In the afternoon, the men join in the performance, and although their dance has nearly the same characteristics and movements as the women's, it’s usually much more intense, almost resembling a war dance. They wield a sword in their right hand and a circular shield in their left, and some of the younger men display impressive skill in quickly maneuvering their blades, spinning them around their heads and behind their backs. There are solos, duets, and trios that involve the drummers, and when the dancing is done collectively, the drummers lead the procession, twisting their bodies and striking their drums with a stick on one side and with their palms on the other.

Goat, with Soul and Clothes of Deceased

Goat, with the Spirit and Clothing of the Deceased


The whole crowd is constantly regaled by the family with corn baked with sugar, roasted Indian corn, rice, sweets, ghur and miseri, when the lay figure is supposed to have had its fill. While the mob eat, the ladies of the house return to the effigy with quick beating of the drums, and again double themselves up in solemn lengthy curtsies. Perhaps the most interesting, because the most accomplished, were the solo male dancers, each performer displaying his own particular genius. The drummer beats his drum whimsically—fast and slow alternately, with no rule—just as it pleases his fancy, and the dancer always keeps time with [106] him in all his frenzies and eccentricities, so that his movements are sometimes so slow as to be barely noticeable, and at others so rapid that his arms and legs can no longer be distinguished. I happened to witness no less than six funerals simultaneously in Garbyang, and a collective war-dance of as many as three hundred men. It went on during a whole day and the greater part of the following night, torches and a big bonfire burning.

The whole crowd is constantly entertained by the family with corn baked with sugar, roasted corn, rice, sweets, ghur, and miseri, when the statue is thought to be satisfied. While the crowd eats, the ladies of the house return to the effigy, quickly beating drums, and bow deeply in long, serious curtsies. The most interesting performers are the solo male dancers, each showcasing their unique talent. The drummer plays whimsically—alternating between fast and slow, with no specific pattern—just as it strikes his fancy, and the dancer always matches his rhythm in all his wildness and quirks, making his movements sometimes so slow they're barely noticeable, and at other times so fast that his arms and legs blur together. I witnessed six funerals happening at the same time in Garbyang, along with a collective war dance of about three hundred men. It continued for a whole day and most of the following night, with torches and a large bonfire burning.

Sending the Goat away from the Village

Sending the Goat Away from the Village


Eventually, amidst firing of guns, howls, yells and deafening hissing of the assembled crowd, the animal to be sacrificed is dragged before the lay figure. Long coloured ribbons are tied round its horns, and the ends left hanging by the side of its head. Sandal-wood is burnt under the beast's nostrils, which is supposed to induce the soul of the departed to enter and establish itself in the animal. The clothes, the turban, the shield, the jewellery, are torn from the figure's back and piled on to the goat, which is now the impersonation of the deceased. It is fed until it can hold

Eventually, amidst the sounds of gunfire, screams, shouts, and the loud hissing of the gathered crowd, the animal to be sacrificed is pulled in front of the lay figure. Long colored ribbons are tied around its horns, with the ends hanging down beside its head. Sandalwood is burned under the animal's nostrils, which is believed to encourage the soul of the departed to enter and settle in the animal. The clothes, turban, shield, and jewelry are stripped from the figure's back and placed onto the goat, which is now seen as the embodiment of the deceased. It is fed until it can hold

[107]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Martial Dance round Lay Figure

Martial Dance circular Lay Figure


[108] no more, wine and liquor being poured down its throat, and large dishes of all possible delicacies being placed before it. The women relatives devote to it their tenderest affection, and shed tears over it in the conviction that it holds the spirit of their lost protector. Stuffed with food, and stupefied by the alcohol, the beast submits, emotionless and immovable, to the wild caresses, prayers, and salaams showered on it. Again the hissing, whistling and yelling begin, and a rush is made for the animal, which is seized by the horns, the neck, the tail, wherever it can be caught hold of, and dragged, pushed, beaten, and at last chased out of the village, but not until after the clothes, shield, sword, turban, and ornaments have been torn from its back. It is eventually handed over to the Hunyas or Jumlis or Humlis, who on these occasions benefit by the simplicity and superstition of the Shokas, and who throw it down, rip the body open, and pull out the heart, or twist it in the inside with a jerk that kills instantly. This method applies to sheep or goat.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] no more, wine and liquor are poured down its throat, and large platters of every kind of delicacy are placed in front of it. The female relatives show it their deepest affection and cry over it, believing it carries the spirit of their lost protector. Stuffed with food and dazed from the alcohol, the animal remains passive and unresponsive to the wild affection, prayers, and greetings directed at it. Soon, the hissing, whistling, and shouting start again, and people rush toward the animal, grabbing it by the horns, neck, or tail, dragging, pushing, and hitting it until it is finally chased out of the village, but not before its clothes, shield, sword, turban, and decorations have been ripped away. It is eventually handed over to the Hunyas or Jumlis or Humlis, who, during these events, take advantage of the simplicity and superstitions of the Shokas, throwing it down, slicing open the body, and pulling out the heart, or twisting it inside with a force that kills instantly. This method applies to sheep or goats.

Tearing out the Heart of the Goat

Tearing out the Heart of the Goat


[109] When a yak is sacrificed, very much the same rites take place up to the moment when the lay figure is deprived of its clothing and the yak invested with it. It is similarly beaten and dragged about, and left on the top of some mountain, the crowd calling after it, "Go! go! We have feasted, fêted and fed you. We have done all in our power for your welfare. We cannot do more! Go now!" With this the yak, with the soul that has been driven into it, is left to its own devices, and as soon as the Shokas have departed, is driven by the Tibetans over a precipice, it being against their faith to draw blood from a yak. In the fatal leap the animal is smashed to pieces, and the Tibetans, collecting the remains, gorge themselves with the prized meat of their cherished yak.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] When a yak is sacrificed, a similar set of rituals occurs until the moment the lay figure is stripped of its clothing and the yak is dressed in it. The yak is also beaten and dragged around, then left on top of a mountain, with the crowd shouting, "Go! Go! We have celebrated, honored, and taken care of you. We've done everything we can for your well-being. We can do no more! Now go!" With that, the yak, with the soul that has been placed into it, is left to fend for itself, and as soon as the Shokas leave, the Tibetans push it over a cliff, as their beliefs prohibit them from shedding a yak's blood. In the fatal fall, the animal is crushed, and the Tibetans gather the remains to feast on the much-coveted meat of their beloved yak.

Yak driven over Precipice

Yak driven over cliff


As a mark of reverence the Shoka men remove their caps not only while following the corpse to cremation, but also during the feasting, the male relatives themselves even shaving their heads; and this practice is occasionally extended to the whole male community in the case of a [110] particularly respected villager dying. The women remove their jewellery, and, as already noted, turn their hoods inside out.

As a sign of respect, the Shoka men take off their caps not only while escorting the body to cremation but also during the feasting. The male relatives even shave their heads; this practice can sometimes extend to the entire male community when a particularly respected villager passes away. The women take off their jewelry and, as noted earlier, turn their hoods inside out.

When all is over, some restitution of his property is made to the dead, and odd articles, such as brass bowls or a gun or a shield or sword, are placed in a sacred cave, which none dare desecrate by entering to remove anything. These caves are high up on the mountain-sides, and are said to be full of sacred offerings, which have accumulated there in the centuries.

When it’s all done, some of his belongings are returned to the dead, and unusual items like brass bowls, a gun, or a shield or sword are placed in a sacred cave that no one dares to enter and take anything from. These caves are high up on the mountainsides and are said to be filled with sacred offerings that have collected there over the centuries.

I expressed the wish to see the cave on the mountain side above Garbyang, but the natives politely asked me not to do so, as the visit of a stranger to this sacred spot might bring misfortune on the Shoka living community. Therefore I abstained from going rather than cause unpleasantness.

I expressed my desire to see the cave on the mountain above Garbyang, but the locals politely asked me not to, as the visit of an outsider to this sacred place could bring bad luck to the Shoka community. So, I decided not to go to avoid causing any trouble.


[111]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XVIII

Touching Shoka farewell—Feelings curiously expressed—Sobs and tears—The start—A funereal procession—Distressed father and mother—Kachi and Dola the worse for drink—Anxious moments—The bridge destroyed.

The day of my departure came. It was after dark. Outside my dwelling a crowd of Shokas had assembled. I bade farewell to my host Zeheram and to his wife and children, who with tears in their eyes wished me God-speed.

The day of my departure arrived. It was after dark. Outside my home, a crowd of Shokas had gathered. I said goodbye to my host Zeheram and to his wife and kids, who, with tears in their eyes, wished me good luck.

Kachi and his Relations

Kachi and His Family


"Salaam, sahib, salaam!" repeated Zeheram, sobbing and bringing his hand respectfully to his forehead. "You know, sahib, that a horse goes to a horse, a tiger to a tiger, a yak to a yak, and a man to a man. A man's house is another man's house, no matter whether the colour of our skin differs or not. Therefore I thank Heaven that you have accepted shelter under my humble roof. You must have been uncomfortable, for all you sahibs are rich and accustomed to luxury. I am only a trader and a cultivator. I am poor, but I possess a heart. You, unlike other sahibs, have always spoken kindly to me and to all of us Shokas. [112] We feel that you are our brother. You have given us presents, but we needed them not. The only present we wish for is that, when you reach the end of your perilous journey, you will send us a message that you are well. We will all pray day and night for you. Our hearts are sore at your leaving us."

"Salaam, sir, salaam!" Zeheram said again, crying and bringing his hand respectfully to his forehead. "You know, sir, that a horse goes to a horse, a tiger to a tiger, a yak to a yak, and a man to a man. A man's house is another man's house, regardless of the color of our skin. So I thank Heaven that you have accepted shelter under my modest roof. You must have felt uncomfortable, since all you wealthy people are used to luxury. I am just a trader and a farmer. I may be poor, but I have a heart. Unlike other wealthy folks, you have always spoken kindly to me and all of us Shokas. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] We feel that you are our brother. You have given us gifts, but we didn’t really need them. The only gift we hope for is that when you complete your dangerous journey, you will send us word that you are okay. We will all pray for you day and night. Our hearts are heavy at your departure."

This from the rough old boy, whom I had got really to like, was touching, and I told him I hoped I might some day be able to repay him for his kindness. When I descended the steps there was quite a crowd in the yard. Every one wished to bid me farewell. The men took my right hand in both theirs and brought it up to their foreheads, muttering words of grief at my leaving. The women gently caressed my face and bade me "Niku tza" ("Go well," "Farewell"). These are the Shoka fashions of taking leave of friends who are departing for distant lands.

This from the rough old guy, whom I had really come to like, was moving, and I told him I hoped I could someday repay him for his kindness. When I went down the steps, there was quite a crowd in the yard. Everyone wanted to wish me goodbye. The men took my right hand in both of theirs and raised it to their foreheads, murmuring words of sorrow at my departure. The women gently stroked my face and said "Niku tza" ("Go well," "Farewell"). These are the Shoka ways of saying goodbye to friends who are heading to faraway places.

The Patan Summoning my Coolies from the Roof of his House

The Patan Calling My Porters from the Roof of His House


Led by the hand by a really grieving company, I moved towards the narrow, steep descent to the Chongur bridge, cut into the slope of the high cliffs of clay. On the way I called at Kachi's house, but he had gone ahead. A more mournful procession could not be imagined. The faint rays of a new moon gave an added melancholy to the scene, and that peculiarly impressive sound of sad steps, if I may [113] thus express the pathetic cadence of people's gait when afflicted, made me feel as if I were attending my own funeral. I begged them to return to their homes, and one after the other they came to embrace my feet and to hold my fingers. Then, hiding their faces in the palms of their hands, they one by one made their way up the grey track cut into the lofty cliff, and like phantoms, gradually becoming smaller and smaller, vanished in the distance. Still some twenty or thirty insisted on escorting me down to the stream. Farther on I came upon the excited figure of an old woman tearing her hair and crying pitifully. She threw herself at my feet, imploring me to take care of her son. It was Kachi's distressed mother. I comforted her as best I could, and also the desolate father (good old Junia), who was there with tears streaming down his cheeks, to bid me an affectionate farewell.

Guided by a truly grieving group, I walked towards the narrow, steep path leading down to the Chongur bridge, carved into the cliffside of the high clay hills. On the way, I stopped by Kachi's house, but he had already left. You couldn’t imagine a more mournful procession. The faint glow of a new moon added to the sadness of the scene, and the uniquely striking sound of quiet, sorrowful steps—if I can express the poignant rhythm of how people walk when they’re in pain—made me feel like I was attending my own funeral. I urged them to go back to their homes, and one by one, they came to embrace my feet and hold my hands. Then, covering their faces with their hands, they slowly made their way up the gray path carved into the steep cliff, like shadows, gradually getting smaller until they disappeared in the distance. Still, about twenty or thirty insisted on walking me down to the stream. As I went further, I spotted an old woman in distress, pulling at her hair and crying mournfully. She fell at my feet, begging me to look after her son. It was Kachi's grieving mother. I consoled her as best I could, and also the heartbroken father (good old Junia), who was there with tears rolling down his cheeks, to give me a heartfelt goodbye.

"Where is your son?"

"Where's your son?"

"You will find him a little farther down, sahib."

"You'll find him a bit further down, sir."

I did—together with four other people lying on the ground all in a heap. One of them who tried to stand up, called out: "Kachi, get up, here is the sahib," and then collapsed again on the top of the others. Neither Kachi nor the others gave any sign of life, and when I spoke to them I discovered that they were in a state of hopeless intoxication, arm-in-arm as they had fallen and slept.

I did—along with four other people sprawled out on the ground, all in a pile. One of them, who tried to get up, shouted, "Kachi, get up, the boss is here," and then fell back down on top of the others. Neither Kachi nor the others reacted at all, and when I spoke to them, I found out they were hopelessly drunk, linked together just as they had fallen and slept.

By the side of Kachi was Dola, his uncle, supposed to be employed by me in the quadruple capacity of interpreter, carrier, Kachi's valet, and cook, in which latter art, after Shoka fashion, he was quite an adept, his fame having spread all over Bias. He was, therefore, a treasure not lightly to be abandoned, and yet, now that I wanted to act quickly and decisively, I had to weigh whether I should proceed with two of the most important characters in my play disabled. Should I, hampered by these semi-corpses, be able to pass unseen the watchful Tibetan guard at the Chongur bridge, only a few hundred yards farther on? I decided to try. Seizing one on each side under their arm-pits, I supported them and kept them erect. It was no easy job, and I felt our speed increase at every step as I moved with my staggering mates down the steep and slippery track. We reached the bottom of the hill at a breakneck rate, and as the track was narrow along the water's edge, it was a wonder that we did not all three of us land in the river. As it was, in coming suddenly to a stop, my two men utterly collapsed again, and I was so exhausted that I had to sit down and rest.

By Kachi's side was Dola, his uncle, who was supposed to help me in four different roles: interpreter, carrier, Kachi's personal attendant, and cook. He was quite skilled in cooking, having gained a reputation all over Bias for his talent. Therefore, he was someone I couldn't easily let go of. However, since I needed to act quickly and decisively, I had to consider whether I could continue with two of the main characters in my story unable to move. Would I be able to sneak past the alert Tibetan guard at the Chongur bridge, only a few hundred yards ahead, while dealing with these semi-conscious people? I decided to give it a shot. I grabbed one under each arm and tried to keep them upright. It wasn't easy, and I felt our pace quicken with every step as I stumbled along the steep, slippery path with my unsteady companions. We reached the bottom of the hill at a risky speed, and since the path was narrow along the water's edge, it was surprising that we didn’t all fall into the river. As it turned out, when I suddenly stopped, both of the men collapsed again, and I was so worn out that I had to sit down and catch my breath.

[114] Kachi Ram had a lucid interval. He gazed round and saw me for the first time that night.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Kachi Ram had a clear moment. He looked around and saw me for the first time that night.

"Sahib!" he exclaimed, with long pauses between each word, "I am drunk!"

"Sahib!" he exclaimed, with long pauses between each word, "I'm drunk!"

"That is quite true," said I.

"That's totally true," I said.

"We Shokas have this bad habit," he continued. "I had to drink chökti with all my relations and friends prior to leaving for this long journey. They would have been offended if I had not divided with each a cup of wine. I now see everything go round. Please put my head into cold water. Oh! the moon is jumping about, and is now under my feet!"

"We Shokas have this bad habit," he continued. "I had to drink chökti with all my family and friends before leaving for this long journey. They would have been upset if I hadn’t shared a cup of wine with each of them. I can see everything spinning. Please put my head in cold water. Oh! The moon is dancing around and is now under my feet!"

The Chongur Bridge Previous to being Destroyed

The Chongur Bridge Before It Was Destroyed


I complied with his request, and gave both his head and Dola's a good ducking in the freezing Kali River.

I went along with his request and gave both his head and Dola's a good dunk in the freezing Kali River.

This had the unfortunate effect of sending them to sleep so soundly that I thought they would never wake again. Some of the sober Shokas offered to carry the two helpless men on their backs. We were wasting valuable time and the sky was getting clouded. When the moon had disappeared behind the high mountain, I went ahead to [115] reconnoitre. All was darkness but for the glimmer of a brilliant star here and there in the sky. I crawled to the bridge and listened. Not a sound, not a light on the opposite bank. All was silence, that dead silence of nature and human life asleep. I stopped on the bridge. This structure spans the river, a huge boulder in the centre of the stream serving as a pillar, and forms, in fact, two separate bridges joined on the opposite sides of this central boulder. I walked cautiously across the first portion, stood to listen again on the rock dividing the foaming waters, and tried to penetrate the obscurity. There was not a soul to be seen, nor a sound to be heard. I went over the rock and proceeded towards the second half of the bridge, when I found to my horror that this second half of the bridge had been cut down. The entire section had collapsed, and with the exception of a long beam still swinging to and fro with one end in the turbid stream, and a plank or two, the whole material had been washed away.

This unfortunately made them fall asleep so deeply that I thought they would never wake up. Some of the serious Shokas offered to carry the two helpless men on their backs. We were wasting valuable time, and the sky was getting cloudy. When the moon disappeared behind the tall mountain, I went ahead to [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] scout. It was all darkness except for the twinkling of a few bright stars in the sky. I crawled to the bridge and listened. There was no sound, no light on the opposite bank. It was all silent, that dead silence of nature and human life asleep. I paused on the bridge. This structure spans the river, with a huge boulder in the middle of the stream serving as a pillar, essentially making two separate bridges joined on the opposite sides of this central boulder. I walked carefully across the first part, stopped to listen again on the rock that divides the rushing waters, and tried to see through the darkness. There was nobody in sight and no sound to be heard. I crossed over the rock and moved toward the second half of the bridge when I was horrified to find that this part of the bridge had been cut down. The entire section had collapsed, and aside from a long beam still swinging back and forth with one end in the murky water and a plank or two, all the material had been washed away.

I returned to my men.

I went back to my team.

"We must continue our way on this side of the river," I whispered to them. "The Tibetans have destroyed the bridge."

"We need to keep going along this side of the river," I whispered to them. "The Tibetans have destroyed the bridge."

"The track is traced," they replied, "but it is impassable at night."

"The path is marked," they replied, "but it's inaccessible at night."

"Never mind; we must go. Come." And I headed the silent procession.

"Never mind; we need to go. Let's go." And I led the quiet line.

We went about a mile. Yet another dilemma. Kachi and Dola were still fast asleep. The others, tired and worn out with the fatigue of carrying them, wished to turn back. The sky was now clouded all over and rain was coming on.

We walked about a mile. Another problem arose. Kachi and Dola were still sound asleep. The others, weary and worn out from carrying them, wanted to turn back. The sky was completely overcast and rain was on the way.

I felt that it was useless to persist. Having seen the two drunken creatures laid flat under a shed, and well covered with blankets, I therefore returned to Garbyang, with the intention of making a fresh start shortly before sunrise, when the drunkards would probably be fit to walk by themselves, and found shelter under the ever hospitable roof of Dr. Wilson.

I felt it was pointless to keep trying. After seeing the two drunk people sprawled out under a shed, all wrapped up in blankets, I went back to Garbyang, planning to make a fresh start just before sunrise, when the drunks would likely be able to walk on their own, and I found refuge under the always welcoming roof of Dr. Wilson.


[116]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XIX

A dangerous track—Perilous passage—A curious bridge over a precipice—Pathetic Shoka custom—Small misadventures—A grand reception—Tea for all tastes.

At 4 a.m., before the sun rose, I made a fresh and hurried start. I proceeded quickly to the spot where I had left the two drunken men. They had gone ahead.

At 4 AM, before the sun came up, I made a quick and rushed start. I hurried to the place where I had left the two drunk guys. They had moved on.

Indeed the track was a bad and dangerous one, overhanging precipices, and hardly wide enough to give standing room upon it. We came to a spot where the narrow path stopped. There was before us a perpendicular rock descending straight as a wall to the Kali River. The corrosive action of dripping water and melting snow, of which last there seemed to be a thick layer higher above on the summit of the cliff, had worn the face of the rock quite smooth. The distance across this vertical wall-like ravine was not more than forty or fifty feet. On the other side of it the narrow track began again.

Indeed, the trail was rough and dangerous, with steep drop-offs on the sides, and barely wide enough to stand on. We reached a spot where the narrow path ended. In front of us was a sheer rock face, dropping straight down like a wall to the Kali River. The constant drip of water and melting snow, of which there appeared to be a thick layer higher up on the cliff’s summit, had worn the rock smooth. The gap across this vertical ravine was no more than forty or fifty feet. On the other side, the narrow path continued again.

Owing to this and other dangerous places, this route is but very seldom used by the natives or by any one else. The road generally taken is on the opposite side of the Kali River, in Nepal territory. Nevertheless, a few Shokas possess bits of land on this bank of the stream, and it was by them that, in order to surmount the obstacle before which I now stood, the following expedient was devised in former years.

Owing to this and other dangerous areas, this route is rarely used by the locals or anyone else. The road that’s usually taken is on the other side of the Kali River, in Nepal. However, a few Shokas own small plots of land along this bank of the river, and it was by them that, to overcome the obstacle I now faced, the following solution was created in previous years.

By letting down a man from above with ropes they succeeded in making two rows of small hollows in the rock, along two parallel horizontal lines, the higher of which was about six feet or so above the lower. The holes were dug at intervals of three or four feet along each line, the upper ones to be caught on by one's hands, the lower ones to

By lowering a man from above with ropes, they managed to create two rows of small holes in the rock, along two parallel horizontal lines, the higher of which was about six feet above the lower. The holes were dug at intervals of three or four feet along each line, with the upper ones meant to be grasped by hand, and the lower ones to

[117]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

A Perilous Passage

A Dangerous Journey


[118] support one's feet, and none of the cavities are deeper than a few inches.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] support one's feet, and none of the holes are deeper than a few inches.

The transit seemed dangerous at any time, and impossible just then, because the drizzling rain which had set in had wetted the rock and made it as slippery as glass, but I realised that the thing had to be risked, and at any cost. With an affected air of assurance, I therefore took off my shoes and went ahead.

The crossing felt risky at any moment, and especially dangerous right then, because the light rain that had started had soaked the rock and made it as slick as glass. Still, I knew I had to take the chance, no matter the cost. So, putting on a brave face, I took off my shoes and moved forward.

I could not look about me, for I clung with my body to the wall, feeling my way with my toes and fingers. The cavities were, as a matter of fact, so shallow that progress was slow and troublesome. When the toes of the right limb seemed firmly planted in a receptacle, the right arm was made to slide along the rock until the fingers had obtained a firm grip in the cavity directly above the one in which the toes were. Then the entire body had to be shifted from left to right, bringing the left foot and hand close to the right extremities and suspending one's weight on the former, so as to render the right foot and arm ready to make the next move forward, and so on, till I reached the other side and alighted upon the narrow track, which was itself only five or six inches wide. Chanden Sing having tied his shoes and mine over his shoulders, proceeded bare-footed on the same hazardous enterprise. With none of the excitement of personal danger, the moments of apprehension while he groped his way with toes and fingers, half paralysed with cold and fear, were to me worse even than those of my own passage. But he too got across safe and sound, and after that the rest was comparatively easy.

I couldn't look around because I was pressed against the wall, finding my way with my toes and fingers. The gaps were so shallow that moving forward was slow and challenging. When my right toes found a secure spot, I would slide my right arm along the rock until my fingers got a good hold on the cavity just above where my toes were. Then, I had to shift my whole body from left to right, bringing my left foot and hand close to the right side and putting my weight on them, so I could prepare my right foot and arm for the next move, and keep going until I reached the other side and landed on the narrow path, which was only about five or six inches wide. Chanden Sing, having slung my shoes and his over his shoulders, went barefoot on the same risky journey. Without the thrill of personal danger, the moments of fear he experienced while feeling his way with his toes and fingers, half frozen with cold and fear, felt even worse to me than my own passage. But he made it across safely, and after that, the rest was much easier.

It was necessary now to look out for signs of the two men, Kachi and Dola, who had preceded us. I was glad to find a little farther on fresh footmarks, undoubtedly those of the two Shokas. The track still ascended and descended nearly all along precipitous cliffs, and was everywhere dangerously narrow, with here and there bits on shaky crowbars. At one spot the rugged formation of the cliff forced one suddenly to ascend to its very top and cross (on all-fours) a rude kind of bridge made of branches of trees spanned not horizontally, but at an angle of sixty degrees over a precipice of several hundred feet. I found a white thread of wool laid over this primitive structure, in accordance with the custom of the Shokas at the death of relatives or friends away from their native village. The soul is supposed to migrate during the dark hours of the night and to return to the birthplace of the deceased, these white threads showing the way at dangerous places on the road.

It was important now to watch for signs of the two men, Kachi and Dola, who had gone ahead of us. I was relieved to find fresh footprints a bit further on, definitely belonging to the two Shokas. The path continued to rise and fall along steep cliffs, and it was narrow everywhere, with some sections supported by wobbly crowbars. At one point, the rough cliff made it necessary to climb to the top and cross a makeshift bridge made of tree branches, which was angled at about sixty degrees over a drop of several hundred feet. I noticed a white thread of wool laid across this basic structure, following the Shokas' custom when a relative or friend dies away from their home village. The belief is that the soul travels during the dark hours of the night and returns to the place where the deceased was born, and these white threads help show the way at dangerous spots along the journey.

[119]Having lost the track more than once, we found ourselves down at the edge of the Kali and compelled to climb up some three hundred feet over sand and rolling stones to regain the path.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Having lost the trail several times, we ended up at the edge of the Kali and had to climb about three hundred feet over sand and loose rocks to get back on the path.

We arrived at last at Nabi. There I found my loads safe and sound, having got here by the better track on the Nepalese side previously to the Chongur bridge being destroyed by the Tibetans, also Kachi and Dola, who had got over and recovered from their drink. To make up, perhaps, for their past misbehaviour, and probably to make me overlook or forget it, they seemed to have induced the natives to welcome me with particular cordiality. I was invited by them, with much show of hospitality, to spend the night in the village.

We finally arrived at Nabi. There, I found my loads safe and sound, having come via the better route on the Nepalese side before the Chongur bridge was destroyed by the Tibetans. Kachi and Dola were also there, having recovered from their drinking. Perhaps to make up for their past behavior and to encourage me to overlook it, they seemed to have convinced the locals to greet me with extra warmth. They invited me, with great hospitality, to spend the night in the village.

I was led with some ceremony to a primitive sort of ladder with very roughly carved steps, and shoved, with help from above and below, on to a flat mud roof. Here a tent had been pitched, the floor of which was covered with mats and rugs for me to rest on. I no sooner laid myself down than a string of men, women and children arrived, carrying bowls with a particularly sumptuous meal of rice, dhal, meat, balab (or boiled buckwheat leaves), curd, milk, broiled corn with sugar, chapatis, shale, sweets, native wine and liquor.

I was guided with a bit of ceremony to a basic kind of ladder with very roughly carved steps, and pushed, with help from above and below, onto a flat mud roof. A tent had been set up there, and the floor was covered with mats and rugs for me to rest on. As soon as I laid down, a group of men, women, and children showed up, carrying bowls filled with a lavish meal of rice, dhal, meat, balab (or boiled buckwheat leaves), curd, milk, roasted corn with sugar, chapatis, shale, sweets, native wine, and liquor.

During the meal, tea was served in all sorts of fashions. There was Chinese tea and Indian tea, tea boiled with sugar and tea without it, tea with milk, and tea with butter and salt in it, pale tea and dark tea, sweet tea and bitter tea—in fact, tea until I—devoted as I am to it—wished that no tea-leaf had ever been picked and stewed in boiling water.

During the meal, tea was served in all kinds of ways. There was Chinese tea and Indian tea, tea boiled with sugar and tea without it, tea with milk, and tea with butter and salt, light tea and dark tea, sweet tea and bitter tea—in fact, tea until I—devoted as I am to it—wished that no tea leaf had ever been picked and steeped in boiling water.


[120]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XX

Dr. Wilson joins my expedition for a few marches—What misdeeds a photographic camera can do—Weighing, dividing, and packing provisions—Two extra men wanted—The last friendly faces.

I was examining a young woman who had badly injured and partly fractured a central vertebra of the spine, when Dr. Wilson turned up and gave the poor wretch the little relief possible in her condition, for which she had hoped in vain from me. He was welcome to me for many reasons besides the pleasure of being in his company. He had offered to join my expedition for a few marches into Tibet, and I was glad indeed to have him with me. We pushed on as soon as possible over the road between Nabi and Kuti, which I have already described. Our journey was quite uneventful, and the snow-bridges and snow-fields, so troublesome when I had first taken this road, had melted and altogether disappeared. Even at Nabi little happened. But I must just mention the following incident as illustrative of the curious suspicion and dislike I found everywhere of the photographic apparatus I carried with me.

I was examining a young woman who had seriously injured and partially fractured a central vertebra in her spine when Dr. Wilson showed up and provided the poor woman with the little relief possible in her condition, which she had hoped for in vain from me. His presence was a welcome relief for many reasons, not just the enjoyment of his company. He had offered to join my expedition for a few treks into Tibet, and I was really glad to have him with me. We moved forward as quickly as possible on the route between Nabi and Kuti, which I’ve already talked about. Our journey was pretty uneventful, and the snow-bridges and snow-fields, which had caused me so much trouble when I first took this path, had melted away completely. Even at Nabi, not much happened. However, I should mention the following incident to illustrate the strange suspicion and dislike I encountered everywhere regarding the camera equipment I carried with me.

I was on the point of leaving the place when a handsome Tibetan woman, whom I had not previously noticed, accosted me with hysterical sobs—inarticulate, but conveying a very clear impression of suffering.

I was about to leave the place when a beautiful Tibetan woman, who I hadn't noticed before, approached me, crying uncontrollably—her words were jumbled, but she clearly expressed her pain.

"You have killed my child, and now you will kill my husband," she complained, when she was able to talk; and I then discovered that I had on my previous visit to Nabi taken a snap-shot at a child perched on the top of a very heavy load that happened to be carried on the woman's back through my camp, and that when she complained I had [121] appeased her, in the usual way, with a coin. She had conveyed her load to Kuti, and had slipped, on her way back, with her child—at a spot not far from where I had had my slide—but, less fortunate than myself, had rolled right into the foaming stream. She managed to cling to the rock and was eventually saved, but the infant was washed from rock to rock by the current, and disappeared under a snow tunnel.

"You killed my child, and now you're going to kill my husband," she lamented, once she was able to speak; and I then realized that during my last visit to Nabi, I had taken a photo of a child sitting on top of a very heavy load that the woman was carrying on her back as she passed through my camp. When she complained, I had calmed her down, as usual, with a coin. She had delivered her load to Kuti and had slipped on her way back with her child—at a spot not far from where I had taken my photo—but, less fortunate than I, had rolled right into the rushing stream. She managed to hold on to a rock and was eventually rescued, but the infant was swept from rock to rock by the current and vanished under a snow tunnel.

"Oh, sahib!" cried the woman, "if you had not before we started looked at us through the eyes (the twin lenses) of your black box (the photographic camera), I should not have lost my baby."

"Oh, sir!" cried the woman, "if you hadn't looked at us through the eyes (the twin lenses) of your black box (the camera) before we started, I wouldn't have lost my baby."

The Photograph that Caused the Child's Death

The Photograph that Caused the Child's Death


"And how about your husband?"

"How's your husband?"

"Oh, you will kill him too."

"Oh, you’re going to kill him too."

"But I don't know your husband. Anyhow, I promise not to look at him with these eyes."

"But I don't know your husband. Anyway, I promise not to look at him with these eyes."

"It is not that, sahib, but he is coming with you to Tibet. He is carrying one of your loads. You will all be killed."

"It’s not that, sir, but he’s coming with you to Tibet. He’s carrying one of your loads. You’re all going to get killed."

She pointed him out to me—one of the strongest among the men I had, and the most anxious to accompany me. He was too good to lose, and I was certainly unwilling to renounce my claim to him on account of his [122] good woman's tears. So I consoled her as best I could; promised to take good care of him, and under no circumstances to photograph him.

She pointed him out to me—one of the strongest among the men I had, and the most eager to join me. He was too valuable to lose, and I wasn’t about to give up my claim to him because of a good woman's tears. So, I comforted her as best as I could; promised to take good care of him and under no circumstances to take his picture.

At Kuti, Dr. Wilson and I were busy for several hours weighing, dividing and packing in equal loads the provisions I had purchased: fourteen munds in all (1120 lbs.) of flour, rice, red sugar (ghur), salt, red pepper (32 lbs.), dhal, miseri (lump sugar), ghi (butter), and a large quantity of satoo (oatmeal), and broiled corn. There were, in addition, the preserved and tinned provisions which I had brought with me from London.

At Kuti, Dr. Wilson and I spent several hours weighing, dividing, and packing the provisions I had bought into equal loads: fourteen munds in total (1120 lbs.) of flour, rice, red sugar (ghur), salt, red pepper (32 lbs.), dhal, miseri (lump sugar), ghi (butter), a large amount of satoo (oatmeal), and grilled corn. There were also the preserved and canned supplies I had brought with me from London.

To give my carriers no cause for complaint, I allowed them to choose their own shoes, blankets, &c., and I did all in my power to humour them, because the loads threatened to be excessively heavy. In fact, I found that, even after dispensing with everything but what was absolutely essential, there was still ample to carry for at least two strong men. Every available Shoka had joined the party, and no inducement that I could offer brought me more volunteers. I was very unwilling to delay, and I was on the point of subdividing among the men I already had the two extra loads, when two stray shepherds turned up, half famished and naked, with long unkempt heads of hair, and only a coral necklace and a silver bangle by way of clothing. I quickly secured them, and although one was really only a boy, I decided to trust to luck and take Dr. Wilson's assurance that he looked tough enough and would be useful.

To avoid complaints from my carriers, I let them pick their own shoes, blankets, etc., and I did everything I could to accommodate them since the loads were turning out to be really heavy. In fact, I discovered that even after getting rid of everything except the essentials, there was still plenty to carry for at least two strong guys. Every available Shoka had joined the group, and no amount of persuasion I could offer brought me more volunteers. I was very reluctant to delay, and I was just about to split the two extra loads among the men I already had when two lost shepherds showed up, half-starved and mostly naked, with long messy hair and only a coral necklace and a silver bangle as clothing. I quickly hired them, and even though one was really just a boy, I decided to take a chance and trust Dr. Wilson's promise that he looked tough enough to be useful.

This brought my little force up to thirty strong, and now I was ready to start.

This brought my small group up to thirty people, and now I was ready to go.

[123]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Plan of Kuti Castle

Kuti Castle Blueprint

1. rock stacks2. steps
3. outer wall4. tower
5. smithy6. windows

CHAPTER XXI

The Kuti Castle—Under way—Our first disaster—A cheerful and a sulky coolie—Mansing—A brigand—A strange medley of followers—A character—Tailoring—Fields of stones—Troublesome rivers—The Jolinkan or Lebung Pass—Sense of humour—Pleased with small comforts.

Before leaving Kuti, I went to see the curious and ancient castle perched on a small hill about three hundred yards south of the village. It is now in ruins, with the exception of a quadrangular tower called by the natives the Kuti Ker, but the foundations of the whole structure can still be plainly seen. I made a plan, which is here reproduced, as it may be of archæological interest. The natives could give me no information regarding it, except that it was once a king's palace strongly fortified. A small house of several rooms by the side of the tower is said to have been the blacksmith's shop in which the arrowheads and swords for the king's soldiers were made. The tower is four yards square at its base, and built of stone. Judging by its shape and construction, and the curious windows, I am inclined to attribute this castle to Tibetan workmanship, for identical towers are seen in Tibet, even at Taklakot. The windows, or rather slits, on each floor of the tower were six inches square; those in the blacksmith's house were considerably larger. There were outer walls for the defence of the fort at places where the castle would have been most accessible. Quantities of stones piled up in heaps probably served as ammunition for the defenders of the fortress in centuries gone by.

Before leaving Kuti, I went to check out the intriguing ancient castle sitting on a small hill about three hundred yards south of the village. It's mostly in ruins now, except for a square tower known by the locals as the Kuti Ker, but the foundations of the entire structure are still clearly visible. I made a sketch, which is included here, as it might have archaeological significance. The locals couldn't tell me much about it, only that it used to be a heavily fortified king's palace. A small building with several rooms next to the tower is said to have been the blacksmith's shop where they made arrowheads and swords for the king's soldiers. The tower measures four yards on each side at its base and is built from stone. Considering its shape and construction, along with the unique windows, I think this castle is of Tibetan design, as similar towers can be found in Tibet, even in Taklakot. The windows, or rather slits, on each floor of the tower were six inches square; those in the blacksmith's shop were quite a bit bigger. There were outer walls for the fort's defense at points where the castle would have been most vulnerable. Piles of stones stacked in heaps likely served as ammunition for the fortress defenders in past centuries.

[124] When I returned to camp all was ready, and after endless trouble with some of my men, who were already uncertain as to whether they would accompany me on my journey or not, I eventually got under way in the afternoon. The Kuti village is the highest in Bias, being situated at an elevation of 12,920 feet.

[a id="Pg_124">[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] When I got back to camp, everything was set, and after a lot of hassle with some of my men, who were unsure if they wanted to join me on my trip, I finally got going in the afternoon. The Kuti village is the highest in Bias, sitting at an elevation of 12,920 feet.

The track was now comparatively free from snow and ice except here and there, where we had to cross extensive slopes covered with snow. On one of these we had our first disaster. A coolie fell who carried in his hand a large pot containing butter. He fortunately did not slide far down, but we had the bitter disappointment of seeing our precious pot roll into the water and disappear for ever. We camped at an elevation of 13,050 feet. Late in the evening, as my men were collecting wood to keep up a huge fire round which we sat, my two coolies, who had remained at Kuti with instructions to follow, arrived with their respective loads. They were two strange characters. The one with a coral necklace was mournful and sulky, the other lively and talkative. They professed to be by caste Rajiputs.

The track was now relatively clear of snow and ice, except for a few spots where we had to cross large slopes still covered in snow. On one of these slopes, we experienced our first disaster. A porter carrying a large pot of butter fell. Fortunately, he didn’t slide too far down, but we experienced the frustrating loss of watching our precious pot roll into the water and disappear forever. We set up camp at an elevation of 13,050 feet. Later that evening, as my team gathered wood to keep a big fire going around which we sat, my two porters who had stayed behind at Kuti with orders to catch up arrived with their loads. They were two unusual characters. One, wearing a coral necklace, looked sad and moody, while the other was energetic and chatty. They claimed to be Rajputs by caste.

"You see," exclaimed the cheerful coolie, "I am small, but I fear nothing. When we cross into Tibet I shall go ahead with a pointed stick and clear all the Tibetans away. I am not afraid of them. I am ready to fight the whole world."

"You see," the cheerful porter exclaimed, "I'm small, but I fear nothing. When we enter Tibet, I'll lead the way with a pointed stick and clear all the Tibetans out of the way. I'm not scared of them. I'm ready to take on the whole world."

Knowing the value of this sort of talk on the part of natives, I shut him up and sent him away to fetch wood. The sulky fellow interested me more. He seldom uttered a word, and when he did he never spoke pleasantly; he was apparently immersed in deep thought, from which it seemed a great effort to draw his mind away. He looked painfully ill. Motionless and speechless, he would stare at a fixed point as if in a trance. His features were peculiarly refined and regular, but his skin had that ghastly shiny whitish tinge so peculiar to lepers. I waited for an opportunity to examine his hands, on which he sat to keep them warm. It is there, in the contracted or dropping off fingers, that one finds the first certain symptoms of that most terrible of all diseases, leprosy. I asked the man to come and sit nearer the blazing fire. He came and stretched out his open palms towards the flickering flame. Alas! my suspicions were but too correct. His fingers, distorted and contracted, with the skin sore at the joints, were sad and certain proof. I examined his feet and found the same symptoms there also.

Knowing how valuable this type of conversation is among the locals, I silenced him and sent him off to gather firewood. The sullen guy intrigued me more. He rarely said a word, and when he did, it was never anything nice; he seemed lost in deep thought, and it looked like it took a lot of effort to pull him out of it. He looked painfully unwell. Motionless and silent, he would stare blankly at a fixed spot as if he were in a trance. His features were oddly refined and regular, but his skin had that eerie, shiny whitish hue typical of lepers. I waited for a chance to check his hands, which he sat on to keep warm. That's where you find the initial signs of that most dreadful disease, leprosy, in the damaged or missing fingers. I invited him to come sit closer to the blazing fire. He approached and stretched his open palms toward the flickering flames. Unfortunately, my suspicions were sadly confirmed. His fingers, twisted and contracted, with sore skin at the joints, were clear and heartbreaking evidence. I looked at his feet and saw the same signs there as well.

"What is your name?" I inquired of him.

"What’s your name?" I asked him.

[125]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Kuti Castle

Kuti Castle


[126]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

"Mansing," he said drily, becoming immediately again absorbed in one of his reveries.

"Mansing," he said dryly, quickly getting lost again in one of his daydreams.

The crackling fire was dying down, when a stalwart Tibetan suddenly appeared bent low under the heavy weight of a huge tree-trunk which he was carrying on his back. He approached and threw the wood on the fire.

The crackling fire was dying down when a sturdy Tibetan suddenly appeared, hunched over under the heavy weight of a massive tree trunk he was carrying on his back. He walked over and tossed the wood onto the fire.

Here was another character! As strong as an ox, this servant of mine had queer antecedents. He was at one time a well-known bandit in the neighbourhood of Lhassa. He was said to have taken many lives, and, finding his own in danger in his country, had come to settle on our side of the border, marrying different wives, whom he constantly beat and in turn banished from under his roof. It was owing to his latest family squabble that he came into my employ; his abnormal strength, valuable for carrying loads, was to me his only recommendation. In camp he went by the name of Daku, "the brigand."

Here was another character! As strong as an ox, this servant of mine had an unusual background. He was once a well-known bandit in the area around Lhassa. It was said that he had taken many lives, and when he found his own life at risk in his home country, he crossed the border to settle on our side, marrying several wives whom he frequently abused and then drove out of his home. It was because of his latest domestic dispute that he came to work for me; his unusual strength, useful for carrying heavy loads, was his only qualification in my eyes. In camp, he went by the name of Daku, "the brigand."

Mansing the Leper showing his Hands

Mansing the Leper showing his Hands


In looking round to inspect my other followers, with whom I had hardly yet got acquainted, I was amused and interested at the strange medley of creatures forming my band. There were Humlis and Jumlis with their luxuriant black hair tied into small tresses and a top-knot over the head, like the Coreans. There were Tibetans, Shokas of Bias, Rongbas, Nepalese, Rajiputs and Totolas, also a Brahmin, two native Christians and a Johari. Then Dr. [127] Wilson. What a collection! What a chaos of languages and dialects!

As I looked around to check on my other followers, whom I had hardly gotten to know yet, I was both amused and intrigued by the strange mix of characters that made up my group. There were Humlis and Jumlis with their thick black hair styled in small braids and a top-knot, similar to Koreans. I spotted Tibetans, Shokas from Bias, Rongbas, Nepalese, Rajputs, and Totolas, plus a Brahmin, two local Christians, and a Johari. Then there was Dr. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Wilson. What a collection! What a jumble of languages and dialects!

An amusing feature of this odd crowd was that each particular caste looked down upon all the others. This from the very beginning occasioned separation during mealtime, and the camp was lively with as many burning fires in as many sheltered spots as there were castes of men following me. I was glad of this, as it seemed a sort of guarantee that they would never all join together to conspire against me.

An amusing aspect of this strange group was that each caste looked down on all the others. Right from the start, this caused them to separate during mealtime, and the camp was bustling with as many campfires in different sheltered spots as there were castes of people following me. I was thankful for this, as it seemed to ensure that they would never all come together to plot against me.

Poor Mansing, the leper, was shivering with cold. He had been unable to purchase himself a blanket and shoes at Kuti. He had spent the money in tobacco instead. Dr. Wilson and I took pity upon him. The long evening was still before us, so I got out the cloth I had purchased at Kuti, and with scissors and needle we began to cut and sew a new set of garments for the poor wretch. The Doctor did the cutting and I the sewing. I cannot boast that a professional tailor would not have turned out a better fit, but for all general purposes the newly-made clothes answered well enough. There was only one inconvenience in the single-breasted jacket. I had no buttons, and was therefore compelled to sew the coat on the man himself. It thus remained a fixture, and not only looked all right, but—which was our chief object—kept him warm.

Poor Mansing, the leper, was shivering from the cold. He couldn't buy a blanket and shoes at Kuti because he spent the money on tobacco instead. Dr. Wilson and I felt sorry for him. With a long evening ahead of us, I took out the cloth I had bought at Kuti, and with scissors and a needle, we started to cut and sew a new set of clothes for the poor guy. The Doctor did the cutting, and I did the sewing. I can't say that a professional tailor would have done a better job, but for our purposes, the clothes turned out well enough. There was just one issue with the single-breasted jacket: I had no buttons, so I had to sew the coat directly onto him. It became a permanent fixture, which not only looked fine but—most importantly—kept him warm.

We left camp at 5.30 the following morning. High mountains rose on either side of us, and we followed the Kuti River flowing here from West to East. At an elevation of 13,980 feet we crossed the Bitroguare River. On the other side of the Kuti River were high perpendicular cliffs of a vividly red-coloured rock with blue horizontal stratifications, and towering over them a succession of very pointed peaks.

We left camp at 5:30 the next morning. Tall mountains rose on both sides, and we followed the Kuti River flowing from west to east. At an elevation of 13,980 feet, we crossed the Bitroguare River. On the other side of the Kuti River were steep cliffs made of bright red rock with blue horizontal layers, and towering above them were a series of very sharp peaks.

The action of ice on the rock was noticeable everywhere. As we went farther we came upon extensive fields of stones and boulders brought down from the higher peaks by the ice, and in some places we found actual moraines. To our left stood a gigantic wall of stone like a natural impregnable fortress. Travelling in a direction of 320° (b.m.), and at elevations of 13,900 feet, 14,200 feet, 14,300 feet, we waded through three tributaries of the Kuti; then we came to a foaming, rapid and deep river which we had great difficulty in crossing. It was getting towards the middle of the day, and the stream, fed by the snows melting under the hot sun, was rising from moment to moment. Two of my coolies whom I first sent in reached the middle, where the water [128] came up to their chins. They lost their footing and were temporarily helpless, and in some danger of being swamped, the loads which they carried on their heads being partly spoiled when we succeeded in recovering them. The other men got frightened by the time they were ready to cross. The river had risen so high that it was impossible to get to the other side except by swimming, and this was out of the question, on account of the loads. We therefore had to follow the stream upwards for about a mile, when fortunately we found a somewhat dangerous, yet passable, snow bridge, over which the remainder of my men and goods effected a crossing in safety. We returned to our course on the Kuti, still passing between high, rugged mountains along an undulating plain averaging about 400 yards wide. Though at comparatively high elevations, there were large patches of brightly coloured flowers—red, violet, white and vivid yellow—which gave to the landscape a picturesque and constantly changing effect.

The impact of ice on the rock was evident everywhere. As we moved further along, we encountered vast fields of stones and boulders that had been dragged down from the higher peaks by the ice, and in some areas, we discovered actual moraines. To our left loomed a massive stone wall, resembling a natural, impenetrable fortress. Traveling in a direction of 320° (b.m.) and at elevations of 13,900 feet, 14,200 feet, and 14,300 feet, we waded through three tributaries of the Kuti; then we came across a frothy, fast-moving, deep river that was challenging to cross. It was approaching midday, and the stream, fed by melting snow under the hot sun, was rising steadily. Two of my porters, who I initially sent in, reached the middle where the water was up to their chins. They lost their footing and were temporarily at a loss, in some danger of being swept away, and the loads on their heads were partly damaged when we managed to retrieve them. The other men got scared by the time they were ready to cross. The river had risen so much that getting to the other side was only possible by swimming, which was not an option because of the loads. We had to follow the river upstream for about a mile, when, fortunately, we found a somewhat treacherous yet passable snow bridge, allowing the rest of my men and goods to cross safely. We returned to our route along the Kuti, still navigating between steep, rugged mountains on an undulating plain averaging about 400 yards wide. Despite the high elevation, there were large patches of brightly colored flowers—red, violet, white, and vivid yellow—which gave the landscape a stunning and ever-changing appearance.

The Jolinkan or Lebung Pass

The Jolinkan or Lebung Pass


On reaching a small pass, 14,750 feet, the path branched to Darma by the Jolinkan towards bearings 260°, and over the Lebung Pass. It is really only a goat track, exceedingly [129] difficult and fatiguing, except in the month of August, when there is only a small quantity of snow, and it leads to the Dholi River about half a mile south of Khumling.

On reaching a small pass at 14,750 feet, the path split towards Darma by the Jolinkan at a bearing of 260°, and over the Lebung Pass. It's really just a goat track, extremely difficult and tiring, except in August, when there's only a little snow, leading to the Dholi River about half a mile south of Khumling.

The Jolinkan River, rising from the snow field to the East of the Lebung or Jolinkan Pass, had now to be crossed. The stalwart dacoit, ever ready to make himself useful, conveyed his load across, and lifting me like a feather on to his back, saved me from plunging higher than my waist into the bitterly cold water, whereas he was covered up to his neck. The course of the Kuti turns now to 330° (b.m.). Going up and down small barren hills, round the foot of high mountains, we attained an altitude of 15,000 feet. Here, to the left of the track, and eighty feet above it, is a small and beautiful lake 500 yards long and 400 wide. Its waters, in which the high snowy peaks round it are reflected as in a silver mirror, find an outlet in a short but most precipitous river flowing with tremendous force into the Kuti. Soon after leaving this lake we came upon another small sheet of water, near which were thirteen peculiar piles or columns of stones, each one having been erected by the first Tibetan or Shoka who crossed the pass during the summer. A similar erection could also be seen perched on a large rock jutting out from the water of the larger lake. Though the sun was fast going down behind the mountains to the west, we pressed on, trying to make as much headway as we could towards the perpetual snows. We still travelled over undulating ground, and the marching was not heavy or difficult, save for the freezingly cold and very rapid streams we had to wade through. It was all we could do to get warm again after having been immersed in one, and before we had ceased shivering we had to wade through the next, and yet the next, so that one's chilliness increased, and the constant discomfort of cold became very trying. Much discontent prevailed among my carriers over the very long march, as their feet were numbed with cold. They nearly mutinied when I would not let them stop at a camp they had selected, but ordered them to proceed farther. A mile and a half from the point they had favoured, we overlooked a large, flat basin of stones and gravel, about half a mile wide and three-quarters of a mile long, which had the appearance of having formerly been a lake. It was surrounded by high snowy peaks, and its bed lay at an altitude of 15,400 feet. It seemed as if the immense quantity of stones and pebbles carried by the river feeding it had raised its bed until it had caused the water to flow into the Kuti. When I saw it, the river formed an extensive delta with as many as twelve [130] arms, joining again within the basin into one single stream before throwing itself into the Kuti. Naturally we selected the wider expanse of water to ford, assuming that it would be shallower than the narrow ones. Once more that day I took off my lower garments and entered the cold water. It came direct from the snows, and its temperature was slightly above freezing-point. The sun had gone down, and there was a piercing wind. My feet, as I went in and out of the numerous branches of the stream, became so cold that I could hardly stand for the stinging pain; moreover, treading on sharp-edged stones under the water and knocking my frozen toes against them was at first very painful, but after a time they got so frozen that, though at each step the soles of my feet and toes were cut and bruised, I suffered no actual pain until after crossing five or six arms of the delta. Unable to balance myself any longer, I struggled as best I could out of the water and rubbed my feet violently, until slowly, and with intense pain, they came back to life.

The Jolinkan River, which starts from the snowfield east of the Lebung or Jolinkan Pass, now needed to be crossed. The tough dacoit, always willing to help, carried his load across, and lifted me effortlessly onto his back, sparing me from falling into the icy water past my waist, while he was soaked up to his neck. The Kuti's course now shifts to 330° (b.m.). Navigating over small barren hills and around the bases of tall mountains, we reached an altitude of 15,000 feet. To the left of the path, eighty feet above it, was a small, beautiful lake, 500 yards long and 400 wide. Its waters mirrored the towering snowy peaks surrounding it like a silver mirror, draining into a short but steep river that charged powerfully into the Kuti. Shortly after leaving this lake, we found another small body of water nearby, marked by thirteen unusual stone piles or columns, each built by the first Tibetan or Shoka who crossed the pass in the summer. A similar structure was also visible on a large rock jutting out from the larger lake. As the sun set behind the mountains to the west, we forged ahead, trying to make as much progress as possible toward the perpetual snows. We continued to move over rolling terrain, and the march wasn't particularly heavy or difficult except for the freezing cold and swiftly flowing streams we had to wade through. It was a struggle to warm up after each immersion, and before I could stop shivering, I had to wade through another stream, and then another, increasing the chilliness and making the constant discomfort of cold quite taxing. There was widespread discontent among my carriers over the long march, as their feet were numb from the cold. They nearly revolted when I refused to let them stop at a camp they had chosen, insisting that we move on further. A mile and a half from their preferred stop, we looked out over a large, flat basin of stones and gravel, about half a mile wide and three-quarters of a mile long, which appeared to have once been a lake. It was surrounded by high snowy peaks, and its bed rested at an altitude of 15,400 feet. It seemed that the massive amount of stones and pebbles carried by the river feeding it had raised its bed, causing the water to flow into the Kuti. At the time I saw it, the river formed a large delta with as many as twelve arms, merging into one stream within the basin before flowing into the Kuti. Naturally, we chose the wider part of the water to cross, thinking it would be shallower than the narrower sections. Once again that day, I removed my lower garments and waded into the cold water. It came directly from the snow, and its temperature was just above freezing. The sun had set, and a biting wind blew. My feet became so cold while moving in and out of the various branches of the stream that I could hardly withstand the stinging pain. Additionally, stepping on sharp-edged stones submerged in the water and banging my frozen toes against them was initially very painful, but after a while, they became so numb that although the soles of my feet and toes were cut and bruised with each step, I felt no real pain until after crossing five or six arms of the delta. Unable to maintain my balance any longer, I struggled to pull myself out of the water and rubbed my feet vigorously until, slowly and with great pain, they started to warm up again.

It is curious how a little sense of humour helps on such occasions. To an onlooker not suffering as we were, the sight of our party crossing that dreadful delta would have been curious. The expression of disgust on all my men's faces, not to speak of my own, could not but have caused merriment. We carried our footgear on our shoulders; we struggled, stumbled, and splashed in the greenish water, and now one, then another, fell helpless through frostbite on some island or other, until we were all disabled, and still only half-way through. In spite of our condition, worn out as we were, the soles and sides of our feet badly cut and bleeding, my men, so sulky at having been firmly baulked in their wishes, became quite good-natured and amusing when I chaffed them over their present troubles, and they saw that I was in the same plight. After endless rubbing, we restored a certain amount of circulation to our lower limbs, and proceeded to cross the next six arms of the delta. When, after an hour or longer of suffering, we were at last able to put on our footgear, we felt the happiness which comes from the knowledge of difficulties overcome. Never can I forget the great joy arising from what may seem a small comfort—a warm pair of socks! As I write these lines I live over again the particular pleasure of gently drawing them on, and it is impressed for ever on my mind as a fitting reward for the hardships I had put up with.

It’s interesting how a little sense of humor helps during tough times. To someone watching and not suffering like we were, seeing our group cross that horrible delta would have been quite a sight. The look of disgust on all my men’s faces, including my own, surely would have brought some laughs. We carried our footwear on our shoulders; we struggled, stumbled, and splashed through the greenish water, and one by one, someone would fall helplessly onto an island or another due to frostbite, until we were all out of commission and still only halfway through. Despite our situation, worn out as we were, with the soles and sides of our feet badly cut and bleeding, my men, who were grumpy about being held back from what they wanted, became friendly and funny when I joked with them about our troubles, especially when they realized I was in the same boat. After rubbing our feet for ages to get some feeling back into them, we went on to cross the next six arms of the delta. Finally, after an hour or more of suffering, when we were able to put our footwear back on, we felt that happiness that comes from having overcome challenges. I can never forget the immense joy from what might seem like a small comfort—a warm pair of socks! As I write this, I relive the special pleasure of gently pulling them on, and that memory is forever etched in my mind as a well-deserved reward for the hardships I endured.

We pitched our tents in a sheltered narrow valley to the North-West of the large basin. Altitude, 15,400 feet. Thermometer: Minimum, 24°, Maximum, 51°.

We set up our tents in a protected narrow valley to the northwest of the large basin. Elevation: 15,400 feet. Thermometer: Low, 24°, High, 51°.


[131]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXII

Want of fuel—Cooking under difficulty—Mansing lost and found—Saved from summary justice—Tibetan visitors—We purchase sheep—The snow-line—Cold streams—The petrified chapati and human hand.

One of the main drawbacks of travelling at these great altitudes was the want of vegetable fuel. There was not a tree, not a shrub to be seen near our camp. Nature wore her most desolate and barren look. Failing wood, my men dispersed to collect and bring in the dry dung of yak, pony and sheep to serve as fuel. Kindling this was no easy matter, box after box of matches was quickly used, and our collective lung power severely drawn upon in fanning the unwilling sparks into a flame only a few inches high. Upon this meagre fire we attempted to cook our food and boil our water (a trying process at such an altitude), keeping our own circulation fairly normal by constantly required efforts. The cuisine that night was not of the usual excellence, and did but little credit to the cook. We had to eat everything half-cooked, or, to be accurate, almost altogether uncooked. The night was a bitterly cold one, with a heavy fall of snow. When we rose in the morning it lay quite two feet deep around us, and the glare was painful to the eyes. I mustered my men. Mansing was missing. He had not arrived the previous night, and there was no sign of the man I had sent in search of him. I was anxious not only from my personal interest in his load (the fellow carried a load of flour, salt, pepper, and five pounds of butter), but I was afraid that the poor leper might himself have been washed away in one of the dangerous streams. Even if this fear were groundless, he must, I felt, have suffered terribly from the cold with no shelter and no fire. Bijesing, who had gone in search of him, had eaten some food before [132] starting, and had taken blankets with him in case he could not return to camp during the night.

One of the main drawbacks of traveling at these high altitudes was the lack of fuel for cooking. There were no trees or shrubs near our camp. Nature looked incredibly desolate and barren. With no wood to find, my men scattered to collect dry dung from yaks, ponies, and sheep to use as fuel. Getting it to ignite wasn't easy; we quickly went through box after box of matches, and we used a lot of effort to fan the reluctant sparks into a flame that barely reached a few inches high. We tried to cook our food and boil our water on this meager fire (a challenging task at such an altitude), keeping our circulation somewhat normal with constant effort. That night’s meal was far from our usual standards and didn’t reflect well on the cook. We had to eat everything either half-cooked or, to be honest, almost completely raw. The night was bitterly cold, with heavy snowfall. When we woke up in the morning, there was nearly two feet of snow around us, and the brightness was uncomfortable for our eyes. I gathered my men. Mansing was missing. He hadn’t returned the previous night, and there was no sign of the person I had sent to look for him. I was worried, not just because I was personally invested in his load (he was carrying flour, salt, pepper, and five pounds of butter), but I also feared that the poor leper might have been swept away in one of the dangerous streams. Even if that fear was unfounded, I knew he must have suffered terribly from the cold with no shelter and no fire. Bijesing, who had gone to find him, had eaten some food before leaving and taken blankets with him in case he couldn’t get back to camp during the night.

It was long after sunrise when, with the aid of my telescope, I discovered the two men coming towards us. They arrived an hour or so later. Mansing had been found sound asleep, several miles back, lying by the side of the empty butter-pot, the contents of which he had devoured. The discovery of this misdeed caused the greatest indignation in camp, for fatty matter and butter were much cherished by the natives, as being warmth-producing, when going over these cold passes. He was nearly the victim of summary justice at the hands of my angry men, and it was only with trouble that I rescued him from their clutches. To prevent a recurrence of the offence, I ordered the culprit to carry in future a heavy load of photographic plates and instruments, which I thought would not prove quite so appetising.

It was a while after sunrise when I spotted two men coming toward us with my telescope. They arrived about an hour later. Mansing had been found sound asleep a few miles back, lying next to an empty butter container that he had finished off. The discovery of this happened caused a huge stir in camp, since the natives highly valued fatty food and butter for the warmth it provided while crossing these cold passes. He nearly faced immediate punishment from my furious men, and I had to intervene to save him from their anger. To prevent him from doing something like that again, I ordered him to carry a heavy load of photographic plates and equipment, which I figured wouldn’t be as tempting.

Before starting I took my usual bath in the cold stream and rubbed myself all over with snow. I found this very invigorating, and when the reaction came I experienced a delightful glow of warmth, notwithstanding the thin clothes I was wearing.

Before starting, I took my usual bath in the cold stream and rubbed snow all over myself. I found this very refreshing, and when the feeling kicked in, I experienced a wonderful warmth, despite the light clothes I was wearing.

While we were camping, a flock of some six hundred sheep appeared, and with them some Tibetans. As I had put up my Tibetan tent, they had made for it, expecting to find some of their own countrymen, and their embarrassment was amusing when they found themselves face to face with Dr. Wilson and myself. Hurriedly removing their fur caps, they laid them upon the ground and made a comical jerky curtsey, as if their heads and knees moved by means of a spring. They put out their tongues full length and kept them so until I made signs that they could draw them back, as I wanted them to answer some questions. This unexpected meeting with us frightened them greatly; they were trembling all over with fear, and after getting as much information out of them as they seemed to possess, I took advantage of the opportunity to buy some of their fattest sheep. When the money was paid there was a further display of furred tongues, and more grand salaams ere they departed, while all hands on our side were busy trying to prevent our newly purchased animals from rejoining the flock moving away from us. On our next march these animals proved a great trouble, and we had to drag them the greater part of the way. Kachi, who had been entrusted with a very recalcitrant and strong beast, which I had specially pro[133]mised my men for their dinner if they made a long march that day, found himself discomfited when he saw that the sheep had freed its head from the cord with which he was dragging it, and was cantering away full speed in the opposite direction.

While we were camping, a flock of around six hundred sheep showed up, along with some Tibetans. Since I had set up my Tibetan tent, they headed straight for it, expecting to see some of their fellow countrymen, and their embarrassment was funny when they realized they were facing Dr. Wilson and me. They quickly took off their fur caps, laid them on the ground, and made a comical, jerky bow, as if their heads and knees were operated by springs. They stuck out their tongues as long as they could and kept them that way until I gestured for them to pull them back, as I wanted them to answer some questions. This unexpected encounter frightened them a lot; they were shaking with fear, and after gathering as much information from them as they seemed to have, I took the chance to buy some of their fattest sheep. After the payment, they showed off their furred tongues again and gave us more elaborate bows before leaving, while everyone on our side was busy trying to keep our newly purchased animals from running back to the flock moving away from us. On our next march, these animals became quite a hassle, and we had to drag them for most of the way. Kachi, who had been tasked with a very stubborn and strong sheep that I had promised my men for dinner if they pushed through a long march that day, found himself in trouble when he noticed that the sheep had gotten its head free from the cord he was using to pull it and was galloping off at full speed in the opposite direction.

Camping in Snow

Camping in the snow


Now, it is well known that at considerable altitudes running is a very painful operation for human beings, the rarified air making the effect of such exertion almost suffocating. Yet Kachi, having over[134]come his first surprise, was soon chasing the escaped beast, and, urged by the cheers and shouts of my other men, who seemed much concerned over this new calamity, he succeeded, after an exciting chase, in capturing it by its tail, a feat easier to describe than to accomplish, for Tibetan sheep have very short stumpy tails. Kachi fell to the ground exhausted, but he held fast with both hands to his capture, and eventually the animal was secured with ropes. This was the sort of minor trouble with which we had to contend at almost every turn during our journey, and although it may appear trivial, it was exasperating enough at the time.

Now, it's well known that at high altitudes, running is really painful for people, as the thin air makes it feel almost suffocating. Yet Kachi, having gotten over his initial surprise, was soon chasing the escaped animal, encouraged by the cheers and shouts of my other men, who seemed quite worried about this new problem. After an exciting chase, he managed to catch it by its tail—a task that sounds easier than it is because Tibetan sheep have very short, stubby tails. Kachi fell to the ground, exhausted, but he held on tightly with both hands to his catch, and eventually the animal was secured with ropes. This was the kind of minor trouble we faced at almost every turn during our journey, and although it might seem trivial, it was frustrating enough at the time.

On fairly undulating ground we gradually rose to a pass 15,580 feet high; then traversing a wide flat land, we followed the Kuti River with its high snowy mountains to the West and East. The snow-line was at 16,000 feet; the snow below this level melts daily, except in a few shaded places. Red and white flowers were still to be seen, though not in such quantities as lower down, and I saw enamoured couples of small black and white butterflies.[12]

On fairly hilly ground, we gradually climbed to a pass 15,580 feet high. After that, we crossed a wide flat area and followed the Kuti River, with its tall snowy mountains to the west and east. The snow-line was at 16,000 feet, and the snow below that level melts daily, except in a few shaded spots. Red and white flowers were still visible, though not as plentiful as farther down, and I saw pairs of small black and white butterflies fluttering around. [12]

After a while there was yet another bitterly cold stream to ford; two small lakes to skirt; three more deep rivers to wade, with cold water from the snows up to our chests, and then we had to make the best way we could through a large field of rocks and stones showing strong indications of iron, my compasses being at once affected, and becoming for a time quite unreliable owing to the deviation. A curious flat circular stone, resting on the top of others, was pointed out to me as a wonder; the accepted legend of the Shokas being that, centuries ago, one of their countrymen halted by the side of this rock, and having baked a chapati, laid it upon the rock, proceeding to make others, when to his great astonishment, on raising his hand to take his first chapati, he found it had turned into solid stone, and had furthermore assumed gigantic proportions. A few feet farther on I was pointed out another wonder, a great human hand (as the Tibetans and Shokas call it), which is supposed to have belonged to the maker of the chapati. Not being satisfied with his first experience, he laid his hand on the rock, and there it remained, petrified, and in this case also, increasing tenfold in size. I could see, with some stretch of the imagination, a certain resemblance to an enormous human hand, but the thing required more faith than observation.

After a while, we had to cross another bitterly cold stream; skirt around two small lakes; wade through three more deep rivers, with icy water from the snow up to our chests. Then we had to find our way through a large field of rocks and stones that showed strong signs of iron, which affected my compasses, making them quite unreliable for a while due to the deviation. I was shown a curious flat circular stone resting on top of others, which was considered a marvel. The accepted legend among the Shokas is that centuries ago, one of their people stopped by this rock, and after baking a chapati, laid it down on the rock while he made more. To his astonishment, when he reached for his first chapati, he found it had turned into solid stone and had grown to giant size. A few feet further, I was shown another wonder—a great human hand, as the Tibetans and Shokas call it, which is said to have belonged to the maker of the chapati. Not satisfied with his first experience, he laid his hand on the rock, and it remained there, petrified, increasing tenfold in size as well. I could see, with a bit of imagination, a certain resemblance to an enormous human hand, but it required more faith than observation.

[135] Mile after mile we marched over sharp stones, wading through a second troublesome delta of eight arms fully a mile in width, across a flat basin of pointed pebbles and stones, until at last, to our great delight, we came to smooth grass land, a soothing comfort to one's torn feet.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] We marched for miles over jagged stones, navigating through another frustrating delta with eight channels that stretched for a full mile, across a flat area covered in sharp pebbles and rocks, until finally, to our immense relief, we reached a smooth patch of grass, a welcome comfort for our sore feet.

The Snow-Line at 16,000 Feet

The snow line at 16,000 feet


Here the Kuti River ran through a large basin, not dissimilar to the one near which we had camped the night before, having also the appearance of lake formation with high perpendicular rocks on the left, which gave one the impression of a vast wall—a rugged and forbidding barrier. Proceeding N.W. the basin became wider and the Kuti River turned to the N.W., while the Mangshan River, descending from the East, joined the first stream in the centre of the basin. In crossing the numerous branches of the two rivers we again experienced, with almost accentuated discomfort, the trials and weariness of the preceding day. The water was colder than ever, our feet were by this time in a dreadful condition, cut and bleeding, because it was constantly necessary to walk bare-footed. Aching and benumbed we stumbled on, in and out of water, always, it seemed, encountering sharp small stones. For us there could be no turning back however; the pain had to be [136] borne before the march was finished, and we won our camping-ground at last under the lee of the high chain of mountains to the North of us, and on the northern bank of the Mangshan River. Directly in front stood the final obstacle, the stupendous backbone of the Himahlyas; once past this I should be on that high Tibetan plateau so accurately and picturesquely called "the roof of the world."

Here, the Kuti River flowed through a large basin, similar to the one near where we had camped the night before. It appeared like a lake, with high vertical rocks on the left that looked like a massive wall—a rough and intimidating barrier. Heading northwest, the basin widened, and the Kuti River made a turn to the northwest, while the Mangshan River, flowing from the east, joined it in the center of the basin. As we crossed the numerous branches of the two rivers, we felt the discomfort of the previous day even more intensely. The water was colder than ever, and our feet were in terrible shape, cut and bleeding, since we had to walk barefoot. Aching and numb, we stumbled on, wading in and out of the water, constantly encountering sharp small stones. There was no turning back for us; we had to endure the pain until the march was over. Eventually, we reached our camping spot at last, sheltered by the high mountain range to the north and on the northern bank of the Mangshan River. Right in front stood the final barrier, the tremendous backbone of the Himalayas; once I got past this, I would be on that high Tibetan plateau, famously and beautifully known as "the roof of the world."

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[12] N.B.—This same kind of butterfly I found at even greater elevations in Tibet.

[12] Note—I found this same type of butterfly at even higher altitudes in Tibet.


[137]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXIII

The scouts return—A small exploring party—The Mangshan glacier.

From Kuti I had despatched a sturdy Shoka, named Nattoo, to ascertain whether it was possible to cross the chain over the high Mangshan Pass, as in this case I should be enabled to get many marches into Tibet by the jungle without fear of being detected. I should thus get behind the force of soldiers which I was informed the Jong Pen of Taklakot had concentrated at the Lippu Pass to prevent my entering the country, and before they could have time to discover my whereabouts I should be too far ahead for them to find me. Nattoo arrived in camp almost simultaneously with ourselves and had a long tale of woe to relate. He had been half way up the mountain. The snow was deep and there were huge and treacherous cracks in the ice. As he was on his way up, an avalanche had fallen, and it was merely by the skin of his teeth that he had escaped with his life. This was to him an evil omen, and he had turned back without reaching the summit of the pass. He seemed scared and worn out, and declared that it was impossible for us to proceed that way. Unfortunately the thrilling account of the Kutial's misfortunes had a depressing effect on my men. What with the intense cold, the fatigue of carrying heavy loads at high elevations over such rough country, and the fearful rivers which they dreaded, and so many of which we had crossed, my carriers became absolutely demoralised at the thought of new hardships ahead, all the more when I assured them that I did not believe Nattoo, and that I should go and see for myself.

From Kuti, I had sent a reliable guide named Nattoo to find out if we could cross over the high Mangshan Pass. If it was possible, I could make significant progress into Tibet through the jungle without the risk of being detected. This would allow me to get behind the soldiers the Jong Pen of Taklakot had assembled at the Lippu Pass to block my entry into the area, and before they could figure out where I was, I would be too far ahead for them to catch me. Nattoo arrived in camp almost at the same time we did and had a long tale of misfortune to share. He had made it halfway up the mountain. The snow was deep, and there were large, dangerous cracks in the ice. On his way up, there was an avalanche, and he barely escaped with his life. To him, this was a bad sign, and he turned back before reaching the summit of the pass. He looked terrified and exhausted, insisting it was impossible for us to continue that way. Unfortunately, his dramatic story had a discouraging effect on my men. With the biting cold, the strain of carrying heavy loads at high altitudes over rough terrain, and the terrifying rivers we had crossed that they feared, my porters became completely demoralized at the thought of more challenges ahead, especially when I told them I didn’t believe Nattoo and that I planned to check it out myself.

It was 4.30 in the afternoon, and therefore some time before sunset. There would be moonlight. I had on that [138] day marched eight miles,[13] and though the soles of my feet were cut and sore I was not really tired. Our camp was at an elevation of 16,150 feet, a pretty respectable altitude considering that the highest mountain in Europe is only 15,781 feet. Dr. Wilson insisted on accompanying me to the top, and Kachi Ram and a Rongba coolie volunteered to come as well. Bijesing, the Johari, got on his feet after some persuasion, and that completed our little exploration party. Chanden Sing, who was really the only man I could trust, was left in charge of the camp, with strict orders to punish severely any one who might attempt to turn back during my absence.

It was 4:30 in the afternoon, so there was still time before sunset. The moon would be out. I had marched eight miles that day, and although the soles of my feet were cut and sore, I wasn’t really tired. Our camp was at an elevation of 16,150 feet, quite a respectable height considering the highest mountain in Europe is only 15,781 feet. Dr. Wilson insisted on coming with me to the top, and Kachi Ram and a Rongba coolie volunteered to join us as well. Bijesing, the Johari, got up after some convincing, and that completed our little exploration group. Chanden Sing, who was really the only person I could trust, was left in charge of the camp, with strict orders to deal harshly with anyone who might try to turn back during my absence.

We set out almost immediately after reaching camp, following up stream the course of the Mangshan River, which is boxed in between high cliffs, those south of it running in a direction of 100° (b.m.), those to the north converging to 130°; the two ranges eventually meeting in the glacier at the foot of Mangshan, about three miles E.-E.S.E. of our camp. There was no track, and the walking was extremely difficult and troublesome, over large slippery stones, between which one's feet constantly slipped and got jammed, straining and injuring one's ankles. Little trusting my followers, who seemed on the verge of mutiny, I did not care to leave behind in camp the heavy load of silver rupees (R. 800) sewn in my coat, which, by the way, I always carried on my person, as well as my rifle, two compasses (prismatic and luminous), two aneroids, one half-chronometer, and another watch and some thirty cartridges. The combined weight of these articles was considerable,[14] and I felt it especially during the first days of my march. On this particular afternoon it was almost too much for my strength. However, one gets accustomed to most things, and after a while I felt comparatively little discomfort in marching under it. I persisted in thus weighting myself simply to be on the safe side, so as to be always prepared in case my men revolted or abandoned me.

We set out almost immediately after reaching camp, following the course of the Mangshan River upstream, which is squeezed between high cliffs. The cliffs to the south run in a direction of 100° (b.m.), while those to the north converge at 130°; the two ranges eventually meet in the glacier at the foot of Mangshan, about three miles E.-E.S.E. from our camp. There was no clear path, and the walking was really tough and frustrating, over large, slippery stones that made my feet constantly slip and get stuck, straining and injuring my ankles. Not fully trusting my companions, who seemed close to mutiny, I didn’t want to leave behind the heavy load of silver rupees (R. 800) sewn into my coat, which I always carried on me, along with my rifle, two compasses (one prismatic and one luminous), two aneroids, a half-chronometer, another watch, and about thirty cartridges. The combined weight of these items was significant,[14] and I particularly felt it during the first days of my march. On that specific afternoon, it was almost too much for my strength. However, one gets used to most things, and after a while, I felt relatively little discomfort while marching with it. I continued to carry this weight simply to be safe, always prepared in case my men revolted or left me.

We proceeded up and down the series of hillocks and in and out of the innumerable channels that the melting snow and ice had, with the aid of centuries, cut deep into the mass of rolling stones. At the point where the two ranges met there stood before us the magnificent pale green ice-terraces of the Mangshan glacier, surmounted by extensive

We moved up and down the series of hills and navigated the countless channels that the melting snow and ice had, over the centuries, carved deeply into the mass of rolling stones. At the point where the two ranges met, the impressive pale green ice terraces of the Mangshan glacier loomed before us, topped by extensive

[139]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Mangshan Glacier

The Mangshan Glacier


[140] snow-fields winding their way to the summit of the mountain range. Clouds enveloped the higher peaks. The clear Alpine ice showed vertical streaks, especially in the lower part of the glacier, where it was granulated to a certain extent. The base, the sides and top being covered with a thick coat of fresh snow, and my time being very limited, I was unable to make careful investigations to ascertain the recent movement and oscillations of this glacier. Judging by the nature of the stony tracts we had passed over, and also by the mounds, similar to those of a terminal moraine, which increased as we approached the glacier and its snow-covered fringe, I concluded that the glacier must have retreated considerably. The rocks and stones, as I have already mentioned, were shiny and slippery, which I attributed to the friction of the ice, and where the ice had extended over gravel, this was greatly disturbed, and scarred by innumerable channels, due, no doubt, to the mighty force of the moving ice besides the constant action of melting snows during the summer. The slopes of the mountains on the north showed no indication of having been disturbed, but the range on the southern side had all the appearance of having been cut and excavated by the ice. Probably the large basins which I had crossed on my way from Kuti, and even the last one, facing our camp, were after all reservoirs formed by ancient moraines with alluvial deposits.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Snowfields winding their way to the top of the mountain range. Clouds surrounded the higher peaks. The clear Alpine ice showed vertical streaks, especially in the lower part of the glacier, where it had become somewhat granulated. The base, sides, and top were covered with a thick layer of fresh snow, and since my time was very limited, I couldn't conduct thorough investigations to determine the recent movements and shifts of this glacier. Based on the rocky areas we had crossed and the mounds, similar to those of a terminal moraine, that increased as we got closer to the glacier and its snow-covered edge, I concluded that the glacier must have retreated significantly. The rocks and stones, as I mentioned before, were shiny and slick, which I thought was due to the friction of the ice, and where the ice had spread over gravel, it had been greatly disturbed and scarred by countless channels, most likely due to the powerful movement of the ice along with the continual melting of snow during the summer. The slopes of the mountains on the north showed no signs of disturbance, but the range on the southern side appeared to have been cut and shaped by the ice. The large basins I had crossed on my way from Kuti, including the last one facing our camp, were likely reservoirs created by ancient moraines with alluvial deposits.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[13] It must be remembered that at high elevations the exertion of walking eight miles would be equivalent to that of marching about twice the distance at much lower altitudes.

[13] It's important to keep in mind that at high altitudes, walking eight miles feels like marching about twice that distance at lower elevations.

[14] See Appendix. Letter by Dr. H. Wilson.

[14] See Appendix. Letter from Dr. H. Wilson.


[141]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXIV

Snow and troublesome débris—The doctor's sufferings—Kachi disabled—Further trials—A weird apparition—Delirium—All safe—The descent.

The Mangshan River rises from this glacier, but we left the glacier (17,800 feet) to the right, and, turning sharply northwards, began our ascent towards the pass. To gaze upon the incline before us was alone sufficient to deter one from attempting to climb it, had one a choice; in addition to this, the snow we struggled over was so soft and deep that we sank into it up to our waists. Occasionally the snow alternated with patches of loose débris and rotten rock, on which we were no better off; in fact, the fatigue of progressing over them was simply overpowering. Having climbed up half-a-dozen steps among the loose cutting stones, we felt ourselves sliding back to almost our original point of departure, followed by a small avalanche of shifting material that only stopped when it got to the foot of the mountain.

The Mangshan River originates from this glacier, but we left the glacier (17,800 feet) to the right and, turning sharply north, began our climb toward the pass. Just looking at the slope ahead was enough to discourage anyone from trying to climb it, if they had a choice; on top of that, the snow we trudged through was so soft and deep that we sank into it up to our waists. Occasionally, the snow was mixed with patches of loose débris and crumbling rock, which didn’t make it any easier; in fact, it was exhausting to move over them. After climbing up a handful of steps among the loose stones, we felt ourselves sliding back to nearly where we started, followed by a small avalanche of shifting debris that only stopped when it reached the base of the mountain.

At 19,000 feet we were for a considerable distance on soft snow, covering an ice-field with deep crevasses and cracks in it. We had to feel our way with great caution, particularly as there was only the light of the moon to depend upon.

At 19,000 feet, we traveled for a long stretch on soft snow, which was covering an ice field riddled with deep crevasses and cracks. We had to navigate very carefully, especially since we could only rely on the moonlight.

Fortunately, as we rose higher, there were no more crevasses, but I began to feel a curious exhaustion that I had never experienced before. At sunset the thermometer which Kachi carried for me had descended forty degrees within a few minutes, and the sudden change in the temperature seemed to affect us all more or less; but we went on, with the exception of Bijesing, who was seized with mountain sickness so violently that he was unable to proceed. The doctor, too, a man of powerful build, was suffer[142]ing considerably. His legs, he said, had become like lead, and each seemed to weigh a ton. The effort of lifting, or even moving, them required all his energy. Although he was terribly blown and gasping for breath, yet he would not give in, and he struggled on bravely until we reached an altitude of 20,500 feet. Here he was seized with such exhaustion and pain that he was unable to proceed. Kachi Ram, the Rongba and I went ahead, but we also were suffering, Kachi complaining of violent beating in his temples and loud buzzing in his ears. He also gasped and staggered dangerously, threatening to collapse at any moment. At 21,000 feet he fell flat on the snow. He was instantly asleep, breathing heavily and snoring raspingly. His hands and feet were icy cold, and I rubbed them. But what caused me more anxiety than anything was the irregular beating and throbbing of his heart. I wrapped him up in his blanket and my waterproof, and, having seen to his general comfort, I shouted to the doctor, telling him what had happened, and that I was going to push on as much higher as I could stand, the Rongba being now the only one of the party who was able to keep up.

Fortunately, as we climbed higher, there were no more crevasses, but I started to feel a strange exhaustion I had never felt before. At sunset, the thermometer that Kachi was carrying for me dropped forty degrees in just a few minutes, and the sudden temperature change seemed to impact all of us to some extent; however, we continued on, except for Bijesing, who was hit with mountain sickness so violently that he couldn’t go any further. The doctor, a well-built man, was also suffering quite a bit. He said his legs felt like lead, each one seeming to weigh a ton. The effort to lift or even move them took every bit of his energy. Even though he was extremely breathless and gasping for air, he refused to give up and pushed on bravely until we reached an altitude of 20,500 feet. At this point, he was hit with such exhaustion and pain that he couldn’t continue. Kachi Ram, the Rongba, and I went ahead, but we were also struggling; Kachi was complaining of a pounding in his temples and a loud ringing in his ears. He gasped and staggered dangerously, about to collapse at any moment. At 21,000 feet, he fell flat on the snow. He instantly fell asleep, breathing heavily and snoring raspy. His hands and feet were icy cold, so I rubbed them. But what worried me even more was the irregular beating and throbbing of his heart. I wrapped him up in his blanket and my waterproof jacket, and after ensuring he was comfortable, I shouted to the doctor, letting him know what had happened and that I was going to push on as high as I could manage, with the Rongba being the only one in the group who could keep up.

A thick mist came on and enveloped us, which considerably added to our trials. Our efforts to get on after we left Kachi at 21,000 feet were desperate, our lungs in convulsion as if about to burst, our pulses hastened, our hearts throbbing (mine being ordinarily very regular) as if they would beat themselves out of our bodies. Exhausted and seized by irresistible drowsiness, the Rongba and I nevertheless at last reached the top. It was a satisfaction to have got there, to have reached such an altitude, although I had long realised the impossibility of getting my men over by this way. It served me also to ascertain the amount of snow on the other side of the range, which, when the fog lifted somewhat, I found to be greater on the northern slope than on the southern. Although almost fainting with fatigue, I registered my observations. The altitude was 22,000 feet, the hour 11 p.m., and there was a strong, cutting North-East wind. I had stupidly forgotten to take my thermometer out of Kachi's pocket when I left him, and was unable to register the temperature, although I had done so only a few minutes before I left Kachi at 21,000 feet. The cold was intense. The stars were extraordinarily brilliant and the moon shone bright for a while over the panorama around me, and though it was a view of utter desolation, it had nevertheless a curious indescribable fascina[143]tion. Below me, to the south, were mountainous masses buried in snow, and to the South-West and North-East were peaks even higher than the one on which I stood. To the north stretched the immense, dreary Tibetan plateau with undulations and intricate hill ranges, beyond which a high mountain range with snow peaks could just be perceived in the distance. I could see very little snow near by, except on the northern slope of the range I was standing on, and on the hill-tops which dotted the plateau.

A thick mist rolled in and surrounded us, making our challenges even greater. After we left Kachi at 21,000 feet, we struggled desperately to keep moving; our lungs felt like they were about to burst, our hearts raced, and mine, which is usually steady, pounded as if it would leap out of my chest. Completely exhausted and overwhelmed by an uncontrollable drowsiness, the Rongba and I finally reached the summit. It felt good to be there, to have achieved such a height, even though I had long since accepted that I couldn’t get my men across this way. It also allowed me to gauge the amount of snow on the other side of the range, which, when the fog lifted a bit, I saw was much more substantial on the northern slope than on the southern. Despite nearly collapsing from fatigue, I took my measurements. The altitude was 22,000 feet, the time was 11 pm, and a strong, biting North-East wind was blowing. I stupidly forgot to take my thermometer out of Kachi's pocket when I left him, so I couldn't record the temperature, even though I had just done so a few moments before. The cold was intense. The stars were incredibly bright, and the moon shone brightly for a short time over the scene around me. Although it was a landscape of complete desolation, it had a strange, indescribable allure. Below me to the south were snow-covered mountains, and to the South-West and North-East were peaks even taller than the one I was on. Stretching to the north was the vast, bleak Tibetan plateau with its rolling hills and complex ridges, beyond which I could just make out a high mountain range with snow-capped peaks in the distance. I could see very little snow nearby, except on the northern slope of the range I was on and on the hilltops scattered across the plateau.

I had barely taken it in, barely realised the wonder of nature asleep when the mist again rose before me and I saw a gigantic phantom rising out of it. It stood in the centre of a luminous circle, a tall, dark figure in the folds of an enormous veil of mist. The effect was overwhelming, and it was only after some moments that I realised that the spectre wore my features, was a liquid presentation of my own proportions colossally enlarged; that I stood in the centre of a lunar rainbow, and that I was gazing on the reflection of myself in the mist. As I moved my arms, my body, or my head, the ghostlike figure moved, and I felt myself irresistibly changing my postures—oddly and nervously at first—then, with an awakening sense of the ridiculous in my actions—so as to make my image change and do as I did. I felt like a child placed for the first time in front of a mirror.

I had hardly taken it in, hardly realized the beauty of nature at rest when the mist rose before me again, and I saw a giant ghost emerging from it. It stood in the center of a bright circle, a tall, dark figure wrapped in a huge veil of mist. The sight was overwhelming, and it took me a moment to realize that the specter had my features, a liquid version of my own shape but massively enlarged; I stood in the middle of a lunar rainbow, looking at my own reflection in the mist. As I moved my arms, my body, or my head, the ghostly figure moved, and I felt an irresistible urge to shift my poses—strangely and nervously at first—then, with an awakening sense of the absurdity of my actions—so that my image would change and mimic what I did. I felt like a child seeing themselves in a mirror for the first time.

The illustration on page 145 represents a solar spectre with circular rainbow which I saw later on at a comparatively low altitude; the lunar effect differed from this in that the colours of the rainbow were but faintly distinguishable.

The illustration on page 145 shows a solar spectrum with a circular rainbow that I later saw at a relatively low altitude; the lunar effect was different in that the colors of the rainbow were only faintly recognizable.

The Rongba had fallen exhausted, and I felt so faint with the awful pressure on my lungs, that, despite all my efforts to resist it, I collapsed on the snow. The coolie and I, shivering pitifully, shared the same blanket for additional warmth. Both of us were seized with irresistible drowsiness, as if we had taken a strong narcotic. I fought hard against it, for I well knew that if my eyelids once closed they would almost certainly remain so for ever. I called to the Rongba. He was fast asleep. I summoned up my last atom of vitality to keep my eyes open. The wind blew hard and biting, with a hissing noise. How that hiss still sounds in my ears! It seemed like the whisper of death. The Rongba, crouched with teeth chattering, was moaning, and his sudden shudders bespoke great pain. It seemed only common charity to let him have the blanket, which was in any case too small for both, so I [144] wrapped it tightly round his head and body. He was doubled up with his chin on his knees. This small exertion was quite sufficient to make me lose the tug-of-war in which I was pulling against nature. Just like the subject who, under hypnotic influence, feels his own will and power suddenly going from him, so I felt the entire hopelessness of further struggle against the supernatural forces I was contending with. Falling backwards on the snow, I made a last desperate effort to gaze at the glittering stars ... my sight became dim and obscured....

The Rongba had collapsed from exhaustion, and I felt so weak from the terrible pressure on my lungs that, despite my efforts to resist it, I fell onto the snow. The coolie and I, shivering painfully, shared the same blanket for extra warmth. We were both overcome with an irresistible drowsiness, as if we had taken a strong sedative. I fought hard against it, knowing that if my eyelids closed even for a moment, they would likely stay that way forever. I called out to the Rongba. He was fast asleep. I summoned every last bit of energy to keep my eyes open. The wind blew fiercely and biting, making a hissing noise. How that hiss still echoes in my ears! It felt like the whisper of death. The Rongba, crouched and chattering his teeth, was moaning, and his sudden shudders showed he was in great pain. It felt like basic kindness to let him have the blanket, which was already too small for both of us, so I wrapped it tightly around his head and body. He was curled up with his chin on his knees. This small effort was enough to make me lose the battle against nature. Just like someone under hypnosis feels their will and power slipping away, I sensed the total hopelessness of continuing to fight against the supernatural forces I was up against. Falling back onto the snow, I made one last desperate attempt to look at the glittering stars... my vision became dim and blurred...

For how long this semi-consciousness lasted, I do not know. "God! how ghastly! Doctor! Kachi!" I tried to articulate. My voice seemed choked in my throat. Was what I saw before me real? The two men, as if frozen to death by the side of each other, seemed lying on that vast white sheet of snow, motionless as statues of ice. In my dream I attempted to raise them. They were quite rigid. I knelt beside them, calling them and frantically striving to bring them back to consciousness and life. Bewildered, I turned round to look for Bijesing, and, as I did so, all sense of vitality seemed to freeze within me. I saw myself enclosed in a quickly contracting tomb of transparent ice. It was easy to realise that I too would shortly be nothing but a solid block of ice, like my companions. My legs, my arms were already congealed. Horror-stricken as I was at the approach of such a hopeless, ghastly death, my sensations were accompanied by a languor and lassitude indescribable but far from unpleasant. To some extent thought or wonderment was still alive. Should I dwindle painlessly away, preferring rest and peace to effort, or should I make a last struggle to save myself? The ice seemed to close in more and more every moment. I was choking.

For how long this semi-consciousness lasted, I don’t know. “God! How awful! Doctor! Kachi!” I tried to say. My voice felt stuck in my throat. Was what I was seeing real? The two men, as if frozen to death next to each other, lay on that vast white sheet of snow, motionless like ice statues. In my dream, I tried to lift them. They were completely stiff. I knelt beside them, calling out and desperately trying to bring them back to consciousness and life. Confused, I turned to look for Bijesing, and as I did, all sense of life seemed to freeze within me. I saw myself trapped in a quickly closing tomb of transparent ice. It was easy to realize that I too would soon just be a solid block of ice, like my companions. My legs and arms were already frozen. Horrified at the thought of such a hopeless, ghastly death, my feelings were mixed with a strange languor and fatigue that was oddly not unpleasant. To some extent, I was still able to think or wonder. Should I fade away painlessly, choosing rest and peace over struggle, or should I make one last effort to save myself? The ice seemed to close in tighter every moment. I was choking.

I tried to scream! to force myself through the suffocating weight on me! I gave a violent plunge, and then everything had vanished. The frozen Kachi, the doctor, the transparent tomb! Nothingness!

I tried to scream! to push myself through the suffocating weight on me! I made a desperate plunge, and then everything disappeared. The frozen Kachi, the doctor, the transparent tomb! Nothingness!

At last I was able to open my eyes, which ached as if needles had been stuck into them. It was snowing hard. I had temporarily lost the use of my legs and fingers. They were frozen. So violent was the shock of realising how very near death I had really been, that in waking up from the ghastly nightmare I became acutely alive to the full importance of instantly making my way down to a lower level. I was already covered with a layer of snow, and I suppose it was the frigid pressure on my forehead that caused the

At last, I managed to open my eyes, which hurt like someone had poked them with needles. It was snowing heavily. I had temporarily lost feeling in my legs and fingers. They were frozen. The shock of realizing just how close to death I had actually been was so intense that, as I woke up from the horrible nightmare, I became painfully aware of how crucial it was to quickly get myself to a lower level. I was already buried under a layer of snow, and I guess it was the icy weight on my forehead that made the

[145]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Spectre and Circular Rainbow

The Ghost and Circular Rainbow


[146] dream. It is, however, probable that, had it not been for the hideous vision that shook my nerves free of paralysing torpor, I should never have awakened from that spell-bound silence.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] dream. However, it’s likely that if it weren't for the terrifying vision that broke me out of my paralyzing daze, I would never have woken up from that enchanting silence.

I sat up with difficulty, and by beating and rubbing them, slowly regained the use of my lower limbs. I roused the Rongba, rubbed him, and shook him till he was able to move. We began our descent.

I sat up with some effort, and by beating and rubbing my legs, I gradually got the use of my lower limbs back. I woke up the Rongba, rubbed him, and shook him until he could move. We started our descent.

No doubt the satisfaction of going up high mountains is very great; but can it be compared to that of coming down?

No doubt the thrill of climbing high mountains is amazing; but can it really compare to the joy of coming down?

Descending was dangerous but not wearisome. The incline being extremely steep, we took gigantic strides on the snow, and when we came to patches of débris, we slid ten or fifteen feet each step amidst a deafening roar from the huge mass of loose stones set in motion by our descent.

Descending was risky but not exhausting. The slope was really steep, so we took huge strides on the snow, and when we hit patches of débris, we slid ten or fifteen feet with each step, deafened by the thunderous noise of the large mass of loose stones set in motion by our descent.

"I Roused the Rongba"

"I Woke the Rongba"


"Hark!" I said to the Rongba, "what is that?"

"Hear that!" I said to the Rongba, "what is it?"

We waited till all was silence, and with hands up to our ears listened attentively. It was still snowing.

We waited until everything was quiet, and with our hands cupped to our ears, we listened carefully. It was still snowing.

"Ao, ao, ao! Jaldi ao! Tumka hatte? Come, come, come quickly! Where are you?" cried a faint distressed voice from far down below.

"Ao, ao, ao! Jaldi ao! Tumka hatte? Come, come, come quickly! Where are you?" cried a weak, worried voice from far below.

[147] We quickened our pace; having hardly any control over our legs, our descent was precipitous. The snow-fall ceased and we became enveloped in a thick mist which pierced into our very bones.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] We picked up speed; barely able to control our legs, we rushed downhill. The snow had stopped falling, and we found ourselves surrounded by a thick fog that chilled us to the bone.

Guided by the anxious cries of the doctor, whose voice we recognised, we continued our breakneck journey downward. The cries got more and more distinct, and at last, to my great joy, we came face to face with Wilson, who, thank Heaven, was alive but almost helpless, as he said his legs were still like lead, and it was all he could do to move them.

Guided by the urgent calls of the doctor, whose voice we recognized, we pressed on in our frantic descent. The calls became clearer and clearer, and finally, to my immense relief, we encountered Wilson, who, thank God, was alive but nearly incapacitated, saying his legs felt heavy as lead, and he could barely manage to move them.

Owing to his anxiety about us, he had been shouting for a long time, and getting no answer, he became very uneasy, all the more so as he found he could in no way come to our help. He had quite given us up for lost.

Due to his worry about us, he had been shouting for a long time, and after not getting a response, he became really uneasy, especially since he realized he couldn’t help us at all. He had completely given us up for lost.

We looked for and found Kachi. He had slept like a top, curled up in his warm blanket and my overcoat, and was now quite refreshed, so all united again, we continued our race downwards, exchanging our experiences and sensations. We had no very serious mishaps, and life and strength gradually came back to us again when we descended to lower elevations. The ascent from the glacier at the bottom of the mountain to the summit occupied four and a half hours; the precipitous descent, without counting stoppages, only the ninth part of that time, the distance covered being about one mile and three quarters.

We searched for and found Kachi. He had slept soundly, curled up in his cozy blanket and my overcoat, and was now feeling refreshed. So, united once again, we continued our race downhill, sharing our experiences and feelings. We didn't have any serious accidents, and our energy and strength gradually returned as we descended to lower elevations. The climb from the glacier at the bottom of the mountain to the summit took four and a half hours; the steep descent, not counting breaks, took just over half an hour, covering about one and three-quarter miles.

Over the same trying stony valley we reached camp during the early hours of the morning. The distance from camp to the altitude reached and back was over ten miles; therefore, during the twenty-four hours I had altogether gone eighteen miles (quite a record at such great altitudes). I may here also remark that, since breakfast at six o'clock the previous morning, I had taken no food of any kind, thus making an interval of twenty-three hours between one meal and the next. The anxiety of my men in camp was intense. They had lost all hope of seeing us again, and they were quite reassured when I told them that we would proceed later in the morning by the Lumpiya Pass, which was believed to be far easier.

Over the same difficult rocky valley, we arrived at camp during the early morning hours. The round trip from camp to the altitude we reached and back was over ten miles; so, in the twenty-four hours, I had covered a total of eighteen miles (quite a record at such high elevations). I should also mention that, since breakfast at six o'clock the previous morning, I hadn’t eaten anything, creating a gap of twenty-three hours between meals. My men in camp were extremely worried. They had completely lost hope of seeing us again, and they felt much relieved when I told them that we would head out later in the morning via the Lumpiya Pass, which was thought to be much easier.

In no time they had lighted a fire of dung, and after having had (at five o'clock in the morning) a handsome feed of rice, chapatis, extract of meat, and strengthening emergency food, we felt we were entitled to a well-deserved rest.

In no time they had started a fire with dung, and after having a nice meal of rice, chapatis, meat extract, and some energy-boosting emergency food at five o'clock in the morning, we felt we deserved a good rest.


[148]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXV

The sources of the Kuti River—The Lumpiya glacier—The summit of the range—Bird's-eye view of Tibet—Rubso frozen almost to death—The Lumpiya Pass—Two coolies in distress.

At 9 a.m. we were ready again to start. The thermometer registered 40° inside the tent, and the minimum temperature outside during the night had been 14°. We followed the Kuti River at the foot of the mountain range, travelling in a direction of 298° (b.m). On rounding a prominent headland, where the Kuti River flows through a narrow passage, we saw facing us on a mound, fourteen stone pillars and pyramids with white stones on them and the customary flying prayers of cloth. It is from this point that the ascent to the Lumpiya Pass begins.

9 a.m. we were ready to start again. The thermometer read 40° inside the tent, and the lowest temperature outside during the night had been 14°. We followed the Kuti River along the side of the mountain range, heading in a direction of 298° (b.m). As we rounded a noticeable headland, where the Kuti River flows through a narrow gap, we saw fourteen stone pillars and pyramids topped with white stones and the usual flying prayers made of cloth on a mound facing us. This is where the climb to the Lumpiya Pass begins.

There are two sources of the Kuti Yangti, joining in a large basin; one comes from two extensive glaciers to the S.W., the other from a glacier directly under the Lumpiya Pass. The river at the junction of the two sources is not more than six yards across. Our route gradually ascended, going N.W. first, then swinging away to N.E. until we attained an elevation of 17,350 feet on a flat basin covered with deep snow. So far we had proceeded with no very great trouble or fatigue, but matters suddenly altered for the worse. Each coolie in the long silent row at the head of which I marched, sank in the snow up to his knees, often up to his waist. They formed, undoubtedly, a picturesque sight in this lonely region, the only bit of life in the picture, the white frozen sheet of snow throwing into strong contrast their faces wrapped tightly round with white turbans. Some wore fur caps with ear flaps; all had long sheepskin coats and high boots of skins; many used snow spectacles; and as this procession, silent and grave, with loads on their backs, struggled higher and higher

There are two sources of the Kuti Yangti that come together in a large basin; one flows from two large glaciers to the southwest, while the other is from a glacier right under the Lumpiya Pass. At the junction of the two sources, the river is no more than six yards wide. Our route gradually went uphill, initially heading northwest, then bending northeast until we reached an elevation of 17,350 feet on a flat basin covered in deep snow. Up until this point, we had made progress without much trouble or fatigue, but things suddenly took a turn for the worse. Each coolie in the long, silent line at the front where I marched sank into the snow up to his knees, and sometimes up to his waist. They made a striking sight in this desolate area, the only hint of life in the scene, with the white solid sheet of snow creating a stark contrast against their faces tightly wrapped in white turbans. Some wore fur hats with ear flaps; all had long sheepskin coats and high leather boots; many used snow goggles; and as this silent, serious procession, burdened with loads on their backs, labored higher and higher.

[149]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Ascending the Lumpiya Pass

Climbing the Lumpiya Pass


[150] with piteous panting, you speculated apprehensively as to how many of them would ever return. Moving cautiously to avoid the many treacherous cracks, I made my way ahead with considerable trouble to a spot six hundred feet higher, where I halted for a while on a rocky island fairly clear of snow. As coolie after coolie arrived, breathing convulsively, he dropped his load and sat quietly by the side of it. There was not a grumble, not a word of reproach for the hard work they were made to endure. Sleet was falling, and the wet and cold increased the discomfort. There was now a very steep pull before us. To the left, we had a glacier beginning in a precipitous fall of ice, about one hundred feet in height. Like the Mangshan glacier, it was in horizontal ribbon-like strata of beautifully clear ice, showing no dirt bands. Perpendicular stripes of a darker greenish colour could be observed arising from the unequal degrees of compactness of the ice; the strata showed almost horizontal, with no curvatures nor depressions in any part of them. The top, the base and the sides of the glacier were in this case also buried in deep snow.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Breathing heavily, you worried about how many of them would make it back. Moving carefully to dodge the many dangerous cracks, I pushed ahead with a lot of effort to a spot six hundred feet up, where I stopped for a bit on a rocky island that was mostly clear of snow. As each porter arrived, panting heavily, he would drop his load and sit quietly next to it. There was no complaining, not a single word of blame for the tough work they had to endure. Sleet was falling, and the wetness and cold made things even more uncomfortable. There was a steep climb ahead of us. To the left, we saw a glacier starting with a steep ice drop of about one hundred feet. Like the Mangshan glacier, it had horizontal layers of beautifully clear ice, without any dirt bands. Vertical lines of a darker greenish color could be seen due to the varying degrees of ice compactness; the layers were almost horizontal, with no curves or dips anywhere in them. The top, base, and sides of the glacier were also buried under deep snow.

The doctor and I went ahead. In our anxiety to reach the summit, unable to discern the track, now covered by several feet of snow, we mistook our bearings, and with great fatigue climbed up an extremely steep incline. Here we were on a patch of the troublesome loose débris, on which we struggled for over half an hour until we reached the top of the range, 18,750 feet, considerably higher than the pass itself. Four men had come with us, the others, to whom we signalled, bearing more to the west by another dangerous track skirting the glacier.

The doctor and I continued on. In our eagerness to reach the summit, unable to see the trail now buried under several feet of snow, we lost our way and, feeling extremely exhausted, climbed up a very steep slope. We ended up on a patch of loose débris, where we struggled for over half an hour until we finally reached the top of the range at 18,750 feet, which was considerably higher than the pass itself. Four men had come with us; the others, whom we signaled, were taking a different, riskier route to the west that went around the glacier.

The wind from the N.E. was piercing and the cold terrible. Under the lee of a large rock we found temporary shelter, and through my telescope scanned the Tibetan plateau spread out before us. From this high eyrie we obtained a superb bird's-eye view. Huge masses of snow covered the Tibetan side of the Himahlyas, as well as the lower range of mountains immediately in front of us, running almost parallel to our range. Two thousand feet below, between these two ranges, flowed, in a wide barren valley, a river which is afterwards called the Darma Yankti or Lumpiya Yankti. In the distance, a flat plateau, rising some eight hundred feet above the river, and resembling a gigantic embankment of a railway line, could be seen extending for many miles; and far away to the north, a chain of high blue mountains capped with snow, undoubtedly the Kangri chain with the Kelas peaks.

The wind from the northeast was biting, and the cold was intense. We found temporary shelter under a large rock and scanned the Tibetan plateau before us through my telescope. From this high vantage point, we had a stunning bird's-eye view. Huge snow-covered masses blanketed the Tibetan side of the Himalayas and the lower mountain range right in front of us, which ran almost parallel to our range. Two thousand feet below, between these two ranges, a river flowed through a wide barren valley, later known as the Darma Yankti or Lumpiya Yankti. In the distance, a flat plateau, rising about eight hundred feet above the river and resembling a giant railway embankment, stretched for miles; and far to the north, we could see a chain of high blue mountains capped with snow, undoubtedly the Kangri chain with the Kelas peaks.

[151]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Lumpiya Glacier and Pass

The Lumpiya Glacier and Pass


[152] A painful incident had unfortunately happened to one of my followers: poor Rubso, a Christian convert, had fallen exhausted from cold and fatigue. He had been seized with cramp, and was lying in a semi-conscious state, his teeth chattering and his features distorted and livid; his eyes were sunken and lifeless, and he showed signs of complete collapse. We hastily carried him under the shelter of a rock and rubbed him vigorously, in the hope of restoring his circulation. After more than half an hour of the greatest anxiety and exertion, to our intense relief he partially recovered, and was able to proceed slowly with our help.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] A painful incident had unfortunately happened to one of my followers: poor Rubso, a Christian convert, had collapsed from the cold and exhaustion. He was cramping and lying there in a semi-conscious state, his teeth chattering and his face twisted and pale; his eyes were sunken and lifeless, showing signs of complete collapse. We quickly moved him under a rock for shelter and rubbed him vigorously, hoping to get his blood flowing again. After more than half an hour of great anxiety and effort, we were incredibly relieved when he started to recover a bit and could continue on slowly with our help.

Having climbed the wrong path, we now had to descend to the pass, six hundred feet lower. We made our way along dangerous rocks and débris. I was just clinging with my half-frozen fingers to a prominent rock, striving to get on the other side, when screams of distress from below struck my ears. Notwithstanding the unsafe position I was in, I could not help turning my head to see what had happened. On the steep incline of snow two coolies with their respective loads were sliding, at incredible speed. They eventually reached the basin, where the angle of the descent being suddenly altered, it caused them to revolve several times on their own axes, the different bags, &c., forming their loads, flying about and being scattered in every direction. I gave a sigh of relief when I saw the men getting up. One coolie picked up one after the other the goods that had been entrusted to him, tied them together, got them on his back, and began the difficult ascent a second time. The other was crying and moaning, so that we could plainly hear him from our elevation. He seemed giddy. After a moment or two he staggered, fell back and lay as if dead. Hastening over the slippery rocks, and then down precipitously on the loose débris, I gained the pass, 18,150 feet. Two reluctant men were immediately despatched to the relief of the coolie in distress. They first carried his load up, then him. After some time he, too, got over the severe shock and fright, and though he was rather shattered and aching all over, I succeeded in persuading the man that nothing was the matter with him.

Having taken the wrong route, we now had to head back down to the pass, which was six hundred feet lower. We navigated through dangerous rocks and debris. I was barely hanging on with my half-frozen fingers to a prominent rock, trying to get to the other side, when I heard screams of distress from below. Despite my precarious position, I couldn't help but turn my head to see what was going on. On the steep slope of snow, two porters with their loads were sliding down at an incredible speed. They eventually reached the bottom, where the sudden change in the slope made them spin multiple times, with their various bags and items flying around and scattering everywhere. I sighed in relief when I saw them get up. One porter picked up his goods one by one, tied them together, managed to get them on his back, and began the tough climb again. The other one was crying and moaning, clearly audible from our height. He seemed disoriented. After a moment, he staggered, fell back, and lay there as if he were dead. I hurried over the slippery rocks and then down the steep loose debris until I reached the pass at 18,150 feet. Two reluctant men were immediately sent to help the distressed porter. They first carried his load back up, then him. After a while, he too recovered from the shock and fear, and even though he was pretty shaken and in pain all over, I managed to convince him that he was fine.

We then hurried down the steep declivity on the Tibetan side, to get away quickly from the bitterly cold, windy pass. Describing a wide arc of a circle, and then making straight down across several long snow-beds, we at last reached the river level and pitched our tents on snow at an altitude of 16,900 feet. There was no wood, no yak or pony dung, no lichens, no moss, and therefore nothing with which [153] we could make a fire. It seemed hard upon my men that, after such a toilsome day, they should be compelled to go to sleep without having had a good meal. They believe—and they are right—that eating cold food at such high elevations, with such low temperature, leads to certain death. They preferred, therefore, to remain without food altogether. Night came, and with it the wind blowing in gusts, and piling the grit and snow around our tents. During the nocturnal hours, with the hurricane raging, we had to turn out of our flapping canvases several times to make the loose pegs firmer. Fastening all the frozen ropes was very cold work. At 2 a.m. the thermometer was down to 12°. At 9 a.m. in the sun, it went up to 26°, and inside the tent at the same hour we had a temperature as high as 32°—freezing-point.

We hurried down the steep slope on the Tibetan side to escape the bitter cold and windy pass quickly. After making a wide arc and then heading straight across several long patches of snow, we finally reached the river level and set up our tents on the snow at an altitude of 16,900 feet. There was no wood, no yak or pony dung, no lichens, no moss—basically nothing to start a fire. It seemed unfair to my men that after such a tiring day they had to sleep without a decent meal. They believe—and they’re right—that eating cold food at such high elevations and low temperatures can lead to certain death. So, they chose to go without food entirely. Night fell, bringing gusty winds that piled grit and snow around our tents. During the night, with the storm raging, we had to get out from our flapping tents several times to secure the loose pegs. Tying down the frozen ropes was really cold work. At 2 morning, the thermometer dropped to 12°. By 9 AM, in the sun, it rose to 26°, and inside the tent at the same hour, it hit 32°—the freezing point.


[154]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXVI

Mysterious footprints—Brigand or spy?—Passes and tracks—Intense cold—No fuel—A high flat plateau—Fuel at last!—Two spies in disguise—What they took us for.

In a hurricane of grit and drenching rain we packed up our traps as best we could and again started on our way. I was slightly in advance when, to my surprise, I noticed, some two hundred yards only from camp, a double line of recent footmarks on the snow. Those coming towards us were somewhat indistinct and nearly covered with grit, those going in the opposite direction seemed quite recent. After carefully examining these footprints, I felt pretty certain that they had been made by a Tibetan. Where the footprints stopped, marks in the snow showed that the man had at different points laid himself flat on the ground. No doubt we had been spied upon and watched. My own men had shown many signs of terror ever since we had crossed to this side of the Himahlyas, and were now all anxiously stooping low over these prints and speculating on their origin. Their excitement and fear were strange to watch. Some surmised that the man must be a Daku, a brigand, and that in the evening we should be attacked by the whole band; others maintained that the spy could only be a Sepoy sent by the Gyanema officers to watch our movements. In any case, this incident was held to be an evil omen, and during our march in a N.W. direction along the bank of the river we continually saw the trail. The wildest speculations and imaginations were rife. To the left of us we passed the valleys leading south to the Neway Pass; then a second to the Kats, 230° (b.m.). The bearings were taken from the mouth of the river descending from it, a tributary of the Darma Yangti.

In a whirlwind of grit and pouring rain, we packed up our traps as best we could and set off again. I was a little ahead when, to my surprise, I spotted a double line of recent footprints in the snow, just two hundred yards from camp. The tracks heading towards us were somewhat unclear and nearly covered with dirt, while those going the other way seemed quite fresh. After carefully examining these footprints, I was pretty sure they were made by a Tibetan. Where the footprints stopped, marks in the snow indicated that the person had laid flat on the ground at different points. It was clear we had been observed and watched. My own men had shown many signs of fear ever since we crossed to this side of the Himalayas, and now they were all anxiously bending low over these prints, speculating about their origin. Their excitement and fear were fascinating to watch. Some guessed that the person must be a Daku, a bandit, and that we would be attacked by the whole group that evening; others insisted that the spy could only be a Sepoy sent by the Gyanema officers to keep tabs on us. In any case, this incident was seen as a bad omen, and as we marched northwest along the riverbank, we continually saw the trail. The wildest speculations and imaginations ran wild. To our left, we passed valleys leading south to the Neway Pass; then a second toward the Kats, 230° (b.m.). The bearings were taken from the mouth of the river flowing from it, a tributary of the Darma Yangti.

[155]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Spied

Watched


[156] Six miles from our last camp, at bearings 340°, was the Luway Pass.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Six miles from our last campsite, heading 340°, was the Luway Pass.

We were travelling on flat or slightly undulating barren ground. We waded across another cold river with water up to our waists, and my men became so exhausted that one mile farther we had to halt at 16,650 feet.

We were walking on flat or slightly rolling barren land. We crossed another cold river with water up to our waists, and my men got so tired that one mile later we had to stop at 16,650 feet.

The cold was intense, and again we had no fuel of any kind. A furious wind was blowing, with snow falling heavily in the evening. My carriers, half starved, ate a little satoo, a kind of oatmeal, but Chanden Sing, a Rajiput, could not, without breaking his caste, eat his food without undressing. It was two days since he had had his last meal, but rather than infringe the rules of his religion, or take off his clothes in such frigid regions, he preferred to curl up in his blanket and go to sleep fasting.

The cold was brutal, and again we had no fuel at all. A strong wind was blowing, with heavy snow falling in the evening. My porters, half-starved, ate a little satoo, a kind of oatmeal, but Chanden Sing, a Rajput, couldn't eat without breaking his caste, which meant he would have to undress. It had been two days since his last meal, but instead of violating his religious rules or taking off his clothes in such freezing temperatures, he chose to curl up in his blanket and fall asleep hungry.

The doctor left the warmth and comfort of blankets to go and talk with the men, and get their views about weather prospects and the chances of our route. I preferred the comfort of such warmth as I could get in our tent, where the temperature was 28° Fahr., or four degrees below freezing. The snow was lying a foot deep, and it was still falling heavily. The carriers were all attempting to sleep, huddled as close as possible to each other for warmth; they refused to move, saying they would rather die, and we found it convenient to believe them, and get what warmth and sleep we could under blankets in the tent.

The doctor left the warmth and comfort of the blankets to speak with the men and get their thoughts on the weather forecast and the chances of our route. I preferred the little warmth I could find in our tent, where the temperature was 28° Fahrenheit, or four degrees below freezing. The snow was a foot deep and still coming down heavily. The carriers were all trying to sleep, huddled close together for warmth; they refused to budge, saying they’d rather die, and we found it easier to believe them and get whatever warmth and rest we could under the blankets in the tent.

Two or three hours later the weather cleared. The coolies, half starved, came to complain that they were again unable to find fuel to cook their food, and that they would leave me. The position of affairs was critical. I immediately took my telescope and clambered to the top of a small hillock. It was curious to note what unbounded faith the coolies had in this glass. It was evident that they believed in a childlike fashion that I could see through mountains with it. I came down with the reassuring news that one day's march further would bring us to a fine supply of fuel.

Two or three hours later, the weather cleared up. The laborers, half-starved, came to complain that they still couldn't find any fuel to cook their food and that they were going to leave me. The situation was critical. I quickly grabbed my telescope and climbed to the top of a small hill. It was interesting to see how much faith the laborers had in this device. They seemed to genuinely believe that I could see through mountains with it. I came back down with the good news that just one more day's march would get us to a great supply of fuel.

They cheerfully hastened to pack up the loads, and set forth with unusual energy in the direction I had pointed out. We followed a parallel line to the high flat plateau on the other side of the stream, the slopes of which, in relation to the plain we were standing on, were at an obtuse angle of about 115°. The snow-covered plateau extended from S.W. to N.E. Beyond it to the N. could be seen some high snowy peaks, in all probability the lofty summits S.E. [157] of Gartok. At the point where the Luway joins the other three rivers there is a direct way to the summit of the tableland, along which it continues across the Himahlyas by the Luway Pass. To our right we were flanked by high rugged mountains, with an occasional precipitous torrent. Six hours' brisk marching took us to a sheltered nook, where a few lichens and shrubs were growing. If we had suddenly descended into the Black Forest of Germany, or the Yosemite Valley, with their gigantic century old trees, our delight could not have been greater. As it was, the highest of these shrubs stood no higher than six or seven inches from the ground, while the diameter of the largest piece of wood we collected was smaller than that of an ordinary pencil. With feverish activity all hands went to work to root up these plants for fuel.

They eagerly hurried to pack up their gear and set off with a surprising energy in the direction I had indicated. We followed a path parallel to the high flat plateau on the other side of the stream, whose slopes, compared to the flat ground we were on, were at an angle of about 115°. The snow-covered plateau stretched from southwest to northeast. Beyond it to the north, you could see some tall snowy peaks, likely the high summits southeast of Gartok. Where the Luway River meets the other three rivers, there’s a direct route to the top of the plateau, which continues across the Himalayas via the Luway Pass. On our right, we were bordered by tall, rugged mountains, with the occasional steep river. After six hours of brisk marching, we reached a sheltered spot where a few lichens and shrubs were growing. If we had suddenly found ourselves in Germany's Black Forest or Yosemite Valley, with their massive, century-old trees, our delight couldn’t have been greater. As it was, the tallest of these shrubs only reached about six or seven inches off the ground, and the largest piece of wood we found was smaller in diameter than an ordinary pencil. With frenzied energy, everyone pitched in to dig up these plants for fuel.

When night came, the same number of hands were busy cooking and transferring with alarming celerity such steaming food as was available from the different fires to the mouths of the famished coolies. Happiness reigned in camp, and all recent hardships were forgotten.

When night fell, the same number of hands were busy cooking and quickly transferring the steaming food available from the different fires to the mouths of the hungry workers. Joy filled the camp, and all recent struggles were forgotten.

A fresh surprise was awaiting us when we rose. Two Tibetans disguised as beggars had come to our camp. They professed to be suffering from cold and starvation. I gave orders that they should be properly fed and kindly treated. On being cross-examined they confessed that they were spies sent by the officer at Gyanema to ascertain whether a sahib had crossed the frontier, and whether we had seen anything of him.

A shocking surprise was waiting for us when we woke up. Two Tibetans disguised as beggars had arrived at our camp. They claimed to be suffering from the cold and hunger. I instructed that they should be properly fed and treated with kindness. When we questioned them closely, they admitted that they were spies sent by the officer at Gyanema to find out if a sahib had crossed the border and whether we had seen anything of him.

We had so many things to attend to in the morning, and it was so cold, that washing had really become a nuisance, and I for my part gave it up, at least pro tem. We were sunburnt, and we wore turbans and snow-glasses, so the Tibetans departed under the impression that our party consisted of a Hindoo doctor, his brother, and a caravan of servants (none of whom had seen a sahib coming), and that we were now on a pilgrimage to the sacred Mansarowar Lake and Kelas Mount.

We had so much to take care of in the morning, and it was so cold that washing had really become a hassle, so I decided to skip it for now. We were sunburned and wearing turbans and sunglasses, so the Tibetans left thinking that our group was a Hindu doctor, his brother, and a caravan of servants (none of whom had seen a sahib before) and that we were on a pilgrimage to the holy Mansarowar Lake and Mount Kailash.

Before the men we treated this as a great joke, but, all the same, Wilson and I anxiously consulted as to our immediate plans. Should we make a rapid march during the night over the mountain range to our right, and strike east by the jungle, or should we face the Gyanema leader and his soldiers?

Before the men, we thought this was a big joke, but still, Wilson and I nervously discussed our next steps. Should we quickly hike through the mountain range to our right and head east through the jungle, or should we confront the Gyanema leader and his troops?

We decided to meet them rather than go out of our way, and I gave orders to raise camp immediately.

We chose to meet them instead of going out of our way, and I instructed everyone to pack up camp right away.


[158]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXVII

Lama Chokden—A Tibetan guard—The sacred Kelas—Reverence of my men for the Sacred Mountain—Trying hard to keep friends with the gods—Obos—Water flowing to us.

We altered our course from N. to N.E., rising to 16,600 feet, and leaving the high tableland to the west. We arrived at Lama Chokden (or Chorten), a pass protected by a Tibetan guard, who quickly turned out, matchlocks in hand, as we approached. They seemed a miserable lot, and not only offered no resistance, but actually begged for money and food. They complained of ill-treatment by their superiors, stating that they received no pay, and even food was only occasionally sent to them at this outpost. Their tunics were in rags; each man carried a sword stuck in front through the girdle. Here, too, we had more inquiries about the young sahib, as messengers on horseback had been sent post-haste from Taklakot to warn the Gyanema officer not to let him penetrate into Hundes[15] by the Lumpiya Pass, should he attempt it. Their description of my supposed appearance was very amusing, and when they said that if the sahib came they would have to cut his head off, I felt so touched by their good-natured confidence that I wanted to distribute a few rupees among them.

We changed our direction from North to North-East, climbing to 16,600 feet and leaving the high plateau to the west. We reached Lama Chokden (or Chorten), a pass overseen by a Tibetan guard, who quickly showed up with matchlocks in hand as we got closer. They looked pretty miserable, and not only did they offer no resistance, but they actually begged us for money and food. They complained about how badly they were treated by their superiors, saying they received no pay, and food was only occasionally provided to them at this outpost. Their tunics were in tatters; each man had a sword tucked in the front of his belt. Here, too, we got more questions about the young sahib, as messengers on horseback had been sent in a hurry from Taklakot to warn the Gyanema officer not to let him enter Hundes[15] via the Lumpiya Pass if he tried. Their description of what I supposedly looked like was quite funny, and when they said that if the sahib came, they would have to cut his head off, I felt so touched by their good-natured confidence that I wanted to give them a few rupees.

"Do not give them anything, sir," said Kachi and the doctor. "These fellows are hand and glove with the bands of dacoits; the latter will soon be told that we have money, and we shall run great risk of being attacked at night."

"Don't give them anything, sir," said Kachi and the doctor. "These guys are in cahoots with the gangs of robbers; they'll soon find out that we have money, and we'll be at serious risk of being attacked at night."

I insisted on giving them a present.

I insisted on giving them a gift.

"No, sir," cried Kachi, distressed; "do not do it, or it will bring us no end of trouble and misfortune. If you give them four annas, that will be ample."

"No, sir," Kachi exclaimed, upset. "Please don’t do it; it will cause us endless trouble and bad luck. If you give them four annas, that will be more than enough."

[159]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

My Men Salaaming Kelas at Lama Chokden

My Men Salaaming Kelas at Lama Chokden


[160]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Accordingly the officer in command had this large sum deposited in the outstretched palm of his hand, and to show his satisfaction, he pulled out his tongue to its full length, waving both his hands at me for some minutes, and bowing clumsily at the same time. His fur cap had been previously removed and thrown on the ground. This was indeed a grand salaam, a ceremonious acknowledgment of a gift of something less than fourpence!

Accordingly, the officer in charge held this large sum in the palm of his hand, and to show his excitement, he stuck out his tongue as far as it would go, waving both hands at me for several minutes while awkwardly bowing. His fur cap had already been taken off and tossed to the ground. This was truly a grand gesture, a formal acknowledgment of a gift that was worth less than four pence!

While the doctor remained in conversation with him, I happened to witness a very beautiful sight. To the north the clouds had dispersed, and the snow-capped sacred Kelas Mount stood majestic before us. In appearance not unlike the graceful roof of a temple, Kelas towers over the long white-capped range, contrasting in beautiful blending of tints with the warm sienna colour of the lower elevations. Kelas is some two thousand feet higher than the other peaks of the Gangir chain, with strongly defined ledges and terraces marking its stratifications, and covered with horizontal layers of snow standing out in brilliant colour against the dark ice-worn rock. The Tibetans, the Nepalese, the Shokas, the Humlis, Jumlis and Hindoos, all have a strong veneration for this mountain, which is believed by them to be the abode of all the good gods, especially of the god Siva. In fact, the ledge round its base is said by the Hindoos to be the mark of the ropes used by the devil (Rakas) to pull down the throne of Siva.

While the doctor was talking to him, I happened to see a really beautiful sight. To the north, the clouds had cleared, revealing the snow-capped sacred Kelas Mountain standing majestically before us. It looked a lot like the graceful roof of a temple, towering over the long range of snow-capped peaks, beautifully contrasting with the warm sienna color of the lower slopes. Kelas is about two thousand feet higher than the other peaks in the Gangir range, with clearly defined ledges and terraces marking its layers, and covered in horizontal layers of snow that stand out vividly against the dark, ice-worn rock. The Tibetans, Nepalese, Shokas, Humlis, Jumlis, and Hindus all have a profound reverence for this mountain, believing it to be the home of all the good gods, especially the god Siva. In fact, the ledge around its base is said by Hindus to be the mark of the ropes used by the devil (Rakas) to pull down Siva's throne.

My men, with heads uncovered, their faces turned towards the sacred peak, were muttering prayers. With joined hands, which they slowly raised as high as the forehead, they prayed fervently, and then went down on their knees, with heads bent low to the ground. My brigand follower, who was standing close by me, hurriedly whispered that I should join in this act of prayer.

My men, with their heads bare and faces directed towards the holy mountain, were whispering prayers. With their hands clasped and lifted slowly up to their foreheads, they prayed earnestly, then knelt down with their heads bowed to the ground. My bandit companion, standing nearby, quickly urged me to take part in this prayer.

"You must keep friends with the gods," said the bandit; "misfortune will attend you if you do not salaam to Kelas; that is the home of a good god!" and he pointed to the peak with the most devout air of conviction.

"You have to stay on good terms with the gods," said the bandit; "bad luck will follow you if you don't show respect to Kelas; that's where a good god lives!" and he pointed to the peak with the most sincere look of conviction.

To please him I saluted the mountain with the utmost deference, and, taking my cue from the others, placed a white stone on one of the hundreds of Chokdens or Obos (stone pillars) erected by devotees at this spot. These Obos, or rough pyramids of stones, are found on the tracks traversing all high passes, near lakes, in fact, everywhere, but rarely in such quantities as at Lama Chokden. The hill in front, and at the back of the guard-house, was literally covered with these structures. Each passer-by deposits a [161] stone on one of them—a white stone if possible—and this is supposed to bring him good fortune, or if he has a wish he desires accomplished, such a contribution will enhance the chances of its fulfilment.

To please him, I greeted the mountain with the utmost respect and, following the lead of others, placed a white stone on one of the hundreds of Chokdens or Obos (stone pillars) set up by devotees at this location. These Obos, or rough pyramids of stones, can be found along all high passes, near lakes, in fact, everywhere, but rarely in such large numbers as at Lama Chokden. The hill in front of and behind the guardhouse was literally covered with these structures. Each passerby adds a [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] stone to one of them—a white stone if possible—and this is believed to bring good fortune, or if they have a wish they want to come true, making such a contribution will increase the chances of it being fulfilled.

The guard-house itself was of rough stone, mean and desolate, and in any country but Tibet would not be considered fit accommodation for pigs.

The guardhouse was made of rough stone, shabby and bleak, and in any place other than Tibet, it wouldn't be seen as suitable shelter even for pigs.

After going a mile or so farther, as the sun was fast disappearing, we searched for a suitable spot to pitch our tents. There was no sign of any water, only the stony bed of a dried rivulet. We were discussing the situation, when a faint sound as of rushing water struck our ears. It grew louder and louder, and then we saw coming towards us a stream of limpid molten snow, gradually advancing over the bed of stones. Evidently the snow of the mountains had taken all day to melt, and the water was only now reaching this spot. My dacoit was in a great state of excitement.

After walking about a mile farther, as the sun was quickly setting, we looked for a good place to set up our tents. There was no sign of water, just the stony bottom of a dry stream. We were talking about the situation when we heard a soft sound like rushing water. It got louder and louder, and then we saw a stream of clear melted snow coming toward us, slowly flowing over the rocky ground. Clearly, the snow from the mountains had melted all day, and the water was just now arriving at this location. My companion was incredibly excited.

"Water flowing to you, sahib!" he exclaimed, with his arms outstretched. "You will have great luck! Look! Look! You want water for your camp, and a stream comes to you! Heaven blesses you. You must dip your fingers into the water as soon as it comes up to you, and throw some drops over your shoulders. Then will fortune attend you on your journey."

"Water's flowing your way, sir!" he shouted, raising his arms. "You're in for some good luck! Look! Look! You need water for your camp, and here comes a stream to you! The heavens are smiling on you. You should dip your fingers into the water as soon as it reaches you and throw a few drops over your shoulders. Then good fortune will follow you on your journey."

I readily fell in with this Tibetan superstition, and we all dipped our fingers, and sprinkled the water behind our backs. Wilson, however, who took the matter quite seriously, said it was all nonsense, and would not give in to such "childish fancy."

I quickly went along with this Tibetan superstition, and we all dipped our fingers and sprinkled the water behind our backs. Wilson, however, who took it very seriously, said it was all nonsense and refused to give in to such "childish nonsense."

Good fortune would have meant much to me, but in the days to come this simple rite proved to have been futile!

Good luck would have meant a lot to me, but in the days ahead, this simple ritual turned out to be pointless!

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[15] Hundes = Tibet.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Dogs = Tibet.


[162]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXVIII

An extensive valley—Kiang, or wild horse—Their strange ways—The Gyanema fort—Apprehension at our appearance—A parley—"Cut off our heads!"—Revolt and murder contemplated—Hypocritical ways of Tibetan officials—Help summoned from everywhere—Preparing for war.

In front of our camp was a great stretch of flat alluvial land, which had been, to all appearance, at some remote time the bed of a large lake about ten miles long and fourteen wide. With my telescope I could see plainly to 40° (b.m.), at the foot of a small hill, the camping-ground of Karko. There were many tents, and my men seemed much reassured when by their shape and colour we made them out to be those of the Joharis from Milam, who come over at this place to trade with the Hunyas[16]. To E.N.E. we had a valley extending for many miles between two high ranges, and to the W. and N.W. were hills between us and the Darma Yangti, flowing there in a N.N.E. direction. Beyond Karko to the North, a stretch of water, the Gyanema Lake, showed brilliantly, and beyond it some comparatively low hill ranges. In the distance, more snowy peaks were visible.

In front of our camp was a vast expanse of flat alluvial land, which appeared to have once been the bed of a large lake about ten miles long and fourteen miles wide. With my telescope, I could clearly see at 40° (b.m.), at the base of a small hill, the camping area of Karko. There were many tents, and my men seemed much more at ease when we identified them by their shape and color as those of the Joharis from Milam, who come to this spot to trade with the Hunyas[16]. To the E.N.E., a valley stretched for many miles between two high mountain ranges, and to the W. and N.W., there were hills blocking our view of the Darma Yangti, which flowed in a N.N.E. direction there. North of Karko, a body of water, Gyanema Lake, shone brightly, and beyond it were some relatively low hill ranges. In the distance, more snow-capped peaks could be seen.

On leaving camp we traversed the plain for six miles in a N.E. direction, and then, on a course of 80° (b.m.), turned into a smaller valley well enclosed by hills, following it for a distance of three or four miles. This formed, as it were, an arm of the other large valley.

On leaving camp, we crossed the plain for six miles in a northeast direction, then, at a heading of 80° (b.m.), we entered a smaller valley that's nicely surrounded by hills, following it for about three or four miles. This was like an extension of the larger valley.

During our march we saw many large herds of Kiang (wild horse). These animals came quite close to us. They resembled zebras in shape and movement of body, but in colour they were mostly light brown. The natives regarded their near proximity as extremely dangerous; for their apparent tameness is often deceptive, enabling [163] them to draw quite close to the unwary traveller, and then with a sudden dash seize him by the stomach, inflicting a horrible wound with their powerful jaws. Their graceful and coquettish ways were most taking; we occasionally threw stones at them to keep them at a safe distance, but after cantering prettily away, they would follow us again and come within a few yards. I succeeded in taking some very good negatives, which unfortunately were afterwards destroyed by the Tibetan authorities. I still have, however, some of the sketches I made of them. We climbed over another hill range, and descended on the other side into a grassy stretch of flat land, in the Northern portion of which was a sheet of water. On a hill South of the lake stood the Gyanema Khar or fort, a primitive tower-like structure of stones, with a tent pitched over it to answer the purpose of roof, supporting a flagstaff, on which flew two dirty white rags. They were not the colours of Hundes, but only wind prayers. Lower down, at the foot of the hill, were two or three large black tents and a small shed of stones. Hundreds of black, white, and brown yaks were grazing on the green patches of grass.

During our march, we came across many large herds of Kiang (wild horses). These animals approached us quite closely. They looked similar to zebras in shape and movement, but their color was mostly light brown. The locals considered their close presence to be very dangerous; their apparent tameness can be misleading, allowing them to get close to an unsuspecting traveler and then suddenly attack, inflicting serious wounds with their strong jaws. Their elegant and playful behavior was quite charming; we sometimes threw stones at them to keep a safe distance, but after gracefully cantering away, they would follow us again and come within a few yards. I was able to take some really good photos, which unfortunately were later destroyed by the Tibetan authorities. However, I still have some sketches I made of them. We climbed over another range of hills and descended into a flat grassy area, where there was a body of water in the northern part. On a hill south of the lake stood the Gyanema Khar or fort, a simple tower-like structure made of stones, with a tent pitched over it serving as a roof, supporting a flagpole that displayed two dirty white rags. These weren't the colors of Hundes, but just wind prayers. Lower down, at the base of the hill, there were two or three large black tents and a small stone shed. Hundreds of black, white, and brown yaks were grazing on the green patches of grass.

The appearance of our party evidently created some apprehension, for we had hardly shown ourselves on the summit of the col when from the fort a gong began to sound loudly, filling the air with its unmelodious metallic notes. A shot was fired. Soldiers with their matchlocks were seen running here and there. They pulled down one of the black tents and hastily conveyed it inside the fort, the greater part of the garrison also seeking shelter within the walls with the empressement almost of a stampede. When, after some little time, they convinced themselves that we had no evil intentions, some of the Tibetan officers, followed by their men, came trembling to meet us. The doctor, unarmed, went ahead to talk with them, whereas my bearer and I remained with the coolies for the double purpose of protecting our baggage in case of a treacherous attack, and of preventing my panic-stricken carriers from abandoning their loads and escaping. But matters looked peaceful enough. Rugs were spread on the grass, and eventually we all sat down. An hour's trying parley with the Tibetan officers, during which time the same things were repeated over and over again, led to nothing. They said they could on no account allow any one from India, whether native or sahib, to proceed, and we must go back. We on our side stated that we were doing no harm. We were pilgrims to the sacred Lake of Mansarowar, only a few miles farther. We [164] had gone to much expense and trouble. How could we now turn back when so near our goal? We would not go back, and trusted they would allow us to proceed.

The sight of our group clearly caused some anxiety, as we had barely reached the top of the pass when a loud gong began to ring from the fort, filling the air with its jarring metallic sound. A shot was fired. Soldiers with their matchlocks were seen running around in a flurry. They took down one of the black tents and hurriedly brought it inside the fort, with most of the garrison also rushing for shelter within the walls, almost in a panic. After a little while, once they were sure we meant no harm, some Tibetan officers, followed by their men, approached us cautiously. The doctor, unarmed, went ahead to talk with them, while my bearer and I stayed with the coolies to both protect our baggage in case of a surprise attack and to keep my frightened carriers from abandoning their loads and fleeing. But everything seemed calm enough. Rugs were laid out on the grass, and eventually we all sat down. An hour of frustrating discussions with the Tibetan officers, during which the same points were repeated endlessly, led to no conclusion. They insisted they could not allow anyone from India, whether local or foreign, to proceed, and that we must turn back. We, on the other hand, argued that we meant no harm. We were pilgrims heading to the sacred Lake of Mansarowar, only a few miles ahead. We had invested a lot of time and money. How could we turn back when we were so close to our destination? We refused to go back and hoped they would let us continue.

We treated them courteously and kindly, and probably mistaking this for fear they promptly took advantage of it, especially the Magbun[17] or chief officer in charge of the Gyanema fort. His marked humility, of which at first he had made so much display, suddenly turned into arrogance. "You will have to cut off my head," said he with a vicious countenance, "or rather I will cut off yours before I let you go another step."

We treated them with respect and kindness, and they probably misinterpreted this as fear, taking advantage of it right away, especially the Magbun[17] or chief officer in charge of the Gyanema fort. His notable humility, which he had flaunted at first, quickly shifted to arrogance. "You’re going to have to cut off my head," he said with a cruel expression, "or better yet, I'll cut off yours before I let you take another step."

"Cut off my head?" cried I, jumping on my feet and shoving a cartridge into my rifle.

"Cut off my head?" I exclaimed, springing to my feet and loading a cartridge into my rifle.

"Cut off my head?" repeated my bearer, pointing with his Martini-Henry at the official.

"Cut off my head?" my bearer repeated, aiming his Martini-Henry at the official.

"Cut off our heads?" queried angrily the Brahmin and the two Christian servants of Dr. Wilson, handling a Winchester and a couple of Gourkha kukris (large knives).

"Cut off our heads?" the Brahmin asked angrily, along with Dr. Wilson's two Christian servants, who were handling a Winchester and a couple of Gourkha kukris (large knives).

"No, no, no, no! Salaam, salaam, salaam!" poured forth the Magbun with the celerity of speech only possessed by a panic-stricken man. "Salaam, salaam," repeated he again, bowing down to the ground, tongue out, and depositing his hat at our feet in a disgustingly servile manner. "Let us talk like friends!"

"No, no, no, no! Peace, peace, peace!" rushed out the Magbun with the speed of someone in a panic. "Peace, peace," he said again, bowing down to the ground, sticking his tongue out, and throwing his hat at our feet in a ridiculously submissive way. "Let's talk like friends!"

The Magbun's men, no braver than their master, shifted their positions in a nonchalant manner so as to be screened by their superiors in case of our firing, and on second thoughts, judging even such a precaution to ensure them but scanty safety, they one after the other got up, walked steadily away for half-a-dozen steps, to show it was not fear that made them leave, and then took to their heels.

The Magbun's men, not any braver than their leader, casually shifted their positions to hide behind their superiors in case we fired. After thinking it over and realizing that even that precaution offered them little safety, they each got up, walked a few steps away to demonstrate they weren't leaving out of fear, and then bolted.

The Magbun and the other officers who remained became more and more meek. We spoke and argued in a friendly manner for two long hours, but with no appreciable results. The Magbun could not decide of his own accord. He would consult with his officers, and he could give us an answer no sooner than the next morning. In the meantime he would provide for our general comfort and ensure our safety, if we would encamp near his tent. This, of course, I well knew to be an expedient to gain time, so as to send for soldiers to Barca, north of the Rakstal Lake, as well as to all the neighbouring camps. I frankly told him my suspicions, but added that I wished to deal fairly [165] with the Tibetan authorities before resorting to force. I reminded the Magbun again, and made him plainly understand, that we were merely peaceful travellers, and had not come to fight; that I was paying tenfold for anything I purchased from him or his men, and was glad to do so; but at the same time, let the hand beware that dared touch or twist a single hair of any one belonging to my party! The Magbun declared that he understood perfectly. He swore friendship, and as friends he begged us to stop over the night near his camp. By the Sun and Kunju Sum (Trinity) he gave a solemn oath that we should in no way be harmed. He took humble leave of us and retired.

The Magbun and the other remaining officers became increasingly submissive. We talked and debated amicably for two long hours, but with no significant progress. The Magbun couldn’t make a decision on his own. He would consult with his officers, and he wouldn’t have an answer for us until the next morning. In the meantime, he offered to ensure our general comfort and safety if we camped near his tent. I knew this was just a tactic to buy time while he called for soldiers from Barca, north of Rakstal Lake, as well as from all the nearby camps. I openly expressed my suspicions but added that I wanted to handle things fairly with the Tibetan authorities before resorting to force. I reminded the Magbun once more, making it clear that we were simply peaceful travelers and didn’t come to fight; that I was paying ten times the market price for anything I bought from him or his men, which I was happy to do. However, let it be known that anyone who dared to harm or even touch a single hair on any member of my party would face consequences! The Magbun insisted that he understood perfectly. He swore friendship and requested us to stay the night near his camp. By the Sun and Kunju Sum (Trinity), he made a solemn vow that we would not be harmed in any way. He humbly took his leave and stepped away.

The doctor and I had been sitting in front, next were Chanden Sing, the Brahmin, and the two Christians. The carriers were behind. When the Magbun had gone I turned round to look at them. Behold, what a sight! They one and all were crying miserably, each man hiding his face in his hands. Kachi had tears streaming down his cheeks, Dola was sobbing, while the Daku and the other Tibetan in my employ, who had for the occasion assumed a disguise, were concealing themselves behind their loads. Serious though the situation was, I could not help laughing at the demoralisation of my men. We pitched our tents, and I had been sitting a while inside one, registering my observations and writing up my diary, when Kachi crept in, apparently in great distress. He seemed so upset that he could hardly speak.

The doctor and I were sitting at the front, with Chanden Sing, the Brahmin, and the two Christians next to us. The carriers were behind. After the Magbun left, I turned around to look at them. What a sight! They were all crying sadly, each man hiding his face in his hands. Kachi had tears streaming down his cheeks, Dola was sobbing, and the Daku, along with the other Tibetan in my team, who had put on a disguise for the occasion, were hiding behind their loads. Even though the situation was serious, I couldn’t help but laugh at my men’s demoralization. We set up our tents, and after a while of sitting inside one, recording my observations and writing in my diary, Kachi crept in looking extremely distressed. He seemed so upset that he could hardly speak.

"Master!" he whispered. "Master! The Tibetans have sent a man to your coolies threatening them that they must betray you or die. They must abandon you during the night, and if you attempt to retain them, they must kill you."

"Master!" he whispered. "Master! The Tibetans have sent a guy to your workers, threatening them that they have to betray you or die. They have to leave you during the night, and if you try to keep them, they’ll kill you."

At the same time that this agent had been sent to conspire with my coolies, other envoys of the Magbun brought huge masses of dry dung to make our fires, conveying to me his renewed declarations of friendship. Notwithstanding this, soldiers were despatched in every direction to call for help. I saw them start: one went towards Kardam and Taklakot; a second proceeded in the direction of Barca, and a third galloped to the West.

At the same time that this agent was sent to plot with my workers, other envoys from the Magbun brought large amounts of dry dung for our fires, delivering his renewed promises of friendship. Despite this, soldiers were sent out in every direction to call for help. I watched them leave: one headed towards Kardam and Taklakot; a second went towards Barca, and a third rode off to the West.

My carriers were evidently preparing a coup-de-main as I watched them through an opening in the tent. They were busily engaged separating their blankets and clothes from my loads, dividing the provisions among themselves, and throwing aside my goods. I went out to them, patiently [166] made them repack the things, and cautioned them that I would shoot any one who attempted to revolt or desert.

My crew was clearly getting ready for a surprise move as I watched them through a gap in the tent. They were busy separating their blankets and clothes from my stuff, dividing the supplies among themselves, and tossing aside my belongings. I went out to them, calmly made them repack everything, and warned them that I would shoot anyone who tried to rebel or run away.

While the doctor and I sat down to a hearty meal, which rumours in camp said would be our last, Chanden Sing was entrusted with the preparations for war on our side. He cleaned the rifles with much care, and got the ammunition ready, for he was longing to fight. The Brahmin, on whose faithfulness we could also rely, remained cool and collected through the whole affair. He was a philosopher, and never worried over anything. He took no active part in preparing for our defence, for he feared not death. God alone could kill him, he argued, and all the matchlocks in the country together could not send a bullet through him unless God wished it. And if it were the God's decree that he should die, what could be the use of rebelling against it? The two converts, like good Christians, were more practical, and lost no time in grinding the huge blades of their kukris to the sharpness of razors.

While the doctor and I enjoyed a substantial meal, which rumors in camp said would be our last, Chanden Sing was tasked with preparing for war on our side. He carefully cleaned the rifles and got the ammunition ready, eager to fight. The Brahmin, whose loyalty we could also count on, remained calm and composed throughout the situation. He was a philosopher and never stressed about anything. He did not take an active role in our defense preparations because he was not afraid of death. Only God could kill him, he believed, and not all the matchlocks in the country could shoot him unless God intended it. And if it was God’s will for him to die, what would be the point of resisting it? The two converts, being practical like good Christians, wasted no time sharpening the large blades of their kukris to a razor's edge.

When darkness came a guard was placed, at a little distance off, all round our camp. It seemed likely that a rush on our tent with the help of my treacherous carriers was contemplated, should an opportunity occur. One of us kept watch outside all through the night, and those inside lay down in their clothes, with loaded rifles by them. I can't say that either Dr. Wilson or I felt particularly uneasy, for the Tibetan soldiers with their clumsy matchlocks, long spears, and jewelled swords and daggers, inspired us more with admiration for their picturesque appearance than with fear.

When night fell, a guard was stationed a short distance away all around our camp. It seemed likely that my treacherous carriers might attempt to storm our tent if a chance presented itself. One of us kept watch outside all night, while those inside lay down in their clothes with loaded rifles beside them. I can't say that either Dr. Wilson or I felt particularly anxious, as the Tibetan soldiers with their awkward matchlocks, long spears, and jeweled swords and daggers made us admire their impressive appearance more than feel afraid.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[16] Hunyas = Tibetans.

Hunyas = Tibetans.

[17] Magpun or Magbun = General-in-Chief.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Magpun or Magbun = General.


[167]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXIX

Arrival of a high official—The Barca Tarjum—A tedious palaver—The Tarjum's anxiety—Permission to proceed—A traitor—Entreated to retrace our steps—Thirty armed horsemen—A pretty speech.

Quite early the next morning we were roused by the distant sound of tinkling horse-bells. On looking out of the tent, I saw a long row of pack-ponies heavily laden, escorted by a number of mounted soldiers with matchlocks and spears. It was evident that some high official was coming. This advance detachment consisted of his subalterns and his baggage. They took a long sweep far away from our tent and dismounted by the Gyanema fort. Other soldiers and messengers were constantly arriving in groups from all directions. The leader of one party, with a considerable escort of soldiers, was received with profuse salaams and I concluded that he must be an important personage.

Very early the next morning, we were awakened by the distant sound of tinkling horse-bells. Looking out of the tent, I saw a long line of pack-ponies heavily loaded, escorted by several mounted soldiers with matchlocks and spears. It was clear that a high official was on the way. This advance group included his subordinates and his supplies. They made a wide detour away from our tent and dismounted near the Gyanema fort. Other soldiers and messengers kept arriving in groups from all directions. The leader of one group, accompanied by a significant number of soldiers, was greeted with elaborate bows, and I figured he must be an important figure.

After some time a message was sent to us that this new comer, the Barca Tarjum, practically a potentate equal in rank to a king under a protectorate, wished to have the honour of seeing us. We replied that we were having our breakfast and that we would send for him when we wished to speak to him. Our experience had taught us that it was advisable to treat Tibetan officials as inferiors, as they were then more subdued, and easier to deal with. At eleven we despatched a messenger to the fort to say we should be pleased to receive the Tarjum. He came immediately with a large following, a picturesque figure dressed in a long coat of green silk of Chinese shape, with large sleeves turned up, showing his arms up to the elbow; he had a cap similar to those worn by Chinese officials, and was shod with heavy long black boots, with large nails under the soles. His long, pale, angular face was remarkable in many [168] ways; it was interestingly stolid, and though somewhat effeminate, had rather fine features; unmistakable signs of depravity indicated his low class of mind and morals. Long hair fell in loose curls down to his shoulders, and hanging from his left ear was an earring of large dimensions, with malachite ornaments and a pendant. In his nervous fingers he held a small roll of Tibetan material, which he used with both hands as a handkerchief to blow his nose inconsequently every time that he was at a loss to answer a question. The Tarjum and his men were profuse in their bows, and there was, as usual, a great display of tongues. These were, I noticed, of an unhealthy whitish colour, caused throughout Tibet by excessive tea-drinking, a practice which ruins the digestion, and furs their tongues. We had rugs placed outside our principal tent, and the doctor and I sat on one, asking the Tarjum to sit on the one facing us. His followers squatted around him. It is a well-known fact that in Tibet, if you are a "somebody," or if you wish people to recognise your importance, you must have an umbrella spread over your head. Fortunately, the ever-provident doctor had two in his possession; which two of our men held over our respective heads. The Tarjum himself was shaded by a parasol of colossal dimensions, held in position by his secretary.

After a while, we got a message that the newcomer, the Barca Tarjum, a powerful figure almost equal to a king under a protectorate, wanted the honor of meeting us. We replied that we were having breakfast and would let him know when we wanted to talk. Our experience had shown us that it was best to treat Tibetan officials as lesser beings, as they then behaved better and were easier to manage. At eleven, we sent a messenger to the fort to say we would be happy to meet the Tarjum. He arrived right away with a large entourage, looking quite striking in a long green silk coat styled like a Chinese one, with wide sleeves rolled up, exposing his arms to the elbow; he wore a cap similar to those worn by Chinese officials and heavy, long black boots with large nails on the soles. His long, pale, angular face was quite distinctive; it was interestingly expressionless, and while it might have seemed somewhat feminine, he had rather refined features. Clear signs of moral decline indicated his low character. His long hair fell in loose curls to his shoulders, and from his left ear dangled a large earring with malachite decorations and a pendant. In his nervous hands, he held a small roll of Tibetan fabric, which he used like a handkerchief to blow his nose every time he struggled to answer a question. The Tarjum and his men bowed deeply, and as usual, there was a lot of chatter. I noticed their tongues were an unhealthy whitish color, a result of excessive tea-drinking that affects digestion and discolors tongues. We had rugs placed outside our main tent, and the doctor and I sat on one while asking the Tarjum to sit on the one across from us. His followers squatted around him. It's well-known that in Tibet, if you're important or want people to recognize your status, you need to have an umbrella over your head. Fortunately, the ever-prepared doctor had two umbrellas that two of our men held over us. The Tarjum himself was shaded by a huge parasol held by his secretary.

In spite of the extravagant terms of friendship which fell from the Tarjum's lips, I was convinced, by close observation of the man's face, that his words were insincere and that it would be unsafe to trust him. He never looked us straight in the face; his eyes were fixed on the ground all the time, and he spoke in a despicably affected manner. I did not like the man from the very first, and, friend or no friend, I kept my loaded rifle on my lap.

In spite of the extravagant claims of friendship that came from the Tarjum, I was convinced, by closely observing his face, that his words were insincere and that it would be unsafe to trust him. He never looked us in the eye; his gaze was always on the ground, and he spoke in a ridiculously phony way. I didn’t like him from the very beginning, and whether he was a friend or not, I kept my loaded rifle in my lap.

After endless ponderous speeches, clumsy compliments, and tender inquiries after all relations they could possibly think of; after tiring parabolic sentences with fine sounds but no meaning; after repeated blowing of the nose and loud coughing, which always came on opportunely when we asked whether they had yet come to a conclusion as to what we should be allowed to do, at last, when my patience was nearly exhausted, our negotiations of the previous day were reopened. We argued for hours. We asked to be allowed to go on. They were still uncertain whether they would let us or not. To simplify matters, and hasten their decision before other reinforcements arrived, the doctor applied for permission to let only eight of us proceed to Mansarowar. He (the doctor) himself would remain at Gyanema with

After endless, long-winded speeches, awkward compliments, and concerned questions about every relative they could think of; after tiring, roundabout sentences that sounded nice but meant nothing; after constant nose blowing and loud coughing that always happened just when we asked if they had decided what we could do, at last, when my patience was nearly gone, our discussions from the day before were reopened. We argued for hours. We asked to be allowed to continue. They were still unsure if they would let us or not. To make things simpler and speed up their decision before more reinforcements arrived, the doctor requested permission for only eight of us to go on to Mansarowar. He (the doctor) would stay at Gyanema with

[169]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Arrival of Reinforcements

Reinforcements Arrive


[170] the remainder of the party as a guarantee of good faith. But even this offer they rejected, not directly, but with hypocritical excuses and delays, for they thought we would not find our way, and that if we did, we should find it very rough, and the climate too severe; that the brigands might attack us, and so on, and so on. All this was very tiresome, and there were signs even of a nasty side to their attitude. I decided to know what I was about.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] the rest of the party as a sign of good faith. But they turned down this offer, not directly, but with insincere excuses and delays, because they thought we wouldn't figure it out, and if we did, it would be incredibly difficult, and the weather too harsh; that bandits might attack us, and so on, and so on. All of this was really annoying, and there were even hints of a nasty attitude from them. I decided I needed to understand what was really going on.

Still holding the rifle cocked at safety on my lap, I turned the muzzle of it towards the Tarjum, and purposely let my hand slide down to the trigger. He became uncomfortable and his face showed signs of wild terror. His eyes, until now fixed upon the ground, became first unsteady, and then settled fixedly, and with a look of distress, on the muzzle of my rifle. At the same time he tried to dodge the aim right or left by moving his head, but I made the weapon follow all his movements. The Tarjum's servants fully shared their master's fear. Without doubt the poor fellow was in agony; his tone of voice, a moment before boisterous and aggressive, now dwindled into the humblest intonations imaginable. With much meekness he expressed himself ready to please us in every way.

Still holding the rifle cocked and resting on my lap, I pointed the muzzle at the Tarjum and intentionally let my hand slide down to the trigger. He grew visibly uneasy, his face showing signs of sheer terror. His eyes, which had been fixed on the ground, first flickered with uncertainty and then locked onto the barrel of my rifle, filled with distress. At the same time, he tried to dodge the aim by moving his head to the right and left, but I followed his movements with the weapon. The Tarjum's servants shared their master's fear completely. It was clear the poor guy was in agony; his tone, which had been loud and aggressive moments ago, now dropped to the most humble intonations imaginable. With a lot of humility, he expressed his willingness to do anything to please us.

"I see that you are good people," said he in a faint whisper, accompanied by a deep bow. "I cannot give, as I would like to do, my official sanction to your journey forward, but you can go if you wish. I cannot say more. Eight of you can proceed to the sacred Mansarowar Lake. The others will remain here."

"I can tell you’re good people," he said in a soft voice, while bowing deeply. "I can't officially permit your journey as I'd like to, but you can go if you want. I can't say anything more. Eight of you can move forward to the sacred Mansarowar Lake. The rest will stay here."

Before giving his final decision he said that he would prefer to have another consultation with his officers.

Before making his final decision, he said he would prefer to have another meeting with his officers.

We accorded this readily.

We agreed to this easily.

The Tarjum then presented the doctor with a roll of Tibetan cloth.

The Tarjum then gave the doctor a piece of Tibetan fabric.

I had bathed as usual in the morning, and my Turkish towel was spread outside the tent to dry. The Tarjum, who showed great interest in all our things, took a particular fancy to its knotty fabric. He sent for his child to see this wonderful material, and when he arrived the towel was placed on the youth's back as if it were a shawl. I at once offered it to him as a present if he would accept it. There were no bounds to his delight, and our relations, somewhat strained a few minutes earlier, became now of the friendliest character. We invited the party inside our tent, and they examined everything with curiosity, asking endless questions. They were now quite jovial and pleasant, and even occasionally amusing. Tibetans have a craving for alcohol at

I had taken my usual morning bath, and my Turkish towel was laid out outside the tent to dry. The Tarjum, who was very interested in all our belongings, became especially fascinated by the towel's textured fabric. He called for his child to see this amazing material, and when the child arrived, the towel was draped over his shoulders like a shawl. I offered it to him as a gift if he would accept it. His joy was limitless, and our relationship, which had been somewhat tense just moments earlier, turned into a friendly one. We invited them into our tent, where they curiously examined everything, asking countless questions. They were now quite cheerful and enjoyable to be around, even occasionally funny. Tibetans have a strong desire for alcohol at

[171]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Barca Tarjum and his Officers

The Barca Tarjum and his Officers


[172] all times and they soon asked me if I had any to give them; there was nothing they would like more. As I never carry any when travelling, I could not offer them any recognised drink, but not wishing to disappoint them, I produced a bottle of methylated spirits (which I used for my hypsometrical apparatus). This they readily drank, apparently appreciating its throat-burning qualities, and asked for more. The Tarjum complained of an ailment from which he had suffered for some time, and the doctor was able to give him a suitable remedy, and all the other officers received small presents when they departed.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] everyone and they quickly asked if I had any to share with them; there was nothing they would enjoy more. Since I never carry any when I’m traveling, I couldn’t offer them a proper drink, but not wanting to let them down, I took out a bottle of methylated spirits (which I used for my altitude-measuring device). They eagerly drank it, seemingly enjoying its burning sensation, and asked for more. The Tarjum mentioned suffering from an ailment for a while, and the doctor managed to provide him with a suitable remedy, and all the other officers received small gifts when they left.

In the afternoon a messenger came from the Barca Tarjum. He had good news for us. The Tarjum wished us to understand that "as we had been so kind to him and his followers, he regarded us as his personal friends; and as we were so anxious to visit the Mansarowar Lake and the great Kelas Mount, and had already experienced many difficulties and great expense in coming so far, he agreed to eight of our party proceeding to the sacred spots. It was impossible for him to give an official consent, but he repeated again that we could go if we wished."

In the afternoon, a messenger arrived from the Barca Tarjum. He brought us good news. The Tarjum wanted us to know that "since we had been so kind to him and his followers, he considered us his personal friends; and since we were eager to visit Mansarowar Lake and the great Kelas Mount, and had already faced many difficulties and spent a lot to come this far, he agreed to let eight of our group go to the sacred sites. He couldn't give official permission, but he emphasized again that we could go if we wanted."

This news naturally delighted me. Once at Kelas, I felt sure I could easily find some means of going farther.

This news naturally made me really happy. Once at Kelas, I felt confident I could easily find a way to go further.

On the same evening, a traitor in our camp sneaked from under the tent in which my men were sleeping, and paid a visit to the Tarjum. There is no doubt that he told him I was not the doctor's brother, nor a Hindoo pilgrim. He disclosed that I was a sahib, and that I was on my way to Lhassa. From what I heard afterwards, it seemed that the Tarjum did not quite believe his informant; but fresh doubts arising in his mind, he sent a message during the night, entreating us to return the way we came.

On the same evening, a traitor in our camp slipped out from under the tent where my men were sleeping and went to see the Tarjum. There's no doubt he told him I wasn't the doctor's brother, nor a Hindu pilgrim. He revealed that I was a sahib and that I was headed to Lhasa. From what I heard later, it seemed the Tarjum didn’t completely trust this informant; however, as new doubts arose in his mind, he sent a message during the night, asking us to go back the way we came.

"If there is really a sahib in your party, whom you have kept concealed from me, and I let you go on, my head will be cut off by the Lhassa people. You are now my friends, and you will not allow this."

"If there's actually a sahib in your group that you've been hiding from me, and I let you leave, the people of Lhassa will have my head. You are my friends now, and you won't let that happen."

"Tell the Tarjum," I replied to the messenger, "that he is my friend, and I will treat him as a friend."

"Tell the Tarjum," I said to the messenger, "that he’s my friend, and I’ll treat him like one."

In the morning, we found thirty horsemen fully armed posted some hundred yards from our tent. To proceed with the demoralised crowd under me, and be followed by this company, would certainly prove disastrous and I felt again that some ruse was a necessity.

In the morning, we found thirty fully armed horsemen positioned about a hundred yards from our tent. Moving forward with the demoralized crowd under my command, while being followed by this group, would definitely lead to disaster, and I realized once again that some sort of trick was necessary.

Much to the astonishment and terror of the armed force and their superiors, the doctor, Chanden Sing and I, rifles [173] in hand, walked firmly towards the contingent of sepoys. After us came the trembling coolies. The Magbun and the Tarjum's officers could hardly believe their eyes. The soldiers quickly dismounted, and laid their arms down to show that they had no intention of fighting. We passed them without any notice. The Magbun ran after me. He begged me to stop one moment. Dola was summoned to interpret his elaborate speech. A pair of prettily embroidered cloth-boots were produced from the loose folds of the official's coat, and he offered them with the following words:

Much to the shock and fear of the armed forces and their superiors, the doctor, Chanden Sing, and I, rifles in hand, confidently walked toward the group of sepoys. Behind us came the trembling laborers. The Magbun and the Tarjum's officers could barely believe what they were seeing. The soldiers quickly got off their horses and laid down their weapons to show they had no intention of fighting. We passed by them without acknowledging their presence. The Magbun ran after me, pleading for me to stop for a moment. Dola was called in to translate his lengthy speech. A pair of beautifully embroidered cloth boots were pulled from the loose folds of the official's coat, and he offered them with these words:

"Though your face is sunburnt and black, and your eyes are sore (they were not, as a matter of fact, but I wore snow-spectacles), your features tell me that you are of a good family, therefore, you must be a high officer in your country. Your noble feelings also show that you would not have us punished for your sake, and now our hearts are glad to see you retrace your steps. Let me offer you these boots, so that your feet may not get sore on the long and difficult journey back to your native land."

"Even though your face is sunburned and dark, and your eyes are sore (which they aren’t, but I was wearing snow goggles), your features tell me that you come from a good family, so you must be a high-ranking official in your country. Your noble attitude also shows that you wouldn’t want us to be punished for your benefit, and now we’re happy to see you turning back. Let me offer you these boots, so your feet don’t get sore on the long and tough journey back to your homeland."

It was neatly put, though the mode of reasoning was peculiar. It was not to my interest to disillusionise the Tibetan as to my purpose, so I accepted the boots. The Magbun and his guard salaamed to the ground.

It was stated clearly, even though the reasoning was unusual. I didn't want to reveal my true intentions to the Tibetan, so I accepted the boots. The Magbun and his guard bowed low.

Without further parleying, we left the Magbun, and retracing our steps, proceeded in a W.S.W. direction as though we had decided to turn back, and leave the country.

Without any more talking, we left the Magbun and, retracing our steps, headed in a W.S.W. direction as if we had decided to turn back and leave the country.


[174]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXX

Spying our movements—Disguised sepoys—A gloomy look-out—Troublesome followers—Another march back—An amusing incident.

We reached the summit of the hill and crossed to the other side. My men went on down the slope, but I remained, screened by a large stone, to observe with my telescope the folks at Gyanema. No sooner had my last man disappeared on the other side of the pass, than the cavalrymen jumped into their saddles and, raising clouds of dust, galloped after us. This was what I had expected. I hastened to rejoin my men. When down in the plain, I again took my telescope, and watched the sky-line of the hill we had just descended. Some thirty heads could be seen peeping over the rocks from among the boulders. The soldiers had evidently dismounted, and were spying our movements. I felt annoyed that they did not openly follow us, if they so wished, instead of watching us from a distance, so I sighted my rifle to eight hundred yards, lay down flat, and took aim at a figure I could see more plainly than the others.

We reached the top of the hill and crossed to the other side. My team went down the slope, but I stayed behind, hidden by a large rock, to watch the people at Gyanema with my binoculars. No sooner had my last man disappeared on the other side of the pass than the cavalrymen jumped on their horses and, kicking up dust, galloped after us. This was what I had expected. I quickly returned to my men. Once on the plain, I grabbed my binoculars again and scanned the skyline of the hill we had just come down. About thirty heads could be seen peeking over the rocks among the boulders. The soldiers had clearly dismounted and were watching our movements. I felt frustrated that they didn't just follow us openly if they wanted to, instead of lurking in the distance, so I set my rifle to eight hundred yards, lay flat, and aimed at a figure that stood out more clearly than the others.

The doctor snatched the rifle from my shoulder.

The doctor grabbed the rifle from my shoulder.

"You must not shoot," said he, with his usual calmness; "you might kill somebody."

"You can’t shoot,” he said calmly, “you could hurt someone.”

"I only wish to teach these cowards a lesson."

"I just want to show these cowards a lesson."

"That is all very well. But every man in Tibet is so cowardly that the lesson would have to be constantly repeated," answered Wilson with his perpetual wisdom.

"That’s all great. But every guy in Tibet is so cowardly that the lesson would have to be repeated all the time," replied Wilson with his usual wisdom.

I slung my rifle over my shoulder and made up my mind to start some other time on the cyclopean task I had then so nearly begun.

I threw my rifle over my shoulder and decided to start the huge task I had almost begun another time.

When we had covered a mile or so of the plain, our phantomlike escort crossed the pass, and came full gallop [175] down the hill. I gave orders to my men to halt, seeing which, the soldiers also came to a dead stop. I watched them through the telescope. They seemed to be holding a discussion. At last five men rode full speed northwards, probably to guard the track in that direction. Three men remained where they were, and the remainder, as if seized by panic, galloped frantically up the hill again, and disappeared over the summit.

When we had traveled about a mile across the plain, our ghostly escort crossed the pass and came charging down the hill. I instructed my men to stop, and upon seeing this, the soldiers also came to an abrupt halt. I observed them through the telescope. It looked like they were having a discussion. Finally, five men rode quickly northward, likely to secure the route in that direction. Three men stayed put, while the rest, as if struck by panic, dashed back up the hill and vanished over the peak.

We resumed our march. The three horsemen followed a course one mile south of ours, close against the foot of the hills, and lying low upon their ponies' heads, they probably imagined that they were passing us unperceived. Seeing that our bearings were for our old camp at Lama Chokden, they left our line and rode ahead of us.

We continued on our march. The three riders took a path a mile south of ours, staying near the base of the hills, and with their heads lowered on their ponies, they probably thought they were slipping by unnoticed. Noticing that we were headed back to our old camp at Lama Chokden, they left our line and rode ahead of us.

When in the evening we reached Lama Chokden, two shepherds came to greet us. Then another appeared.

When we arrived at Lama Chokden in the evening, two shepherds came to welcome us. Then another one showed up.

"Our sheep are far away," said they. "We are hungry. We are poor. Can we stop near your camp and pick up the food that you will throw away?"

"Our sheep are really far off," they said. "We're hungry. We're struggling. Can we stop by your camp and take the food that you're going to throw away?"

"Certainly," I replied. "But mind you do not pick up anything else."

"Sure," I replied. "But make sure you don’t pick up anything else."

These simple folk, thinking I should not know them, had left their ponies at the Lama Chokden guard-house, and, disguised as shepherds, they were now trying to ingratiate themselves with us, with the object of discovering our movements and plans. They were, of course, no other than the three sepoys from Gyanema.

These ordinary people, thinking I wouldn’t recognize them, had left their ponies at the Lama Chokden guardhouse and were now pretending to be shepherds to try to win us over, aiming to find out our movements and plans. They were, of course, none other than the three soldiers from Gyanema.

At each step in our retreat towards the Himahlyas my heart became heavier and my spirits more depressed. I was full of stratagems, but to think out plans and to carry them into effect were two different things.

At every step of our journey back to the Himalayas, my heart felt heavier and my spirits sank lower. I had plenty of schemes in mind, but coming up with plans and actually putting them into action were two completely different things.

How many times had not my schemes been upset? How often had I not had to begin afresh when all seemed ready and in perfect working order?—that, too, when I had plenty of good material at my disposal to work upon. Now things had changed altogether for the worse. My chances of success, notwithstanding my incessant struggle, were getting smaller and smaller every day. I could not but feel that there must be an end eventually to the capability and endurance of my followers and myself. It is hard enough to start on a difficult task, but when you are well started, and have already overcome many difficulties, to have to come back and begin again is more than galling.

How many times have my plans been thrown off course? How often have I had to start over when everything seemed set and working perfectly?—especially when I had plenty of good resources available to use. Now things had completely changed for the worse. My chances of success, despite my constant effort, were getting smaller every day. I couldn’t help but feel that there must eventually be a limit to the capability and endurance of my team and myself. It's already tough to start a challenging task, but when you're well underway and have overcome many obstacles, having to go back and start again is incredibly frustrating.

The outlook was dark and gloomy; I stood face to face with apparent failure, and I was uncertain of the loyalty of my own men.

The future looked bleak; I stood right in front of what seemed like failure, and I wasn't sure I could trust my own team.

[176] At this camp, for instance, the Daku (brigand), who had changed his disguise several times since coming in contact with the Tibetans, announced his immediate departure. The doctor, with his usual kindness, had already entreated him to remain, but without avail. We well knew that in this region, infested by dacoits, this man was only leaving us to recommence his late marauding habits. He would, in all probability, join some band, and without much doubt we might soon expect a visit during the darkest hours of the night. The Daku knew that I carried a large sum of money, and during the last two days his behaviour had been more than strange. Had he come across some of his mates? or had he heard from the sepoys that they were in the neighbourhood?

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] At this camp, for example, the Daku (bandit), who had changed his disguise multiple times since meeting the Tibetans, announced that he would be leaving immediately. The doctor, as always, kindly asked him to stay, but it didn’t work. We all knew that in this area, plagued by bandits, this guy was only leaving to pick up his old habits of raiding. He would likely join another gang, and without a doubt, we could expect a visit during the darkest hours of the night. The Daku knew that I had a lot of money, and over the past couple of days, his behavior had been very odd. Had he met up with some of his buddies? Or had he heard from the sepoys that they were nearby?

The Daku had a bundle of his blankets strapped on his back in readiness for immediate departure. My men, distressed at this new danger, came to report it to me. I immediately sent for him. Speaking bluntly, and keeping his eyes fixed on the ground, he said: "I am going, sahib."

The Daku had a bundle of blankets tied to his back, ready to leave at any moment. My men, worried about this new threat, came to inform me. I quickly called for him. Speaking straightforwardly, and looking down, he said, "I'm leaving, sir."

"Where?" I inquired.

"Where?" I asked.

"I have friends near here, and I am going to them."

"I have friends nearby, and I’m going to see them."

"Very good, go," I replied, calmly taking up my rifle.

"Alright, go ahead," I said, calmly picking up my rifle.

His load was off his shoulder in less time than it takes to describe the event. He resumed his work as usual. One or two other riotous coolies were brought back to reason by similar menaces.

His burden was off his shoulder in no time at all. He got back to work like usual. One or two other unruly workers were brought back to their senses by similar threats.

I heard later that a band of brigands attacked a party near the frontier only two days after this occurred.

I found out later that a group of robbers attacked a party near the border just two days after this happened.

Another march back! How painful it was to me! Yet it was advisable. We went a few miles and encamped on the bank of a rapid stream, the Shirlangdu. From this point, with some difficulty and danger, it would be possible to climb over the mountain range during the night, and attempt to elude the spies and watchmen, by crossing the jungle to Mansarowar. I made up my mind to attempt this. It seemed to add to the risk to have so large a following as my thirty men, so I decided that only four or five should accompany me. Going alone was impracticable, because of the difficulty of carrying sufficient food, or I would have by far preferred it. Nevertheless, if the worst came to the worst, I resolved to attempt this latter mode of travelling, and rely on the chance of obtaining food from Tibetans.

Another march back! How painful that was for me! But it made sense. We traveled a few miles and set up camp by the fast-flowing Shirlangdu stream. From here, with some challenges and risks, it might be possible to climb over the mountains at night and try to avoid the spies and guards by crossing the jungle to Mansarowar. I decided to go for it. Having such a large group of thirty men felt like it would add to the risk, so I chose to take only four or five with me. Going alone wasn’t practical because it would be difficult to carry enough food, or I definitely would have preferred that. Still, if things got really bad, I was determined to try that method of traveling and depend on getting food from the Tibetans.

All the loads were made ready. Articles of clothing and comfort, niceties in the way of food, and extras in the way [177] of medicines, were left behind to make room for my scientific instruments.

All the loads were prepared. Items like clothing and comfort, nice food, and additional medicines were left behind to make space for my scientific instruments. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Each pound in weight more that I dedicated to science meant a pound less food to take us to Lhassa. Everything that was not of absolute necessity had to be left.

Each extra pound I devoted to science meant one less pound of food for our journey to Lhassa. Anything that wasn't absolutely essential had to be left behind.

Two Tibetan spies came to camp in the afternoon, in the disguise, as usual, of beggars. They asked for food, and exacted it. Their manner was unbearably insulting. This was a little too much for us, and Bijesing the Johari, and Rubso the Christian cook, were the first to enter into an open fight with them! They punched and kicked them, driving them down a steep ravine leading to a river, then, assisted by other men in camp, showered stones upon them. The unfortunate intruders, unable to wade quickly across the rapid stream, received as fine a reception as they deserved.

Two Tibetan spies showed up at the camp in the afternoon, once again disguised as beggars. They asked for food and took it by force. Their attitude was extremely disrespectful. This was more than we could tolerate, and Bijesing the Johari and Rubso the Christian cook were the first to confront them openly! They punched and kicked the spies, pushing them down a steep ravine that led to a river, and then, with the help of other camp members, pelted them with stones. The unfortunate intruders, unable to cross the fast-flowing stream quickly, got exactly the reception they deserved.

This little skirmish amused the camp, but many of the Shokas and Hunyas in my service were still scared out of their wits. It was quite sufficient for them to see a Tibetan to crumble into nothing.

This little fight entertained the camp, but many of the Shokas and Hunyas working for me were still terrified. Just seeing a Tibetan was enough to make them fall apart.


[178]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXXI

An attempt that failed—A resolution—A smart Shoka lad—The plucky Chanden Sing proposes to accompany me—Mansing the leper becomes my servant's servant.

The hour fixed for my flight was 9 p.m. Five men had been induced to follow me by the offer of a handsome reward.

The time set for my flight was 9 PM Five men had been encouraged to follow me with the promise of a generous reward.

At the hour appointed no single one of them had put in an appearance. I went in search of them. One man had purposely injured his feet and was disabled, another pretended to be dying, the others positively refused to come. They were shivering with fright and cold.

At the scheduled time, not one of them had shown up. I went to look for them. One guy had intentionally hurt his feet and couldn’t walk, another acted like he was on the verge of death, and the rest outright refused to come. They were shaking from fear and cold.

"Kill us, sahib, if you like," they implored of me, "but we will not follow you."

"Go ahead and kill us, sir, if that's what you want," they pleaded with me, "but we will not follow you."

At 3 a.m. all attempts to get even one man to carry a load had proved futile. I had to abandon the idea of starting.

At 3 AM, all efforts to get even one person to carry a load had been unsuccessful. I had to give up on the idea of starting.

My prospects became more gloomy than ever. Another march back towards the cold and dreary pass by which I had entered Tibet!

My outlook became more dismal than ever. Another march back towards the cold and bleak path that I had entered Tibet through!

"You are depressed, Mr. Landor," remarked the doctor.

"You’re feeling down, Mr. Landor," the doctor said.

I admitted the fact. Every step backwards was to me like a stab in the heart. I had wished to push on at all costs, and it was only in consideration of my good and kind friend, the doctor, that I had reluctantly refrained from making my way by force. My blood was boiling. I felt feverish. The cowardice of my men made them absolutely contemptible, and I could not bear to see them even.

I accepted the truth. Every step back felt like a stab to my heart. I wanted to push forward no matter what, and it was only out of respect for my good friend, the doctor, that I had hesitantly held back from forcing my way through. I was furious. I felt like I had a fever. The cowardice of my men made them utterly despicable, and I couldn't stand to even look at them.

Immersed in my thoughts, I walked quickly on, and the rugged way seemed short and easy. I found a suitable spot for our next camp. Here before me, and on every side, stood high snowy mountains; there, in front, towered that [179] same Lumpiya Pass by which I had crossed into Tibet with such high hopes. I detested the sight of it on the present occasion; its snowy slopes seemed to mock at my failure.

Lost in my thoughts, I hurried along, and the rough path felt short and manageable. I found a good place for our next campsite. All around me stood tall, snowy mountains; in front of me loomed that same Lumpiya Pass, the one I had crossed into Tibet with such optimism. I hated the sight of it now; its snowy slopes seemed to taunt me for my failure.

Whether it is that storms invariably come when one is depressed, or whether one gets depressed when storms are coming, I am not here prepared to say, but the fact remains that, before we had time to pitch our tents, the wind, which had been high all through the afternoon, increased tenfold. The clouds above were wild and threatening, and snow soon fell in feathery flakes.

Whether storms always show up when you’re feeling down, or if you feel down when storms approach, I can’t say for sure, but the truth is that before we could set up our tents, the wind, which had been strong all afternoon, picked up even more. The clouds above were chaotic and menacing, and soon snow began to fall in light, delicate flakes.

"What are you going to do?" inquired the doctor of me. "I think you had better return to Garbyang, get fresh men, and make another start."

"What are you going to do?" the doctor asked me. "I think you should go back to Garbyang, get some fresh men, and give it another try."

"No, doctor. I will die rather than continue this backward march. There will be a far better chance if I go alone, and I have resolved to start to-night, for I am convinced that I shall find my way over the range."

"No, doctor. I would rather die than keep going backward. I’ll have a much better chance if I go on my own, and I've decided to leave tonight because I'm sure I can find my way over the mountains."

"No, no, it is impossible, Mr. Landor," cried the doctor, with tears in his eyes. "That must mean death to any one attempting it."

"No, no, that's impossible, Mr. Landor," the doctor exclaimed, tears in his eyes. "That would mean death for anyone trying it."

I told him that I was quite determined.

I told him that I was really determined.

The poor doctor was dumbfounded. He knew that it was useless to try to dissuade me. I went into the tent to rearrange and reduce my baggage, making a load small enough to carry on my back, in addition to the daily kit and instruments.

The poor doctor was shocked. He knew it was pointless to try to change my mind. I went into the tent to sort and lighten my baggage, making it small enough to carry on my back, along with my daily supplies and instruments.

Whilst I was making preparations for my journey, Kachi Ram entered the tent. He looked frightened and perplexed.

While I was getting ready for my journey, Kachi Ram entered the tent. He looked scared and confused.

"What are you doing, sir?" inquired he hurriedly. "The doctor says you are going to leave alone to-night, cross the mountain range, and go to Lhassa by yourself."

"What are you doing, sir?" he asked quickly. "The doctor says you’re leaving alone tonight, crossing the mountain range, and going to Lhassa by yourself."

"Yes, that is true."

"Yes, that's true."

"Oh, sir! The perils and dangers are too great, you cannot go."

"Oh, sir! The risks and dangers are too high, you can't go."

"I know, but I am going to try."

"I know, but I'm going to give it a shot."

"Oh, sir! Then I will come with you."

"Oh, sir! Then I’ll come with you."

"No, Kachi. You will suffer too much. Go back to your father and mother now that you have the opportunity."

"No, Kachi. You’ll go through too much pain. Go back to your mom and dad while you still can."

"No, sir; where you go, I will go. Small men never suffer. If they do it does not matter. Only great men's sufferings are worth noticing. If you suffer, I will suffer. I will come."

"No, sir; wherever you go, I will go. Small men never suffer. If they do, it doesn’t matter. Only the suffering of great men is worth noticing. If you suffer, I will suffer. I will come."

Kachi's philosophy touched me. I ascertained beyond doubt that he meant what he said, and then decided to take him.

Kachi's philosophy inspired me. I was completely sure he meant what he said, so I decided to go along with it.

[180] This was a piece of luck. Kachi Ram had five bosom friends among the young Shoka coolies. They were all friends of the Rambang, and in the evenings in camp they often used to join and sing weird songs in honour of the fair maids of their hearts, whom they had left on the other side of the Himahlyas.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] This was a stroke of luck. Kachi Ram had five close friends among the young Shoka coolies. They were all friends of the Rambang, and in the evenings at camp, they often gathered together to sing strange songs in honor of the beautiful girls they had left behind on the other side of the Himalayas.

Kachi hurried away in a state of feverish excitement. He was back in a few minutes.

Kachi rushed off, filled with intense excitement. He returned a few minutes later.

"How many coolies will you take, sir?"

"How many workers will you take, sir?"

"None will come."

"No one will come."

"Oh, I will get them. Will five do?"

"Oh, I'll get them. Will five be enough?"

"Yes," I murmured incredulously.

"Yeah," I murmured in disbelief.

My scepticism sustained a shock when Kachi returned, buoyant, saying in his peculiar English:

My skepticism took a hit when Kachi came back, feeling upbeat, saying in his distinctive English:

"Five Shokas come, sir. Then you, sir, I, sir, five coolies, sir, start night-time, what clock?"

"Five Shokas are coming, sir. Then there’s you, sir, me, sir, five coolies, sir, when do we start at night, what time?"

"By Jove, Kachi," I could not help exclaiming, "you are a smart lad."

"Wow, Kachi," I couldn't help but say, "you’re a clever kid."

"'Smart,' sir?" inquired he sharply, hearing a new word. He was most anxious to learn English, and he had a mania for spelling. "'Smart!' What is meaning? How spell?"

"'Smart,' sir?" he asked sharply, noticing a new word. He was very eager to learn English and had a passion for spelling. "'Smart!' What does it mean? How do you spell it?"

"S-m-a-r-t. It means 'quick, intelligent.'"

"S-m-a-r-t. It means 'smart.'"

"Smart," he repeated solemnly, as he wrote the newly-acquired word in a book which I had given him for the purpose. Kachi was undoubtedly, in spite of some small faults, a great character. He was a most intelligent, sharp, well-meaning fellow. His never failing good humour, and his earnest desire to learn and to be useful, were quite refreshing.

"Smart," he said seriously, writing the new word in a book I had given him for that reason. Kachi was definitely a great person, despite a few minor flaws. He was very intelligent, quick-witted, and kind-hearted. His constant good humor and genuine desire to learn and be helpful were truly refreshing.

My luck seemed to have turned indeed. A few minutes later my bearer, quite unaware that any one would accompany me, entered the tent, and exclaimed in a disgusted manner:

My luck really seemed to have changed. A few minutes later, my porter, completely unaware that anyone would be joining me, walked into the tent and said with a look of disgust:

"Shoka crab, sahib! Hunya log bura crab. Hazur hum, do admi jaldi Lhasa giao." ("The Shokas are bad. The Hunyas are very bad. Your honour and I, we two alone, will go quickly by ourselves to Lhassa.")

"Shoka crab, sir! The Shokas are bad. The Hunyas are really bad. Your honor and I, just the two of us, will go quickly by ourselves to Lhasa."

Here was another plucky and useful man anxious to come. He professed to have no fear of death. He was the type of man I wanted. How true the poor fellow's protestations were I learned at a later date!

Here was another brave and capable guy eager to join. He claimed to have no fear of death. He was exactly the kind of person I was looking for. How genuine the poor guy's statements were I found out later!

Chanden Sing was a man of strong sporting proclivities. His happiness was complete when he could fire his rifle at something, though he was never known to hit the mark. He had been severely reprimanded and punished by me [181] only a few days before for wasting several cartridges on kiang (wild horse) three miles distant. Ordinary work, however, such as doing his own cooking, or keeping my things tidy, was distasteful to him, and was invariably passed on to others.

Chanden Sing was a man with a strong passion for sports. His happiness was complete whenever he could take his rifle out and shoot at something, though he was never known to actually hit anything. Just a few days before, I had given him a stern reprimand and punishment for wasting several bullets on a wild horse three miles away. However, he had no interest in ordinary tasks like cooking for himself or keeping my belongings organized, and he consistently handed those responsibilities off to others. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Mansing the leper, being unfortunately of the same caste as Chanden Sing, became my servant's servant. The two Hindoos constantly quarrelled and fought, but at heart they were the best of friends. The bearer, by means of promises, mingled at intervals with blows, eventually succeeded in inducing his protégé to join in our new plan, and face with us the unknown dangers ahead.

Mansing the leper, unfortunately being from the same caste as Chanden Sing, became my servant's servant. The two Hindus constantly argued and fought, but deep down, they were the best of friends. The bearer, using promises mixed with occasional punches, eventually managed to persuade his protégé to join our new plan and face the unknown dangers together with us.


[182]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXXII

"Devil's Camp"—A fierce snowstorm—Abandoning our tents—Dangers and perils in prospect—Collecting the men—One load too many!—Another man wanted and found—A propitious night—Good-bye to Wilson—The escape—Brigands.

By eight o'clock in the evening I had collected all the men who had promised to follow me. They comprised my bearer, Kachi and six coolies.

By eight o'clock in the evening, I had gathered all the men who had agreed to come with me. They included my bearer, Kachi, and six porters.

We named this camp "Devil's Camp," for diabolical indeed was the wind that shook our tents, not to speak of the snow blown into our shelters by the raging storm. During the night the wind grew in fury. Neither wood, dung, nor lichen for fuel was to be found. Our tents were pitched at 16,900 feet above sea-level, and to ascend to the summit of the range would mean a further climb of two thousand feet. In such weather the difficulties of the ascent were increased tenfold, though for evading the vigilance of the Tibetan watchmen, who spied upon our movements, we could have no better chance than a dirty night like this. I arranged with the doctor that he was to take back to Garbyang all the baggage I had discarded and the men who had declined to follow me. He must display all our tents until late in the afternoon of the next day, so as to let the Tibetans suppose that we were all under them, and give me time to make a long forced march before they could get on our track. Hard as it would be for us going forward, we would take no tent except the small tente d'abri, weighing about four pounds. We should anyhow be unable to pitch one for several days, for fear of being detected by the Tibetans, who would be soon seen abroad in search of us. We should have to march long distances at night, keeping mostly on the summit of the range, instead of proceeding, like other travellers, along the valleys, and we must get what little

We named this camp "Devil's Camp" because the wind that shook our tents was truly wicked, not to mention the snow that was blown into our shelters by the fierce storm. Throughout the night, the wind grew stronger. There was no wood, dung, or lichen for fuel. Our tents were set up at 16,900 feet above sea level, and reaching the summit of the range meant an additional climb of two thousand feet. In such weather, the challenges of the ascent were multiplied tenfold, but escaping the watchful eyes of the Tibetan guards who monitored our movements was best attempted on a nasty night like this. I arranged with the doctor to take back to Garbyang all the luggage I had left behind, along with the men who chose not to continue with me. He had to set up all our tents until late in the afternoon of the following day, to make the Tibetans believe we were all still there, giving me time to make a long forced march before they could pick up our trail. It would be tough for us to move forward, but we would only take the small tente d'abri, which weighed about four pounds. We wouldn't be able to set up any tent for several days to avoid being spotted by the Tibetans, who would soon be out looking for us. We would have to walk long distances at night, mostly staying on the ridge of the range instead of following the valleys like other travelers, and we had to get whatever little

[183]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

"At Night I led my men up the mountain in a fierce snowstorm"

"At night, I took my team up the mountain during a heavy snowstorm."


[184] sleep we could during the day, when we could hide in some secluded spot. The thought of seeing a fire had to be abandoned for an indefinite period, because, even in the remote contingency of our finding fuel at the great altitudes where we should have to camp, every one knows that a fire and a column of smoke can be seen at a very great distance, both by day and night. We pondered and discussed all these matters before we made a start, and, moreover, we were fully aware that, if the Tibetans could once lay their hands upon us, our numbers were too small to offer a stout resistance, and we might well give ourselves up for lost. In fact, taking things all round, I rather doubted whether the lives of my few followers and my own were worth more than a song from the moment of our leaving "Devils' Camp."

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] We could only sleep during the day when we could find a quiet spot to hide. The idea of starting a fire was off the table for the foreseeable future because, even if we managed to find fuel at the high altitudes where we would camp, everyone knows that a fire and its smoke can be spotted from a long distance, both day and night. We thought and talked through all these issues before we set off, and we knew that if the Tibetans got a hold of us, our small group wouldn’t stand a chance, and we might as well consider ourselves finished. Honestly, looking at the situation overall, I started to doubt whether my life and the lives of my few companions were worth more than a song from the moment we left "Devils' Camp."

With this full knowledge of what we were undertaking, we may have been foolish in starting at all, but lack of determination cannot in fairness be credited as one of our faults.

With a complete understanding of what we were getting into, we might have been naive to start at all, but honestly, we can’t be blamed for a lack of determination.

The thoughtful doctor had brought with him from our last camp a few lichens, with which he was now attempting to light a fire, to cook me some chapatis before leaving. Alas! four hours' hard work, and an equal number of boxes of matches, failed to produce the semblance of a flame.

The considerate doctor had brought a few lichens from our last campsite, and he was now trying to start a fire to cook me some chapatis before we left. Unfortunately, after four hours of hard work and using just as many matchboxes, he still couldn't get even a spark.

At midnight I sent Chanden Sing and Kachi to collect the men. Two came trembling into the tent; the others could not be roused. I went myself and took them, one by one, to their loads. They were all crying like children. It was then that I discovered that in the haste and confusion I had made one load too many. Here was a dilemma! Everything was ready and propitious for our flight, and a delay at this juncture was fatal. At any cost, I must have another man.

At midnight, I sent Chanden Sing and Kachi to gather the men. Two came in shaking with fear; the others couldn't be woken up. I went myself and took them to their loads, one by one. They were all crying like kids. It was then I realized that in the rush and chaos, I had made one load too many. This was a dilemma! Everything was set and perfect for our escape, and a delay at this point would be disastrous. I had to get another man, no matter what.

The moans and groans in the coolies' tent, when I went in search of one, were pitiful. You would have thought that they were all going to die within a few minutes, and that they were now in their last agonies, all because of the terror of being picked out to follow me.

The moans and groans in the coolies' tent, when I went in search of one, were heartbreaking. You would think they were all about to die any minute, suffering in their final moments, all because of the fear of being chosen to follow me.

At last, after endless trouble, threats and promises, Bijesing the Johari was persuaded to come. But the load was too heavy for him; he would only carry half. To save trouble, I agreed I would carry the other half myself in addition to my own load.

At last, after a lot of hassle, threats, and promises, Bijesing the Johari agreed to come. But the load was too heavy for him; he would only carry half. To avoid extra trouble, I agreed to carry the other half myself, along with my own load.

We put out our hurricane lantern, and at 2 a.m., when the gale was raging at its height, driving the grit and snow like [185] spikes into our faces; when the wind and cold seemed to penetrate with biting force to the marrow of our bones, when, as it seemed, all the gods were giving vent to their anger by putting every obstacle in our way, a handful of silent men, half frozen and staggering, left the camp to face the blizzard. I ordered my men to keep close together, and we made immediately for the mountain side, taking care to avoid the places where we supposed the Tibetan spies were posted.

We turned off our hurricane lantern, and at 2 a.m., when the storm was at its worst, blasting grit and snow like spikes into our faces; when the wind and cold felt like they were gripping us to our very bones, and it seemed like all the gods were unleashing their fury by throwing every obstacle in our path, a small group of silent men, half-frozen and staggering, left the camp to face the blizzard. I told my men to stick close together, and we headed straight for the mountainside, being careful to steer clear of the spots where we thought the Tibetan spies might be hiding.

We could not have selected a more suitable night for our escape. It was so dark that we could only see a few inches in front of our noses. The doctor, silent and with a swelling heart, accompanied me for a couple of hundred yards. I urged him to return to the tent. He stopped to grasp my hand, and in a broken voice the good man bade me farewell and God-speed.

We couldn't have picked a better night for our escape. It was so dark that we could barely see a few inches in front of us. The doctor, quiet and full of emotion, walked with me for a couple of hundred yards. I insisted he go back to the tent. He paused to take my hand, and in a shaky voice, the kind man wished me farewell and good luck.

"The dangers of your journey," whispered Wilson, "are so great and so numerous that God alone can guide you through. When I think of the cold, hunger and hardships you will have to endure, I can but tremble for you."

"The dangers of your journey," whispered Wilson, "are so great and so many that only God can guide you through. When I think of the cold, hunger, and hardships you’ll face, I can only tremble for you."

"Good-bye, doctor," said I, deeply moved.

"Goodbye, doctor," I said, feeling really emotional.

"Good-bye," he repeated, "good——" and his voice failed him.

"Goodbye," he repeated, "good—" and his voice trailed off.

Two or three steps and the darkness separated us, but his touching words of farewell rang and echoed in my ears, as with sadness I remembered the loyalty and cheerful kindness of this good friend. The journey towards Lhassa had recommenced in grim earnest. In a short while our ears, fingers, and toes were almost frozen, and the fast driving snow beat mercilessly against our faces, making our eyes ache. We proceeded like so many blind people, speechless and exhausted, rising slowly higher on the mountain range, and feeling our way with our feet. As we reached greater altitudes it grew still colder, and the wind became more piercing. Every few minutes we were compelled to halt and sit close together in order to keep warm and get breath, as the air was so rarefied that we could barely proceed under our heavy loads.

Two or three steps and the darkness separated us, but his heartfelt words of goodbye echoed in my ears as I sadly remembered the loyalty and cheerful kindness of this good friend. The journey to Lhasa had resumed in earnest. Before long, our ears, fingers, and toes were almost frozen, and the driving snow hit our faces mercilessly, making our eyes hurt. We moved like a group of blind people, silent and worn out, slowly climbing higher on the mountain range, feeling our way with our feet. As we gained altitude, it got even colder, and the wind became sharper. Every few minutes, we had to stop and huddle close together to stay warm and catch our breath since the air was so thin we could barely continue under our heavy loads.

We heard a whistle, and sounds like distant voices. My men collected round me, whispered, "Dakus, dakus!" ("Brigands, brigands!"), and then threw themselves flat on the snow. I loaded my rifle and went ahead, but it was vain to hope to pierce the obscurity. I listened. Yet another shrill whistle!

We heard a whistle and sounds like voices in the distance. My men gathered around me, whispering, "Dakus, dakus!" ("Brigands, brigands!"), and then they lay flat in the snow. I loaded my rifle and moved forward, but it was useless to think I could see through the darkness. I listened. Then came another sharp whistle!

My Shokas were terrified. The sound seemed to come from straight in front of us. We slightly altered our course, [186] winning our way upward slowly and steadily, until we found at sunrise we were near the mountain top. It was still snowing hard. One final effort brought us to the plateau on the summit.

My Shokas were scared. The noise seemed to come from right in front of us. We slightly changed our direction, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] moving upward slowly and steadily, until we realized at sunrise that we were close to the mountain top. It was still snowing heavily. One last push took us to the plateau at the summit.

Here we felt comparatively safe. Thoroughly exhausted, we deposited our burdens on the snow, and laid ourselves down in a row close to one another to keep ourselves warm, piling on the top of us all the blankets available.

Here, we felt relatively safe. Completely worn out, we dropped our loads on the snow and lay down in a row close to each other to stay warm, piling all the available blankets on top of us.


[187]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXXIII

S.E. wind—Hungry and half frozen—Lakes at 18,960 feet above sea-level—Cold food at high altitudes—Buried in snow—Mansing's sufferings—Fuel at last.

At 1 p.m. we woke up, drenched to the skin, the sun having thawed the thick coating of snow over us. This camp was at 18,000 feet. The wind from the S.E. cut like a knife, and we suffered from it, not only on this occasion, but every day during the whole time we were in Tibet. It begins to blow with great fierceness and regularity at one o'clock in the afternoon, and it is only at about eight in the evening that it sometimes abates and gradually ceases. Frequently, however, the wind, instead of dropping at this time, increases in violence, blowing with terrible vehemence during the whole night. As we were making ready to start again, with limbs cramped and stiff, the sky once more became suddenly covered with heavy grey clouds, and fresh snow fell. There was no possibility of making a fire, so we started hungry and half-frozen, following a course of 70° (b.m.). We waded up to our waists through a freezingly cold stream, and climbing steadily higher and higher for six miles, we at last reached another and loftier plateau to the N.E. of the one where we had camped in the morning. The altitude was 18,960 feet, and we were surprised to find four lakes of considerable size close to one another on this high tableland. The sun, breaking for a moment through the clouds, shone on the snow-covered tops of the surrounding mountains, silvering the water of the lakes, and making a beautiful and spectacular picture, wild and fascinating in effect.

At 1 PM we woke up, soaked to the bone, with the sun having melted the thick layer of snow covering us. This camp was at 18,000 feet. The wind from the southeast cut through us like a knife, and we suffered from it not just this time, but every day throughout our stay in Tibet. It starts blowing fiercely and consistently at one o'clock in the afternoon, and it only sometimes dies down around eight in the evening before gradually stopping. Often, though, instead of easing off, the wind picks up even more, howling with ferocity through the entire night. As we were getting ready to move again, our limbs cramped and stiff, the sky suddenly darkened with heavy gray clouds, and fresh snow began to fall. We couldn’t build a fire, so we set off hungry and half-frozen, heading in a direction of 70° (b.m.). We waded through a freezing cold stream that reached up to our waists, and after steadily climbing higher and higher for six miles, we finally reached another, even higher plateau to the northeast of where we had camped that morning. The altitude was 18,960 feet, and we were surprised to find four sizeable lakes close to each other on this elevated tableland. The sun broke through the clouds for a moment, shining on the snow-covered peaks of the surrounding mountains, turning the water of the lakes to silver and creating a stunning and captivating scene that was wild and mesmerizing.

Hunger and exhaustion prevented full appreciation of the scene; nothing could stand in the way of quickly finding a suitable place to rest our weak and jaded bodies, under [188] the shelter of the higher hills round the plateau, or in some depression in the ground. I was anxious to push across the plateau, and descend on the N.E. side to some lower altitude where we should more probably find fuel, but my men, half-starved and fagged, could go no farther. Their wet loads were considerably heavier than usual, they panted terribly owing to the great altitude, and no sooner had we come to a partially sheltered spot between the larger lake and its most eastern neighbouring sheet of water, than they all collapsed and were unable to proceed. I was much concerned about them, as they refused to take any cold food, saying it would cause their death. I was really at a loss to see how they could recover sufficient strength for the next day's marching. Eventually, by personally pledging them that they would not die, I persuaded them to eat a little sato and ghur. Unfortunately, no sooner had they eaten some of it mixed with cold water, than nearly all were seized with violent pains in their stomachs, from which they suffered for the greater part of the night.

Hunger and exhaustion made it hard to fully appreciate the scene; we just needed to find a decent place to rest our tired and weak bodies, either under the shelter of the higher hills around the plateau or in some low spot on the ground. I really wanted to get across the plateau and go down to the N.E. side to a lower area where we might find fuel, but my men, half-starved and drained, couldn’t go any further. Their wet gear was much heavier than usual, they were panting heavily because of the high altitude, and as soon as we reached a somewhat sheltered spot between the larger lake and the eastern neighboring body of water, they all collapsed and couldn’t continue. I was really worried about them because they refused to eat any cold food, claiming it would kill them. I honestly didn’t know how they could get enough strength for the next day's march. Eventually, by assuring them that they wouldn’t die, I convinced them to eat a little sato and ghur. Unfortunately, as soon as they ate some mixed with cold water, nearly all of them were hit with severe stomach pains, which bothered them for most of the night.

There is no doubt that experience had taught them that eating cold food at great altitudes is more dangerous than eating no food at all, and I regretted my ill-timed, if kindly meant advice. One is apt to judge other people by oneself, and personally I never felt any difference, whether my food was cold or hot.

There’s no doubt that experience taught them that eating cold food at high altitudes is riskier than not eating at all, and I regretted my poorly timed, albeit well-intentioned, advice. It’s easy to judge others based on our own experiences, and for me, I never felt any difference whether my food was cold or hot.

Soon after sunset the cold was intense. It was still snowing hard, and our wet garments and blankets were now freezing. I lighted a small spirit lamp, round which we all sat close together, and covered over with our frozen wraps. I even attempted to cook on the flame some concentrated broth, but, owing to the high altitude, the water was a long time losing its chill, apart from boiling, and when it was just getting tepid the flame went out, and I could afford no more spirits of wine to light it again: so the cooking had to be abandoned, and as the night grew colder and colder, we huddled together under our respective blankets in a vain attempt to sleep. We had made a protecting wall with our baggage, and my men covered their heads and everything with their blankets; but I never could adopt their style of sleeping, as it seemed to suffocate me. I always slept with my head uncovered, for not only was it more comfortable, but I wished to be on the alert should we at any time be surprised by Tibetans. My men moaned, groaned, and chattered their teeth convulsively during the night. I woke many times with a bad pain in my ears from frostbite; my eyes, too, suffered as the

Soon after sunset, the cold was intense. It was still snowing heavily, and our wet clothes and blankets were now freezing. I lit a small spirit lamp, and we all huddled around it, covering ourselves with our frozen wraps. I even tried to cook some concentrated broth over the flame, but because of the high altitude, the water took a long time to lose its chill, let alone boil, and just as it was starting to warm up, the flame went out. I couldn't afford any more alcohol to relight it, so I had to give up on cooking. As the night grew colder and colder, we curled up together under our blankets in a futile attempt to sleep. We had built a protective wall with our gear, and my men covered their heads and everything with their blankets, but I could never sleep like that; it felt suffocating to me. I always slept with my head uncovered—not only was it more comfortable, but I wanted to stay alert in case we were surprised by Tibetans. My men moaned, groaned, and chattered their teeth all night. I woke up many times with a bad pain in my ears from frostbite; my eyes also suffered as the

[189]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Buried in Snow

Buried in Snow


[190] eyelashes became covered with icicles. Every time I tried to open them there was an uncomfortable feeling as if the eyelashes were being torn off, for the slit of the eye became fast frozen directly the lids were closed.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] My eyelashes were coated with icicles. Every time I tried to open them, it felt uncomfortable, as if my eyelashes were being ripped off, because the moment my eyelids closed, the opening of my eye froze solid.

At last the morning came! The night had seemed endless. When I tried to raise the blanket in order to sit up, it seemed of an extraordinary weight and stiffness. No wonder! It was frozen hard, and as rigid as cardboard, covered over with a foot of snow. The thermometer during the night had gone down to 24°. I called my men. They were hard to wake, and they, too, were buried in snow.

At last, morning arrived! The night felt like it would never end. When I tried to lift the blanket to sit up, it felt incredibly heavy and stiff. No surprise there! It was frozen solid, as rigid as cardboard, covered with a foot of snow. The thermometer had dropped to 24° during the night. I called out to my men. They were tough to wake up, and they were also buried in snow.

"Uta, uta, uta!" ("Get up, get up, get up!") I called, shaking one by one, and brushing off as much snow as I could.

"Uta, uta, uta!" ("Get up, get up, get up!") I shouted, shaking each one and brushing off as much snow as I could.

"Baroff bahut!" ("There is much snow!") remarked one as he put his nose outside his blanket, and rubbed his eyes, smarting from the white glare around us. "Salaam, sahib," added he, as, having overcome his first surprise, he perceived me, and he waved his hand gracefully up to his forehead.

"Baroff bahut!" ("There's a lot of snow!") said one as he peeked out from his blanket and rubbed his eyes, stinging from the bright whiteness surrounding us. "Salaam, sahib," he added, and after getting over his initial shock, he noticed me and waved his hand politely to his forehead.

The others behaved in a similar manner. Kachi was, as usual, the last one to wake.

The others acted the same way. Kachi was, as always, the last one to wake up.

"O, Kachi," I shouted, "get up!"

"O, Kachi," I shouted, "wake up!"

"O, bahiyoh!" ("O, father!") yawned he, stretching his arms. Half asleep, half awake, he looked round as if in a trance, muttering incoherent words.

"O, bahiyoh!" ("O, father!") he yawned, stretching his arms. Half asleep and half awake, he looked around as if in a trance, mumbling incoherent words.

"Good morning, sir. Oh, much snow. Oh look, sir, two kiangs there! What is 'kiang' in English?"

"Good morning, sir. Wow, there's a lot of snow. Look, sir, there are two kiangs over there! What's 'kiang' in English?"

"Wild horse."

"Mustang."

"'Wild' you spell w-i-l-d?"

"'Wild' is spelled w-i-l-d?"

"Yes."

"Yep."

Here the note-book was produced from under his pillow, and the word registered in it.

Here, the notebook was pulled out from under his pillow, and the word was written down in it.

Odd creatures these Shokas! The average European, half-starved and frozen, would hardly give much thought to exact spelling.

Odd creatures these Shokas! The typical European, half-starved and frozen, would hardly think twice about exact spelling.

Poor Mansing the leper suffered terribly. He groaned through the whole night. I had given him one of my wrappers, but his circulation seemed suspended. His face was grey and cadaverous, with deep lines drawn by suffering, and his feet were so frozen that for some time he could not stand.

Poor Mansing the leper suffered greatly. He groaned all night long. I had given him one of my blankets, but his circulation seemed to have stopped. His face was pale and lifeless, marked by deep lines from suffering, and his feet were so cold that for a while he couldn't stand.

Again the Shokas would eat nothing, for snow was still falling. We started towards the N.E. After a mile of flat we began a steep descent over unpleasant loose débris and [191] sharp rocks. The progress was rapid, but very painful. Scouring the country below with my telescope, I perceived shrubs and lichens far down in the valley to the N.E. and also a tent and some sheep. This was unfortunate, for we had to alter our course in order not to be seen. We again climbed up to the top of the plateau and rounded unperceived the mountain summit, striking a more Easterly route. Towards sunset we began our descent from the latter point, and we crossed the river with no great difficulty. Having selected a nicely sheltered depression in the ground, we pitched my little tente d'abri there, by the side of a pond of melted snow. With natural eagerness, we all set out collecting lichens and shrubs for our fires, and each man carried into camp several loads of the drier fuel. In a moment there were three big fires blazing, and not only were we able to cook a specially abundant dinner and drown our past troubles in a bucketful of boiling tea, but we also managed to dry our clothes and blankets. The relief of this warmth was wonderful, and in our comparative happiness we forgot the hardships and sufferings we had so far encountered. With the exception of a handful of sato, this was the first solid meal we had had for forty-eight hours. In those two days we had travelled twenty miles, each of us carrying a weight averaging considerably over sixty pounds.

Again, the Shokas wouldn't eat anything because snow was still falling. We started moving northeast. After a mile of flat ground, we began a steep descent over loose debris and sharp rocks. We made good progress, but it was really painful. Scanning the area below with my telescope, I spotted shrubs and lichens far down in the valley to the northeast, as well as a tent and some sheep. This was unfortunate because we had to change our course to avoid being seen. We climbed back up to the top of the plateau and went around the mountain summit without being noticed, taking a more easterly route. As the sun began to set, we started our descent from that point and crossed the river without much difficulty. We chose a sheltered spot in the ground and set up my little tent there, next to a pond of melted snow. Eagerly, we all went out to gather lichens and shrubs for our fires, each of us bringing back several loads of dry fuel. Soon, there were three big fires burning, and we were able to cook a big dinner and drown our past troubles in a bucketful of boiling tea, while also drying our clothes and blankets. The relief of that warmth was incredible, and in our relative happiness, we forgot the hardships and suffering we had faced so far. Aside from a handful of sato, this was the first solid meal we had in forty-eight hours. In those two days, we had traveled twenty miles, each carrying a weight that averaged well over sixty pounds.

We were at 16,500 feet, which seemed quite a low elevation after our colder and loftier camping-grounds. The reaction was quite pleasant, and for myself I contemplated our future plans and possibilities with better hope. The outlook had changed from our deepest depression to a condition of comparative cheerfulness and content.

We were at 16,500 feet, which felt pretty low compared to our colder and higher camping spots. The mood was nice, and I personally started thinking about our future plans and opportunities with more optimism. The outlook shifted from our lowest point of sadness to a state of relative happiness and satisfaction.


[192]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXXIV

Dacoits—No nonsense allowed—A much-frequented region—A plateau—The Gyanema-Taklakot track—A dangerous spot—Soldiers waiting for us—Burying our baggage—Out of provisions—A fall into the Gakkon River—A bright idea—Nettles our only diet.

In front of us, to the N.E., was a high mountain, then farther towards the East, a narrow valley between two hill ranges, while at 238° (b.m.) a river passed through a picturesque gorge in the direction of the Mangshan Mountain.

In front of us, to the N.E., was a tall mountain, and further East, a narrow valley between two ranges of hills, while at 238° (b.m.) a river flowed through a scenic gorge leading toward the Mangshan Mountain.

It was necessary for me to proceed along the valley to the east, as we should thus save ourselves much trouble, time and exertion, though there would be some risk of our meeting Tibetans, especially bands of dacoits, with whom this part of Nari Khorsum[18] is infested. We had, therefore, to proceed cautiously, especially as my Shokas seemed no less timid and afraid of these folks. We had hardly gone half a mile over the undulating country, and I had stopped behind my men to take some observations with my prismatic compass, when my carriers suddenly threw themselves flat on the ground and began to retreat, crawling on hands and knees.

I had to move through the valley to the east because it would save us a lot of trouble, time, and effort, even though there was a risk of running into Tibetans, especially groups of bandits, who are known to roam this area of Nari Khorsum[18]. So, we needed to be careful, especially since my Shokas seemed just as scared of these people. We had hardly traveled half a mile over the rolling terrain when I stopped behind my men to take some readings with my prismatic compass, and then my carriers suddenly dropped flat on the ground and started to crawl away on their hands and knees.

"Dakus, Dakus!" ("Brigands, brigands!") they whispered, as I got near them.

"Dakus, Dakus!" ("Brigands, brigands!") they whispered, as I got close to them.

It was too late. We had been seen, and a number of dacoits, armed with matchlocks and swords, came rapidly towards us. It has always been my experience that, in such cases, the worst thing to do is to run away, for nothing encourages a man more than to see that his opponent is afraid of him. I therefore loaded my Mannlicher, and my bearer did likewise with the Martini-Henry. I gave orders to the Shokas to squat down by their respective loads and not stir an inch. We two strolled towards the fast [193] approaching band, now less than a hundred yards distant. I shouted to them to stop, and Chanden Sing signalled that they must go back; but they took no notice of our warnings, and came on all the faster towards us. Undoubtedly they thought that we were only Shoka traders, and looked, from experience, to find an easy prey. Making ready to rush us as soon as they got near enough, they separated with the obvious intention of taking us on all sides.

It was too late. We had been spotted, and a group of bandits, armed with matchlocks and swords, rushed towards us. From my experience, the worst thing you can do in situations like this is to run away, as nothing boosts a man's confidence more than seeing his opponent afraid. So, I loaded my Mannlicher, and my bearer did the same with the Martini-Henry. I instructed the Shokas to crouch by their respective loads and not move. We walked towards the approaching group, now less than a hundred yards away. I shouted for them to stop, and Chanden Sing signaled for them to turn back; but they ignored our warnings and came on even faster. They surely thought we were just Shoka traders, believing, based on past experiences, that we would be easy targets. Preparing to charge us as soon as they got close enough, they split up with the clear intention of surrounding us.

Sheep Carrying Load

Sheep Carrying Load


"Dushu! Dushu!" ("Go back!") I cried angrily at them, raising my rifle to my shoulder and taking a steady aim at the leader. Chanden Sing followed suit with one of the others, and this seemed to have a salutary effect on them, for they immediately made a comical salaam and took to their heels, Chanden Sing and I pursuing them for some distance so as to get them well out of our way. Having occupied a prominent position on a small mound, we discovered that a short way off they had a number of mates and some three thousand sheep, presumably their last loot. We signalled that they must get away from our course, and eventually, driving their booty before them, they scurried off in the direction I indicated. When they were well clear of us, and my Shokas, who thought their last hour had come, had partly recovered from their fright, we proceeded on our journey, entering the narrow valley between the two hill ranges. That we were now in a much-frequented region could be plainly seen from the numerous encamping-grounds [194] alongside the stream. But our success of the morning had raised our spirits, and we stepped out cheerily, keeping to the left bank. A steepish climb brought us to a plateau at an altitude of 16,400 feet, from which we obtained a fine view of the snow range running from East to West from the Mangshan Mountain to the Lippu Pass, and beyond to the N.E. the four lofty peaks of Nimo Nangil, 25,360 feet, 22,200 feet, 22,850 feet, 22,670 feet. The highest peaks were at 84°, 92°, 117° (b.m.). This plateau sloped gently, and was broken by many deep crevasses, conveying the water-flow down into the Gakkon River.

"Dushu! Dushu!" ("Go back!") I shouted angrily at them, raising my rifle to my shoulder and taking careful aim at the leader. Chanden Sing did the same with one of the others, and this seemed to have a positive effect on them, as they quickly made a comical salaam and took off running. Chanden Sing and I chased them for a bit to make sure they were far enough away. From our spot on a small mound, we noticed that not far off, they had a bunch of companions and about three thousand sheep, likely their last haul. We signaled for them to move away from our path, and eventually, pushing their goods ahead of them, they scampered in the direction I pointed. Once they were out of our way, and my Shokas, who thought they were done for, had calmed down a bit, we continued on our journey, entering the narrow valley between the two hill ranges. It was clear we were in a busy area, as seen from the many camping spots alongside the stream. However, our success that morning lifted our spirits, and we moved forward cheerfully, sticking to the left bank. A steep climb brought us to a plateau at 16,400 feet, where we got a great view of the snow range stretching from East to West from Mangshan Mountain to Lippu Pass, and beyond to the Northeast, the four tall peaks of Nimo Nangil at 25,360 feet, 22,200 feet, 22,850 feet, and 22,670 feet. The highest peaks were at 84°, 92°, and 117° (b.m.). This plateau sloped gently and was marked by many deep crevasses that directed the water flow down into the Gakkon River.

On the lower portion of this plateau, and then along the course of the river, a track ran from Gyanema to Taklakot viâ Kardam and Dogmar, and another seldom-frequented track to Mangshan, S.S.W. of this place. The edge of the plateau was 15,800 feet above sea-level, and the river 550 feet lower.

On the lower part of this plateau, and then along the river, there was a path that went from Gyanema to Taklakot via Kardam and Dogmar, along with another rarely used path to Mangshan, southwest of this area. The edge of the plateau was 15,800 feet above sea level, and the river was 550 feet lower.

This was for us a very dangerous spot, since, no doubt, by this time the Tibetans must be aware that I had escaped and was well on my way into their country. I knew that soldiers and spies must be guarding all the tracks and searching for us. This thoroughfare, being more frequented than the others, was all the more insecure, and we had to display great caution in order to avoid detection. In Tibet, I may here note, the atmosphere is so clear that moving objects can be plainly seen at exceptionally long distances. I scoured the country with my telescope, but I could see no one, so we went on. However, my men considered it safer to descend into one of the numerous creeks, where we should be less exposed, but we had hardly reached the border of it when we heard noises rising from the valley below.

This was a very dangerous spot for us because the Tibetans must have realized by now that I had escaped and was making my way into their territory. I knew that soldiers and spies were likely guarding all the paths and searching for us. This route, being busier than the others, was even less secure, so we had to be extremely cautious to avoid being seen. In Tibet, it’s worth mentioning, the air is so clear that moving objects can be seen from very long distances. I scanned the area with my telescope, but I saw no one, so we continued on. However, my men thought it would be safer to descend into one of the many creeks, where we would be less exposed, but we had barely reached the edge when we heard noises coming from the valley below.

Crawling on our stomachs, my bearer and I peeped over the edge of the plateau. Some five hundred feet below was a Tibetan encampment, with a number of yaks and ponies grazing. Unnoticed, I watched them for some time. There were several soldiers, most probably posted there on the look-out for me. With my glass I recognised some of the Gyanema men. We deemed it advisable to find a spot where we could hide until night came. Then, making a détour, we descended to the river, 15,250 feet, scrambled across in the dark, and made our way up a narrow gorge between high cliffs until we came to a well-hidden spot, where I called a halt. Followed by my men, I climbed up from rock to rock on the cliff to our left, and found a small natural platform, sheltered by a huge boulder projecting

Crawling on our stomachs, my companion and I peeked over the edge of the plateau. About five hundred feet below was a Tibetan campsite, with several yaks and ponies grazing. I watched them unnoticed for a while. There were a few soldiers, probably stationed there to look out for me. With my binoculars, I recognized some of the Gyanema men. We thought it would be best to find a place to hide until nightfall. Then, taking a detour, we climbed down to the river, at 15,250 feet, crossed in the dark, and made our way up a narrow gorge between tall cliffs until we reached a concealed spot where I decided to stop. Followed by my men, I climbed up from rock to rock on the cliff to our left and found a small natural platform, sheltered by a large boulder sticking out.

[195]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Dacoits with a Booty of Sheep

Dacoits with a Haul of Sheep


[196] over it. This seemed a safe enough spot for us to stop. We dared not put up a tent, and we took the precaution of burying all our baggage in case of a surprise during the night. Unhampered, we should at any moment be able to hide ourselves away from our pursuers or run before them, and we could always come back afterwards for our things if an opportunity offered itself.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] over it. This seemed like a safe enough place for us to stop. We didn't dare set up a tent, so we buried all our belongings just in case we were surprised during the night. Without any baggage weighing us down, we could quickly hide from our pursuers or escape if we needed to, and we could always return later for our stuff if the chance arose.

And now, just as everything seemed to be running smoothly, I made a terrible discovery. At this stage of the journey, when it was important for me to move very rapidly, I found that we were out of provisions. This was indeed an unpleasant surprise, for before leaving the larger body of my expedition I had given orders to my men to take food for ten days. The doctor, who had been deputed to see to this, had assured me that the loads contained quite enough to last us over that length of time, and now for some unaccountable reason we had only sufficient food for one meagre meal. Moreover, I discovered that we had only a few grains of salt left.

And now, just when everything seemed to be going well, I made a terrible discovery. At this point in the journey, when it was crucial for me to move quickly, I realized we were out of supplies. This was a really unpleasant surprise because, before leaving the larger part of my expedition, I had instructed my men to bring enough food for ten days. The doctor, who was responsible for this, had assured me that the loads held enough to last us that long, and now, for some unknown reason, we only had enough food for one small meal. On top of that, I found we had only a few grains of salt left.

"What have you done with it?" I inquired angrily, as it immediately flashed across my mind that there had been foul play among my carriers. I had ordered each man to take half seer (1 lb.) of salt.

"What did you do with it?" I asked angrily, as it suddenly hit me that something shady had happened with my carriers. I had instructed each man to carry half a seer (1 lb.) of salt.

"Yes, sahib, but we forgot to take it," said the men in a chorus.

"Yes, sir, but we forgot to take it," said the men in unison.

After the terrible hardships and fatigue we had gone through, and the anxiety and difficulty of carrying on my surveying, photography, sketching, writing, collecting, &c., under conditions of unusual discomfort and risk, it was, indeed, a hard blow to me to see all my plans thus unexpectedly frustrated, for we were still three or four days' journey from Mansarowar, where I relied on getting fresh supplies. Having come thus far, should I be compelled now to go back or give in, and be captured by the Tibetan soldiers whom I had so successfully evaded? Though not usually much affected by physical pain, I unfortunately suffer greatly under any mental stress. I felt quite ill and depressed, and, to add bodily discomfort to my moral sufferings, came the fact that I had slipped, while jumping in semi-darkness from stone to stone across the Gakkon River, and had fallen flat into about four feet of water. The wind was very high at the time, and the thermometer down to 26°, so that, sitting in my wet clothes to discuss our present situation with my men, I suddenly became so cold, shivery and exhausted, that I thought I was about to collapse altogether. My usual good spirits, which had done much towards [197] carrying me so far, seemed extinguished; my strength failed me entirely, and a high fever set in, increasing in violence so fast that, notwithstanding my desperate struggle not to give in, I became almost delirious. With my teeth chattering and my temperature at its highest, I saw all my troubles assume an exaggerated form, and failure seemed inevitable. The more I ransacked my brain the more hopeless seemed our position, until, when I was almost in despair, an expedient suddenly flashed across my mind; an idea more adapted for romance perhaps than real life, yet not, I hoped, impossible to be carried into execution. Four of my men should go disguised, two as traders and two as beggars, into the Takla[19] fort, and purchase food from my enemies. We remaining in camp would, in the meantime, keep well hidden until they returned. I spoke to my followers, and after some easily conceivable reluctance, four Shokas undertook to perform, the daring duty. Discovery would mean to them the loss of their heads, probably preceded by cruel tortures of all kinds; so, though they eventually betrayed me, I cannot help giving them credit for the pluck and fidelity they displayed in the present emergency.

After all the terrible hardships and fatigue we had gone through, along with the stress and difficulty of managing my surveying, photography, sketching, writing, collecting, etc., under such uncomfortable and risky conditions, it was really upsetting to see all my plans unexpectedly fall apart, especially since we were still three or four days' journey from Mansarowar, where I was counting on getting fresh supplies. Having come this far, should I really have to turn back or give up and get caught by the Tibetan soldiers I had managed to evade? While I usually don’t get affected much by physical pain, I unfortunately suffer a lot from mental stress. I felt quite sick and down, and to make matters worse, I slipped while jumping in the dim light from stone to stone across the Gakkon River and fell flat into about four feet of water. The wind was really strong at the time, and the temperature had dropped to 26°, so as I sat in my wet clothes discussing our situation with my team, I suddenly became so cold, shivery, and exhausted that I felt like I was going to collapse. My usual good spirits, which had helped me get this far, seemed gone; I completely lost my strength, and a high fever set in, getting so intense so quickly that, despite my desperate efforts to hang on, I became almost delirious. With my teeth chattering and my temperature at its peak, I saw all my troubles in a distorted way, and failure felt inevitable. The more I searched my mind, the more hopeless our situation seemed, until, when I was almost in despair, an idea suddenly popped into my head; one that seemed more suited for a story than real life, but I hoped it wasn't impossible to pull off. Four of my men would disguise themselves, two as traders and two as beggars, and go into the Takla[19] fort to buy food from my enemies. Meanwhile, we would stay hidden in camp until they returned. I talked to my followers, and despite their understandable reluctance, four Shokas agreed to take on the risky task. If discovered, it would cost them their lives, likely after enduring terrible tortures; so even though they eventually betrayed me, I can’t help but admire the courage and loyalty they showed in this difficult situation.

During the night my men were extremely good to me. We did not sleep for fear of being surprised by the Tibetan soldiers, and we passed hour after hour listening to Shoka stories of brigands and Tibetan tortures, terrible enough not only to keep us awake, but to make every hair on our heads stand on end. Early in the morning, when it grew light, we gathered a quantity of nettles, which were to be found in profusion at this camp, and having boiled them in different fashions, we made of them a hearty if not an appetising meal. They did not seem very unpalatable at the time, only it was unfortunate that we had no more salt, for that would have added to the digestibility of our prickly diet. We supplied the deficiency by mixing with them a double quantity of pepper, and it was a relief to know that, while nettles existed near our camp, we should at least not die of starvation.

During the night, my men were incredibly kind to me. We didn't sleep because we were afraid of being caught off guard by the Tibetan soldiers, and we spent hour after hour listening to Shoka's stories about bandits and horrifying Tibetan punishments, which were terrifying enough to keep us awake and make our hair stand on end. Early in the morning, as it got light, we gathered a bunch of nettles that were plentiful at this camp, and after boiling them in various ways, we made a hearty if not very appetizing meal. They didn’t taste too bad at the time; it was just unfortunate that we didn’t have any more salt, as that would have made our prickly meal easier to eat. We made up for the lack of salt by adding double the amount of pepper, and it was a relief to know that as long as we had nettles nearby, we wouldn’t starve.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[18] Nari Khorsum—name of that province.

[18] Nari Khorsum—the name of that province.

[19] Takla-khar or Taklak t = Takla fort.

Takla-khar or Taklak t = Takla fort.


[198]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXXV

All that remained of my men's provisions—The plan to enter the fort—Appearance of yaks—A band of brigands—Erecting fortifications—Changes in the temperature—Soldiers in search of us!

The food supply for my men was now reduced in all to four pounds of flour, two pounds of rice, and two pounds of sato. This we gave to the four men who were to attempt to enter Taklakot, for their road would be long and fatiguing. For us, there were plenty of nettles to fall back upon.

The food supply for my men was now down to four pounds of flour, two pounds of rice, and two pounds of sato. We gave this to the four men who were going to try to enter Taklakot, since their journey would be long and tiring. For us, there were plenty of nettles to rely on.

I carefully instructed the four Shokas how to enter the Tibetan fort one by one in their disguises, and purchase, in small quantities at a time, the provisions we required. When a sufficient amount was obtained to make a load, a man should immediately start towards our camp, and the others were to follow separately for a few marches, when at a given spot, they would all four meet again and return to us. It was exciting work to prepare the different disguises and arrange for everything, and at last, after repeated good-byes and words of encouragement, the four messengers left on their perilous errand. All seemed very quiet round us, so quiet that I unburied my sextant and artificial horizon, and was taking observations for longitude as well as for latitude (by double altitudes, as the angle was too great to be measured at noon), when, to our dismay, a herd consisting of over a hundred yaks appeared on the pass, North of our camp, and slowly advanced towards us. Were we discovered? Were the Tarjum's men coming, preceded by their animals? No time was to be lost; instruments and blankets were quickly cleared away and hidden, and then, crawling up towards the animals, who had stopped on perceiving us, we threw stones at them in order to drive them down the next

I carefully instructed the four Shokas on how to enter the Tibetan fort one by one in their disguises and to purchase the supplies we needed in small amounts. Once they had gathered enough to make a load, one of them would head straight back to our camp, while the others would follow separately for a few marches. At a predetermined location, they would all meet up again and return to us. It was thrilling to prepare the various disguises and arrange everything. Finally, after several goodbyes and words of encouragement, the four messengers set out on their risky mission. Everything around us felt very calm, so calm that I dug out my sextant and artificial horizon to take readings for both longitude and latitude (using double altitudes since the angle was too steep to measure at noon). To our shock, a herd of over a hundred yaks suddenly appeared on the pass north of our camp and slowly started moving toward us. Had we been discovered? Were the Tarjum's men coming, followed by their animals? There was no time to waste; we quickly packed away our instruments and blankets and then crawled toward the animals, which had stopped when they noticed us. We threw stones at them to drive them down the next

[199]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Behind our Bulwarks

Behind our defenses


[200] creek. As luck would have it, we were just in time to do this, for from our hiding-place on the summit of the pass we could see, on the other side, a number of Tibetans following the yaks we had driven away. They passed only a couple of hundred yards below us, evidently quite unconscious of our presence. They were singing, and apparently looking for somebody's tracks, for they often stooped to examine the ground. Later in the afternoon I went to reconnoitre down the Gyanema road, and in the hope of watching, unseen, the Tibetans who passed on their way to and from Taklakot. I saw no soldiers, but a strong band of Jogpas (brigands), driving before them thousands of sheep and yaks, was an interesting sight. They all rode ponies, and seemed to obey their leader very smartly, when in a hoarse voice, and never ceasing to turn his prayer-wheel, he muttered orders. They went briskly along in fine style, women as well as men riding their ponies astride. The men had matchlocks and swords, and each pony carried, besides its rider, bags of food slung behind the saddle. I watched the long procession from behind some rocks, and felt somewhat relieved when the last horsemen, who passed only some twenty yards from me, rode away with the rest of the caravan. I retraced my steps, and judging that this camp was not quite so safe as I had at first supposed, I proceeded, with the aid of my men, to erect a rough entrenchment and wall round our platform, along the rock under which we lived. These bulwarks answered the double purpose of sheltering us from the sight of the Tibetans and of acting as fortifications in case of a night attack. All our things were buried a little way above our camp.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] creek. Fortunately, we arrived just in time for this, as from our hiding spot at the top of the pass, we could see several Tibetans on the other side following the yaks we had driven off. They passed just a couple of hundred yards below us, completely unaware of our presence. They were singing and seemed to be searching for someone’s tracks, often stopping to look at the ground. Later in the afternoon, I went to scout down the Gyanema road, hoping to watch the Tibetans pass by on their way to and from Taklakot without being seen. I didn’t see any soldiers, but a large group of Jogpas (bandits) herding thousands of sheep and yaks was an interesting sight. They all rode ponies and appeared to follow their leader’s commands promptly, who, in a raspy voice and never ceasing to turn his prayer wheel, muttered orders. They moved quickly and confidently, with both men and women riding their ponies. The men carried matchlocks and swords, and each pony had bags of food strapped behind the saddle. I observed the long line from behind some rocks, feeling a bit relieved when the last horseman passed only about twenty yards from me and joined the rest of the caravan. I retraced my steps, realizing that this camp wasn't as safe as I initially thought, so with the help of my men, I started building a makeshift fortification around our platform under the rock where we stayed. These barriers served to shield us from the Tibetans' view and provided protection in case of a nighttime attack. All our belongings were buried a bit above our camp.

Another long dreary day had elapsed. We had used our last grain of salt; and yet another day on nettles alone; and a third day and a fourth, on the same diet! How sick we got of nettles! The days seemed endless as, lying flat on a peak above our camp, I remained hour after hour scanning with my telescope the long plateau above the Gakkon River in search of our returning messengers. Every time I perceived men in the distance my heart leaped, but on focussing them with my glass they turned out to be Jogpas (bandits), or Dogpas (nomad tribes of smugglers), or travelling Humlis or Jumlis, on their way to Gyanema and Gartok. And how many times did we not listen and then anxiously peep through the fissures in our fortifications when some unusual noise struck our ears! As time went on, and they did not put in an appearance, we [201] began to entertain doubts as to their safety, or would they betray us and never return? Or, as was more likely, had they been caught by the Jong Pen (the master of the fort), and been imprisoned and tortured?

Another long, dreary day had passed. We had used up our last grain of salt, and it was yet another day of just eating nettles. Then a third day, and a fourth, stuck on the same diet! We were so tired of nettles! The days felt endless as I lay flat on a peak above our camp, spending hour after hour scanning the long plateau above the Gakkon River with my telescope, hoping to spot our returning messengers. Each time I saw men in the distance, my heart raced, but when I focused the lens on them, they turned out to be Jogpas (bandits), or Dogpas (nomadic smugglers), or travelers from Humla or Jumla heading to Gyanema and Gartok. How many times did we strain to listen and anxiously peek through the gaps in our defenses when we heard some unusual noise? As time went by without any sign of them, we started to worry about their safety. Would they betray us and never come back? Or, more likely, had they been caught by the Jong Pen (the master of the fort), imprisoned, or even tortured?

My bearer, who was somewhat of a bon vivant, declined to eat any more food, as he said it was better not to eat at all than to eat the same thing constantly. He swore he could fast for ten days, and he made up for want of food by sleeping.

My helper, who loved the good life, refused to eat any more food, saying it was better not to eat at all than to eat the same thing all the time. He claimed he could go without food for ten days, and he made up for the lack of food by sleeping.

My fortified abode was comfortable enough during the morning, when the sun shone on it, though often it got so warm that we had to abandon it in the middle of the day, when the thermometer registered as much as 120°, 122°, and even 124°. From 1 p.m. till 10 at night a bitter wind blew from the S.E., and seemed to get right into our bones; so cold was it that the temperature suddenly dropped down to 60°, and even lower, the moment the sun disappeared behind the mountains, and continued to fall as low as 40°, 34° and 32°; the minimum during the night. One night we had a terrible gale and a snowstorm. Such was the force of the wind, that our wall was blown down upon us as we slept in its shelter, and the hours we had dedicated to rest had to be spent in repairing the damage done. On the following morning we were gathering nettles for our meal, when we heard the distant tinkling of fast approaching horse-bells. We quickly put out the fires, hid our things, and hastened behind our entrenchment. I seized my rifle; Chanden Sing loaded the Martini. A Shoka, who was too far off to reach our fortified abode in time, screened himself behind some rocks. In the nick of time! Half-a-dozen sepoys with matchlocks, to which were attached red flags, slung over their shoulders, were cantering gaily up the hillside only a few yards in front of us. They were undoubtedly searching for me, judging by the way they looked in every direction, but fortunately they never turned towards the castle walls that concealed us. They were expecting, I presumed, to see a large European tent in one of the valleys, and never even dreamt that we should be where we were. We covered them well with our rifles, but we had no occasion to fire. They rode on, and the sound of their horse-bells grew fainter and fainter as they disappeared behind the pass. To be sure these horsemen could only be soldiers despatched by the Tarjum to guard this track. They were now probably on their way back to him, satisfied that the sahib was not to be found in that part of the country.

My fortified home was cozy enough in the morning when the sun was shining on it, though it often got so hot that we had to leave it in the middle of the day when the temperature reached as high as 120°, 122°, and even 124°. From 1 PM until 10 at night, a bitter wind blew in from the southeast, cutting through us; it was so cold that the temperature suddenly dropped to 60° and even lower as soon as the sun went down behind the mountains, continuing to fall as low as 40°, 34°, and 32°; that was the minimum during the night. One night, we experienced a terrible gale and a snowstorm. The wind was so strong that our wall collapsed on us while we slept under its shelter, and the hours we had planned for rest had to be spent repairing the damage. The next morning, while we were gathering nettles for our meal, we heard the distant sound of horse-bells approaching quickly. We quickly put out the fires, hid our belongings, and ran behind our makeshift fortifications. I grabbed my rifle; Chanden Sing loaded the Martini. A Shoka, who was too far away to reach our fortified home in time, took cover behind some rocks. Just in time! A half-dozen sepoys with matchlocks and red flags slung over their shoulders were riding up the hillside just a few yards in front of us. They were clearly looking for me, given how they scanned the area, but luckily they never looked toward the castle walls that hid us. I figured they were expecting to see a large European tent in one of the valleys and never imagined we would be where we were. We had them well covered with our rifles, but we didn't need to fire. They rode off, and the sound of their horse-bells faded as they disappeared into the pass. These horsemen were surely soldiers sent by the Tarjum to guard this route. They were likely on their way back to him, satisfied that the sahib was not to be found in that area.


[202]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXXVI

"Terror Camp"—Two more messengers leave camp—A tribe of Dogpas—A strange sahib—Our messengers return from Taklakot—The account and adventures of their mission—In great distress—Two fakirs who suffered through me—Five hundred rupees offered for my head—The Shokas want to abandon me—A plot—How it failed.

We named this spot "Terror Camp," for many and horrible were the experiences that befell us here. Another weary day dragged slowly to its close, and there was still no sign of the messengers' return. Two men volunteered to go into Kardam, a settlement some miles off, and try to obtain food from the Tibetans. One of them had a friend at this place, and he thought he could get from him sufficient provisions to enable us to go on a few days longer.

We called this place "Terror Camp" because we had many awful experiences here. Another exhausting day slowly came to an end, and there was still no sign of the messengers coming back. Two men offered to head into Kardam, a settlement a few miles away, to try and get food from the Tibetans. One of them had a friend in the area and thought he could get enough supplies from him to help us keep going for a few more days.

They started, disguised as pilgrims, a disguise not difficult to assume, for their clothes were falling to pieces owing to the rough marching we had done of late. They were away the whole day, and only returned late at night, having an amusing tale to tell. Meeting a tribe of Dogpas, they had boldly entered their camp, asking to purchase food. Unfortunately the Dogpas had not sufficient for themselves, and could not spare any. Incidentally my men were informed that Lando Plenki—the name the Tibetans had given me—had taken a large army of men into Tibet, and that great excitement prevailed at Taklakot as well as at other places, owing to the fact that the sahib had the extraordinary power of making himself invisible when the Tibetan soldiers were in his vicinity. He had been reported as having been seen in many places in Tibet: soldiers had been despatched in all directions to capture him. His tracks had several times been discovered and followed, and yet he could never be found. Messengers [203] had been hastily sent out from Taklakot to Lhassa (sixteen days' journey), and to Gartok, a great bazaar in West Tibet, asking for soldiers to assist in the capture of this strange invader, who was also said to have the power of walking on the water when crossing the rivers, and of flying over mountains when he chose. When I recalled our struggles and sufferings in climbing over the mountains, and in crossing the streams on our journey, this account of myself given by the Tibetans, and now repeated to me, struck me as almost cruelly ironical. Anyhow, I was pleased that the Tibetans credited me with such supernatural powers, for it could hardly fail to be an advantage in keeping them from getting to too close quarters with us.

They set out disguised as pilgrims, which wasn't hard to pull off since their clothes were falling apart from all the rough marching we had done lately. They were gone all day and returned late at night with a funny story to share. They had boldly entered a Dogpa camp and asked to buy food, but unfortunately, the Dogpas didn't have enough for themselves and couldn't share any. My men learned that Lando Plenki—the name the Tibetans had given me—had brought a large army into Tibet, and there was a lot of excitement in Taklakot and other areas because the sahib had the incredible ability to make himself invisible when the Tibetan soldiers were nearby. He had been spotted in various places throughout Tibet; soldiers had been sent out in all directions to catch him. His tracks were often found and followed, but he was never captured. Messengers had been quickly dispatched from Taklakot to Lhassa (a journey of sixteen days) and to Gartok, a major market in West Tibet, requesting soldiers to help capture this strange intruder, who was also said to walk on water when crossing rivers and fly over mountains whenever he wanted. When I thought about our struggles and hardships climbing the mountains and crossing streams, this account of myself shared by the Tibetans felt almost cruelly ironic. Still, I was glad the Tibetans believed I had such supernatural powers, as it could only help keep them from getting too close to us.

Three more days had to be spent in a state of painful uncertainty and anxiety regarding the fate of our messengers to Taklakot. On the night of the 3rd we had retired to our fortress in despair, fearing that they had been captured and probably beheaded. It was 10 p.m., and we were worn out and ready to turn in; our fire down below at the bottom of the creek was slowly dying out, and nature around us was still and silent, when I suddenly heard sounds of approaching steps. We listened, peeping through the fissures in our wall. Were these Tibetans trying to surprise us in our sleep, or could they be our men returning at last?

Three more days had to be spent in a state of painful uncertainty and anxiety about the fate of our messengers to Taklakot. On the night of the 3rd, we had retreated to our fortress in despair, fearing that they had been captured and probably executed. It was 10 PM, and we were exhausted and ready to go to bed; our fire down below at the bottom of the creek was slowly dying out, and the nature around us was still and quiet, when I suddenly heard the sounds of approaching footsteps. We listened, peeking through the gaps in our wall. Were these Tibetans trying to catch us off guard while we slept, or could they be our men finally returning?

We closely watched the gorge from which the sounds came, faint sounds of voices and of footsteps. Silent as we were, there were not wanting signs of the nervous excitement of my men. At last four staggering figures crawled cautiously into camp, and we could not even then discern in the dim light whether these were our messengers or not.

We carefully observed the gorge from where the sounds were coming, faint voices and footsteps. Even though we were silent, there were clear signs of my men’s nervous excitement. Finally, four unsteady figures crawled slowly into camp, and even then, we couldn't tell in the dim light if they were our messengers or not.

"Kuan hai?" ("Who is there?") I shouted.

"Kuan hai?" ("Who is there?") I yelled.

"Dola!" replied a voice, and instantly we gave them a joyful and hearty greeting. But our happiness was not to last long. The men did not respond. They seemed quite exhausted, and apparently terrified. I asked them to explain the cause of their distress, but, sobbing and embracing my feet, they showed great disinclination to tell me. Grave, indeed, was the news they brought, presaging much trouble in store.

"Dola!" replied a voice, and immediately we greeted them with joy and enthusiasm. But our happiness didn't last long. The men didn’t respond. They looked completely worn out and seemed really scared. I asked them to explain what was wrong, but while crying and holding onto my feet, they were very reluctant to tell me. The news they brought was serious, indicating a lot of trouble ahead.

"Your days are numbered, sahib," at last cried Dola. "It is impossible for you to get out of this country alive ... they will kill you, and the Jong Pen of Taklakot says that he must have your head at all costs."

"Your days are numbered, sir," Dola finally shouted. "It’s impossible for you to leave this country alive... they will kill you, and the Jong Pen of Taklakot says he has to have your head at all costs."

[204] "Do not look so far ahead, Dola," I replied, trying to calm him, "but tell me first how you reached Taklakot."

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] "Don't think so far ahead, Dola," I said, trying to soothe him, "but first tell me how you got to Taklakot."

"Oh, sahib, we followed your plan. We suffered much on the road, as the marches were long and severe, and we had very little food. We walked day and night for two days, keeping away from the track, and hiding whenever we saw any one. When we got near the Tibetan fort, we saw at the foot of the hill a few tents of the Tinker and Chongur Shokas from Nepal. None of the Biassi or Chaudassi Shokas had been allowed to enter Tibet owing to the Jong Pen's anger with them regarding his claims for land revenue. There was a guard day and night at the river, and a sharp look-out was kept to stop and arrest anybody entering the country. Two fakirs, who were on a pilgrimage to the sacred Mansarowar, unaware of the danger, had crossed over the Lippu Pass, and had proceeded down to Taklakot, where they were immediately seized and accused of being you, sahib, in disguise. As the Tibetans were not quite certain as to which of the two was the real sahib, they severely punished both, beating them almost to death. What became of them afterwards we were unable to learn. Anyhow, the Tibetans subsequently found out that you had entered Tibet by another pass, and soldiers have been sent in every direction to look for you.

"Oh, sir, we followed your plan. We endured a lot on the journey because the marches were long and tough, and we barely had any food. We walked day and night for two days, staying off the path and hiding whenever we saw anyone. When we got close to the Tibetan fort, we spotted a few tents belonging to the Tinker and Chongur Shokas from Nepal at the foot of the hill. None of the Biassi or Chaudassi Shokas were allowed to enter Tibet due to the Jong Pen's anger at them over his land revenue claims. There was a guard 24/7 at the river, keeping a sharp lookout to stop and arrest anyone trying to enter the country. Two fakirs, who were on a pilgrimage to the holy Mansarowar, crossed the Lippu Pass without realizing the danger and went down to Taklakot, where they were immediately captured and accused of being you, sir, in disguise. Since the Tibetans weren't sure which of the two was the real sir, they severely punished both, beating them nearly to death. We couldn't find out what happened to them afterward. In any case, the Tibetans later discovered you had entered Tibet through another pass, and soldiers have been dispatched in all directions to search for you."

"No sooner did we appear at Taklakot," sobbed Dola, "than we were pounced upon, knocked about, and arrested. They cross-examined us closely. We professed to be Johari traders, who had run short of food, and had made for Taklakot to buy provisions. They beat us and treated us badly, until your friend Zeniram, the head village man of Chongur (in Nepal), came to our rescue and gave thirty rupees surety for us. We were then allowed to remain in his tent, guarded by Tibetan soldiers. We secretly purchased from him and packed the provisions, and at night Zeniram succeeded in decoying the soldiers that were guarding us into his tent, and gave them chökti to drink until they became intoxicated. One by one we four succeeded in escaping with our loads. For three nights we marched steadily back, concealing ourselves during the day for the sake of safety. Now we have returned to you, sahib."

"No sooner did we arrive at Taklakot," Dola cried, "than we were jumped on, pushed around, and arrested. They grilled us closely. We claimed to be Johari traders who had run out of food and had come to Taklakot to buy supplies. They beat us and treated us poorly until your friend Zeniram, the headman of Chongur (in Nepal), came to help us and put down thirty rupees as surety for us. We were then allowed to stay in his tent, watched over by Tibetan soldiers. We secretly bought provisions from him and packed them, and at night, Zeniram managed to lure the soldiers guarding us into his tent and got them to drink chökti until they were drunk. One by one, the four of us managed to escape with our loads. For three nights, we marched steadily back, hiding during the day for safety. Now we have returned to you, sahib."

Dola paused for a minute or two.

Dola paused for a minute or two.

"Sahib," he continued, "we were told in Taklakot that over a thousand soldiers are searching for you everywhere, and more are expected from Lhassa and Sigatz,[20] whither [205] the Jong Pen has hastily sent messengers. They fear you, sahib, but they have orders from Lhassa to capture you at all costs. They say that you can make yourself invisible when you like, and exorcisms are made and prayers offered daily, so that in future you may be seen and arrested. Once caught, they will have no pity on you, and you will be beheaded, for the Jong Pen is angry with you owing to the defiant messages you sent him from Garbyang. He has given orders to the soldiers to bring you back dead or alive, and whoever brings your head will receive a reward of 500 rupees."

"Sahib," he continued, "we heard in Taklakot that over a thousand soldiers are searching for you everywhere, and more are expected from Lhassa and Sigatz,[20] where [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] the Jong Pen has quickly sent messengers. They fear you, sahib, but they have orders from Lhassa to capture you at all costs. They claim you can make yourself invisible whenever you want, and exorcisms are performed and prayers said daily so that you may be seen and arrested in the future. Once caught, they will show you no mercy, and you will be beheaded, as the Jong Pen is angry with you for the defiant messages you sent him from Garbyang. He has ordered the soldiers to bring you back, dead or alive, and whoever brings your head will receive a reward of 500 rupees."

"I had no idea that my head was so valuable," I could not help exclaiming. "I shall take great care of it in the future."

"I had no idea my head was so valuable," I couldn't help but exclaim. "I'll take great care of it from now on."

As a matter of fact 500 rupees in Tibet represents a fortune, and the man possessing it is a very rich man.

Actually, 500 rupees in Tibet is a fortune, and the person who has it is extremely wealthy.

But my men were not in a laughing mood and they looked upon the whole affair as very serious.

But my guys weren't in a joking mood, and they viewed the whole situation as pretty serious.

I gave a handsome backshish to the four men who had brought the provisions, but that did not prevent all the Shokas declaring that the danger was so great that they must leave me there and then. Appeals are useless on such occasions, and so I simply stated that I should shoot any man attempting to leave camp. Having now provisions for ten days, I informed them that we must at once push on.

I gave a generous tip to the four men who brought the supplies, but that didn’t stop all the Shokas from saying that the danger was so severe that they had to leave immediately. Pleas are pointless in situations like this, so I just said that I would shoot anyone trying to leave the camp. Now that we had enough supplies for ten days, I told them we needed to move forward right away.

Sulky and grumbling they left our fortified corner and went below to the creek. They said they preferred sleeping down there. I suspected them, however, and I sat up watching them and listening instead of sleeping. My bearer rolled himself up in his blanket and, as usual, was soon asleep. The Shokas lighted a fire, sat round it, and with their heads close together, held an excited council in semi-whispers. In the heated discussion some spoke louder than they imagined, and the night being particularly still and the place well adapted for carrying sound, I overheard words which put me on the alert, for I soon convinced myself that they were arranging to sell my head ... yes ... and to divide the money.

Sulking and complaining, they left our secure spot and headed down to the creek. They said they preferred sleeping there. I had my suspicions, though, so I stayed awake, watching and listening instead of sleeping. My porter wrapped himself in his blanket and, as usual, fell asleep quickly. The Shokas started a fire, gathered around it, and held an animated meeting in hushed tones. During their heated discussion, some were louder than they realized, and since the night was particularly quiet and the area was good for carrying sound, I overheard things that made me alert. I quickly convinced myself they were planning to sell my head... yes... and split the money.

The men got closer together, and spoke so faintly, that I could hear no more. Then they each in turn placed one hand above the other along a stick, until the end of it was reached; each man then passed it to his neighbour, who went through the same form; a complicated manner of drawing lots, common among the Shokas. Eventually the man selected by fate drew from a load a large Gourkha kukri, and removed its scabbard. A strange, almost fantastic [206] impression remains on my mind of the moment when the men, with their faces lighted by the small flame of the flickering fire, all looked up towards my eyrie. The culminating point of their treachery had come, and their countenances seemed ghastly and distorted, as seen from the fissure in the wall behind which I knelt. They listened to hear if we were asleep. Then all but one rolled themselves in their blankets, completely covering their heads and bodies. The one figure I could now see sat up by the fire for some time, as if absorbed in thought. Every now and then he turned his head up towards my fortress, and listened. At last he got up, and with his feet smothered the fire. It was a lovely night, and as soon as the reddish flame was put out the stars shone again like diamonds in the small patch of deep blue sky visible above my head.

The men gathered closer together and spoke so quietly that I couldn’t hear them anymore. Then each of them took turns placing one hand over the other along a stick until they reached the end. Each man passed it to his neighbor, who did the same thing; it was a complicated way of drawing lots, common among the Shokas. Eventually, the man chosen by chance pulled out a large Gourkha kukri from a load and removed its scabbard. A strange, almost surreal impression remains in my mind of the moment when the men, their faces illuminated by the small flicker of the fire, all looked up toward where I was hiding. The peak of their treachery had arrived, and their faces appeared ghastly and twisted, as seen from the crack in the wall behind which I knelt. They listened to see if we were asleep. Then, except for one, they all rolled themselves in their blankets, completely covering their heads and bodies. The only figure I could still see sat by the fire for a while, as if lost in thought. Every now and then, he looked up toward my hiding place and listened. Eventually, he got up and smothered the fire with his feet. It was a beautiful night, and as soon as the reddish flames were extinguished, the stars sparkled like diamonds in the small patch of deep blue sky visible above me.

I rested the barrel of my rifle on the wall, my eyes being fixed on the black figure down below. I watched as, stooping low, it crawled step by step the few yards up to my abode, pausing to listen each time that a rolling stone caused a noise. It was now only two or three yards away, and seemed to hesitate. Drawing back, and ready to spring up, I kept my eyes fixed on the top of the wall. I waited some time, but the man was in no hurry, and I grew impatient.

I rested the barrel of my rifle on the wall, my eyes locked on the dark figure below. I watched as it crouched low, crawling slowly up the few yards to my place, stopping to listen whenever a rolling stone made a sound. Now it was just two or three yards away and seemed unsure. Pulling back and getting ready to jump up, I kept my eyes on the top of the wall. I waited for a while, but the man wasn't rushing, and I started to get impatient.

I slowly got up, rifle in hand, and as I raised my head above the wall I found myself face to face with the man on the other side. I lost no time in placing the muzzle of my Mannlicher close to his face, and the perplexed Shoka, dropping his kukri, went down on his knees to implore my pardon. After giving him a good pounding with the butt of my rifle, I sent him about his business. The man lacked the qualities of a murderer, but I felt I had better see that no other disturbance took place during the night. It is true that two men attempted to crawl out of camp and desert, but I discovered this and stopped them in time. At last the sun rose, and the night ended with all its troubles and anxieties.

I slowly got up, rifle in hand, and as I lifted my head above the wall, I found myself face to face with the guy on the other side. I quickly aimed the muzzle of my Mannlicher at him, and the startled Shoka, dropping his kukri, fell to his knees to beg for my forgiveness. After giving him a solid hit with the butt of my rifle, I sent him on his way. The guy didn’t have the traits of a murderer, but I figured it was better to make sure no other trouble happened during the night. It’s true that two men tried to sneak out of camp and desert, but I caught them in time and stopped them. Finally, the sun rose, and the night came to an end with all its troubles and worries.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[20] Sigatz, usually called "Shigatze" by English people.

[20] Sigatz, often referred to as "Shigatze" by English speakers.


[207]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXXVII

A Tibetan guard's encampment—Nattoo volunteers to be a guide—Treachery and punishment of the Shokas—All ways forward barred to me—Evading the soldiers by another perilous march at night—Mansing again lost—A marvellous phenomenon—Sufferings of my men—Severe cold.

On my last scouting journey up the hill above the camp, I had espied, by the aid of my telescope, the encampment of a guard of Tibetans, about three miles north of us, and I informed my followers of this fact.

On my last scouting trip up the hill above the camp, I spotted, with the help of my telescope, the camp of a group of Tibetans, about three miles north of us, and I told my crew about it.

In the morning, when we again dug up the main part of our baggage and made ready to start, one of the men, the Kutial Nattoo, came forward and professed to be able to guide us directly to the Mansarowar Lake. He seemed very anxious to undertake this task, saying that there would be no chance of detection by the route he knew, and consequently we might march during the daytime.

In the morning, when we started unpacking our main bags and getting ready to leave, one of the guys, Kutial Nattoo, stepped up and said he could lead us straight to Mansarowar Lake. He seemed really eager to take on this job, claiming that the route he knew was safe from detection, so we could travel during the day.

We started up the creek, led by this man, and I was astonished at the willingness with which the Shokas agreed to proceed. In a little time I felt convinced that he was deliberately taking us to the spot I most wished to avoid. On my remonstrating and stopping further progress in that direction, the Shokas mutinied and, depositing their loads, tried to escape, but my bearer quickly barred their way ahead in the narrow creek and I prevented their escape from the opposite side, so they had to surrender. Painful as it was to me, I had to severely punish them all, and while I took care that no one should bolt, Chanden Sing took special pleasure in knocking them about until they were brought back to their senses. On being closely cross-examined, they openly confessed that they had made a plot to hand me over to the Tibetan guard, in order to escape the horrors of torture by the Tibetans. This last act of [208] treachery, coming after what had happened during the night, and from the very men whom I had just been more than lenient towards, was too much for me, and I used a stick, which Chanden Sing handed me, very freely on their backs and legs, Nattoo the Kutial receiving the largest share of blows, because he was undoubtedly the head of the conspiracy.

We started up the creek, led by this guy, and I was shocked at how readily the Shokas agreed to move forward. Before long, I was convinced that he was intentionally taking us to the place I most wanted to avoid. When I protested and stopped any further progress in that direction, the Shokas rebelled and, dropping their loads, tried to flee. However, my bearer quickly blocked their way ahead in the narrow creek, and I stopped their escape from the opposite side, forcing them to surrender. As painful as it was for me, I had to punish them all severely, and while I made sure no one could run away, Chanden Sing seemed to take a twisted joy in roughing them up until they came to their senses. When I interrogated them closely, they admitted that they had conspired to hand me over to the Tibetan guard to avoid the torturous fates at the hands of the Tibetans. This latest act of betrayal, coming right after what had happened during the night, and from the very people I had been more than lenient with, was too much for me. I used a stick, which Chanden Sing passed to me, quite liberally on their backs and legs, with Nattoo the Kutial getting the most hits because he was clearly the ringleader of the plot.

On climbing to a point of vantage, I now further discovered that, besides the guard we had to the north of us, both east and west our way was barred by Tibetan soldiers, and although it was not possible to get on during the day without being seen, I absolutely refused to go back south. I held a palaver with my men, who were apparently resigned, and they agreed to accompany me as far as the Maium Pass (on the road to Lhassa), which we reckoned to be some fifteen or eighteen marches. They further agreed to endeavour to obtain yaks and food for me, and I was then to dismiss them. From the summit of the hill I had climbed, I had taken careful bearings, and when night came, aided by my luminous compass, I led my men high up along the mountain range at an average elevation of 1500 feet above the Gyanema-Taklakot track.

When I climbed to a high point, I realized that, in addition to the guard to our north, both the east and west were blocked by Tibetan soldiers. Even though it wasn't possible to move during the day without being spotted, I absolutely refused to head back south. I had a discussion with my men, who seemed resigned, and they agreed to go with me as far as the Maium Pass (on the way to Lhassa), which we estimated was about fifteen or eighteen marches away. They also agreed to try to get yaks and food for me, after which I would send them away. From the top of the hill I had climbed, I took careful measurements, and when night fell, using my glowing compass, I led my men higher up along the mountain range at an average height of 1500 feet above the Gyanema-Taklakot track.

The night was dark and stormy, and we encountered much difficulty in our journey forward owing to the slippery ground, alternated with the ever troublesome loose débris and shifting rocks. We could not see far ahead, and though we well knew from the angle of the slope that we were travelling along a precipice, we could not distinguish anything under us except a peculiarly luminous streak far, far down below—undoubtedly the river.

The night was dark and stormy, and we faced a lot of challenges on our journey because the ground was slippery, mixed with the annoying loose débris and shifting rocks. We couldn't see very far ahead, and even though we knew from the angle of the slope that we were along a cliff, we couldn't make out anything below us except a strange glowing streak far, far down—definitely the river.

I could not explain this luminosity of the water, which did not seem to come from reflection of the light of stars or the moon, because the sky was very cloudy at the time. Moreover, the river had a curious greenish tint quite peculiar to itself, and closely resembling the light produced by an electric spark. In the more dangerous spots we had to proceed for long distances on all-fours, and even then we felt hardly safe, for we could hear the rattling of the stones rolling down the steep slope, and by this sound we could judge that we were proceeding over a precipice of extraordinary height. So difficult and painful was the walking, that it took us four hours to go about three miles; and we felt so exhausted, that from time to time we had to lie down and rest, shivering with cold, and our hands bleeding from cuts caused by the sharp stones. I mustered my men. Poor Mansing the leper was missing. When [209] we last saw him he was moaning under his load, and he constantly stumbled and fell. Two men were sent in search, but after an hour's absence they failed to discover him. The faithful Chanden Sing and the Shoka Dola were then despatched, as I would not abandon the poor wretch if by any means he could be saved. After another hour of anxiety, the two returned, bringing the unfortunate coolie with them. The poor fellow's hands and feet were badly cut, and the pain in the latter was so great that he could not stand erect. He had fallen fainting from exhaustion, and it was by a mere stroke of luck that in the darkness Chanden Sing stumbled against his senseless body. Apart from his life, his loss would have been a very serious matter for me, as he carried my bedding and photographic cameras.

I couldn't explain the glowing water, which didn't seem to come from the reflection of the stars or the moon since the sky was pretty cloudy at the time. Plus, the river had a strange greenish hue that was unique to it and looked a lot like the light from an electric spark. In the more dangerous spots, we had to crawl for long stretches, and even then we felt barely safe because we could hear the stones rattling as they rolled down the steep slope, which made us realize we were moving over a very high cliff. Walking was so tough and painful that it took us four hours to cover about three miles; we were so exhausted that we had to lie down and rest every now and then, shivering from the cold, with our hands bleeding from cuts made by the sharp stones. I gathered my men. Poor Mansing, the leper, was missing. The last time we saw him, he was moaning under his load, constantly stumbling and falling. We sent two men to look for him, but after an hour, they couldn't find him. Then I sent the loyal Chanden Sing and Shoka Dola, as I wouldn't abandon the poor guy if there was any chance he could be saved. After another hour of worry, the two came back, bringing the unfortunate coolie with them. His hands and feet were badly cut, and the pain in his feet was so intense that he couldn't stand up straight. He had fainted from exhaustion, and it was pure luck that in the darkness, Chanden Sing stumbled over his unconscious body. Losing him would have been a huge issue for me, aside from his life, since he was carrying my bedding and photographic cameras.

Sleet and rain commenced to fall, and the cold was intense. We continued to climb steadily, Chanden Sing and I helping the poor leper along. The march soon became less difficult, as we were following a depression formed by the action of melting snows, and were sheltered from the piercing wind which had been hitherto driving the sleet hard into our faces. We slowly covered some three miles more, and during that time the storm passed away, leaving the atmosphere beautifully clear. When we reached the pass (over 17,000 feet), a curious optical phenomenon astonished us all. The larger stars and planets, of a dazzling brilliancy such as I had never in my life seen before, seemed to swing to and fro in the sky with rapid and sudden jerks, describing short arcs of a circle, and returning each time to their normal position. The effect was so weird, that the first thing that struck me was that something had gone wrong with my vision, but my companions saw the same phenomenon: another curious thing was that the stars nearer the horizon disappeared and reappeared behind the mountain range. The oscillations of the heavenly bodies nearer the horizon were less rapid, but the angle of the arc described measured almost double that traced by the stars directly above our heads. The oscillations of these, however, were very much more rapid, especially at certain moments, when the star itself could no more be discerned, and a continuous line of light appeared on the deep blue background of the sky. This strange optical illusion, which began soon after the storm had entirely cleared away, lasted some time; then the vibrations gradually became less violent, and stars and planets eventually resumed their normal steadiness, [210] and shone with great brilliancy and beauty. We crossed the pass, and halted directly on the northern side of it, for my men's feet were in such a condition that they could bear the pain no longer. The minimum temperature was but 12°, and as we had no tent there was only a blanket between us and heaven. When we woke in the morning, we found the thermometer had risen to 30°, but we were enveloped in a thick mist which chilled us to our very marrow. I had icicles hanging down my moustache, eyelashes and hair, and my cheeks and nose were covered with a thin layer of ice caused by the respiration settling and congealing on my face.

Sleet and rain started to fall, and it was freezing cold. Chanden Sing and I helped the poor leper as we climbed steadily. The hike soon became easier since we were following a dip created by melting snow, which shielded us from the biting wind that had been hitting us hard in the face. We slowly covered about three more miles, and during that time the storm passed, leaving the air beautifully clear. When we reached the pass (over 17,000 feet), we were all amazed by a strange optical phenomenon. The larger stars and planets, shining with a brilliance I had never seen before, appeared to swing back and forth in the sky with quick, jerky motions, tracing short arcs of a circle and returning to their original spots. It was so bizarre that I first thought something was wrong with my vision, but my companions noticed the same strange effect. Another odd thing was that the stars closer to the horizon vanished and reappeared behind the mountains. The movements of the heavenly bodies near the horizon were slower, but the angle of their arcs was almost double that of the stars directly above us. However, those stars moved much more rapidly, especially at certain moments when they became indistinguishable, creating a continuous line of light against the deep blue sky. This weird optical illusion started soon after the storm cleared and lasted for a while; then the vibrations gradually calmed down, and the stars and planets eventually returned to their normal steadiness, shining with great brilliance and beauty. We crossed the pass and stopped directly on the northern side because my men’s feet were in such bad shape they could no longer handle the pain. The temperature dropped to just 12°, and since we had no tent, there was only a blanket between us and the sky. When we woke up in the morning, we found the thermometer had risen to 30°, but we were surrounded by a thick mist that chilled us to the bone. I had icicles hanging from my mustache, eyelashes, and hair, and my cheeks and nose were covered with a thin layer of ice from my breath freezing on my face.


[211]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXXVIII

Night marching—The Lafan and Mafan Lakes—Tize, the sacred Kelas—Rhubarb—Butterflies—A hermit Lama—More Dacoits—Surrounded by them—Routed.

During our night marches, up and down mountain ranges of considerable height, we naturally had adventures and escapes far too numerous to relate here in exact detail, and I shall not give a full description of each march on account of the unavoidable monotony of such a narrative. In constant storms of grit and snow we crossed range after range, travelling during the night and hiding by day, camping at very great altitudes and undergoing considerable privations. I steered my men towards the Rakstal[21] Lake, and one day, having risen to 17,550 feet, we obtained a magnificent view of the two great sheets of water, the Lafan-cho and Mafan-cho, or Rakstal and Mansarowar Lakes, by which latter names they are more commonly known to non-Tibetans.

During our nighttime marches, up and down tall mountain ranges, we naturally had too many adventures and narrow escapes to recount in detail, and I won't describe each march fully due to the inevitable boredom of such a narrative. In constant storms of grit and snow, we crossed range after range, traveling at night and hiding during the day, camping at very high altitudes and facing significant hardships. I guided my men toward Rakstal[21] Lake, and one day, after climbing to 17,550 feet, we enjoyed a stunning view of the two large bodies of water, Lafan-cho and Mafan-cho, or Rakstal and Mansarowar Lakes, which are the names more commonly used by people not from Tibet.

To the N. of the lakes stood the magnificent Tize, the sacred Kelas mountain, overtopping by some two thousand feet all the other snowy peaks of the Gangri chain, which extended roughly from N.W. to S.E. From this spot we could see more distinctly than from Lama Chokden the band round the base of the mountain, which, according to legend, was formed by the rope of the Rakas (devil) trying to tear down this throne of the gods.

To the north of the lakes stood the magnificent Tize, the sacred Kelas mountain, towering about two thousand feet above all the other snow-capped peaks of the Gangri range, which stretched roughly from northwest to southeast. From this location, we could see more clearly than from Lama Chokden the band around the base of the mountain, which, according to legend, was created by the rope of the Rakas (devil) attempting to pull down this throne of the gods.

Tize, the great sacred peak, is of fascinating interest, owing to its peculiar shape. It resembles, as I have said, the giant roof of a temple, but to my mind it lacks the gracefulness of sweeping curves such as are found in Fujiama of Japan, the Most artistically beautiful mountain I have ever seen. Tize is angular, uncomfortably angular, if I may be allowed the expression, and although its height, the vivid colour of its [212] base, and the masses of snow that cover its slopes, give it a peculiar attraction, it nevertheless struck me as being intensely unpicturesque, at least from the point from which I saw it, and from which the whole of it was visible. When clouds were round it, toning down and modifying its shape, Tize appeared at its best from the painter's point of view. Under these conditions, I have thought it very beautiful, especially at sunrise, with one side tinted red and yellow, and its rocky mass standing majestic against a background of shiny gold. With my telescope I could plainly distinguish, especially on the E. side, the defile along which the worshippers make the circuit at the base of the mountain, though I was told that some pilgrims actually march round it on the snowy ledge directly over the base, and just above the darker band of rock described before. On the S.W. side can be seen, on the top of a lower peak, a gigantic Obo.

Tize, the great sacred peak, is really interesting because of its unique shape. It looks like a huge temple roof, but in my opinion, it lacks the elegance of the smooth curves found in Japan's Fujiama, the most artistically beautiful mountain I've ever seen. Tize is sharp and angular, uncomfortably so, if I can say that, and while its height, the bright color at its base, and the large amounts of snow covering its slopes give it a special appeal, I still found it to be quite unpicturesque, at least from the viewpoint I had where I could see the whole thing. When clouds surround it, softening and altering its shape, Tize looks its best from an artist's perspective. Under these conditions, I thought it was very beautiful, especially at sunrise, with one side glowing red and yellow, and its rocky mass standing tall against a shiny gold backdrop. With my telescope, I could easily make out the path on the east side where worshippers walk around the base of the mountain, although I was told that some pilgrims actually walk along the snowy ledge right above the darker band of rock I mentioned earlier. On the southwest side, you can spot a gigantic Obo atop a lower peak.

Our First View of Rakastal

Our First Look at Rakastal


The peregrination round Tize usually takes three days, though some accomplish it in two days, and under favourable circumstances it has even been done in one day. It is usual for the pilgrims to say certain prayers and make sacrifices as they proceed, and the more fanatical perform the journey serpentwise, lying flat on the ground; others, again, do it on their hands and knees, and others walking backwards.

The journey around Tize usually takes three days, although some people manage to do it in two days, and under good conditions, it has even been completed in one day. Pilgrims typically say specific prayers and make sacrifices as they go, and the more devoted followers travel in a serpent-like manner, lying flat on the ground; others do it on their hands and knees, and some even walk backward.

[213] Tize, or Kelas, has an elevation of 21,830 feet, and Nandiphu, W. of it, 19,440 feet, while N.W. of the sacred mountain are visible other summits 20,460 feet, 19,970 feet, and 20,280 feet. Animal life seemed to abound, for while I was sketching the panorama before me, a snow leopard bounded gracefully past us. I had a shot or two at thar, and we saw any number of kiang. We found rhubarb, which seemed to be thriving, at so high an elevation as 17,000 feet, and quantities of yellow flowers in the same locality and at the same elevation; and at 19,000 feet I netted two couples of small white and black butterflies. They seemed to have great difficulty in flying, and hardly rose more than two or three inches off the ground, flapping their wings irregularly; they seldom flew more than a few feet, and then remained motionless for long periods before they attempted to fly again. I had come across the same kind of butterfly at lower altitudes, 18,600 feet and 17,000 feet, and I invariably found them in couples.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Tize, or Kelas, rises to an elevation of 21,830 feet, while Nandiphu, to the west, reaches 19,440 feet. To the northwest of the sacred mountain, other peaks can be seen at elevations of 20,460 feet, 19,970 feet, and 20,280 feet. Wildlife seemed abundant; while I was sketching the view in front of me, a snow leopard gracefully bounded by. I managed to get a shot or two at some thar, and there were plenty of kiang around. We discovered rhubarb thriving at an elevation of 17,000 feet, along with many yellow flowers in the same area. At 19,000 feet, I caught two pairs of small black and white butterflies. They seemed to struggle to fly, barely lifting more than two or three inches off the ground, flapping their wings irregularly. They rarely flew more than a few feet and would stay still for long periods before trying to fly again. I had encountered the same type of butterfly at lower elevations, 18,600 feet and 17,000 feet, and I always found them in pairs.

On nearing the lakes, the atmosphere seemed saturated with moisture, for no sooner had the sun gone down than there was a heavy dew, which soaked our blankets and clothes. We were at 16,550 feet in a narrow marshy creek in which we had descended à pic from the last mountain range. From the summit of the range we had seen many columns of smoke rising from the neighbourhood of the Rakas Lake, and we judged that again we must proceed with great caution.

As we got closer to the lakes, the air felt really humid. No sooner had the sun set than a thick dew covered our blankets and clothes. We were at 16,550 feet in a narrow, marshy creek where we had come down sharply from the last mountain range. From the peak of the range, we had seen several columns of smoke rising from the area around Rakas Lake, so we realized that we needed to be very careful again.

We cooked our food, and in the middle of the night, for greater safety, we shifted our camp on the summit of the plateau in a North-Easterly direction, and continued our journey in the morning, high above the magnificent blue sheet of the Devil's Lake with its pretty islands.

We prepared our meal, and in the middle of the night, to be safer, we moved our camp to the top of the plateau in a northeast direction, and continued our journey in the morning, high above the stunning blue expanse of Devil's Lake with its beautiful islands.

"Sahib, do you see that island?" exclaimed the Kutial, pointing at a barren rock that emerged from the lake. "On it," he continued, "lives a hermit Lama, a saintly man. He has been there alone for many years, and he is held in great veneration by the Tibetans. He exists almost entirely on fish, and occasional swan's eggs, and only in winter, when the lake is frozen, is communication established with the shore, and supplies of tsamba are brought to him, for they have no boats in Rakastal, nor any way of constructing rafts, owing to the absence of wood. The hermit sleeps in a cave, but generally comes out in the open to pray to Buddha." During the following night, when everything was still, a slight breeze blowing from the North brought to us, faint and indistinct, the broken howls of the hermit.

"Sahib, do you see that island?" exclaimed the Kutial, pointing at a barren rock that jutted out of the lake. "On it," he continued, "lives a hermit Lama, a holy man. He has been there alone for many years, and the Tibetans hold him in great respect. He survives mostly on fish and the occasional swan's eggs, and only in winter, when the lake is frozen, can he communicate with the shore, and supplies of tsamba are brought to him, because they have no boats in Rakastal, nor any way to build rafts due to the lack of wood. The hermit sleeps in a cave but usually comes out into the open to pray to Buddha." During the following night, when everything was quiet, a slight breeze blowing from the North brought us, faint and distant, the broken howls of the hermit.

[214] "What is that?" I asked of the Shokas.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] "What is that?" I asked the Shokas.

"It is the hermit speaking to God. Every night he climbs to the summit of the rock, and from there addresses his prayers to Buddha the Great."

"It’s the hermit talking to God. Every night he climbs to the top of the rock and from there directs his prayers to Buddha the Great."

"How is he clothed?" I inquired.

"How is he dressed?" I asked.

"In skins."

"In skins."

Rakastal and ...... Mansarowar Lakes
Rakastal and ...... Mansarowar Lakes

Late in the afternoon we had an amusing incident. We came to a creek in which were a number of men and women, hundreds of yaks and sheep, and some thirty ponies.

Late in the afternoon, we had a funny incident. We came across a creek where there were several men and women, hundreds of yaks and sheep, and about thirty ponies.

The Shokas became alarmed, and immediately pronounced the folks to be brigands. I maintained that they were not, and as Kachi expounded the theory that the only way to distinguish Dakus from honest beings was to hear them talk (the Dakus he declared usually shout at the top of their voices when conversing, and use language far from select, while well-to-do Tibetans speak gently and with refinement), [215] I thought the only thing to do was to go and address the people, when by the tone of voice we should find out what they were. This, however, did not suit my Shokas, and we were placed in rather a curious position, for to proceed we must either pass by the Tibetan encampment, or we must march southwards round a mountain, which would involve considerable trouble, fatigue, and waste of time. We waited till night came, watching, unseen, the Tibetans below us. As is customary with them, they retired at sundown to their tents. Leaving my men behind, I crawled into their camp during the night and peeped into one of the tents. The men were squatting on the ground, round a fire in the centre, upon which steamed two vessels with stewing tea. One old man, with strongly-marked Mongolian features, accentuated by the heavy shadows which were cast by the light of the fire above his angular [216] cheek-bones and prominent and wrinkled brow, was busily revolving his prayer-wheel from left to right, repeating in a mechanical way the usual Omne mani padme hun, words which come from the Sanscrit, and refer to the reincarnation of Buddha from a lotus flower, meaning literally, "O God, the gem emerging from a lotus flower." Two or three other men, whose faces I could not well see, as they were stooping very low, were busy counting money and examining several articles of Indian manufacture, which undoubtedly had been seized from Shokas. It was fortunate that they had no dogs in this camp, for I, having discovered our best way to pass them unperceived, went back to my men and led them, in the middle of the night, through the camp itself. We proceeded for a mile or so beyond the encampment, and having selected a well-sheltered spot where we could rest without fear of discovery, we laid down our loads and tried to get a few hours' sleep. Waking at sunrise we were startled to find ourselves surrounded by a band of dacoits. They were our friends of the previous night, who, having followed our tracks, and mistaking us for Shoka traders, had now come for a little festive looting. On drawing near they were given a somewhat warm reception, and their instant retreat was more speedy than dignified.

The Shokas got nervous and quickly labeled the people as bandits. I insisted they weren’t, and as Kachi explained that the only way to tell Dakus apart from honest people was to listen to how they spoke (he claimed the Dakus typically yelled loudly while talking and used pretty rough language, while wealthy Tibetans spoke softly and elegantly), [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] I thought the best move was to go and talk to the people, as we could gauge who they were by their tone of voice. However, my Shokas didn’t agree with that, putting us in a bit of a tricky situation. To continue on, we would either have to walk past the Tibetan camp or head south around a mountain, which would be a hassle and take a lot of time and energy. We waited until nightfall, keeping an eye on the Tibetans below us, who, as usual, retired to their tents at sunset. I left my men behind and snuck into their camp during the night, peeking into one of the tents. The men were sitting on the ground around a fire in the middle, where two pots of tea were simmering. One old man, with very pronounced Mongolian features highlighted by the shadows from the fire casting over his sharp cheekbones and wrinkled forehead, was rotating his prayer wheel from left to right, mechanically reciting the usual Omne mani padme hun, a phrase from Sanskrit that refers to Buddha’s reincarnation from a lotus flower, meaning literally, "O God, the gem emerging from a lotus flower." Two or three other men, whose faces I couldn’t see well because they were hunched down, were busy counting money and checking out several items made in India, which had likely been taken from the Shokas. Luckily, there were no dogs in this camp, so after figuring out how to sneak past without being noticed, I returned to my men and led them through the camp in the middle of the night. We went about a mile beyond the encampment and found a well-protected spot where we could rest without being found. We dropped our loads and tried to get a few hours of sleep. When we woke up at sunrise, we were shocked to find ourselves surrounded by a group of dacoits. They were the same men from the night before, who had tracked us down, mistaking us for Shoka traders, and had come looking for some festive looting. As they got closer, they were met with a somewhat warm welcome, and their quick retreat was more hasty than dignified.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[21] Rakastal—Devil's Lake, also very frequently pronounced Rakstal.

[21] Rakastal—Devil's Lake, which is often pronounced Rakstal as well.


[217]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XXXIX

Spied and followed by robbers—Jogpas' hospitality—Hares—Tibetan charms resisted—Attempt to snatch Chanden Sing's rifle out of his hands—The ridge between Rakas and Mansarowar Lakes.

We wended our way along a narrow valley towards the shore of the Devil's Lake, halting to cook our food about half a mile from the water's edge, and I took this opportunity to make observations for longitude. Also altitude with hypsometrical apparatus. Water boiled at 185° with temperature of atmosphere at 64°.

We made our way through a narrow valley towards the shore of Devil's Lake, stopping to cook our food about half a mile from the water's edge. I took this chance to measure the longitude and also the altitude using a hypsometer. Water boiled at 185° with an atmospheric temperature of 64°.

I had just repacked my instruments, and was lying flat in the sun, some distance away from my men, when I thought I saw something move. Jumping up, I beheld a stalwart Tibetan stealing along the ground only a few yards away from me, with the object no doubt of taking possession of my rifle before I had time to discover him. Unfortunately for him, he was not quick enough, and all that he gained for his attempt was a good pounding with the butt of my Mannlicher. He was one of the Dakus we had seen in the morning, and no doubt they had followed and spied upon us all along. Having got over his first surprise, the dacoit, with an amusing air of assumed innocence, requested us to go and spend the night in his tent with him and his mates. They would treat us right royally, he said. Being, however, well acquainted with the hospitality of dacoits, we declined the invitation. The brigand went away somewhat shaken and disappointed, and we continued our journey along the water-edge of the Devil's Lake (Rakas-tal), where hundreds of hares sprang from under our feet, several of which I killed with my rifle, using bullet cartridges. There were signs all along that at some previous epoch the level of [218] the lake must have been much higher than it is at present.

I had just repacked my gear and was lying flat in the sun, away from my guys, when I thought I saw something move. Jumping up, I saw a strong Tibetan sneaking along the ground just a few yards away from me, clearly trying to grab my rifle before I noticed him. Unfortunately for him, he wasn’t quick enough, and all he got for his trouble was a solid hit with the butt of my Mannlicher. He was one of the Dakus we had seen that morning, and they must have been following and watching us the whole time. Once he recovered from his initial shock, the dacoit, putting on a fake innocent look, invited us to spend the night in his tent with him and his friends. He claimed they would treat us like royalty. However, knowing all too well the hospitality of dacoits, we turned down the offer. The brigand walked away somewhat shaken and disappointed, and we continued our journey along the edge of Devil's Lake (Rakas-tal), where hundreds of hares sprang up from under our feet, and I shot several of them with my rifle using bullet cartridges. There were signs all around that at some point, the lake must have been much higher than it is now.

Marching during the day we encountered many Tibetans, some of whom were Dogpas, others Jogpas. When they saw us approaching they generally bolted, driving their sheep or yaks in front of them. Nevertheless, we came upon two Tibetan women, very dirty, and their faces smeared with black ointment to prevent the skin from cracking in the high wind. They were dressed in long sheepskin garments, worn out and filthy, and their coiffures were so unwashed that they emitted a sickening odour. I ordered them not to come too near us, for although these females had no claims whatever to beauty—and, as far as I could see they possessed no other charm—one being old and toothless, the other with a skin like a lizard, they actually tried to decoy us to their tents, possibly with the object of getting us robbed by their men. My men seemed little attracted by the comical speeches and gestures with which they sought to beguile us, and I pushed on so as to be rid of this uncanny pack as soon as possible.

Marching during the day, we met many Tibetans, some of whom were Dogpas and others Jogpas. When they saw us coming, they usually ran away, herding their sheep or yaks ahead of them. However, we stumbled upon two Tibetan women, very dirty with their faces smeared in black ointment to protect their skin from cracking in the strong wind. They wore long, worn-out sheepskin clothing that was filthy, and their hair was so unwashed that it gave off a nauseating smell. I told them to stay away from us because, while these women had no claims to beauty—and as far as I could tell, no other appeal—one was old and toothless, and the other had skin like a lizard. They actually tried to lure us to their tents, possibly with the aim of having their men rob us. My men didn’t seem very interested in the silly jokes and gestures they used to try to entice us, and I pushed on to get away from this strange group as quickly as possible.

Four Tibetans, who attempted to snatch Chanden Sing's rifle out of his hand, received from him a battering that they were unlikely soon to forget, and after this we were fortunately left alone for the remainder of the day. In the evening, Chanden Sing fired at a black wolf which came close to camp, and I discovered, about one hundred feet above lake-level, imbedded in the mountain side, a stratum of gigantic fossils, which, owing to their size and weight, I regretted to be unable to dig out and carry away.

Four Tibetans, who tried to grab Chanden Sing's rifle from him, got a beating they wouldn't forget any time soon, and after that, we were fortunately left alone for the rest of the day. In the evening, Chanden Sing shot at a black wolf that came close to our camp, and I found, about one hundred feet above lake level, a layer of gigantic fossils embedded in the mountainside, which I regretted not being able to dig out and take with me due to their size and weight.

Feeling almost certain that we were being spied upon all the time by the numerous Jogpas we had met, we attempted to dodge them by pretending to encamp before sunset. However, we only lighted a fine fire, and then after dark escaped, walking and stumbling for several miles, until we found a spot high on the hillside where we considered ourselves safe. Snow fell heavily during the night, and, as usual, we woke up with icicles hanging from our moustaches, eyelashes and hair, notwithstanding which we really were quite happy and well.

Feeling pretty sure that we were being watched all the time by the many Jogpas we had met, we tried to avoid them by pretending to set up camp before sunset. Instead, we just lit a nice fire and then, after it got dark, sneaked away, walking and stumbling for several miles until we found a spot high on the hillside where we felt safe. Snow fell heavily throughout the night, and, as usual, we woke up with icicles hanging from our mustaches, eyelashes, and hair. Despite that, we were actually quite happy and in good shape.

It was my good fortune to make quite sure from many points that, as can be seen from the illustration reproduced in these pages, the ridge between the Rakas and Mansarowar Lakes is continuous, and no communication between the two lakes exists. With the exception of a small depression about half-way across, the ridge has an average height of [219] 1000 feet all along, a fact which ought in itself to dispose of the theory that the two lakes are one. I also further ascertained from the natives that there is no communication whatever between them, though the depression in the ridge makes it probable that at a very remote period some connection existed. The lowest point in this depression is over 300 feet above the level of the lake.

It was my good luck to confirm from various sources that, as shown in the illustration in these pages, the ridge between the Rakas and Mansarowar Lakes is continuous, and there is no connection between the two lakes. Apart from a small dip about halfway across, the ridge has an average height of [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] 1000 feet all along, which should dismiss the idea that the two lakes are actually one. I also learned from the locals that there’s absolutely no connection between them, although the dip in the ridge suggests that there may have been a link a long time ago. The lowest point in this dip is over 300 feet above the level of the lake.

A Dacoit

A bandit


[220]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XL

More robbers—The friends of Tibetan authorities—A snap-shot—A meek lot—Prepossessing female and her curious ways—The purchase of two yaks.

Just before leaving the shores of the Rakstal I had a great slice of luck. It happened thus. We had been detected by another band of dacoits who were trying their hardest to overtake us. I had been spying them with my telescope as they rode in our direction. They were driving some twenty yaks in front of them at an unusually fast pace. The dacoits rode ponies. We were about a mile and a half ahead of them now, and close to the edge of the Devil's Lake. We saw them coming down the hillside at a breakneck speed straight in our direction. It was evident that they were after us. My men became terror-stricken when I gave the order to halt.

Just before we left the shores of Rakstal, I had a stroke of luck. Here's how it happened. We had been spotted by another group of bandits who were doing their best to catch up to us. I had been watching them with my telescope as they rode toward us. They were herding about twenty yaks in front of them at an unusually fast speed. The bandits were on ponies. We were about a mile and a half ahead of them, close to the edge of Devil's Lake. We saw them racing down the hillside straight at us. It was clear they were after us. My men were terrified when I ordered us to stop.

The band of dacoits approached and left the yaks in charge of two women. When they galloped in a line towards us, my men, with the exception of Chanden Sing and Mansing, were paralysed with fright.

The group of bandits came up and left the yaks with two women. As they rode towards us in a line, my men, except for Chanden Sing and Mansing, were frozen with fear.

They were now a hundred yards off. With loaded rifle in one hand, and my camera in the other, I advanced to meet them, knowing that, with their old-fashioned matchlocks, it takes them a considerable time to light the fuse and fire a shot. Moreover, it is almost an impossibility for them to fire on horseback, their weapons being heavy and cumbersome.

They were now a hundred yards away. With a loaded rifle in one hand and my camera in the other, I moved forward to meet them, knowing that with their old-fashioned matchlocks, it takes them quite a while to light the fuse and take a shot. Plus, it's almost impossible for them to shoot from horseback since their weapons are heavy and bulky.

I focused them in my twin lens photographic apparatus, and waited till I had them well in the field. I snapped the shot when they were only thirty yards away, vaulting over their ponies in the act of dismounting. The camera, having done its work, was quickly deposited on the ground, and the rifle shouldered. I shouted to them to put down their

I aimed my twin lens camera at them and waited until they were nicely framed. I took the shot when they were just thirty yards away, leaping off their ponies as they dismounted. Once the camera had done its job, I quickly set it down and grabbed my rifle. I called out to them to put down their

[221]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Bandits laid down their Arms

The Bandits laid down their weapons.


[222] weapons, and to give force to my request I aimed at them with my Mannlicher.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] weapons, and to strengthen my request, I aimed at them with my Mannlicher.

A meeker lot of brigands I do not believe could be found, though people of that kind are often brave when it is easy for them to be courageous. Their matchlocks were unslung from their shoulders with remarkable quickness and flung to the ground, and their jewelled swords were laid by the side of their firearms. They went down on their knees, and taking off their caps with both hands, put out their tongues in sign of salute and submission, and I could not help taking another snap-shot at them in that attitude, which was comical, to say the least of it.

A weaker group of bandits I don't think could be found, even though people like that can be brave when it's easy to be courageous. They quickly unstrapped their matchlocks from their shoulders and threw them to the ground, placing their jeweled swords next to their guns. They dropped to their knees, took off their caps with both hands, and stuck out their tongues as a sign of respect and submission. I couldn't help but take another photo of them in that position, which was, to put it mildly, quite funny.

My bearer, who had been left to look after the baggage, had placed Mansing in charge, and was now by my side with the Martini-Henry, when one of the women, riding astride, arrived on the scene. She was evidently furious at the cowardice of her men, and I liked her for that. She jumped off her steed, ejaculated words at the top of her voice, shaking her fists at the men still kneeling before me, and at last, foaming with rage, spat on them. While thus haranguing the band of highwaymen, she had an annoying way of pointing at my baggage, but her speech seemed to have little effect on the submissive crowd.

My porter, who had been left to look after the luggage, had put Mansing in charge and was now beside me with the Martini-Henry when one of the women, riding astride, showed up. She was clearly furious at the cowardice of her men, and I appreciated that about her. She jumped off her horse, yelled at the top of her lungs, shaking her fists at the men still kneeling before me, and finally, furious, spat on them. While she was lecturing the group of bandits, she had an irritating habit of pointing at my luggage, but her words seemed to have little impact on the submissive crowd.

I, therefore, went up to her, patted her on the back, and gave her a rupee to hold her tongue. She grabbed the coin and rubbed it on her skin coat to make the silver shine. She instantly became calm, and rubbing the coin until it was quite bright, she raised her fiery eyes, staring into mine, and pulled out her tongue to express her thanks.

I walked up to her, gave her a pat on the back, and handed her a rupee to quiet her down. She took the coin and rubbed it on her coat to make the silver shine. She quickly relaxed, and as she polished the coin until it was shiny, she lifted her intense gaze to meet mine and stuck out her tongue to show her appreciation.

Kachi and Dola, who knew Tibetan well, were now summoned to address the filibusters for me, and these two Shokas were in such trepidation that they could hardly walk, much less speak. After a while, however, seeing how well I had these supposed terrific rangers under control, they were at last able to translate.

Kachi and Dola, who were fluent in Tibetan, were called in to speak to the filibusters on my behalf, and these two Shokas were so nervous that they could barely walk, let alone talk. After some time, though, seeing how effectively I had these supposedly fierce rangers under control, they finally managed to translate.

"I want them to sell me some yaks and some ponies," I said. "I will pay handsomely for them."

"I want them to sell me some yaks and some ponies," I said. "I’ll pay well for them."

"They say they cannot. The Tarjum will cut their heads off if he comes to know it. They will only sell one or two yaks."

"They say they can't. The Tarjum will chop their heads off if he finds out. They'll only sell one or two yaks."

"Very good. How much do they want?"

"Sounds great. How much do they want?"

"Two hundred silver rupees. But," added Dola, "sahib, do not give them more than forty. That is a great deal more than they are worth. A good yak costs from ten to sixteen rupees."

"Two hundred silver rupees. But," Dola added, "sir, don’t give them more than forty. That’s way more than they’re worth. A good yak costs between ten and sixteen rupees."

[223] After some three or four hours' bargaining, during which time the bandits descended gradually from two hundred rupees to forty and I rose from twenty to that figure, we at last agreed, amidst the greatest excitement on both sides, that their two best yaks should become my property. I then, becoming quite friendly, purchased pack-saddles from them, and sundry other curiosities. They gave me tea even and tsamba. The fiery woman only had still a peculiar way of keeping her eyes fixed on my baggage, and her longing for my property seemed to increase when she saw me paying for the yaks. If she kept one eye on my goods, I kept both there; and I took good care that my rifle was never out of my hand, and that no one ever came too near me from behind.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] After about three or four hours of haggling, during which the bandits slowly lowered their price from two hundred rupees to forty and I raised my offer from twenty to that amount, we finally reached an agreement, with a lot of excitement on both sides, that their two best yaks would be mine. I then became quite friendly and bought pack-saddles from them, along with several other curiosities. They even offered me tea and tsamba. The fierce woman still had a strange way of keeping her eyes on my baggage, and her desire for my belongings seemed to grow when she saw me paying for the yaks. While she watched my stuff, I kept both of my eyes on it too; I made sure my rifle was always in my hand, and that no one came too close to me from behind.

Pack-saddles for Yaks

Yak Pack Saddles


We counted the money down, some fifty rupees, including all purchases. Each coin was passed round and sounded by each of our sellers, and when the entire sum was handed [224] over the coins were passed back and recounted so that there should be no mistake. Time in Tibet is not money, and my readers must not be surprised when I tell them that counting, recounting and sounding the small amount took two more hours. The two yaks were eventually handed over to us. One, a huge long-haired black animal, restless and powerful; the other equally black, strong and hairy, but somewhat gentler.

We counted the money, about fifty rupees in total, covering all purchases. Each coin was handed around and checked by each of our sellers, and when we gave them the full amount, the coins were passed back and recounted to avoid any mistakes. In Tibet, time isn't money, so my readers shouldn't be surprised when I say that counting, recounting, and checking the small amount took an extra two hours. Eventually, we received the two yaks. One was a massive, long-haired black animal, restless and strong; the other was also black, sturdy and hairy, but a bit more gentle.

To catch them, separate them from the herd, pass ropes through their respective nostrils, and tie pack-saddles on their backs, were all operations we as novices had to master. It was hard work indeed, but we struggled till we succeeded.

To catch them, we needed to separate them from the herd, thread ropes through their nostrils, and secure pack saddles on their backs—these were skills we, as beginners, had to learn. It was tough work, but we kept at it until we got it right.

When we parted we were good friends, the bandits behaving admirably, and I made up my mind that I would at any time rather trust a bandit in Tibet than an official.

When we said goodbye, we were good friends, the bandits acting really well, and I decided that I would always rather trust a bandit in Tibet than a government official.


[225]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XLI

Tibetan coats, hats, and boots—Why a Tibetan prefers to leave half the chest and one arm bare—Ornamentations—Manner and speech—Ignorance and superstition—Way of eating—Jogpa women and children—Head-dress.

In a way, I was sorry when my interview with the Jogpas came to an end, for, although they were undoubtedly brigands, they were certainly interesting. Their original and curious dress and manner of conversation, their unusual but eminently suitable mode of eating, and their jovial freedom of demeanour, were really quite refreshing. Their dress was quite representative of Tibet, for the men wore a great variety of coats and hats, probably owing to the facility with which they obtained them, and no two individuals were dressed alike, though certain leading characteristics of dress were conserved in each case. One man wore a gaudy coat trimmed with leopard skin, another had a long grey woollen robe like a dressing-gown, taken up at the waist by a kamarband, and a third was garbed in a loose raiment of sheepskin, with the wool inside. Yet a fourth was arrayed in a deep red tunic fastened by a belt of leather with silver ornamentations inlaid in wrought-iron to hold a needle-case, tinder-pouch and steel, with a bead hanging from the leather thong, and a pretty dagger with sheath of ebony, steel, and filigree silver, besides other articles, such as a bullet-pouch and bag. In their kamarbands or belts, the Jogpas, in common with the majority of Tibetan men, wear a sword in front, and whether the coat is long or short, it is invariably loose and made to bulge at the waist in order that it may contain a store of eating and drinking bowls, the "pu-kus," snuff-box, and sundry bags of money, and tsamba and bricks of tea! It is owing [226] to this custom that most Tibetan men, when seen at first, impress one as being very stout, whereas, as a matter of fact, they are somewhat slight in figure. Tibetans leave one arm and part of the chest bare, letting the sleeve hang loose. The reason for this practice, which seems to have puzzled many people, is that in Tibet the days are very hot and the nights cold (the drop in the thermometer in S.W. Tibet being at times as much as 80° and even 100°), and as the Tibetans always sleep in their clothes, the garments that protect their bodies from being frozen at night are found too heavy and warm in the hot sun, and therefore this simple expedient is adopted. When sitting down, both arms are drawn from the sleeves and the chest and back are left bare; but when on foot, one arm, usually the left, is slipped in, to prevent the coat and its heavy contents from falling off.

In a way, I was sad when my interview with the Jogpas ended because, even though they were definitely outlaws, they were quite fascinating. Their unique and interesting clothing, the way they talked, their unusual but practical way of eating, and their cheerful behavior were really refreshing. Their clothing was very representative of Tibet, with men wearing a wide variety of coats and hats, likely due to how easily they got them, and no two people were dressed the same, although certain common traits in attire were maintained. One man wore a flashy coat trimmed with leopard skin, another had a long gray wool robe like a dressing gown, cinched at the waist with a kamarband, and a third was dressed in a loose sheepskin outfit with the wool on the inside. Yet another wore a deep red tunic secured with a leather belt adorned with silver decoration and wrought-iron inlays to hold a needle case, tinder pouch, and steel, with a bead hanging from the leather thong, and a nice dagger with an ebony sheath, steel, and filigree silver, along with other items like a bullet pouch and bag. In their kamarbands or belts, the Jogpas, like most Tibetan men, carry a sword in front, and whether their coats are long or short, they are always loose and designed to bulge at the waist to hold a supply of eating and drinking bowls, the "pu-kus," a snuff-box, and various bags of money, as well as tsamba and tea bricks! Because of this custom, most Tibetan men, when first seen, appear very stout, while in reality, they are somewhat slender in build. Tibetans leave one arm and part of their chest exposed, letting the sleeve hang loose. The reason behind this practice, which seems to confuse many, is that in Tibet, the days are very hot and the nights cold (the drop in temperature in S.W. Tibet can sometimes be as much as 80° or even 100°), and since Tibetans always sleep in their clothes, the garments that protect them from freezing at night feel too heavy and warm in the hot sun, so they adopt this simple solution. When sitting down, both arms pull out of the sleeves, leaving the chest and back bare; but when walking, one arm, usually the left, goes back in to keep the coat and its heavy contents from falling off.

White Woollen Coat and SashesWoollen Socks
White Wool Coat and SashesWool Socks

I have no hesitation in pronouncing the Tibetan boots, from a practical point of view of utility, as the best in the world. They have all the advantages a boot should possess, especially those with flat soles of thick twisted cord. The upper part, being made of red and green felt, keeps the foot warm without preventing ventilation, and plenty of spreading room is left for the toes when walking. The felt gaiter, reaching to just below the knee, holds the soft sole of the boot flat under the foot, giving absolutely free action to the ankle. The most salient and sensible point in the Tibetan [227] footgear, however, is that the foot, all but the top part, is encased in the thick sole, thus preventing the jamming of toes between stones when walking, for instance, on débris, and also doing away with the accumulation of snow and mud between the sole and boot, so inconvenient in our footgear. There are many varieties and makes of boots in Tibet, but the principle is always the same. The boots are always homemade, each individual making his own, except in large towns, where footgear can be purchased, and necessarily the quality is then not up to the same high standard. The difference in Tibetan boots is mainly in the quality or texture of the soles; for instance, the Lhassa boots have finer, softer, and more elastic soles than those made in Sigatz (usually written Shigatze), which are quite hard and stiff, and supposed to wear out much sooner than the more pliable ones of the sacred city. Then there are some with leather soles, made specially for wet or snowy regions, and these when greased over are quite waterproof. Two kinds of these are in use, one with pointed and curled toes for cutting one's way into the snow, the other of the usual shape. Men and women alike wear these boots. The principal Lamas and officials of Tibet have adopted the Chinese-pattern boots of leather, with heavy leather or wooden soles and enormous nails under them.

I have no doubt in saying that Tibetan boots are the best in the world when it comes to practicality. They have all the features a good boot should have, especially the thick twisted cord flat soles. The upper part is made of red and green felt, which keeps your feet warm while still allowing for ventilation, and there’s plenty of room for your toes to spread out when you walk. The felt gaiter, which reaches just below the knee, keeps the soft sole of the boot flat against the foot, allowing for completely free ankle movement. The main highlight of Tibetan footgear, though, is that your foot, except for the top, is protected by a thick sole, preventing your toes from getting jammed between stones when walking on debris, and also stopping snow and mud from getting stuck between the sole and the boot, which can be quite a hassle with most footwear. There are many types and styles of boots in Tibet, but the basic design is always the same. They are typically handmade, with each person crafting their own, except in larger towns where you can buy boots, but their quality is usually not as high. The differences in Tibetan boots mainly relate to the quality or texture of the soles; for example, Lhasa boots have softer, more elastic soles compared to the harder, stiffer soles of those made in Sigatz (often spelled Shigatze), which tend to wear out faster than the more flexible ones from the sacred city. There are also boots with leather soles made specifically for wet or snowy areas, and these can be made waterproof by applying grease. Two types of these are used: one with pointed, curled toes for cutting through snow, and the other in the traditional shape. Both men and women wear these boots. The leading Lamas and officials of Tibet have taken on Chinese-style leather boots with heavy leather or wooden soles and large nails underneath.

Man's Boot, Made at Sigatz—Snow BootWoman's Boot—Boot Made in Lhassa
Man's Boot, Made at Sigatz—Snow BootWoman's Boot—Boot Made in Lhasa

The Tibetans have innumerable varieties of headgear. The most peculiar of all, worn chiefly by soldiers and dacoits, is one in the form of a section of a cone with large rim, made entirely of twisted cord like that used for the soles of the boots, and with a hole at the top for ventilation. The conical part being too small to fit the head, it is held upon the skull by means of two strings tied under the chin. There are also conical brown and grey felt ones, not unlike [228] filters used in chemical laboratories, and these, when of the better quality, are frequently ornamented with gold, blue, or red embroidery of Chinese manufacture. An impressive headgear was worn by the medicine man attached to the band of robbers I had interviewed. It resembled at first sight an exaggerated jockey's cap of red silk, but closer examination showed that it consisted of two long strips of red silk, well stretched on a light frame of bamboo, set at an angle of about 90°. This hat was held on the head by means of a band round the back of the head, and it projected some fifteen inches over the forehead. In addition to these there are of course common cloth or fur caps with ear-flaps; and it is not uncommon to see, in Tibet, soldiers wearing a silk kamarband bound tightly round the head, turban-fashion, with one end left hanging down over the ear. The commoner Tibetan, however, is not fond of covering his head, and though he often has one or more caps stowed away in the loose folds of his coat, he seldom wears one on his head under ordinary circumstances. This does not apply to officials, who are never seen without a circular cap of Chinese shape, surmounted by a top-knot. All men, except the Lamas, who shave their heads clean, wear a pigtail, short and shaggy at times, or long and ornamented with a piece of cloth, in which it is sewn, and passed through rings of ivory, bone, glass, metal, or coral. Ornaments of silver, such as perforated coins, are much used in adorning the men's pigtails, and coral and malachite ornaments are also common in Tibet for the same purpose, and are much valued by the natives. Men wear, passed through the lobe of the ear, an earring with malachite ornamentations, and often with an additional long pendant.

The Tibetans have countless types of headgear. The most unusual, mostly worn by soldiers and thieves, is a cone-shaped hat with a large brim, made entirely from twisted cord like the kind used for boot soles, and it has a hole at the top for ventilation. The conical part is too small to fit the head, so it’s secured on the skull with two strings tied under the chin. There are also conical hats made of brown and gray felt, similar to filters used in chemical labs, and the higher-quality versions are often decorated with gold, blue, or red embroidery made in China. An impressive hat was worn by the medicine man in the group of robbers I spoke to. At first glance, it looked like an oversized jockey's cap made of red silk, but upon closer inspection, it was actually two long strips of red silk tightly stretched over a light bamboo frame set at a 90° angle. This hat was kept on the head by a band around the back, extending about fifteen inches over the forehead. Besides these, there are also standard cloth or fur caps with ear flaps; it’s not uncommon to see soldiers in Tibet wearing a silk kamarband wrapped tightly around their heads, turban-style, with one end hanging down over the ear. However, ordinary Tibetans generally don’t like to cover their heads, and while they might have one or more caps tucked away in the loose folds of their coat, they rarely wear one on their heads in everyday situations. This isn’t true for officials, who are always seen with a circular Chinese-style cap topped with a top-knot. All men, except for the Lamas who shave their heads completely, have a pigtail, which can be short and messy at times or long and adorned with a piece of cloth sewn onto it, threaded through rings made of ivory, bone, glass, metal, or coral. Silver ornaments, such as perforated coins, are commonly used to decorate men’s pigtails, and coral and malachite ornaments are also popular in Tibet for this purpose and are highly valued by the locals. Men also wear earrings with malachite decorations, often featuring a long pendant hanging from them.

Hat, as Worn by Officials
Hat, as Worn by Officials

It is usually of brass or silver, and occasionally of gold. More common than the solitary earring is the brass or silver charm-box, frequently containing a likeness of Buddha, which nearly every Tibetan carries slung round his neck. Tibetans are, as a rule, excessively superstitious and fond of charms of every sort. Their superstitions are, of course, the result of ignorance, and so are most of their other bad qualities. Except among the higher officials and the Lamas, education can hardly be said to exist in Tibet, the population being kept in the most obscure ignorance. Few can read, and none can write, and the Lamas take very good care that only those shall learn who are likely to be of use. Honesty and honour are two qualities almost [229] unknown in any class or condition in Tibet, and as for truthfulness, all travellers in the country can testify to the practical impossibility of obtaining it from a Tibetan. Cruelty is innate in them, and vice and crime are everywhere rampant.

It’s usually made of brass or silver, and sometimes gold. More common than a single earring is the brass or silver charm box, often containing an image of Buddha, which almost every Tibetan wears around their neck. Generally, Tibetans are extremely superstitious and fond of all kinds of charms. Their superstitions stem from ignorance, which is also behind many of their other bad qualities. Aside from the higher officials and the Lamas, education is nearly nonexistent in Tibet, leaving the population in deep ignorance. Few can read, and none can write, and the Lamas make sure that only those who are deemed useful are allowed to learn. Honesty and honor are qualities rarely found in any class or situation in Tibet, and as for truthfulness, all travelers in the country can confirm how nearly impossible it is to get a straightforward answer from a Tibetan. Cruelty seems to be part of their nature, and vice and crime are widespread.

That the Jogpas had good digestions was evident from the way they ate when, having concluded the sale of the yaks, they squatted down to a hearty meal of tsamba, chura, and tea. They took from their coats their wooden and metal pu-kus, and quickly filled them with tsamba; pouring over it some steaming tea made as usual with butter and salt in a churn, they stirred it round and round the bowl with their dirty fingers until a paste was formed, which they rolled into a ball and ate, the same operation being repeated over and over again until their appetite was satisfied. Each time, before refilling, the bowl was licked clean by rotating the pu-ku round and round the tongue. Feeling the heat of the sun, after their meal both men and women removed their garments above the waist, showing ornaments of gold, silver and copper encircling their necks.

That the Jogpas had good digestions was clear from the way they ate when, after selling the yaks, they sat down for a hearty meal of tsamba, chura, and tea. They pulled out their wooden and metal pu-kus from their coats and quickly filled them with tsamba; pouring steaming tea made with butter and salt over it, they stirred it around the bowl with their dirty fingers until a paste formed, which they rolled into a ball and ate. They repeated this process over and over until they were full. Each time, before refilling, they licked the bowl clean by rotating the pu-ku around their tongue. Feeling the sun's heat, after their meal both men and women removed their tops, revealing gold, silver, and copper jewelry around their necks.

The women-folk of the dacoits, though far from beautiful, possessed a certain charm, arising from their curious wildness. Unlike those of the generality of Tibetan women, their teeth were very good, and their complexion was not specially dark, the black ointment with which their cheeks, noses, and foreheads were smeared making them appear darker than they really were, and being decidedly unbecoming. All of them had regular features, and their eyes and mouths were full of expression. Their hair had been plaited into numberless little tresses, brought up and fastened in a graceful curve over the head, kept firm by a red turban, which was arranged to show another row of little tresses on the forehead, the ends being joined in succession to one another. They wore large earrings of gold inlaid with malachite, and were in manner so unaffected that they disregarded even the most primitive conventions.

The women of the bandits, while not conventionally beautiful, had a certain charm that came from their wild and intriguing nature. Unlike most Tibetan women, their teeth were quite nice, and their skin wasn't especially dark. The black ointment smeared on their cheeks, noses, and foreheads made them seem darker than they actually were and didn't look great. They all had well-defined features, with expressive eyes and mouths. Their hair was styled into countless little braids, lifted and secured in a graceful arc over their heads, held in place by a red turban that showcased another row of braids on their foreheads, with the ends linked together. They wore large gold earrings inlaid with malachite and had such a natural demeanor that they ignored even the most basic social norms.

The children were talkative, and had the bearing of adults. They wore swords in their belts, even at the early age of eight or ten years. In a basket that had been carried by one of the yaks I saw an infant only a few months old. I caressed it, to the horror of his superstitious mother, who snatched the child away and washed and rubbed the poor little fellow's face until the skin was sore, declaring that children die who are touched by strangers.

The kids were chatty and carried themselves like adults. They wore swords on their belts, even at the young ages of eight or ten. In a basket that one of the yaks was carrying, I saw a baby only a few months old. I gently touched it, shocking its superstitious mother, who quickly snatched the child away and scrubbed the poor little guy's face until it was sore, insisting that children who are touched by strangers end up dying.

[230] The men were just as bad in this, and when I purchased some rice from them they would not let me handle it till it had become my property. They objected each time that I stretched out my arm to touch the bag of rice, and showed me eventually a handful of rice at a considerable distance, to let me judge of its quality. I had to purchase only the handful at first. Having assured myself that it was all right, I then purchased the remainder.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] The men were just as bad about this, and when I bought some rice from them, they wouldn't let me touch it until it was officially mine. Each time I reached out to grab the bag of rice, they objected and finally showed me a handful from a good distance away so I could judge its quality. I had to buy just the handful at first. After confirming that it was okay, I then bought the rest.


[231]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XLII

A Daku's strange ideas—The ridge between the two lakes—Black tents—Confronting the two lakes—A chain of high peaks—Gombas—Change in the weather.

We had marched on the same afternoon about half a mile in the direction of Mansarowar, when we were overtaken by one of the Dakus, whom we had left a short time before. He rode towards us, apparently in a great state of excitement. Having dismounted, he drew his sword and began chasing one of my yaks. This seemed so strange a proceeding that we were at a loss to understand his intentions, but as he screamed to us that he meant no harm we let him go on. He eventually overtook one recalcitrant yak, and, after a struggle with the unfortunate beast, he flung his arms round its neck and rested his head between its horns. I was anything but pleased with these antics, fearing that this effusion was only a dodge to cut the beast's throat. Much to my astonishment, I found that the young Jogpa had seized a tuft of the yak's hair with his teeth and was trying to tear it off, while the unfortunate beast was making desperate efforts to shake off its persecutor. The hair eventually gave way, and with a mouthful of it hanging from both sides of his tightly closed lips the Jogpa now let go of the animal's head, and, brandishing his sword, made a dash for its tail.

We had marched for about half a mile toward Mansarowar that afternoon when one of the Dakus we had left earlier caught up with us. He rode up excitedly. After getting off his horse, he pulled out his sword and started chasing one of my yaks. This seemed so odd that we couldn't figure out what he was up to, but since he yelled that he meant no harm, we let him continue. He finally caught up with a stubborn yak, and after struggling with the poor animal, he wrapped his arms around its neck and rested his head between its horns. I was far from happy about these antics, worried that this display was just a trick to slaughter the beast. To my surprise, I saw that the young Jogpa had bitten a tuft of the yak's hair and was trying to pull it out, while the poor animal desperately tried to shake him off. The hair eventually came loose, and with a mouthful of it sticking out from both sides of his tightly closed lips, the Jogpa let go of the yak’s head and, swinging his sword, lunged for its tail.

I seized the man by his pigtail, while he in his turn clung to the tail of the frightened yak, which bolting, dragged us after it at an unpleasant pace.

I grabbed the man by his pigtail, and he, in turn, held on to the tail of the scared yak, which bolted and dragged us along at a pretty uncomfortable speed.

The Jogpa, in our mad flight, cut off a long lock of the yak's silky hair, and having secured this, appeared to be quite satisfied, let go and sheathed his sword. He concealed the stolen locks in his coat, and then made profound obeisances to us, putting out his tongue as usual and [232] declaring that unless that precaution is taken when parting with a beast, bad luck is sure to come to you. This closed the incident: the Jogpa rode away perfectly happy, and we continued our march across the stony plain until we reached the ridge which extends across it and divides the two sheets of water. We climbed up to the top, rising to 16,450 feet, and to make certain that the ridge really extended right across, I made an expedition about half-way across, finding the northern part somewhat lower than the southern, still rising several hundred feet above the level of the lakes. This expedition incurred some loss of time, and when night came we were still on the ridge.

The Jogpa, in our frantic escape, cut off a long strand of the yak's silky hair, and after securing it, seemed quite pleased, sheathed his sword, and let go. He hid the stolen locks in his coat and then bowed deeply to us, sticking out his tongue as usual and declaring that if that precaution isn’t taken when parting with an animal, bad luck is bound to follow. This wrapped up the incident: the Jogpa rode away completely happy, and we continued our journey across the rocky plain until we reached the ridge that runs across it, separating the two bodies of water. We climbed up to the top, reaching 16,450 feet, and to confirm that the ridge really did extend all the way across, I took a little expedition about halfway over, discovering that the northern part was a bit lower than the southern but still several hundred feet above the lake levels. This exploration caused us to lose some time, and when night fell, we were still on the ridge.

A Black Yak

A Black Yak


From our camping-ground we saw fifteen black tents on the hillside, and to the E. on the lake shore there was a large Gomba or Lamasery, with a temple and a number of mud houses. I estimated the distance between ourselves and the Gomba at only eight miles, a cheering fact, because I hoped to get fresh provisions there to enable us to proceed more rapidly on our journey. We were now quite out of reach of the Gyanema sepoys, as well as of the Barca Tarjum and the Taklakot Jong Pen, and if we could only obtain a sufficient quantity of food during the night, and proceed by the jungle early the next day, there would be [233] little danger of our being overtaken. The Shokas were, of course, again shaking with fright at the idea of entering a Tibetan settlement, but I told them very firmly that we must reach Tucker Gomba and village that night.

From our campsite, we could see fifteen black tents on the hillside, and to the east, on the lake shore, there was a large Gomba or Lamasery with a temple and several mud houses. I estimated the distance to the Gomba to be only eight miles, which was encouraging because I hoped to find fresh supplies there to help us move faster on our journey. We were now well out of reach of the Gyanema sepoys, as well as the Barca Tarjum and the Taklakot Jong Pen. If we could get enough food during the night and head through the jungle early the next day, there would be little risk of being caught. The Shokas were, of course, trembling with fear at the thought of entering a Tibetan settlement, but I told them firmly that we had to reach Tucker Gomba and the village that night.

We had below us the two great lakes, and before I left this magnificent panorama, I could not help taking a last long look at the marvellous scene. The Devil's Lake, with its broken, precipitous shores, its rocky islands and outstretching peninsulas, was far more enchanting to me than the sacred lake at its side, in which, according to tradition, dwell Mahadeva (pronounced Mahadeve) and all the other good gods. Although the water is equally blue and limpid; although each lake has for background the same magnificent Gangri chain, Mansarowar, the creation of Brahma, from whom it takes its name, is not nearly so weirdly fascinating as its neighbour. Mansarowar has no ravines rising precipitously from its waters, in which their vivid colouring would be reflected as in a mirror; it is almost a perfect oval, without indentations. There is a stony, slanting plain some two miles wide between the water's edge and the hills surrounding it, except along the ridge separating it from the Rakstal, where its shore is slightly more rugged and precipitous.

We had the two great lakes below us, and before I left this amazing view, I couldn’t help but take one last long look at the stunning scene. Devil's Lake, with its jagged, steep shores, rocky islands, and sprawling peninsulas, was far more captivating to me than the holy lake next to it, where, according to tradition, Mahadeva (pronounced Mahadeve) and all the other good gods reside. Even though the water is just as blue and clear; even though both lakes are framed by the beautiful Gangri mountain range, Mansarowar, created by Brahma and named after him, is nowhere near as strangely fascinating as its neighbor. Mansarowar doesn’t have ravines rising sharply from its waters, where its bright colors could be reflected like in a mirror; it’s almost a perfect oval, without any indentations. There’s a stony, sloping plain about two miles wide between the water’s edge and the surrounding hills, except along the ridge that separates it from Rakstal, where the shore is slightly more rugged and steep.

Directly south of the lake is a chain of high peaks covered with snow, from which several streams descend. From where we stood we could see evident signs, as in the case of the Rakstal, that the level of the lake must at one time have been at least thirty feet higher than it is at present, and the slanting bed of small rounded and smooth stones, which extends from one-and-a-half to two miles beyond the water-line, is evidence enough that the water must once have been up to that point; I believe that it is still gradually receding.

Directly south of the lake is a range of towering snow-covered peaks, from which several streams flow down. From our vantage point, we could clearly see signs, similar to those at Rakstal, indicating that the lake's level must have been at least thirty feet higher than it is now. The sloping bed of small, rounded, and smooth stones that stretches one-and-a-half to two miles beyond the water line is clear evidence that the water must have reached that level at one time; I believe it is still slowly receding.

Round the lake there are several tumbling-down sheds in charge of Lamas, but only one important Gomba (monastery) and a temple are to be found—viz., at Tucker village.

Around the lake, there are several run-down sheds managed by Lamas, but there is only one significant Gomba (monastery) and a temple, located in Tucker village.

I was told that a small Gomba and serai in charge of Lamas stands to the N.W. of the lake, but I cannot vouch for the accuracy of the statement, as I did not visit it myself, and the information I received from Tibetans regarding its position and importance was conflicting.

I heard that a small Gomba and serai overseeing Lamas is located to the northwest of the lake, but I can't confirm if that's true since I didn't go there myself, and the information I got from Tibetans about its location and significance was inconsistent.

As the nature of the country suddenly altered between the Devil's Lake and Mansarowar, so, too, the weather and the temperature greatly changed. Over the Rakstal we invariably saw a lovely blue sky, whereas over Mansarowar heavy black clouds always lowered, and rain fell incessantly. From [234] time to time the wind blew off the rain for a few minutes, and lovely effects of light played on the water, but fresh clouds, with violent bursts of thunder, soon made the scene again gloomy and depressing.

As the landscape of the country suddenly shifted between Devil's Lake and Mansarowar, the weather and temperature also changed dramatically. Over Rakstal, we consistently enjoyed a beautiful blue sky, while above Mansarowar, dark clouds perpetually hung low, and rain fell non-stop. From time to time, the wind would blow the rain away for a few minutes, creating stunning light effects on the water, but new clouds, accompanied by loud thunder, would quickly return the scene to a gloomy and dreary state.

It was much warmer on the Mansarowar side of the ridge than on the other, and, probably owing to dampness, the air seemed quite thick to breathe, instead of being crisp and light, as it was along the shores of the Devil's Lake. Indeed, when I recall the Mansarowar, I cannot help thinking that it is the home, not only of the gods, but also of all the storms.

It was much warmer on the Mansarowar side of the ridge than on the other side, and probably due to the dampness, the air felt thick to breathe, instead of being crisp and light like it was along the shores of the Devil's Lake. In fact, when I think back on Mansarowar, I can't help feeling that it's the home, not just of the gods, but also of all the storms.

A Tibetan Fortune Teller

A Tibetan fortune teller



[235]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XLIII

The Langa Tsangpo—A terrific storm—Drenched to the skin—Heavy marching—Against the gods—Difficulty in finding the Lamasery and village—A bark!—Arrival at last—Gentle tapping—Under a roof.

We descended some two miles to the plain, and crossed a rapid delta of the Langa Tsangpo or Langa River; then another, a mile farther. As these rivers came directly from the snows, the water was very cold, and often three or four feet deep, owing to the thawing of the snow and ice during the day.

We descended about two miles to the plain and crossed a fast-flowing delta of the Langa Tsangpo, or Langa River; then another one a mile later. Since these rivers came straight from the snow, the water was very cold and often three or four feet deep due to the melting snow and ice during the day.

No sooner had we reached the shores of the Mansarowar, than the heavy clouds which had been hanging over our heads poured forth such a torrent of rain, that in a moment we were drenched to the skin. We were marching very fast, as all our heavy loads were now on the two yaks, but night was well advanced, and the darkness was such that we could only see a few inches in front of us. We were actually walking in an inch or two of water, and a fierce S.E. wind drove the rain and hail so hard into our faces and hands as to cause us considerable pain. We were frozen in our wet garments, and our teeth were chattering, though we walked quickly, keeping close together. From time to time a bright flash of lightning shone on the lake, followed by a terrific crash of thunder, and by what we could see during those few seconds of light we tried to steer our way towards Tucker village and Gomba.

No sooner had we reached the shores of Mansarowar than the heavy clouds that had been looming overhead unleashed such a downpour that we were soaked in an instant. We were moving quickly since all our heavy loads were now on the two yaks, but night was well advanced, and the darkness was so intense that we could only see a few inches ahead. We were actually walking in an inch or two of water, and a fierce southeast wind blasted the rain and hail into our faces and hands, causing us a lot of pain. We were freezing in our wet clothes, our teeth chattering, even though we kept moving quickly and close together. Occasionally, a bright flash of lightning lit up the lake, followed by a loud crash of thunder, and during those brief moments of light, we tried to find our way towards Tucker village and Gomba.

The rivers, swollen by the rain, were extremely difficult to cross, and the water seemed to flow so rapidly on the inclined bed, that it was all we could do to keep on our feet. So wet were we that we did not even take the trouble to remove our shoes or garments, and we splashed through, clothes and all. Three times we went into the freezing [236] water above our waists, and then we marched for apparently endless miles on the pebbly and stony incline. We could not see where we were going, and the storm seemed to grow worse every moment: we stumbled on amidst large stones and boulders, and fell over one another on slippery rocks. Farther on, we sank up to our knees in mud, and each time that we lifted a foot it seemed to be of lead. It was a downpour such as I had seldom before experienced.

The rivers, swollen by the rain, were really hard to cross, and the water was flowing so fast down the slope that all we could do was try to stay on our feet. We were so soaked that we didn’t even bother to take off our shoes or clothes, and we just splashed through, fully dressed. We went into the freezing water three times, getting it above our waists, and then we marched for what felt like endless miles on the rocky incline. We couldn’t see where we were headed, and the storm seemed to get worse every moment: we stumbled over big stones and boulders, tripping on slippery rocks. Further along, we sank up to our knees in mud, and every time we lifted a foot, it felt like we were pulling up lead weights. It was a downpour like I had rarely experienced before.

"Are you quite sure, Kachi, that this lake is the home of the gods?" I inquired of Kachi. "Why, even on the Devil's Lake we had better weather than this."

"Are you really sure, Kachi, that this lake is where the gods live?" I asked Kachi. "Honestly, we had better weather even at Devil's Lake."

"Yes, sir," replied Kachi. "But you make the gods angry, and that is why they send thunder, hail and rain to stop your progress. You are going on against the gods, sir."

"Yes, sir," replied Kachi. "But you're making the gods angry, and that's why they send thunder, hail, and rain to block your way. You're going against the gods, sir."

"Never mind, Kachi. It cannot pour for ever."

"Don't worry, Kachi. It can't rain forever."

At midnight we had no idea of our position, still we pushed on.

At midnight, we had no clue where we were, but we kept going.

"Have we passed the Gomba? Have we not yet reached it?" were the questions we asked each other. It seemed to me that, at the rate we were going, we ought by now to be very near the place, and yet after another hour's tramp we had not struck it. I was under the belief that we had gone about nine miles, and I expressed the opinion that we had passed it, but the Shokas insisted that we had not, so we again proceeded.

"Have we passed the Gomba? Have we not reached it yet?" were the questions we asked each other. It felt to me that, at the pace we were moving, we should have been very close by now, and yet after another hour of walking, we still hadn't arrived. I believed we had covered about nine miles, and I said I thought we had passed it, but the Shokas insisted we hadn't, so we continued on our way.

We had hardly gone five hundred yards, when we heard a faint, distant, and most welcome dog's bark. It came from the N.W., and we surmised that it must come from Tucker. We had steered too far south of the place, which accounted for our missing it in the darkness.

We had barely gone five hundred yards when we heard a faint, distant, and very welcome dog barking. It was coming from the northwest, and we guessed it was Tucker. We had steered too far south of the spot, which explained why we missed it in the dark.

Guided by the yelping, we hastily directed our steps towards the settlements. The dog's solitary howl was at once supplemented by fifty more angry barks, and though we knew by the sound that we were approaching the village, it was so dark and stormy that we could not find the place. Only when we found ourselves close to the mud huts could we be certain that we had at last arrived.

Guided by the barking, we quickly made our way towards the settlements. The dog’s lonely howl was soon joined by fifty more angry barks, and even though we could tell by the sounds that we were getting close to the village, it was so dark and stormy that we couldn’t find it. Only when we got close to the mud huts could we be sure that we had finally arrived.

It was now between 2 and 3 a.m. The rain still came down in torrents, and, alas! there was no sign of any of the inhabitants being willing to give us shelter. It was quite out of the question to pitch our little tente d'abri, for our things were already wringing wet.

It was now between 2 and 3 AM The rain continued to pour heavily, and, unfortunately, there was no indication that any of the locals were willing to offer us shelter. Setting up our little tente d'abri was completely out of the question since our belongings were already soaked.

The noise we made tapping outside a door was determined, so much so that the door itself nearly gave way.

The noise we made tapping on the door was so intense that it almost broke down the door.

[237]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

My Two Yaks

My Two Yaks


[238] This was a shelter-house, a serai for pilgrims, and as we claimed to be pilgrims, we had, by the laws of the country, a right to admission. The Kutial Nattoo, who had once before reached this lake by a different route, led us to this house.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] This was a shelter house, a serai for travelers, and since we claimed to be pilgrims, we were entitled to enter according to the country’s laws. The Kutial Nattoo, who had previously arrived at this lake via a different path, guided us to this house.

"You are dacoits," said a hoarse voice from inside; "or you would not come at this hour."

"You guys are thieves," said a rough voice from inside; "or you wouldn't show up at this hour."

"No, we are not," we entreated. "Please open. We are well-to-do people. We will harm no one, and pay for all."

"No, we're not," we pleaded. "Please open up. We're well-off people. We won't hurt anyone, and we'll pay for everything."

"Middu, Middu!" ("Cannot be, no.") "You are dacoits. I will not open."

"Middu, Middu!" ("No way, not happening.") "You are bandits. I'm not opening the door."

To show that we were not what they imagined, faithful Chanden Sing and Dola tapped again so gently at the door that the bolt gave way. The next moment ten strangers were squatting down round a warm fire drying their shrivelled-up, soaked skins by the flame of dried tamarisk and dung. The landlord, a doctor by the way, was reassured when he saw that we had no evil intentions, and found some silver coins in the palm of his hand. Yet he said he would rather that we slept somewhere else: there was a capital empty hut next door.

To show that we weren’t what they thought, loyal Chanden Sing and Dola knocked softly on the door until it opened. The next moment, ten strangers were sitting around a warm fire, drying their wrinkled, soaked skin by the flames of dried tamarisk and dung. The landlord, who happened to be a doctor, felt relieved when he saw that we meant no harm and found some silver coins in his hand. Still, he said he would prefer that we sleep elsewhere: there was a perfect empty hut next door.

On our agreeing to this, he conducted us to the place, and there we spent the remainder of the night, or rather the early morning.

On agreeing to this, he led us to the place, and there we spent the rest of the night, or rather the early morning.


[239]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XLIV

The interior of a serai—Vermin—Fish, local jewellery, and pottery for sale—Favourite shapes and patterns—How pottery is made.

Our abode was a one-storeyed house built of stones and mud with a flat roof. There were two rooms, the first lighted by the door, the second and larger having a square aperture in the ceiling for the triple purpose of ventilation, lighting and outlet for the smoke of the fire, which burnt directly underneath in the centre of the room. The beams and rafters supporting the roof had been brought over from the other side of the Himahlyas, as no wood is to be found in Western Tibet.

Our home was a single-story house made of stone and mud with a flat roof. It had two rooms: the first one was lit by the door, while the second, larger room had a square opening in the ceiling that served three purposes: ventilation, lighting, and letting out smoke from the fire burning right underneath in the center of the room. The beams and rafters supporting the roof were imported from the other side of the Himalayas since there’s no wood available in Western Tibet.

This serai was in charge of a young, half-demented lama, who was most profuse in salutations, and who remained open-mouthed, gazing at us for a considerable time. He was polite and attentive in helping to dry our things in the morning, and, whenever we asked for anything, he ran out of the serai in frantic fits of merriment, always bringing in what we required.

This serai was managed by a young, somewhat confused lama, who greeted us enthusiastically and stared at us for a long time with his mouth open. He was courteous and helpful in assisting us to dry our belongings in the morning, and whenever we requested something, he would dash out of the serai in fits of laughter, always returning with what we needed.

Silver Lhassa Coins

Silver Lhasa Coins


The heavy storm during the night had flooded our room, and there was only one corner slightly drier than the rest of the floor, where we all slept huddled together. These serais have no claim to cleanliness, and on this occasion all the minor animal life that inhabited the floor had, with a view to avoiding the water, retreated to the higher portion of the room, which we also had selected, so that one more [240] trial was added to all our other miseries, for we were half devoured by a variety of "insects." This, indeed, was a dreadful pest, and one from which we suffered indescribable agonies, not only on this occasion but whenever we halted near Tibetan camps. When we rose in the morning the room was full of Tibetan men, women and children, who seemed very good-natured and friendly.

The heavy storm during the night had flooded our room, and there was only one corner that was slightly drier than the rest of the floor, where we all slept huddled together. These serais have no claim to cleanliness, and in this case, all the small creatures that lived on the floor had, trying to escape the water, moved to the higher part of the room, which we also chose, so we faced yet another challenge on top of all our other troubles, as we were half-devoured by various "insects." This was truly a terrible nuisance, and we suffered indescribable agony not only this time but also every time we stopped near Tibetan camps. When we got up in the morning, the room was full of Tibetan men, women, and children, who seemed very good-natured and friendly.

Copper CoinsEarring Worn by Men
     Copper Coins     Men's Earrings

Silver Charm

Silver Bracelet


Gold and Malachite Brooch
Gold and Malachite Brooch

"Tanga chick!" (a silver coin equivalent to half a rupee) cried an old woman, who stuck a dried fish under my nose, professing volubly that it had been caught in Mansarowar, and that it would make its possessor the happiest of mortals. Others unrolled, from pieces of red cloth, jewellery in the form of brooches, rings, and earrings of brass or silver inlaid with malachite.

"Tanga chick!" (a silver coin worth half a rupee) shouted an old woman, who held a dried fish up to my face, passionately claiming it was caught in Mansarowar, and that owning it would make someone the happiest person alive. Others unwrapped pieces of red cloth to reveal jewelry in the form of brooches, rings, and earrings made of brass or silver, decorated with malachite.

"Gurmoh sum!" (three rupees), "Diu, diu, diu" ("Yes yes, yes"), "Karuga ni!" (two two-anna pieces), "Gientcheke!" (a four-anna piece), and so on, all talking at the same time, in their anxiety to dispose of their goods.

"Gurmoh sum!" (three rupees), "Diu, diu, diu" ("Yes yes, yes"), "Karuga ni!" (two two-anna coins), "Gientcheke!" (a four-anna coin), and so on, all speaking at once, eager to sell their items.

The jewellery was of local manufacture, and in some cases the pieces of malachite were firmly set, but usually a kind of paste is used for holding the stones, and consequently, pretty as the jewels are, they soon break.

The jewelry was made locally, and in some cases, the malachite pieces were securely set, but usually, a type of paste is used to hold the stones, so even though the jewels are nice to look at, they break pretty quickly.

The earrings are usually better made than the brooches, but the most interesting of all, because simpler and more characteristic, are the flat silver charms, such as the one I give in the illustration, ornamented with a primitive design. This particular one, which is now in my [241] possession is of great antiquity, the edges being much worn down. It has the lotus pattern in the centre and leaf ornamentations filled in with lines radiating from a parent stem. Concentric circles occupy the inner square, which also contains circular dots in sets of threes and contiguous semicircles. Triangles filled in with parallel lines are a favourite form of ornamentation in Tibetan work, and, perhaps, most popular of all in the mind of the Tibetan artist is the square or the lozenge outline, with a special inclination towards purely geometrical patterns, a tradition probably inherited from their Mongol ancestors.

The earrings are usually better crafted than the brooches, but the most interesting pieces, because they are simpler and more distinctive, are the flat silver charms, like the one I’m showing in the illustration, decorated with a primitive design. This particular charm, which is now in my[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]possession, is very old, with its edges significantly worn down. It features a lotus pattern in the center and leaf decorations filled with lines radiating from a central stem. Concentric circles fill the inner square, which also has circular dots arranged in threes and nearby semicircles. Triangles filled with parallel lines are a popular form of decoration in Tibetan art, and perhaps the most favored shape by Tibetan artists is the square or lozenge, with a strong preference for purely geometric patterns, a tradition likely passed down from their Mongol ancestors.

The most interesting objects to me at Tucker were the specimens of pottery made by the natives, which is manufactured from clay of fine quality, although it is not properly beaten previous to being worked into vases, jugs, &c. Moulds are used to fashion the bases of the larger vessels and the inner part is shaped by the hand; a rough turning-machine simplifies the finishing of the upper part of the vase, leaving it comparatively smooth. Two handles with rough line ornamentations are added to the larger vessels, but one suffices for the jars with longer neck and small aperture.

The most interesting objects to me at Tucker were the pottery pieces made by the natives, which is crafted from high-quality clay, even though it's not properly beaten before being shaped into vases, jugs, etc. Molds are used to create the bases of the larger vessels, while the inner part is shaped by hand; a rough turning machine makes it easier to finish the upper part of the vase, leaving it fairly smooth. Two handles with rough line decorations are added to the larger vessels, but one handle is enough for jars with a longer neck and small opening.

The two patterns reproduced in the illustration are those more commonly adopted; the colour is a light greyish terra-cotta, left fairly smooth and unvarnished. They are well burnt, in primitive furnaces, the Lamas showing much skill in the manufacture of these vessels, which find a ready market among the pilgrims to the sacred lake. The tools used in fashioning the vessels are extremely simple; a piece of flat stone, and two or three wands of wood, beyond which the Tucker potter does not really require more than his fingers and his nails to accomplish his work.

The two patterns shown in the image are the ones most commonly used; the color is a light grayish terra-cotta, kept relatively smooth and unvarnished. They are well-fired in basic kilns, with the Lamas demonstrating a lot of skill in making these pots, which sell well to the pilgrims visiting the sacred lake. The tools used to create the pots are very simple: a flat stone and a couple of wooden sticks, and beyond that, the Tucker potter mainly just needs his hands and nails to get the job done.

Mansarowar Pottery

Mansarovar Pottery


[242]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XLV

Friendly Lamas—Chanden Sing and Mansing purified—Mansing's sarcasm—Pilgrims to Mansarowar and their privileges—For luck!—Outside the Gomba.

Several Lamas came to visit me in the morning, and professed to be pleased to see us; in fact they asked me to go and pay them a visit in the Lamasery and temple. They said there was much sickness in the village, and as they believed me to be a Hindoo doctor, they wished I could do something to relieve their sufferings. I promised to do all I could, and was very glad to have this unique chance of visiting a Lamasery, and of studying the cases that would be brought before me. I carried my rifle in my hand even during this friendly visit to the Lamas.

Several Lamas came to see me in the morning and claimed to be happy to see us; in fact, they invited me to come and visit them at the Lamasery and temple. They mentioned that there was a lot of illness in the village, and since they thought I was a Hindu doctor, they hoped I could help alleviate their suffering. I promised to do my best and was excited to have this rare opportunity to visit a Lamasery and study the cases presented to me. I held my rifle in my hand even during this friendly visit with the Lamas.

When I came out of our stuffy, dark room, preceded and followed by a crowd of inquisitive natives, I had a good look round this strange village. After the storm of the night, we did not have the beautiful blue sky that might have been expected, but over us hung threatening clouds, while the waters of the sacred lake, softly moved by the wind, made a gentle lapping sound on the beach. Chanden Sing and Mansing, the two Hindoos, divested of all their clothing except a doti, were squatting near the edge of the lake, having their heads shaved clean by Bijesing the Johari. I must confess that I was somewhat annoyed when I saw them using my best razor for the purpose, but I repressed my anger on remembering that, according to their religion, the fact of being at Mansarowar absolved them from all sins. My two servants, with heads turned towards Kelas Mount, seemed excited, and were praying so fervently that I stood to watch them. They washed themselves repeatedly in the water of the lake, and at last plunged into it. On coming out shivering, they each took out of their [243] clothes a silver rupee, and flung it into the lake as an offering to the God Mahadeva. Then, with hairless faces and heads, they dressed and came to pay their salaams to me, professing to be now happy and pure.

When I stepped out of our stuffy, dark room, with a crowd of curious locals before and behind me, I took a good look around this unusual village. After last night's storm, we didn’t get the beautiful blue sky we might have expected; instead, threatening clouds loomed overhead, and the gentle breeze created a soft lapping sound on the beach from the sacred lake's waters. Chanden Sing and Mansing, the two Hindus, were sitting near the edge of the lake, wearing only a doti, as Bijesing the Johari shaved their heads clean. I must admit I felt a bit annoyed to see them using my best razor for this, but I held back my anger, remembering that according to their religion, being at Mansarowar cleared them of all sins. My two servants, with their faces turned toward Kelas Mount, seemed excited and were praying so earnestly that I stopped to watch them. They repeatedly washed themselves in the lake's water and eventually dove in. When they emerged, shivering, they each pulled a silver rupee from their clothes and tossed it into the lake as an offering to God Mahadeva. Afterward, with their heads and faces shaved, they got dressed and came to greet me, claiming to be happy and pure now.

"Siva, the greatest of all gods, lives in the waters of Mansarowar," exclaimed my bearer in a poetic mood. "I have bathed in its waters, and of its waters I have drunk. I have salaamed the great Kelas, the sight of which alone can absolve all sins of humanity; I shall now go to heaven."

"Siva, the greatest of all gods, lives in the waters of Mansarowar," my bearer said with a poetic flair. "I have bathed in its waters and drunk from them. I have worshiped the great Kelas, whose sight alone can wash away all the sins of humanity; I am now on my way to heaven."

"I shall be satisfied if we get as far as Lhassa," grumbled the sceptical Mansing, out of ear-reach of the Tibetans.

"I'll be happy if we make it to Lhassa," grumbled the skeptical Mansing, out of earshot of the Tibetans.

Chanden Sing, who was well versed in religious matters, explained that only Hindoo pilgrims who had lost both parents shaved their heads on visiting Mansarowar, as a sacrifice to Siva, and if they were of a high caste, on their return to their native land after the pilgrimage, it was customary to entertain all the Brahmins of the town to a banquet. A man who had bathed in Mansarowar was held in great respect by everybody, and commanded the admiration and envy of the entire world.

Chanden Sing, who was knowledgeable about religious customs, explained that only Hindu pilgrims who had lost both parents shaved their heads when visiting Mansarowar as a tribute to Siva. If they were from a high caste, it was customary for them to host a banquet for all the Brahmins in their hometown upon returning from the pilgrimage. A person who had bathed in Mansarowar was greatly respected by everyone and inspired admiration and envy from all around.

The Mansarowar Lake is about forty-six miles round, and those pilgrims who wish to attain a greater state of sanctity make a kora or circuit on foot, along the water-line. The journey occupies from four to seven days, according to circumstances, and one trip round will absolve the pilgrim from ordinary sins; twice the circuit clears the conscience of any murder; and three times will make honest and good a person who has killed his or her father, mother, brother or sister. There are fanatics who make the tour on their knees, others accomplish the distance lying down flat at each step on their faces like the pilgrims to Kelas.

The Mansarowar Lake is about forty-six miles around, and those pilgrims who want to achieve a higher level of holiness walk a kora or circuit along the shoreline. The trip takes anywhere from four to seven days, depending on the circumstances, and one round will absolve the pilgrim from minor sins; making the circuit twice clears the conscience of any murder; and doing it three times can redeem someone who has killed their father, mother, brother, or sister. There are zealots who complete the journey on their knees, while others cover the distance lying flat on their stomachs with each step like the pilgrims to Kelas.

According to legend, Mansarowar was created by Brahma, and he who shall bathe in its waters will share the paradise of Mahadeva! No matter what crimes he may have previously committed, a dip in the holy lake is sufficient to purge the soul as well as the body! To please my men, therefore, and perhaps bring myself some luck, I too hurled a couple of coins into the water.

According to legend, Mansarowar was created by Brahma, and anyone who bathes in its waters will share in the paradise of Mahadeva! It doesn’t matter what crimes they may have committed before; a dip in the holy lake is enough to cleanse both the soul and the body! To please my men and maybe bring myself some luck, I also tossed a couple of coins into the water.

The purifying ablutions being over, I ordered Chanden Sing to take his rifle and follow me into the Gomba, as the Lamas were so polite that I feared treachery on their part.

The purification rituals finished, I told Chanden Sing to grab his rifle and come with me into the Gomba, since the Lamas were so polite that I worried they might be up to something.

The large square building, with its walls painted red and its flattish dome of gilt copper, rose by the water-side, and was both picturesque and handsome in its severe simplicity.

The large square building, with its red-painted walls and flat dome made of gold-colored copper, stood by the water’s edge, looking both attractive and elegant in its straightforward design.

[244] There came sounds from inside of deep, hoarse voices muttering prayers, the tinkling of bells and clanging of cymbals. From time to time a drum was beaten, giving a hollow sound, and an occasional and sudden touch upon a gong caused the air to vibrate until the notes in a gradual diminuendo were carried away over the holy lake.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Deep, raspy voices were heard from inside, mumbling prayers, along with the ringing of bells and the clashing of cymbals. Occasionally, a drum was struck, producing a hollow sound, and a sudden hit on a gong made the air resonate until the fading notes drifted across the sacred lake.


[245]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XLVI

Entering the Lamasery—The Lama's dwelling—Novices—Were we in a trap?—Images—Oblations—Urghin—The holy water, the veil of friendship, and absolution—Musical instruments, books, &c.—God and the Trinity—Heaven and hell—A mystery.

After Chanden Sing and I had entered into the Lamasery, the large door, which had been pushed wide open, was immediately closed. We were in a spacious courtyard, three sides of which had two tiers of galleries supported by columns. This was the Lhaprang, or Lama's house, and directly in front of me was the Lha Kang, or temple, the floor of which was raised some five feet above the level of the ground, with a very large door leading into it. At this entrance were, one on either side, recesses in which, by the side of a big drum, squatted two Lamas with books of prayers before them, a praying-wheel and a rosary in their hands, the beads of which they shifted after every prayer. At our appearance the monks ceased their prayers and beat the drums in an excited manner. From what I could judge, there was a commotion in the Gomba. Lamas, old and young, rushed to and fro out of their rooms, while a number of Chibbis or novices—boys between the ages of twelve and twenty—lined the banisters of the upper verandah with expressions of evident suspense and curiosity depicted on their faces. No doubt the Lamas had prepared a trap for us. I warned Chanden Sing to be on the alert, and set him on guard at the entrance of the temple, while I, depositing a few silver coins on the drum of the Lama to my right, took off my shoes in sign of respect and—much to the amazement of the monks—quietly entered the house of worship. Partly astonished at the sight of the silver, and more so at my want of caution, [246] the Lamas, of whom there was a good number in the courtyard, remained motionless and mute. The high Lama, or Father Superior of the monastery, at last came forward, stooping low and placing one thumb above the other and putting his tongue out to show his superlative approval of my visit to the many images representing deities or sanctified Buddhist heroes which were grouped along the walls of the temple. The largest of these were about five feet high, the others about three feet. Some were carved out of wood, their drapery and ornaments being fairly artistic in arrangement and execution, while others were fashioned in gilt metal. There were a number in a sitting posture and some standing erect; and they all rested on ornamented pedestals or plainer bases painted blue, red, white and yellow. Many wore the ancient Chinese double-winged cap, as used to this day by Corean officials, and were placed in recesses in the wall decorated with stuffs, wood carvings, and rough paintings of images.

After Chanden Sing and I entered the Lamasery, the large door that had been pushed wide open was immediately closed. We were in a spacious courtyard with two tiers of galleries supported by columns on three sides. This was the Lhaprang, or Lama's house, and directly in front of me was the Lha Kang, or temple, which had a floor raised about five feet above the ground and a very large door leading into it. At this entrance, there were recesses on either side where two Lamas sat next to a big drum, with books of prayers in front of them, a prayer wheel, and a rosary in their hands, shifting the beads after each prayer. When we showed up, the monks stopped their prayers and beat the drums excitedly. From what I could tell, there was a frenzy in the Gomba. Lamas, both old and young, rushed in and out of their rooms, while several Chibbis or novices—boys aged twelve to twenty—lined the banisters of the upper verandah, their faces showing clear suspense and curiosity. The Lamas had likely set a trap for us. I warned Chanden Sing to stay alert and positioned him at the temple entrance, while I placed a few silver coins on the drum of the Lama to my right, removed my shoes as a sign of respect, and—much to the monks' surprise—quietly entered the house of worship. A bit stunned by the sight of the silver and even more surprised by my lack of caution, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] the Lamas in the courtyard stood still and silent. Eventually, the high Lama, or Father Superior of the monastery, came forward, stooping low, placing one thumb over the other and sticking out his tongue to show his supreme approval of my visit to the many images of deities or revered Buddhist figures grouped along the temple walls. The largest of these were about five feet tall, while the others were around three feet. Some were carved out of wood, and their drapery and ornaments were quite artistic, while others were made of gilt metal. There were several in a sitting position and some standing, all resting on decorative pedestals or simpler bases painted blue, red, white, and yellow. Many wore the traditional Chinese double-winged cap, still used today by Korean officials, and were placed in wall recesses decorated with fabrics, wood carvings, and rough paintings of images.

Entrance to the Tucker Temple

Entrance to Tucker Temple


At the foot of these images was a long shelf, on which, in bright brass vessels of all sizes, were oblations of tsamba, dried fruit, chura, wheat and rice offered through the Lamas by the devotees to the different saints. Some of the ears of barley were ornamented with imitation leaves of murr (butter), coloured red, blue and yellow.

At the bottom of these images was a long shelf, where bright brass containers of various sizes held offerings of tsamba, dried fruit, chura, wheat, and rice presented by the devotees to different saints through the Lamas. Some of the barley ears were decorated with fake leaves of murr (butter), colored red, blue, and yellow.

[247] The ceiling of the temple was draped in red woollen cloth similar to that of the clothes worn by the Lamas themselves, and from it hung hundreds of strips of silk, wool and cotton of all imaginable colours. The roof was supported by columns of wood forming a quadrangle in the centre of the temple and joined by a balustrade, compelling the worshippers to make a circuit from left to right in order to pass before the several images. In a shrine in the central part of the wall facing the entrance was Urghin or Kunjuk-chick, "God alone," and in front of it on a kind of altar covered with a carpet a collection of donations far more abundant than those offered to the other images.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] The temple's ceiling was draped in red wool fabric, similar to the clothing worn by the Lamas, and from it hung hundreds of strips of silk, wool, and cotton in every color you could imagine. The roof was supported by wooden columns forming a square in the center of the temple, connected by a railing that forced worshippers to walk from left to right to pass in front of the various images. In a shrine on the wall directly opposite the entrance was Urghin or Kunjuk-chick, "God alone," and in front of it, on a kind of altar covered with a carpet, was a collection of donations much larger than those given to the other images.

The Lama, pointing at it, told me that it was a good God, and so I salaamed it and deposited a small offering in a handy collection-box, which seemed to please the Lama greatly, for he at once fetched a holy water amphora, hung with long veils of friendship and love, and poured some scented liquid on the palms of my hands. Then, producing a strip of veil, he wetted it with the scent and presented it to me. The majority of pilgrims generally go round the inside of the temple on their knees, but, notwithstanding that, to avoid offending prejudices, I generally follow the principle of doing in Rome as the Romans do, I could not here afford the chance of placing myself at such a disadvantage in case of a surprise. The high Lama explained the different images and threw handfuls of rice over them as he called them by their respective names, all of which I tried hard to remember, but, alas! before I could get back to the serai and scribble down their appellations, they had all escaped my memory. A separate entrance led from the living part of the monastery into the temple.

The Lama pointed at it and told me it was a good God, so I bowed to it and put a small offering in a nearby collection box, which really seemed to please the Lama. He immediately fetched a holy water container draped with long veils of friendship and love and poured some scented liquid into my hands. Then, he took a piece of the veil, dampened it with the scent, and handed it to me. Most pilgrims usually go around the inside of the temple on their knees, but even though I try to follow the local customs, I couldn’t risk putting myself at a disadvantage in case something unexpected happened. The high Lama explained the different images and scattered handfuls of rice over them as he named them, which I tried hard to remember. Unfortunately, by the time I got back to the serai and tried to write down their names, I had forgotten them all. There was a separate entrance that led from the living area of the monastery into the temple.

Lights, burning in brass bowls, their wicks being fed with melted butter, were scattered on the floor in the central quadrangle, and near them lay oblong books of prayers printed on the smooth yellow Tibetan paper made from a fibrous bark. Near these books were small drums and cymbals. One double drum, I noticed, was made from reversed sections of human skulls, and my attention was also attracted by some peculiar headgear worn by the Lamas during their services and ceremonies. On these occasions they not only accompany their chanting and prayers with the beating of drums and clashing of cymbals, but they at the same time make a noise on cane flutes, tinkle hand-bells, and sound a large gong. The noise of these instruments is at times so great that the prayers themselves are quite inaudible. Unfortunately, [248] I failed to see any of the awe-inspiring masks which are used by Lamas in their eccentric and mystic dances, during which, when the Lamas spend the whole day in the temple, they consume much tea with butter and salt in it, which is brought to them in cups by Lamas of an inferior order, acting as servants. They pass hour after hour in their temples apparently absolutely absorbed in praying to the God above all gods, the incarnation of all the saints together united in a trinity, the Kunjuk-Sum.

Lights burning in brass bowls, with their wicks fueled by melted butter, were scattered across the floor of the central courtyard. Nearby lay rectangular prayer books printed on smooth yellow Tibetan paper made from fibrous bark. Next to these books were small drums and cymbals. I noticed one double drum was made from reversed sections of human skulls, and I was also drawn to the unusual headgear worn by the Lamas during their services and ceremonies. During these events, they not only accompany their chanting and prayers with the beating of drums and clashing of cymbals, but they also play cane flutes, jingle hand bells, and strike a large gong. The noise from these instruments can become so loud that the prayers are barely audible. Unfortunately, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] I didn't get to see any of the incredible masks used by Lamas in their unique and mystical dances, where they spend the entire day in the temple. They consume a lot of tea with butter and salt, which is served to them in cups by lower-ranking Lamas acting as attendants. They spend hour after hour in their temples, seemingly completely immersed in praying to the God above all gods, the embodiment of all saints united in a trinity, the Kunjuk-Sum.

Kunjuk-Sum, translated literally, means "the three deities," and some take it to refer to the elements, air, water and fire, which in the Tibetan mind are symbols of speech, charity and force and life. One great point in Buddhism, as everyone knows, is the advocation of love and respect to one's father and mother and the prohibition against injuring one's neighbours in any way. According to the precepts contained in some eight hundred volumes called the Kajars, the Tibetans believe in a heaven (the Deva Tsembo) free from all anxieties of human existence, full of love and joy, and ruled over by a god of infinite goodness, helped by countless disciples called the Chanchubs, who spend their existence in performing charitable deeds among living creatures. With a number of intermediate places of happiness and punishment they even believe in a hell, where the souls of sinners are tormented by fire and ice.

Kunjuk-Sum, literally translated, means "the three deities," and some interpret it as referring to the elements—air, water, and fire—which in Tibetan culture symbolize speech, charity, and life force. One key aspect of Buddhism, as everyone knows, is the emphasis on love and respect for one’s parents and the prohibition against harming one’s neighbors in any way. According to the teachings found in around eight hundred volumes known as the Kajars, the Tibetans believe in a heaven (the Deva Tsembo) that is free from all the anxieties of human life, filled with love and joy, and governed by a god of infinite goodness, supported by countless disciples called the Chanchubs, who dedicate their lives to performing charitable acts among living beings. They also believe in various intermediate realms of happiness and punishment, and even a hell where the souls of sinners suffer from fire and ice.

"God sees and knows everything, and He is everywhere," exclaimed the Lama, "but we cannot see Him. Only the Chanchubs can see and speak to Him."

"God sees and knows everything, and He is everywhere," shouted the Lama, "but we can't see Him. Only the Chanchubs can see and talk to Him."

"What are the evil qualities to be mostly avoided?" I inquired of the high Lama, who spoke a little Hindustani.

"What are the main evil qualities to avoid?" I asked the high Lama, who spoke a bit of Hindustani.

"Luxury, pride and envy," he replied.

"Luxury, pride, and envy," he replied.

"Do you ever expect to become a saint?" I asked him.

"Do you ever think you'll become a saint?" I asked him.

"Yes, I hope so, but it takes five hundred transmigrations of an uncontaminated soul before one can be one."

"Yeah, I really hope so, but it takes five hundred lives of a pure soul before someone can actually become one."

Then, as if waking to a sudden thought, he seized my hand impulsively and spread my fingers open. Having done this, he muttered two or three words of surprise. His face became serious, even solemn, and he treated me with strange obsequiousness. Rushing out of the temple, he went to inform the other Lamas of his discovery, whatever it was. They crowded round him, and from their words and gestures it was easy to see that they were bewildered.

Then, as if waking up to a sudden thought, he grabbed my hand impulsively and spread my fingers apart. After doing that, he muttered two or three surprised words. His face turned serious, even solemn, and he treated me with a strange kind of servility. He rushed out of the temple to tell the other Lamas about his discovery, whatever it was. They gathered around him, and from their words and gestures, it was clear that they were confused.

When I left the company of the strange idols and came into the courtyard, every Lama wished to examine and touch my hand, and the sudden change in their behaviour was to me a source of great curiosity, until I learnt the real cause of it some weeks later.

When I left the company of the strange idols and stepped into the courtyard, every Lama wanted to check and touch my hand, and their sudden shift in behavior made me really curious until I found out the real reason behind it a few weeks later.


[249]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XLVII

The Jong Pen's statements regarding me—Sects of Lamas—Lamaseries—Government allowance—Ignorance of the crowds—How Lamas are recruited—Lamas, novices, and menials—Dances and hypnotism—Infallibility—Celibacy and vice—Sculptors—Prayer-wheels and revolving instruments—Nunneries—Human bones for eating vessels and musical instruments—Blood-drinking.

Before I left the monastery, the Lamas, who had now become more or less accustomed to me, asked me many questions regarding India and concerning medicine. These seemed to be subjects of great interest to them. They also questioned me as to whether I had heard that a young sahib had crossed over the frontier with a large army, which the Jong Pen of Taklakot had defeated, beheading the sahib and the principal members of the expedition.

Before I left the monastery, the Lamas, who had now gotten used to me, asked me a lot of questions about India and medicine. These topics seemed to really interest them. They also wanted to know if I had heard that a young British officer had crossed the border with a large army, which the Jong Pen of Taklakot had defeated, beheading the officer and the main members of the expedition.

I professed to be ignorant of these facts, and so I really was, though I naturally felt much amused at the casual way in which the Jong Pen of Taklakot had disposed of the bearskin before he had even caught the bear himself. The Lamas took me for a Hindoo doctor, owing to the colour of my face, which was sunburnt and had long remained unwashed, and they thought that I was on a pilgrimage of circumambulation round the Mansarowar Lake. They appeared anxious to know whether illnesses were cured by occult sciences in India, or by medicines only. I, who, on the other hand, was more interested in getting information than in giving it, turned the conversation on the Lamas themselves.

I claimed to be unaware of these facts, and I genuinely was, although I couldn't help but find it amusing how casually the Jong Pen of Taklakot had dealt with the bearskin before he had even caught the bear. The Lamas assumed I was a Hindu doctor because of my sunburned face, which had gone a long time without being washed, and they thought I was on a pilgrimage around Mansarowar Lake. They seemed eager to know if illnesses in India were treated with occult skills or just medicine. I, however, was more interested in getting information than sharing it, so I shifted the conversation to the Lamas themselves.

Of course I knew that there are sects of red, yellow, white and black Lamas, the red ones being the older and more numerous throughout the country; next to them come the yellow Lamas, the Gelupkas, equally powerful in [250] political and religious matters, but not quite so numerous; and, lastly, the white Lamas and the black Lamas, the Julinba, who are the craftsmen in the monasteries, working at painting, printing, pottery and ornamentation, besides attending on the other Lamas and making themselves useful all round in the capacities of cooks, shepherds, water-carriers, writers, and last, but not least, executioners. The lamaseries are usually very rich, for the Tibetans are a deeply devout race, and the Lamas are not backward in learning how to extort money from the ignorant worshippers under pretences of all kinds. Besides attending to their religious functions, the Lamas are traders at large, carrying on a smart money-lending business, and charging a very high interest, which falls due every month. If this should remain unpaid, all the property of the borrower is confiscated, and if this prove insufficient to repay the loan the debtor himself becomes a slave to the monastery. It is evident, from the well-fed countenances of the Lamas, that, notwithstanding their occasional bodily privations, they as a rule do not allow themselves to suffer in any way, and no doubt can be entertained as to their leading a smooth and comfortable existence of comparative luxury—a condition which frequently degenerates into vice and depravity.

Of course I knew that there are groups of red, yellow, white, and black Lamas, with the red ones being the oldest and most numerous across the country; next are the yellow Lamas, the Gelupkas, who are also powerful in political and religious matters but not quite as numerous; and finally, the white Lamas and the black Lamas, the Julinba, who are the craftsmen in the monasteries, working on painting, printing, pottery, and decoration, in addition to assisting the other Lamas and being helpful in various roles such as cooks, shepherds, water-carriers, writers, and, last but not least, executioners. The monasteries are usually very wealthy, as the Tibetans are a deeply devout people, and the Lamas are skilled at extorting money from the uninformed worshippers under various pretenses. Besides fulfilling their religious duties, the Lamas engage in trading, running a lucrative money-lending business that charges very high interest, due every month. If payments are missed, the borrower's property is seized, and if that isn't enough to cover the debt, the borrower themselves becomes a slave to the monastery. It's clear from the well-fed faces of the Lamas that, despite their occasional physical deprivations, they generally do not allow themselves to suffer at all, and there’s no doubt that they lead a smooth and comfortable life of relative luxury—a situation that often deteriorates into vice and moral decay.

The larger lamaseries receive a yearly Government allowance, and considerable sums are collected from the oblations of the faithful, while other moneys are obtained by all sorts of devices which, in any country less religious than Tibet, would be considered hardly honourable and often even altogether criminal. To any one acquainted with Tibet, it is a well-known fact that, except in the larger towns, nearly all people besides brigands and Lamas are absolutely poor, while the monks themselves and their agents live and prosper on the fat of the land. The masses are maintained in complete ignorance, and seldom is a layman found who can write or even read. Thus everything has to go through the Lamas' hands before it can be sanctioned.

The larger monasteries receive an annual allowance from the government, and they collect significant amounts from the offerings of the faithful. They also obtain money through various methods that, in any less religious country than Tibet, would be considered quite dishonorable and often outright illegal. Anyone familiar with Tibet knows that, except in the bigger towns, nearly all people aside from bandits and monks are extremely poor, while the monks and their representatives thrive on the wealth of the land. The general population is kept completely uninformed, and it's rare to find a layperson who can read or write. As a result, everything has to pass through the monks' hands before it can be approved.

The lamaseries and the Lamas, and the land and property belonging to them, are absolutely free from all taxes and dues, and each Lama or novice is supported for life by an allowance of tsamba, bricks of tea, and salt. They are recruited from all ranks, and whether honest folks or murderers, thieves or swindlers, all are eagerly welcomed on joining the brotherhood. One or two male members of each family in Tibet take monastic orders, and by these means the monks obtain a great hold over each house- or

The lamaseries and the Lamas, along with their land and property, are completely exempt from all taxes and fees. Each Lama or novice is supported for life with an allowance of tsamba, tea bricks, and salt. They come from all backgrounds, and whether they're good people or criminals like murderers, thieves, or swindlers, all are welcomed with open arms into the brotherhood. Typically, one or two males from each family in Tibet take monastic vows, and through this, the monks gain significant influence over each household.

[251]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Tucker Village and Gomba

Tucker Village and Gomba


[252] tent-hold. It is hardly an exaggeration to say that in Tibet half the male population are Lamas.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] tent-hold. It's not an exaggeration to say that in Tibet, half of the male population are Lamas.

In each monastery are found Lamas, Chibbis, and a lower grade of ignorant and depraved Lamas, slaves, as it were, of the higher order. They dress, and have clean-shaven heads like their superiors, and do all the handiwork of the monastery; but they are mere servants, and take no direct, active part in the politics of the Lama Government. The Chibbis are novices. They enter the lamasery when very young, and remain students for many years. They are constantly under the teaching and supervision of the older ones, and confession is practised from inferior to superior. After undergoing, successfully, several examinations they become effective Lamas, which word translated means "high priest." These Chibbis take minor parts in the strange religious ceremonies in which the Lamas, disguised in skins and ghastly masks, sing and dance with extraordinary contortions to the accompaniment of weird music made by bells, horns, flutes, cymbals and drums.

In each monastery, there are Lamas, Chibbis, and a lower group of uninformed and corrupt Lamas, who serve as the subordinates to the higher-ups. They dress similarly and have clean-shaven heads like their superiors, and they perform all the manual labor for the monastery; however, they are just servants and do not take any direct, active role in the politics of the Lama Government. The Chibbis are novices. They enter the lamasery at a very young age and remain students for many years. They are always under the instruction and supervision of the older ones, and confession happens from the inferior to the superior. After successfully passing several examinations, they become full-fledged Lamas, which translates to "high priest." These Chibbis participate in minor roles during the unusual religious ceremonies, where the Lamas, dressed in skins and terrifying masks, sing and dance in extraordinary ways to strange music created by bells, horns, flutes, cymbals, and drums.

Each large monastery has at its head a Grand Lama, not to be confounded with the Dalai Lama of Lhassa, who is believed, or rather supposed, to have an immortal soul transmigrating successively from one body into another.

Each large monastery is led by a Grand Lama, which should not be confused with the Dalai Lama of Lhassa. It is believed, or rather assumed, that he has an immortal soul that moves from one body to another.

The Lamas eat, drink and sleep together in the monastery, with the exception of the Grand Lama, who has a room to himself. For one moon in every twelve they observe a strict seclusion, which they devote to praying, and during which time they are not allowed to speak. They fast for twenty-four hours at a time, with only water and butter-tea, eating on fast-days sufficient food only to remain alive, and depriving themselves of everything else, including snuff and spitting, the two most common habits among Tibetan men.

The Lamas eat, drink, and sleep together in the monastery, except for the Grand Lama, who has his own room. For one month each year, they go into strict seclusion, dedicating that time to prayer, during which they aren’t allowed to speak. They fast for twenty-four hours at a time, consuming only water and butter tea, eating just enough on fasting days to survive, and avoiding everything else, including snuff and spitting, which are two common habits among Tibetan men.

The Lamas have great pretensions to infallibility, and on account of this they claim, and obtain, the veneration of the people, by whom they are supported, fed and clothed. I found them, as a rule, very intelligent, but inhuman, barbarously cruel and dishonourable, and this was not my own experience alone: I heard the same from the overridden natives, who wish for nothing better than a chance to shake off their yoke.

The Lamas have a strong belief in their own infallibility, and because of this, they demand and receive the respect of the people, who support, feed, and clothe them. Generally, I found them to be quite intelligent, but also inhumane, cruel, and dishonorable. This wasn’t just my experience; I heard the same from the oppressed locals, who are eager for any opportunity to break free from their oppression.

Availing themselves of the absolute ignorance in which they succeed in keeping the people, the Lamas practise to a great extent occult arts, by which they profess to cure illnesses, discover murders and thefts, stop rivers from [253] flowing, and bring storms about at a moment's notice. Certain exorcisms, they say, drive away the evil spirits that cause disease. It is certain that the Lamas are adepts at hypnotic experiments, by which means they contrive to let the subjects under their influence see many things and objects that are not there in reality. To this power are due the frequent reports of apparitions of Buddha, seen generally by single individuals, and the visions of demons, the accounts of which alone terrify the simple-minded folk, and cause them to pay all their spare cash in donations to the monastery.

Taking advantage of the complete ignorance they maintain among the people, the Lamas extensively practice occult arts, claiming they can cure illnesses, solve murders and thefts, stop rivers from flowing, and create storms at a moment's notice. They assert that certain exorcisms can drive away the evil spirits that cause illness. It’s clear that the Lamas are skilled in hypnotic techniques, which allow them to make subjects under their influence see many things and objects that don’t actually exist. This power explains the frequent reports of Buddha apparitions, usually witnessed by individuals, and visions of demons, which alone terrify the simple-minded and lead them to give all their spare money as donations to the monastery.

Mesmerism plays an important part in their weird dances, during which extraordinary contortions are performed, and strange positions assumed, the body of the dancer being eventually reduced to a cataleptic state, in which it remains for a great length of time.

Mesmerism is a key element in their strange dances, where amazing twists and odd poses are showcased, and the dancer’s body ultimately enters a cataleptic state, remaining like that for a long time.

The Lamas swear to celibacy when they enter a lamasery; but they do not always keep these vows, and they are besides addicted to the most disgusting of all vices in its very worst forms, which accounts for the repulsive appearance of far-gone depravity so common among the middle-aged Lamas.

The Lamas take a vow of celibacy when they join a lamasery, but they don’t always adhere to these promises. Additionally, they are often involved in some of the most repulsive vices in their most extreme forms, which explains the unpleasant look of extreme depravity that is frequently seen among middle-aged Lamas.

All the larger lamaseries support one or more Lama sculptors, who travel all over the district, and go to the most inaccessible spots to carve on rocks, stones, or pieces of horn, the everlasting inscription, "Omne mani padme hun," which one sees all over the country. Unseen, I once succeeded, after much difficulty and discomfort, in carrying away two of these very heavy inscribed stones, which are still in my possession, and of which reproductions are here given.

All the bigger lamaseries have one or more Lama sculptors who travel around the area and go to the hardest-to-reach places to carve the everlasting inscription, "Omne mani padme hun," onto rocks, stones, or pieces of horn. Without being noticed, I once managed, after a lot of struggle and discomfort, to take two of these very heavy inscribed stones, which I still have, and reproductions of them are included here.

Weird and picturesque places, such as the highest points on mountain passes, gigantic boulders, rocks near the sources of rivers, or any spot where a mani wall exists, are the places most generally selected by these artists to engrave the magic formula alluding to the reincarnation of Buddha from a lotus flower.

Weird and beautiful places, like the highest points on mountain passes, massive boulders, rocks near river sources, or any spot with a mani wall, are the most commonly chosen by these artists to engrave the magic formula referring to the reincarnation of Buddha from a lotus flower.

The famous prayer-wheels, those mechanical contrivances by which the Tibetans pray to their god by means of water, wind and hand-power, are also manufactured by Lama artists. The larger ones, moved by water, are constructed by the side of, or over, a stream, and the huge cylinders on which the entire Tibetan prayer-book is inscribed are revolved by the flowing water. The wheels moved by wind-power are similar to those used by the Shokas, which I have already described, but the Tibetans often have prayers printed on the slips of cloth. The [254] smaller prayer-wheels, revolved by hand, are of two different kinds, and are made either of silver or copper. Those for home use are cylinders, about six inches high. Inside these revolve on pivots, on the principle of a spinning top, the rolls of prayers which, by means of a projecting knob above the machine, the worshipper sets in motion. The prayers can be seen revolving inside through a square opening in the cylinder. The more universal prayer-wheel in everyday use in Tibet is, however, of the pattern shown in the illustration. It is usually constructed of copper, sometimes of brass, and frequently entirely or partly of silver. The cylinder has two movable lids, between which the prayer-roll fits tightly. A handle with an iron rod is passed through the centre of the cylinder and roll, and is kept in its place by means of a knob. A ring, encircling the cylinder, attaches it to a short chain and weight; this serves, when started by a jerk of the hand, to give a rotatory movement, which must, according to rule, be from left to right, and which is kept up indefinitely, the words "Omne mani padme hun," or simply "Mani, mani," being repeated all the time.

The famous prayer wheels, those mechanical devices through which Tibetans pray to their god using water, wind, and manual power, are also made by Lama artists. The larger ones, powered by water, are built next to or over a stream, and the massive cylinders that have the entire Tibetan prayer book inscribed on them are turned by the flowing water. The wheels that are powered by the wind are similar to those used by the Shokas, which I've already described, but Tibetans often print prayers on slips of cloth. The smaller prayer wheels, turned by hand, come in two different types and are made from either silver or copper. The ones meant for home use are cylinders about six inches tall. Inside, prayer rolls spin on pivots, like a spinning top, which the worshipper sets in motion using a knob above the machine. The prayers can be seen rotating inside through a square opening in the cylinder. However, the more common prayer wheel used every day in Tibet is of the type shown in the illustration. It is typically made of copper, sometimes brass, and often entirely or partially silver. The cylinder has two movable lids, which hold the prayer roll tightly. A handle with an iron rod goes through the center of the cylinder and roll, secured by a knob. A ring around the cylinder connects it to a short chain and weight; this allows it to spin when given a quick motion by hand, which must, according to tradition, be in a left-to-right direction and can keep going indefinitely while the words "Omne mani padme hun" or simply "Mani, mani" are recited continuously.

Stone with Inscription

Inscribed Stone


The more ancient wheels have the prayers written by hand instead of printed, and are contained in a small black bag. Charms, such as rings of malachite, jade, bone, or silver, are often attached to the weight and chain by which the rotary movement is given to the wheel. These praying-[255]machines are found in every Tibetan family, and nearly every Lama possesses one. They keep them jealously, and it is very difficult to get the real ones. I was particularly fortunate, and during my journey in Tibet I was able to purchase as many as twelve, two of which were extremely old.

The older prayer wheels have the prayers hand-written instead of printed, and are kept in a small black pouch. Charms like rings made of malachite, jade, bone, or silver are often attached to the weight and chain that makes the wheel turn. These prayer machines can be found in every Tibetan household, and almost every Lama has one. They take great care of them, and it’s quite hard to find the genuine ones. I was especially lucky, and during my trip in Tibet, I managed to buy twelve of them, two of which were very old.

Prayer-wheels—Ancient and Modern. Showing Rolls of Prayers to Go Inside

Prayer wheels—Ancient and Modern. Displaying Rolls of Prayers to Place Inside


Besides the rosary, which the Lamas always use in a similar way to the Roman Catholics, they have a brass instrument which they twist between the palms of their hands while saying prayers, and this is used exclusively by Lamas. It is from 2½ to 3 inches in length, and is rounded so as to be easily held in the hollow of the two hands.

Besides the rosary, which the Lamas always use much like Roman Catholics do, they have a brass instrument that they twist between their palms while saying prayers, and this is used solely by Lamas. It measures about 2½ to 3 inches long and is rounded to fit easily in the palms of both hands.

In Tibet, as in other Buddhist countries, there are nunneries besides lamaseries. The nuns, most unattractive in themselves, shave their heads and practise witchcraft and magic, just as the Lamas do. They are looked down upon by the masses. In some of these nunneries strict clausura [256] is enforced, but in most of them the Lamas are allowed free access, with the usual result, that the nuns become the concubines of the Lamas. Even apart from this, the women of the nunneries are quite as immoral as their brethren of the lamaseries, and at their best they are but a low type of humanity.

In Tibet, just like in other Buddhist countries, there are nunneries in addition to lamaseries. The nuns, generally not considered attractive, shave their heads and practice witchcraft and magic, similar to the Lamas. They are looked down upon by the general public. In some of these nunneries, strict clausura [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] is enforced, but in most of them, the Lamas have free access, which usually leads to the nuns becoming the concubines of the Lamas. Even aside from this, the women in the nunneries are just as immoral as their male counterparts in the lamaseries, and at their best, they are considered a low type of humanity.

The Lamas who, at certain periods of the year, are allowed an unusual amount of freedom with women, are those who practise the art of making musical instruments and eating-vessels out of human bones. The skull is used for making drinking-cups, tsamba bowls, and single and double drums, and the humerus, femur, and tibia bones are turned into trumpets and pipes. These particular Lamas are said to relish human blood, which they drink out of the cups made from men's skulls.

The Lamas who, at certain times of the year, are permitted an unusual level of freedom with women are those who create musical instruments and eating utensils from human bones. The skulls are used to make drinking cups, tsamba bowls, and both single and double drums, while the humerus, femur, and tibia bones are crafted into trumpets and pipes. These specific Lamas are said to enjoy drinking human blood from the cups made from human skulls.

Stone with Inscription

Engraved Stone


[257]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XLVIII

Illnesses and remedies—Curious theories about fever—Evil spirits—Blacksmith and dentist—Exorcisms—Surgical operations—Massage and cupping—Incurable illnesses—Deformities—Deafness—Fits and insanity—Melancholia—Suicides.

The Lamas became quite communicative, enabling me, partly with the little Hindustani that I knew and partly with the Tibetan I had picked up, to enter into a conversation about illnesses and their remedies, certain as I was that they must have strange notions on the subject. I was not disappointed in this surmise, and from that conversation and my own observation on previous and subsequent occasions, I am able to give a few details of the methods of the Lamas in curing the more frequent ailments found in the country.

The Lamas opened up quite a bit, allowing me, using a bit of Hindustani I knew and some Tibetan I had learned, to chat about illnesses and their treatments, certain they would have some unique ideas on the topic. I wasn't let down by this assumption, and from that discussion and my own observations before and after, I can share a few details about the Lamas' methods for treating the common ailments found in the area.

The Lamas explained to me that all diseases arose from fever, instead of fever being an accompaniment of most illnesses, and furthermore, that fever itself was but an evil spirit, which assumed different forms when it entered the body, and caused all sorts of complaints. The fever demon, they asserted, was a spirit, but there were yet other demons who were so good as to bring us riches and happiness. For instance, when a man after a dangerous illness visited a a cave, waterfall or river-gorge which these demons were supposed to haunt, he might have a relapse and die, or he might be instantly cured and live happy ever afterwards. In the latter case, as would naturally be expected, the recipient of such inestimable privileges generally returned to pay a second visit to the kindly spirits who made his life worth living, "but," said the Lamas quite seriously, "when he goes a second time he will get blind or paralytic, as a punishment for his greediness."

The Lamas told me that all diseases came from fever, instead of fever being just a side effect of most illnesses. They also said that fever was actually an evil spirit that took on different forms when it entered the body, causing all sorts of problems. They claimed the fever demon was a spirit, but there were other demons that were generous enough to bring us wealth and happiness. For example, when a man who had just recovered from a serious illness visited a cave, waterfall, or river gorge that these demons were believed to inhabit, he might relapse and die, or he might be instantly cured and live happily ever after. In the latter case, as you might expect, the person who received such incredible blessings usually returned to visit the kind spirits that made his life worthwhile. "But," the Lamas said quite seriously, "when he goes back a second time, he will become blind or paralyzed as a punishment for his greed."

"The evil spirits," continued a fat old Lama with crooked [258] fingers, which he clenched and shook as he spoke, "are in the shape of human beings or like goats, dogs, sheep or ponies, and sometimes they assume the semblance of wild animals, such as bears and snow leopards."

"The evil spirits," continued a plump old Lama with crooked fingers, which he clenched and shook as he spoke, "appear as human beings or take the form of goats, dogs, sheep, or ponies, and at times they look like wild animals, such as bears and snow leopards."

I told the Lamas that I had remarked many cases of goître and also other abnormalities, such as hare-lip and webbed fingers and toes, as well as the very frequent occurrence of supernumerary fingers or toes. I asked them the reason for such cases, and they attributed them, with the exception of webbed fingers, to the mischievous work of demons before the child's birth; they could not, however, suggest a remedy for goître.

I told the Lamas that I had noticed many cases of goiter and other issues, like cleft lip and webbed fingers and toes, as well as the common occurrence of extra fingers or toes. I asked them why these happened, and they said that, except for webbed fingers, it was the naughty work of demons before the child was born; however, they couldn’t suggest a cure for goiter.

Inguinal and umbilical hernia are quite common, as I have on several occasions observed, and coarse belts are made according to the taste and ingenuity of the sufferer, but are of hardly any efficacy in preventing the increase of the swellings.

Inguinal and umbilical hernias are pretty common, as I've seen on several occasions, and people create makeshift belts based on their preferences and creativity, but these are hardly effective in stopping the swellings from getting worse.

A common complaint, especially among the older women, was rheumatism, from which they seemed to suffer considerably. It affected their fingers and toes, and particularly the wrists and ankles, the joints swelling so as to render them quite stiff, the tendons contracting, swelling, and becoming prominent and hard in the palms of the hands.

A common complaint, especially among the older women, was rheumatism, which they seemed to suffer from a lot. It affected their fingers and toes, and especially their wrists and ankles, making the joints swell and become quite stiff, with the tendons tightening, swelling, and becoming prominent and hard in the palms of their hands.

Both before and after my conversation with the Lamas I had opportunities of ascertaining that the stomachs of the Tibetans are seldom in good working order. But how could they be when you consider the gallons of filthy tea which they drink daily, and the liquor to which they are so partial? This poisonous concoction is enough to destroy the gastric juices of an ostrich! The tongue, as I have mentioned already, is invariably thickly furred with a whitish coating, and Tibetans have often complained to me of tumours as well as of painful burnings in the stomach, the latter undoubtedly caused by ulcerations. It is to be regretted that, even in the high land of Tibet, the worst of all sexual diseases (called by the Tibetans Boru) has made vast numbers of victims, palpable traces of it showing themselves in eruptions, particularly on the forehead and on the ears, round the mouth and under the nostrils, on the arms and legs. In cases of very long standing, a peculiar whitish discoloration of the skin and gums was to be noticed, with abnormal contraction of the pupils. That such a disease is well rooted in the country we have proof enough in the foul teeth which the majority of Tibetans possess. In nearly all cases that I examined, the teeth were, even in young men, so loose, decayed and broken as to make me feel quite sorry [259] for their owners, and during the whole time I was in Tibet—and I came in contact with several thousand people—I believe that I could almost count on my fingers the sets of teeth that appeared quite regular, healthy and strong. As a rule, too, the women had better teeth than the men. No doubt the admixture of bad blood in the Tibetan race contributes a great deal to the unevenness and malformation of their teeth, and if we add to this the fact that the corruption of the blood, even apart from disease, is very great owing to their peculiar laws of marriage, it is not surprising that the services of dentists are everywhere required. The teeth of Tibetans are generally of such a brittle nature that the dentist of Tibet—usually a Lama and a blacksmith as well—has devised an ingenious way of protecting them from further destruction by means of a silver cap encasing the broken tooth. I once saw a man with all his front teeth covered in this fashion, and as the dentist who had attended to him had constructed the small cases apparently with no regard to shape or comfort, but had made most of them end in a point for mastication's sake, the poor man had a ghastly appearance every time that he opened his mouth. The Tibetans are not very sensitive to physical pain, as I have had reason to judge on several occasions, when I have seen teeth extracted in the most primitive fashion, without a sound being emitted from the sufferer.

Both before and after my talk with the Lamas, I noticed that Tibetans often have stomach issues. It's no wonder, considering the gallons of horrible tea they drink daily and their fondness for alcohol. This toxic mix could ruin the stomach of an ostrich! As I mentioned earlier, their tongues are usually covered in a thick, white coating, and many Tibetans have told me about tumors and painful burning sensations in their stomachs, likely due to ulcers. It's unfortunate that even in highland Tibet, one of the worst sexual diseases (referred to by Tibetans as Boru) has affected countless individuals, with visible signs appearing as eruptions on their foreheads, ears, around their mouths, and under their nostrils, as well as on their arms and legs. In long-standing cases, there’s often a peculiar white discoloration of the skin and gums, along with abnormally constricted pupils. The deep-rooted nature of this disease is evident in the poor dental health of most Tibetans. In nearly every case I examined, even young men had teeth that were loose, decayed, and broken, which made me feel sorry for them. During my time in Tibet, where I interacted with thousands of people, I could almost count on my fingers the number of people who had healthy and strong teeth. Generally, the women had better teeth than the men. The mixing of bad blood in the Tibetan population likely contributes to their uneven and malformed teeth, and when you consider their unique marriage customs, it's not surprising that dentists are in high demand. The teeth of Tibetans are typically so brittle that the local dentist—often a Lama who doubles as a blacksmith—has come up with a clever way to protect them from further damage using silver caps to cover broken teeth. I once saw a man whose front teeth were all covered this way, and since the dentist had made the caps without considering shape or comfort, most of them ended in a point for chewing. This made the poor man look quite ghastly whenever he opened his mouth. Tibetans don’t seem very sensitive to physical pain; I've seen teeth pulled in the most rudimentary ways without a single sound from the person enduring it.

In South-Western Tibet the Hunyas (Tibetans) have the same strange notions on transmigration of evil spirits that are common to the Shokas. For instance, if a man falls ill, they maintain that the only remedy is to drive away the evil spirit which has entered his body. Now, according to Tibetan and Shoka ideas, evil spirits always enter a living body to satisfy their craving for blood: therefore, to please the spirit and decoy him away, if the illness be slight, a small animal such as a dog or a bird is brought and placed close by the patient; if the illness be grave, a sheep is produced and exorcisms are made in the following fashion. A bowl of water is whirled three or four times over the sick man's head, and then again over the animal selected, upon whose head it is poured. These circles, described with certain mystic words, have the power of drawing the spirit out of its first quarters and causing it to enter the brain of the second victim, upon whose skull the water is poured to prevent its returning back.

In South-Western Tibet, the Hunyas (Tibetans) share the same odd beliefs about the transmigration of evil spirits that the Shokas have. For example, if someone gets sick, they believe the only solution is to drive away the evil spirit that has entered their body. According to Tibetan and Shoka beliefs, evil spirits enter a living being to satisfy their thirst for blood; therefore, to appease the spirit and lure it away, if the illness is mild, a small animal like a dog or a bird is brought and placed near the patient. If the illness is serious, a sheep is used, and exorcisms are performed in the following way: a bowl of water is spun three or four times over the sick person's head, then over the chosen animal, onto which the water is poured. These circles, spoken with certain mystical words, have the power to draw the spirit out of its initial host and make it enter the brain of the second victim, onto whose head the water is poured to stop it from returning.

"Of course," said my informer with an air of great gravity, "if you can give the evil spirit a present in the shape of a living being that will satisfy him, he will depart [260] quite happy." If the illness is slight, it means that the spirit is not much out of temper, and a small present is enough to satisfy him, but if the disease is serious, nothing less than a sheep or even a yak will be sufficient. As soon as the spirit has changed his temporary abode the animal is quickly dragged away to a crossing of four roads, and if there are no roads a cross is previously drawn on the ground, where a grave for the animal is dug, into which it is mercilessly thrown and buried alive. The spirit, unable to make a rapid escape, remains to suck the blood of his last victim, and in the meantime the sick man, deprived of the company of his ethereal and unwelcome guest, has time to make a speedy recovery. When a smaller animal is used, such as a dog or a bird, and when the patient complains of more than one ailment, the poor beast, having been conveyed to the crossing of four roads, is suddenly seized and brutally torn into four parts, which are flung in four different directions, the idea being that, wherever there may be spirits waiting for blood, they will get their share and depart happy. After their craving is satisfied, the evil spirits are not very particular whether the blood is human or not. In Shoka land especially, branches with thorns and small flying prayers are placed on each road to prevent their immediate return. These are said to be insuperable barriers to the evil spirits.

"Sure," said my informant seriously, "if you can give the evil spirit a gift in the form of a living being that will please him, he'll leave quite content." If the illness is mild, it means the spirit isn't very upset, and a small gift is enough to satisfy him. But if the illness is severe, nothing less than a sheep or even a yak will do. Once the spirit has switched his temporary place, the animal is quickly taken to a crossroads, and if there aren't any roads, a cross is drawn on the ground where a grave for the animal is dug, into which it is heartlessly thrown and buried alive. The spirit, unable to escape quickly, sticks around to drain the blood of his last victim, while the sick person, rid of the company of his ethereal and unwanted guest, has time to recover fast. When a smaller animal, like a dog or a bird, is used, and the patient has more than one issue, the poor creature, once taken to the crossroads, is suddenly grabbed and brutally torn into four pieces, which are thrown in four different directions, with the idea being that wherever spirits are waiting for blood, they'll get their share and leave satisfied. After their hunger is quenched, the evil spirits aren't too picky about whether the blood is human or not. In Shoka land, especially, branches with thorns and small flying prayers are placed on each road to stop their immediate return. These are said to be unbeatable barriers against the evil spirits.

Branch with Thorns to Prevent Return of Evil Spirits
Branch with Thorns to Prevent Return of Evil Spirits

When a patient completely recovers, the Lamas naturally obtain money for the exorcisms which have expelled the illness, and they never fail to impress upon the people the extraordinary powers they possess over the much-dreaded demons.

When a patient fully recovers, the Lamas naturally receive payment for the exorcisms that drove out the illness, and they always make sure to emphasize their incredible powers over the feared demons.

The Tibetans are unsuccessful in surgery, first of all because they do not possess sufficient knowledge of human anatomy; secondly, because their fingers are wanting in suppleness and sensitiveness of touch; and lastly, because they are not able to manufacture instruments of sufficient sharpness to perform surgical operations with speed and cleanliness. In Tibet everybody is a surgeon, thus woe to the unfortunate who needs one. It is true that amputation is seldom performed; but if it should become necessary, and the operation is at all difficult, the patient [261] generally succumbs. The Tibetan surgeon does not know how to saw bones, and so merely severs the limb at the place where the fracture has occurred. The operation is performed with any knife or dagger that happens to be at hand, and is, therefore, attended with much pain, and frequently has disastrous results. The precaution is taken to tie up the broken limb above the fracture, but it is done in such a clumsy way that very often, owing to the bad quality of Tibetan blood, mortification sets in, and, as the Tibetans are at a loss what to do on such occasions, another victim goes to join the majority.

The Tibetans struggle with surgery for a few reasons. First, they lack adequate knowledge of human anatomy. Second, their fingers lack the flexibility and sensitivity needed for delicate work. Lastly, they can’t create instruments that are sharp enough to perform surgical procedures quickly and cleanly. In Tibet, everyone claims to be a surgeon, so it's unfortunate for anyone who actually needs one. While amputations are rare, if one is necessary and the procedure is complex, the patient usually doesn't survive. Tibetan surgeons don’t know how to saw through bones, so they just cut off the limb where the break occurred. They use whatever knife or dagger is available, which causes a lot of pain and often leads to serious complications. They do try to tie up the injured limb above the fracture, but they do it in such a clumsy way that, due to the poor quality of Tibetan blood, gangrene often sets in. Since Tibetans are unsure how to handle these situations, more people end up dying.

Considering the nomadic habits of the Tibetans and the rough life they lead, they are comparatively immune from very bad accidents. Occasionally there is a broken arm or leg which they manage to set roughly, if the fracture is not a compound one, by putting the bones back in their right position, and by tightly bandaging the limbs with rags, pieces of cloth and rope. Splinters are used when wood is obtainable. A powder made from a fungus growing on oak-trees in the Himahlyas is imported and used by the Tibetans near the frontier. A thick layer of it, when wet, is rubbed and left upon the broken limb, over which the bandaging is afterwards done. In a healthy person, a simple fracture of the leg, which by chance has been properly set, takes from twenty to thirty days to heal, after which the patient can begin moving about; and a broken arm does not require to be kept in a sling more than fifteen or twenty days. If these cures are somewhat more rapid than with our more civilised methods of bone-setting, it is merely due to the wholesome climate and the fact that the natives spend most of their days out in the open air and in the sun, undoubtedly the best cure for any complaint of that kind; but, of course, it is but seldom that the bones are joined properly, and they generally remain a deformity. More satisfactory results are obtained with cases of dislocations by pulling the bones into their right position.

Considering the nomadic lifestyle of the Tibetans and the tough conditions they face, they are relatively protected from serious accidents. Occasionally, someone might end up with a broken arm or leg, which they manage to set roughly, as long as the fracture isn't a compound one, by aligning the bones and tightly wrapping the limbs with rags, pieces of cloth, and rope. Splints are used whenever wood is available. They import a powder made from a fungus that grows on oak trees in the Himalayas, which is utilized by Tibetans near the border. A thick layer of this powder, when wet, is rubbed onto the broken limb and covered with bandaging. For a healthy person, a simple leg fracture that has been properly set takes about twenty to thirty days to heal, after which the individual can start moving around; a broken arm typically doesn’t need to be kept in a sling for more than fifteen or twenty days. If their recovery seems faster than with our more advanced methods of bone-setting, it’s mainly due to the healthy climate and the fact that locals spend most of their time outdoors in the sun, which is definitely the best remedy for such issues; however, bones are rarely aligned correctly, and they usually heal in a deformed position. Better results are achieved with dislocations by pulling the bones back into place.

In case of wounds the bleeding is arrested by the application of a wet rag tightly bound over the wound. In most cases of unbandaged wounds that came under my notice the process of healing was a very slow one, the great changes in the temperature between night and day often causing them to open of themselves. They made good headway towards recovery in the beginning, but the skin was very slow in joining and re-forming.

In the case of wounds, the bleeding can be stopped by applying a wet cloth tightly over the injury. In most unbandaged wounds I've seen, the healing process was quite slow, with the significant temperature changes between night and day often causing them to reopen on their own. They initially showed good progress toward recovery, but the skin took a long time to heal and come together again.

Burns are treated by smearing butter over them; and a [262] poultice of rhubarb is used to send down swellings of contusions as well as for the purpose of bringing boils, from which the Tibetans suffer much, to a speedy maturation.

Burns are treated by spreading butter on them; and a poultice of rhubarb is used to reduce swelling from bruises as well as to help boils, which the Tibetans often suffer from, ripen quickly.

Aconite is given for fever and rheumatism, and a rough kind of massage is used to allay pain in the muscles of limbs. It is generally done by the women, who, as far as I could judge, practised it with no real knowledge but merely contented themselves with violent rubbing and pinching and thumping until signs of relief appeared on the sufferer's face. Whether, however, these manifestations were due to actual soothing of pain, or to the prospect of the masseuse bringing her treatment to an end, I could never properly ascertain. Tibetan fingers are not well adapted for such work, being clumsy and, compared with those of other Asiatic races, quite stiff and hard.

Aconite is used for fever and rheumatism, and a rough type of massage is performed to ease muscle pain in the limbs. This is usually done by women who, as far as I could tell, practiced it without real knowledge, simply relying on vigorous rubbing, pinching, and thumping until they saw signs of relief on the patient's face. However, I could never really determine whether these signs were because of actual pain relief or just the hope that the masseuse would finish her treatment soon. Tibetan fingers aren't suited for this kind of work; they tend to be clumsy and, compared to those of other Asian cultures, are quite stiff and rough.

Cupping is adopted with success. Three or four small incisions are made close to one another and a conical cupping-horn about seven inches long, having a tiny hole at its point, is applied over them. The operator then sucks through this small aperture until the horn is full of blood, when it is removed and the operation begun again. With poisoned wounds the sucking is done by applying the lips to the wound itself.

Cupping is successfully used. Three or four small cuts are made close together, and a conical cupping horn about seven inches long, with a tiny hole at the tip, is placed over them. The practitioner then sucks through this small opening until the horn fills with blood, after which it is removed, and the process is repeated. For poisoned wounds, the sucking is done by applying the lips directly to the wound.

Bleeding is used as a remedy for bruises and swellings, and for internal pain, also for acute attacks of rheumatism and articular pains. If it is not sufficient, the branding cure is resorted to, and if this should also fail, then the tinder cones, to be described later on, come into play and, the seat of the pain being encircled with them, they are set alight. When even this remedy proves inefficacious, and the patient survives it, the illness is pronounced incurable!

Bleeding is used as a treatment for bruises and swelling, as well as for internal pain, acute attacks of rheumatism, and joint pain. If that’s not enough, they turn to branding as a remedy, and if that doesn’t work either, then they use tinder cones, which will be explained later. These are placed around the area of pain and set on fire. If this remedy also doesn’t work and the patient survives, the illness is deemed incurable!

Natural abnormalities and deformities are frequent enough in Tibet, and some came under my notice in nearly every camp I entered. Deformities of the spine were common, such as displacement of the shoulder-blades; and I saw during my stay in Tibet many cases of actually humpbacked people. There were frequent cases, too, of crookedness of the legs, and clubfoot was not rare, while one constantly met with webbed fingers and supernumerary fingers and toes, as well as the absence of one or more of them. Malformations of the skull, such as the two sides being of marked unequal shape or an abnormal distance between the eye sockets, were the two most common deformities that came under my notice.

Natural abnormalities and deformities are quite common in Tibet, and I noticed them in almost every camp I visited. Deformities of the spine were frequent, like dislocated shoulder blades; during my time in Tibet, I saw many people who were actually humpbacked. There were also many cases of crooked legs, and clubfoot was not unusual. It was common to come across webbed fingers and extra fingers and toes, as well as the absence of one or more of them. Skull malformations, such as significant asymmetry or an unusual distance between the eye sockets, were the two most common deformities I observed.

The ears of men of the better classes were much elongated [263] artificially by the constant wearing of heavy earrings, which sometimes even tore the lobe of the ear.

The ears of upper-class men were often stretched out [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] artificially by regularly wearing heavy earrings, which sometimes even ripped the earlobe.

The most frequent and curious of all was the extreme swelling of children's stomachs, caused by the umbilical cord not being properly tied at birth. The operation was generally performed by the mother and father of the newly-born or by some friend at hand. The infants had such enormous paunches that in some cases they were hardly able to stand; but, as they grew older, the swelling seemed to gradually abate and the body assumed its normal shape.

The most common and strange issue was the severe swelling of children's stomachs, caused by the umbilical cord not being tied properly at birth. The procedure was usually done by the baby's parents or a nearby friend. The infants had such huge bellies that in some cases they could barely stand; however, as they got older, the swelling seemed to slowly reduce and their bodies returned to normal shape.

Deafness was common, but I never came across any dumb people, though I now and then encountered cases of painful stammering and other defects of articulation arising from malformation of the palate and tongue.

Deafness was common, but I never came across any mute people, although I occasionally encountered cases of painful stuttering and other speech issues caused by problems with the palate and tongue.

Occasionally, however, the difficulty of speech was caused by dementia, which seemed very common in Tibet, especially among the young men. Whether it was caused by cardiac affection subsequent to organic vices, as I suspected, or by other trouble, I could not say for certain, but presently I based my suspicions on certain facts which I happened to notice, besides the presence of symptoms indicating great nervous depression and strain, extreme weakness of the spine and oscillations of the hands when spread horizontally with the fingers and thumbs wide apart. This may in one way be accounted for by the difficulty that men have in obtaining wives, owing to the scarcity of women. Apoplectic and epileptic fits and convulsions were not of very frequent occurrence, but they seemed severe when they did occur. The fire cure was usually applied in order to drive away the spirits that were supposed to have entered the body, but, all the same, these fits at times resulted in temporary or occasionally permanent paralysis, and much derangement and disfiguration of the facial expression, particularly about the eyes and mouth. I had occasion to study three very good specimens of this kind at Tucker, at Tarbar, north of the Brahmaputra River, and at Tokchim.

Sometimes, though, speech difficulties were caused by dementia, which seemed pretty common in Tibet, especially among young men. I couldn't say for sure if it was due to heart issues related to other health problems, as I suspected, or something else entirely, but I based my suspicions on certain things I noticed, along with symptoms indicating significant nervous stress and strain, extreme weakness in the spine, and shaking of the hands when extended horizontally with fingers and thumbs spread apart. This might partly be explained by the challenges men face in finding wives due to the lack of women. While apoplectic and epileptic seizures weren't very common, they were quite severe when they did happen. The fire cure was typically used to drive away the spirits believed to have entered the body, but even so, these seizures sometimes led to temporary or, occasionally, permanent paralysis and noticeable changes in facial expression, especially around the eyes and mouth. I had the opportunity to study three very clear cases of this at Tucker, at Tarbar, north of the Brahmaputra River, and at Tokchim.

Much to my regret I never came across any violent cases of insanity during my stay in the country, though many times I observed strange peculiarities among the men, and signs of mania, more particularly religious.

Much to my regret, I never encountered any violent cases of insanity during my time in the country, although I often noticed strange behaviors among the men and signs of mania, especially of a religious nature.

In women I several times noticed symptoms of melancholia, caused no doubt by abuse of sexual intercourse, owing to their strange laws of polyandry. I was told that occasionally it led to suicide by drowning or strangulation. [264] However, I was never able to keep any of the suspicious cases under close observation for any length of time, and, as our arrival into Tibetan camps generally created some amount of fear and sensation, and we usually left before they could be quite at home with us, I never had a chance of studying the subject more closely.

In women, I often noticed signs of depression, likely due to the excessive sexual relationships allowed by their unusual polyandry laws. I was informed that it sometimes led to suicide through drowning or strangulation. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] However, I was never able to closely observe any of these concerning cases for an extended period, and since our arrival in Tibetan camps usually sparked some fear and excitement, we often left before they could feel completely comfortable with us, which meant I never had the opportunity to study the topic in more depth.

The Tokchim Tarjum

The Tokchim Translation



[265]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XLIX

A Tibetan medicine-man—Lumbago, and a startling cure for it—Combustible fuses—Fire and butter—Prayers, agony, and distortions—Strange ideas on medicine.

Strange as the Tibetan remedies seemed to be, none came up, as far as interest went, to one I saw applied at a place called Kutzia. I had entered a camp of some twenty or thirty tents, when my attention was drawn to an excited crowd collected round an old man whose garments had been removed. He was tightly bound with ropes, and agony was depicted on his features. A tall, long-haired man with red coat and heavy boots knelt by the side of the sufferer and prayed fervently, twirling round a prayer-wheel which he held in his right hand.

Weird as the Tibetan remedies seemed, nothing I saw matched the level of interest generated by an experience I had at a place called Kutzia. I had entered a camp with around twenty or thirty tents when I noticed a crowd gathered around an old man who had been stripped of his clothes. He was tightly bound with ropes, and his face was filled with pain. A tall man with long hair, wearing a red coat and heavy boots, knelt beside the suffering man and prayed intensely while spinning a prayer wheel in his right hand.

My curiosity aroused, I approached the gathering, whereupon three or four Tibetans got up and signed to me to be off. I pretended not to understand, and, after a heated discussion, I was allowed to remain.

My curiosity piqued, I walked over to the group, where three or four Tibetans got up and signaled for me to leave. I acted like I didn’t understand, and after a heated argument, I was allowed to stay.

An operation was obviously being performed by a Tibetan medicine-man, and the suspense in the crowd round the sick man was considerable. The doctor was busy preparing combustible fuses, which he wrapped up carefully in silk paper. When cut in the centre they formed two cones, each with a little tail of twisted paper protruding beyond its summit. Having completed six or eight of these, the medicine-man made his patient, or rather his victim, assume a sitting posture. I inquired what ailed the sick man. From what they told me, and from an examination made on my own account, I was satisfied that the man was suffering from an attack of lumbago. The coming cure, however, interested me more than the illness itself, and the doctor, seeing how absorbed I was in the performance, asked me to sit by his side. First of all the man called for "fire," and [266] a woman handed him a blazing brand from a fire near by. He swung it to and fro in the air, and pronounced certain exorcisms. Next the patient was subjected to a thorough examination, giving vent to a piercing yell each time that the long bony fingers of the physician touched his sides, whereupon the man of science, pointing to the spot, informed his open-mouthed audience that the pain was "there." Putting on a huge pair of spectacles, he rubbed with the palm of his hand the umbilical region of the sufferer and then measured with folded thumb two inches on each side of, and slightly under, the umbilicus. To mark these distances he used the burning brand, applying it to the flesh at these points.

An operation was clearly happening with a Tibetan medicine-man, and the crowd around the sick man was quite tense. The doctor was busy preparing combustible fuses, wrapping them carefully in silk paper. When cut in the middle, they created two cones, each with a little twisted paper tail sticking out from the top. After making six or eight of these, the medicine-man had his patient, or rather his victim, sit up. I asked what was wrong with the sick man. From what they told me and from my own observations, I figured the man was suffering from lumbago. However, I was more interested in the upcoming treatment than the illness itself, and the doctor, noticing how focused I was on the procedure, invited me to sit next to him. First, the man called for "fire," and a woman handed him a glowing brand from a nearby fire. He waved it around in the air and chanted some exorcisms. Next, the patient underwent a thorough examination, letting out a sharp scream each time the doctor's long bony fingers touched his sides, prompting the physician to point to the spot and inform his captivated audience that the pain was "there." Donning a large pair of glasses, he rubbed the area around the sick man's belly button, then measured two inches on each side of and just below it with his folded thumb. To mark these distances, he used the burning brand, applying it to the skin at these points.

"Murr, murr!" ("Butter, butter!") he next called for, and butter was produced. Having rubbed a little on the burns, he placed upon each of them a separate cone, and pressed until it remained a fixture, the point upwards. Shifting the beads of a rosary, revolving the praying-wheel, and muttering prayers, the medicine-man now worked himself into a perfect frenzy. He stared at the sun, raising his voice from a faint whisper to a thundering baritone at its loudest, and his whole audience seemed so affected by the performance that they all shook and trembled and prayed in their terror. He now again nervously clutched the burning wood in one hand, and, blowing upon it with the full strength of his lungs, produced a flame. The excitement in the crowd became intense. Every one, head down to the ground, prayed fervently. The doctor waved the ignited wood three or four times in the air and then applied the flames to the paper tips of the combustible cones. Apparently saltpetre and sulphur had been mixed in the preparation of these. They burned fast, making a noise like the fuse of a rocket.

"Murr, murr!" ("Butter, butter!") he called out next, and butter was brought to him. After applying a little to the burns, he placed a separate cone on each one, pressing them down until they stayed in place, the points facing upwards. Moving the beads of a rosary, turning the praying wheel, and mumbling prayers, the medicine-man worked himself into a complete frenzy. He fixed his gaze on the sun, raising his voice from a soft whisper to a booming baritone at its loudest, and his audience seemed so influenced by his performance that they all shook, trembled, and prayed in their fear. He nervously gripped the burning wood in one hand, and with all his breath, he blew on it until it ignited. The crowd's excitement reached a peak. Everyone, heads bowed to the ground, prayed earnestly. The doctor waved the flaming wood three or four times in the air and then brought the flames to the paper tips of the combustible cones. It seemed that saltpeter and sulfur had been mixed into the preparation. They burned quickly, making a noise like a rocket’s fuse.

At this juncture the animation of the onlookers was not to be compared with the agitation of the patient, who began to feel the effects of this primitive remedy. The fire spluttered on his bare skin. The cure was doing its work. The wretched man's mouth foamed, and his eyes bulged out of their sockets. He moaned and groaned, making desperate efforts to unloose the bonds that kept his hands fast behind his back. Two stalwart men sprang forward and held him, while the medicine-man and all the women present, leaning over the prostrate form, blew with all their might upon what remained of the three smoking cones frizzling away into the flesh of the wretched victim.

At this point, the excitement of the onlookers couldn't compare to the distress of the patient, who was starting to feel the effects of this basic treatment. The fire sputtered against his bare skin. The remedy was taking hold. The poor man's mouth foamed, and his eyes bulged out of their sockets. He moaned and groaned, making desperate attempts to free his hands from the bonds tying them behind his back. Two strong men rushed in to hold him down, while the medicine man and all the women present leaned over the helpless form, blowing with all their might on what was left of the three smoking cones sizzling against the flesh of the unfortunate victim.

The pain of which the man complained seemed to encircle his waist, wherefore the strange physician, having [267] untied his patient's arms from behind, and retied them in front, began his measurements again, this time from the spinal column.

The pain the man complained about felt like it was wrapping around his waist, so the strange doctor, after untying his patient's arms from behind and retying them in front, started taking measurements again, this time from the spine.

A Medicine-man
A Medicine-man

"Chik, ni, sum!" ("One, two, three!") he exclaimed, as he marked the three spots in the same fashion as before, smeared them over with butter, and affixed the cones. Here ensued a repetition of the previous excitement; prayers, agony, and distortions, but the patient was not thoroughly cured, and more cones were subsequently ignited on both his sides, in spite of his protests and my appeals on his behalf. The poor fellow soon had a regular circle of severe burns round his body.

"Chik, ni, sum!" ("One, two, three!") he shouted, as he marked the three spots just like before, covered them with butter, and attached the cones. This led to a repeat of the earlier chaos; prayers, pain, and contortions, but the patient wasn't completely healed, and more cones were lit on both sides of him, despite his protests and my appeals on his behalf. The poor guy quickly ended up with a serious ring of burns all around his body.

Needless to say, when, two hours later, the operation was over, the sick man had become a dying man. With a view to obtaining a few hints on Tibetan medicine from this eminent physician—the Tibetans held him in great esteem—I sent him a small present and requested him to visit me. He was flattered and showed no desire to keep his methods a secret, but even pressed me to try some of his unique remedies.

Needless to say, when the operation was finished two hours later, the sick man had turned into a dying man. Hoping to get some insights on Tibetan medicine from this respected doctor—who the Tibetans greatly admired—I sent him a small gift and asked him to come see me. He was pleased and showed no interest in keeping his methods a secret; in fact, he encouraged me to try some of his special remedies.

According to him, fire would cure most illnesses; what fire could not cure, water would. He had, nevertheless, some small packets of variously coloured powders, for which he claimed extraordinary powers.

According to him, fire would heal most illnesses; what fire couldn't heal, water would. He still had some small packets of differently colored powders, which he claimed had amazing powers.

"I am afraid your patient will die," I remarked.

"I’m afraid your patient is going to die," I said.

"He may," was the reply, "but it will be the fault of the patient, not the cure. Besides, what does it matter whether you die to-day or to-morrow?"

"He might," was the reply, "but it will be the patient's fault, not the treatment. Besides, what difference does it make if you die today or tomorrow?"

And with this unprofessional dictum he left me.

And with this unprofessional statement, he walked away from me.


[268]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER L

Tucker village—Chokdens—Houses—Flying prayers—Soldiers or robbers?—A stampede—Fresh provisions—Disappointment—Treachery—Shokas leave me—Observations—Five men, all counted!

When I left the Gomba, having been salaamed to the ground by my new friends the Lamas, I walked about the village to examine all there was to be seen.

When I left the Gomba, after my new friends the Lamas had bowed to me, I strolled around the village to check out everything there was to see.

Along the water's edge stood a number of dilapidated Chokdens made of mud and stones, with a square base surmounted by a moulding, and an upper decoration in steps, topped by a cylindrical column. They were in a row at the east end of the village, and, as is well known, they are supposed to contain a piece of bone, cloth or metal, and books or parts of them, that had once belonged to a great man or a saint. Roughly drawn images are occasionally found in them. In rare cases, when cremation has been applied, the ashes are collected into a small earthenware urn, and deposited in one of the Chokdens. The ashes are usually made into a paste with clay, on which, when flattened like a medallion, a representation of Buddha is either stamped from a mould, or engraved by means of a pointed tool.

Along the water's edge stood several rundown Chokdens made of mud and stones, featuring a square base topped with a molding and a stepped upper decoration, capped by a cylindrical column. They were lined up at the eastern end of the village, and it's well known that they are believed to hold a piece of bone, cloth, or metal, along with books or fragments of books, that once belonged to a great person or a saint. Roughly drawn images are sometimes found inside them. In rare instances, when cremation has been performed, the ashes are gathered into a small earthenware urn and placed in one of the Chokdens. The ashes are typically mixed into a paste with clay, and when flattened like a medallion, a depiction of Buddha is either stamped from a mold or carved with a pointed tool.

The interior of the houses at Tucker was no more pleasing than the exterior. Each habitation had a walled courtyard, and the top of the wall, as well as the edge of the flat roof, was lined with masses of tamarisk for fuel. In the courtyard, sheep and goats were penned at night; and the human beings who occupied the rooms were dirty beyond all description. There were hundreds of flying prayers over the monastery as well as over each house, and as the people stood on their roofs watching us, laughing and chatting, the place had quite a gay aspect.

The inside of the houses at Tucker was just as unappealing as the outside. Each home had a walled courtyard, with the top of the wall and the edge of the flat roof covered in piles of tamarisk for fuel. In the courtyard, sheep and goats were kept at night, and the people living in the rooms were incredibly dirty. There were hundreds of flying prayers over the monastery and each house, and as the people stood on their roofs watching us, laughing and chatting, the place had a rather cheerful vibe.

[269] While I was strolling about some fifty or sixty men appeared on the scene, armed with matchlocks and swords, and I looked upon them with suspicion, but Kachi reassured me, and said they were not soldiers, but a powerful band of robbers encamped about half a mile off, and on very friendly terms with the Lamas. As a precaution, I loaded my rifle, which was quite sufficient to occasion a stampede of the armed crowd, followed, in the panic, by all the other villagers that had collected round us. Like all Tibetans, they were a miserable lot, though powerfully built, and with plenty of bounce about them.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] While I was walking around, about fifty or sixty men showed up, armed with matchlocks and swords. I regarded them with suspicion, but Kachi comforted me and said they weren't soldiers, but a strong group of robbers camped about half a mile away, and they were on very friendly terms with the Lamas. As a precaution, I loaded my rifle, which was enough to cause a stampede among the armed crowd, followed by all the other villagers who had gathered around us. Like all Tibetans, they were a miserable bunch, though powerfully built and full of energy.

The Panku Gomba

The Panku Gumba


Early in the morning I had made inquiries about provisions, and had arranged for the purchase of two fat sheep and some 450 lbs. of food (flour, rice, tsamba, ghur, sugar, salt and butter), and several Tibetans stated that they could supply me with any quantity I required. Among others was a trader from Buddhi, Darcey Bura's brother, who promised to bring me within an hour a sufficient quantity of food to last us ten men twenty-five days. I noticed, when these men left, that two of my Shokas ran after them, and entered into an excited discussion with them. Some two or three hours later, the traders returned, swearing that not an ounce of food could be obtained in the place. The way [270] in which these men could lie was indeed marvellous to study. I suspected treachery, and reprimanded my Shokas, threatening to punish them very severely if my suspicions proved to be well founded.

Early in the morning, I asked about supplies and arranged to buy two fat sheep and around 450 lbs. of food (flour, rice, tsamba, ghur, sugar, salt, and butter). Several Tibetans said they could provide me with whatever quantity I needed. One of them was a trader from Buddhi, Darcey Bura’s brother, who promised to bring me enough food for ten men for twenty-five days within an hour. I noticed when these men left that two of my Shokas ran after them and got into an animated discussion. A couple of hours later, the traders returned, swearing that not a single ounce of food could be found in the area. The way these men could lie was truly astonishing to witness. I suspected betrayal and scolded my Shokas, threatening to punish them severely if my suspicions turned out to be correct.

The Shokas, knowing themselves discovered, and partly through fear of the Tibetans, were now again quite unreasonable and demoralised. It was no use keeping them by force and I decided to discharge them. From the moment I had entered the forbidden country I had been compelled to protect myself against them as much as against the Tibetans. I reflected, however, when I made up my mind to let them go, that these fellows had stood for my sake hardships and privations which few men could stand; and in paying them off I therefore rewarded them suitably, and they undertook to bring back safely across the frontier part of my baggage containing photographs, ethnological collections, &c. With infinite trouble I then managed to purchase enough provisions to last five men ten days.

The Shokas, realizing they had been discovered and partly out of fear of the Tibetans, were once again unreasonable and demoralized. There was no point in keeping them by force, so I decided to let them go. Since I entered the forbidden territory, I had to protect myself from them just as much as from the Tibetans. However, as I made up my mind to set them free, I remembered that these guys had endured hardships and sacrifices for my sake that few could handle; so when I paid them off, I made sure to reward them fairly. They agreed to safely bring back part of my luggage across the border, which included photographs, ethnological collections, and so on. After much effort, I managed to buy enough supplies for five men to last ten days.

The whole party accompanied me three-and-a-quarter miles farther, where, in sight of the tumble-down Panku Gomba, a mile to the West of us, we halted in order to make the necessary arrangements for our parting, unseen by the Tibetans. I took observations for latitude and longitude. The water of the hypsometrical apparatus boiled at 185° Fahr. fifty feet above the level of the lake, the temperature of the air being 76° and the hour 10 a.m.

The entire group walked with me for about three and a quarter miles until we stopped, out of sight of the Tibetans, near the rundown Panku Gomba, which was a mile to our west. We paused to make the necessary arrangements for our departure. I took measurements for latitude and longitude. The water in the hypsometric device boiled at 185°F, fifty feet above the level of the lake, with the air temperature at 76° and the time being 10 AM

We had a high snowy chain to the South of us, extending from 70° to 33° (b.m.), the direction of the range being approximately from South-West to North-East, starting at Nimo Namgil.

We had a tall snowy mountain range to our south, stretching from 70° to 33° (b.m.), with the range running roughly from southwest to northeast, starting at Nimo Namgil.

When everything was ready, the five Shokas, including Kachi and Dola, left me, swearing by the sun and all that they hold most sacred, that they would in no way betray me to the Tibetans, who so far had no suspicion as to who I was.

When everything was set, the five Shokas, including Kachi and Dola, left me, promising by the sun and everything they held dear that they wouldn't betray me to the Tibetans, who still had no idea who I was.

Bijesing the Johari and the Kutial Bura Nattoo agreed to accompany me as far as the Maium Pass, so that my party, including myself, now was reduced to only five.

Bijesing, the Johari, and the Kutial Bura Nattoo agreed to go with me as far as the Maium Pass, so my group was now down to just five people, including me.


[271]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LI

The start with a further reduced party—A reconnaissance—Natural fortress—Black tents and animals—On the wrong tack—Slings and their use—A visit to a Tibetan camp—Mistaken for brigands—Bargaining and begging.

All was promising well when, with my reduced party, I started towards the N.E., first following for three-and-a-quarter miles a course of 49°,[22] skirting the lake, then ascending over the barren hill ranges in a direction of 90° for a distance of twelve miles. The journey was uneventful, and my four men seemed in the best of spirits. We descended to a plain where water and grass could be found, and having seen a camping-ground with a protecting wall, such as are usually put up by Tibetans at their halting-places, we made ourselves comfortable for the night, notwithstanding the high wind and a passing storm of hail and rain, which drenched us to the skin. The thermometer during the night went down to 34°.

Everything was looking good when, with my smaller group, I set off towards the northeast, first following a path of 49° for three and a quarter miles,[22] skirting the lake, then climbing over the desolate hill ranges in a direction of 90° for twelve miles. The trip was uneventful, and my four men seemed to be in high spirits. We descended to a flat area where we could find water and grass, and after spotting a campsite with a protective wall, typically built by Tibetans at their stopping points, we settled in for the night, despite the strong wind and a passing storm of hail and rain that soaked us to the skin. The temperature dropped to 34° during the night.

At sunrise I started to make a reconnaissance from the top of a high hill wherefrom I could get a bird's-eye view of a great portion of the surrounding country. It was of the utmost importance for me to find out which would be the easiest way to get through the intricate succession of hills and mountains, and to discover the exact direction of a large river to the N. of us, throwing itself into the Mansarowar, the name of which no one could tell me. I started alone towards 352° 30′ (b.m.), and three-and-a-half miles' climb brought me to 16,480 feet on the summit of a hill, where I was able to ascertain and note down all that I wished to know. I returned to camp, and we went on towards 73° 30′, crossing over a pass 16,450 feet, and ultimately finding ourselves at the foot of a hill, the [272] summit of which resembled a fortress, with flying-prayers flapping to and fro in the wind. At the foot of the hill were some twenty ponies grazing.

At sunrise, I began my exploration from the top of a high hill, where I could see a large portion of the surrounding area. It was crucial for me to find out the easiest way to navigate through the complex arrangement of hills and mountains and to determine the exact direction of a large river to the north of us, which flowed into the Mansarowar, a name no one could tell me. I set out alone toward 352° 30′ (b.m.), and after a climb of three and a half miles, I reached 16,480 feet at the summit of a hill, where I was able to gather and note everything I needed to know. I returned to camp, and we proceeded toward 73° 30′, crossing a pass at 16,450 feet, eventually finding ourselves at the base of a hill whose summit looked like a fortress, with prayer flags waving in the wind. At the foot of the hill, there were about twenty ponies grazing.

Sling
Sling

With the aid of my telescope I was able to make sure that what at first appeared to be a castle was nothing but a work of nature, and that apparently no one was concealed up there. The ponies, however, indicated the presence of men, and we had to move cautiously. In fact, rounding the next hill, we discerned in the grassy valley below a number of black tents, two hundred yaks, and about a thousand sheep. We kept well out of sight behind the hill, and making a long détour, we at last descended in an extensive valley, in which the river described a semicircle, washing the southern hill ranges, where it was joined by a tributary coming from the S.E. This tributary at first appeared to me larger than what I afterwards recognised to be the main stream, so that I followed its course for four miles (92° 30′ b.m.), till I found that it was taking me in a more southerly direction than I wished, and had to retrace my steps along a flattish plateau. Meeting two Tibetan women, I purchased, after endless trouble, a fat sheep out of a flock they were driving before them. These two females carried rope slings in their hands, and the accuracy with which they could fling stones and hit the mark at very great distances was really marvellous. For the sake of a few annas they gave an exhibition of their skill, hitting any sheep you pointed at in their flock, even at distances of thirty and forty yards. I tried to obtain from these dangerous females a little information about the country, but they professed absolute ignorance.

With my telescope, I confirmed that what I initially thought was a castle was really just a natural formation, and it seemed that no one was hiding up there. However, the presence of the ponies suggested that men were nearby, so we had to be cautious. As we rounded the next hill, we spotted several black tents, two hundred yaks, and about a thousand sheep in the grassy valley below. We stayed out of sight behind the hill and took a long detour until we finally descended into a wide valley, where the river curved in a semicircle, flowing along the southern hills, and joined a tributary coming from the southeast. At first, this tributary looked bigger than what I later recognized as the main river, so I followed it for four miles (92° 30′ b.m.) until I realized it was taking me further south than I wanted to go, forcing me to retrace my steps across a flat plateau. I encountered two Tibetan women and, after a lot of effort, I bought a fat sheep from the flock they were herding. These women had rope slings in their hands, and their ability to accurately throw stones and hit targets at great distances was truly impressive. For just a few annas, they demonstrated their skill, hitting any sheep you pointed out in their flock, even from thirty or forty yards away. I tried to get some information about the area from these formidable women, but they claimed to know nothing.

"We are menials," they said, "and we know nothing. We know each sheep in our flock, and that is all, but our lord, of whom we are the slaves, knows all. He knows where the rivers come from, and the ways to all Gombas. He is a great king."

"We're just laborers," they said, "and we don't know much. We know each sheep in our flock, and that's about it, but our lord, whom we serve, knows everything. He knows where the rivers start and the paths to all the Gombas. He is a great king."

"And where does he live?" I inquired.

"And where does he live?" I asked.

"There, two miles off, where that smoke rises to the sky."

"There, two miles away, where that smoke goes up into the sky."

The temptation was great to go and call on this "great king," who knew so many things, all the more so as we might probably persuade him to sell us provisions, which, as we had none too many, would be of great assistance to us. Anyhow the visit would be interesting, and I decided to risk it.

The temptation was strong to visit this "great king," who was knowledgeable about so many things. Plus, we might convince him to sell us some supplies, which we really needed and would be a huge help. Regardless, the visit would be intriguing, so I decided to go for it.

[273]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

A Natural Castle

A Natural Fortress


[274]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

We steered towards the several columns of smoke that rose before us, and eventually we approached a large camp of black tents. Our appearance caused a good deal of commotion, and men and women rushed in and out of their tents in great excitement.

We headed towards the columns of smoke rising ahead of us and soon arrived at a large camp of black tents. Our arrival stirred up quite a bit of excitement, and people rushed in and out of their tents in a flurry.

"Jogpas, jogpas!" ("Brigands! brigands!") somebody in their camp shouted, and in a moment their matchlocks were made ready, and the few men who had remained outside the tents drew their swords, holding them clumsily in their hands in a way hardly likely to terrify any one.

"Jogpas, jogpas!" ("Brigands! brigands!") someone in their camp shouted, and in an instant, their matchlocks were readied, while the few men who stayed outside the tents drew their swords, awkwardly gripping them in a way that was unlikely to scare anyone.

To be taken for brigands was a novel experience for us, and the warlike array was in strange contrast to the terrified expressions on the faces of those who stood there armed. In fact, when Chanden Sing and I walked forward and encouraged them to sheathe their steels and put their matchlocks by, they readily followed our advice, and brought out rugs for us to sit upon. Having overcome their fright, they were now most anxious to be pleasant.

Being mistaken for bandits was a new experience for us, and the militant setup was in sharp contrast to the scared looks on the faces of those who stood there armed. In fact, when Chanden Sing and I stepped forward and urged them to put away their weapons and set their matchlocks aside, they quickly followed our advice and brought out rugs for us to sit on. Once they got over their fear, they were eager to be friendly.

"Kiula gunge gozai deva labodù!" ("You have nice clothes!") I began the conversation, attempting flattery, to put the chieftain at his ease.

"Kiula gunge gozai deva labodù!" ("You have nice clothes!") I started the conversation, trying to flatter him to make the chieftain feel more comfortable.

"Lasso, leh!" ( "Yes, sir") answered the Tibetan, apparently astonished, and looking at his own attire with an air of comical pride.

"Lasso, leh!" ("Yes, sir") replied the Tibetan, clearly surprised, while gazing at his own outfit with a sense of humorous pride.

His answer was sufficient to show me that the man considered me his superior, the affirmative in Tibetan to an equal or inferior being the mere word lasso without the leh.

His answer clearly showed me that the man saw me as his superior, with the affirmative in Tibetan for an equal or inferior being just the word lasso without the leh.

Woman carrying Child in Basket

Woman with Child in Basket


"Kiula tuku taka zando?" ("How many children have you?") I rejoined.

"How many children do you have?" I replied.

"Ni." ("Two.")

"Two."

"Chuwen bogpe, tsamba, chou wonǐ?" ("Will you sell me flour or tsamba?")

"Chuwen bogpe, tsamba, chou wonǐ?" ("Will you sell me flour or tsamba?")

"Middù—have not got any," he replied, making several quick semicircular movements with the up-turned palm of his right hand.

"Middù—I don't have any," he replied, making several quick circular motions with the palm of his right hand facing up.

This is a most characteristic action of the Tibetan, and nearly invariably accompanies the word "No," instead of a movement of the head, as with us.

This is a typical behavior of Tibetans, and it almost always goes along with the word "No," instead of shaking their head like we do.

[275]"Keran ga naddoung?" ("Where are you going?") he asked me eagerly.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]"Where are you going?" he asked me eagerly.

"Nhgarang ne Koroun!" ("I am a pilgrim!") "Lungba quorghen neh jelghen." ("I go looking at sacred places.")

"Nhgarang ne Koroun!" ("I am a pilgrim!") "Lungba quorghen neh jelghen." ("I go looking at sacred places.")

"Gopria zaldo. Chakzal wortzié. Tsamba middù. Bogpe middù, guram middù, dié middù, kassur middù." ("I am very poor. Please hear me. I have no tsamba, no flour, no sweet paste, no rice, no dried fruit.")

"Gopria zaldo. Chakzal wortzié. Tsamba middù. Bogpe middù, guram middù, dié middù, kassur middù." ("I am very poor. Please hear me. I have no tsamba, no flour, no sweet paste, no rice, no dried fruit.")

This, of course, I knew to be untrue, so I calmly said that I would remain seated where I was until food was sold to me, and at the same time produced one or two silver coins, the display of which to the covetous eyes of the Tibetans was always the means of hastening the transaction of business. In small handfuls, after each of which the Tibetans swore that they had not another atom to sell, I managed, with somewhat of a trial to my patience, to purchase some twenty pounds of food. The moment the money was handed over they had a quarrel among themselves about it, and almost came to blows, greed and avarice being the most marked characteristic of the Tibetans. No Tibetan of any rank is ashamed to beg in the most abject manner for the smallest silver coin, and when he sells and is paid, he always implores for another coin, to be thrown into the bargain.

This, of course, I knew to be untrue, so I calmly said that I would stay right where I was until food was sold to me, and at the same time, I pulled out one or two silver coins, which was always enough to catch the greedy eyes of the Tibetans and speed up the deal. I managed to buy about twenty pounds of food after some patience, as the Tibetans would insist they had nothing left to sell after each small handful. The moment I handed over the money, they started arguing among themselves about it and almost came to blows, as greed and selfishness were the most noticeable traits of the Tibetans. No Tibetan, regardless of rank, feels ashamed to beg in the most pitiable way for the smallest silver coin, and when he sells and is paid, he always begs for another coin to be added to the deal.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[22] All bearings given are magnetic.

All mentioned bearings are magnetic.


[276]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LII

What the men were like—Their timidity—Leather work—Metal work—Blades and swords—Filigree—Saddles and harness—Pack saddles.

The men of the party were extremely picturesque, with hair flowing down their shoulders and long pigtails ornamented with pieces of red cloth, circles of ivory and silver coins. Nearly all had the stereotyped pattern coat, with ample sleeves hanging well over the hands, and pulled up at the waist to receive the paraphernalia of eating-bowls, snuff-box, &c., employed in daily life. Most of them were dressed in dark red, and all were armed with jewelled swords.

The men in the group were quite striking, with hair cascading down their shoulders and long pigtails decorated with bits of red cloth, ivory circles, and silver coins. Almost all of them wore the typical patterned coat, with wide sleeves that draped over their hands, cinched at the waist to hold their everyday items like eating bowls and snuff boxes. Most were dressed in dark red, and they were all equipped with jeweled swords.

With flat, broad noses and slits of piercing eyes, high cheek-bones and skin giving out abundant oily excretions, most of the men stood at a respectful distance, scrutinising our faces and watching our movements apparently with much interest. I have hardly ever seen such cowardice and timidity as among these big, hulking fellows; to a European it scarcely seems conceivable. The mere raising of one's eyes was sufficient to make a man dash away frightened, and, with the exception of the chief, who pretended to be unafraid, notwithstanding that even he was trembling with fear, they one and all showed ridiculous nervousness when I approached them to examine their clothes or the ornaments they wore round their necks, the most prominent of which were the charm-boxes that dangled on their chests. The larger of these charm-boxes contained an image of Budda, the others were mere brass or silver cases with nothing in them.

With flat, broad noses and narrow, piercing eyes, high cheekbones, and skin that produced a lot of oil, most of the men stood at a respectful distance, carefully examining our faces and watching our movements with a lot of interest. I've rarely seen such cowardice and timidity as among these big, hulking guys; it barely seems conceivable to a European. Just raising one’s eyes was enough to make a man run away in fear, and aside from the chief, who pretended to be brave while still trembling with fear, they all showed comical nervousness when I approached them to look at their clothes or the ornaments around their necks, the most noticeable of which were the charm-boxes hanging on their chests. The bigger charm-boxes held an image of Buddha, while the others were just brass or silver cases with nothing inside.

I was struck here, as well as in other camps, by the skill of the Tibetans in working leather, which they tan and prepare themselves, often giving to it a fine red or green colour. As a rule, however, the natural tint is preserved, especially when the leather is used for belts, bullet and [277] powder-pouches, and flint-and-steel cases. The hair of the skins is removed by plucking and scraping, and preference is shown for skins of the yak, antelope, and kiang. The Tibetans are masters of the art of skinning, the hides being afterwards beaten, trodden upon and manipulated to be rendered soft. There were simple ornamentations stamped upon some of the leather articles, but in most instances either metal or leather ornaments of various colours were fastened on the belts and pouches, iron clasps inlaid with silver or silver ones being the commonest.

I was impressed here, as well as in other camps, by the skill of the Tibetans in working with leather, which they tan and prepare themselves, often giving it a beautiful red or green color. Generally, though, the natural color is kept, especially when the leather is used for belts, bullet and powder pouches, and flint-and-steel cases. The hair from the skins is removed by plucking and scraping, and they prefer the skins of the yak, antelope, and kiang. The Tibetans are experts at skinning; the hides are then beaten, trodden on, and worked to make them soft. Some of the leather items have simple stamped designs, but in most cases, either metal or leather ornaments of various colors are attached to the belts and pouches, with iron clasps inlaid with silver or silver clasps being the most common.

Tibetan Young Man

Tibetan Young Man


These metals are found in the country, and the Tibetans smelt and cast the ore when sufficient fuel is obtainable for the purpose. Earthen crucibles are employed to liquefy the metals, and the castings are made in clay moulds. For the inlaid work, in which the Tibetans greatly excel, they use hammer and chisel. Inlaid ornamentation is frequently to be seen on the sheaths of Tibetan swords, the leaf pattern, varied scrolls and geometrical combinations being most commonly preferred. The process of hardening metals is still in its infancy, and Tibetan blades are of wrought-iron, and not of steel. They succeed, however, in [278] bringing them to a wonderful degree of sharpness, although they entirely lack the elasticity of steel blades. Grooves to let in air, and thus make wounds incurable, are generally ground in the sides of the daggers, but the blades of the common swords are perfectly smooth and made to cut on one side only. As can be seen from the illustrations, these weapons are hardly adapted to meet the requirements of severe fighting, as they do not allow a firm grip, nor have they any guard for the hand. The sheaths and handles of some of the more valuable swords are made of solid silver inlaid with turquoises and coral beads, others of silver with gold ornamentations. At Lhassa and at Sigatz (Shigatze), silver filigree decorations are used on the best daggers; but nowhere else in Tibet is fine wire-making practised.

These metals are present in the country, and the Tibetans smelt and cast the ore when they can find enough fuel for it. They use earthen crucibles to melt the metals, and the castings are made in clay molds. For the intricate inlaid work that Tibetans excel at, they employ hammers and chisels. Inlaid designs are often seen on the sheaths of Tibetan swords, with popular choices being leaf patterns, varied scrolls, and geometric shapes. The technique for hardening metals is still developing, so Tibetan blades are made of wrought iron rather than steel. However, they manage to achieve an impressive sharpness, even though these blades lack the flexibility of steel. Dagger blades typically have grooves to allow air in, making wounds harder to heal, while the blades of common swords are smooth and designed to cut on one side only. As shown in the illustrations, these weapons are not really suited for serious combat since they don’t provide a good grip and lack any handguard. The sheaths and handles of some of the more valuable swords are made of solid silver inlaid with turquoise and coral beads, while others are silver embellished with gold. In Lhassa and Sigatz (Shigatze), the finest daggers feature silver filigree decorations, but fine wire-making isn’t practiced anywhere else in Tibet.

Swords

Knives


It must not be inferred from the above remarks that there are no steel swords in Tibet, for indeed many fine blades of excellent Chinese steel can be seen all over the country in the possession of the richer officials, such as the huge two-handed, double-edged swords of Chinese importation, used by Tibetan executioners.

It shouldn't be assumed from the comments above that there are no steel swords in Tibet, because many impressive blades made from high-quality Chinese steel can be found throughout the country in the hands of wealthier officials, including the large two-handed, double-edged swords imported from China that are used by Tibetan executioners.

The saddles, though possibly lacking comfort, are nevertheless skilfully made. The frame is made of solid wood (imported) and set in hammered iron (often inlaid with silver [279] and gold, as in the saddle here reproduced), which, like a Mexican saddle, is very high in front and at the back. Lizard skin or coloured leather is employed to decorate certain parts, and a pad covers the seat. A rug is, however, invariably placed over this pad for comfort, and the short iron stirrups compel one to sit with legs doubled up, a really not uncomfortable position when one gets used to it. Breastpiece, crupper, bridle and bit are of leather ornamented with inlaid metal pieces. Double bags for tsamba, butter, &c. are fastened behind the saddle, together with the inevitable peg and long rope, with which no Tibetan rider is unprovided, for the tethering of his pony at night.

The saddles, while perhaps not the most comfortable, are expertly crafted. The frame is made from solid imported wood and set in hammered iron, often inlaid with silver and gold, like the saddle shown here. Similar to a Mexican saddle, it has a high front and back. Lizard skin or colored leather is used to decorate certain parts, and a pad covers the seat. However, a rug is always placed over this pad for added comfort, and the short iron stirrups force you to sit with your legs bent, which can actually be quite comfortable once you get used to it. The breastpiece, crupper, bridle, and bit are made of leather adorned with inlaid metal pieces. Double bags for tsamba, butter, etc., are attached behind the saddle, along with the essential peg and long rope that no Tibetan rider is without for tethering his pony at night.

Saddle

Saddle


Pack-saddles for yaks are made on the same principle, but are of much rougher construction, as can be judged from the illustrations,[23] in which the two saddles I used on my journey are represented. The baggage is made fast by means of ropes to the two upper bars. To keep the saddle in position on the yak, and to prevent sores being inflicted, pads and blankets are laid upon the animal's back. Add to this protection the long coat possessed by the beast itself, and it will be clear why it very seldom sustains the slightest injury from these apparently cruel burdens.

Pack-saddles for yaks are built on the same principle, but they're much rougher in construction, as you can see from the illustrations,[23] showing the two saddles I used on my trip. The baggage is secured with ropes to the two upper bars. To keep the saddle in place on the yak and to prevent sores, pads and blankets are placed on the animal's back. When you add the protection of the yak's long coat, it becomes clear why these animals rarely suffer any injury from what seem like harsh loads.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.


[280]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LIII

Rain in torrents—A miserable night—A gorge—A gigantic inscription—Sheltered under boulders—A fresh surprise—Only two followers left.

When night came on, I did not consider it safe to encamp near the Tibetans. We moved away, driving our yaks before us and dragging the newly purchased sheep. We marched two-and-a-half miles, and then halted in a depression in the ground (16,050 feet), where we had a little shelter from the wind, which blew with great force. To our right lay a short range of fairly high mountains running from North to South, and cut by a gorge, out of which flowed a large stream. At that time of the evening we could not hope to cross it, but an attempt might be made in the morning, when the cold of the night would have checked the melting of the snows. Heavy showers had fallen frequently during the day, and the moment the sun went down there was a regular downpour. Our little tente-d'abri had been pitched, but we had to clear out of it a couple of hours later, the small basin in which we had pitched it having been turned into a regular pond. There was no alternative for us but to come out into the open, for where the water did not flood us the wind was so high and the ground so moist that it was not possible to keep our tent up. The pegs would not hold. The hours of the night seemed very long as we sat tightly wrapped up in our waterproofs, with feet, hands and ears frozen, and the water dripping down upon us. At dawn there were no signs of the storm abating. We had not been able to light a fire in the evening, nor could we light one now, and we were cold, hungry and miserable. The thermometer had been down to 36°. Towards noon, the rain still pouring down in torrents and there being no sign of its clearing, we loaded

When night fell, I didn’t think it was safe to camp near the Tibetans. We moved away, herding our yaks in front of us and dragging the newly bought sheep. We walked two and a half miles and then stopped in a dip in the ground (16,050 feet), where we had a bit of shelter from the strong wind. To our right was a short range of fairly high mountains running north to south, divided by a gorge, from which a large stream flowed. At that time of evening, we couldn’t cross it, but an attempt could be made in the morning when the night’s cold would have slowed the snowmelt. Heavy rain had fallen often throughout the day, and the moment the sun set, it turned into a steady downpour. Our little tente-d'abri had been set up, but we had to leave it a couple of hours later because the small area we pitched it in had become a pond. We had no choice but to come out into the open, since where the water didn’t reach us, the wind was so strong and the ground so wet that we couldn’t keep our tent up. The pegs wouldn’t hold. The hours of the night felt very long as we sat tightly wrapped in our waterproofs, with frozen feet, hands, and ears, while water dripped down on us. At dawn, there were no signs of the storm letting up. We hadn’t been able to light a fire in the evening, and we couldn’t light one now, leaving us cold, hungry, and miserable. The thermometer had dropped to 36°. By noon, with the rain still pouring down in torrents and no sign of it stopping, we loaded

[281]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Camp with Gigantic Inscription

Camp with Huge Sign


[282] our yaks and entered the gorge between the snow-covered mountains. With difficulty we crossed the tributary we had so far followed, and then proceeded along the right bank of the main stream to 23° 30″, then to 25°.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] We took our yaks and entered the gorge between the snow-covered mountains. It was tough to cross the tributary we had been following, and then we continued along the right bank of the main stream to 23° 30″, and then to 25°.

We were so exhausted and wet that, when towards evening we came to an enormous cliff, on the rocky face of which a patient Lama sculptor had engraved in gigantic letters the everlasting characters, Omne mani padme hun, we halted. The gorge was very narrow here, and we managed to find a dry spot under a big boulder, but as there was not sufficient room for all five, the two Shokas went under the shelter of another rock a little way off. This seemed natural enough, nor could I anticipate any danger, taking care myself of the weapons and the scientific instruments, while the Shokas had under their own sheltering boulder the bags containing nearly all our provisions except tinned meats. The rain pelted all night, the wind howled, and again we could not light a fire. The thermometer did not fall below 38°, but the cold, owing to our drenched condition, seemed intense. In fact, we were so frozen that we did not venture to eat, but, crouching ourselves in the small dry space at our disposal, we eventually fell fast asleep without tasting food. I slept soundly for the first time since I had been in Tibet, and it was broad daylight when I woke up, to find the man Nattoo from Kuti, and Bijesing the Johari, departed from under their sheltering rock, together with the loads entrusted to them. I discovered their tracks, half washed away, in the direction from which we had come the previous night. The rascals had bolted, and there would have been comparatively little harm in that, if only they had not taken with them all the stock of provisions for my two Hindoo servants, and a quantity of good rope, straps, and other miscellaneous articles, which we were bound to miss at every turn and which we had absolutely no means of replacing.

We were so tired and soaked that, when we reached a huge cliff in the evening, where a dedicated Lama sculptor had carved the timeless words, Omne mani padme hun, in giant letters, we stopped. The gorge was really narrow at this point, and we found a dry spot under a large boulder. However, there wasn’t enough room for all five of us, so the two Shokas moved under another rock a short distance away. That felt normal enough, and I didn’t expect any danger while I took care of the weapons and scientific instruments, and the Shokas kept the bags containing most of our supplies, except for the tinned meats, under their own boulder. It rained heavily all night, the wind howled, and once again, we couldn’t start a fire. The thermometer didn't drop below 38°, but we felt freezing due to our soaked state. In fact, we were so cold that we didn’t even bother to eat. Crouching together in the small dry space we had, we eventually fell asleep without any food. For the first time since I had arrived in Tibet, I slept soundly, and when I woke up, it was broad daylight. I found that Nattoo from Kuti and Bijesing the Johari had left their sheltering rock along with the loads they were responsible for. I noticed their tracks, half washed away, leading back the way we had come the night before. Those scoundrels had run off, and while it wouldn’t have been such a big deal, they took with them all the food meant for my two Hindu servants, along with a good amount of rope, straps, and various other items we were going to miss desperately and had no way to replace.

Of thirty picked servants who had started with me, twenty-eight had now abandoned me, and only two remained: faithful Chanden Sing and Mansing the leper!

Of the thirty selected servants who began this journey with me, twenty-eight had now left me, and only two remained: loyal Chanden Sing and Mansing the leper!

The weather continued horrible, with no food for my men and no fuel! I proposed to the two to go back also and let me continue alone. I described to them the dangers of following me farther, and warned them fully, but they absolutely refused to leave me.

The weather remained terrible, with no food for my men and no fuel! I suggested to the two of them that they should head back and let me continue alone. I explained the dangers of going further with me and warned them thoroughly, but they absolutely refused to leave my side.

"Sahib, we are not Shokas," were their words. "If you die, we will die with you. We fear not death. We are sorry to see you suffer, sahib, but never mind us. We are only poor people, therefore it is of no consequence."

"Sahib, we are not Shokas," they said. "If you die, we will die with you. We are not afraid of death. We feel sorry to see you in pain, sahib, but don’t worry about us. We are just poor people, so it doesn’t matter."


[283]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LIV

My time fully occupied—Our own yak drivers—A heavy blow—Along the stream—Soldiers in pursuit of us—Discovered.

This last disaster should, I suppose, have deterred us from further progress, but it somehow made me even more determined to persist than I was before. It was no light job to have to run afield oneself to capture the yaks, which had wandered off in search of grass; and having found them and driven them back to our primitive camping-place, to tie upon their backs the pack-saddles, and fasten on them the heavy tin-lined cases of scientific instruments and photographic plates. This task was only part of the day's routine, which included the writing up of my diary, the registering of observations, sketching, photographing, changing plates in cameras, occasionally developing them, surveying, cleaning of rifles, revolver, &c. &c. The effort of lifting up the heavy cases on to the pack-saddles was, owing to our exhausted condition, a severe tax on our strength, and the tantalising restlessness of the yaks forced us to make several attempts before we actually succeeded in properly fastening the loads, particularly as we had lost our best pieces of rope and leather straps. Our sole remaining piece of rope seemed hardly long enough to make the final knot to one of the girths; anyhow neither my bearer nor Mansing had sufficient strength to pull and make it join; so I made them hold the yak by the horns to keep him steady while I pulled my hardest. I succeeded with a great effort, and was about to get up, when a terrific blow from the yak's horn struck me in the skull an inch behind my right ear and sent me rolling head over heels. I was stunned for several moments, and the back of my head was swollen and sore for many days, the mark of the blow being visible even now.

This last disaster should have stopped us from moving forward, but it actually made me even more determined to keep going. It was no easy task to go out and catch the yaks that had wandered off looking for grass. After finding them and bringing them back to our basic campsite, I had to tie the pack-saddles on their backs and load the heavy, tin-lined cases of scientific instruments and photographic plates onto them. This was just part of the daily routine, which also included writing in my diary, recording observations, sketching, taking photos, changing camera plates, occasionally developing them, surveying, and cleaning rifles and revolvers. Lifting those heavy cases onto the pack-saddles was a real challenge given our exhausted state, and the restless yaks made us try several times before we finally secured the loads, especially since we had lost our best ropes and leather straps. The only piece of rope we had left didn't seem long enough to finish securing one of the girths; neither my porter nor Mansing had the strength to pull it tight, so I had them hold the yak by the horns to keep him steady while I pulled as hard as I could. I managed it with a lot of effort and was just about to get up when I got a massive blow from the yak's horn to the back of my head, just behind my right ear, sending me rolling. I was dazed for a few moments, and the back of my head was swollen and sore for days, with a visible mark from the hit that’s still there now.

[284]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Yak with Cases of Scientific Instruments

Yak with Cases of Scientific Instruments


We proceeded along the right bank of the river on a course of 85° between reddish hills and distant high snowy mountains to the N.W. and E.S.E. of us, which we saw from time to time when the rain ceased and the sky cleared. The momentary lifting of the clouds would be followed by another downpour, and the marching became very unpleasant and difficult, as we sank deep in the mud. Towards evening, we suddenly discovered some hundred and fifty soldiers riding full gallop in pursuit of us along the river valley. We pushed on, and having got out of their sight behind a hill, we deviated from our course and rapidly climbed up to the top of the hill range; my two men and the yaks concealed themselves on the other side. I remained lying flat on the top of the hill, spying with my telescope the movements of our pursuers. They rode unsuspectingly on, the tinkling of their horse-bells sounding pleasant to the ear at that deserted spot. They made a pretty picture, and, thinking probably that we had continued our way along the river, they rode past the spot [285] where we had left the path, and, possibly owing to their haste to catch us up, did not notice our tracks up the hillside.

We moved along the right bank of the river at an angle of 85°, surrounded by reddish hills and distant snowy mountains to the northwest and southeast, which we caught a glimpse of whenever the rain stopped and the sky cleared. Each time the clouds lifted, it was quickly followed by another downpour, making our march very uncomfortable and tough as we sank deep into the mud. By evening, we suddenly spotted about a hundred and fifty soldiers galloping after us in the river valley. We picked up our pace and, once we were out of their sight behind a hill, we deviated from our route and quickly climbed to the top of the hill range; my two men and the yaks hid on the other side. I stayed flat on top of the hill, using my telescope to watch our pursuers. They rode on, unaware, the sound of their horse-bells ringing pleasantly in the quiet area. It was quite a scene, and probably thinking that we had continued down the river, they passed the spot [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] where we had left the path and, likely due to their eagerness to catch up with us, didn’t notice our tracks leading up the hillside.

Rain began to fall heavily again, and we remained encamped at 17,000 feet with all our loads ready for flight at any moment; the night being spent none too comfortably. I sat up all night, rifle in hand, in case of a surprise, and I was indeed glad when day dawned. The rain had stopped, but we were now enveloped in a white mist which chilled us. I was very tired, and telling Chanden Sing to keep a sharp watch, tried to sleep for a while.

Rain began to pour heavily again, and we stayed camped at 17,000 feet with all our gear ready to go at a moment's notice; the night was not exactly comfortable. I stayed up all night, rifle in hand, ready for any surprises, and I was really relieved when morning came. The rain had stopped, but we were now surrounded by a cold, white mist. I was very tired, so I told Chanden Sing to keep a close watch and tried to catch some sleep for a bit.

With only Two Men I proceeded towards Lhassa

With just two men, I headed toward Lhasa.


"Hazur, hazur! jaldi apka banduk!" ("Sir, sir, quick, your rifle!") muttered my bearer, rousing me. "Do you hear the sound of bells?"

"Sir, sir, quick, your rifle!" muttered my bearer, waking me up. "Do you hear the sound of bells?"

The tinkling was quite plain. As our pursuers were approaching, evidently in a strong body, there was no time to be lost. To successfully evade them appeared impossible, so I decided to meet them, rather than attempt flight. Chanden Sing and I were armed with our rifles, and Mansing with his Gourkha kukri, and thus we awaited their arrival. There came out of the mist a long procession of grey, phantomlike figures, each one leading a pony. The advance guard [286] stopped from time to time to examine the ground; having discovered our footprints only partially washed away by the rain, they were following them up. Seeing us at last on the top of the hill, they halted. There was commotion among them, and they held an excited consultation; some of them unslung their matchlocks, others drew their swords, while we sat on a rock above and watched them with undivided attention.

The tinkling was very clear. As our pursuers were getting closer, clearly in a large group, we had no time to waste. Evading them seemed impossible, so I chose to face them instead of trying to run away. Chanden Sing and I had our rifles, and Mansing had his Gurkha kukri, and we waited for them to arrive. Out of the mist came a long line of gray, ghostly figures, each leading a pony. The front line stopped every so often to check the ground; having found our footprints only partially washed away by the rain, they were following them. When they finally spotted us at the top of the hill, they stopped. There was a lot of chatter among them, and they held an animated discussion; some of them took out their matchlocks, while others drew their swords, all while we sat on a rock above and watched them intently.


[287]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LV

An interview—Peace or war?—Gifts and the scarf of friendship—The Kata—The end of a friendly visit.

After hesitating a little, four officers signalled to us that they wished to approach.

After pausing for a moment, four officers signaled to us that they wanted to come closer.

"You are a great king!" shouted one at the top of his voice, "and we want to lay these presents at your feet," and he pointed to some small bags which the other three men were carrying. "Gelbo! Chakzal! Chakzal!" ("We salute you, king!")

"You are an amazing king!" shouted one man at the top of his lungs, "and we want to present these gifts to you," and he pointed to some small bags that the other three men were carrying. "Gelbo! Chakzal! Chakzal!" ("We salute you, king!")

I felt anything but regal after the wretched night we had spent, but I wished to treat the natives with due deference and politeness whenever it was possible.

I didn’t feel regal at all after the awful night we had, but I wanted to treat the locals with the respect and courtesy they deserved whenever I could.

I said that four men might approach, but the bulk of the party was to withdraw to a spot about two hundred yards away. This they immediately did, a matter of some surprise to me after the warlike attitude they had assumed at first. They laid their matchlocks down in the humblest fashion, and duly replaced their swords in their sheaths. The four officers approached, and when quite close to us, threw the bags on the ground and opened them to show us their contents. There was tsamba, flour, chura (a kind of cheese), guram (sweet paste), butter, and dried fruit. The officers were most profuse in their humble salutations. They had removed their caps and thrown them on the ground, and they kept their tongues sticking out of their mouths until I begged them to draw them in. They professed to be the subordinates of the Tokchim Tarjum, who had despatched them to inquire after my health, and who wished me to look upon him as my best friend. Well aware of the difficulties we must encounter in travelling through such an inhospitable [288] country, the Tarjum, they said, wished me to accept the gifts they now laid before me, and with these they handed me a Kata, or "the scarf of love and friendship," a long piece of thin silklike gauze, the end of which had been cut into a fringe. In Tibet these Katas accompany every gift, and no caller ever goes about without one, which instantly on arrival he produces for presentation to his host. The high Lamas sell them to devotees, and one or more of these scarves is presented to those who leave a satisfactory oblation after visiting a lamasery and temple. If a verbal message is sent to a friend, a Kata is sent with it, and among officials and Lamas small pieces of this silk gauze are enclosed even in letters. Not to give or send a Kata to an honoured visitor is considered a breach of good manners and is equivalent to a slight.

I mentioned that four men might come over, but the majority of the group was going to move to a spot about two hundred yards away. They did this right away, which surprised me after their initially aggressive stance. They put down their matchlocks in a very modest way and carefully sheathed their swords. The four officers came closer, and when they were near us, they dropped the bags on the ground and opened them to show us what was inside. There was tsamba, flour, chura (a type of cheese), guram (sweet paste), butter, and dried fruit. The officers were excessively polite, removing their caps and placing them on the ground, keeping their tongues sticking out until I asked them to pull them back in. They claimed to be the subordinates of the Tokchim Tarjum, who had sent them to check on my well-being and wanted me to think of him as my best friend. Aware of the challenges we would face traveling through such a harsh country, the Tarjum, they said, wanted me to accept the gifts they were presenting, and with them, they handed me a Kata, or "the scarf of love and friendship," a long piece of thin silklike gauze, the end of which was cut into a fringe. In Tibet, these Katas accompany every gift, and no visitor goes anywhere without one, which they immediately show their host upon arrival. The high Lamas sell them to followers, and one or more of these scarves is given to those who make a satisfactory offering after visiting a lamasery or temple. If a verbal message is sent to a friend, a Kata is included with it, and among officials and Lamas, small pieces of this silk gauze are even placed in letters. Not giving or sending a Kata to a respected visitor is seen as bad manners and is essentially an insult.

A Kata

A workout routine


I hastened to express my thanks for the Tarjum's kindness, and I handed the messengers a sum in silver of three times the value of the articles presented. The men seemed very pleasant and friendly, and we chatted for some time. Much to my annoyance, poor Mansing, bewildered at the sight of so much food, could no longer resist the pangs of hunger and, caring little for the breach of etiquette and likely consequences, proceeded to fill his mouth with handfuls of flour, cheese and butter. This led the Tibetans to suspect that we must be starving, and with their usual shrewdness they determined to take advantage of it.

I quickly expressed my gratitude for the Tarjum's kindness and gave the messengers three times the value of the items we received in silver. The men seemed very pleasant and friendly, and we chatted for a while. Much to my annoyance, poor Mansing, overwhelmed by the sight of so much food, couldn't resist his hunger any longer and, disregarding the etiquette and potential consequences, started shoveling handfuls of flour, cheese, and butter into his mouth. This made the Tibetans suspect that we must be starving, and with their usual cleverness, they decided to take advantage of the situation.

"The Tarjum," said the oldest of the messengers, "wishes you to come back and be his guest, when he will feed you and your men, and you will then go back to your country."

"The Tarjum," said the oldest of the messengers, "invites you to return and be his guest, where he will provide food for you and your men, and afterwards, you can go back to your country."

"Thank you," I replied; "we do not want the Tarjum's food, nor do we wish to go back. I am greatly obliged for his kindness, but we will continue our journey."

"Thank you," I said; "we don't want the Tarjum's food, nor do we want to go back. I really appreciate his kindness, but we will keep going on our journey."

[289]"Then," angrily said a young and powerful Tibetan, "if you continue your journey we will take back our gifts."

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]"Then," a young and strong Tibetan said angrily, "if you keep going on your journey, we will want our gifts back."

"And your Kata!" I rejoined, sending first the large ball of butter flying into his chest, and after it the small bags of flour, tsamba, cheese, fruit, &c., a minute earlier prettily laid out before us.

"And your Kata!" I replied, first throwing the big ball of butter at his chest, followed by the small bags of flour, tsamba, cheese, fruit, etc., which had just been neatly arranged in front of us a minute ago.

This unexpected bombardment quite upset the Tibetans, who, with powdered coats, hair and faces, scampered away as best they could, while Chanden Sing, always as quick as lightning when it was a case of hitting, pounded away with the butt of his rifle at the roundest part of one ambassador's body, as in his clumsy clothes he attempted to get up and run.

This sudden attack really threw the Tibetans off, who, covered in dust from their coats, hair, and faces, hurried away as quickly as they could, while Chanden Sing, always lightning-fast when it came to fighting, smashed the butt of his rifle against the roundest part of one ambassador's body as he awkwardly tried to get up and run.

Mansing, the philosopher of our party, interrupted in his feed but not put out, nor concerned in what was going on, picked up the fruit and cheese and pieces of butter scattered all over the place, mumbling that it was a shame to throw away good food in such a reckless fashion.

Mansing, the philosopher of our group, paused in his meal but remained unfazed and uninterested in the chaos around him. He gathered the fruit, cheese, and bits of butter strewn everywhere, grumbling that it was a shame to waste good food like that.

The soldiers, who had been watching attentively from a distance the different phases of the interview, considered it prudent to beat a hasty retreat, and, mounting their steeds with unmistakable dispatch, galloped pell-mell down the hill, and then along the valley of the river, until they were lost to sight in the mist, while the poor ambassadors, who had been unable to rejoin their ponies, followed as quickly as possible under the circumstances, considering the rarefied air and rough ground.

The soldiers, who had been watching closely from a distance during the interview, thought it wise to make a quick getaway. They swiftly jumped on their horses and raced down the hill and along the river valley until they disappeared into the mist. Meanwhile, the poor ambassadors, who couldn't get back to their ponies, followed as fast as they could given the thin air and rough terrain.

Their cries of distress, caused by fear alone, for we had done them no harm, served to strengthen the contempt in which my men by now held the Tibetan soldiers and their officers.

Their cries of distress, driven solely by fear, as we had harmed them in no way, only deepened the contempt my men already felt for the Tibetan soldiers and their officers.

The scene really was comical, and I made as much capital as I could out of it, laughing with my companions and ridiculing to them the supposed valour of Tibetans.

The scene was genuinely hilarious, and I took full advantage of it, laughing with my friends and mocking the supposed bravery of the Tibetans.

When the Tibetans were out of sight, Chanden Sing and I pocketed our pride and helped Mansing to collect the dried dates, apricots, the pieces of chura, butter and guram. Then having loaded our yaks we marched on.

When the Tibetans were out of sight, Chanden Sing and I swallowed our pride and helped Mansing gather the dried dates, apricots, pieces of chura, butter, and guram. After loading our yaks, we continued on our way.


[290]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LVI

Rain in torrents—A swampy plain—The sun at last—Our yaks stolen and recovered.

We were not in luck. The weather continued squally in the morning, and in the afternoon the rain was again torrential. We went towards 78° over uninteresting and monotonous grey country with a chain of snowy peaks stretching from South-West to North-East. We waded through a fairly deep and very cold river, and subsequently rose over a pass 17,450 feet. A number of Hunyas, with flocks of several thousand sheep, came in sight, but we avoided them. They did not see us.

We weren't lucky. The weather stayed stormy in the morning, and in the afternoon, the rain was pouring down again. We headed toward 78° across dull and monotonous gray terrain, with a range of snowy peaks stretching from the Southwest to the Northeast. We crossed a pretty deep and really cold river, and then climbed over a pass at 17,450 feet. We spotted a group of Hunyas with flocks of several thousand sheep, but we chose to steer clear of them. They didn’t see us.

At the point where we crossed it, the main stream turns in a graceful bend to 140° (b.m.). We climbed over hilly and barren country to an altitude of 17,550 feet, where several small lakelets were to be found, and, having marched in all fourteen and a-half miles in a drenching rain, we descended into a large valley. Here we had great difficulty in finding a spot where to rest for the night. The plain was simply a swamp, with several lakes and ponds, and we sank everywhere in mud and water. All our bedding and clothes were soaked to such an extent that it really made no difference where we halted; so we pitched our little tent on the banks of a stream coming out of a valley to the North, from which, extending in an easterly direction, rose a series of pyramidal mountains, covered with snow, and all of almost equal height and base. To the South were high peaks with great quantities of snow upon them. This valley was at an elevation of 17,450 feet, and the cold was intense.

At the spot where we crossed it, the main stream gracefully bends to 140° (b.m.). We climbed over hilly and barren land to an altitude of 17,550 feet, where we found several small lakes. After marching for fourteen and a half miles in pouring rain, we descended into a large valley. Here, we struggled to find a place to rest for the night. The plain was basically a swamp, with several lakes and ponds, and we were stuck in mud and water everywhere. Our bedding and clothes were soaked to the point that it didn’t really matter where we stopped; so we set up our little tent on the banks of a stream coming from a valley to the North, where there was a series of pyramidal mountains to the east, all covered in snow and almost the same height and base. To the South were tall peaks with a lot of snow on them. This valley was at an elevation of 17,450 feet, and the cold was extreme.

At night the rain came down in bucketsful, and our tente d'abri gave us but little shelter. We were lying inside in water, and all the trenches in the world could not

At night, the rain poured down heavily, and our tente d'abri provided barely any shelter. We were lying inside in water, and no amount of trenches could

[291]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Torrential Rain

Heavy Rain


[292] have kept it from streaming in. In fact, it is no exaggeration to say that the whole valley was a sheet of water from one to several inches deep. Of course, we suffered intensely from cold, the thermometer dropping to 26° at 8 p.m., when a South-East wind blew furiously; and the rain fell mixed with sleet for a time, and was followed by a heavy snowstorm. We lay crouched up on the top of our baggage, so as not to sleep on the frozen water, and when we woke in the morning our tent had half collapsed owing to the weight of snow upon it. During the day the temperature went up and rain fell afresh, so that when we resumed our marching, we sank into a mixture of mud, snow and water several inches deep. We had to cross three rivers, and to skirt five lakes of various sizes, following a course of 83° 45′.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] have kept it from streaming in. In fact, it's no exaggeration to say that the whole valley was covered with water, from one to several inches deep. Of course, we were freezing, with the temperature dropping to 26° at 8 pm, when a southeast wind howled furiously; and the rain fell mixed with sleet for a while, followed by a heavy snowstorm. We huddled on top of our gear to avoid sleeping on the frozen ground, and when we woke up in the morning, our tent had partially collapsed under the weight of the snow. During the day, the temperature rose, and it rained again, so when we resumed our march, we sank into a mix of mud, snow, and water several inches deep. We had to cross three rivers and navigate around five lakes of various sizes, following a course of 83° 45′.

Seven miles of this dreary marching saw us encamped (17,380 feet) by the foot of a conical hill 17,500 feet, where an almost identical repetition of the previous night's experience took place. The thermometer was down to 32°, but fortunately the wind subsided at eight in the evening. As luck would have it, the sun came out the following day, and we were able to spread out all our things to dry, during which process we had yet another novel experience.

Seven miles of this dreary march brought us to camp (17,380 feet) at the foot of a cone-shaped hill at 17,500 feet, where we had an almost identical experience to the previous night. The temperature dropped to 32°, but luckily the wind calmed down by eight in the evening. As fortune would have it, the sun came out the next day, allowing us to lay out all our things to dry, during which we had yet another new experience.

Head of Brigand

Brigand Leader


Our two yaks had disappeared. I climbed up to the summit of the hill above camp, and with my telescope scoured the plain. The two animals were some distance off being led away by ten or twelve men on horseback, who drove in front of them a flock of about five hundred sheep. By their clothing I recognised the strangers to be robbers. [293] Naturally I started post haste to recover my property, leaving Chanden Sing and Mansing in charge of our camp. I caught them up as they marched slowly, though, when they perceived me, they hastened on, trying to get away. I shouted three times to them to stop, but they paid no heed to my words, so that I unslung my rifle and would have shot at them had the threat alone not been sufficient to make them reflect. They halted, and when I got near enough I claimed my two yaks back. They refused to give them up. They said they were twelve men, and were not afraid of one. Dismounted from their ponies, they seemed ready to go for me.

Our two yaks were gone. I climbed to the top of the hill above our camp and scanned the plain with my telescope. The two animals were some distance away, being led off by ten or twelve men on horseback, who were driving a flock of about five hundred sheep in front of them. From their clothes, I could tell they were robbers. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Naturally, I rushed off to get my property back, leaving Chanden Sing and Mansing in charge of our camp. I caught up with them as they walked slowly, but when they saw me, they quickened their pace, trying to escape. I shouted three times for them to stop, but they ignored me, so I took my rifle off my shoulder and was ready to shoot if necessary, but the threat alone made them think twice. They stopped, and when I got close enough, I asked for my two yaks back. They refused to give them to me. They claimed they were twelve men and weren’t afraid of just one. Dismounting from their ponies, they looked ready to come after me.

Brigands with Sheep

Sheep Bandits


As I saw them take out a flint and steel to light the fuses of their matchlocks, I thought I might as well have my innings first, and, before they could guess at my intention, I applied a violent blow with the muzzle of my rifle to the stomach of the man nearest to me. He collapsed, while I administered another blow to the right temple of another man who held his matchlock between his legs, and was on the point of striking his flint and steel to set the tinder on fire. He, too, staggered and fell clumsily.

As I watched them pull out a flint and steel to light the fuses of their matchlocks, I figured I should make my move first. Before they could figure out what I was planning, I delivered a hard hit with the muzzle of my rifle to the stomach of the man closest to me. He went down, and I followed up with another strike to the right temple of another guy who had his matchlock between his legs and was about to strike his flint and steel to ignite the tinder. He staggered and fell awkwardly as well.

"Chakzal, chakzal! Chakzal wortzié!" ("We salute you, we salute you! Please listen!") exclaimed a third brigand, [294] with an expression of dismay, and holding up his thumbs, with his fist closed in sign of approval.

"Chakzal, chakzal! Chakzal wortzié!" ("We salute you, we salute you! Please listen!") shouted a third bandit, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] looking worried and giving a thumbs-up with his fist clenched as a sign of approval.

"Chakzal," I replied, shoving a cartridge into the Mannlicher.

"Chakzal," I replied, loading a cartridge into the Mannlicher.

"Middù, middù!" ("No, no!") they entreated, promptly laying down their weapons.

"No, no!" they pleaded, quickly putting down their weapons.

I purchased from these men about thirty pounds of tsamba and eight of butter, and got one of them to carry this to my camp, while I, without further trouble, recovered my yaks and drove them back to where Chanden Sing and Mansing were busy lighting a fire to make some tea.

I bought about thirty pounds of tsamba and eight of butter from these guys and convinced one of them to carry it to my camp, while I easily got my yaks back and took them to where Chanden Sing and Mansing were busy starting a fire to make some tea.

Saddle Bags

Saddle bags


[295]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LVII

Travelling Tibetans—Over a high pass—A friendly meeting—A proffered banquet—Ascent to 20,000 feet—Looking for the Gunkyo Lake—Surprised by a phantom army.

Towards noon, when our things had got almost dry in the warm sun, the sky became overclouded, and it again began to rain heavily. I was rather doubtful as to whether I should go over a pass some miles off to 93° (b.m.), or should follow the course of the river and skirt the foot of the mountains. We saw a large number of Tibetans travelling in the opposite direction to ours, and they all seemed much terrified when we approached them. We obtained from them a few more pounds of food, but they refused to sell us any sheep, of which they had thousands. I decided to attempt the first-mentioned route and, making our way first over a continuation of the flat plateau, then over undulating, ground, we came to two lakelets, at the foot of the pass in question. The ascent was comparatively gentle, over snow, and we followed the river descending from the top. About half-way up, on looking back, we saw eight soldiers galloping toward us. We waited for them; and as soon as they came up to us, they went through the usual servile salutations, depositing their arms on the ground to show that they had no intention of fighting. A long friendly palaver followed, the Tibetans professing their friendship for us and their willingness to help us to get on in any way in their power. This was rather too good to be true, and I suspected treachery, all the more so when they pressed and entreated us to go back to their tents, where they wished us to remain as their highly-honoured guests, and where we should have all the luxuries that human mind can conceive showered upon us. On further specification, these were found to consist of presents of chura, cheese, butter, yak [296] milk, and tsamba, and they said they would sell us ponies if we required them. The description was too glowing; so, taking all things into consideration, and allowing for the inaccuracy of speech of my interlocutors as well as of Tibetans in general, I thanked them from the bottom of my heart and answered that I preferred to continue my way and bear my present sufferings.

Around noon, when our things were almost dry in the warm sun, the sky got cloudy, and it started to rain heavily again. I was pretty unsure whether to go over a pass a few miles away to 93° (b.m.) or follow the river and stay at the base of the mountains. We saw a lot of Tibetans traveling in the opposite direction, and they all seemed really scared when we got close. We managed to get a few more pounds of food from them, but they wouldn't sell us any sheep, even though they had thousands. I decided to try the first route and, moving first over a flat plateau and then across some rolling ground, we reached two small lakes at the foot of the pass we were considering. The climb was relatively gentle, over snow, and we followed the river coming down from the top. About halfway up, when I looked back, I saw eight soldiers galloping toward us. We waited for them, and as soon as they reached us, they went through the usual respectful greetings, laying their arms on the ground to show they weren't looking for a fight. A long friendly conversation followed, with the Tibetans expressing their friendship and willingness to help us in any way they could. This felt a bit too good to be true, and I started to suspect betrayal, especially when they insisted we come back to their tents, where they wanted us to stay as their honored guests, promising all the luxuries imaginable. On further discussion, these luxuries turned out to be gifts of chura, cheese, butter, yak milk, and tsamba, and they said they would sell us ponies if we needed them. Their description was too enticing; so, considering all things and recognizing the tendency of my conversation partners and Tibetans in general to exaggerate, I sincerely thanked them and said I preferred to keep going and endure my current hardships.

Phantom-like Visitors

Ghostly Visitors


They perceived that I was not easy to catch, and, if anything, they respected me the more for it. In fact they could not disguise their amazement at my having got so far with only two men. When I had given my visitors some little present, we parted at last, in a very friendly manner.

They realized that I wasn't easy to catch, and if anything, they respected me more for it. In fact, they couldn't hide their amazement at how I had made it this far with only two men. After I gave my visitors a small gift, we finally parted ways on very friendly terms.

We climbed up to the pass (18,480 feet), and before us on the other side found a large stretch of flat land, some two thousand feet lower. I could see a lake, which I took to be the Gunkyo. Nevertheless, to make certain of it, I left my men and yaks on the pass and went to reconnoitre from a peak 19,000 feet high, N.E. of us. There was much snow and the ascent was difficult and tedious. When I got to the top another higher peak barred the view in front of me, so descending first and then ascending again, I climbed this second summit, finally reaching an elevation of 20,000 feet, and obtaining a good bird's-eye view of the country all [297] round. There was a long snowy range to the North, and, directly under it, what I imagined to be a stretch of water, judging from the mist and clouds forming above it, and from the grass on the lower portion of the mountains.

We climbed up to the pass (18,480 feet), and on the other side, we found a large flat area, about two thousand feet lower. I could see a lake, which I thought might be the Gunkyo. However, to be sure, I left my team and the yaks at the pass and went to scout from a peak 19,000 feet high, northeast of us. There was a lot of snow, and the climb was tough and slow. When I reached the top, another higher peak blocked my view, so I descended and then climbed this second summit, eventually reaching an elevation of 20,000 feet and getting a great bird's-eye view of the surrounding area. There was a long snowy range to the north and directly below it, what I believed to be a body of water, judging by the mist and clouds forming above it and the grass on the lower part of the mountains. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

A hill range stood in my way, just high enough to conceal the lake behind it. I rejoined my men and we continued our march down the other side of the pass, sinking in deep, soft snow. We pitched our tent at a spot about five hundred feet higher than the plain below us, in a gorge formed by the two mountain sides coming close together. Notwithstanding that I was now quite accustomed to great altitudes, the ascent to 20,000 feet had caused a certain exhaustion, and I should have been glad of a good night's rest.

A mountain range was in my way, just tall enough to hide the lake behind it. I regrouped with my team and we carried on down the other side of the pass, sinking into deep, soft snow. We set up our tent in a spot about five hundred feet higher than the plain below us, in a gorge where the two mountain sides came close together. Even though I was used to high altitudes, the climb to 20,000 feet had left me feeling pretty tired, and I would have welcomed a good night's sleep.

Mansing and Chanden Sing, having eaten some food, slept soundly, but I felt very depressed. I had a peculiar sense of unrest and of some evil coming to us during the night.

Mansing and Chanden Sing, having eaten some food, slept soundly, but I felt very down. I had a strange feeling of anxiety and a sense that some kind of trouble was coming our way during the night.

We were all three under our little tent, when I began to fancy there was some one outside. I do not know why the thought entered my head, for I heard no noise, but all the same I felt I must see and satisfy my curiosity. I peeped out of the tent with my rifle in hand, and saw a number of black figures cautiously crawling towards us. In a moment I was outside on my bare feet, running towards them and shouting at the top of my voice, "Pila tedau tedang!" ("Look out, look out!") which caused a stampede among our ghostlike visitors. There were, apparently, numbers of them hidden behind rocks, for when the panic seized them, the number of runaways was double or even treble that of the phantoms I had at first seen approaching. At one moment there seemed to be black ghosts springing out from everywhere, only, more solid than ghosts, they made a dreadful noise with their heavy boots as they ran in confusion down the steep descent and through the gorge. They turned sharply round the hill at the bottom and disappeared.

We were all three under our little tent when I started to think there was someone outside. I’m not sure why that thought popped into my head since I didn’t hear anything, but I felt like I needed to see for myself. I peeked out of the tent with my rifle in hand and saw a bunch of dark figures crawling toward us. In an instant, I was outside on my bare feet, running toward them and shouting at the top of my lungs, "Pila tedau tedang!" ("Look out, look out!"), which sent our ghostly visitors into a panic. There seemed to be many more of them hiding behind rocks because when they started to panic, the number of people running away was twice or even three times the number of phantoms I’d first seen coming. For a moment, it looked like black ghosts were popping up from everywhere, but they were more solid than ghosts, making a terrible noise with their heavy boots as they rushed down the steep slope and through the gorge. They turned sharply around the hill at the bottom and vanished.

When I crawled inside the tent again Chanden Sing and Mansing, wrapped head and all in their blankets, were still snoring!

When I crawled back into the tent, Chanden Sing and Mansing, all wrapped up in their blankets, were still snoring!


[298]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LVIII

A sleepless night—Watching our enemy—A picturesque sight—A messenger—Soldiers from Lhassa—Taken for a Kashmeree—The Gunkyo Lake.

Naturally I passed a sleepless night after that, fearing that the unwelcome visitors might return. We speculated much as to how the Tibetans had found us, and we could not help surmising that our friends of the previous afternoon must have put them on our track. However, such was the inconceivable cowardice shown on every occasion by the Tibetans, that we got to attach no importance to these incidents, and not only did they not inspire us with fear, but they even ceased to excite or disturb us much.

Naturally I had a sleepless night after that, worried that the unwanted visitors might come back. We speculated a lot about how the Tibetans had found us, and we couldn't help but think that our friends from the previous afternoon must have tipped them off. However, the sheer cowardice displayed by the Tibetans every time made us stop taking these incidents seriously. Not only did they fail to scare us, but they also stopped bothering us or causing us much disturbance.

We went on as usual, descending to the plain, and when we had got half-way across it, I scoured the hills all round with my telescope to see if I could discern traces of our pusillanimous foes.

We continued as normal, moving down to the plain, and when we were halfway across it, I scanned the hills all around with my telescope to see if I could spot any signs of our cowardly enemies.

"There they are," cried Chanden Sing, who had the most wonderful eyesight of any man I have known, as he pointed at the summit of a hill where, among the rocks, several heads could be seen peeping. We went on without taking further notice of them, and then they came out of their hiding-place, and we saw them descending the hill in a long line, leading their ponies. On reaching the plain they mounted their steeds and came full gallop towards us. They were quite a picturesque sight in their dark-red coats or brown and yellow skin robes and their vari-coloured caps. Some wore bright red coats with gold braiding, and Chinese caps. These were officers. The soldiers' matchlocks, to the rests of which red and white flags were attached, gave a touch of colour to the otherwise dreary scenery of barren hills and snow, and the tinkling of the horse-bells enlivened

"There they are," shouted Chanden Sing, who had the best eyesight of anyone I’ve ever met, as he pointed to the top of a hill where a few heads were peeking out from behind the rocks. We kept walking without paying them much attention, and soon they emerged from their hiding spots and started coming down the hill in a long line, leading their ponies. Once they reached the plain, they hopped on their horses and charged towards us. They looked quite striking in their dark-red coats, or brown and yellow skin robes, and their colorful caps. Some wore bright red coats with gold detailing and Chinese caps. These were the officers. The soldiers’ matchlocks, which had red and white flags attached to their rests, added a splash of color to the otherwise dull scene of barren hills and snow, and the sound of the horse-bells brightened the atmosphere.

[299]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Gunkyo Lake

Gunkyo Lake


[300] the monotony of these silent, inhospitable regions. They dismounted some three hundred yards from us, and one old man, throwing aside his matchlock and sword in a theatrical fashion, walked unsteadily towards us. We received him kindly, and he afforded us great amusement, for in his way he was a strange character.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] the dullness of these quiet, harsh areas. They got off their horses about three hundred yards away, and one old man, dramatically tossing aside his matchlock and sword, stumbled towards us. We greeted him warmly, and he provided us with a lot of entertainment, as he was quite an unusual character in his own right.

"I am only a Messenger"

"I'm just a messenger"


"I am only a messenger," he hastened to state, "and therefore do not pour your anger upon me if I speak to you. I only convey the words of my officers, who do not dare to come for fear of being injured. News has been received at Lhassa, from whence we have come, that a Plenki (an Englishman) with many men is in Tibet, and can be found nowhere. We have been sent to capture him. Are you one of his advance guard?"

"I’m just a messenger," he quickly said, "so please don’t take your anger out on me for speaking to you. I’m only relaying what my superiors have told me, as they’re too scared to come themselves. We’ve gotten word in Lhassa, from where we’ve come, that a Plenki (an Englishman) is in Tibet with a lot of men, and we can’t find him anywhere. We’ve been sent to capture him. Are you part of his advance guard?"

"No," I replied drily. "I suppose that you have taken several months to come from Lhassa."

"No," I replied flatly. "I guess it took you several months to get here from Lhassa."

"Oh no! Our ponies are good," he answered; "and we have come quickly."

"Oh no! Our ponies are great," he replied; "and we got here fast."

"Chik, ni, sum, shi, nga, do, diu, ghieh, gu, chu, chuck chick, chuck ni," the Tibetan counted up to twelve, frowning and keeping his head inclined towards the right as if to collect his thoughts, at the same time holding up his hand, with the thumb folded against the palm, and turning down a finger as he called each number. The thumbs are never [301] used in counting. "Lum chuck ni niman!" "Twelve days," said he, "have we been on the road. We have orders not to return till we have captured the Plenki. And you?" asked he inquisitively, "how long have you taken to come from Ladak?"

"Chik, ni, sum, shi, nga, do, diu, ghieh, gu, chu, chuck chick, chuck ni," the Tibetan counted to twelve, frowning and tilting his head to the right as if gathering his thoughts, while holding up his hand—with his thumb tucked against his palm—and folding down a finger for each number he called out. The thumbs are never [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] used in counting. "Lum chuck ni niman!" "Twelve days," he said, "we have been on the road. We have been told not to return until we have captured the Plenki. And you?" he asked curiously, "how long did it take you to come from Ladak?"

He said that he could see by my face that I was a Kashmeree, I being probably so burnt and dirty that it was hard to distinguish me from a native. The old man cross-examined me to find out whether I was a pundit sent by the Indian Government to survey the country, and asked me why I had discarded my native clothes for Plenki (European) ones. He over and over again inquired whether I was not one of the Plenki's party.

He said he could tell by my face that I was Kashmiri, probably because I was so sunburned and dirty that it was hard to tell me apart from a local. The old man questioned me thoroughly to see if I was a pundit sent by the Indian Government to survey the area, and he asked why I had traded my native clothes for European ones. He repeatedly asked whether I was part of the Europeans’ group.

"Keran ga naddo ung?" ("Where are you going?") he queried.

"Keran ga naddo ung?" ("Where are you going?") he asked.

"Nhgarang no koroun Lama jehlhuong." ("I am a pilgrim," I replied, "going to visit monasteries.")

"Nhgarang no koroun Lama jehlhuong." ("I’m a pilgrim," I said, "on my way to visit monasteries.")

"Keran mi japodù." ("You are a good man.")

"Keran mi japodù." ("You're a good man.")

He offered to show me the way to the Gunkyo Lake, and was so pressing that I accepted. However, when I saw the 200 soldiers mount and follow us, I remonstrated with him, saying that if we were to be friends we did not need an army to escort us.

He offered to show me the way to Gunkyo Lake, and he insisted so much that I agreed. However, when I saw the 200 soldiers getting on their mounts and following us, I expressed my concerns to him, saying that if we were going to be friends, we didn’t need an army to escort us.

"If you are our friend, you can come alone, and we will not injure you," I gave him to understand; "but if you are our enemy we will fight you and your army here at once, and we will save you the trouble of coming on."

"If you're our friend, you can come by yourself, and we won’t harm you," I made it clear to him; "but if you’re our enemy, we’ll fight you and your army right here, and we’ll save you the hassle of coming any closer."

The Tibetan, confused and hesitating, went to confabulate with his men, and returned some time after with eight of them, while the bulk of his force galloped away in the opposite direction.

The Tibetan, unsure and hesitant, went to talk with his men and returned some time later with eight of them, while most of his force rode off in the opposite direction.

We went across the plain to 355° (b.m.), until we came to a hill range, which we crossed over a pass 17,450 feet high. Then, altering our course to 56° 30′, we descended and ascended several hills, and at last found ourselves in the grassy sheltered valley of the large Gunkyo Lake, extending from South-East to North-West. With a temperature of 68° (Fahr.) the water in hypsometrical apparatus boiled at 183° 3½′ at 8.30 in the evening. The lake was of extraordinary beauty, with the high snowy Gangri mountains rising almost sheer from its waters, and on the southern side lofty hills forming a background wild and picturesque, but barren and desolate beyond all words. At the other end of the lake, to the North-West, were lower mountains skirting the water.

We crossed the plain to 355° (b.m.) until we reached a mountain range, which we crossed over a pass at 17,450 feet high. Then, changing our direction to 56° 30′, we went down and then up several hills, and finally found ourselves in the grassy, sheltered valley of the large Gunkyo Lake, which stretched from Southeast to Northwest. With a temperature of 68° (Fahr.), the water in the hypsometrical apparatus boiled at 183° 3½′ at 8:30 in the evening. The lake was incredibly beautiful, with the high snowy Gangri mountains rising almost straight up from its waters, and on the southern side, tall hills creating a wild and picturesque background, though barren and desolate beyond description. At the other end of the lake, to the Northwest, were lower mountains lining the water.

We encamped at 16,455 feet, and the soldiers pitched their tent some fifty yards away.

We set up camp at 16,455 feet, and the soldiers put up their tent about fifty yards away.


[302]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LIX

In pleasant company—Unpopularity of the Lamas—Soldiers—Towards the Maium Pass—Grass—Threats—Puzzled Tibetans—The Maium Pass—Obos.

During the evening the Tibetans came over to my camp and made themselves useful. They helped us to get fuel, and brewed tea for me in Tibetan fashion. They seemed decent fellows, although sly if you like. They professed to hate the Lamas, the rulers of the country, to whom they took special pleasure in applying names hardly repeatable in these pages. According to them, the Lamas had all the money that came into the country, and no one but themselves was allowed to have any. They were not particular as to the means used to obtain their aim; they were cruel and unjust. Every man in Tibet, they said, was a soldier in case of emergency, and every one a servant of the Lamas. The soldiers of the standing army received a certain quantity of tsamba, bricks of tea and butter, and that was all, no pay being given in cash. Usually, however, they were given a pony to ride, and when on travelling duty they had a right to obtain relays of animals at post-stations and villages, where also they were entitled to claim supplies of food, saddles, or anything else they required, to last them as far as the next encampment. The weapons (sword and matchlock) generally belonged to the men themselves, and always remained in the family; but occasionally, and especially in the larger towns, such as Lhassa and Sigatz, the Lamas provided them: gunpowder and bullets were invariably supplied by the authorities. The arms were manufactured mostly in Lhassa and Sigatz. Although the Tibetans boasted of great accuracy in shooting with their matchlocks, which had wooden rests to allow the marksman to take a steady aim, it was never my pleasure to see even

During the evening, the Tibetans came to my camp and helped out. They gathered fuel and made tea for me in their traditional way. They seemed like decent guys, though a bit sneaky. They claimed to despise the Lamas, the rulers of the country, and took particular joy in using names that are not suitable to repeat here. According to them, the Lamas kept all the money that flowed into the country, leaving no one else with anything. They weren’t picky about how they tried to achieve their goals; they were ruthless and unfair. Every man in Tibet, they said, was a soldier ready to fight in case of an emergency, and everyone served the Lamas. The soldiers in the regular army received a certain amount of tsamba, blocks of tea and butter, and that was it—no cash pay. Usually, though, they were given a pony to ride, and when on duty, they had the right to get fresh animals at post-stations and villages, where they could also claim food, saddles, or anything else they needed to last until they reached the next camp. The weapons (sword and matchlock) usually belonged to the men and stayed in the family; however, sometimes, especially in larger towns like Lhasa and Sigatz, the Lamas supplied them, while the authorities always provided gunpowder and bullets. Most arms were made in Lhasa and Sigatz. Even though the Tibetans boasted about their accuracy with matchlocks, which had wooden rests to help the shooter aim steadily, I never had the chance to see even

[303]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Flying Prayers on the Maium Pass

Flying Prayers on the Maium Pass


[304] the champion shots in the country hit the mark. It is true that, for sporting purposes and for economy's sake, the Tibetan soldier hardly ever used lead bullets or shot, but preferred to fill his barrel with pebbles, which were scarcely calculated to improve the bore of the weapon. Furthermore, gunpowder was so scarce that it was but very seldom they had a chance of practising.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] The top marksmen in the country definitely hit their targets. It's true that, for the sake of sport and cost-efficiency, the Tibetan soldier rarely used lead bullets or shot. Instead, he preferred to load his firearm with pebbles, which didn't do much for the gun's accuracy. Additionally, gunpowder was so hard to come by that they rarely had the opportunity to practice.

At sunrise the view of Gunkyo was magnificent, with the snow-covered mountains tinted gold and red, and reflected in their minutest details in the still waters of the lake. We loaded our yaks, the Tibetans giving us a helping hand, and started towards the Maium Pass, following a general course of 109° up the river, which throws itself into the Gunkyo Lake.

At sunrise, the view of Gunkyo was breathtaking, with the snow-covered mountains glowing in gold and red, and their finest details mirrored in the calm waters of the lake. We packed our yaks with the help of the Tibetans and set off toward the Maium Pass, generally heading 109° up the river that flows into Gunkyo Lake.

MatchlockMatchlock
Matchlock firearm    Matchlock firearm

The valley was very narrow, and ran in continuous zigzags; but although the altitude was great, there was abundance of grass, and the green was quite refreshing to the eyes, tired as we were of snow and reddish barren mountains and desert-like stretches of land. We came to a basin where, on the opposite bank of the stream, was a large Tibetan camping-ground with a high wall of stones. Behind it I could see smoke rising, which made me suspect that there were people concealed there.

The valley was really narrow and twisted in continuous zigzags. Even though we were at a high altitude, there was plenty of grass, and the green was a nice change for our eyes, which were worn out from the snow, reddish barren mountains, and desert-like stretches of land. We reached a basin where, on the other side of the stream, there was a large Tibetan campsite with a tall stone wall. Behind it, I could see smoke rising, which made me think there were people hiding there.

[305]Our Tibetan friends asked what we were going to do, and begged me to stop there to talk and drink tea. I said I had had quite enough of both, and would proceed.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Our Tibetan friends asked what our plans were and urged me to stay for a chat and some tea. I told them I had had more than enough of both and would continue on.

"If you go on we will kill you," said one of the soldiers, getting into a temper, and taking advantage of our politeness towards him and his mates.

"If you keep going, we will kill you," said one of the soldiers, getting angry and taking advantage of our politeness towards him and his buddies.

"Nga samgi ganta indah" ("If you please"), I answered with studied courtesy.

"Nga samgi ganta indah" ("If you please"), I replied politely.

"If you go another step, we will cut off your head, or you will have to cut off ours," cried two or three others, stretching their bare necks towards me.

"If you take one more step, we’ll cut off your head, or you’ll have to cut off ours," shouted a couple of others, tilting their bare necks toward me.

"Taptih middù" ("I have not got a small knife"), I replied, quite seriously, and with assumed disappointment, twirling my hand in the air in Tibetan fashion.

"Taptih middù" ("I don’t have a small knife"), I replied, quite seriously and with feigned disappointment, twirling my hand in the air in a Tibetan style.

The Tibetans did not know what to make of me, and when I moved towards the pass, on which hundreds of flying prayers flapped in the wind, after politely bidding them good-bye with tongue out, and waving both my hands palms upwards in front of my forehead in the most approved Tibetan style, they took off their caps and humbly saluted us by going down on their knees and putting their heads close to the ground.

The Tibetans were unsure of what to think of me, and as I walked toward the pass, where hundreds of prayer flags fluttered in the wind, I politely said goodbye with my tongue out and waved both my hands palms up in front of my forehead in the traditional Tibetan way. They removed their caps and respectfully knelt down, lowering their heads close to the ground to greet us.

We crossed the plain, and slowly wended our way up the pass. Near the top we came to a track, the highway from Ladak to Lhassa viâ Gartok, along the northern side of the Rakstal, Mansarowar and Gunkyo Lakes. On the pass itself were planted several poles connected by means of ropes, from which flying prayers waved gaily in the breeze. Obos, or mounds of stones, had also been erected here. The slabs were usually white, and bore in many instances the inscription "Omne mani padme hun." Yak skulls and horns, as well as those of goats and sheep, were laid by the side of these Obos, the same words being engraved on the bone and stained red with the blood of the animal killed.

We crossed the plain and slowly made our way up the pass. Near the top, we reached a trail, the highway from Ladak to Lhassa via Gartok, along the northern shore of the Rakstal, Mansarowar, and Gunkyo Lakes. At the pass itself, several poles were planted, connected by ropes, from which prayer flags fluttered cheerfully in the breeze. Obos, or stone mounds, were also built here. The stones were usually white and often had the inscription "Omne mani padme hun" on them. Yak skulls and horns, along with those of goats and sheep, were placed beside these Obos, with the same words engraved on the bones and stained red with the blood of the sacrificed animals.

These sacrifices are offered by Tibetans when crossing a high pass, especially if there is a Lama close at hand to commemorate the event. The meat of the animal killed is eaten by the people present, and, if the party is a large one, dancing and singing follow the feast. As I have already remarked, these Obos are found all over the country; they indicate the points marking the passes or summits of hills, and no Tibetan ever goes by one of them without depositing on it a white stone to appease the possible wrath of their God.

These offerings are made by Tibetans when they cross a high pass, especially if a Lama is nearby to mark the occasion. The meat from the animal that was killed is shared among those present, and if the group is large, dancing and singing follow the meal. As I’ve mentioned, these Obos are found throughout the country; they mark the locations of passes or hilltops, and no Tibetan ever passes one without placing a white stone on it to calm any potential anger from their God.


[306]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LX

The Maium Pass—Into the Yutzang province—Its capital—The Doktol province—Orders disregarded—The sources of the Brahmaputra—Change in the climate—The valley of the Brahmaputra—Running risks.

The Maium Pass (17,500 feet), to which from where I started no Englishman had ever penetrated, is a great landmark in Tibet, for not only does one of the sources of the great Tsangpu, or Brahmaputra River, rise on its S.E. slopes, but it also separates the immense provinces of Nari-Khorsum (extending West of the Maium Pass and comprising the mountainous and lacustrine region as far as Ladak) from the Yutzang, the central province of Tibet, stretching East of the pass along the valley of the Brahmaputra and having Lhassa for its capital. The word Yu in Tibetan means "middle," and it is applied to this province, as it occupies the centre of Tibet. To the North of the Maium lies the Doktol province.

The Maium Pass (17,500 feet), which no Englishman had ever reached from my starting point, is a significant landmark in Tibet. Not only does one of the sources of the great Tsangpu, or Brahmaputra River, emerge from its southeastern slopes, but it also separates the vast provinces of Nari-Khorsum (which extends west of the Maium Pass and includes the mountainous and lake-filled areas up to Ladak) from Yutzang, the central province of Tibet, located east of the pass along the Brahmaputra valley, with Lhassa as its capital. The word Yu in Tibetan means "middle," and it is used for this province because it sits in the center of Tibet. To the north of the Maium is the Doktol province.

I had taken a reconnoitring trip to another pass to the N.E. of us, and had just returned to my men on the Maium Pass, when several of the Tibetan soldiers we had left behind rode up towards us. We waited for them, and their leader, pointing at the valley beyond the pass, cried: "That yonder is the Lhassa territory and we forbid you to enter it."

I had gone on a scouting trip to another pass to the northeast of us, and had just returned to my team at the Maium Pass when several of the Tibetan soldiers we had left behind rode up to us. We waited for them, and their leader, pointing at the valley beyond the pass, shouted, "That over there is Lhassa territory, and we forbid you to enter it."

I took no notice of his protest, and driving before me the two yaks I stepped into the most sacred of all the sacred provinces, "the ground of God."

I ignored his protest, and leading the two yaks in front of me, I entered the most sacred of all sacred places, "the ground of God."

We descended quickly on the Eastern side of the pass, while the soldiers, aghast, remained watching us from above, themselves a most picturesque sight as they stood among the Obos against the sky-line, with the sunlight shining on their jewelled swords and the gay red flags of their matchlocks, while over their heads strings of flying [307] prayers waved in the wind. Having watched us for a little while, they disappeared.

We quickly descended on the eastern side of the pass, while the soldiers, shocked, watched us from above, looking quite striking as they stood among the Obos against the skyline, with sunlight glinting off their jeweled swords and the bright red flags of their matchlocks. Strings of flying prayers waved in the wind above their heads. After watching us for a bit, they vanished.

Source of the Brahmaputra

Origin of the Brahmaputra


A little rivulet, hardly six inches wide, descended among stones in the centre of the valley we were following, and was soon swollen by other rivulets from melting snows on the mountains to either side. This was one source[24] of the great Brahmaputra, one of the largest rivers of the world. I must confess that I felt somewhat proud to be the first European who had ever reached these sources, and there was a certain childish delight in standing over this sacred stream which, of such immense width lower down, could here be spanned by a man standing with legs slightly apart. We drank of its waters at the spot where it had its birth, and then, following a marked track to 125° (b.m.), we continued our descent on a gentle incline along a grassy valley. The change in the climate between the West and South-east sides of the Maium Pass was extraordinary. On the Western side we had nothing but violent storms of hail, rain and snow, the dampness in the air rendering the atmosphere cold even during the day. The soil was unusually marshy, and very little fuel or grass could be found. The moment the pass was crossed we were in a mild, pleasant climate, with a lovely deep blue sky over us and plenty of grass for the [308] yaks, as well as low shrubs for our fires; so that, after all our sufferings and privations, we felt that we had indeed entered the land of God. Notwithstanding that I expected great trouble sooner or later, I was not at all sorry I had disobeyed the soldiers' orders and had marched straight into the forbidden territory—it was a kind of wild satisfaction at doing that which is forbidden.

A small stream, not even six inches wide, flowed between rocks in the middle of the valley we were following, and it quickly grew larger from other streams created by melting snow on the nearby mountains. This marked one of the sources[24] of the great Brahmaputra, one of the largest rivers in the world. I have to admit that I felt a bit proud to be the first European to reach these sources, and there was a certain childish joy in standing over this sacred stream, which, while it was incredibly wide further down, could be crossed here by a man standing with legs slightly apart. We drank from its waters at the spot where it originated and then, following a marked path to 125° (b.m.), we continued our descent on a gentle slope through a grassy valley. The difference in climate between the west and south-east sides of the Maium Pass was remarkable. On the western side, we faced nothing but fierce storms of hail, rain, and snow, with the damp air making it feel cold even during the day. The ground was unusually boggy, and we could hardly find fuel or grass. As soon as we crossed the pass, we entered a mild, pleasant climate, with a beautiful deep blue sky overhead and plenty of grass for the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] yaks, along with low shrubs for our fires; after all our hardships and deprivations, we felt like we had truly entered the land of God. Even though I anticipated significant trouble down the line, I didn’t regret disobeying the soldiers’ orders and marching straight into forbidden territory—it felt like a kind of wild satisfaction to do something that was off-limits.

The Brahmaputra received three small snow-fed tributaries descending rapidly from the steep mountains on either side of us; and where the main stream turned sharply to 170°, a fourth and important tributary, carrying a very large volume of water, came down to it through a gorge from 20° (b.m.).

The Brahmaputra got three small, snow-fed tributaries that flowed quickly down from the steep mountains on both sides of us; and where the main river suddenly curved to 170°, a fourth and significant tributary, bringing a huge amount of water, came into it through a gorge from 20° (b.m.).

We encamped near the junction of these rivers, on the right bank of the main stream, at an altitude of 16,620 feet. From the Maium Pass a continuation of the Gangri chain of mountains runs first in a South-easterly direction, then due East, taking a line almost parallel to the higher Southern range of the Himahlyas, and forming a vast plain intersected by the Brahmaputra. On the Southern side of the river can be seen minor hill ranges between the river course and the big range with its majestic snowy peaks and beautiful glaciers. This Northern range keeps an almost parallel line to the greater range southward; and, though no peaks of very considerable elevation are to be found along it, yet it is of geographical importance, as its Southern slopes form the Northern watershed of the holy river as far as Lhassa.

We set up camp near the confluence of these rivers, on the right bank of the main stream, at an elevation of 16,620 feet. From the Maium Pass, a part of the Gangri mountain range runs first in a southeast direction, then due east, following a line that's almost parallel to the higher southern range of the Himalayas, creating a vast plain cut through by the Brahmaputra. On the southern side of the river, you can see smaller hill ranges between the river and the larger range with its impressive snowy peaks and stunning glaciers. This northern range runs almost parallel to the bigger southern range; although there aren't any significantly high peaks along it, it is geographically important because its southern slopes form the northern watershed of the sacred river all the way to Lhassa.

The valley enclosed between these two parallel ranges is the most thickly populated valley in Tibet. Grass is abundant, and fuel easily obtainable, and therefore thousands of yaks, sheep, and goats can be seen grazing near the many Tibetan camps along the Brahmaputra and its principal tributaries. The trade route taken by the caravans from Ladak to Lhassa follows this valley; and, as I came to Tibet to see and study the Tibetans, I thought that, although I might run greater risks, I could in no part of the country accomplish my object better than by going along this thickly populated track.

The valley between these two parallel mountain ranges is the most densely populated valley in Tibet. Grass is plentiful, and fuel is easy to find, so thousands of yaks, sheep, and goats can be seen grazing near the many Tibetan camps along the Brahmaputra and its main tributaries. The trade route used by caravans traveling from Ladakh to Lhasa runs through this valley; and since I came to Tibet to see and learn about the Tibetans, I believed that, even if I might face more risks, I could achieve my goal better by following this heavily populated route.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[24] I passed the other source on the return journey.

[24] I passed the other source on my way back.


[309]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXI

Expecting trouble—Along the Brahmaputra—A thunderstorm—A dilemma—A dangerous river—Swamped—Saved—Night disturbers—A new friend.

We slept very little, as we expected the soldiers to attack us during the night to try and stop our progress, but all was quiet and nothing happened; our yaks, however, managed to get loose, and we had some difficulty in recovering them in the morning, for they had swum across the stream, and had gone about a mile from camp on the other side.

We hardly slept, anticipating that the soldiers would try to attack us during the night to hinder our progress, but everything was quiet and nothing occurred; however, our yaks got loose, and we struggled to get them back in the morning, as they had crossed the stream and traveled about a mile from camp on the other side.

The night had been very cold, the thermometer dropping as low as 32½°. We did not pitch our little tent, in case of emergencies, and we were tired and cold after the long march of the previous day. There was a South-westerly breeze blowing and I found it hard to have to cross the river, chase the yaks and bring them back to camp. Then, exhausted as we were, we had in addition to go through the daily routine of loading them. We followed the right bank of the stream to bearings 170° (m.), then to 142° 30′ (b.m.), where it wound in and out between barren hills, subsequently flowing through a grassy valley three-quarters of a mile wide and a mile and a half long. It then went through a narrow passage to 17° 30′ (b.m.) and turned to 103° and farther to 142° through an undulating grassy valley two miles wide, in crossing which we were caught in a terrific thunderstorm, with hail and rain. This was indeed an annoying experience, for we were now before a very large tributary of the Brahmaputra, and the stream was so swollen, rapid and deep that I was much puzzled as to how to take my men across: they could not swim, and the water was so cold that a dip in it would give any one a severe shock. However, there was no time to be lost, for the river was visibly rising, and as the storm was getting worse, [310] difficulties would only increase every moment. We took off every stitch of clothing and fastened our garments, with our rifles, &c., on the pack-saddles of the yaks, which we sent into the water. They are good swimmers, and though the current carried them over a hundred yards down stream, we saw them with satisfaction scramble out of the water on to the opposite bank.

The night was extremely cold, with the temperature dropping to 32½°. We didn’t set up our little tent in case of emergencies, and we were tired and chilled after the long march the day before. A southwesterly breeze was blowing, and I found it tough to cross the river, round up the yaks, and bring them back to camp. Then, even though we were exhausted, we had to go through the daily routine of loading them up. We followed the right bank of the stream to a heading of 170° (m.), then to 142° 30′ (b.m.), where it meandered between barren hills, eventually flowing through a grassy valley three-quarters of a mile wide and a mile and a half long. The river then flowed through a narrow passage to 17° 30′ (b.m.) and turned to 103°, continuing to 142° through an undulating grassy valley two miles wide. As we crossed it, we were caught in a terrible thunderstorm with hail and rain. This was indeed a frustrating experience, as we were now facing a very large tributary of the Brahmaputra, and the river was so swollen, fast, and deep that I was really puzzled about how to get my men across: they couldn’t swim, and the water was so cold that anyone who fell in would be severely shocked. However, we couldn’t waste any time, as the river was visibly rising, and the storm was getting worse, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] making the difficulties increase every moment. We took off all our clothes and secured our garments, along with our rifles, etc., on the pack-saddles of the yaks, which we sent into the water. They are strong swimmers, and even though the current carried them over a hundred yards downstream, we were relieved to see them scramble out of the water onto the opposite bank.

Tibetan Dog

Tibetan Mastiff


Notwithstanding the faith that Chanden Sing and Mansing had in my swimming, they really thought that their last hour had come when I took each by the hand and asked them to follow me into the stream. Hardly had we gone twelve yards when the inevitable took place. We were all three swept away, and Chanden Sing and Mansing in their panic clung tight to my arms and dragged me under water. Though I swam my hardest with my legs, we continually came to the surface and then sank again, owing to the dead weight of my helpless mates. But at last, after a desperate struggle, the current washed us [311] on to the opposite side, where we found our feet, and were soon able to scramble out of the treacherous river. We were some two hundred yards down stream from the spot at which we had entered the river, and such was the quantity of muddy water we had swallowed that we all three became sick. This left us much exhausted, and, as the storm showed no signs of abating, we encamped (16,320 feet) there and then on the left bank of the stream. Though we sadly needed some warm food, there was, of course, no possibility of lighting a fire. A piece of chocolate was all I had that night, and my men preferred to eat nothing rather than break their caste by eating my food.

Despite the trust that Chanden Sing and Mansing had in my swimming skills, they genuinely believed their time had come when I took each of them by the hand and asked them to follow me into the river. We had barely gone twelve yards when the inevitable happened. We were all swept away, and Chanden Sing and Mansing, in their panic, clung tightly to my arms and pulled me under the water. Even though I swam as hard as I could with my legs, we kept surfacing and then sinking again because of the dead weight of my helpless companions. But finally, after a desperate struggle, the current washed us onto the opposite bank, where we were able to find our footing and scramble out of the treacherous river. We were about two hundred yards downstream from where we had entered, and we had swallowed so much muddy water that we all felt sick. This left us extremely exhausted, and since the storm showed no signs of letting up, we set up camp there on the left bank of the river (16,320 feet). Although we really needed some warm food, there was, of course, no way to start a fire. I had only a piece of chocolate that night, and my men would rather not eat anything than break their caste by eating my food.

Small Mani Wall

Small Mani Wall


We were asleep under our little tent, the hour being about eleven, when there was a noise outside as of voices and people stumbling against stones. I was out in a moment with my rifle, and shouted the usual "Paladò" ("Go away"), in answer to which, though I could see nothing owing to the darkness, I heard several stones flung from slings whizzing past me. One of these hit the tent, and a dog barked furiously. I fired a shot in the air, which had the good effect of producing a hasty retreat of our enemies, whoever they were. The dog, however, would not [312] go. He remained outside barking all night, and it was only in the morning, when I gave him some food and caressed him in Tibetan fashion, with the usual words of endearment, "Chochu, Chochu," that our four-footed foe became friendly, rubbing himself against my legs as if he had known me all his life, and taking a particular fancy to Mansing, by whose side he lay down. From that day he never left our camp, and followed us everywhere, until harder times came upon us.

We were asleep under our little tent around eleven o'clock when we heard noise outside, like voices and people stumbling over rocks. I jumped out with my rifle and shouted the usual "Paladò" ("Go away"), and although I couldn’t see anything in the dark, I heard several stones being flung from slings whizzing past me. One of them hit the tent, and a dog started barking furiously. I fired a shot into the air, which made our enemies—whoever they were—retreat quickly. However, the dog wouldn’t leave. He stayed outside barking all night, and it was only in the morning, when I gave him some food and petted him in the Tibetan way, saying the usual words of endearment, "Chochu, Chochu," that our four-legged foe became friendly. He rubbed against my legs as if he had known me forever and took a special liking to Mansing, lying down next to him. From that day on, he never left our camp and followed us everywhere until harder times hit us.


[313]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXII

Leaving the course of the river—A pass—An arid plain—More vanishing soldiers—Another river—A mani wall—Mirage?—A large Tibetan encampment—The chain of mountains North of us.

The river was turning too much towards the South, so I decided to abandon it and strike across country, especially as there were faint signs of a track leading over a pass to 110° (b.m.) from camp. I followed this track, and along it I distinguished marks of hundreds of ponies' hoofs, now almost entirely washed away. This was evidently the way taken by the soldiers we had encountered on the other side of the Maium Pass.

The river was bending too much to the south, so I decided to leave it and head straight across the land, especially since there were faint signs of a track leading over a pass to 110° (b.m.) from camp. I followed this track and noticed marks of hundreds of ponies' hooves, which were now almost completely washed away. This was clearly the route taken by the soldiers we had met on the other side of the Maium Pass.

Having risen over the col 17,750 feet, we saw before us an extensive valley with barren hills scattered over it. To the South we observed a large plain some ten miles wide, with snowy peaks rising on the farther side. In front was a hill projecting into the plain, on which stood a mani wall; and this latter discovery made me feel quite confident that I was on the high road to Lhassa. About eight miles off to the NNW. were high snowy peaks, and as we went farther we found a lofty mountain range, with still higher peaks, three miles behind it. We had travelled half-way across the waterless plain, when we noticed a number of soldiers' heads and matchlocks popping in and out from behind a distant hill. After a while they came out in numbers to observe our movements, then retired again behind the hill. We proceeded, but when we were still half a mile from them they abandoned their hiding-place, and galloped away before us, raising clouds of dust. From a hill 16,200 feet, over which the track crossed, we perceived a group of very high snowy peaks about eight miles distant. Between them and us stood a range of hills cut by a valley, along which [314] flowed a river carrying a large volume of water. This we followed to 126° (b.m.), and having found a suitable fording-place, we crossed over at a spot where the stream was twenty-five yards across, and the water reached up to our waists. We found here another mani wall with large inscriptions on stones, and as the wind was very high and cutting, we made use of it to shelter us. Within the angle comprised between bearings 240° and 120° (b.m.) we could observe a very high, snowy mountain range in the distance (the great Himahlyan chain), and lower hill ranges even as near as three miles from camp. The river we had just crossed flowed into the Brahmaputra, and we were now at an elevation of 15,700 feet. We saw plainly at sunset a number of black tents before us at bearings 120°; we calculated them to be two miles distant. We counted about sixty, as well as hundreds of black yaks.

Having climbed over the pass at 17,750 feet, we saw before us a vast valley dotted with barren hills. To the south, we noticed a large plain about ten miles wide, with snowy peaks rising on the other side. In front of us was a hill that jutted into the plain, on which stood a *mani* wall; this made me feel pretty confident that I was on the right path to Lhassa. About eight miles to the north-northwest, there were tall snowy peaks, and as we moved on, we encountered a high mountain range, with even higher peaks three miles behind it. We had traveled halfway across the waterless plain when we spotted several soldiers' heads and matchlocks appearing and disappearing behind a distant hill. After a while, they came out in numbers to watch us, then retreated back behind the hill. We continued, but when we were still half a mile away, they left their hiding place and galloped off ahead of us, kicking up clouds of dust. From a hill at 16,200 feet, where the path crossed, we could see a group of very tall snowy peaks about eight miles away. Between us and them was a range of hills cut by a valley, along which flowed a river carrying a large volume of water. We followed this river to 126° (b.m.), and after finding a good place to ford, we crossed where the stream was twenty-five yards wide, and the water came up to our waists. Here, we found another *mani* wall with large inscriptions on stones, and since the wind was very strong and biting, we used it for shelter. Within the angle formed by bearings 240° and 120° (b.m.), we could see a very high, snowy mountain range in the distance (the great Himalayan chain), and lower hill ranges as close as three miles from our camp. The river we had just crossed flowed into the Brahmaputra, and we were now at an elevation of 15,700 feet. As the sun set, we clearly saw a number of black tents in front of us at bearings 120°; we estimated they were about two miles away. We counted around sixty tents, along with hundreds of black yaks.

An Effect of Mirage

A Mirage Effect


At sunrise the next morning, much to our surprise, they had all vanished; nor, on marching in the direction where we had seen them the previous night, were we able to find traces of them. It seemed as if it must have been mirage. Eventually, however, some fourteen miles away, across a grassy plain bounded to the North-East by [315] the range extending from North-West to South-East, and with lofty snowy peaks at 72° some five miles off, we came upon a very large Tibetan encampment of over eighty black tents at an altitude of 15,650 feet. They were pitched on the banks of another tributary of the Brahmaputra, which, after describing a great curve in the plain, passed West of the encampment. Five miles off, in the arc of circle described from 310° to 70° (b.m.), stood the chain of mountains which I had observed all along; but here the elevations of its peaks became gradually lower and lower, so much so that the name of "hill range" would be more appropriate to it than that of "mountain chain." Behind it, however, towered loftier peaks again with their snowy caps.

At sunrise the next morning, to our surprise, they had all disappeared; and when we marched in the direction we had seen them the night before, we couldn't find any traces of them. It felt like it must have been a mirage. Eventually, though, about fourteen miles away, across a grassy plain bordered to the North-East by [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] the mountain range stretching from North-West to South-East, with tall snowy peaks at 72° about five miles away, we stumbled upon a large Tibetan encampment with over eighty black tents at an altitude of 15,650 feet. They were set up along the banks of another tributary of the Brahmaputra, which, after making a broad curve in the plain, flowed west of the camp. Five miles away, in the arc of a circle extending from 310° to 70° (b.m.), stood the mountain chain I had been observing all along; but here, the heights of its peaks gradually decreased, to the point where calling it a "hill range" would be more fitting than referring to it as a "mountain chain." Behind it, though, taller peaks rose again with their snowy caps.


[316]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXIII

A commotion—An invitation declined—The tents—Delicacies—The Chokseh.

We wanted food, and so made boldly for the encampment. Our approach caused a great commotion, and yaks and sheep were hastily driven away before us, while men and women rushed in and out of their tents, apparently in a state of much excitement. Eight or ten men reluctantly came forward and entreated us to go inside a large tent. They said they wished to speak to us, and offered us tea. I would not accept their invitation, distrusting them, but went on across the encampment, halting some three hundred yards beyond it. Chanden Sing and I proceeded afterwards on a round of calls at all the tents, trying to purchase food and also to show that, if we had declined to enter a particular tent, it was not on account of fear, but because we did not want to be caught in a trap. Our visit to the different golingchos or gurr (tents) was interesting enough. The tents themselves were very cleverly constructed, and admirably adapted to the country in which they were used; and the various articles of furniture inside attracted my curiosity. The tents, black in colour, were woven of yaks' hair, the natural greasiness of which made them quite waterproof. They consisted of two separate pieces of this thick material, supported by two poles at each end, and there was an oblong aperture above in the upper part of the tent, through which the smoke could escape. The base of the larger tents was hexagonal in shape: the roof, generally at a height of six or seven feet above the ground, was kept very tightly stretched by means of long ropes passing over high poles and pegged to the ground. Wooden and iron pegs were used for this purpose, and many were required to keep the tent close to the ground all round, so as [317] to protect its inmates from the cutting winds of the great plateau. Long poles, as a rule numbering four, with white flying prayers, could be seen outside each tent, or one to each point of the compass, the East being taken for a starting-point. Around the interior of the larger tents there was a mud wall from two to three feet high, for the purpose of further protection against wind, rain and snow. These walls were sometimes constructed of dried dung, which, as time went on, was used for fuel. There were two apertures, one at either end of the tent; that facing the wind being always kept closed by means of loops and wooden bolts.

We wanted food, so we confidently headed towards the encampment. Our arrival stirred up a lot of activity; yaks and sheep were quickly driven away from in front of us, while men and women hurried in and out of their tents, clearly very excited. Eight or ten men reluctantly approached us and invited us to come inside a large tent. They said they wanted to talk and offered us tea. I refused their invitation, not trusting them, and instead went on past the encampment, stopping about three hundred yards away. Chanden Sing and I then visited all the tents, trying to buy food and show that if we didn’t go into a specific tent, it was not out of fear, but because we didn’t want to fall into a trap. Our visit to the different golingchos or gurr (tents) was quite interesting. The tents themselves were very well made and perfectly suited to the environment. The various furniture inside caught my curiosity. The black tents were woven from yak hair, which naturally had a grease that made them waterproof. They were made of two separate sections of thick material, supported by two poles on each end, with a long opening at the top for smoke to escape. The larger tents had a hexagonal base, and the roof, typically six or seven feet above the ground, was kept tightly stretched with long ropes running over high poles and secured to the ground. Wooden and iron pegs were used for this, and many were necessary to hold the tent close to the ground all around, protecting its occupants from the harsh winds of the great plateau. Long poles, usually four in number, with white prayer flags could be seen outside each tent, one for each direction, with the East as the starting point. Inside the larger tents, there was a mud wall two to three feet high, designed for extra protection against wind, rain, and snow. These walls were sometimes made of dried dung, which would eventually be used as fuel. There were two openings, one at each end of the tent; the one facing the wind was always kept shut with loops and wooden bolts.

Black Tent

Black Tent


The Tibetan is a born nomad, and shifts his dwelling with the seasons, or wherever he can find pasture for his yaks and sheep; but, though he has no fixed abode, he knows how to make himself comfortable, and he carries with him all that he requires. Thus, for instance, in the centre of his tent, he begins by making himself a goling, or fireplace of mud and stone, some three feet high and four or five long, by one and a half wide, with two, three, or more side ventilators and draught-holes. By this ingenious contrivance he manages to increase the combustion of the dried dung, the most trying fuel from which to get a flame. On the top of this stove a suitable place is made to fit the several [318] raksangs, or large brass pots and bowls, in which the brick tea, having been duly pounded in a stone or wooden mortar, is boiled and stirred with a long brass spoon. A portable iron stand is generally to be seen somewhere in the tent, upon which the hot vessels are placed, as they are removed from the fire. Close to these is the toxzum or dongbo, a cylindrical wooden churn, with a lid through which a piston passes. This is used for mixing the tea with butter and salt, in the way I have described as also adopted by the Jogpas.

The Tibetan is a natural nomad who moves his home with the seasons or wherever he can find grass for his yaks and sheep. Even though he doesn’t have a permanent residence, he knows how to make himself comfortable and brings everything he needs with him. For example, in the center of his tent, he sets up a goling, or fireplace made of mud and stone, about three feet high and four or five feet long, by one and a half feet wide, with two, three, or more side ventilators and draft holes. With this clever setup, he enhances the burning of dried dung, which is a difficult fuel to ignite. On top of this stove, there’s a designated spot for several raksangs, or large brass pots and bowls, where the brick tea, after being pounded in a stone or wooden mortar, is boiled and stirred with a long brass spoon. A portable iron stand is usually found somewhere in the tent for placing the hot vessels after they’ve been taken off the fire. Nearby is the toxzum or dongbo, a cylindrical wooden churn with a lid that has a piston going through it. This is used for mixing the tea with butter and salt, similar to the method used by the Jogpas.

A Dongbo or Tea Churn
A Dongbo or Tea Churn

The wooden cups or bowls used by the Tibetans are called puku, fruh, or cariel, and in them tsamba is also eaten after tea has been poured on it, and the mixture worked into a paste by means of more or less dirty fingers. Often extra lumps of butter are mixed with this paste, and even bits of chura (cheese). The richer people (officials) indulge in flour and rice, which they import from India and China, and in kassur, or dried fruit (namely, dates and apricots) of inferior quality. The rice is boiled into a kind of soup called the tukpa, a great luxury only indulged in on grand occasions, when such other cherished delicacies as gimakara (sugar) and shelkara (lump white sugar) are also eaten. The Tibetans are very fond of meat, though few can afford such an extravagance. Wild game, yak and sheep are considered excellent food, and the meat and bone cut in pieces are boiled in a cauldron with lavish quantities of salt and pepper. The several people in a tent dip their hands into the pot, and having picked up suitable pieces, tug at them with their teeth and fingers, grinding even the bone, meat eaten without bone being supposed to be difficult to digest.

The wooden cups or bowls used by Tibetans are called puku, fruh, or cariel, and in them tsamba is also eaten after tea has been poured on it, and the mixture is worked into a paste using more or less dirty fingers. Often, extra lumps of butter are mixed in with this paste, and even bits of chura (cheese). Wealthier people (officials) indulge in flour and rice, which they import from India and China, as well as kassur, or dried fruit (mainly dates and inferior-quality apricots). The rice is boiled into a kind of soup called tukpa, a great luxury only enjoyed on special occasions, when other favored treats like gimakara (sugar) and shelkara (lump white sugar) are also eaten. Tibetans really enjoy meat, though few can afford such a luxury. Wild game, yak, and sheep are considered excellent food, and the meat and bones are cut into pieces and boiled in a large pot with generous amounts of salt and pepper. Several people in a tent dip their hands into the pot, pick up suitable pieces, and tear at them with their teeth and fingers, even grinding the bones, as meat without bones is thought to be hard to digest.

The Tibetan tents are usually furnished with a few tildih (rough sitting-mats) round the fireplace, and near the entrance of the tent stands a dahlo, or basket, in which the dung is stored as collected. These dahlos, used in couples, are very convenient for tying to pack-saddles, for which purpose they are specially designed. Along the walls of the tent are the tsamgo or bags of tsamba, and the dongmo or butter-pots, and among masses of sheepskins and blankets can be seen the little wooden chests in which the store of butter is kept under lock and key.

The Tibetan tents are typically set up with a few tildih (rough sitting mats) around the fireplace, and near the entrance of the tent, there’s a dahlo, or basket, where the collected dung is stored. These dahlos, used in pairs, are really handy for attaching to pack saddles, as that's what they’re designed for. Along the walls of the tent are the tsamgo or bags of tsamba, and the dongmo or butter pots, and in among piles of sheepskins and blankets, you can spot the small wooden chests where the butter is securely kept under lock and key.

[319]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Interior of a Tent

Inside a Tent


[320] The first thing that strikes the eye on entering a Tibetan tent is the chokseh or table, upon which are lights and brass bowls containing offerings to the Chogan, the gilt god to whom the occupiers of the gurr (tent) address their morning and evening prayers. Prayer-wheels and strings of beads are plentiful, and lashed upright to the poles are the long matchlocks belonging to the men, their tall props projecting well out of the aperture in the roof of the tent. Spears are kept in a similar manner, but the swords and smaller knives are carried about the person all day, and laid on the ground by the side of their owners at night.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] The first thing that catches your eye when you enter a Tibetan tent is the chokseh or table, which holds lights and brass bowls filled with offerings to the Chogan, the golden god to whom the people in the gurr (tent) say their morning and evening prayers. There are plenty of prayer wheels and strings of beads, and the long matchlocks belonging to the men are strapped upright to the poles, their tall barrels sticking out of the opening in the tent's roof. Spears are stored in a similar way, but swords and smaller knives are carried on them throughout the day and laid on the ground next to their owners at night.

TsamgoSmall Tsamba Bag, carried on the Person by Tibetans
TsamgoSmall Tsamba Bag, worn by Tibetans

[321]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXIV

Refusal to sell food—Women—Their looks and characteristics—The Tchukti—A Lhassa lady.

The inhabitants of this encampment were polite and talkative. Notwithstanding their refusal to sell us food on the plea that they had none even for themselves, their friendliness was so much beyond my expectation that I at first feared treachery. However, treachery or not, I thought that while I was there I had better see and learn as much as I could. Women and men formed a ring round us, and the fair sex seemed less shy than the stronger in answering questions. I was particularly struck, not only in this encampment but in all the others, by the small number of women to be seen in Tibet. This is not because they are kept in seclusion; on the contrary, the ladies of the Forbidden Land seem to have it all their own way. They are actually in an enormous minority, the proportion being, at a rough guess, backed by the wise words of a friendly Lama, from fifteen to twenty males to each female in the population; nevertheless, the fair sex in Hundes manages to rule the male majority, playing thereby constantly into the hands of the Lamas.

The people in this camp were friendly and chatty. Even though they refused to sell us food, claiming they didn’t have any for themselves, their kindness was so surprising that I initially worried it might be a trap. But whether it was genuine or not, I figured I should take the opportunity to observe and learn as much as I could while I was there. Women and men gathered around us, and the women seemed less hesitant than the men to answer questions. I was particularly struck, not just in this camp but in all the others I visited, by the small number of women in Tibet. This isn’t because they’re kept hidden away; on the contrary, the women of this Forbidden Land seem to have a lot of freedom. In fact, they are a significant minority, with an estimated ratio of about fifteen to twenty men for every woman in the population. Still, the women in Hundes somehow manage to hold power over the male majority, which regularly benefits the Lamas.

The Tibetan female, whether she be a lady, a shepherdess, or a brigandess, cannot be said to be prepossessing. In fact, it was not my luck to see a single good-looking woman in the country, although I naturally saw women who were less ugly than others. Anyhow, with the accumulated filth that from birth is undisturbed by soap, scrubbing or bathing; with nose, cheeks and forehead smeared with black ointment to prevent the skin cracking in the wind; and with the unpleasant odour that emanates from never-changed clothes, the Tibetan woman is, at her best, repulsive to European taste. After one has overcome one's first disgust she yet has, at a distance, a certain charm of her [322] own. She walks well, for she is accustomed to carry heavy weights on her head; and her skull would be well-set on her shoulders were it not that the neck is usually too short and thick to be graceful. Her body and limbs possess great muscular strength and are well developed, but generally lack stability, and her breasts are flabby and pendent—facts due, no doubt, to sexual abuse. She is generally of heavy frame, and rather inclined to stoutness. Her hands and feet show power and rude strength, but no dexterity or suppleness is noticeable in her fingers, and she has therefore no ability for very fine or delicate work.

The Tibetan woman, whether she is a lady, a shepherdess, or a bandit, isn't exactly attractive. In fact, I didn't see a single good-looking woman in the country, although I did come across women who were less ugly than others. Anyway, with the accumulated dirt that hasn't been touched by soap, scrubbing, or bathing since birth; with her nose, cheeks, and forehead coated in black ointment to prevent her skin from cracking in the wind; and with the unpleasant smell that comes from never-changing clothes, the Tibetan woman is, at her best, off-putting to European tastes. Once you get past the initial disgust, she does have a certain charm from a distance. She walks well because she’s used to carrying heavy loads on her head; her skull would sit nicely on her shoulders if her neck weren't usually too short and thick to look graceful. Her body and limbs are strong and well-developed, but they often lack stability, and her breasts are saggy—likely due to sexual abuse. She usually has a heavy build and tends to be a bit stout. Her hands and feet show power and rough strength, but there's no finesse or flexibility in her fingers, so she lacks the ability for very fine or delicate work.

Tibetan Hair Brushes and Flint and Steel Pouch

Tibetan Hair Brushes and Flint and Steel Pouch


The Tibetan woman is, nevertheless, far superior to the Tibetan man. She possesses a better heart, more pluck, and a finer character than he does. Time after time, when the males, timid beyond all conception, ran away at our approach, the women remained in charge of the tents, and,

The Tibetan woman is, however, way better than the Tibetan man. She has a kinder heart, more courage, and a stronger character than he does. Again and again, when the men, scared beyond belief, ran away as we got closer, the women stayed in charge of the tents, and,

[323]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Tibetan Women and Children

Tibetan Women & Children


[324] although by no means cool or collected, they very rarely failed to meet us without some show of dignity.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] even though they were far from calm or composed, they hardly ever met us without displaying some sense of dignity.

On the present occasion, when all were friendly, the women seemed much less shy than the men, and conversed freely and incessantly. They even prevailed upon their masters to sell us a little tsamba and butter.

On this occasion, when everyone was friendly, the women appeared much less shy than the men and chatted freely and nonstop. They even convinced their masters to sell us some tsamba and butter.

Tibetan women wear trousers and boots like the men, and over them they have a long gown, either yellow or blue, reaching down to their feet. Their head-dress is curious, the hair being carefully parted in the middle, and plastered with melted butter over the scalp as far down as the ears; then it is plaited all round in innumerable little tresses, to which is fastened the Tchukti, three strips of heavy red and blue cloth joined together by cross bands ornamented with coral and malachite beads, silver coins and bells, and reaching from the shoulders down to the heels.

Tibetan women wear trousers and boots like the men, and over them they have a long gown, either yellow or blue, that reaches down to their feet. Their headwear is interesting, with the hair carefully parted in the middle and coated with melted butter on the scalp down to the ears. It is then braided all around into many little strands, to which is attached the Tchukti, three strips of heavy red and blue fabric joined by cross bands decorated with coral and malachite beads, silver coins, and bells, extending from the shoulders down to the heels.

The Tchukti

The Tchuktis


They seemed very proud of this ornamentation, and displayed much coquetry in attracting our notice to it. Wealthier women in Tibet have quite a small fortune hanging down their backs, for all the money or valuables earned or saved are sewn on to the Tchukti. To the lower end of the Tchukti one, two or three rows of small brass or silver bells are attached, and therefore the approach of the Tibetan dames is announced by the

They seemed really proud of this decoration and were quite flirtatious in drawing our attention to it. Wealthier women in Tibet have a small fortune hanging down their backs, as all the money or valuables they’ve earned or saved are sewn onto the Tchukti. At the lower end of the Tchukti, one, two, or three rows of small brass or silver bells are attached, so the approach of the Tibetan women is announced by the

[325]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

A Lady from Lhassa

A Woman from Lhasa


[326] tinkling of their bells, a quaint custom, the origin of which they could not explain to me, beyond saying that it was pretty and that they liked it.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] the tinkling of their bells, a charming tradition, the meaning of which they couldn’t explain to me, other than to say that it was nice and that they enjoyed it.

The illustration that I give here of a travelling Tibetan lady from Lhassa was taken at Tucker. She wore her hair, of abnormal length and beauty, in one huge tress, and round her head, like an aureole, was a circular wooden ornament, on the outer part of which were fastened beads of coral, glass and malachite. The arrangement was so heavy that, though it fitted the head well, it had to be supported by means of strings tied to the hair and others passed over the head. By the side of her head, and hanging by the ears and hair, were a pair of huge silver earrings inlaid with malachite, and round her neck three long strings of beads with silver brooches.

The picture I'm sharing of a traveling Tibetan woman from Lhassa was taken at Tucker. She had exceptionally long and beautiful hair styled in a big braid, and around her head was a circular wooden ornament that looked like a halo, adorned with beads made of coral, glass, and malachite. The piece was so heavy that, even though it fit her head well, it needed to be supported by strings tied to her hair and others that went over her head. Next to her head, hanging by her ears and hair, were large silver earrings inlaid with malachite, and around her neck were three long strands of beads with silver brooches.

Considerable modifications necessarily occurred in these garments and ornaments, according to the locality and the wearer's condition in life, but the general lines of their clothing were practically everywhere the same. Often a loose silver chain belt was worn considerably below the waist, and rings and bracelets were common everywhere.

Considerable changes naturally happened in these garments and accessories, depending on the location and the wearer's social status, but the overall style of their clothing was pretty much the same everywhere. A loose silver chain belt was often worn quite low on the waist, and rings and bracelets were popular all over.

Money Bags

Cash Flow


[327]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXV

Polyandry—Marriage ceremonies—Jealousy—Divorce—Identification of children—Courtship—Illegitimacy—Adultery.

That the Tibetans legally recognise polyandry and polygamy is well known. Very little, however, has hitherto transpired as to the actual form of these marital customs, so that the details which follow, startling as they may seem when regarded from a Western standpoint, will be found not without interest.

That the Tibetans legally accept polyandry and polygamy is well known. However, very little has been shared about how these marital customs actually look in practice, so the details that follow, though surprising from a Western perspective, will be found interesting.

First of all, I may say that there is not such a thing known in Tibet as a standard of morality amongst unmarried women of the middle classes; and, therefore, from a Tibetan point of view, it is not easy to find an immoral woman. Notwithstanding this apparently irregular state of affairs, the women's behaviour is better than might be expected. Like the Shoka girls, they possess a wonderful frankness and simplicity of manner, with a certain reserve which has its allurements; for the Tibetan swain, often a young man, being attracted by the charms of a damsel, finds that his flirtation with her has become an accepted engagement almost before it has begun, and is compelled, in accordance with custom, to go, accompanied by his father and mother, to the tent of the lady of his heart. There he is received by her relations, who have been previously notified of the intended call, and are found seated on rugs and mats awaiting the arrival of their guests.

First of all, I should mention that there isn’t really a concept of morality among unmarried middle-class women in Tibet; so, from a Tibetan perspective, it’s not easy to find a woman considered immoral. Despite this seemingly unconventional situation, the women’s behavior is surprisingly better than you might expect. Similar to the Shoka girls, they have a wonderful openness and simplicity, along with a certain allure of modesty. When a Tibetan guy, often a young man, is drawn to the charm of a girl, he often finds that their flirtation quickly turns into an accepted relationship even before it starts. Following tradition, he has to go to the girl’s tent with his parents. There, they are greeted by her family, who have already been informed about the visit, sitting on rugs and mats, waiting for their guests to arrive.

After the usual courtesies and salutations, the young man's father asks, on behalf of his son, for the young lady's hand; and, if the answer is favourable, the suitor places a square lump of yak murr (yak butter) on his betrothed's forehead. She does the same for him, and the marriage ceremony is then considered over, the buttered couple being man and wife.

After the usual pleasantries and greetings, the young man's father asks, on his son's behalf, for the young lady's hand in marriage; and if she agrees, the suitor places a square piece of yak murr (yak butter) on his fiancée's forehead. She does the same for him, and then the marriage ceremony is considered complete, with the buttered couple now being husband and wife.

[328]If there is a temple close by, Katas, food and money are laid before the images of Buddha and saints, and the parties walk round the inside of the temple. Should there be no temple at hand, the husband and wife make the circuit of the nearest hill, or, in default of anything else, the tent itself, always moving from left to right. This ceremony is repeated with prayers and sacrifices every day for a fortnight, during which time libations of wine and general feasting continue, and at the expiration of which the husband conveys his better half to his tent.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]If there’s a temple nearby, Katas, food, and money are offered at the images of Buddha and the saints, and the couple walks around inside the temple. If there isn’t a temple, the husband and wife walk around the nearest hill, or if there’s nothing else available, they circle their tent, always moving from left to right. This ceremony is repeated with prayers and offerings every day for two weeks, during which they also enjoy wine and feasting, and at the end of that period, the husband takes his wife back to their tent.

The law of Tibet, though hardly ever obeyed, has strict clauses regulating the conduct of married men in their marital relations. So long as the sun is above the horizon, no intercourse is permitted; and certain periods and seasons of the year, such as the height of summer and the depth of winter, are also proscribed.

The law of Tibet, while rarely followed, has strict rules governing how married men should behave in their relationships. No sexual activity is allowed while the sun is up, and there are also specific times of the year, like mid-summer and mid-winter, when it is forbidden.

Woman whose Face is Smeared with Black Ointment

Woman with a Face Covered in Black Ointment


A Tibetan girl on marrying does not enter into a nuptial tie with an individual but with all his family, in the following somewhat complicated manner. If an eldest son marries an eldest sister, all the sisters of the bride become his wives. Should he, however, begin by marrying the second sister, then only the sisters from the second down will be his property. If the third, all from the third, and so on. At the same time, when the bridegroom has brothers, they are all regarded as their brother's wife's husbands, and they one and all cohabit with her, as well as with her sisters if she has any.

A Tibetan girl, when she marries, doesn’t just tie the knot with one person but with his entire family, in a somewhat complex way. If the eldest son marries the eldest sister, all of the bride’s sisters become his wives. However, if he starts by marrying the second sister, only the sisters from the second one down will be his wives. If he marries the third sister, then it applies to all from the third sister down, and so on. At the same time, if the groom has brothers, they are all considered to be husbands of their brother's wife, and they all live together with her, as well as with her sisters if she has any.

The system is not simple, and certainly not very edifying, and were it not for the odd savoir faire of the Tibetan woman, [329] it would lead to endless jealousies and unpleasantness: owing, however, largely, no doubt, to the absolute lack of honour or decency in Tibetan males and females, the arrangement seems to work as satisfactorily as any other kind of marriage.

The system isn't simple, and it's definitely not very enlightening, and if it weren't for the unique expertise of the Tibetan woman, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] it would lead to endless jealousy and discomfort. However, probably because of the complete absence of honor or decency among Tibetan men and women, the arrangement seems to work as well as any other type of marriage.

I asked what would happen in the case of a man marrying a second sister, and so acquiring marital rights over all her younger sisters, if another man came and married her eldest sister. Would all the brides of the first man become the brides of the second? No, they would not; and the second man would have to be satisfied with only one wife. However, if the second sister were left a widow, and her husband had no brothers, then she would become the property of her eldest sister's husband, and with her all the other sisters.

I asked what would happen if a guy married a second sister and, in doing so, gained rights over all her younger sisters, while another guy married her oldest sister. Would all of the first guy's brides become the second guy's brides? No, they wouldn't; the second guy would only be allowed one wife. However, if the second sister was left a widow and her husband didn't have any brothers, then she would become the property of her oldest sister's husband, along with all her other sisters.

Tibetan Woman

Tibetan Woman


It must not be inferred from these strange matrimonial laws that jealousy is non-existent in Tibet among both men and women; trouble does occasionally arise in Tibetan house- or tent-holds. As, however, the Tibetan woman is clever, she generally contrives to arrange things in a manner conducive to peace. When her husband has several brothers, she despatches them on different errands in every direction, to look after yaks or sheep, or to trade. Only one remains and he is for the time being her husband; then when another returns he has to leave his place and becomes a bachelor, and so on, till all the brothers have, during the year, had an equal period of marital life with their single wife.

It shouldn’t be assumed from these unusual marriage customs that jealousy isn’t present in Tibet among men and women; tensions do occasionally arise in Tibetan households. However, since Tibetan women are resourceful, they usually manage to keep the peace. When a woman’s husband has several brothers, she sends them off on different tasks—looking after yaks or sheep, or going to trade. Only one brother stays behind to be her husband for the time being; then when another brother returns, he takes his place and becomes a bachelor, and this continues until all the brothers have had an equal share of married life with their one wife over the year.

Divorce is difficult in Tibet and involves endless complications. I inquired of a Tibetan lady what would [330] she do in case her husband refused to live with her any longer.

Divorce is challenging in Tibet and comes with countless complications. I asked a Tibetan woman what she would do if her husband no longer wanted to live with her. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Lady in Question

The Woman in Question


"'Why did you marry me?' I would say to him," she exclaimed. "'You found me good, beautiful, wise, clever, affectionate. Now prove that I am not all this!'"

"'Why did you marry me?' I asked him," she shouted. "'You thought I was good, beautiful, smart, clever, and affectionate. Now show me that I’m not any of those things!'"

This modest speech, she thought, would be quite sufficient to bring any husband back to reason, but all the same a number of Tibetans find it convenient occasionally to desert their wives, eloping to some distant province, or over the boundary. This procedure is particularly hard on the man's brothers, as they all remain the sole property of the abandoned bride. On the same principle, when a husband dies, the wife is inherited by his brothers.

This simple speech, she believed, would be enough to bring any husband back to his senses, but still, some Tibetans occasionally find it easy to leave their wives, running off to a faraway province or across the border. This situation is especially tough on the man's brothers, as they become solely responsible for the deserted bride. Similarly, when a husband passes away, his brothers inherit the wife.

A very painful case came before the court of the Jong Pen at Taklakot. The husband of a Tibetan lady had died, and she, being enamoured of a handsome youth some twenty years younger than herself, married him. Her husband's brother, however, came all the way from Lhassa after her and claimed her as his wife, though he had already a better half and a large family. She would not hear of leaving the husband of her choice, and after endless scenes between

A very painful case came before the court of the Jong Pen at Taklakot. The husband of a Tibetan woman had died, and she, in love with a handsome young man about twenty years her junior, married him. However, her late husband's brother traveled all the way from Lhassa to claim her as his wife, even though he already had a wife and a large family. She refused to leave the husband she chose, and after endless arguments between

[331]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Tibetan Children

Tibetan Kids


[332] them, the case was heard by the Jong Pen of Taklakot. The Tibetan law was against her, as, according to it, she decidedly belonged to her brother-in-law; but money is stronger than the law in the land of the Lamas.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Their case was heard by the Jong Pen of Taklakot. The Tibetan law was not on her side, as it stated that she clearly belonged to her brother-in-law; however, money holds more power than the law in the land of the Lamas.

"For the peace of all, you can arrange things this way," was the advice of the Jong Pen. "You can divide your property, money and goods, into three equal parts: one to go to the Lamas, one to your husband's brother, and one to be retained by yourself."

"For everyone's peace of mind, you can do it like this," said the Jong Pen. "You can split your property, money, and belongings into three equal parts: one for the Lamas, one for your husband's brother, and one for yourself."

The woman consented; but, much to her disgust, when two parts had been paid out and she was hoping for peace, a question was raised by the Jong Pen as to why she should even retain one-third of the fortune if she no longer made part of the deceased man's family? Thus orders were instantly given that she should be deprived of everything she possessed.

The woman agreed; however, to her great annoyance, after two parts had been paid out and she was hoping for some peace, the Jong Pen questioned why she should keep one-third of the fortune if she was no longer part of the deceased man's family. As a result, orders were quickly given for her to lose everything she owned.

However, the woman was shrewd enough to deceive the Jong Pen's officers, for one night, having bundled up her tent and her goods and chattels, she quietly stepped over the boundary and placed herself under British protection.

However, the woman was clever enough to fool the Jong Pen's officers. One night, after packing up her tent and belongings, she quietly crossed the boundary and put herself under British protection.

The mode of knowing and identifying children in Tibet is peculiar. It is not by the child's likeness to his parent, nor by other reasonable methods, that the offspring is set down as belonging to one man more than to another, but this is the mode adopted. Supposing that one married man had two brothers and several children, the first child belongs to him; the second to his first brother, and the third to his second brother, while the fourth would be again the first man's child.

The way of recognizing and identifying children in Tibet is unique. It's not based on the child's resemblance to their parent or other logical methods that determine which man a child belongs to, but rather this is the method used. If a married man has two brothers and several children, the first child belongs to him; the second to his first brother, and the third to his second brother, while the fourth would again be the first man's child.

The rules of courtship are not very strict in Tibet, yet intercourse with girls is looked upon as illegal, and in certain cases not only are the parties, if discovered, made to suffer shame, but certain fines are inflicted on the man, the most severe of all being that he must present the young lady with a dress and ornaments. In the case of "gentlefolks" the question is generally solved to the satisfaction of everybody by the man marrying the woman, and by his gracefully presenting "veils of friendship" to all her relations and friends, together with articles of food; but if by mischance she should be placed in an awkward position before the eyes of the world, and the man will not hear of a matrimonial union, then efforts are made to prevent the birth of the child alive. If these are not successful, the mother must be maintained until after the child's birth. In such cases the illegitimate child remains the man's, and suffers the usual indignities of illegitimacy.

The rules of dating in Tibet aren't very strict, but having relations with girls is seen as illegal. In some cases, if caught, both people involved face shame, and the man may also have to pay fines, with the most severe penalty being that he needs to give the young woman a dress and jewelry. For "gentlefolk," the issue is usually resolved to everyone's satisfaction by the man marrying the woman and graciously giving "veils of friendship" to all her family and friends, along with food. However, if by chance she ends up in a difficult situation publicly, and the man refuses to marry her, efforts are made to prevent the child from being born alive. If those efforts fail, the mother must be supported until after the child is born. In such cases, the illegitimate child is still considered the man's and faces the usual stigma of being illegitimate.

[333]Sixteen in the case of women, and eighteen or nineteen in that of men, is regarded as the marriageable age. Motherhood continues until a fairly advanced age, and I have seen a woman of forty with a baby only a few months old. But, as a rule, Tibetan women lose their freshness while still quite young; and no doubt their custom of polyandry not only contributes to destroy their looks but also is the chief cause that limits the population of Tibet.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Sixteen for women, and eighteen or nineteen for men, is seen as the age for marriage. Motherhood can last until a fairly old age, and I've seen a woman who's forty with a baby just a few months old. However, generally, Tibetan women lose their youthful appearance while still quite young; and undoubtedly, their practice of polyandry not only affects their looks but is also a major reason for the limited population in Tibet.

The Lamas are supposed to live in celibacy, but they do not always keep to their oath, tempted, no doubt, by the fact that they themselves invariably go unpunished. If, on the other hand, in cases of adultery, the culprit be a layman, he has to pay compensation according to his means to the husband, the amount being fixed by the parties concerned and their friends, or by the law if applied for.

The Lamas are expected to live celibately, but they don't always stick to their vow, likely tempted by the fact that they usually face no consequences. In contrast, if a layman commits adultery, he must provide compensation to the husband based on his ability to pay, with the amount determined by the parties involved and their friends, or set by the law if requested.

In ordinary cases of marital trespass, presents of clothing, tsamba, chura, guram, kassur (dried fruit) and wine, accompanied by the never-lacking Kata, are sufficient to allay the injured husband's anger and to fully compensate him for any shame suffered.

In normal cases of infidelity, gifts of clothing, tsamba, chura, guram, kassur (dried fruit), and wine, along with the always-present Kata, are enough to calm the upset husband and fully make up for any embarrassment he experienced.

The only serious punishment inflicted is, however, in the case of the wife of a high official eloping with a man of low rank. Then the woman is subjected to flogging as a penalty for her infidelity, her husband is disgraced, and her lover, after being subjected to a painful surgical operation, is, if he survives, expelled from the town or encampment.

The only real punishment given is when the wife of a high-ranking official runs away with a man of lower status. In that case, the woman is whipped as punishment for her infidelity, her husband faces disgrace, and her lover, after going through a painful surgical procedure, is expelled from the town or camp if he survives.

High officials, and a few wealthy people who are not satisfied with one wife, are allowed by the law of the land to keep as many concubines as their means allow them.

High officials and some wealthy individuals who are not content with having one wife are permitted by the law to have as many concubines as their finances allow.


[334]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXVI

Tibetan funerals—Disposal of their dead—By cremation—By water—Cannibalism—Strange beliefs—Revolting barbarity—Drinking human blood—The saints of Tibet.

Tibetan funerals are interesting, but they so closely resemble those of the Shokas, which I have described at length, that any detailed account of them would be a mere repetition of what I have already written.

Tibetan funerals are fascinating, but they are so similar to those of the Shokas, which I have described in detail, that providing a detailed account of them would just repeat what I've already written.

A Young Lama

A Young Lama


For the disposal of the dead body itself, however, the Tibetans have curious customs of their own. The most [335] uncommon method, owing to the great scarcity of fuel, is that of cremation, which is only employed in the case of wealthy people or Lamas, and is effected in exactly the same fashion as among the Shokas. Another and more usual plan is to double up the body, sew it into skins, and let it be carried away by the current of a stream. But the commonest method of all is the revolting ceremony which I now proceed to describe.

For disposing of a dead body, the Tibetans have their own unique customs. The rarest method, due to the lack of fuel, is cremation, which is only done for wealthy individuals or Lamas, and it's carried out in the same way it is among the Shokas. Another more common approach is to fold up the body, sew it into animal skins, and allow it to be taken away by the flow of a stream. However, the most common method is the disturbing ceremony that I will now describe.

A Red Lama

A Red Llama


The body of the deceased is borne to the top of a hill, where the Lamas pronounce certain incantations and prayers. Then the crowd, after walking seven times round the body, retire to a certain distance, to allow ravens and dogs to tear the corpse to pieces. It is considered lucky for the departed and his family when birds alone devour the greater portion of the body; dogs and wild animals come, say the Lamas, when the deceased has sinned during his life. Anyhow, the almost complete destruction of the corpse is anxiously watched, and, at an opportune moment, the Lamas and crowd, turning their praying-wheels, and muttering the everlasting "Omne mani padme hun," return to the body, round which seven more circuits are made, moving from left to right.[25] Then the relatives squat round. The Lamas sit near the body, and with their daggers cut to pieces what remains of the flesh. The highest Lama present [336] eats the first morsel, then, muttering prayers, the other Lamas partake of it, after which all the relations and friends throw themselves on the now almost denuded skeleton, scraping off pieces of flesh, which they devour greedily; and this repast of human flesh continues till the bones are dry and clean!

The body of the deceased is carried to the top of a hill, where the Lamas recite certain incantations and prayers. Afterward, the crowd walks around the body seven times before stepping back to let ravens and dogs tear the corpse apart. It's considered fortunate for the deceased and their family when only birds consume most of the body; dogs and wild animals appear, according to the Lamas, when the deceased has sinned during their life. In any case, the near-complete destruction of the corpse is closely observed, and at the right moment, the Lamas and the crowd, turning their prayer wheels and murmuring the constant "Omne mani padme hun," return to the body, making seven more circuits, moving from left to right. [25] Then the relatives sit in a circle around it. The Lamas take their places near the body, and with their daggers, they cut up what remains of the flesh. The highest Lama present eats the first piece, then, while murmuring prayers, the other Lamas share it. After that, all the relatives and friends jump onto the now nearly bare skeleton, scraping off bits of flesh that they greedily devour, and this meal of human flesh continues until the bones are dry and clean!

Cup made of Human Skull

Human Skull Cup


The idea of this ghastly ceremony is that the spirit of the departed, of whom you have swallowed a piece, will for ever keep on friendly terms with you. When birds and dogs do not shrink from feeding, it is a sign that the body is healthy, and fit for themselves.

The purpose of this horrifying ceremony is that the spirit of the deceased, whose essence you have consumed, will always maintain a friendly connection with you. When birds and dogs aren’t hesitant to eat, it indicates that the body is healthy and suitable for them.

Chokden, or Tomb of a Saint

Chokden, or Tomb of a Saint


Revolting beyond words is the further fact that, when a man has died of some pestilential disease, and, owing to the odour, the birds will not peck at the body, nor will the famished dogs go near it, then a large number of Lamas, having made the usual exorcisms, sit down by it, and do not get up again until they have devoured the whole of the rotten human flesh! The relatives and friends are wiser and less brutal. They rightly believe that, if voracious animals will not partake of the meal proffered them, it is because the body is that of a sinner against whom God is angry. And who better than the Lamas could make [337] peace between God and him? So let the Lamas eat it all.

Revolting beyond words is the fact that when a man dies from a terrible disease, and because of the smell, the birds won’t peck at the body, and the starving dogs won't go near it, a large group of Lamas, after performing the usual rituals, sits by it and doesn’t leave until they’ve eaten all the rotting human flesh! The relatives and friends are wiser and less cruel. They rightly believe that if hungry animals refuse the meal offered to them, it’s because the body belongs to a sinner whom God is angry with. And who better than the Lamas could make peace between God and him? So let the Lamas eat it all. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

In the case of not finding sufficient Lamas to perform these rites, the body is either disposed of by throwing it into the water, or else, the relations having first partaken of a morsel of the flesh, it is bound to a rock to let animals or time do the rest.

In the event that there aren't enough Lamas available to carry out these rituals, the body is either discarded by throwing it into the water, or, after the relatives have eaten a piece of the flesh, it is tied to a rock to let animals or time take care of it.

The Lamas are said to have a great craving for human blood, which, they say, gives them strength, genius and vigour. When sucking wounds that are not poisoned, they drink the blood, and also on certain occasions wounds are inflicted for the sake of sucking the blood. At other times the cups cut from human skulls, found in all monasteries, are filled with blood, and the Lamas in turn satisfy their thirst out of them.

The Lamas are said to have a strong desire for human blood, which they claim gives them strength, creativity, and energy. When they drink from unpoisoned wounds, they consume the blood, and sometimes they deliberately inflict wounds just to drink the blood. At other times, the cups made from human skulls, which are found in all monasteries, are filled with blood, and the Lamas quench their thirst from them.

But enough of this. It is sickening to set it down, though my book would be incomplete if I had made no mention of the cannibalism of the Lamas.

But enough of this. It's disturbing to write it down, even though my book would be incomplete if I didn’t mention the cannibalism of the Lamas.

When a saintly Lama dies, or some old man much respected by the community, either parts of the flesh, or, if cremation has been applied, some of his ashes, are preserved and placed in a Chokden erected for the purpose; and, judging by the number of these structures one finds all over Tibet, one feels inclined to think that half the population of the country must have been saints, or else that the standard of saintliness in the sacred land of the Lamas is not prohibitively high.

When a holy Lama dies, or an elderly man who is highly respected in the community, some parts of the body, or some of his ashes if he was cremated, are kept and placed in a Chokden built for this purpose. Looking at the number of these structures found throughout Tibet, one might assume that half the population must have been saints, or that the criteria for being considered a saint in the sacred land of the Lamas isn't too strict.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[25] In the case of a sect called Bombos, the circuits are made in the reverse fashion, as also are their prayer-wheels turned from right to left.

[25] In the case of a group called Bombos, the circuits are made in the opposite direction, and their prayer-wheels are turned from right to left as well.


[338]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXVII

Another commotion—Two hundred soldiers—A stampede—Easy travelling—A long Mani wall—Mosquitoes.

Coming out of our tent in the morning, we noticed an unusual commotion among the Tibetans. A number of mounted men with matchlocks had arrived, and others similarly armed immediately went to join them from the tents. They seemed excited, and I kept my eye upon them while I was cooking my food. There were some two hundred in all, picturesquely garbed. They seemed to be good horsemen, and looked well as they rode in a line towards us. A little way off they stopped and dismounted, and the leaders came forward, one stalwart fellow in a fine sheepskin coat marching ahead of the rest. His attitude was very arrogant, and, dispensing with the usual salutations, he approached quite close, shaking his fist at me.

Coming out of our tent in the morning, we noticed a strange commotion among the Tibetans. A group of mounted men with matchlocks had arrived, and others who were similarly armed quickly joined them from the tents. They seemed excited, and I kept an eye on them while I was cooking my food. There were about two hundred in total, dressed in colorful outfits. They appeared to be skilled horsemen and looked impressive as they rode in a line towards us. A short distance away, they stopped and dismounted, and the leaders approached, with one strong man in a nice sheepskin coat leading the way. His demeanor was quite arrogant, and without the usual greetings, he came close, shaking his fist at me.

"Kiu mahla lokhna nga rah luck tiba tangan" ("I will give you a goat or a sheep if you will go back"), he said.

"Kiu mahla lokhna nga rah luck tiba tangan" ("I will give you a goat or a sheep if you go back"), he said.

"Kiu donna nga di tangon" ("And I give you this to make you go back!") was my quick answer, while I unexpectedly administered him one straight from the shoulder that sent him flat on his back and sprawling on the ground.

"Kiu donna nga di tangon" ("And I give you this to make you go back!") was my quick response as I unexpectedly knocked him down with a solid punch that sent him flat on his back, sprawled out on the ground.

The army, which, with its usual prudence, was watching events from a respectful distance, beat a hasty retreat. The officer, though unhurt, scrambled away, screaming. The Tibetans had so far behaved with such contemptible cowardice that we could hardly congratulate ourselves on such easy successes. We began to feel that really we had no enemy at all before us, and very likely we became even careless. Anyhow, we ate our food and gave this affair but little thought.

The army, always cautious, was observing events from a safe distance, then quickly pulled back. The officer, although unharmed, fled in a panic, screaming. The Tibetans had shown such pathetic cowardice that we could barely take pride in our effortless victories. We started to feel like we didn't have any real enemy in front of us, and we probably grew careless. In any case, we ate our food and barely thought about this situation.

[339]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

A Mani Wall on the Road to Lhassa

A Mani Wall on the Way to Lhasa


[340]The Tibetans kept their distance, and did not trouble us again that day. Those who had not ridden off retired timidly inside their black tents, and not a soul was to be seen about the encampment—which might have been deserted, so silent and so empty did it appear. I registered my daily observations, made a sketch of one of the black tents, and wrote up my diary; after which we raised camp.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]The Tibetans kept their distance and didn’t bother us again that day. Those who hadn’t ridden off cautiously settled inside their black tents, and there wasn’t a soul to be seen around the camp—it felt like it could have been abandoned, so quiet and empty it seemed. I took note of my daily observations, sketched one of the black tents, and wrote in my diary; after that, we packed up the camp.

"And I give you this to make you go back"

"And I give you this to make you return."


Our progress was now comparatively easy, along a broad grassy plain, and we proceeded without further disturbance in a South-easterly direction, observing a high snowy peak at 20° (b.m.), and a low pass in the mountain range to our North-east at 55° (b.m.). A very high range stood ahead of us in the far distance, with low hills between. In going round one of these lonely hills we found at the foot of it another and more important mani wall of some length, with numberless inscriptions of all ages and sizes on stones, pieces of bone, skulls and horns. Farther on, to the South, there were three smaller hillocks and two larger ones. The soldiers we had routed at the encampment had proceeded in the direction we were now following, and we were, in fact, treading all along on the footprints of their ponies.

Our progress was now relatively smooth, traveling across a wide grassy plain, and we continued southeast without any further interruptions, spotting a tall snowy peak to the southeast at 20° (b.m.) and a low pass in the mountain range to our northeast at 55° (b.m.). A very tall mountain range loomed in the far distance, with low hills in between. As we went around one of these solitary hills, we discovered at its base another, more significant mani wall, which stretched for quite a length, covered in countless inscriptions of various ages and sizes on stones, bones, skulls, and horns. Further south, we noticed three smaller mounds and two larger ones. The soldiers we had chased away from the camp had followed the same path we were now on, and we were essentially walking in the hoof prints left by their ponies.

We had to cross a river and a number of rivulets, and so troublesome was it each time to take off one's shoes and [341] clothes to wade through, that we bundled up our clothes on the yaks, and travelled along for the rest of the afternoon bare-footed and with nothing on but a doti (loin-cloth), in the style adopted by fakirs.

We had to cross a river and several small streams, and it was such a hassle every time to take off our shoes and clothes to wade through that we just packed our clothes on the yaks and traveled the rest of the afternoon barefoot, wearing only a doti (loincloth), like the style of fakirs.

In an arc of a circle from 120° to 180° (b.m.) we noticed very low hills, and from 160° to 220°, some thirty or forty miles off, could be seen much more clearly now the high range we had observed before. The sun was extremely hot, the ground marshy, the air being thick with huge and very troublesome mosquitoes. We were quickly covered from head to foot with bites, and the irritation caused by them was intense. Halting on the right bank of a large stream at 15,600 feet, we named this spot Mosquito Camp. At sunset the number of mosquitoes around us was such as to drive us nearly mad, but fortunately, the moment the sun disappeared, the thermometer fell to 33°, and we had a peaceful night.

In an arc of a circle from 120° to 180° (b.m.), we noticed very small hills, and from 160° to 220°, about thirty or forty miles away, we could see much more clearly now the high range we had observed before. The sun was incredibly hot, the ground marshy, and the air was thick with huge, really annoying mosquitoes. We were quickly covered from head to toe with bites, and the irritation from them was intense. Stopping on the right bank of a large stream at 15,600 feet, we named this spot Mosquito Camp. At sunset, the number of mosquitoes around us was enough to drive us nearly insane, but luckily, as soon as the sun went down, the temperature dropped to 33°, and we had a peaceful night.

In the evening we saw a number of horsemen riding full speed on a course about one mile south of ours, but converging to the same direction. No doubt they were sent to keep the authorities ahead well informed of our movements.

In the evening, we saw several horsemen riding at full speed on a course about a mile south of ours, but heading in the same direction. They were definitely sent to keep the authorities ahead well informed about our movements.


[342]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXVIII

Washing-day—A long march—Kiang and antelope—Benighted—The purchase of a goat—Ramifications of the Brahmaputra—A détour—Through a swamp—Mansing again lost and found.

The next was for us a great washing-day. The water of the stream was so pleasant and clear that we could not resist the temptation of having a regular cleaning up, washing first our clothing and spreading it to dry in the sun, and then cleansing our faces and bodies thoroughly with soap, a luxury unknown to us for ever so long.

The next was a big washing day for us. The stream's water was so nice and clear that we couldn't resist the urge to do a proper clean-up, washing our clothes first and spreading them out to dry in the sun, and then thoroughly washing our faces and bodies with soap, a luxury we hadn't had in a long time.

While I was drying myself in the sun—owing to the want of towels—I registered at 211° (b.m.) a very high snowy peak, and a lower one at 213° 30′ forming part of the chain before us. There were mountains on every side of the plain we were traversing; and another very elevated peak, of which I had taken bearings on a previous occasion, was at 20° (b.m.). A break occurred in the hill range to our North-east, showing a narrow valley, beyond which were high snowy mountains. We made a very long march along the grassy plain, going to 147° (b.m.), and encamped on the bank of the Brahmaputra, here already a wide, deep and very rapid stream. We had passed hundreds of kiang and antelopes, and shortly before sunset I took a walk to the hills to try and bring some fresh meat to camp. I stalked a herd of antelopes, and having gone some five miles from camp, I was benighted, and on my return had the greatest difficulty in finding my men in the darkness. They had been unable to light a fire, and as they had both gone fast asleep, I received no answer to my calls. We had selected a sheltered depression in the ground for our camp, and there being hundreds of similar spots everywhere round it, and no landmarks to go by, it was by no means easy to identify the exact place.

While I was drying off in the sun—since we didn't have any towels—I marked a very high snowy peak at 211° (b.m.) and a lower one at 213° 30′ that was part of the range in front of us. Mountains surrounded the plain we were crossing, and another tall peak I had noted earlier was at 20° (b.m.). There was a break in the mountain range to our northeast, revealing a narrow valley, beyond which were more high snowy mountains. We made a long trek across the grassy plain to 147° (b.m.) and set up camp by the Brahmaputra, which was already a wide, deep, and very fast-moving river. We passed hundreds of kiang and antelopes, and just before sunset, I took a walk up to the hills to try to bring back some fresh meat for camp. I stalked a herd of antelopes, and after walking about five miles from camp, I lost track of time as night fell, making it really hard to find my men in the dark. They hadn’t been able to start a fire and had both fallen asleep, so I got no response to my calls. We had chosen a sheltered dip in the ground for our camp, and with hundreds of similar spots all around and no obvious landmarks, it wasn’t easy to pinpoint the exact location.

[343]Fortunately, at last, after I had shouted for some considerable time, Chanden Sing heard me, and, by the sound of his voice, I found my way back. In the morning we noticed a large encampment about a mile off on the opposite bank of the Brahmaputra, where we might have obtained provisions, but the stream was too rapid for us to cross; moreover, we saw black tents in every direction on our side of the water, and therefore there was no reason to go to the extra trouble and danger of crossing the stream.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Luckily, after I had been shouting for quite a while, Chanden Sing finally heard me, and I was able to find my way back by following the sound of his voice. In the morning, we spotted a large camp about a mile away on the other side of the Brahmaputra, where we could have gotten supplies, but the current was too strong for us to cross. Also, we noticed black tents in every direction on our side of the river, so there was no need to take the extra risk and effort to cross.

Kiang

Kiang


Much to our delight, we succeeded in purchasing a goat from some passing Tibetans, who drove before them a flock of several thousand heads, and, as we could not find sufficient dry fuel to make a fire, we entrusted Mansing with the safe-conduct of the animal to our next camp, where we proposed to feast on it.

Much to our joy, we managed to buy a goat from some Tibetans who were herding a flock of several thousand. Since we couldn't find enough dry fuel to start a fire, we asked Mansing to make sure the goat got safely to our next camp, where we planned to have a feast.

The Brahmaputra had here several ramifications mostly ending in lakelets, and rendering the plain a regular swamp. The larger branch was very wide and deep, and we preferred following it to crossing it, notwithstanding that we had to deviate somewhat from the course which I would have otherwise followed. We thus made a considerable détour, but even as it was, for several miles we sank in mud up to our knees, or waded through water, for although there were small patches of earth with tufts of grass which rose above the water, they collapsed on our attempting to stand upon them.

The Brahmaputra here had several branches, mostly leading to small lakes, making the plain a typical swamp. The larger branch was very wide and deep, and we chose to follow it rather than cross it, even though it meant we had to stray somewhat from the route I would have otherwise taken. We ended up taking a significant détour, but even so, for several miles we sank in mud up to our knees or waded through water, because while there were small patches of land with tufts of grass that were above the water, they collapsed whenever we tried to stand on them.

[344]The whole of the Northern part of the plain was extremely marshy. Our yaks gave us no end of trouble, for when they sank unexpectedly in soft mud-holes, they became restless and alarmed, and in their struggles to save themselves, once or twice shook off their pack-saddles and loads, which we had not been able to fasten properly for want of ropes. Chanden Sing and I, however, managed to keep up with them, and at last, on nearing the hills, the ground showed greater undulations and was rather drier. We saw columns of smoke rising from near the foot of the range to the North of us. We went on another couple of miles, exhausted and dirty, our clothes, which we had spent so much soap and time in washing, filthy with splashes of mud.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]The entire northern part of the plain was really marshy. Our yaks caused us endless trouble because when they unexpectedly sank into soft mud, they got restless and scared. In their attempts to free themselves, they shook off their pack-saddles and loads, which we couldn't secure properly due to a lack of ropes. Chanden Sing and I, however, managed to keep up with them, and finally, as we approached the hills, the ground became more uneven and a bit drier. We noticed columns of smoke rising from near the base of the mountains to our north. We continued on for another couple of miles, exhausted and dirty, our clothes— which we had spent so much soap and time washing—were now filthy with splashes of mud.

Our Yaks Sinking in Mud

Our Yaks Stuck in Mud


"Where are Mansing and the rabbu?"[26] I asked of my bearer.

"Where are Mansing and the rabbu?"[26] I asked my servant.

"He remained behind at the beginning of the swamp. He was too exhausted to drag along the goat you purchased."

"He stayed back at the start of the swamp. He was too tired to haul the goat you bought."

[345]I was much concerned, on scouting the country all round from a hillock with my telescope, to see no signs of the poor fellow, and I was angry with myself for not noticing his disappearance before. As there were many Tibetans about the spot where he had remained, I feared foul play on their part, and that he might have been overpowered. Again I imagined that, weak as he was, he might have been sucked down in one of the deeper mud-holes, without a chance of saving himself. I left Chanden Sing to look after the yaks and turned back in search of him. As I hurried back mile after mile, struggling again half across the mud swamp, and yet saw no signs of the poor coolie, I was almost giving up my quest in despair, when my eye caught something moving about half a mile farther on. It was the goat all by itself. I made for it with a sinking heart.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]I was really worried, after scanning the area from a small hill with my telescope, to see no signs of the poor guy, and I was mad at myself for not noticing he was missing sooner. Since there were many Tibetans around the place where he had stayed, I feared they might have done something to him, and that he could have been overpowered. I also thought that, as weak as he was, he might have gotten stuck in one of the deeper mud holes, with no way to save himself. I left Chanden Sing to tend to the yaks and turned back to look for him. As I rushed back mile after mile, struggling again through the muddy swamp, and still saw no signs of the poor coolie, I was almost ready to give up in despair when I spotted something moving about half a mile ahead. It was the goat all by itself. I headed towards it with a heavy heart.

It was only on getting quite close to it that I perceived the poor coolie, lying flat and half sunk in the mud. He had fallen in a faint, and though he was still breathing, he was quite insensible. Fortunately he had taken the precaution of tying the rope of the rabbu tight round his arm, and thus not only was it owing to the animal that I had found his whereabouts, but I had also saved our precious acquisition. With some rubbing and shaking I brought the poor fellow back to life, and supported him by the arm until we rejoined Chanden Sing. Not till the middle of the night did we reach Tarbar, a large Tibetan encampment at the foot of the hill range.

It was only when I got really close that I noticed the poor coolie, lying flat and half buried in the mud. He had fainted, and even though he was still breathing, he was completely out of it. Fortunately, he had taken the precaution of tying the rope of the rabbu tightly around his arm, so not only did I find him thanks to the animal, but I also saved our valuable asset. After some rubbing and shaking, I brought the poor guy back to consciousness and helped him by the arm until we found Chanden Sing again. We didn't reach Tarbar, a large Tibetan camp at the foot of the hill range, until the middle of the night.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[26] The Tibetans have three distinct kinds of goats: the rabbu, or large woolly animal, such as the one I had purchased; the ratton, or small goat; and the chitbu, a dwarf goat whose flesh is delicious eating. The rabbu and ratton are the two kinds generally used for carrying loads, and they have sufficient strength to bear a weight not exceeding 40 lbs. for a distance of from five to eight miles daily over fairly good ground.

[26] The Tibetans have three different types of goats: the rabbu, a large, woolly animal like the one I bought; the ratton, a small goat; and the chitbu, a dwarf goat whose meat is really tasty. The rabbu and ratton are the two types typically used for carrying loads, and they can handle a weight of up to 40 lbs. for distances of five to eight miles each day on relatively good terrain.


[346]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXIX

The alarm given—Our bad manners—A peaceful settlement—A large river—Gigantic peak—Again on marshy soil.

The alarm of our arrival, given first by scores of dogs barking at us, then by one of the natives who had ventured to leave his tent to find out the cause of the disturbance, created the usual panic in the place.

The alarm of our arrival, first announced by a chorus of barking dogs and then by one of the locals who had dared to step out of his tent to investigate the commotion, caused the usual panic in the area.

"Gigri duk! gigri duk! Jogpa, Jogpa!" ("Danger, danger; help, brigands!") cried the Tibetan, running frantically out of his tent; and a few seconds later, black figures could be seen everywhere, rushing in and out of their tents in a state of confusion. It must be remembered that, according to the manners of Tibet, one should time one's arrival at an encampment so as to reach it before sundown, unless notice of one's approach is sent ahead. People who arrive unexpectedly in the middle of the night are never credited with good motives, and their appearance is associated with all sorts of evil intentions, murder, robbery or extortion. I tried to set the minds of the good folk at ease, by stating that I meant no harm; but such was their excitement and confusion that I could get no one to listen to me.

"Gigri duk! gigri duk! Jogpa, Jogpa!" ("Danger, danger; help, brigands!") shouted the Tibetan, sprinting out of his tent in a panic; and moments later, dark figures were seen everywhere, darting in and out of their tents in a frenzy. It's important to note that, according to Tibetan customs, one should arrive at a camp before sundown unless they notify others of their approach in advance. People who show up unexpectedly in the middle of the night are never viewed with good intentions, and their arrival is linked to all kinds of malicious purposes, like murder, theft, or extortion. I tried to reassure the good people, saying that I meant no harm; but their anxiety and chaos were so intense that no one would listen to me.

Two old women came to us with a bucket of milk and laid it at my feet, entreating me to spare their lives; and great was their astonishment when, instead of finding themselves murdered, they received a silver rupee in payment. This was the first step towards a peaceful settlement of the disturbance. After some time, calm was restored and, though still regarded with considerable suspicion, we were politely treated by the natives.

Two elderly women approached us with a bucket of milk and placed it at my feet, pleading for their lives; they were greatly shocked when, instead of facing death, they were given a silver rupee in return. This was the first move toward peacefully resolving the conflict. After a while, order was restored and, although still viewed with a fair amount of distrust, we were treated politely by the locals.

Unfortunately, here too we were unable to purchase provisions, the natives declaring that they had not sufficient for themselves. So, having feasted on the rabbu which we [347] killed, and on yak's milk, we made preparations to strike camp early next morning.

Unfortunately, we couldn't buy any supplies here either, as the locals said they didn't have enough for themselves. So, after feasting on the rabbu we had killed and some yak's milk, we got ready to break camp early the next morning.

At night the thermometer fell to 26°, and the cold was very great; but we purchased a quantity of dung from the natives and made a fine fire in the morning; and, having had a good meal after several days' privations, we felt happier than usual. The natives begged as ever, showing their unrestrained craving for money, to get which they would lower themselves to anything.

At night, the temperature dropped to 26°, and it was really cold; but we bought a lot of dung from the locals and made a great fire in the morning. After having a good meal after several days of hardship, we felt happier than usual. The locals were still begging, showing their desperate need for money, and they would do anything to get it.

Carpenter and Saddle-maker

Carpenter and Saddle Maker


North-west of the encampment, through a gorge, flowed a wide river which skirted the foot of the mountains. It was snow-fed, for in the evening the current was strong and deep, whereas early in the morning the level of the water was several feet lower, being, however, even then hardly fordable. On leaving Tarbar, we followed for a while the course of the river, and, the day being glorious, we were able to admire fully the magnificent panorama of the great rugged mountain-range to our South-west. The higher peaks were nearly all of a pyramidical shape, and at 226° 30′ (b.m.) I observed a gigantic quadrangular peak which I took to be Mount Everest. Next to it, at 225° 30′ (b.m.), is a pyramidical peak, very lofty, but not to be compared in height or beauty to its neighbour. I followed a general course towards 120° (b.m.), and as the river, which we had more or less followed, now described a big bend towards the S.S.E., I decided to cross it. We waded through it successfully with water up to our [348] necks, and again we found ourselves upon marshy land, with a repetition of the previous day's experience.

Northwest of the camp, a wide river flowed through a gorge at the base of the mountains. It was fed by snow, as the current was strong and deep in the evening, while in the early morning the water level dropped several feet, making it barely crossable even then. After leaving Tarbar, we followed the river's path for a while, and since it was a beautiful day, we were able to fully appreciate the stunning view of the rugged mountain range to our southwest. Most of the higher peaks had a pyramid shape, and at 226° 30′ (b.m.), I spotted a massive quadrangular peak that I believed to be Mount Everest. Next to it, at 225° 30′ (b.m.), was a very tall pyramid-shaped peak, but it couldn’t compare in height or beauty to its neighbor. I generally headed toward 120° (b.m.), and as the river we had been following made a big bend toward the S.S.E., I decided to cross it. We successfully waded through with water up to our necks, and once again we found ourselves on marshy land, repeating the experience from the previous day.

Old Woman

Elderly Woman


Farther on, we crossed three more tributaries of the larger stream, all fairly wide and deep; and then we had once more to get across the main river, now of such depth and rapidity as to cause us much trouble and no small danger. The river traverses the plain in zigzag fashion, and, unless we wanted to follow its banks, and so lengthen the journey by double or treble the distance, this was the only course open to us. Thus, while trying to travel in a straight line, we found ourselves for the third time confronted by this great river, now swollen by other snow-fed streams, and carrying an immense body of water. It was in the afternoon, too, when the water was at its highest. We attempted a crossing at several points, but found it impossible; so I made up my mind to wait for low water early next morning.

Farther along, we crossed three more tributaries of the larger stream, all pretty wide and deep; then we had to get across the main river again, which was now so deep and fast that it caused us a lot of trouble and serious danger. The river zigzags across the plain, and unless we wanted to follow its banks, which would double or triple our distance, this was the only way forward. So, while trying to travel in a straight line, we faced this big river for the third time, now swollen by other snow-fed streams and carrying a massive volume of water. It was also in the afternoon when the water was at its highest. We tried to cross at several points, but it was impossible; so I decided to wait for the water to go down early the next morning.


[349]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXX

Another Tibetan encampment—Uncontrollable animals—A big stream—Washed away—In dreadful suspense—Rescuing the yak—Diving at great altitudes and its effects—How my two followers got across—A precarious outlook and a little comfort.
Contrivance for Carrying Loads
Contrivance for Carrying Loads

Apparently my yaks knew this part of the country well; and I noticed that, whenever I lost the track, all I had to do was to follow them, and they would bring me back to it again. Even when I drove them away from the track, they showed a great disinclination to move, whereas they proceeded willingly enough while we were on the high road, which, mark you, is no road at all, for no track is visible except here and there, where the footprints of the last nomads with their sheep, ponies and yaks have destroyed the grass.

Clearly my yaks knew this part of the country really well; and I noticed that whenever I lost the path, all I had to do was follow them, and they would lead me back to it. Even when I tried to steer them away from the path, they were very reluctant to move, while they were eager to go when we were on the main route, which, by the way, isn’t a road at all, since no trail is visible except for the places where the footprints of the last nomads with their sheep, ponies, and yaks have trampled the grass.

Half a mile on the other side of the river was an encampment of some fifty or sixty tents, with hundreds of yaks and sheep grazing near it.

Half a mile on the other side of the river was a campsite with about fifty or sixty tents, along with hundreds of yaks and sheep grazing nearby.

At this point my two yaks, which I noticed had been marching with more than usual smartness, bolted while I was ordering Chanden Sing and Mansing to take down the loads, and went straight into the water.

At this point, my two yaks, which I noticed had been moving with unusual energy, suddenly ran off while I was telling Chanden Sing and Mansing to unload, and headed straight into the water.

In attempting to make them turn back, Mansing threw a stone at them, which, however, only sent them on all the faster. The current was so strong, and the bottom of the river so soft, that they both sank, and when they reappeared on the surface it was only to float rapidly away down stream. We watched them with ever-increasing anxiety, for they seemed quite helpless. We ran panting along the river [350] bank, urging them on with shouts to drive them to the other side. Alas, in their desperate struggle to keep afloat, and powerless against the current, the two yaks collided violently in mid-stream, and the bump caused the pack-saddle and loads of the smaller yak to turn over. The animal, thus overbalanced and hampered, sank and reappeared two or three times, struggling for air and life. It was, indeed, a terrible moment. I threw off my clothes and jumped into the water. I swam fast to the animal, and, with no small exertion, pulled him on shore, some two hundred yards farther down the stream. We were both safe, though breathless, but, alas! the ropes that held the baggage had given way, and saddle and loads had disappeared. This loss was a dreadful blow to us. I tried hard, by repeatedly diving into the river, until I was almost frozen, to recover my goods, but failed to find them or even to locate them. Where I suspected them to be the water was over twenty feet deep, and the bottom of the river was of soft mud; so that the weight of the loads would have caused them to sink and be covered over with it.

In trying to make them turn back, Mansing threw a stone at them, which only made them go faster. The current was so strong, and the riverbed so soft, that they both sank, and when they came back to the surface, it was only to float away quickly downstream. We watched them with growing anxiety because they seemed completely helpless. We ran breathlessly along the riverbank, shouting to urge them to swim to the other side. Unfortunately, in their desperate effort to stay afloat and unable to fight against the current, the two yaks collided violently in the middle of the river, causing the pack-saddle and loads of the smaller yak to flip over. The animal, now off balance and struggling, sank and resurfaced two or three times, gasping for air and fighting for its life. It was, indeed, a horrifying moment. I took off my clothes and jumped into the water. I swam quickly to the animal and, with a lot of effort, pulled it to shore about two hundred yards downstream. We were both safe, though out of breath, but, unfortunately, the ropes that held the baggage had broken, and the saddle and loads had vanished. This loss hit us hard. I desperately tried diving into the river repeatedly, until I was nearly frozen, to recover my things, but I couldn’t find them or even spot where they might be. Where I thought they might be, the water was over twenty feet deep, and the riverbed was soft mud, so the weight of the loads would have caused them to sink and get buried in it.

Rescuing a Yak

Rescuing a Yak


Diving at such very great elevations gave one a peculiar and unpleasant sensation. The moment I was entirely under water, I felt as if I were compressed under an appalling weight which seemed to crush me. Had the liquid [351] above and around me been a mass of lead instead of water, it could not have felt heavier. The sensation was especially noticeable in my head, which felt as if my skull were being screwed into a vice. The beating at my temples was so strong that, though in ordinary circumstances I can remain under water for over a minute, I could there never bold out for longer than fifteen or twenty seconds. Each time that I emerged from below, gasping for air, my heart beat alarmingly hard, and my lungs seemed as if about to burst.

Diving at such high elevations gave me a strange and uncomfortable feeling. The moment I was fully underwater, it felt like I was being crushed under a heavy weight. If the liquid[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] above and around me had been a mass of lead instead of water, it wouldn't have felt any heavier. This feeling was particularly strong in my head, making it seem like my skull was being squeezed in a vice. The pounding in my temples was so intense that, even though I usually can hold my breath for over a minute, I couldn't last more than fifteen or twenty seconds in that situation. Each time I surfaced, gasping for air, my heart was racing, and it felt like my lungs were about to burst.

I was so exhausted that I did not feel equal to conveying across my two men, so I unloaded the stronger yak, and then, with endless fatigue, I drove him and his mate again into the water. Unhampered, and good swimmers as they are, they floated away with the current and reached the other side. Chanden Sing and Mansing, with their clothes and mine tied into a bundle over their shoulders, got on the animals and, after a somewhat anxious passage, they arrived safely on my side, where we camped, my men mourning all night over the lost property. The next morning I made fresh attempts to recover the loads, but in vain! Unhappily they contained all my tinned provisions, and what little other food I had, and they had in them besides eight hundred rupees in silver, the greater part of my ammunition, changes of clothing and three pairs of shoes, my copper hurricane lantern, and sundry knives and razors.

I was so exhausted that I couldn't manage to get my two men across, so I unloaded the stronger yak. Then, completely worn out, I drove him and his mate back into the water. Without any hindrances, and since they are good swimmers, they floated away with the current and made it to the other side. Chanden Sing and Mansing, with our clothes tied into a bundle over their shoulders, got on the animals and, after a somewhat nerve-wracking journey, they safely reached my side, where we set up camp, my men grieving all night over the lost belongings. The next morning, I made new attempts to recover the loads, but it was useless! Unfortunately, they contained all my canned food, everything else I had, and also eight hundred rupees in silver, most of my ammunition, changes of clothing, three pairs of shoes, my copper hurricane lantern, and various knives and razors.

The only thing we recovered was the pack-saddle, which was washed ashore some six hundred yards farther down. Our situation can be summed up in a few words. We were now in the centre of Tibet, with no food of any kind, no clothes to speak of, and no boots or shoes, except those we wore, which were falling to pieces. What little ammunition I had left could not be relied upon, owing to its having been in the water on several occasions; and round us we had nothing but enemies—insignificant enemies if you like, yet enemies for all that.

The only thing we found was the pack saddle, which was washed up about six hundred yards further down. Our situation can be summed up in a few words. We were now in the middle of Tibet, with no food at all, barely any clothes, and no boots or shoes except the ones we were wearing, which were falling apart. The little ammunition I had left was unreliable since it had been in the water several times; and all around us were nothing but enemies—insignificant enemies if you want to call them that, but enemies nonetheless.

I got what comfort I could out of the knowledge that at least the water-tight cases with my scientific instruments, notes, sketches and maps were saved, and as far as I was concerned, I valued them more than anything else I possessed.

I took comfort in knowing that at least the water-tight cases with my scientific instruments, notes, sketches, and maps were saved, and for me, I valued them more than anything else I owned.


[352]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXI

Hungry and worn—A sense of humour—Two buckets of milk—No food to be obtained—Chanden Sing and Mansing in a wretched state—Their fidelity—Exhaustion.

We went on, hungry, worn out, with our feet lacerated, cheering one another as best we could. We laughed at our troubles; we laughed at the Tibetans and their comical ways; we laughed at everything and everybody, until eventually we even laughed at ourselves. When you are hungry, the sun seems slow at describing its daily semicircle from East to West; yet though involuntary fasting gives you at first an acute pain in the stomach, it doesn't become unbearable until after several days' absolute want of food; that is to say, if you are in a way accustomed, as we were, to extra long intervals between one meal and the next. When we got to our third day's fasting we were keen enough for a meal; and, perceiving some black tents close by the mountain side, about four miles out of our course, we made for them with hungry haste. We purchased two bucketsful of yaks' milk, one of which I drank there and then myself, the second being equally divided between my two servants. That was all we could get. They would sell us absolutely nothing else.

We kept going, hungry and exhausted, with our feet sore, cheering each other up as best we could. We laughed at our problems; we laughed at the Tibetans and their funny ways; we laughed at everything and everyone, until eventually we even laughed at ourselves. When you’re hungry, the sun seems to take forever to move across the sky from East to West; yet although not eating at first gives you a sharp pain in your stomach, it doesn't become unbearable until several days without food; that is, if you're somewhat used to long periods between meals like we were. By the third day of fasting, we were eager for food, and seeing some black tents near the mountainside, about four miles off our path, we rushed over to them. We bought two buckets of yak milk, one of which I drank right away, the other split between my two servants. That was all we could get. They refused to sell us anything else.

After this we moved forward again, making steady, and, if one allows for the great elevation we were at, comparatively rapid progress; noting down everything, and holding our own against all comers. We encountered pleasant people, and some unpleasant ones, but, whether their manner was courteous or the reverse, we could nowhere obtain food for love or money.

After this, we continued to move ahead, making steady progress, and—considering the high altitude we were at—fairly quickly; taking note of everything and standing our ground against everyone we met. We came across nice people and some not so nice, but whether they were polite or rude, we couldn’t find any food, no matter how hard we tried or how much we were willing to pay.

Poor Mansing and Chanden Sing, not having the same interest that I had in my work to keep up their spirits, were now in a dreadful condition. Cold, tired and starved, the [353] poor wretches had hardly strength left to stand on their feet, the soles of which were badly cut and very sore. It really made my heart bleed to see these two brave fellows suffer as they did for my sake; and yet no word of complaint came from them; not once did their lips utter a reproach.

Poor Mansing and Chanden Sing, lacking the same enthusiasm I had for my work to lift their spirits, were now in terrible shape. Cold, exhausted, and hungry, the [a id="Pg_353">[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] poor guys barely had the strength to stay on their feet, with soles that were badly cut and very sore. It truly broke my heart to see these two brave men suffer like they did for my sake; yet not a single word of complaint came from them; not once did they utter a reproach.

Drinking out of a Bucket

Drinking from a Bucket


"Never, mind if we suffer or even die," said the poor fellows, when I expressed my sympathy with them, "we will follow you as long as we have strength to move, and we will stand by you, no matter what happens."

"Never mind if we suffer or even die," said the poor guys when I expressed my sympathy for them. "We'll follow you as long as we have the strength to move, and we'll stand by you no matter what happens."

I had to relieve Chanden Sing of his rifle, as he was no longer able to carry it. I myself, too, felt languid and exhausted as the days went by, and we got scarcely any food. I cannot say that I experienced any very severe physical pain. This was due, I think, to the fact that my exhaustion brought on fever. I had, nevertheless, a peculiar feeling in my head, as if my intellect, never too bright, had [354] now been altogether dulled. My hearing, too, became less acute; and I felt my strength slowly dying down like the flame of a lamp with no more oil in it. The nervous excitement and strain alone kept me alive, and I went on walking mechanically.

I had to take Chanden Sing's rifle from him since he couldn't carry it anymore. I felt worn out and drained as the days passed, and we barely had any food. I can't say I felt a lot of physical pain. I think that was because my exhaustion led to a fever. Still, I had this odd sensation in my head, as if my mind, which was never that sharp, had completely dulled. My hearing also got worse, and I felt my strength fading slowly, like a lamp running out of oil. Only the nervous energy and stress kept me going, and I kept walking on autopilot.

Shrine inside Tent

Shrine in Tent


[355]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXII

Eighty black tents—Starved—Kindly natives—Presents—Ando and his promises—A friendly Lama—A low pass—My plans.

We reached an encampment of some eighty black tents and a mud guard-house. We were positively in a starved condition and it was utterly impossible to proceed farther, owing to the wretched condition of my two men. They begged to be given ponies to ride, for their feet were so sore that, notwithstanding their anxiety to follow me, they could not.

We arrived at a camp with about eighty black tents and a muddy guardhouse. We were honestly starving and it was completely impossible to move forward because my two men were in such poor shape. They pleaded for ponies to ride, as their feet were so sore that, despite their eagerness to follow me, they just couldn't.

The natives received us very kindly, and, on my applying for them, consented to sell me ponies, clothes and provisions. We encamped about two miles beyond the settlement, and during the evening several persons visited my tent, bringing gifts of flour, butter and tsamba, accompanied by Katas, the veils of friendship. I made a point of invariably giving the Tibetans, in return for their gifts, silver money to an amount three or four times greater than the value of the articles they presented us with, and they professed to be very grateful for it. A man called Ando, who styled himself a Gourkha, but wore the garb of the Tibetans, came to visit us in our tent, and promised to bring for sale several ponies the next morning. He also undertook to sell me a sufficient quantity of food to enable us to reach Lhassa, and, to show his good faith, brought a portion of the supplies in the evening, and said he would let us have the remainder the next morning.

The locals welcomed us warmly, and when I asked them, they agreed to sell me ponies, clothes, and food. We set up camp about two miles past the settlement, and in the evening, several people came to my tent, bringing gifts of flour, butter, and tsamba, along with Katas, the veils of friendship. I made it a point to always give the Tibetans, in return for their gifts, silver money worth three or four times more than the value of what they gave us, and they claimed to be very grateful for it. A man named Ando, who called himself a Gourkha but wore Tibetan clothing, visited us in our tent and promised to bring several ponies for sale the next morning. He also offered to sell me enough food to get us to Lhassa, and to prove his goodwill, he brought some of the supplies in the evening and said he would give us the rest the following morning.

We next had a visit from a Lama, who appeared both civil and intelligent, and who presented us with some butter and chura (cheese). He had travelled in India, he told us, as far as Calcutta, and was on his way from Gartok to Lhassa, where he expected to arrive in four or five days, having an excellent pony. Other Lamas and men who [356] came to see us stated that they had come from Lhassa in that time, and I do not think that they can have been far wrong, as the whole distance from the Lippu Pass on the frontier (near Garbyang) to Lhassa can on horseback be covered in sixteen days.

We next had a visit from a Lama, who seemed both polite and knowledgeable, and who brought us some butter and chura (cheese). He mentioned that he had traveled in India, all the way to Calcutta, and was on his way from Gartok to Lhassa, where he expected to arrive in four or five days, riding an excellent pony. Other Lamas and men who[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] came to see us said they had also come from Lhassa in that time, and I believe they were probably accurate, since the entire distance from the Lippu Pass on the frontier (near Garbyang) to Lhassa can be covered on horseback in sixteen days.

Mud Guard-house

Mud Guardhouse


The natives, as usual, showed great reticence in letting out the name of the encampment, some calling it Toxem, others Taddju. North of us was a low pass in the hill range, and having already seen as much as I wanted of the Tibetans, it was my intention, if I succeeded in purchasing provisions and ponies, to cross over this pass and proceed towards the Sacred City, following a course on the northern side of the mountain range. Besides, the highway to Lhassa was getting so thickly populated that I thought it advisable to travel through less inhabited regions. I intended proceeding, dressed as a European, until within a few miles of Lhassa. Then I would leave my two men concealed in some secluded spot, and assuming a disguise, I would penetrate alone during the night into the city. This would have been easy enough, as Lhassa has no gates, and only a ruined wall round it.

The locals were, as always, quite hesitant to share the name of the camp, with some calling it Toxem and others Taddju. To the north, there was a low pass in the hills, and after seeing more of the Tibetans than I wanted, I planned to buy supplies and ponies so I could cross over this pass and head toward the Sacred City, sticking to the northern side of the mountain range. Additionally, the main road to Lhassa was becoming so crowded that I thought it would be better to travel through less populated areas. I planned to travel dressed as a European until I was just a few miles from Lhassa. Then, I would leave my two companions hidden in a secluded spot and, after changing my appearance, I would sneak into the city alone at night. This would be fairly easy since Lhassa has no gates, just a crumbling wall around it.

I succeeded in purchasing some clothing and boots from [357] the Tibetans, and the pigtail that I needed to make me pass for a Tibetan I intended to make myself, out of the silky hair of my yaks. To avoid betraying myself by my inability to speak Tibetan fluently, I thought of pretending to be deaf and dumb.

I managed to buy some clothes and boots from the Tibetans, and I planned to make the pigtail I needed to blend in as a Tibetan from the silky hair of my yaks. To avoid giving myself away because I couldn't speak Tibetan fluently, I considered pretending to be deaf and mute.

A good meal brought hope and high spirits, and when I retired to sleep I saw myself already inside the sacred walls.

A good meal brought hope and lifted my spirits, and when I went to sleep, I imagined myself already inside the sacred walls.

Tibetan Bellows

Tibetan blowers


[358]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXIII

Strange noises—Ando the traitor—Purchasing provisions and ponies—A handsome pony—Decoyed away from my tent and rifles—Pounced upon—The fight—A prisoner.
A Distaff
A Distaff

During the night I was aroused several times by noises, and I went out of my tent to look for the disturbers, but failed to discover any one. This had become my nightly experience, and I attached very little importance to these sounds.

During the night, I was woken up several times by noises, and I went outside my tent to investigate the source, but I couldn't find anyone. This had become a regular occurrence for me, and I didn’t think much of these sounds.

In the morning, Ando and two or three Tibetans came to sell us provisions and ponies, and, while my two servants and I were engaged in purchasing what we required, I saw a number of villagers coming up in groups. Some spun their wool, others carried bags of tsamba and flour, while others still arrived leading a number of fine ponies. Having purchased provisions to last us a couple of months, we now began the selection of mounts, and naturally my servants and myself were overjoyed at our unexpected piece of luck in finding ourselves, after untold sufferings and privations of all kinds, confronted with abundance of everything we could possibly desire. The demeanour of the Tibetans was so friendly, and they seemed so guileless, that I never thought of suspecting them. Chanden Sing and Mansing, who at bottom were sportsmen of the very first order, delighted at the prospect of getting animals, rode first one pony and then another to suit themselves; and Chanden Sing, having selected a handsome beast for his own use, called me to try it and examine it before paying over the purchase-money.

In the morning, Ando and two or three Tibetans came to sell us supplies and ponies. While my two servants and I were busy buying what we needed, I noticed several villagers arriving in groups. Some were spinning their wool, others were carrying bags of tsamba and flour, while still others were leading several fine ponies. After buying enough provisions to last us a couple of months, we started picking out mounts. Naturally, my servants and I were thrilled by our unexpected luck in finding ourselves, after countless hardships and challenges, faced with an abundance of everything we could possibly want. The Tibetans were so friendly and seemed so sincere that I never thought to suspect them. Chanden Sing and Mansing, who were essentially top-notch sportsmen, were excited about getting animals and rode one pony after another to find the best fit. Chanden Sing, after choosing a handsome pony for himself, called me over to try it out and inspect it before handing over the money for the purchase.

Unsuspecting of foul play, and also because it would not

Unsuspecting of any wrongdoing, and also because it wouldn't

[359]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Purchasing Ponies

Buying Ponies


[360] be convenient to try the various lively ponies with my rifle slung over my shoulder, I walked unarmed to the spot, about a hundred yards away from my tent, where the restless animal was being held for my inspection. The natives followed behind me, but such a thing being common in any country when one buys a horse in public, I thought nothing of it. As I stood with my hands behind my back, I well recollect the expression of delight on Chanden Sing's face when I approved of his choice, and, as is generally the case on such occasions, the crowd behind in a chorus expressed their gratuitous opinion on the superiority of the steed selected.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] It was convenient to check out the lively ponies with my rifle slung over my shoulder, so I walked unarmed to the spot, about a hundred yards away from my tent, where the restless animal was being held for my inspection. The locals followed behind me, but since that’s common in any country when buying a horse in public, I didn’t think much of it. As I stood with my hands behind my back, I clearly remember the look of delight on Chanden Sing's face when I approved of his choice, and, as usually happens on such occasions, the crowd chimed in, sharing their unsolicited opinions about the superiority of the chosen horse.

I was a Prisoner

I was incarcerated


I had just stooped to look at the pony's fore-legs, when I was suddenly seized from behind by several persons, who grabbed me by the neck, wrists, and legs, and threw me down on my face. I struggled and fought [361] until I shook off some of my assailants and regained my feet; but others rushed up, and I was surrounded by some thirty men, who attacked me from every side, and clinging to me with all their might succeeded in grabbing my arms, legs and head. Weak as I was, they knocked me down three more times, and three more times I regained my feet. I fought to the bitter end with my fists, feet, head and teeth each time that I got one hand or leg free from their clutches, hitting right and left at any part where I could disable my opponents. Their timidity, even when in such overwhelming numbers, was indeed beyond description; and it was entirely due to it, and not to my strength (for I had hardly any), that I was able to hold my own against them for some twenty minutes. My clothes were torn in the fight. Long ropes were thrown at me from every side, and I became so entangled in them that my movements were impeded. One rope which they flung and successfully twisted round my neck completed their victory. They pulled hard at it from the two ends, and while I panted and gasped with the exertion of fighting, they tugged and tugged to strangle me, till I felt as if my eyes would shoot out of their sockets. I was suffocating. My sight became dim, and I was in their power. Dragged down to the ground, they stamped, and kicked, and trampled upon me with their heavy nailed boots, until I was stunned. Then they tied my wrists tightly behind my back; they bound my elbows, my chest, my neck and my ankles. I was a prisoner!

I had just bent down to check the pony's front legs when I was suddenly grabbed from behind by several people. They seized me by the neck, wrists, and legs, and threw me down on my face. I struggled and fought until I managed to shake off some of my attackers and got back on my feet; but others rushed in, and soon I was surrounded by about thirty men who attacked me from all sides, gripping me with all their strength and managing to grab my arms, legs, and head. Weak as I was, they knocked me down three more times, and each time I got back up. I fought fiercely with my fists, feet, head, and teeth whenever I managed to free a hand or a leg from their hold, striking at any part I could to incapacitate my opponents. Their fear, even when they outnumbered me so greatly, was truly remarkable; and it was solely because of that, not my strength (which was barely there), that I managed to hold my own against them for about twenty minutes. My clothes were torn in the struggle. Long ropes were thrown at me from all sides, and I got so tangled up in them that my movements were restricted. One rope that they threw ended up twisted around my neck, sealing their victory. They pulled on both ends hard, and while I gasped and panted from fighting, they tugged relentlessly to choke me, until I felt like my eyes were going to pop out of my head. I was suffocating. My vision blurred, and I was at their mercy. Dragged down to the ground, they stomped, kicked, and trampled on me with their heavy boots until I was dazed. Then they tied my wrists tightly behind my back; they bound my elbows, chest, neck, and ankles. I was a prisoner!

Rope Riding-whip

Riding whip


[362]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXIV

Chanden Sing's plucky resistance—Mansing secured—A signal—A treacherous Lama—Confiscation of baggage—Watches, compasses and aneroids—Fear and avidity—The air-cushion—Dragged into the encampment.
Earring worn by High Officials
Earring worn by High Officials

They lifted me and made me stand up. The brave Chanden Sing had been struggling with all his might against fifteen or twenty foes, and had disabled several of them. He had been pounced upon at the same moment as I was, and had fought gallantly until, like myself, he had been entangled, thrown down and secured by ropes. During my struggle, I heard him call out repeatedly: "Banduk, banduk, Mansing; jaldi, banduk!" ("Rifle, rifle, Mansing; quick, my rifle!") but, alas, poor Mansing the leper, the weak and jaded coolie, had been sprung upon by four powerful Tibetans, who held him pinned to the ground as if he had been the fiercest of bandits. Mansing was a philosopher. He had saved himself the trouble of even offering any resistance; but he too, was ill-treated, beaten and tightly bound. At the beginning of the fight a shrill whistle had brought up four hundred[27] armed soldiers who had lain in ambush round us, concealed behind the innumerable sandhills and in the depressions in the ground. They took up a position round us and covered us with their matchlocks.

They lifted me and made me stand up. The brave Chanden Sing had been fighting with all his strength against fifteen or twenty enemies and had taken several of them out. He had been attacked at the same time as I was and had fought valiantly until, just like me, he got tangled up, thrown down, and secured with ropes. During my struggle, I heard him shouting over and over: "Banduk, banduk, Mansing; jaldi, banduk!" ("Rifle, rifle, Mansing; quick, my rifle!") but, unfortunately, poor Mansing the leper, the weak and exhausted laborer, had been jumped on by four strong Tibetans, who held him down as if he were the fiercest of bandits. Mansing was a philosopher. He had saved himself the trouble of even trying to resist, but he too was mistreated, beaten, and tightly bound. At the start of the fight, a sharp whistle had summoned four hundred[27] armed soldiers who had been lying in wait around us, hidden behind the countless sandhills and in the dips in the ground. They took up positions around us and aimed their matchlocks at us.

All was now over, and, bound like a dangerous criminal, I

All was now over, and, tied up like a dangerous criminal, I

[363]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Dragged into the Settlement

Pulled into the Settlement


[364] looked round to see what had become of my men. When I realised that it took the Tibetans five hundred men[28] all counted to arrest a starved Englishman and his two half-dying servants, and that, even then, they dared not do it openly, but had to resort to abject treachery; when I found that these soldiers were picked troops from Lhassa and Sigatz (Shigatze), despatched on purpose to arrest our progress and capture us, I could not restrain a smile of contempt for those into whose hands we had at last fallen.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] I looked around to see what had happened to my men. When I realized that it took five hundred Tibetans[28] to catch a starved Englishman and his two half-dead servants, and that, even then, they didn’t dare to do it openly and had to resort to complete treachery; when I discovered that these soldiers were elite troops from Lhassa and Sigatz (Shigatze), sent specifically to stop us and capture us, I couldn't help but smile with contempt for those who had finally caught us.

A Spear
A Spear

My blood boiled when, upon the order of the Lama, who the previous night had professed to be our friend, several men advanced and searched our pockets. They rifled us of everything we possessed, and began overhauling our baggage. The watches and chronometer were looked upon with suspicion, their ticking causing anxiety and curiosity. They were passed round and round and mercilessly thrown about from one person to the other, until they stopped. They were then pronounced "dead." The compasses and aneroids, which they could not distinguish from watches, were soon thrown aside, as "they had no life in them," but great caution was displayed in touching our rifles, which were lying on our bedding when the tent had been torn down.

My blood heated up when, on the order of the Lama, who had claimed to be our friend the night before, several men came forward and searched our pockets. They took everything we had and started going through our bags. The watches and chronometer were viewed with suspicion, their ticking causing anxiety and curiosity. They were passed around forcefully and tossed from one person to another until they stopped working. They were then declared "dead." The compasses and aneroids, which they couldn’t tell apart from the watches, were quickly discarded as "they had no life in them," but they handled our rifles, which were on our bedding when the tent was taken down, with great caution.

Great fears were entertained lest they should go off by themselves; and it was only on my assurance (which made our captors ten times more cautious) that they were not loaded, that at last they took them and registered them in the catalogue of our confiscated property. I had upon me a gold ring that my mother had given me when I was a child. I asked permission to retain it, and with their superstitious nature they immediately thought that it had occult powers, like the wands one reads of in fairy tales.

Great fears arose that they would leave on their own, and it was only after I assured them (which made our captors even more cautious) that they were not loaded, that they finally took them and logged them in the catalog of our confiscated property. I had a gold ring that my mother had given me when I was a child. I asked if I could keep it, and with their superstitious beliefs, they immediately thought it had magical powers, like the wands you read about in fairy tales.

A man called Nerba, who later on played an important part in our sufferings, was entrusted with it, and warned never to let me see it again. As we three prisoners sat bound and held down by guards it was heartbreaking to see the Lamas and officers handle all our things so roughly as to spoil nearly all they touched; but particularly disgusting [365] was their avidity when, in searching the pockets of the coat I wore daily, and which I had not put on that morning, they found a quantity of silver coins, some eight hundred rupees in all. Officers, Lamas and soldiers made a grab for the money, and when order was re-established, only a few coins remained where the sum had been laid down. Other moneys which they found in one of our loads met with a similar fate. Among the things arousing greatest curiosity was an india-rubber pillow fully blown out. The soft, smooth texture of the india-rubber seemed to catch their fancy, and one after the other they rubbed their cheeks on the cushion, exclaiming at the pleasant sensation it gave them. However, in playing with the brass screw by which the cushion was inflated, they gave it a turn, and the imprisoned air found its way out with a hissing noise. This created quite a panic among the Tibetans, and many were the conjectures of their superstitious minds as to the meaning of the strange contrivance. They regarded it as an evil omen, and naturally I took advantage of any small incident of this kind to work judiciously on their superstitions and frighten them as much as I could.

A man named Nerba, who later played a significant role in our hardships, was given the task and warned never to let me see it again. As the three of us prisoners sat tied up and restrained by guards, it was heartbreaking to watch the Lamas and officers handle our belongings so carelessly, ruining almost everything they touched. Especially disturbing was their eagerness when, while searching the pockets of the coat I wore daily—which I hadn’t put on that morning—they found a stash of silver coins totaling about eight hundred rupees. Officers, Lamas, and soldiers all lunged for the money, and when order was restored, only a few coins remained where the pile had been. Other money they discovered in one of our bags suffered the same fate. Among the items that sparked the most curiosity was an inflatable rubber pillow. The soft, smooth feel of the rubber seemed to fascinate them, and one by one, they rubbed their cheeks against the cushion, marveling at the pleasant sensation. However, while playing with the brass screw used to inflate the cushion, they accidentally released the trapped air, causing it to hiss. This caused quite a panic among the Tibetans, leading them to speculate wildly about the meaning of this strange device. They viewed it as a bad omen, and naturally, I took advantage of any small incident like this to play on their superstitions and scare them as much as I could.

Tibetans overhauling our Baggage

Tibetans revamping our luggage


The Tibetans, having examined all except my water-tight cases of instruments, photographic plates and sketches, [366] seemed so upset at one or two things that happened, and at some remarks I made, that they hurriedly sealed up all my property in bags and blankets, and ordered the things to be placed on yaks and brought into the guard-house of the settlement. This done, they tied the end of the ropes that bound our necks to the pommels of their saddles, and, having loosed our feet, they sprang on their ponies and rode off, with shouts, hisses and cries of victory, firing their matchlocks in the air, and dragging us prisoners into the settlement.

The Tibetans, after checking everything except my waterproof cases of instruments, photo plates, and sketches, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] seemed really upset by a few things that happened and some comments I made. They quickly packed up all my belongings in bags and blankets, then ordered that everything be put on yaks and taken to the guardhouse of the settlement. Once that was done, they tied the ends of the ropes around our necks to the pommels of their saddles, removed the ropes from our feet, and then jumped on their ponies to ride off, shouting, hissing, and cheering in victory while firing their matchlocks into the air, dragging us prisoners into the settlement.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[27] The Lamas stated afterwards that this was the number.

[27] The Lamas later confirmed that this was the number.

[28] Counting Lamas, villagers and soldiers.

Counting llamas, locals, and soldiers.


[367]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXV

A warning to my men—Calm and coolness—The Pombo's tent—Chanden Sing cross-examined and flogged.

On reaching the settlement, my last words to my men before we were separated were, "No matter what they do to you, do not let them see that you suffer," and they promised to obey me. We were then conveyed to different tents. I was dragged to one of the larger tents, inside and outside of which soldiers were placed on guard. Those near me were at first sulky, and rough in their manner and speech, but I always made a point of answering them in as collected and polite a fashion as I could. I had on many previous occasions found that nothing carries one further in dealings with Asiatics than to keep calm and cool, and I saw in a moment that, if we were ever to get out of our present scrape, it would be by maintaining a perfectly impassive demeanour in face of anything that might take place. Whether I acted my part well it is not for me to say, but the reader can satisfy himself on that point by perusing the Government inquiry and report made by Mr. J. Larkin, and given in the Appendix to this book.

Upon arriving at the settlement, my final words to my men before we parted ways were, "No matter what they do to you, don’t let them see that you’re suffering," and they agreed to follow my advice. We were then taken to different tents. I was taken to one of the larger tents, with soldiers stationed both inside and outside as guards. The soldiers near me were initially grumpy and rough in their behavior and speech, but I always made it a point to respond to them as calmly and politely as I could. I had found on many previous occasions that staying calm is the best approach when dealing with Asiatics, and I quickly realized that if we were ever going to get out of this situation, it would depend on maintaining a completely impassive demeanor no matter what happened. Whether I played my part well, I can’t say, but the reader can find out for themselves by looking at the Government inquiry and report by Mr. J. Larkin, included in the Appendix of this book.

The tent being kept closed, I was unable to discover what happened outside, but from the noises I heard of people rushing hither and thither, and of shouted orders, besides the continuous tinkling of the soldiers' horse-bells as they galloped past the tent, I concluded that the place must be in a state of turmoil. I had been some three hours in the tent, when a soldier entered and ordered me out.

The tent was kept closed, so I couldn’t see what was happening outside. However, from the sounds of people running around, shouted commands, and the constant jingling of soldiers’ horse bells as they rode by, I figured the area was in chaos. I had been in the tent for about three hours when a soldier came in and told me to come out.

"They are going to cut off his head," said he to his comrades; and, turning round to me, he made a significant gesture with his hand across his neck.

"They're going to behead him," he said to his friends; and, turning to me, he made a meaningful gesture with his hand across his neck.

"Nikutza" ("All right"), said I drily.

"Okay," I said flatly.

It must not be forgotten that, when a Tibetan himself [368] hears words of this import, he usually goes down on his knees and implores to be spared, with tears, and sobs, and prayers in profusion. So it is not surprising that the Tibetans were somewhat astonished at my answer, and seemed puzzled as to what to make of it. Anyhow, the first ardour of the messenger was sensibly cooled down, and I was led out with more reluctance than firmness.

It shouldn't be overlooked that when a Tibetan hears words like these, he typically drops to his knees and begs to be spared, with tears, sobbing, and many prayers. So it’s not surprising that the Tibetans were a bit shocked by my response and seemed confused about how to interpret it. Anyway, the initial enthusiasm of the messenger was noticeably dampened, and I was taken out with more hesitation than resolve.

The Pombo's Tent

Pombo's Tent


During the time I had been shut up, a huge white tent with blue ornaments had been pitched in front of the mud-house, and round it were hundreds of soldiers and villagers—a most picturesque sight.

During the time I had been locked away, a massive white tent with blue decorations had been set up in front of the mud house, and around it were hundreds of soldiers and villagers—a truly stunning sight.

As I was led nearer, I perceived that the front of the tent was wide open, and inside stood a great number of red Lamas, with shaven heads, in their long woollen tunics. The soldiers stopped me when I was about twenty yards from the tent. Additional ropes were added to those already cutting into my wrists, elbows and chest, and the others made tighter. I perceived Chanden Sing led forward, and then, instead of taking me before the Lamas, they pushed me to the rear of the solitary mud-house to preclude my witnessing the scene that followed. I heard Chanden Sing being interrogated in a loud angry tone of voice, and accused of [369] having been my guide. Next I heard wild shouts from the crowd, then a dead silence. A few instants later I distinguished the snapping noise of a lash, followed by hoarse moans from my poor bearer, to whom they were evidently applying it.

As I was brought closer, I noticed that the front of the tent was wide open, and inside there were a lot of red Lamas with shaved heads dressed in long woolen tunics. The soldiers stopped me when I was about twenty yards from the tent. They added more ropes to those already cutting into my wrists, elbows, and chest, and tightened the others. I saw Chanden Sing being brought forward, but instead of taking me to the Lamas, they pushed me to the back of the lone mud house to prevent me from seeing what happened next. I heard Chanden Sing being questioned in a loud, angry voice and accused of being my guide. Then I heard shouting from the crowd, followed by silence. A few moments later, I recognized the sound of a whip cracking, followed by hoarse moans from my poor bearer, who was clearly the one being punished.

I counted the strokes, the sickening noise of which is still well impressed on my memory, as they regularly and steadily fell one after the other to twenty, to thirty, forty, and fifty. Then there was a pause.

I counted the blows, the disturbing sound of which is still fresh in my mind, as they fell one after another steadily—twenty, thirty, forty, and fifty. Then there was a pause.


[370]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXVI

Led before the tribunal—The Pombo—Classical Tibetan beyond me—Chanden Sing lashed—The Lamas puzzled—A sudden change in the Pombo's attitude.

A number of soldiers now came for me, and I was first led, then pushed violently before the tribunal.

A number of soldiers now came for me, and I was first led, then shoved forcefully before the tribunal.

On a high seat in the centre of the tent sat a man wearing ample trousers of gaudy yellow and a short yellow coat with flowing sleeves. On his head he had a huge four-pointed hat gilt all over, and with three great eyes painted on it. He was young-looking, and his head was clean shaven, as he was a Lama of the highest order, a Grand Lama and a Pombo, or Governor of the province, with powers equivalent to those of a feudal king. On his right stood a stout and powerful red Lama who held a huge double-handed sword, and behind, and at the sides, were a number of other Lamas, officers and soldiers. As I stood silent, and with my head held high before him, two or three Lamas rushed at me and ordered me to kneel. They tried to compel me to do so, by forcing me on my knees, but I succeeded in maintaining an upright posture.

On a high seat in the center of the tent sat a man in baggy bright yellow pants and a short yellow coat with flowing sleeves. On his head, he wore a large four-pointed hat that was completely gilded, with three big eyes painted on it. He looked young, and his head was clean-shaven, as he was a Lama of the highest order, a Grand Lama and a Pombo, or Governor of the province, with powers comparable to those of a feudal king. On his right stood a sturdy and strong red Lama holding a massive double-handed sword, and behind him, as well as on the sides, were several other Lamas, officers, and soldiers. As I stood silently with my head held high before him, two or three Lamas rushed at me and ordered me to kneel. They tried to force me to do so by pushing me down, but I managed to keep standing upright.

The Pombo, who was furious at my declining to kneel before him, addressed me in words that sounded violent; but, as he spoke classical Tibetan, and I only the colloquial language, I could not understand a word of what he said, and I meekly asked him not to use such fine words, as they were unintelligible to me.

The Pombo, who was angry at my refusal to kneel before him, spoke to me in a way that sounded aggressive; however, since he was using classical Tibetan and I only knew the everyday language, I couldn't understand anything he said. I politely asked him not to use such complicated words, as they were beyond my understanding.

The great man was taken aback at this unheard-of request; and, with a frown on his face, he pointed to me to look to my left. The soldiers and Lamas drew aside, and I beheld Chanden Sing lying flat on his face, stripped from the waist downwards, in front of a row of Lamas and military men. Two powerful Lamas, one on each side of him, began again

The great man was surprised by this unusual request; and, with a frown on his face, he pointed for me to look to my left. The soldiers and Lamas stepped aside, and I saw Chanden Sing lying flat on his stomach, stripped from the waist down, in front of a line of Lamas and military men. Two strong Lamas, one on each side of him, started again.

[371]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chanden Sing being Lashed

Chanden Sing getting lashed


[372] to castigate him with knotted leather thongs weighted with lead, laying on their strokes with vigorous arms from his waist to his feet. He was bleeding all over. Each time that a lash fell on his wounded skin it felt as if a dagger had been stuck into my chest; but I knew Orientals too well to show any pity for the man, as this would have only involved a more severe punishment for him. So I looked on at his torture as one would upon a thing of everyday occurrence. The Lamas nearer to me shook their fists under my nose, and explained that my turn would come next, whereupon I smiled and repeated the usual "Nikutza, nikutza" ("Very good, very good").

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] to whip him with knotted leather straps loaded with lead, hitting hard from his waist to his feet. He was bleeding everywhere. Each time the whip struck his injured skin, it felt like a knife had been driven into my chest; but I knew the ways of the Orientals too well to show any sympathy for him, as that would only lead to an even harsher punishment for him. So I watched his suffering as one might view something common. The Lamas closer to me shook their fists in front of my face and warned that I would be next, to which I smiled and replied with the usual "Nikutza, nikutza" ("Very good, very good").

The Pombo

The Pombo


The Pombo and his officers were at a loss what to make of me, as I could plainly see by their faces; so that the more I perceived how well my plan was answering, the more courage I screwed up to play my part to the best of my ability.

The Pombo and his officers were confused about what to think of me, as I could clearly see from their expressions; so the more I noticed how well my plan was working, the more confidence I gathered to play my role to the best of my ability.

The Pombo, an effeminate, juvenile, handsome person, almost hysterical in manner, and likely to make a splendid subject for hypnotic experiments (I had reason to think, indeed, that he had already often been under mesmeric influence), remained with his eyes fixed upon mine as if in a trance for certainly over two minutes.

The Pombo, a flashy, youthful, good-looking person, almost hysterical in behavior, and a likely perfect candidate for hypnosis (I suspected he had probably been under hypnotic influence many times before), kept his eyes locked on mine as if in a trance for at least two minutes.

There was a wonderful and sudden change in the man, and his voice, arrogant and angry a few moments before, was now soft and apparently kindly. The Lamas around [373] him were evidently concerned at seeing their lord and master transformed from a foaming fury to the quietest of lambs. They seized me and brought me out of his sight to the spot where Chanden Sing was being chastised. Here again I could not be compelled to kneel, so at last I was allowed to squat down before the Pombo's officers.

There was a sudden and amazing shift in the man, and his voice, which had been arrogant and angry just moments ago, was now soft and seemingly kind. The Lamas around him were clearly worried to see their lord and master change from a raging storm to the calmest lamb. They grabbed me and pulled me away from his sight to the place where Chanden Sing was being punished. Again, I couldn’t be forced to kneel, so eventually, I was allowed to sit down in front of the Pombo's officers.


[374]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXVII

My note-books and maps—What the Lamas wanted me to say—My refusal—Anger and threats—Ando, the traitor—Chanden Sing's heroism—A scene of cruelty—Rain.

The two Lamas, leaving Chanden Sing, produced my note-books and maps, and proceeded to interrogate me closely, saying that, if I spoke the truth, I should be spared, otherwise I should be flogged and then beheaded.

The two Lamas, leaving Chanden Sing, pulled out my notebooks and maps, and started questioning me closely, saying that if I told the truth, I would be spared; otherwise, I would be whipped and then executed.

A Soldier

A Soldier


I answered that I would speak the truth, whether they punished me or not.

I replied that I would tell the truth, no matter what punishment they gave me.

One of the Lamas, a great big brute, who was dressed up in a gaudy red silk coat, with gold embroidery at the collar, and who had taken part in the flogging of Chanden Sing, told me I must say "that my servant had shown me the road across Tibet, and that he had done the maps and sketches." If I would say this, they [375] were willing to release me and have me conveyed back to the frontier, promising to do me no further harm. They would cut my servant's head off, that was all, but no personal injury should be inflicted on me.

One of the Lamas, a huge guy in a flashy red silk coat with gold embroidery on the collar, who had participated in the beating of Chanden Sing, told me I needed to say "my servant had shown me the way across Tibet, and he had created the maps and sketches." If I said this, they were ready to let me go and send me back to the border, promising not to cause me any more harm. They would just execute my servant, but I wouldn’t suffer any personal injury. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

I explained clearly to the Lamas that I alone was responsible for the maps and sketches, and for finding my way so far inland. I repeated several times, slowly and distinctly, that my servant was innocent, and that therefore there was no reason to punish him. He had only obeyed my orders in following me to Tibet, and I alone, not my two servants, was to be punished if anybody was punishable.

I clearly explained to the Lamas that I was solely responsible for the maps and sketches, and for making my way so far inland. I repeated several times, slowly and distinctly, that my servant was innocent, and there was no reason to punish him. He had only followed my orders by coming with me to Tibet, and I was the only one who should be punished if anyone deserved it, not my two servants.

The Lamas were angry at this, and one of them struck me violently on the head with the butt-end of his riding-crop. I pretended not to notice it, though it made my scalp ache and smart.

The Lamas were furious about this, and one of them hit me hard on the head with the end of his riding crop. I acted like I didn’t feel it, even though it made my scalp throb and sting.

Soldier with Pigtail wound round his Head

Soldier with Pigtail Wrapped Around His Head


"Then we shall beat you and your man until you say what we want," the Lama exclaimed angrily.

"Then we'll beat you and your guy until you tell us what we want," the Lama shouted angrily.

"You can beat us if you like," I replied with assurance, "but if you punish us unjustly it will go against yourselves. You can tear our skin off, and you can make us bleed to death, but you cannot make us feel pain."

"You can hurt us if you want," I said confidently, "but if you punish us unfairly, it will backfire on you. You can strip our skin away and make us bleed out, but you can't make us feel pain."

Ando, the traitor, who spoke Hindustani fluently, acted as interpreter whenever there was a hitch in our Tibetan conversation, and with what I knew of the language, and with this man's help, everything was explained to the Tibetans as clearly as possible. Notwithstanding this, they continued mercilessly to lash my poor servant, who, in his agony, was biting the ground as each blow fell on him and tore away patches of skin and flesh. Chanden Sing behaved [376] heroically. Not a word of complaint, nor a prayer for mercy, came from his lips. He said that he had spoken the truth and had nothing more to say. Watched intently by all the Lamas and soldiers, I sat with affected stoicism before this scene of cruelty, until, angry at my phlegm, order was given to the soldiers that I should be dragged away. Again they led me behind the mud-house, from where I could distinctly hear the angry cries of the Lamas cross-examining Chanden Sing, and those dreadful sounds of the lash still being administered.

Ando, the traitor, who spoke Hindustani fluently, acted as an interpreter whenever there was a problem with our Tibetan conversation. With my understanding of the language and his help, we made sure everything was explained to the Tibetans as clearly as possible. Still, they continued to mercilessly whip my poor servant, who, in his pain, was biting the ground as each blow landed on him, ripping away pieces of skin and flesh. Chanden Sing acted heroically. Not a single complaint or plea for mercy escaped his lips. He said he had told the truth and had nothing more to add. Watched closely by all the Lamas and soldiers, I sat there with affected calmness during this cruel scene, until, frustrated by my indifference, they ordered the soldiers to drag me away. Once again, they took me behind the mud house, from where I could clearly hear the angry shouts of the Lamas interrogating Chanden Sing, along with the horrifying sounds of the whip still being used.

It began to rain heavily, and this was a bit of luck for us, for in Tibet, as in China, a shower has a great effect upon the people, and even massacres have been known to be put a stop to until the rain should cease.

It started raining heavily, and this was somewhat lucky for us, because in Tibet, as in China, a downpour greatly affects the people, and there have even been instances where massacres were halted until the rain stopped.

Such was the case that day. The moment the first drops fell, the soldiers and Lamas rushed here, there, and everywhere inside the tents, and I was hastily dragged to the most distant tent of the settlement, which became packed with the guards into whose charge I had been given.

Such was the case that day. The moment the first drops fell, the soldiers and Lamas rushed everywhere inside the tents, and I was quickly pulled to the farthest tent of the settlement, which filled up with the guards who were in charge of me.

An Officer

An officer


[377]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXVIII

A high military officer—A likely friend—A soldier and not a Lama—His sympathy—Facts about the Tibetan army.
Purse
Purse

An officer of high rank was sitting cross-legged at the farther end of the tent. He wore a handsome dark red gown trimmed with gold and leopard skin, and was shod with tall black and red leather boots of Chinese shape. A beautiful sword with solid silver sheath inlaid with large pieces of coral and malachite was passed through his belt.

An officer of high rank was sitting cross-legged at the far end of the tent. He wore a stylish dark red robe trimmed with gold and leopard skin, and he had on tall black and red leather boots in a Chinese style. A stunning sword with a solid silver sheath inlaid with large pieces of coral and malachite was tucked into his belt.

Flint and Steel
Flint and Steel

This man, apparently between fifty and sixty years of age, had an intelligent, refined, honest, good-natured face; and somehow or other I felt from the very first moment I saw him that he would be a friend. And, indeed, whereas the soldiers and Lamas treated me with brutality and took every mean advantage that they could, this officer was alone in showing some deference to me and some appreciation of my behaviour. He made room by his side and signed that I might sit there.

This man, who looked to be in his fifties or sixties, had a smart, polished, honest, and kind face. From the moment I first laid eyes on him, I sensed he would be a friend. While the soldiers and Lamas treated me harshly and exploited every small opportunity to belittle me, this officer stood out as the only one who treated me with respect and recognized my behavior. He made space for me next to him and gestured for me to sit there.

Snuff-box
Snuff-box

"I am a soldier," said he in a dignified tone, "not a Lama. I have come from Lhassa with my men to arrest you, and you are now our prisoner. But you have shown no fear, and I respect you."

"I am a soldier," he said with a dignified tone, "not a Lama. I came from Lhassa with my men to arrest you, and now you are our prisoner. But you haven’t shown any fear, and I respect you."

So saying, he inclined his head and laid his forehead touching mine, and pulled out his tongue. Then he made a gesture signifying that, though he wished to, he could not then say more, owing to the presence of the soldiers.

So saying, he leaned his head down and pressed his forehead against mine, then stuck out his tongue. He then gestured to indicate that, even though he wanted to, he couldn't say more at that moment because the soldiers were present.

Later on we entered into a most amicable conversation, in the course of which he said that he was a Rupun (a grade [378] below that of general). I tried to explain to him all about English soldiers and weapons, and he displayed the keenest interest in all I told him. In return he gave me interesting information about the soldiers of Tibet. Every man in Tibet is considered a soldier in time of war or when required to do duty, but for the regular army all lads that are strong and healthy can enlist from the age of seventeen, those deformed or weakly being rejected as unfit for service. Good horsemanship is one of the qualities most appreciated in the Tibetan soldier, and, after that, unbounded obedience. The Rupun swore by the Tibetan matchlocks, which he believed to be the most serviceable weapons on earth; for, according to him, as long as you had powder enough, you could use anything as a missile. Pebbles, earth, or nails did as good work as any lead bullet.

Later on, we got into a very friendly conversation, during which he mentioned that he was a Rupun (a rank one step below general). I tried to explain everything about English soldiers and weapons, and he showed great interest in what I was saying. In exchange, he shared some fascinating details about the soldiers of Tibet. Every man in Tibet is considered a soldier during wartime or when called upon, but to join the regular army, all young men who are strong and healthy can enlist starting at age seventeen, while those who are deformed or weak are rejected as unfit for service. Good horsemanship is highly valued in the Tibetan soldier, followed by unquestioning obedience. The Rupun was a firm believer in the effectiveness of Tibetan matchlocks, which he thought were the most reliable weapons on earth; according to him, as long as you had enough gunpowder, you could use anything as a projectile. Pebbles, dirt, or nails were just as effective as any lead bullet.

Flint-and-steel Pouch

Firestarter Pouch


He told me that large quantities of these weapons were manufactured at Lhassa and Sigatz (Shigatze), and he stated that the majority of Tibetan men outside the towns possess one. Gunpowder was also made with saltpetre and sulphur found in the country.

He told me that a lot of these weapons were made in Lhassa and Sigatz (Shigatze), and he said that most Tibetan men outside the towns have one. They also produced gunpowder using saltpetre and sulfur found in the area.

The Rupun, seeing how quick I was at picking up words, took a special delight in teaching me, as one would a child, the names of the several grades in the Tibetan army. The Tchu-pun[29] was the lowest grade, and only had ten men under him; then came the Kiatsamba-pun or Kia-pun,[30] or officer in command of one hundred soldiers; and the Tung-pun,[31] or head of one thousand. These officers, however, are seldom allowed the full complement of soldiers according to their grade, and very often the "commander of one thousand" has only under him three or four hundred men at the most. Above the Tung-pun comes the Rupun, a kind of adjutant-general; then the Dah-pun, or great officer; and highest of all, the Mag-pun (or Mag-bun, as it is usually pronounced), the general in chief.

The Rupun, noticing how quickly I picked up words, took special pleasure in teaching me, as one might a child, the names of the different ranks in the Tibetan army. The Tchu-pun[29] was the lowest rank, and he only had ten men under him; then came the Kiatsamba-pun or Kia-pun,[30] the officer in charge of one hundred soldiers; and the Tung-pun,[31] the head of one thousand. However, these officers are rarely given the full number of soldiers for their rank, and often the "commander of one thousand" only has three or four hundred men at most under his command. Above the Tung-pun is the Rupun, a sort of adjutant-general; then the Dah-pun, or high officer; and at the top of the hierarchy is the Mag-pun (or Mag-bun, as it’s commonly pronounced), the general in chief.

The acquaintance of one of these generals we had already made at Gyanema. Though my informant said that officers [379] are elected for their bravery in time of war and for their strength and aptitude in the saddle and with their weapons, I knew well enough that such was not the case. The posts are mainly given to whoever can afford to pay most for them, and to men of families under special protection of the Lamas. In many cases they are actually sold by auction.

We had already met one of these generals at Gyanema. While my source claimed that officers are chosen for their bravery during wartime and for their skills in riding and fighting, I knew that wasn't true. The positions are mostly given to those who can pay the most for them and to individuals from families who have special protection from the Lamas. In many instances, they are actually sold at auction.

Leather Horse-whip

Leather riding whip


The method described by the Rupun was nevertheless what is popularly believed by the masses of Tibet to be the way in which military officers are chosen.

The method described by the Rupun is still what most people in Tibet believe is how military officers are chosen.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[29] Tchu, ten, pun, officer, or officer of ten men.

[29] Tchu, ten, pun, officer, or a leader of ten men.

[30] Kiatsamba or Kia = one hundred.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Kiatsamba or Kia = 100.

[31] Tung = one thousand.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Tung = 1,000.


[380]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXIX

Sarcasm appreciated—Kindness—A change for the worse—The place for an Englishman—Vermin—A Tibetan prayer.

The Rupun possessed a good deal of dry humour, and I told him how fast the Tibetan soldiers had run away on previous occasions when I had met them and had my rifle by me. But he was quite equal to the situation and exclaimed: "Yes, I know that they ran, but it was not through fear. It was because they did not wish to hurt you." Upon which I answered that, if that were the case, they need not have run so fast.

The Rupun had a great sense of dry humor, and I shared how quickly the Tibetan soldiers had fled during our past encounters when I had my rifle with me. But he handled it well and replied, "Yes, I know they ran, but it wasn't out of fear. They just didn't want to hurt you." To which I responded, if that was true, they really didn't need to run so fast.

The Rupun seemed amused and laughed at my sarcasm. He patted me on the back and said I was right. He professed to be grieved to see me tied up, and said he had received strict orders not to give me food or unloose my bonds.

The Rupun seemed entertained and laughed at my sarcasm. He patted me on the back and said I was right. He claimed to be upset to see me tied up and said he had received strict orders not to give me food or loosen my bonds.

Charm-box

Charm box


The soldiers, who had been listening open-mouthed to the affable and friendly conversation between the Rupun and myself, a practice not common in Tibet between captor and prisoner, followed their chief's example, and from being harsh and rough, turned quite kindly and respectful. They placed a cushion under me and tried to make me as comfortable as they could in the circumstances.

The soldiers, who had been listening with wide eyes to the friendly conversation between the Rupun and me—a situation not typical in Tibet between captor and prisoner—mirrored their leader's attitude and shifted from being tough and rough to surprisingly kind and respectful. They put a cushion under me and did their best to make me comfortable given the circumstances.

[381]Towards the evening, however, the Rupun was summoned before the Pombo, and the guard was relieved by a fresh lot of men. This was a change for the worse. Their manner was extremely rough, and they dragged me away from the dignified seat I had occupied in the place of honour in the tent, and knocked me violently down on a heap of dung which they used for fuel.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]As evening approached, the Rupun was called in front of the Pombo, and a new group of guards took over. This shift made things worse. They were very aggressive and forcefully pulled me away from the respectable spot I had held at the front of the tent, throwing me harshly onto a pile of dung they used for fuel.

"That is the place for plenkis!" shouted one of the men, "not in the best part of the tent."

"That’s the spot for plenkis!" shouted one of the men, "not in the prime section of the tent."

They pounced upon me roughly, and though I made no resistance whatever, they again tied my feet together, and another rope was fastened round my knees. The ends of these ropes were left long, and each was given in charge of a soldier.

They jumped on me aggressively, and even though I didn’t resist at all, they tied my feet together again and fastened another rope around my knees. The ends of these ropes were left long, and each was handed over to a soldier.

No part of a Tibetan tent is over clean, but the spot where I was to rest for the night was the dirtiest. Bound so tightly that the ropes cut channels in my flesh, it was out of the question to sleep; but tenfold worse than this was the disgusting fact that I soon got covered with vermin, which swarmed in the tent. From this time till the end of my captivity, or twenty-five days later, I suffered unspeakable tortures from this pest. The guards, with their swords drawn, were all round me inside the tent, and others were posted outside.

No part of a Tibetan tent is very clean, but the spot where I was meant to sleep for the night was the dirtiest. The ropes were tied so tightly that they cut into my skin, making it impossible to sleep; but what was even worse was the disgusting fact that I quickly got covered with bugs that swarmed in the tent. From that moment until the end of my captivity, which was twenty-five days later, I endured unimaginable torment from this pest. The guards, with their swords drawn, surrounded me inside the tent, while others stood outside.

The night was full of strange events. Shouts could be heard at intervals from a distance outside, and some one of the guard in the tent answered them. They were to keep the men awake and make sure that I was still there. One of the soldiers in the tent revolved his prayer-wheel, muttering the following prayer so often that I learned it by heart:

The night was packed with unusual happenings. Every so often, shouts echoed from afar outside, and one of the guards in the tent responded. Their job was to keep the soldiers alert and ensure I was still present. One of the soldiers in the tent turned his prayer wheel, whispering a prayer so frequently that I memorized it:

Sangbo, sangbo Yabni namla dupchenché Yumni is locked up Lashin shukpi Kani san Pashin tagpe Kani san Yulo parba palui san Tumlo parba wumboi san Lassan lussan tamjeh san
Chedan Kordan is alive Takpeh yeiki polloh san Takpeh yonki molloh san Tzurzu Kaghi Tablah san Arah, Banza, Nattittí Jehmi fights for justice.

The almost literal translation of the words is this:

The almost literal translation of the words is this:

[382]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Oh my God, I confess That my father has gone to heaven,
But my mother is currently alive (lit. in the house).
First my mom sinned And you brought all people to heaven,
Then my mom and dad sinned, and I will go to heaven.
If all the other men and I sin, and we confess our sins,
We are all prone to sin, and the wumboo wood cleanses us from all sins. On the northwest (Lassan) and southeast (Lussan) are the two
ways to heaven.
I read the sacred text and cleanse myself,
My arm bone__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ is the sacred bone (literally, God's bone).
And the mark of manhood is my left arm.
Oh my God, you who are above me,
And at the holy Kujernath, Banzah and Nattittí, I pray every day for health and prosperity (money and riches).

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[32] The Tibetans believe that in men the left, and in women the right, arm belongs to God. They regard it as sacred, because with this arm food is conveyed to the mouth, thus giving life to the body, and also because it is with the arms that one can defend oneself against one's enemies. The bone of the nose is also regarded as sacred.

[32] The Tibetans believe that in men, the left arm, and in women, the right arm, belongs to God. They see it as sacred because food is brought to the mouth with this arm, giving life to the body, and because it’s with the arms that one can defend against enemies. The bone in the nose is also considered sacred.


[383]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXX

The Rupun as a friend—Treated with respect and deference—Fed by the Rupun and soldiers—Improving my knowledge of Tibetan.
Puku, or Wooden Cup
Puku, or Wooden Cup

In the middle of the night the Rupun returned. I noticed he seemed very much upset. He sat by my side, and by the light of the flickering fire and a wick burning in a brass bowl filled with butter, I could see in his face an expression of great anxiety. I felt, by the compassionate way in which he looked at me, that he had grave news to give me. I was not mistaken. He moved me from the pestilent place where I had been thrown down helpless by the soldiers, and laid me in a more comfortable and cleaner part of the tent. Then he ordered a soldier to bring me a blanket. Next, to my astonishment, he became very severe, and said he must examine my bonds. He turned quite angry, scolding the soldiers for leaving me so insecurely tied, and proceeded to make the knots firmer, a thing which I felt was impossible. Though he pretended to use all his strength in doing this, I found, much to my amazement, that my bonds were really becoming loosened. He then quickly covered me up with the heavy blanket.

In the middle of the night, the Rupun returned. I noticed he looked very upset. He sat next to me, and by the flickering fire and a wick burning in a brass bowl filled with butter, I could see a look of deep anxiety on his face. I could tell from the way he compassionately looked at me that he had serious news to share. I wasn’t wrong. He moved me from the filthy spot where the soldiers had thrown me down helpless and placed me in a more comfortable and cleaner part of the tent. Then he told a soldier to bring me a blanket. To my surprise, he suddenly became very serious and said he needed to check my restraints. He got quite angry, scolding the soldiers for leaving me so loosely tied, and started tightening the knots, something I thought was impossible. Even though he pretended to be using all his strength, I was amazed to find that my bonds were actually starting to loosen. He then quickly covered me up with the heavy blanket.

Puku, or Wooden Cup
Puku, or Wooden Cup

The soldiers were at the other end of the large tent, and seemed occupied with a loud argument over some paltry matter. The Rupun, stooping low, and making pretence to tuck me in the blanket, whispered:

The soldiers were at the far end of the large tent, clearly engaged in a loud argument about something trivial. The Rupun, bending down and pretending to tuck me into the blanket, whispered:

"Your head is to be cut off to-morrow. Escape to-night. There are no soldiers outside."

"Your head will be chopped off tomorrow. Escape tonight. There are no soldiers outside."

The good man was actually preparing everything for my flight. He put out the light, and came to sleep by my side. [384] It would have been comparatively easy, when all the men had fallen asleep, to slip from under the tent and steal away. I had got my hands easily out of the ropes, and should have had no difficulty in undoing all my other bonds; but the thought that I should be leaving my two men at the mercy of the Tibetans prevented my carrying the escape into effect. The Rupun, having risen to see that the guard were asleep, lay down again close to me and murmured:

The good man was actually getting everything ready for my flight. He turned off the light and came to sleep beside me. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] It would have been fairly easy, once all the men had fallen asleep, to slip out from under the tent and make my getaway. I had easily gotten my hands free from the ropes and would have had no trouble undoing the rest of my bindings; but the thought of leaving my two men at the mercy of the Tibetans stopped me from going through with the escape. The Rupun, having gotten up to check that the guards were asleep, lay back down close to me and murmured:

"Nelon, nelon; paladǒ" ("They are asleep; go").

"Nelon, nelon; paladǒ" ("They are asleep; go").

Well meant and tempting as the offer was, I told him I must stay with my men.

Well-meaning and tempting as the offer was, I told him I had to stay with my crew.

Having my hands free, I managed to sleep a little during the night; and when the morning came I slipped my hands again inside the ropes.

Having my hands free, I was able to sleep a bit during the night; and when morning came, I slipped my hands back inside the ropes.

The Rupun, who seemed much disappointed, tied the ropes round my wrists firmly again, and, though he appeared rather vexed at my not having availed myself of the chance of flight he had given me, he treated me with ever-increasing respect and deference. He even produced his puku (wooden bowl), which he filled with steaming tea from the raksang,[33] and lifted it up to my mouth for me to drink.

The Rupun, looking quite disappointed, tied the ropes around my wrists tightly again. Even though he seemed annoyed that I hadn’t taken the chance to escape he had offered, he treated me with more and more respect and courtesy. He even brought out his puku (wooden bowl), filled it with steaming tea from the raksang,[33] and lifted it to my mouth for me to drink.

On perceiving how thirsty and hungry I was, not only did this good man refill the cup time after time until my thirst was quenched, but he mixed with it tsamba, and lumps of butter, which he then stuffed into my mouth with his fingers.

On seeing how thirsty and hungry I was, this kind man not only filled my cup over and over until my thirst was satisfied, but he also mixed in tsamba and chunks of butter, which he then stuffed into my mouth with his fingers.

It was really touching to see how, moved to kindness, the soldiers imitated his example, and, one after the other, produced handfuls of tsamba and chura, and deposited them in my mouth. Their hands, it is true, were not over clean, but on such occasions it does not do to be too particular, and I was so hungry that the food they gave me seemed delicious. I had been for two nights and one day without food, and, what with the exertion of the fight and my various exciting experiences, my appetite was very keen.

It was really touching to see how, inspired by kindness, the soldiers followed his lead and one by one handed me handfuls of tsamba and chura, placing them in my mouth. Their hands, it’s true, weren't exactly clean, but during moments like this, you can’t be too picky, and I was so hungry that the food they gave me tasted amazing. I had gone two nights and a day without food, and with the physical effort from the fight and all my thrilling experiences, my appetite was really strong.

This great politeness, however, and the sympathy with which not only the Rupun, but even the soldiers treated me now, made me suspect that my end was indeed near. I was grieved not to be able to obtain news of Chanden Sing and Mansing; and the soldiers' reticence in answering questions regarding them made me fear that something awful had [385] happened. Nevertheless, though my gaolers were friendly, I did not betray any anxiety, but pretended to take all that came as a matter of course. I spent the first portion of the day in a lively conversation with the soldiers, partly to divert my thoughts and partly to improve my knowledge of Tibetan.

This extreme politeness, along with the sympathy that not just the Rupun but even the soldiers showed me now, made me think that my end was truly near. I was saddened that I couldn’t get any news about Chanden Sing and Mansing; the soldiers’ reluctance to answer questions about them made me worry that something terrible had happened. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Still, even though my guards were friendly, I didn’t show any anxiety and pretended to take everything in stride. I spent the first part of the day having a lively conversation with the soldiers, partly to distract myself and partly to enhance my understanding of Tibetan.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[33] Raksang, a vessel in which tea mixed with butter and salt is kept boiling over the fire.

[33] Raksang, a container that keeps tea mixed with butter and salt boiling over the heat.


[386]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXXI

A bearer of bad news—Marched off to the mud-house—Mansing—Insults and humiliations—Iron handcuffs instead of ropes—The Rupun's sympathy—No more hope—In the hands of the mob.

Early in the afternoon a soldier entered the tent, and striking me on the shoulder with his heavy hand, shouted:

Early in the afternoon a soldier entered the tent, and gave me a hard slap on the shoulder, shouting:

"Ohe!" (This is a Tibetan exclamation always used by the rougher classes when beginning a conversation. It corresponds to "Look here.")

"Ohe!" (This is a Tibetan exclamation commonly used by the rougher classes when starting a conversation. It translates to "Look here.")

"Ohe!" repeated he; "before the sun goes down you will be flogged, both your legs will be broken,[34] they will burn out your eyes, and then they will cut off your head!"

"Ohe!" he repeated; "before the sun sets, you will be whipped, both your legs will be broken,[34] they will burn out your eyes, and then they will chop off your head!"

The man, who seemed quite in earnest, accompanied each sentence with an appropriate gesture illustrating his words. I laughed at him and affected to treat the whole thing as a joke, partly because I thought this was the best way to frighten them and prevent them from using violence, and partly because the programme thus laid before me seemed so extensive that I thought it could only be intended to intimidate me.

The man, who looked really serious, backed up each sentence with a fitting gesture that illustrated his words. I laughed at him and pretended to treat the whole situation as a joke, partly because I thought this was the best approach to scare them off and keep them from being violent, and partly because the plan he presented seemed so vast that I figured it could only be meant to intimidate me.

However, the words of the soldier cast a gloom over my friendly guard in the tent, and when I tried to cheer them up, they answered bluntly that I would not laugh for very long. Something was certainly happening, for the men rushed in and out of the tent, and whispered among themselves. When I spoke to them they would answer no more, and on my insisting, they made signs that their lips must from now be closed.

However, the soldier's words cast a shadow over my friendly guard in the tent, and when I tried to lift their spirits, they bluntly told me I wouldn’t be laughing for long. Something was definitely going on, as the men hurried in and out of the tent, whispering among themselves. When I tried to talk to them, they stopped responding, and when I pressed them, they gestured that their lips had to remain sealed from now on.

About half an hour later, another person rushed into the tent in a great state of excitement, and signalled to my [387] guards to lead me out. This they did, after making my bonds tighter than ever, and placing extra ropes round my chest and arms. In this fashion I was marched off to the mud-house and led into one of the rooms. A large number of soldiers and villagers assembled outside, and after we had waited some time, Mansing, tightly bound, was brought into the same room. My pleasure at seeing my man again was so great, that I forgot all about what was happening, and paid no attention to the insults of the mob peeping through the door. After a while a Lama came in with a smiling face and said he had good news to give me.

About half an hour later, someone rushed into the tent, clearly very excited, and signaled to my guards to take me out. They did so, tightening my bonds even more and adding extra ropes around my chest and arms. This is how I was taken to the mud house and led into one of the rooms. A large crowd of soldiers and villagers gathered outside, and after we waited for a while, Mansing, tightly bound, was brought into the same room. I was so thrilled to see him again that I forgot everything else and ignored the taunts of the crowd peeking through the door. After a bit, a Lama came in with a smile and said he had good news for me.

"We have ponies here," he said, "and we are going to take you back to the frontier, but the Pombo wishes to see you first to-day. Do not make any resistance. Let us exchange the ropes round your wrists for these iron handcuffs."

"We have ponies here," he said, "and we're going to take you back to the frontier, but the Pombo wants to see you first today. Don't resist. Let's swap the ropes around your wrists for these iron handcuffs."

Soldier laying before me the Programme of Tortures

Soldier lying in front of me with the Torture Program


Here he produced a heavy pair of them, which he had kept concealed under his coat.

Here he pulled out a heavy pair of them, which he had kept hidden under his coat.

"You will not wear them for more than a few moments while we are leading you to his presence. Then you will be free. We swear to you by the Sun and Kunjuk-Sum that we will treat you kindly."

"You won’t have them on for more than a few minutes while we take you to see him. After that, you’ll be free. We swear to you by the Sun and Kunjuk-Sum that we will treat you well."

I promised not to resist, chiefly because I had no chance of doing so. For greater safety they tied my legs and placed a sliding knot round my neck; then I was carried out into the open, where a ring of soldiers with drawn swords stood round me. While I lay flat on my face on the ground, held [388] down firmly, they unwound the ropes from around my wrists, and the iron fetters, joined by a heavy chain, were substituted for them. They took some time in fastening the clumsy padlock, after which, all being ready, they unbound my legs.

I promised not to resist, mainly because I knew I couldn't. For extra safety, they tied my legs and put a sliding knot around my neck; then I was taken out into the open, where a circle of soldiers with their swords drawn stood around me. While I lay flat on my face on the ground, held down firmly, they unwound the ropes from my wrists, and heavy iron shackles connected by a thick chain were put in their place. It took them a while to secure the bulky padlock, and once everything was set, they untied my legs.

They made me stand up again, and knowing that I could not possibly get my hands free, they began to load me with insults and offensive terms, not directed to me as an individual, but as a Plenki, an Englishman. They spat upon me and threw mud at me. The Lamas behaved worse than any of the others, and the one who had sworn that I should be in no way ill-used if I would submit quietly to be handcuffed was the most prominent among my tormentors and the keenest in urging the crowd on to further brutality.

They made me stand up again, and knowing that I couldn’t possibly get my hands free, they started hurling insults and offensive names at me, not as a person, but as a Plenki, an Englishman. They spat on me and threw mud at me. The Lamas acted worse than anyone else, and the one who had promised that I wouldn’t be mistreated if I quietly allowed myself to be handcuffed was the most prominent among my tormentors and the most eager in encouraging the crowd to be even more brutal.

My Handcuffs

My Handcuffs


Suddenly the attention of the crowd was drawn to the approach of the Rupun with a number of soldiers and officers. He seemed depressed, and his face was of a ghastly yellowish tint. He kept his eyes fixed on the ground, and, speaking very low, ordered that I should again be conveyed inside the mud-house.

Suddenly, the crowd's attention turned to the approach of the Rupun, accompanied by several soldiers and officers. He appeared downcast, and his face had a sickly yellowish hue. He kept his gaze focused on the ground and, speaking in a very quiet voice, instructed that I should be taken back inside the mud house.

A few moments later he came in and closed the door after him, having first cleared the room of all the people who were in it. As I have mentioned before, Tibetan structures of this kind have a square aperture in the ceiling by which they are ventilated and lighted.

A few moments later, he walked in and closed the door behind him after clearing the room of everyone else. As I mentioned earlier, Tibetan buildings like this have a square opening in the ceiling for ventilation and light.

The Rupun laid his forehead upon mine in sign of compassion, and then sadly shook his head.

The Rupun rested his forehead against mine as a gesture of sympathy, and then shook his head sadly.

[389] "There is no more hope," he whispered; "your head will be cut off to-night. The Lamas are bad and my heart is aching. You are like my brother, and I am grieved...."

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] "There’s no hope left," he whispered; "they’re going to execute you tonight. The Lamas are cruel, and it hurts me to say this. You’re like my brother, and I’m really sad...."

The good old man tried not to let me see his emotion, and made signs that he could stay no longer, lest he should be accused of being my friend.

The old man tried to hide his feelings from me and signaled that he couldn’t stay any longer, afraid of being seen as my friend.

The mob again entered the room, and I was once more dragged out into the open by the Lamas and soldiers. Some discussion followed as to who should keep the key of my handcuffs, and eventually it was handed over to one of the officers, who mounted his pony and rode away at a great rate in the direction of Lhassa.

The mob came back into the room, and once again, the Lamas and soldiers pulled me out into the open. There was some discussion about who should hold the key to my handcuffs, and eventually, it was given to one of the officers, who got on his pony and rode off quickly towards Lhassa.

Padlock and Key

Lock and Key


FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[34] A form of torture in which, after placing the legs upon two parallel logs of wood, a heavy blow is given with a mallet, fracturing both legs.

[34] A type of torture where the legs are placed on two parallel wooden logs and then struck hard with a hammer, breaking both legs.


[390]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXXII

A pitiful scene—A struggle to get to Chanden Sing—Brutally treated—A torturing saddle—Across country at a gallop—A spirited pony—Sand deposits and hills—Speculation—More horsemen coming towards us.

Just then I heard the voice of my servant Chanden Sing calling to me in a weak agonised tone:

Just then I heard my servant Chanden Sing calling me in a weak, anguished voice:

"Hazur, Hazur, hum murgiaega!" ("Sir, sir, I am dying!") and, turning my head in the direction from which these painful sounds came, I perceived my faithful bearer with his hands bound behind his back, dragging himself on his stomach towards the door of one of the other rooms of the mud-house. His poor face was hardly recognisable, it bore the traces of such awful suffering.

"Sir, sir, I am dying!" and, turning my head toward the source of these painful sounds, I saw my loyal bearer with his hands tied behind his back, pulling himself along the floor toward the door of one of the other rooms in the mud house. His poor face was barely recognizable; it showed signs of such profound suffering.

I could stand no more. Pushing my guards aside with my shoulders, I endeavoured to get to the poor wretch, and had nearly reached him when the soldiers who stood by sprang upon me, grappling me, and lifting me bodily off my feet. They threw me on the back of a pony.

I couldn't take it anymore. Shoving my guards aside with my shoulders, I tried to get to the poor guy, and I was almost there when the soldiers nearby jumped on me, grabbing me and lifting me off my feet. They tossed me onto the back of a pony.

Though I now feared the worst, I tried to encourage my brave servant by shouting to him that I was being taken to Taklakot, and that he would be brought after me the following day. He had exhausted his last atom of strength in creeping to the door. He was roughly seized, and brutally hurled back into the room of the mud-house, so that we could not exchange a word more. Mansing, the coolie, was placed, with his arms pinioned, on a bare-backed pony. The saddle of the pony I had been thrown upon is worthy of description. It was in reality the wooden frame of a very high-backed saddle, from the back of which some five or six sharp iron spikes stuck out horizontally. As I sat on this implement of torture, the spikes caught me in the small of my back.

Though I was now terrified about what was coming, I tried to reassure my brave servant by yelling to him that I was being taken to Taklakot, and he would be brought after me the next day. He had used up all his strength to crawl to the door. He was roughly grabbed and brutally thrown back into the room of the mud house, so we couldn’t exchange another word. Mansing, the coolie, was tied up and placed on a bare-backed pony. The saddle of the pony I had been thrown onto is worth mentioning. It was actually the wooden frame of a very high-backed saddle, from the back of which about five or six sharp iron spikes stuck out horizontally. As I sat on this torture device, the spikes dug into the small of my back.

[391]My guard having been augmented by twenty or thirty mounted men with muskets and swords, we set off at a furious pace. A horseman riding in front of me led my pony by means of a cord, as my hands were manacled behind my back; and thus we travelled across country for miles.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]With my guard increased by twenty or thirty mounted soldiers armed with muskets and swords, we took off at breakneck speed. A rider in front of me held my pony by a cord since my hands were shackled behind my back, and we traveled across the countryside for miles.

"Sir, sir, I am Dying"

"Sir, I’m dying."


But for those awful spikes in the saddle, the ride would not have been so very bad, for the pony I rode was a fine spirited animal, and the country around was curious and interesting. We proceeded along an apparently endless succession of yellow sandhills, some of them as high as two or three hundred feet, others not more than twenty or thirty. The sand seemed to have been deposited more by wind than by water, though it is also possible that the whole basin, not very high above the level of the huge stream, may at some time have been altogether under water. The whole space between the mountain-range to the North of the Brahmaputra and the river itself was covered with these sand mounds, except in certain places where the soil was extremely marshy, and where our ponies sank in deep soft mud. We splashed across several rivulets and skirted a number of ponds. From the summit of a hill to which they led me, I could see that the hills were of much greater circumference and height near the river edge, becoming [392] smaller and smaller as they approached the mountain-range to the North. Moreover, they increased in number and size the farther we went in an easterly direction.

But if it weren't for those terrible bumps in the saddle, the ride wouldn't have been so bad, because the pony I was riding was a really spirited animal, and the surrounding landscape was fascinating and interesting. We moved along what seemed like an endless series of yellow sandhills, some as tall as two or three hundred feet, and others only about twenty or thirty. The sand appeared to have been deposited more by the wind than by water, although it's also possible that the entire area, not very high above the level of the massive river, might have been completely underwater at some point. The whole stretch between the mountain range to the north of the Brahmaputra and the river itself was covered with these sand mounds, except in certain spots where the soil was really marshy, and where our ponies sunk into deep, soft mud. We splashed through several small streams and went around a number of ponds. From the top of a hill they took me to, I could see that the hills were much larger and taller near the riverbank, getting smaller and smaller as they moved towards the mountain range to the north. Additionally, they increased in number and size the farther we traveled to the east.

Spiked Saddle

Spiked Saddle


The circumstances under which I was now travelling did not permit me to ascertain the quality of the sand, or make any accurate investigations as to where the sand came from, but a glance at the country all round made me feel sure that the sand had been conveyed there from the South. This one could plainly see from depressions and wavelike undulations, showing that it had travelled (roughly) in a northerly direction; and although, having been unable to ascertain this for a fact, I do not wish to be too certain with regard to the movements and sources of these sand deposits, I was pretty firmly convinced that the sand had been deposited there by the wind, which had carried it over the Himahlyan chain from the plains of India.

The conditions I was traveling in didn’t allow me to figure out the quality of the sand or conduct any thorough investigations about its origin, but a quick look at the surrounding area convinced me that the sand had come from the South. You could clearly see this from the dips and wavy shapes in the land, which indicated that it had moved (more or less) northward. Even though I couldn't confirm this fact, I didn’t want to be too definitive about the movement and sources of these sand deposits. Still, I was quite convinced that the wind had carried the sand over the Himalayan mountains from the plains of India.

My guard scoured the country from the high point of vantage to which we had ascended. Away in the distance to the East, we saw a large number of horsemen raising clouds of dust; and, riding down the hill, the ponies sinking in the soft sand, we set off in the direction of the new comers, the surface at the bottom of the hill being more compact and harder.

My guard scanned the landscape from the high point we had climbed. In the distance to the East, we spotted a large group of horsemen kicking up dust; so, we rode down the hill, with the ponies struggling in the soft sand. We headed towards the newcomers, as the ground at the bottom of the hill was more solid and stable.


[393]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXXIII

At an unpleasant pace—Drawing near the cavalcade—A picturesque sight—A shot fired at me—Terrible effects of the spikes along my spine—The rope breaks—An ill omen—A second shot misses me—Arrows—The end of my terrible ride.

We travelled mile after mile at an unpleasant pace, until we arrived at a spot where, drawn up in a line, was the cavalcade we had seen from the summit of the hill. It was a beautiful sight as we approached it, though the pain which I was undergoing rather detracted from the pleasure I should otherwise have taken in the picturesque scene. There were about a hundred red Lamas in the centre, with banner-men whose heads were covered by peculiar flat fluffy hats, and the same number of soldiers and officers in their grey, red and black tunics; some two hundred horsemen in all.

We traveled mile after mile at a slow, uncomfortable pace until we reached a spot where the caravan we had seen from the top of the hill was lined up. It was a stunning sight as we got closer, although the pain I was feeling somewhat took away from the enjoyment I would have otherwise experienced in the picturesque scene. There were about a hundred red Lamas in the center, with banner bearers wearing unique flat, fluffy hats, as well as the same number of soldiers and officers in their gray, red, and black uniforms; a total of around two hundred horsemen.

The Pombo, in his yellow coat and trousers and his queer pointed hat, sat on a magnificent pony a little in front of the crowd of Lamas and soldiers.

The Pombo, in his yellow coat and pants and his strange pointed hat, sat on a stunning pony slightly ahead of the crowd of Lamas and soldiers.

Curiously enough, when close to this new crowd, the horseman who led my pony let go the rope, and the pony was lashed cruelly and left to its own devices. The soldiers of my guard reined up and drew aside. The pony dashed off in the direction of the Pombo and, as I passed close to him, a man named Nerba (private secretary of the Tokchim Tarjum), knelt down, and, taking aim with his matchlock resting on its prop, deliberately fired a shot at me.

Curiously enough, when we got near this new crowd, the horseman leading my pony let go of the rope, and the pony was cruelly whipped and left to fend for itself. My guard's soldiers pulled back and moved aside. The pony bolted off toward the Pombo, and as I passed by, a man named Nerba (private secretary of the Tokchim Tarjum) knelt down and, aiming his matchlock on its rest, deliberately fired a shot at me.

Although (I learned afterwards) this Nerba was one of the champion shots in the country, and the distance from the muzzle of his matchlock to me not more than four yards, the bullet missed me, whizzing past my left ear. Probably the speed at which my animal was proceeding saved me, as the marksman could not take a very steady aim; but my pony, startled at the sudden report of the matchlock at such [394] close quarters, took fright, and began rearing and plunging. I managed to maintain my seat, though the spikes in the saddle were lacerating the lower part of my spine terribly.

Although I learned later that this Nerba was one of the best shooters in the country, and the distance from the muzzle of his matchlock to me was no more than four yards, the bullet missed me, whizzing past my left ear. Probably the speed at which my horse was moving saved me because the marksman couldn’t aim very steadily; however, my pony, startled by the sudden gunshot at such close range, got scared and started to rear and buck. I managed to stay on, even though the spikes in the saddle were hurting the lower part of my spine terribly.

Nerba Firing at Me

Nerba Shooting at Me


Several horsemen now rode up and captured my pony, and preparations were made for another exciting number in the programme of my tortures. In their way these noble Lamas were of a sporting nature, but I swore to myself that, no matter what they did to me, I would not give them the satisfaction of seeing that they were hurting me. Acting on this principle, I pretended not to feel the effect of the spikes tearing the flesh off my backbone; and when they led me before the Pombo to show him how covered with blood I was, I expressed satisfaction at riding such an excellent pony. This seemed to puzzle them.

Several horse riders came up and took my pony, getting ready for another thrilling act in my series of torments. In their own way, these noble Lamas were a bit of a sport, but I promised myself that no matter what they did to me, I wouldn’t give them the satisfaction of knowing they were hurting me. Sticking to this idea, I pretended not to feel the spikes ripping into my back; and when they brought me before the Pombo to show him how bloody I was, I acted pleased to be riding such a great pony. This seemed to confuse them.

A cord of yak's hair, about forty or fifty yards long, was now produced, the swivel attached to one end of it fastened to my handcuffs, and the other end held by a horseman. We set off again on our wild career, this time followed not only by the guard, but by the Pombo and all his men. Once or twice I could not help turning round to see what they were about. The cavalcade was a weird and picturesque sight, the riders with their many-coloured dresses, their matchlocks with red flags, their jewelled swords, their banners with long ribbons of all colours

A length of yak hair rope, around forty or fifty yards long, was produced, with one end attached to my handcuffs and the other held by a horseman. We took off again on our wild journey, this time followed not only by the guards but also by the Pombo and all his men. A couple of times, I couldn’t help but look back to see what they were up to. The procession was a strange and striking sight, with the riders in their colorful outfits, their matchlocks flying red flags, their jeweled swords, and their banners with long ribbons of every color.

[395]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Ride on a Spiked Saddle

The Ride on a Spiked Saddle


[396] flying in the wind; all galloping furiously, shouting, yelling and hissing, amidst a deafening din of thousands of horse-bells.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] riding in the wind; all racing wildly, shouting, yelling, and hissing, surrounded by a loud noise of thousands of horse-bells.

In order to accelerate our speed, a horseman rode by my side lashing my pony to make it go its hardest. Meanwhile the horseman who held the cord did his utmost to pull me out of the saddle, no doubt in the hope of seeing me trampled to death by the cohort behind me. As I leaned my body forward so as to maintain my seat, and with my arms pulled violently backwards by the rope, the flesh was rubbed off my hands and knuckles by the chain of the handcuffs. In places the bone was exposed; and, of course, every tug brought me into forcible contact with the spikes and inflicted deeper wounds. The cord, though strong, eventually and unexpectedly gave way. The soldier who was pulling at the other end was clumsily unhorsed, and I myself was all but thrown by the unexpected jerk. This ludicrous incident at first provoked mirth among my escort, a mirth which their superstitious minds immediately turned into an ill omen.

To speed things up, a horseman rode next to me, whipping my pony to make it go faster. Meanwhile, the horseman holding the rope did everything he could to yank me out of the saddle, probably hoping to see me crushed by the group behind me. As I leaned forward to stay seated and my arms were yanked back by the rope, the skin on my hands and knuckles got scraped off by the handcuffs. In some spots, you could see the bone; and every pull slammed me against the spikes, causing deeper cuts. The rope, though strong, suddenly snapped. The soldier pulling on the other end fell off his horse awkwardly, and I almost got thrown off by the sudden jolt. This hilarious moment initially made my escort laugh, but their superstitious minds quickly turned it into a bad omen.

Coat I Wore at the Time of My Capture, and Showing Effect of Spikes

Coat I Wore When I Was Captured, and Showing the Effect of Spikes


When my pony was stopped, as well as the runaway steed of the dismounted cavalier, I took advantage of their fears, and assured them once more that whatever harm they tried to do me would go against themselves. However, the cord was retied with sundry strong knots, and, after an interruption of a few minutes, we resumed our breakneck gallop, I being again sent on in front.

When my pony stopped, along with the runaway horse of the dismounted rider, I took advantage of their fears and assured them again that any harm they tried to cause me would ultimately hurt them instead. However, the rope was tied again with several strong knots, and after a short break, we continued our wild gallop, with me being sent ahead once more.

Towards the end of our journey we had to go round the curve of a sandhill, the track between this and a large pond at its foot being very narrow. At this point I saw in front of me a soldier posted in ambush, with his matchlock ready to fire. The pony sank deep in the sand, and could not travel fast here, which I suppose was the reason why this spot had been selected. The man fired as I passed only a few paces from him; but, as luck would have it, this second attempt also left me untouched.

Towards the end of our journey, we had to go around the curve of a sandhill, with the path between it and a large pond at the bottom being very narrow. At that moment, I spotted a soldier hiding in ambush, his matchlock aimed to fire. The pony sank deep into the sand and couldn’t move quickly, which I guess was why this spot was chosen. The man fired as I passed just a few steps away from him, but luckily, this second attempt also left me unharmed.

[397] Getting clear of the soft sand, and finding harder ground, we resumed our headlong career. Several arrows were shot at me from behind; but, though some passed very near, not one struck me; and thus, after an interminable ride full of incident and excitement, we arrived, towards sunset, at our destination.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] After getting out of the soft sand and onto firmer ground, we picked up speed again. A few arrows were shot at me from behind; some came really close, but not a single one hit me. So, after what felt like an endless ride full of events and thrills, we finally reached our destination just before sunset.

On the crown of a hill stood a fortress and large lamasery, and at its foot, in front of another large structure, the Pombo's gaudy tent had been pitched. The name of this place, as far as I could afterwards ascertain, was Namj Laccé Galshio or Gyatsho.

On top of a hill stood a fortress and a big lamasery, and at its base, in front of another large building, the Pombo's colorful tent had been set up. The name of this place, as I could later find out, was Namj Laccé Galshio or Gyatsho.


[398]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXXIV

Intense pain—Hustled to the execution-ground—Stretched and tied—Thirsting for blood—A parade of torturing appliances—The music—The Taram.

A Display of Various Instruments of Torture

A Display of Different Torture Devices


Two or three men tore me roughly off the saddle. The pain in my spine caused by the spikes was intense. I asked for a moment's rest. My captors, however, refused, and, roughly thrusting me forward, said that I would be beheaded in an instant. All the people round jeered and made signs to me that my head would be cut off, and insults of all kinds were showered upon me by the crowd [399] of Lamas and soldiers. I was hustled to the execution-ground, which lay to the left front of the tent. On the ground was a long log of wood in the shape of a prism. Upon the sharp edge of this I was made to stand, and several men held me by the body while four or five others, using their combined strength, stretched my legs as wide apart as they could go. Fixed in this painful position, the brutes securely tied me by my feet to the log of wood with cords of yak-hair. Several men were made to pull these cords, and they were so tight that they cut grooves into my skin and flesh in several places round my ankles and on my feet, many of the cuts[35] being as much as three inches long.

Two or three men yanked me roughly off the saddle. The pain in my spine from the spikes was unbearable. I asked for a moment to catch my breath. My captors, however, refused and roughly shoved me forward, saying that I would be beheaded immediately. The crowd around me jeered and gestured that my head was going to be cut off, showering me with all sorts of insults from the crowd of Lamas and soldiers. I was pushed toward the execution ground, which was to the left front of the tent. On the ground was a long log of wood shaped like a prism. I was forced to stand on the sharp edge of this log while several men held my body, and four or five others stretched my legs apart as far as they could. In this painful position, the brutes tightly tied my feet to the log using yak-hair cords. Several men pulled these cords so tightly that they cut into my skin and flesh in several places around my ankles and feet, many of the cuts[35] being as long as three inches.

Lama Musicians

Lama Artists


When I was thus firmly bound, one ruffian, the man Nerba, whom I have mentioned before as having fired a shot at me, came forward and seized me from behind by the hair of my head. My hair was long, as it had not been cut for over five months.

When I was tied up like that, one thug, the guy Nerba, whom I mentioned earlier for shooting at me, stepped up and grabbed my hair from behind. My hair was long since I hadn't cut it in over five months.

The Hot Iron Torture

The Branding Iron Torture


The spectacle before me was overwhelming. By the Pombo's tent stood in a row the most villainous brutes I have ever set eyes upon. One, a powerful repulsive individual, held in his hand a great knobbed mallet used for fracturing bones; another carried a bow and arrows; a third [400] held a big two-handed sword; while others made a display of various ghastly instruments of torture. The crowd, thirsting for my blood, formed up in a semicircle, leaving room for me to see the parade of the torture implements that awaited me; and, as my eyes roamed from one figure to the other, the several Lamas shook their various implements to show that they were preparing for action.

The scene in front of me was intense. By Pombo's tent stood a row of the most menacing brutes I have ever seen. One, a huge and repulsive guy, held a hefty mallet used for smashing bones; another had a bow and arrows; a third[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] had a large two-handed sword; while others showcased various horrifying torture devices. The crowd, eager for my blood, formed a semicircle, clearing a space for me to see the lineup of torture tools that awaited me. As my eyes moved from one figure to another, several Lamas shook their tools to signal that they were ready to begin.

The Taram
The Taram

A group of three Lamas stood at the entrance of the tent. They were the musicians. One held a gigantic horn which, when blown, emitted hoarse, thundering sounds, and his companions had one a drum and the other cymbals. Another fellow some distance away continually sounded a huge gong. From the moment I was made to dismount the deafening sounds of the diabolical trio echoed all through the valley, and added to the horror of the scene.

A group of three Lamas stood at the entrance of the tent. They were the musicians. One held a gigantic horn that, when blown, made loud, booming sounds, while his companions had a drum and cymbals. Another guy some distance away continuously struck a huge gong. From the moment I was forced to dismount, the deafening sounds of the demonic trio echoed throughout the valley, adding to the horror of the scene.

An iron bar with a handle of wood bound in red cloth was being made red hot in a brasier. The Pombo, who had again placed something in his mouth to produce artificial foaming at the lips, and so to show his temper, worked himself up into a frenzy. A Lama handed him the implement of torture (the Taram), now red hot, and the Pombo seized it by the handle.

An iron bar with a wooden handle wrapped in red cloth was being heated in a brazier. The Pombo, who had once again put something in his mouth to create fake foam at the lips to display his anger, worked himself into a rage. A Lama handed him the red-hot torture device (the Taram), and the Pombo grabbed it by the handle.

"Ngaghi kin meh taxon!" ("We will burn out your eyes!") cried a chorus of Lamas.

"Ngaghi kin meh taxon!" ("We will burn out your eyes!") shouted a group of Lamas.

The Pombo strode up to me, brandishing the ghastly implement. I stared at him, but he kept his eyes away from me. He seemed reluctant, but the Lamas around him urged him on, lifting the man's arm towards me!

The Pombo walked up to me, waving the scary tool. I looked at him, but he wouldn’t meet my gaze. He seemed hesitant, but the Lamas surrounding him pushed him forward, raising his arm towards me!

"You have come to this country to see" (alluding to what I had stated the previous day, viz., that I was a traveller and pilgrim, and had only come to see the country). "This, then, is the punishment for you!" and with these dreadful words the Pombo raised his arm and placed the red-hot iron bar parallel to, and about an inch or two from, my eyeballs, and all but touching my nose.

"You've come to this country to see" (referring to what I said yesterday, that I was a traveler and pilgrim, here just to explore). "This is your punishment!" With those terrifying words, the Pombo raised his arm and held the red-hot iron bar parallel to, and just an inch or two from, my eyes, nearly touching my nose.

Instinctively I kept my eyes tightly closed, but the heat was so intense that it seemed as if my eyes, the left one especially, were being desiccated and my nose scorched.

Instinctively, I kept my eyes tightly closed, but the heat was so intense that it felt like my eyes, especially the left one, were drying out and my nose was burning.

Though the time seemed interminable, I do not think that the heated bar was before my eyes actually longer than thirty [401] seconds or so. Yet it was quite long enough, for, when I lifted my aching eyelids, I saw everything as in a red mist. My left eye was frightfully painful, and every few seconds it seemed as if something in front of it obscured its vision. With the right eye I could still see fairly well, except that everything, as I have said, looked red instead of its usual colour. The hot iron had been thrown down and was frizzling on the wet ground a few paces from me.

Though the time felt endless, I don’t think the heated bar was actually in front of my eyes for more than about thirty [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] seconds. But that was long enough, because when I lifted my aching eyelids, I saw everything through a red haze. My left eye was extremely painful, and every few seconds it felt like something was blocking my vision in front of it. With my right eye, I could still see fairly well, except everything looked red instead of its usual color. The hot iron had been thrown down and was sizzling on the wet ground a few steps away from me.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[35] Measured some weeks later by Dr. Wilson.

[35] Measured a few weeks later by Dr. Wilson.


[402]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXXV

Bleeding all over—Insulted and spat upon—"Kill him!"—Urging on the executioner—Refusal to stoop—An unpleasant sword exercise—The execution suspended.

My position as I stood with my legs wide apart, with my back, hands and legs bleeding, and seeing everything of a ghastly red tinge; amidst the deafening, maddening noise of gong, drum, cymbals and horn; insulted, spat upon by the crowd, and with Nerba holding me so tight by my hair as to tear handfuls of it from my scalp, was one in which I cannot wish even my bitterest enemies to find themselves. All I was able to do was to remain calm and composed and to watch with apparent unconcern the preparations for the next sufferings to be inflicted upon me.

My position as I stood with my legs spread apart, my back, hands, and legs bleeding, surrounded by everything bathed in a horrific red hue; amidst the deafening, maddening noise of gongs, drums, cymbals, and horns; insulted and spat on by the crowd, with Nerba gripping my hair so tightly that she tore out handfuls from my scalp, was one I wouldn’t wish on my worst enemies. All I could do was stay calm and composed and watch with a seemingly indifferent attitude as the preparations for the next round of suffering were being set in motion.

"Miumta nani sehko!" ("Kill him with a rifle!") shouted a hoarse voice.

"Miumta nani sehko!" ("Kill him with a rifle!") shouted a harsh voice.

A matchlock was now being loaded by a soldier, and such was the quantity of gunpowder they placed in the barrel that I made sure whoever fired it would have his head blown off; so it was with a certain amount of satisfaction that I saw it handed over to the Pombo. That official placed the weapon against my forehead, with the muzzle pointing upwards. Then a soldier leaning down, applied fire to the fuse and eventually there was a loud report which gave my head a severe shock, and the overloaded matchlock flew clean out of the Pombo's hand, much to everybody's surprise. I forced myself to laugh; and their confusion, added to the tantalising failure of every attempt they made to hurt me, drove the crowd to the highest pitch of fury.

A soldier was loading a matchlock, and they packed so much gunpowder into the barrel that I was certain anyone who fired it would end up with their head blown off. So, I felt a certain satisfaction watching it being handed over to the Pombo. That official aimed the weapon at my forehead, with the muzzle pointing up. Then a soldier leaned down to light the fuse, and eventually, there was a loud bang that jolted my head and sent the overloaded matchlock flying out of the Pombo's hand, much to everyone’s surprise. I forced myself to laugh, and their confusion, combined with the frustrating failure of every attempt to harm me, pushed the crowd to a boiling point of rage.

"Ta kossaton, ta kossaton!" ("Kill him, kill him!") exclaimed fierce voices all round me. "Ngala mangbo shidak majidan!" ("We cannot frighten him!") "Ta kossaton, ta kossaton!" ("Kill him, kill him!"), the whole valley resounding with their ferocious cries.

"Kill him, kill him!" exclaimed fierce voices all around me. "We can't scare him!" "Kill him, kill him!" the whole valley echoing with their ferocious cries.

[403]A huge two-handed sword was now handed to the Pombo, who drew it out of its sheath.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]A massive two-handed sword was now given to the Pombo, who pulled it out of its sheath.

A Bannerman

A Banner Holder


"Kill him, kill him!" shouted the mob once more, urging on the executioner, who, his superstitious nature not having overcome the ill-omened fact that the matchlock a moment before had jumped out of his hand (which he probably attributed to the doing of some supreme power and not to the over-charge), seemed quite reluctant to come forward.

"Kill him, kill him!" shouted the crowd again, pushing the executioner on, who, despite his superstitions not being able to shake off the bad omen of the matchlock slipping from his hand moments ago (which he likely blamed on some higher power and not his own mistake), appeared very hesitant to step forward.

I seized this moment to say that they might kill me if they wished, but that, if I died to-day, they would all die to-morrow—an undeniable fact, for we are all bound to die some day. This seemed to cool them for a moment, but the excitement in the crowd was too great, and at last they succeeded in working the Pombo up into a passion. His face [404] became quite unrecognisable, such was his excitement, and he behaved like a madman.

I took that chance to say that they could kill me if they wanted, but if I died today, they'd all be dead by tomorrow—an undeniable truth, since we all have to die someday. This seemed to calm them down for a moment, but the crowd's excitement was too intense, and eventually, they got Pombo worked up into a rage. His face became completely unrecognizable from his anger, and he acted like a lunatic.

At this point a Lama approached and slipped something into the mouth of the executioner, who again foamed at the lips. A Lama held his sword, while he turned up one sleeve of his coat to have his arms free, and the Lamas turned up the other for him. Then he strode towards me with slow, ponderous steps, swinging the shiny sharp blade from side to side before him, with his bare arms outstretched.

At this point, a Lama walked over and put something in the mouth of the executioner, who started to foam at the lips again. One Lama held his sword while he rolled up one sleeve of his coat to have his arms free, and the other Lamas rolled up the other for him. Then he walked toward me with slow, heavy steps, swinging the shiny, sharp blade from side to side in front of him, with his bare arms extended.

The man Nerba, who was still holding me by the hair, was told to make me bend my neck. I resisted with what little strength I had left, determined to keep my head erect and my forehead high. They might kill me, true enough, they might hack me to pieces if they chose, but never until I had lost my last atom of strength would these ruffians make me stoop before them. I would perish, but it should be looking down upon the Pombo and his countrymen.

The man Nerba, who was still gripping my hair, was ordered to make me bend my neck. I fought back with what little strength I had left, determined to keep my head up and my forehead high. They might kill me, sure, they might chop me to pieces if they wanted, but not until I had completely exhausted my strength would these thugs make me bow before them. I would die, but it would be while looking down at the Pombo and his countrymen.

The Executioner Brought the Sword Down to My Neck

The executioner brought the sword down to my neck.


The executioner, now close to me, held the sword with his nervous hands, lifting it high above his shoulder. He then brought it down to my neck, which he touched with the blade, to measure the distance, as it were, for a clean effective stroke. Then, drawing back a step, he quickly raised the sword again and struck a blow at me with all his might. The sword passed disagreeably close to my [405] neck under my chin, but did not touch me. I would not flinch, nor speak, and my demeanour seemed to impress him almost to the point of frightening him. He became reluctant to continue his diabolical performance; but the impatience and turbulence of the crowd were at their highest, and the Lamas nearer to him gesticulated like madmen and urged him on again.

The executioner, now right next to me, held the sword with his shaky hands, raising it high above his shoulder. He then brought it down to my neck, lightly touching the blade to measure the distance for a clean, effective strike. After stepping back, he quickly raised the sword again and swung at me with all his strength. The sword came uncomfortably close to my neck under my chin but didn't make contact. I refused to flinch or speak, and my calm demeanor seemed to impress him, almost to the point of scaring him. He became hesitant to continue his grim task; however, the impatience and agitation of the crowd reached a peak, and the Lamas closest to him waved their arms like crazy and urged him on again.

As I write this, their wild shouts, their bloodthirsty countenances, are vividly brought before me. Apparently against his will, the executioner went through the same kind of performance on the other side of my head. This time the blade passed so near that the point cannot have been more than half an inch or so from my neck.

As I write this, their wild shouts and bloodthirsty faces are vividly in my mind. Against his will, the executioner went through a similar act on the other side of my head. This time, the blade came so close that the tip must have been no more than half an inch from my neck.

It seemed as if all would soon be over; yet, strange to say, even at this culminating moment I did not seriously realise that I should die. Why this was so I cannot say, because everything pointed towards my end being very near; but I had a feeling all the time that I should live to see the end of it all. I was very sorry, if my end were really at hand, as it seemed likely, that I should die without seeing my parents and friends again, and that they probably would never know how and where I had died. One is naturally at all times reluctant to leave a world in which one has barely had a dull moment, but, after all my wretched experiences, sufferings and excitement, I did not realise my peril so much as I should have done had I, for instance, been dragged from my comfortable London flat direct on to the execution-ground, instead of first having lived through the recent past.

It felt like everything was about to come to an end; yet, strangely enough, even at this moment, I didn't truly believe I was going to die. I can't really say why, because everything indicated that my end was very close; but I somehow felt that I would survive to see how it all turned out. I felt sorry, if my end was really near as it seemed, that I would die without seeing my parents and friends again, and that they would probably never know how and where I had passed away. It's natural to be hesitant to leave a world where you've hardly had a boring moment, but after all my miserable experiences, suffering, and excitement, I didn't feel my danger as much as I would have if, for example, I had been taken straight from my comfortable London apartment to the place of execution, instead of having first gone through the recent past.

Naturally the scene is one that I am not likely to forget, and I must say for the Tibetans that the whole affair was very picturesquely carried out. Even the ghastliest ceremonies may have their artistic side, and this particular one, performed with extra pomp and flourish, was really impressive.

Naturally, this scene is one I’m not likely to forget, and I have to say the whole event was carried out very beautifully by the Tibetans. Even the most gruesome ceremonies can have an artistic element, and this particular one, done with extra pomp and flair, was truly impressive.

It appears that the unpleasant sword exercise is sometimes gone through in Tibet previous to actually cutting off the head, so as to make the victim suffer more before the final blow is given. I was not aware of this at the time, and only learnt it some weeks after. It is usually at the third stroke that the victim is actually beheaded.

It seems that the brutal sword practice is sometimes carried out in Tibet before the actual beheading, to make the victim endure more pain before the final strike. I didn't know this at the time and only found out a few weeks later. The victim is typically beheaded on the third strike.

The Lamas were still clamouring for my head, but the Pombo made a firm stand this time, and declined to go on with the execution. They collected round him and seemed very angry; they shouted and yelled and gesticulated in the wildest fashion; and still the Pombo kept his eyes upon me in a half-respectful, half-frightened manner, and refused to move.

The Lamas were still demanding my head, but the Pombo stood his ground this time and refused to carry out the execution. They gathered around him and looked really angry; they shouted, yelled, and waved their arms around wildly; yet the Pombo kept his gaze on me in a mix of respect and fear, and wouldn’t budge.


[406]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXXVI

Mansing arrives—A pretence of killing him—Our execution postponed—Fed by the Lamas.

An excited consultation followed, during which, in the midst of this scene of barbarity, my coolie Mansing arrived. He had fallen off his bare-back pony many times, and had been left far behind. The man who held my hair now relinquished his grasp, while another pushed me violently from in front, causing me to fall heavily backward, and putting a painful strain on all the tendons of my legs. Mansing, bruised and aching all over, was brought forward and tied by his legs to the same log of wood to which I was fastened. They informed me that they would kill my coolie first, and one brutal Lama seized him roughly by the throat. I was pushed up in a sitting posture, and a cloth was thrown over my head and face, so that I could not see what was being done. I heard poor Mansing groan pitifully, then there was a dead silence. I called him, I received no answer; so I concluded that he had been despatched. I was left in this terrible suspense for over a quarter of an hour, when at last they removed the cloth from over my head, and I beheld my coolie lying before me, bound to the log and almost unconscious, but, thank God, still alive. He told me that, when I had called him, a Lama had placed his hand upon his mouth to prevent him from answering, while, with the other hand, he had squeezed his neck so tightly as to nearly strangle him. After a while Mansing got better, and the coolness and bravery of the poor wretch during these terrible trials were really marvellous.

An intense conversation followed, during which, in the middle of this brutal scene, my coolie Mansing showed up. He had fallen off his bareback pony multiple times and had been left far behind. The guy holding my hair finally let go, while someone else forcefully shoved me from the front, causing me to fall hard backward and straining all the tendons in my legs painfully. Mansing, bruised and sore all over, was brought forward and tied by his legs to the same log I was attached to. They told me they would kill my coolie first, and a savage Lama grabbed him harshly by the throat. I was propped up to sit, and a cloth was thrown over my head and face, blocking my view of what was happening. I heard poor Mansing groan in despair, then there was complete silence. I called for him, but got no reply; so I assumed he had been killed. I was left in this dreadful suspense for over fifteen minutes, when finally they took the cloth off my head, and I saw my coolie lying in front of me, tied to the log and nearly unconscious, but thank God, still alive. He told me that when I called him, a Lama had placed his hand over his mouth to silence him, while with the other hand, he squeezed his neck tightly enough to almost strangle him. After a while, Mansing started to recover, and his calmness and bravery during these horrific trials were truly remarkable.

We were told that our execution was only postponed till the next day, in order that we might be tortured until the time came for us to be brought out to death.

We were informed that our execution was just delayed until the next day, so we could be tortured until it was time for us to be led to our death.

A number of Lamas and soldiers stood round jeering at [407] us. I seized the opportunity this respite afforded to hail a swaggering Lama and ask him for some refreshment.

A group of Lamas and soldiers stood around mocking us. I took advantage of this break to call out to a cocky Lama and ask him for something to drink.

"Orcheh, orcheh nga dappa tugu duh, chuen deh, dang, yak, guram, tcha, tsamba pin" ("I am very hungry, please give me some rice, yak meat, ghur, tea, and oatmeal!") I asked in my best Tibetan.

"Orcheh, orcheh nga dappa tugu duh, chuen deh, dang, yak, guram, tcha, tsamba pin" ("I'm really hungry, please give me some rice, yak meat, ghur, tea, and oatmeal!") I asked in my best Tibetan.

"Hum murr, Maharaja!" ("I want butter, your Majesty") put in Mansing, half in Hindustani and half in the Tibetan language.

"Hum murr, Maharaja!" ("I want butter, your Majesty") was said in Mansing, mixing both Hindustani and Tibetan.

This natural application for food seemed to afford intense amusement to our torturers, who had formed a ring round us, and laughed at our appeal, while Mansing and I, both of us famished, were left sitting bound in a most painful position.

This natural way of using food seemed to really amuse our captors, who had formed a circle around us and laughed at our pleas, while Mansing and I, both starving, were left sitting there tied up in a very painful position.

The day had now waned, and our torturers did not fail to remind us constantly that the following day our heads would be severed from our bodies, which I told them would cause us no pain, for if they gave us no food we should be dead of starvation by then.

The day had now faded, and our tormentors kept reminding us that the next day our heads would be chopped off, which I told them wouldn’t hurt us, because if they didn't feed us, we would be dead from starvation by then.

Whether they realised that this might be the case, or whether some other reasons moved them, I cannot say; but several of the Lamas, who had been most brutal, including one who had the previous day taken a part in Chanden Sing's flogging, now became quite polite and treated us with a surprising amount of deference. Two Lamas were despatched to the monastery, and returned after some time with bags of tsamba and a large raksang of boiling tea. I have hardly ever enjoyed a meal more, though the Lamas stuffed the food down my throat with their unwashed fingers so fast that they nearly choked me.

Whether they realized this might be the case, or if there were other reasons behind it, I can't say; but several of the Lamas, who had been quite brutal, including one who had participated in Chanden Sing's flogging the day before, now became very polite and treated us with surprising respect. Two Lamas were sent to the monastery and returned after a while with bags of tsamba and a large raksang of boiling tea. I have hardly ever enjoyed a meal more, even though the Lamas forced the food down my throat with their unwashed fingers so quickly that they nearly choked me.

"Eat, eat as much as you can," said they grimly, "for it may be your last meal."

"Eat, eat as much as you can," they said grimly, "because it might be your last meal."

And eat I did, and washed the tsamba down with quantities of buttered tea, which they poured into my mouth carelessly out of the raksang.

And eat I did, and washed the tsamba down with plenty of buttered tea, which they poured into my mouth casually from the raksang.

Mansing, whose religion did not allow him to eat food touched by folk of a different caste, was eventually permitted to lick the meal out of the wooden bowl. I myself was none too proud to take the food in any way it might be offered, and when my humble "Orcheh, orcheh tchuen mangbo terokchi" ("Please give me some more") met with the disapproval of the Lamas, and brought out the everlasting negative, "Middù, middù," I was still too hungry to waste any of the precious food: so the Tibetans revolved the wooden bowl round and round my mouth, and I licked it as clean as if it had never been used.

Mansing, whose religion prohibited him from eating food touched by people of a different caste, was eventually allowed to lick the meal from the wooden bowl. I wasn't too proud to take the food in any form it was offered, and when my humble "Orcheh, orcheh tchuen mangbo terokchi" ("Please give me some more") faced the disapproval of the Lamas, who responded with the everlasting negative, "Middù, middù," I was still too hungry to waste any of the precious food: so the Tibetans turned the wooden bowl around and around my mouth, and I licked it clean as if it had never been used.


[408]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXXVII

Happiness checked—Stretched on the rack—Mansing shares my fate—Drenched and in rags—An unsolved mystery.

After all the excitement of the day, we were beginning to feel a little restored and much relieved at being treated rather less roughly, were it only for a few moments, when, small as it was, the improvement in our condition was checked.

After all the excitement of the day, we started to feel a bit rejuvenated and relieved to be treated a bit more gently, if only for a few moments, when, despite how minor it was, the improvement in our situation was interrupted.

A Lama came from the monastery and gave orders right and left, and the place was again in commotion. We were pounced upon and roughly seized, and my legs were quickly untied, a number of men holding me down the while. Again they lifted me until I stood upright on the cutting edge of the prismatic log: two men seized one leg and two the other, and stretched them apart as far as they could possibly go. Then rope after rope was wound round my feet and ankles, and I was made fast as before to the log.

A Lama came from the monastery and started giving orders everywhere, causing a stir once again. We were grabbed roughly, and my legs were quickly untied while several men held me down. They lifted me up again until I was standing upright on the sharp edge of the prismatic log: two men grabbed one leg and two others grabbed the other, pulling them apart as far as they could. Then, one rope after another was wrapped around my feet and ankles, securing me tightly to the log just like before.

As my legs were much farther apart this time, the pain in the muscles of my legs when they proceeded to knock me down backwards was even greater than it had been on the previous occasion. But before I had time to feel it in full, the Lamas, now as ferocious as I had seen them at first, dragged my manacled arms backwards from under my body and tied a rope to the chain of the handcuffs. This done, they passed the rope through a hole in the top of a high post behind me, and by tugging at it, strained my arms upwards in a way that, had I been less supple, would certainly have broken them. When all their strength combined could not stretch me another inch without tearing my body to pieces, they made the rope fast, and I remained half suspended, and feeling as if all the bones of my limbs were getting, or had got, pulled out of their sockets. The weight of the body naturally tending to settle down would, I felt, [409] every moment increase the suffering of this terrible torture, which was really a primitive form of the rack.

As my legs were spread wider this time, the pain in my leg muscles when they tried to knock me down backward was even worse than before. But before I could fully register the pain, the Lamas, now as fierce as I had first seen them, yanked my restrained arms backward from under my body and tied a rope to the handcuff chain. After that, they threaded the rope through a hole in a tall post behind me, and by pulling on it, they yanked my arms upward in a way that, if I were less flexible, would definitely have broken them. When all their strength combined couldn’t stretch me any further without ripping my body apart, they secured the rope, leaving me half suspended and feeling like all the bones in my limbs were being pulled out of their sockets. I sensed that the weight of my body naturally trying to settle down would only increase the agony of this brutal torture, which was essentially a primitive version of the rack.

Mansing was likewise suspended on the other side, his feet remaining tied to the log to which my own were fastened, only not quite so wide apart.

Mansing was also suspended on the other side, his feet still tied to the log where mine were secured, just not quite as far apart.

The pain was at first intense, the tendons of the legs and arms being dreadfully strained, and the spinal column bent so as nearly to be broken in two. The shoulder-blades forced into close contact, pressed the vertebræ inwards, and caused excruciating pains along the lumbar vertebræ, where the strain was greatest.

The pain was initially overwhelming, with the tendons in my legs and arms severely strained, and my spine bent almost to the breaking point. My shoulder blades pressed tightly together, pushing against the vertebrae and causing excruciating pain along my lower back, where the strain was worst.

Thus Elapsed Twenty-four terrible Hours

Thus elapsed twenty-four terrible hours.


As if this were not sufficient, a cord was tied from Mansing's neck to mine, the object of which was to keep our necks stretched in a most uncomfortable position.

As if that wasn't enough, a cord was tied from Mansing's neck to mine, which kept our necks stretched in a really uncomfortable position.

It began to rain heavily, and we were left out in the open. The rags to which our clothes had been reduced in our struggle when we were first seized were drenched. Half naked and wounded, we were alternately numbed with cold and burning with fever. A guard encircled us, having with them two watch-dogs tied to pegs. The soldiers were apparently so confident of our inability to escape that they drew their heavy blankets over their heads and slept. One of them in his slumber moved and pushed his sword outside the blanket in which he had now rolled himself tight. This inspired me with the idea of attempting to escape.

It started to rain hard, and we were stuck out in the open. The rags our clothes had become after our struggle when we were first captured were soaked. Half-naked and injured, we felt both numb from the cold and burning with fever. A guard surrounded us, with two guard dogs tied to stakes. The soldiers seemed so sure we wouldn’t get away that they pulled their heavy blankets over their heads and fell asleep. One of them shifted in his sleep and poked his sword out from the blanket he had wrapped himself in. This gave me the idea to try to escape.

[410] Two or three hours later it had become very dark. Thanks to the extremely supple nature of my hands, I succeeded in drawing the right hand out of my handcuffs, and, after an hour or so of stealthy and anxious work I managed to unloose the cord that bound Mansing's feet. Then I whispered to him to get up slowly and to push the sword towards me with his foot until I could reach it. If successful in this, I could soon cut my bonds and those fastening Mansing's hands, and with a weapon in our possession we would make a bold dash for liberty.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] A couple of hours later, it had gotten really dark. Because my hands are incredibly flexible, I managed to slip my right hand out of the handcuffs. After about an hour of careful and tense work, I finally got the cord that tied Mansing's feet loose. Then I whispered to him to get up slowly and to push the sword towards me with his foot until I could grab it. If this worked out, I could quickly cut my bonds and the ones keeping Mansing's hands restrained, and with a weapon in our hands, we would make a bold run for freedom.

Mansing, however, was not a champion of agility. In his joy at feeling partly free, the poor coolie moved his stiff legs clumsily. The vigilant watch-dogs detected this, and gave the alarm by barking. The guards were up in a moment, and, timid as they always were, they all hurriedly left us, and went to fetch lights to examine our bonds.

Mansing, however, wasn't exactly quick on his feet. In his excitement at feeling somewhat free, the poor laborer moved his stiff legs awkwardly. The alert guard dogs picked up on this and started barking. The guards were on it in no time, and, as scared as they always were, they all quickly left us and went to get lights to check our restraints.

In the meanwhile, protected by the darkness of the stormy night, I had succeeded in replacing my hand inside the iron handcuff. Putting it back was more difficult than drawing it out, but I had just time to effect my purpose. The men who had gone to the monastery returned with lights. I pretended to be fast asleep: a likely thing with every bone in my body feeling as if it were disjointed, every limb half-numbed and frozen, every tendon and ligament so strained as to drive me mad with pain!

In the meantime, shielded by the darkness of the stormy night, I managed to slip my hand back into the iron handcuff. It was harder to put it back than to pull it out, but I just had enough time to accomplish my goal. The men who had gone to the monastery came back with lights. I pretended to be sound asleep: quite believable considering every bone in my body felt like it was out of joint, every limb was half-numb and frozen, and every tendon and ligament was so strained it was driving me crazy with pain!

The Tibetans found the bonds round Mansing's feet undone. They examined my hands and saw them just as they had left them. They inspected my feet. The ropes were still there cutting into my flesh. They inspected Mansing's hands, only to find them still fastened to the post behind him.

The Tibetans found the ties around Mansing's feet were untied. They looked at my hands and saw they were just as they had left them. They checked my feet. The ropes were still there cutting into my skin. They examined Mansing's hands, only to discover they were still secured to the post behind him.

The Tibetans were so puzzled at this mysterious occurrence that they positively got frightened. They began to shout excitedly, calling for help. In a moment, the alarm having been given, a crowd of men rushed at us, and with their swords drawn, surrounded us. One man, braver than the rest, gave Mansing a few cuts with a whip, warning us that if the ropes were found undone again they would decapitate us there and then. The coolie was again bound, this time more tightly than ever.

The Tibetans were so confused by this strange event that they actually got scared. They started shouting excitedly, calling for help. Before long, once the alarm was raised, a group of men rushed toward us, surrounding us with their swords drawn. One man, bolder than the others, lashed Mansing a few times with a whip, warning us that if the ropes were found undone again, they would execute us on the spot. The coolie was tied up again, this time even more tightly than before.


[411]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXXVIII

Mansing partially untied after twelve hours on the rack—Numbed—How the brain works under such circumstances—My scientific instruments—The end of my photographic plates—A paint-box accused of occult powers—An offer refused—Courtesy and cruelty combined.

By way of precaution, a light was set between Mansing and myself, and, as it was still raining hard, the Tibetans placed a canvas shelter over us to prevent the light from being extinguished. At about six or seven in the morning, Mansing's feet were untied, but not his hands. I was left in the same uncomfortable and painful posture. The hours passed very slowly and wearily. My legs, my arms and hands had gradually become quite lifeless, and after the first six or seven hours that I had been stretched on the rack, I felt no more actual pain. The numbness crept along every limb of my body, until I had now the peculiar sensation of possessing a living head on a dead body.

By way of precaution, a light was set up between Mansing and me, and since it was still pouring rain, the Tibetans put a canvas shelter over us to keep the light from going out. Around six or seven in the morning, Mansing’s feet were untied, but his hands remained bound. I was still stuck in the same uncomfortable and painful position. The hours dragged on very slowly and tiredly. My legs, arms, and hands had gradually gone completely numb, and after the first six or seven hours of being stretched out, I didn’t feel any more real pain. The numbness spread through every limb of my body, and I now had the strange feeling of having a living head on a lifeless body.

It is indeed remarkable how one's brain keeps alive and working well under such circumstances, apparently unaffected by the temporary mortification of the remainder of the system.

It’s truly amazing how the brain stays active and functioning well in these situations, seemingly unharmed by the temporary embarrassment of the rest of the body.

The day now dawning was one full of strange incidents. When the sun was high in the sky, the Pombo, with a great number of Lamas, rode down from the monastery, though the distance was very short. He went to his tent, and presently my cases of scientific instruments were brought outside and opened, the soldiers and Lamas displaying an amusing mixture of curiosity and caution over everything they touched. I had to explain the use of each instrument, a difficult matter indeed, considering their ignorance and my limited knowledge of Tibetan, which did not allow of my delivering scientific addresses. The sextant was looked upon with great suspicion, and even more so the [412] hypsometrical apparatus, with its thermometers in brass tubes, which they took to be some sort of firearm, Then came a lot of undeveloped photographic plates, box after box of which they opened in broad daylight, destroying in a few moments all the valuable negatives that I had taken since leaving Mansarowar. The Pombo, more observant than the others, noticed that the plates turned a yellowish colour on being exposed to the light.

The day that was just starting was filled with strange occurrences. When the sun was high in the sky, the Pombo, along with many Lamas, rode down from the monastery, even though it was a short distance. He went to his tent, and soon my scientific instruments were brought outside and unpacked, with the soldiers and Lamas showing an amusing mix of curiosity and caution over everything they touched. I had to explain how each instrument worked, which was quite challenging given their lack of knowledge and my limited proficiency in Tibetan, making it hard for me to give scientific presentations. The sextant was viewed with a lot of suspicion, and even more so was the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] hypsometric device, with its thermometers in brass tubes, which they mistook for some kind of weapon. Then, they came across a bunch of undeveloped photographic plates, opening box after box of them in broad daylight, ruining all the valuable negatives I had taken since leaving Mansarowar in just a few moments. The Pombo, more observant than the others, noticed that the plates turned yellowish when exposed to the light.

"Why is that?" asked he.

"Why is that?" he asked.

"It is a sign that you will suffer for what you are doing to me."

"It shows that you will experience pain for what you’re doing to me."

The Pombo flung away the plate, and was much upset. He ordered a hole to be dug in the ground some way off, and the plates to be instantly buried. The soldiers, however, who had been entrusted with the order, seemed loth to touch the plates, and they had to be reprimanded and beaten by the Lamas before they would obey. At last, with their feet, they shoved the boxes of negatives to a spot some distance off, where, in dog fashion, they dug a deep hole with their hands in the muddy ground; and there, alas! my work of several weeks was covered for ever with earth.

The Pombo threw the plate away, clearly upset. He had a hole dug in the ground nearby and ordered that the plates be buried immediately. However, the soldiers who were given the task hesitated to touch the plates and had to be scolded and beaten by the Lamas before they would comply. Finally, using their feet, they pushed the boxes of negatives to a spot further away, where they dug a deep hole in the muddy ground with their hands like dogs; and there, unfortunately, my work of several weeks was buried forever under the earth.

Now came my paint-box with its cakes of water-colours.

Now my paint box arrived with its cakes of watercolors.

"What do you do with these?" cried an angry Lama, pointing at the harmless colours.

"What are you supposed to do with these?" shouted an angry Lama, pointing at the harmless colors.

"I paint pictures."

"I create art."

"No, you are lying. With the 'yellow' you find where gold is in the country, and with the 'blue' you discover where malachite is."

"No, you’re lying. With the 'yellow' you find where gold is in the country, and with the 'blue' you discover where malachite is."

I assured them that this was not the case, and told them that, if they would untie me, I would, on recovering the use of my arms, paint a picture before them.

I assured them that this wasn't true, and told them that if they untied me, I would, once I regained the use of my arms, paint a picture for them.

They prudently preferred to leave me tied up.

They wisely chose to leave me tied up.

Their whole attention was now drawn to a considerable sum in silver and gold which they found in the cases, and the Pombo warned the people that not one coin must be stolen.

Their entire focus was now on a substantial amount of silver and gold they discovered in the cases, and the Pombo warned everyone that not a single coin should be taken.

I took this chance to make an offering of 500 rupees to the lamasery, and told the Pombo that I would like him to accept as a gift my Martini-Henry, which I had noticed rather took his fancy.

I seized the opportunity to donate 500 rupees to the lamasery and told the Pombo that I'd like him to accept my Martini-Henry as a gift, which I had noticed he seemed quite interested in.

Both gifts were refused, as they said the lamasery was very wealthy, and the Pombo's position as an official did not allow him to carry a rifle. The Pombo, nevertheless, was quite touched by the offer, and came personally to thank me.

Both gifts were declined because they said the lamasery was very wealthy, and Pombo’s role as an official didn’t permit him to carry a rifle. However, Pombo was genuinely moved by the offer and came by to thank me in person.

In a way the rascals were gentlemanly enough in their manner, and I could not help admiring their mixture of courtesy and cruelty, either of which they could switch on at a moment's notice without regard to the other.

In a way, the troublemakers were pretty gentlemanly in their behavior, and I couldn't help but admire their blend of politeness and brutality, either of which they could turn on at a moment's notice without thinking about the other.


[413]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER LXXXIX

An unknown article in Tibet—My sponge bewitched—A Lama fires my Martini-Henry—The rifle bursts.

They had now reached the bottom of the water-tight case, and the Pombo drew out with much suspicion a curious flattened object.

They had now reached the bottom of the waterproof case, and the Pombo pulled out a strange flattened object with a lot of suspicion.

"What is that?" inquired he, as usual lifting the article up in the air.

"What is that?" he asked, as usual holding the item up in the air.

My sight had been so injured that I could not clearly discern what it was; but on their waving it in front of my nose, I recognised it to be my long mislaid bath-sponge, dry and flattened, which Chanden Sing, with his usual ability for packing, had stored away at the bottom of the case, piling upon it the heavy cases of photographic plates. The sponge, a very large one, was now reduced to the thickness of less than an inch, owing to the weight that had for weeks lain upon it.

My vision was so damaged that I couldn't clearly see what it was; but when they waved it in front of my nose, I recognized it as my long-lost bath sponge, dry and flattened. Chanden Sing, with his usual packing skills, had tucked it away at the bottom of the case, stacking the heavy boxes of photographic plates on top of it. The sponge, which was very large, had now compressed to less than an inch thick due to the weight that had been pressing down on it for weeks.

The Tibetans were greatly puzzled at this new discovery, which they said resembled tinder; and it was touched with much caution, for some of the Lamas said it might explode.

The Tibetans were really confused by this new discovery, which they said looked like tinder; and it was handled very carefully because some of the Lamas said it might explode.

When their curiosity was appeased, they took it and threw it away. It fell near me in a small pool of water. This was a golden opportunity to frighten my jailers, and I addressed the sponge in English, and with any word that came into my mouth, pretending to utter incantations. The attention of the Lamas and soldiers was naturally quickly drawn to this unusual behaviour on my part; and they could not conceal their terror when, as I spoke louder and louder to the sponge, it gradually swelled to its normal size with the moisture it absorbed.

When their curiosity was satisfied, they grabbed it and tossed it aside. It landed near me in a small puddle. This was the perfect chance to scare my captors, so I started talking to the sponge in English, using any words that popped into my head as if I were casting a spell. The Lamas and soldiers quickly noticed my strange behavior, and they couldn't hide their fear as I spoke louder and louder to the sponge, which slowly expanded back to its normal size as it soaked up the moisture.

The Tibetans, who at first could hardly believe their eyes at this incomprehensible occurrence, became so panic-[414]stricken at what they believed to be an exhibition of my occult powers, that there was a general stampede in every direction.

The Tibetans, who were initially stunned by this baffling event, became so overwhelmed with panic at what they thought was a display of my supernatural abilities that everyone started running in every direction.

In a way, all this was entertaining, and anyhow it served to pass away the time. The most amusing scene that afternoon was, however, still to come.

In a way, all this was entertaining, and it still helped to pass the time. The most amusing scene that afternoon was yet to come.

After a time the Lamas screwed up their courage, and returned to where my baggage had been overhauled. One of them picked up my Martini-Henry, and the others urged him to fire it off. He came to me, and when I had explained to him how to load it, he took a cartridge and placed it in the breech, but would insist on not closing the bolt firmly home. When I warned him of the consequences, he struck me over the head with the butt of the rifle.

After a while, the Lamas gathered their courage and went back to where my luggage had been checked. One of them picked up my Martini-Henry, and the others encouraged him to fire it. He came to me, and after I explained how to load it, he took a cartridge and put it in the chamber, but he wouldn't close the bolt properly. When I warned him about what would happen, he hit me over the head with the butt of the rifle.

Belt, with Bullet and Powder Pouches, Dagger, Needle-case, and Flint and Steel

Belt, with bullet and powder pouches, dagger, needle case, and flint and steel


It is the fashion, when aiming with one of their matchlocks, which have a prop attached to them, to place the butt in front of the nose instead of holding it firmly to the shoulder as we do. So the Lama aimed in this fashion at one of my yaks peacefully grazing some thirty yards off. While everybody watched anxiously to see the results of this marksman's shooting, he pulled the trigger; the rifle went off with an extra loud report, and behold! the muzzle of the Martini burst and the violent recoil gave the Lama a fearful blow in the face. The rifle, flying out of his hands, described a somersault in the air, and the Lama fell backwards to the ground, where he remained spread out flat, bleeding all over, and screaming like a child. His nose was squashed; one eye had been put out, and his teeth shattered.

It’s common to aim with matchlocks that have a prop, holding the butt in front of the nose instead of firmly against the shoulder like we do. So, the Lama aimed this way at one of my yaks, calmly grazing about thirty yards away. Everyone watched nervously to see how the shot would turn out. He pulled the trigger; the rifle fired with an unusually loud bang, and suddenly, the muzzle of the Martini exploded, causing a violent recoil that hit the Lama hard in the face. The rifle flew out of his hands, flipping through the air, and the Lama fell back to the ground, lying flat, bleeding everywhere, and screaming like a child. His nose was crushed, one eye was gone, and his teeth were broken.

Whether the rifle burst because the bolt had not been properly closed, or because mud had got into the muzzle as well, I could not say; but I give here a photograph of the [415] broken weapon, which the Tibetans returned to me several months later through the Government of India.

Whether the rifle exploded because the bolt wasn't fully closed, or because mud had gotten into the muzzle as well, I can't say; but I'm sharing a photo of the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] broken weapon, which the Tibetans returned to me several months later via the Government of India.

The injured Lama, I may say, was the one at the head of the party that wanted to have my head cut off, so that, naturally enough, I could not help betraying my satisfaction at the accident. I was glad they had let me live another day were it only to see his self-inflicted punishment.

The injured Lama, I have to say, was the leader of the group that wanted to have me killed, so it’s no surprise that I couldn’t help feeling pleased about the accident. I was glad they let me live another day, even if it was just to witness his own punishment.

Martini-Henry Exploded

Martini-Henry Exploded


[416]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XC

A consultation—Untied from the rack—The most terrible twenty-four hours of my life—I lose the use of my feet—Circulation returning—Intense pain—Sports.

The Pombo, who had been, during the greater part of the afternoon, looking at me with an air of mingled pity and respect, as though he had been forced against his will to treat me so brutally, could not help joining in my laughter at the Lama's sorrowful plight. In a way, I believe he was rather glad that the accident had happened; for, if he had until then been uncertain whether to kill me or not, he felt, after what had occurred, that it was not prudent to attempt it. The gold ring which had been taken from me on the day of our arrest, and for which I had asked many times, as it had been given by my mother, was regarded as possessing miraculous powers as long as it was upon me; and was therefore kept well away from me, for fear that, with its help, I might break my bonds and escape. The Pombo, the Lamas and officers held another consultation, at the end of which, towards sunset, several soldiers came and loosed my legs from the stretching log; and my hands, though still manacled, were lowered from the pillar behind.

The Pombo, who had spent most of the afternoon looking at me with a mix of pity and respect, as if he had reluctantly been forced to treat me so harshly, couldn't help but join in my laughter at the Lama's sad situation. In a way, I think he was somewhat relieved that the accident had happened; because, if he had been unsure about killing me before, he now realized it wouldn’t be wise to try. The gold ring that was taken from me on the day we were arrested, which I had asked about many times since it was given to me by my mother, was believed to have magical powers as long as it was on me; so it was kept far away from me, out of fear that I might use it to break my bonds and escape. The Pombo, the Lamas, and the officers held another meeting, and by sunset, several soldiers came to release my legs from the stretching log, and although my hands were still shackled, they were lowered from the pillar behind me.

As the ropes round my ankles were unwound from the deep channels they had cut into my flesh, large patches of skin came away with them. Thus ended the most terrible twenty-four hours I have ever passed in my lifetime.

As the ropes around my ankles were taken off, they pulled away chunks of flesh with them. This marked the end of the worst twenty-four hours I’ve ever experienced in my life.

I felt very little relief at first as I lay flat on the ground, for my body and legs were stiff and as if dead; and, as time went by, and I saw no signs of their coming back to life, I feared that mortification had set in, and that I had lost the use of my feet for good. It was two or three hours before the blood began to circulate in my right foot, and the pain when it did so was intense. Had a handful of knives been [417] passed slowly down the inside of my leg the agony could not have been more excruciating. My arms were not quite so bad: they also were numbed, but the circulation was more quickly re-established.

I felt hardly any relief at first as I lay flat on the ground, since my body and legs were stiff and felt lifeless. As time passed and I saw no signs of them coming back to life, I worried that they were rotting and that I had permanently lost the use of my feet. It took two or three hours before blood started to flow back into my right foot, and the pain when it did was unbearable. If a handful of knives had been slowly pushed down the inside of my leg, the agony couldn't have been more intense. My arms weren't quite as bad; they were also numb, but the circulation returned a bit faster.

In the meanwhile, the Pombo, whether to amuse me or to show off his riches, ordered about one hundred ponies, some with magnificent harness, to be brought up; and, mounting the finest, and holding in his hand that dreadful taram, rode round the hill on which the monastery and fort stood.

In the meantime, the Pombo, either to entertain me or to flaunt his wealth, had about one hundred ponies brought in, some with stunning harness. He mounted the best one and, holding that awful taram in his hand, rode around the hill where the monastery and fort were located.

On returning, he harangued his men, and a series of sports began, the Pombo seating himself near me and watching me intently to see how I was enjoying the performance. First of all the best marksmen were selected, and with their matchlocks fired one after the other at my two poor yaks only a few yards off; but although they aimed carefully and deliberately, they did not succeed in hitting them. I knew that they fired with bullets, for I could hear the hissing sound the missiles made.

On his return, he scolded his men, and a series of games began, with the Pombo sitting next to me and watching closely to see how much I was enjoying the show. First, the best marksmen were chosen, and they took turns firing their matchlocks at my two poor yaks just a few yards away; but even though they aimed carefully and deliberately, they didn’t manage to hit them. I could tell they were using bullets because I could hear the hissing sound the projectiles made.

Next came a display of fine horsemanship, which was very interesting. I should have enjoyed it more if I had not been suffering agonies all the time. Still, the performance helped to cheer me. First there were races in which only two ponies at a time took part, the last race being run between the two winners of the last heats, and a kata was presented to the victor. Next one horseman rode ahead at full gallop flying a kata, while some twenty others followed closely behind. The kata was left to fly by itself, and when it settled on the ground, the horsemen following the first rode some distance away, and, at a given signal, galloped back wildly, all converging towards the spot, and, bending down from their ponies, attempted to pick up the kata without dismounting. Some of the younger men were very clever at this.

Next came a display of impressive horsemanship, which was quite interesting. I would have enjoyed it more if I hadn’t been in so much pain the entire time. Still, the performance lifted my spirits. First, there were races with only two ponies competing at a time, with the final race featuring the winners of the previous heats, and a kata was awarded to the victor. Next, one horseman rode ahead at full gallop with a flying kata, while about twenty others followed closely behind. The kata was left to flutter on its own, and when it landed, the horsemen following the first rider went some distance away and, at a given signal, galloped back wildly, all converging on the spot. Leaning down from their ponies, they tried to grab the kata without getting off. Some of the younger men were especially good at this.

Another exercise consisted in one man on foot standing still, while a mounted comrade rode at full gallop towards him, seized him by his clothes, and lifted him on to the saddle.

Another exercise involved one man on foot standing still, while a mounted comrade rode full speed toward him, grabbed him by his clothes, and lifted him onto the saddle.

Though I could not see as well as I wished, I got so interested in the show, and expressed such admiration for the ponies, that the Pombo, becoming quite thoughtful and polite, ordered the best of them to be brought before me, and had me lifted into a sitting posture, so that I could see them better.

Though I couldn't see as well as I wanted, I became so interested in the show and expressed such admiration for the ponies that the Pombo, becoming quite thoughtful and polite, ordered the best of them to be brought in front of me and had me lifted into a sitting position so that I could see them better.


[418]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XCI

A great relief—The Pombo's attentions—A weird hypnotic dance.

This was a great relief, for I was suffering more from my humiliating position, being unable to stand, than from the tortures themselves. The Pombo told me that I must now look towards the tent, and then got up and walked towards it.

This was a huge relief, as I was struggling more with my embarrassing situation, being unable to stand, than with the actual pain. The Pombo told me that I should now look at the tent, then got up and walked toward it.

The opening of the tent was over twenty feet long. Some soldiers came and dragged me close to the front of it, so that I could witness all that went on.

The entrance of the tent was more than twenty feet wide. Some soldiers came and pulled me near the front so I could see everything happening.

Two big Lamas entered the tent with the Pombo, and a number of other people who were inside were turned out. They closed the tent for a few minutes, and then opened it again. In the meantime a gong summoned the Lamas of the monastery to come down, and, a few minutes later, a string of them came and took their places inside the tent.

Two large Lamas walked into the tent with the Pombo, and several other people who were inside were asked to leave. They shut the tent for a few minutes, then opened it again. Meanwhile, a gong called for the Lamas of the monastery to come down, and a few minutes later, a group of them arrived and took their seats inside the tent.

The Pombo, in his yellow coat and trousers and four-cornered hat, sat on a kind of high-backed chair in the centre of the tent, and by his side stood the two Lamas who had first entered it with him. The Pombo was beyond doubt in a hypnotic trance. He sat motionless, with his hands flat on his knees and his head erect; his eyes were fixed and staring. For some minutes he remained like this, and all the soldiers and people who had collected in front of the tent went down on their knees, laid their caps on the ground, and muttered prayers. One of the two Lamas, a fellow with great mesmeric powers, now laid his hand upon the shoulders of the Pombo, who gradually raised his arms with hands outstretched and remained as in a cataleptic state for a long time without moving an inch.

The Pombo, dressed in his yellow coat and trousers with a four-cornered hat, sat in a tall-backed chair in the center of the tent, while the two Lamas who had entered with him stood beside him. The Pombo was clearly in a hypnotic trance. He sat still, hands flat on his knees and head straight; his eyes were fixed and staring. He stayed like this for several minutes, and all the soldiers and people gathered in front of the tent went down on their knees, placed their caps on the ground, and murmured prayers. One of the two Lamas, a man with strong mesmerizing abilities, then placed his hand on the Pombo's shoulders, who gradually raised his arms with hands outstretched and remained in a cataleptic state for a long time without moving.

Next the Lama touched the Pombo's neck with his thumbs, [419] and caused the head to begin a rapid circular movement from left to right.

Next, the Lama touched the Pombo's neck with his thumbs, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] and started making its head spin quickly in a circle from left to right.

The Pombo's Contortions

The Pombo's Twists


Certain exorcisms were pronounced by the hypnotiser, and the Pombo now began the most extraordinary snake-like contortions, moving and twisting his arms, head, body and legs. He worked himself, or rather was worked, into a frenzy that lasted some time, and the crowd of devotees drew nearer and nearer to him, praying fervently and emitting deep sighs and cries of astonishment and almost terror at some of the more eccentric movements of his limbs. Every now and then this weird kind of dance terminated in a strange posture, the Pombo actually doubling himself up with his head between his feet and his long flat hat resting on the ground. While he was in this position, the bystanders went one by one to finger his feet, and make low prostrations and salaams. At last the hypnotiser, seizing the Pombo's head between his hands, stared in his eyes, rubbed his forehead, and woke him from the trance. The Pombo was pale and exhausted. He lay back on the chair and his hat fell off his head, which was clean shaven, thus unmistakably showing that he too was a Lama, and, as we [420] have seen, of a very high order, probably of the first rank after the Dalai Lama.

Certain exorcisms were performed by the hypnotist, and the Pombo then started the most incredible snake-like contortions, twisting and moving his arms, head, body, and legs. He either worked himself, or was made to work into a frenzy that lasted for a while, and the crowd of followers moved closer and closer to him, praying intensely and letting out deep sighs and gasps of surprise and almost fear at some of his more unusual movements. Every now and then, this bizarre dance ended in a strange position, with the Pombo actually bending over with his head between his feet and his long flat hat resting on the ground. While he was in this position, the onlookers approached one by one to touch his feet and make low bows and salutes. Finally, the hypnotist grabbed the Pombo's head between his hands, stared into his eyes, rubbed his forehead, and brought him out of the trance. The Pombo looked pale and exhausted. He leaned back in the chair, and his hat fell off, revealing his clean-shaven head, which unmistakably showed that he too was a Lama and, as we [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] have seen, of a very high order, probably of the first rank after the Dalai Lama.

Katas were distributed after this religious performance to all the Tibetans present, and they folded them and stowed them away in their coats.

Katas were handed out after this religious ceremony to all the Tibetans present, and they folded them up and tucked them away in their coats.

The Finale of the Dance

The Dance Finale


[421]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XCII

Compliments exchanged—A poisoned drink proffered—In acute pain—Uncertainty as to our fate—Working the oracle—My webbed fingers.

The Pombo came out of his gaudy tent, and I told him that the dance was beautiful, but that I was very hungry. He asked me what I wanted to eat, and I said I would like some meat and tea.

The Pombo came out of his flashy tent, and I told him that the dance was amazing, but that I was really hungry. He asked me what I wanted to eat, and I said I would like some meat and tea.

A little later, a large vessel with a delicious stew of yak's meat was brought to me, as well as tsamba in abundance. However, though I felt quite famished, I had the greatest difficulty in swallowing even a little food. This I thought must be owing to the injuries to my spine and to the mortification of my limbs, which had apparently affected my whole system except my head.

A little later, a big pot of tasty yak stew was brought to me, along with plenty of tsamba. However, even though I was really hungry, I found it really hard to swallow even a small amount of food. I thought this might be because of the injuries to my spine and the numbness in my limbs, which seemed to have affected my whole body except for my head.

When the Pombo had retired and night came on, I was again tied to the stretching log, but this time with my limbs not stretched so far apart. My hands, too, were again fastened to the pillar behind, but with no strain on them.

When the Pombo had finished for the day and night fell, I was once again tied to the stretching log, but this time my limbs weren’t stretched as far apart. My hands were also tied to the pillar behind me, but without any strain on them.

Late in the evening, half a dozen Lamas came from the monastery with a light and a large brass bowl which they said contained tea. The wounded Lama, with his head all bandaged up, was among them, and he was so anxious for me to drink some of it to keep myself warm during the cold night that I became suspicious. When they pushed a bowl of the liquid to my lips, I merely sipped a little, and declined to take more, spitting out what they had forced into my mouth. I swallowed a few drops, and a few minutes later I was seized with sharp, excruciating pains in my stomach, which continued for several days after. I can but conclude that the drink proffered me was poisoned.

Late in the evening, a group of six Lamas came from the monastery carrying a light and a large brass bowl that they claimed was filled with tea. The injured Lama, whose head was completely bandaged, was among them, and he was so eager for me to drink some to warm myself during the cold night that I became suspicious. When they held the bowl to my lips, I only sipped a bit and refused to take more, spitting out what they had forced into my mouth. I swallowed a few drops, and a few minutes later, I was hit with sharp, intense pains in my stomach that lasted for several days afterward. I can only conclude that the drink offered to me was poisoned.

The following day my left foot, which had remained lifeless since I had been untied from the rack the first time, [422] began to get better, and the circulation was gradually restored. The pain was unbearable.

The next day, my left foot, which had stayed numb since I was taken off the rack for the first time, [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] started to improve, and the circulation slowly came back. The pain was excruciating.

In the morning indecision again prevailed as to what was to be done to us. A number of Lamas were still anxious to have us beheaded, whereas the Pombo and the others had the previous night almost made up their minds to send us back to the frontier. Unfortunately, it appears[36] that the Pombo had seen a vision during the night in which a spirit told him that, if he did not kill us, he and his country would suffer some great misfortune. "You can kill the Plenki," the spirit was reported to have said, "and no one will punish you if you do. The Plenkis are afraid to fight the Tibetans."

In the morning, there was still uncertainty about what was going to happen to us. Some of the Lamas were eager to have us executed, while the Pombo and the others had nearly decided the night before to send us back to the border. Unfortunately, it seems[36] that the Pombo had a vision during the night in which a spirit warned him that if he didn't kill us, he and his country would face a great disaster. "You can kill the Plenki," the spirit reportedly said, "and no one will hold you accountable if you do. The Plenkis are afraid to confront the Tibetans."

Among the Lamas no important step is taken without incantations and reference to occult science, so the Pombo ordered a Lama to cut off a lock of my hair, which he did with a very blunt knife, and then the Pombo rode up with it in his hand to the lamasery to consult the oracle. The lock was handed in for inspection, and it seems that, after certain incantations, the oracle answered that I must be beheaded or the country would be in great danger.

Among the Lamas, no important decision is made without rituals and a nod to mystical knowledge, so the Pombo had a Lama cut off a lock of my hair, which he did with a very dull knife. Then the Pombo rode off with it in hand to consult the oracle at the lamasery. The lock was presented for examination, and it turns out that after some rituals, the oracle proclaimed that I had to be beheaded or the country would face serious danger.

The Pombo rode back apparently disappointed, and now ordered that one of my toe-nails should be cut; after which operation, performed with the same blunt knife, the oracle was again consulted as to what should be done, and unhappily gave the same answer.

The Pombo rode back looking disappointed and then ordered that one of my toe-nails be cut. After this was done with the same dull knife, the oracle was consulted again about what should be done, and unfortunately, it gave the same answer.

Three such consultations are usually held by the high court of the assembled Lamas, the Tibetans on the third occasion producing for the oracle's decision a piece of a finger-nail. The Lama who was about to cut this off examined my hands behind and spread my fingers apart, expressing great surprise and astonishment. In a moment all the Lamas and soldiers came round and examined my manacled hands; a repetition of my experience at the Tucker Monastery. The Pombo, too, on being informed, immediately came and inspected my fingers, and the proceedings were at once stopped.

Three consultations typically take place with the high court of the assembled Lamas. During the third meeting, the Tibetans present a piece of a fingernail for the oracle’s decision. The Lama who was about to cut it off examined my hands from behind and spread my fingers apart, showing great surprise and astonishment. Soon, all the Lamas and soldiers gathered around to look at my handcuffed hands, reminiscent of my experience at the Tucker Monastery. The Pombo, upon being notified, quickly came to check my fingers, and the proceedings were immediately halted.

When some weeks later I was released, I was able to learn from the Tibetans the reason of their amazement. My fingers happen to be webbed rather higher than usual, and this is most highly thought of in Tibet. He who possesses such fingers has, according to the Tibetans, a charmed life; [423] and no matter how much one tries, no harm can be done to him. Apart from the question whether there was much charm or not in my life in Tibet, there is no doubt that this trifling superstition did much towards hastening the Pombo's decision as to what was to be our fate.

When I was released a few weeks later, I learned from the Tibetans why they were so amazed. My fingers are webbed a little higher than usual, and this is highly regarded in Tibet. According to the Tibetans, someone with such fingers has a charmed life; [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] no matter what happens, no harm can come to them. Whether or not my life in Tibet was truly charmed, there’s no doubt that this small superstition played a big role in the Pombo's decision about our fate.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[36] The Tibetan Lamas stated this to the Political Peshkar Karak Sing, our frontier officer.

[36] The Tibetan Lamas told this to the Political Peshkar Karak Sing, our border officer.


[424]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XCIII

Our lives to be spared—An unpleasant march—Chanden Sing still alive—A sleepless night—Towards the frontier—Long and painful marches—How we slept at night—A map drawn with blood.

The Pombo ordered that my life should be spared, and that I should on that very day start on my return journey towards the Indian frontier. He took from my own money one hundred and twenty rupees, which he placed in my pocket for my wants during the journey, and commanded that, though I must be kept chained up, I was to be treated kindly, and my servants also.

The Pombo ordered that my life be spared and that I should begin my journey back to the Indian frontier that very day. He took one hundred and twenty rupees from my own money and put them in my pocket for my needs during the trip. He also commanded that, although I had to be kept in chains, I and my servants were to be treated kindly.

When all was ready, Mansing and I were led on foot to Toxem, our guard consisting of some fifty horsemen riding on ponies. We had to travel at a great speed despite our severely lacerated feet, our aching bones, and the sores and wounds with which we were covered all over. The soldiers led me tied by the neck like a dog, and dragged me along when, panting, exhausted and suffering, I could not keep up with the ponies. We crossed several cold streams, sinking in water and mud up to our waists.

When everything was set, Mansing and I were taken on foot to Toxem, with our guard made up of about fifty horsemen on ponies. We had to move quickly despite our badly injured feet, sore bones, and the cuts and bruises all over our bodies. The soldiers pulled me along, tied by the neck like a dog, dragging me when I was panting, exhausted, and in pain, unable to keep up with the ponies. We crossed several cold streams, getting stuck in the water and mud up to our waists.

At Toxem, to my great delight, I beheld Chanden Sing still alive. He had been kept prisoner in the mud-house, where he had remained tied upright to a post for over three days, and for four days he had not eaten food nor drunk anything. He was told that I had been beheaded. He was in a dreadful condition; almost dying from his wounds, cold and starvation.

At Toxem, to my great joy, I saw that Chanden Sing was still alive. He had been held captive in the mud house, where he had been tied upright to a post for more than three days, and for four days he hadn't eaten or drunk anything. He had been told that I had been executed. He was in a terrible state; almost dying from his injuries, suffering from cold and starvation.

We were detained there for the night, half-choked by smoke in one of the rooms of the mud-house packed with soldiers, who, with a woman of easy morals, gambled the whole night, and sang and swore and fought, preventing us from sleeping for even a few minutes.

We were stuck there for the night, barely able to breathe because of the smoke in one of the rooms of the mud house filled with soldiers, who, along with a woman of loose morals, gambled all night, sang, swore, and fought, making it impossible for us to sleep for even a few minutes.

[425]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Chanden Sing tied to a Post

Chanden Sing tied to a post


[426]The next day at sunrise Chanden Sing and I were placed on yaks, not on riding saddles, but on pack-saddles such as those shown in the illustration in chapter xl. p. 223. Poor Mansing was made to walk, and was beaten mercilessly when, tired and worn out, he fell or remained behind. They again tied him with a rope by the neck and dragged him along in a most brutal manner. We had a strong guard to prevent our escaping, and they demanded fresh relays of yaks and ponies and food for themselves at all the encampments, so that we travelled very fast. In the first five days we covered one hundred and seventy-eight miles, the two longest marches being respectively forty-two and forty-five miles; but afterwards we did not cover quite such great distances.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]The next day at sunrise, Chanden Sing and I were put on yaks, not in riding saddles, but on pack-saddles like those shown in the illustration in chapter xl. p. 223. Poor Mansing had to walk and was beaten mercilessly whenever he fell or lagged behind, completely exhausted. They tied him with a rope around his neck and dragged him along in a brutal way. We had a strong guard to stop us from escaping, and they demanded fresh yaks, ponies, and food for themselves at every camp, so we traveled very quickly. In the first five days, we covered one hundred and seventy-eight miles, with the two longest marches being forty-two and forty-five miles; but after that, we didn’t travel quite as far.

A White Yak

A White Yak


We suffered considerably on these long marches, as the soldiers ill-treated us and would not allow us to eat every day for fear we should get too strong. They let us have food only every two or three days, and our exhaustion and the pain caused by riding those wretched yaks in our wounded condition were terrible.

We endured a lot during these long marches, as the soldiers treated us poorly and wouldn’t let us eat every day for fear we would get too strong. They only gave us food every two or three days, and our exhaustion along with the pain from riding those miserable yaks in our injured state was unbearable.

All our property had been taken away from us, and our clothes were in rags and swarming with vermin. We were

All our belongings had been taken from us, and our clothes were torn and crawling with bugs. We were

[427]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Map Drawn in Blood during Captivity

Map Drawn in Blood during Captivity


[428] bare-footed and practically naked. The first few days we generally marched from before sunrise till sometimes an hour or two after sunset; and when we reached camp we were torn off our yaks and our jailers fastened iron cuffs round our ankles, in addition to those we had already round our wrists. Being considered quite safe, we were left to sleep out in the open without a covering of any kind, and often lying on snow or deluged with rain. Our guard generally pitched a tent under which they slept; but even when they did not have one, they usually went to brew their tea some fifty yards or so from us.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] barefoot and almost naked. For the first few days, we mostly marched from just before sunrise until sometimes an hour or two after sunset; and when we arrived at camp, we were yanked off our yaks and our captors locked iron cuffs around our ankles, in addition to the ones we already had on our wrists. Considered quite secure, we were left to sleep outside without any covering, often lying on snow or getting soaked by rain. Our guards usually set up a tent where they slept; but even when they didn’t have one, they often went to make their tea about fifty yards away from us.

Helped by my two servants, who sat by me to keep watch and to screen me, I managed, at considerable risk, to keep a rough record of the journey back, on a small piece of paper that had remained in my pocket when I had been searched by the Tibetans. As I did when on the rack, I used to draw my right hand out of its cuff, and, with a small piece of bone I had picked up as pen, and my blood as ink, I drew brief cipher notes, and a map of the whole route back.

With the help of my two servants, who sat beside me to keep watch and protect me, I managed, at significant risk, to keep a rough record of the journey back on a small piece of paper that had stayed in my pocket when the Tibetans searched me. Just like when I was on the rack, I pulled my right hand out of its cuff, and with a small piece of bone I had found as a pen, using my blood as ink, I sketched brief cipher notes and a map of the entire route back.

Necessarily, as I had no instruments with which to take careful observations, I had to content myself with taking my bearings by the sun, the position of which I got fairly accurately by constantly watching the shadow projected by my body on the ground. Of course, when it rained or snowed, I was altogether at a loss, and had to reckon my bearings by the observations of the previous day.

Necessarily, since I didn’t have any tools to make precise observations, I had to settle for figuring out my direction using the sun, which I could track pretty accurately by constantly watching the shadow my body cast on the ground. Of course, when it rained or snowed, I was completely lost and had to estimate my direction based on the observations from the previous day.


[429]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XCIV

South of the outward journey—Severity of our guard—Ventriloquism and its effects—Terrible but instructive days—The Southern source of the Brahmaputra—Leaving Yutzang.

We travelled, as can be seen by the dotted red line on the map attached to this book, first W. then W.N.W., N.W., W. and N.W., following the Brahmaputra along a course South of the outward journey, until we reached the boundary of the Yutzang[37] (central, or Lhassa) province. Our guard were not only severe with us, but they also ill-treated us in every possible way. One or two of the soldiers, however, showed kindness and thoughtfulness, bringing us a little butter or tsamba whenever they could do so unseen by their comrades. The guard was changed so frequently that we had no chance of making friends with them, and each lot seemed worse than the last.

We traveled, as you can see from the dotted red line on the map attached to this book, first west, then west-northwest, northwest, west again, and northwest, following the Brahmaputra along a path south of our outward journey, until we reached the boundary of the Yutzang[37] (central, or Lhassa) province. Our guards were not only strict with us, but they also mistreated us in every way possible. However, one or two of the soldiers showed kindness and consideration, bringing us a little butter or tsamba whenever they could do so without their comrades seeing. The guards were changed so often that we had no chance to make friends with them, and each new group seemed worse than the last.

A very curious incident happened one day, causing a scare among them. We had halted near a cliff, and the soldiers were some twenty yards off. Having exhausted every means I could think of to inspire these ruffians with respect, I resorted to the performance of some ventriloquial feats, pretending to speak and to receive the answers from the summit of the cliff. The Tibetans were terror-stricken. They asked me who was up there. I said it was some one I knew.

A very curious incident happened one day, causing a scare among them. We had stopped near a cliff, and the soldiers were about twenty yards away. After trying every possible way to make these tough guys respect me, I decided to do some ventriloquism, pretending to speak and hear responses from the top of the cliff. The Tibetans were absolutely terrified. They asked me who was up there. I told them it was someone I knew.

"Is it a Plenki?"

"Is it a Plenki?"

"Yes."

Yes.

Immediately they hustled us on our yaks and mounted their ponies, and we left the place at headlong speed.

Immediately, they rushed us onto our yaks and jumped on their ponies, and we left the place at full speed.

On reaching a spot which from observations taken on my outward journey I reckoned to be in longitude 83° 6′ 30″ E. and latitude 30° 27′ 30″ N. I had a great piece of luck. It is at this point that the two principal sources of the[430] Brahmaputra meet and form one river, the one coming from the N.W., which I had already followed, the other proceeding from the W.N.W. The Tibetans, to my delight, selected the southern route, thus giving me the opportunity of visiting the second of the two principal sources of the great river. This second stream rises in a flat plain, having its first birth in a lakelet in approximate longitude 82° 47′ E. and latitude 30° 33′ N. I gave the Northern source my own name, a proceeding which I trust will not be regarded as immodest in view of the fact that I was the first European to visit both sources and of all the circumstances of my journey.

Upon reaching a spot that I estimated to be at longitude 83° 6′ 30″ E and latitude 30° 27′ 30″ N, I got very lucky. It’s here that the two main sources of the[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Brahmaputra come together to form one river, with one flowing from the N.W., which I had already followed, and the other coming from the W.N.W. To my delight, the Tibetans chose the southern route, giving me the chance to explore the second main source of this great river. This second stream starts in a flat plain, originating in a small lake at approximately longitude 82° 47′ E and latitude 30° 33′ N. I decided to name the Northern source after myself, which I hope won't be seen as boastful since I was the first European to visit both sources and given all the circumstances of my journey.

One of Our Guard

One of Our Guards


This period of our captivity was dreary, yet interesting and instructive, for, as we went along, I got the soldiers to teach me some Tibetan songs, not unlike those of the Shokas in character, and from the less ill-natured men of our guard I picked up, by judicious questioning, a considerable amount of information, which, together with that collected from my own observations, I have given in this book.

This time in captivity was dull, but also interesting and educational. As we moved along, I convinced the soldiers to teach me some Tibetan songs, which were similar to those of the Shokas. From the less hostile members of our guard, I was able to gather a lot of information through careful questioning, which, along with what I observed myself, I've included in this book.

Over a more southerly and lower pass than the Maium Pass, by which, healthy, hopeful and free, we had entered the province of Yutzang, we now left it, wounded, broken down, naked and prisoners.

Over a lower and more southern pass than the Maium Pass, through which we had entered the province of Yutzang feeling healthy, hopeful, and free, we now left it, injured, defeated, stripped bare, and as prisoners.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[37] Also written U-tzang.

Also spelled U-tzang.


[431]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XCV

Easier times—Large encampments—Suffocating a goat—A Tarjum's encampment—Tokchim—Old friends—Musicians—Charity.

We now proceeded in a North-westerly direction, and, once clear of the sacred Yutzang province, our guard behaved with rather less cruelty. With the little money the Pombo had permitted me to keep we were allowed to purchase food enough to provide us with more frequent meals, and, while we ate, the soldiers removed our handcuffs, which they temporarily placed round our ankles. Thus, with utensils lent us by our guard, we were able to cook some food; and, although we had to serve it on flat stones instead of dishes, it seemed indeed delicious.

We now moved in a north-west direction, and, once we were out of the sacred Yutzang province, our guards showed a bit less cruelty. With the little money the Pombo allowed me to keep, we were able to buy enough food for more regular meals. As we ate, the soldiers took off our handcuffs and put them around our ankles for a while. Using utensils lent to us by our guards, we managed to cook some food; and although we had to serve it on flat stones instead of actual plates, it tasted amazing.

We crossed over our former track, and then followed it almost in a parallel line, but some miles North of it, along an undulating, clayey plateau, thus avoiding the marshy plain which we had found so troublesome to cross on our journey out. We found large numbers of black tents here and there, and one night, when we were encamped by some small lakes, we were permitted to purchase a goat. A soldier, a good fellow who had been very friendly to us, selected a fine fat one for us, and we were looking forward with pleasure to a solid meal, when we found to our dismay that we had no means of despatching the animal. We could not behead it, as the Tibetans would not trust us with a knife or sword, and the Tibetans themselves refused to kill the animal for us in any other way. Eventually our soldier friend allowed his scruples to be overcome by the payment of a rupee, and proceeded to kill the animal in a most cruel fashion. He tied its legs together, and, having stuffed the nostrils with mud, he held the poor beast's mouth closed with one hand until it was suffocated. The soldier during [432] the performance revolved his prayer-wheel with his free hand, praying fervently all the while.

We retraced our earlier path and then followed it almost parallel, several miles to the north, along a rolling, clayey plateau, avoiding the marshy plain we had struggled to cross on our way out. We spotted many black tents scattered around, and one night, while camping near some small lakes, we were allowed to buy a goat. A soldier, a nice guy who had been very friendly to us, picked out a plump one for us, and we were eagerly anticipating a hearty meal, only to discover with dismay that we had no way to kill the animal. We couldn’t behead it because the Tibetans wouldn’t trust us with a knife or sword, and the Tibetans themselves refused to kill the goat for us in any other way. Eventually, our soldier friend let his principles slide for the payment of a rupee and went on to kill the animal in a very cruel manner. He tied its legs together, stuffed the nostrils with mud, and held the poor creature’s mouth shut with one hand until it suffocated. Throughout the whole process, the soldier turned his prayer wheel with his free hand, praying earnestly the entire time. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Soldier Suffocating Goat

Soldier choking goat


We found ourselves at last in the plain, where a Tarjum's encampment of some two hundred tents was to be seen, and here we remained one night. There was a large assemblage of Lamas and soldiers. In the middle of the night we were suddenly and roughly roused from sleep, and made to move our camp about a mile or so from the settlement; and, early in the morning, having crossed the large stream, we proceeded in a South-westerly direction, reaching the encampment of the Tokchim Tarjum the same night. Here we were met by the officers who had on a previous occasion brought us gifts, and whom we had routed with all their soldiers when they threatened us.

We finally arrived at the plain, where we saw a Tarjum camp with about two hundred tents, and we stayed there for one night. There was a big group of Lamas and soldiers. In the middle of the night, we were abruptly awakened and forced to move our camp about a mile away from the settlement. Early in the morning, after crossing the large stream, we headed southwest and reached the Tokchim Tarjum camp that same night. There, we were greeted by the officers who had previously brought us gifts, and whom we had defeated along with all their soldiers when they threatened us.

This time they behaved very decently, the oldest of them showing us every civility, and professing great admiration for our courage in persevering against such heavy odds. The old gentleman did all he could to make us comfortable, and even called up two strolling musicians for our amusement. One man wore a peculiar four-cornered head-dress made of skin. He played with a bow on a two-stringed instrument, while his companion, a child, danced and went through

This time, they acted very politely. The oldest among them showed us a lot of courtesy and expressed great admiration for our bravery in continuing despite the tough challenges. The older gentleman did everything he could to make us feel comfortable and even brought in two street musicians for our entertainment. One of the musicians wore a unique four-cornered hat made of leather. He played with a bow on a two-stringed instrument, while his companion, a young child, danced and performed.

[433]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Strolling Musicians

Street Musicians


[434] certain clumsy contortions, going round every few minutes with his tongue thrust out to beg for tsamba from the audience. The Tibetans are very charitable towards beggars, and not only on this, but on other occasions, I noticed that they seldom refused, no matter however small their donations might be, to give tsamba or pieces of butter or chura to the mendicants. The older musician had a square club passed through his girdle, and at intervals he laid down his instrument, and, using the club as a sword, gave an imitation of a martial dance, exactly like the one I have described as performed by the Shokas. Every now and then, too, he applied it to the boy's back and head, to inspire him with fresh vigour, and this generally drew roars of laughter from the audience.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] certain awkward movements, going around every few minutes with his tongue sticking out, begging for tsamba from the audience. The Tibetans are very generous toward beggars, and not just on this occasion, I noticed they rarely refused to give tsamba or pieces of butter or chura to those in need, no matter how small the contributions might be. The older musician had a square club hanging from his belt, and occasionally he set down his instrument and, using the club like a sword, performed a mock martial dance, just like the one I described being done by the Shokas. Every now and then, he would also hit the boy's back and head with it to motivate him, which usually got loud laughs from the audience.

An Old Beggar

A Homeless Person


[435]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XCVI

Towards Mansarowar—Mansing's vision—Bathing in Mansarowar.

The next day, amidst repeated good-byes and professions of friendship on the part of our hosts and jailers, we departed towards Mansarowar, and late in the afternoon reached the Tucker village and Gomba, where we put up at the same serai in which I had slept on my way out. All our bonds were here removed for good, and we enjoyed comparative freedom, though four men walked by my side wherever I went, and an equal number looked after Chanden Sing and Mansing. Naturally we were not allowed to go far from the serai, but we could prowl about in the village. I took this opportunity to have a swim in the Mansarowar Lake, and Chanden Sing and Mansing again paid fresh salaams to the gods and plunged in the sacred water.

The next day, amid repeated goodbyes and declarations of friendship from our hosts and guards, we set off toward Mansarowar. Late in the afternoon, we arrived at Tucker village and Gomba, where we stayed at the same serai where I had rested on my way out. All our restrictions were finally lifted, and we enjoyed a bit of freedom, although four men accompanied me wherever I went, and another four kept an eye on Chanden Sing and Mansing. Naturally, we weren't allowed to wander far from the serai, but we could explore the village. I took this chance to swim in Mansarowar Lake, while Chanden Sing and Mansing again offered their respects to the gods and dove into the sacred water.

The Lamas, who had been so friendly during my former visit, were now extremely sulky and rude; and, after having witnessed our arrival, they all withdrew into the monastery, banging the gate after them. All the villagers, too, hastily retired to their respective houses. The place was deserted with the exception of the soldiers round us.

The Lamas, who had been so friendly during my previous visit, were now really moody and rude; and after seeing us arrive, they all went back into the monastery, slamming the gate behind them. The villagers also quickly returned to their homes. The place was empty except for the soldiers around us.

Poor Mansing, who, worn out and in great pain, was sitting close by me, looking vaguely at the lake, had an extraordinary vision, the result, probably, of fever or exhaustion.

Poor Mansing, who, exhausted and in a lot of pain, was sitting near me, staring vaguely at the lake, experienced an incredible vision, likely a result of fever or fatigue.

"Oh, sahib," said he, as if in a dream, though he was quite awake; "look, look! Look at the crowd of people walking on the water. There must be more than a thousand men! Oh, how big they are getting!... And there is God ... Seva.... No, they are Tibetans, they are coming to kill us, they are Lamas! Oh, come, sahib, they are so near.... Oh, they are flying...!"

"Oh, sir," he said, almost like he was dreaming, even though he was fully awake; "look, look! Look at the crowd of people walking on the water. There must be more than a thousand men! Oh, they are getting so big!... And there is God ... Seva.... No, they are Tibetans; they are coming to kill us, they are Lamas! Oh, come, sir, they are so close.... Oh, they are flying...!"

[436]"Where are they?" I asked.

"Where are they?" I asked.

I could see that the poor fellow was under an hallucination. His forehead was burning and he was in a high fever.

I could tell that the poor guy was hallucinating. His forehead was hot, and he had a high fever.

"They have all disappeared!" he exclaimed, as I placed my hand on his forehead and he woke from his trance.

"They're all gone!" he exclaimed, as I put my hand on his forehead and he came out of his trance.

He seemed quite stupefied for a few moments; and, on my inquiring of him later whether he had seen the phantom crowd again, he could not remember ever having seen it at all.

He looked pretty dazed for a moment; and when I later asked him if he had seen the ghostly crowd again, he couldn’t recall ever having seen it at all.

A Tibetan Shepherd

A Tibetan shepherd


The natives came to visit us in the serai during the evening, and we had great fun with them, for the Tibetans are full of humour and have many comical ways. As for ourselves, now that we were only two marches from Taklakot, it was but natural that our spirits were high. Only two more days of captivity, and then a prospect of freedom.

The locals came to visit us in the serai in the evening, and we had a great time with them because the Tibetans are very funny and have many amusing habits. As for us, since we were only two days' journey from Taklakot, it was natural that we felt upbeat. Just two more days of being stuck here, and then we could look forward to freedom.

It was still dark when we were roused and ordered to start. The soldiers dragged us out of the serai. We entreated them to let us have another plunge in the sacred Mansarowar, and the three of us were eventually allowed to do so. The water was bitterly cold, and we had nothing to dry ourselves with.

It was still dark when we were awakened and told to get moving. The soldiers pulled us out of the serai. We begged them to let us have one more dip in the sacred Mansarowar, and eventually the three of us were allowed to go. The water was freezing, and we had nothing to dry off with.

It was about an hour before sunrise when we were placed on our yaks and, surrounded by some thirty soldiers, rode off.

It was about an hour before sunrise when we got on our yaks, and surrounded by around thirty soldiers, we set off.

[437]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Interior of a Serai

Interior of a Caravanserai


[438]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XCVII

Suna—Wilson and the Political Peshkar across the frontier—A messenger—Our progress stopped—Diverting us over the Lumpiya Pass—Condemned to certain death—We attack our guard—Lapsang and the Jong Pen's private secretary—A document—Nearing Kardam—Retracing our steps—Dogmar.
Tea Churn (Open)
Tea Churn (Open)

When we had been marching for several hours, our guard halted to have their tea. A man named Suna, and his brother and son, whom I had met in Garbyang, halted near us, and from them I heard that news had arrived in India that I and my two men had been beheaded, and that thereupon Doctor Wilson and the Political Peshkar Karak Sing had crossed over the frontier to ascertain the facts, and to attempt to recover my baggage, &c. My joy was intense when I heard that they were still at Taklakot. I persuaded Suna to return as fast as he could, and to inform Wilson that I was a prisoner, and tell him my whereabouts. I had barely given Suna this message when our guard seized the man and his brother and roughly dismissed them, preventing them from having any further communication with us. As soon as we were on the march again, a horseman rode up to us with strict orders from the Jong Pen of Taklakot not to let us proceed any farther towards the frontier by the Lippu Pass, which we could now have reached in two days, but to take us round by the distant Lumpiya Pass. At this time of the year the Lumpiya would be impassable; and we should have to make a further journey of at least fifteen or sixteen days, most of it over snow and ice, during which we, in our starved and weakened state, would inevitably succumb. [439] We asked to be taken into Taklakot, but our guard refused, and in the meantime the Jong Pen of Taklakot had sent other messengers and soldiers to ensure the fulfilment of his orders, and to prevent our further progress.

When we had been marching for several hours, our guard stopped for tea. A man named Suna, along with his brother and son, whom I had met in Garbyang, paused nearby, and from them I learned that news had reached India that I and my two men had been executed, and that Doctor Wilson and the Political Peshkar Karak Sing had crossed the border to find out the truth and try to recover my belongings, etc. I was overjoyed to hear that they were still in Taklakot. I convinced Suna to hurry back and inform Wilson that I was a prisoner and to tell him where I was. Just as I had given Suna this message, our guard grabbed him and his brother and roughly sent them away, preventing any further communication with us. Once we were on the move again, a horseman approached us with strict orders from the Jong Pen of Taklakot not to let us go any farther towards the border by the Lippu Pass, which we could have reached in two days, but to take us the long way around by the distant Lumpiya Pass. At this time of year, the Lumpiya would be impossible to cross; we would have to take a journey of at least fifteen or sixteen days, mostly over snow and ice, during which we, in our starved and weakened state, would likely not survive. [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] We asked to be taken into Taklakot, but our guard refused, and in the meantime, the Jong Pen of Taklakot had sent more messengers and soldiers to ensure his orders were carried out and to stop our progress.

Our guard, now strengthened by the Taklakot men, compelled us to leave the Taklakot track, and we began our journey towards the cold Lumpiya. This was murder, and the Tibetans, well knowing it, calculated on telling the Indian authorities that we had died a natural death on the snows.

Our guard, now reinforced by the Taklakot men, forced us to leave the Taklakot route, and we started our journey toward the cold Lumpiya. This was lethal, and the Tibetans, fully aware of this, planned to inform the Indian authorities that we had died of natural causes in the snow.

A Bearer of Bad News

Bad News Bearer


We were informed that we should be left at the point where the snows began, that the Tibetans would give us no food, no clothes and no blankets, and that we should be abandoned to our own devices. This, needless to say, meant certain death.

We were told that we would be dropped off at the point where the snow started, that the Tibetans wouldn’t provide us with any food, clothes, or blankets, and that we would be left to fend for ourselves. This, of course, meant certain death.

We determined to stand no more, and to play our last card. After travelling some two and a half miles westward of the Taklakot track, we declined to proceed any more in that direction. We said that, if they attempted to force us on, we were prepared to fight our guard, as whether we died by their swords and matchlocks, or frozen to death on the Lumpiya, was quite immaterial to us.

We decided we wouldn't take it anymore and were ready to play our last card. After traveling about two and a half miles west of the Taklakot route, we refused to go any further in that direction. We stated that if they tried to push us onward, we were ready to fight our guards because whether we died by their swords and guns or froze to death on the Lumpiya didn’t matter to us.

The guard, in perplexity, decided to let us halt there for the night, so as to have time to send a messenger to Taklakot to inform the Jong Pen, and ask for further instructions.

The guard, feeling confused, decided to let us stay there for the night so he could send a messenger to Taklakot to inform the Jong Pen and ask for further instructions.

[440]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

A Shoka-Tibetan Half-caste

A Shoka-Tibetan mixed race


During the night the order came that we must proceed, so the next morning our guard prepared to start us again towards the Lumpiya. Then we three semi-corpses collected what little strength remained in us, and suddenly made an attack on them with stones; whereupon, incredible as it may seem, our cowardly guard turned tail and bolted! We went on in the direction of Taklakot, followed at a distance [441] by these ruffians, who were entreating us to make no further resistance and to go with them where they wanted us to go. If we did not, they said, they would all have their heads cut off. We refused to listen to them, and kept them away by throwing stones at them.

During the night, we got the order to move out, so the next morning our guards got ready to take us back to Lumpiya. Then we three barely clinging to life gathered what little strength we had left and suddenly launched an attack on them with stones; unbelievably, our cowardly guards ran away! We headed towards Taklakot, with those thugs following us at a distance, begging us not to resist anymore and to go with them wherever they wanted. They threatened that if we didn't, they would all lose their heads. We ignored them and kept them at bay by throwing stones.

Sheep Loads for Borax and Grain
Sheep Loads for Borax and Grain

We had gone but a few miles when we met with a large force of soldiers and Lamas, despatched by the Jong Pen to prepare for our death. Unarmed, wounded, starved and exhausted as we were, it was useless attempting to fight against such odds. As it was, when they saw we were at liberty, they made ready to fire on us.

We had only traveled a few miles when we encountered a large group of soldiers and Lamas sent by the Jong Pen to prepare for our demise. Unarmed, injured, starved, and exhausted, we had no chance of fighting back against such overwhelming numbers. As it turned out, when they saw we were free, they got ready to shoot at us.

The Jong Pen's Chief Minister, a man called Lapsang, and the Jong Pen's Private Secretary, were at the head of this party. I went to shake hands with them and held a long and stormy palaver, but they kept firm and insisted on our turning away from the frontier, now that we were almost within a stone's-throw of it, and we must perforce proceed by the high Lumpiya Pass. Those were the Jong Pen's orders, and they, as well as I, must obey them. They would not give us or sell us either animals or clothes which even the small sum of money I had on me would have been sufficient to buy; and they would not provide us with an ounce of food. We emphatically protested, and said we preferred to die where we were. We asked them to kill us then and there, for we would not budge an inch westwards.

The Jong Pen's Chief Minister, a man named Lapsang, and the Jong Pen's Private Secretary were leading this group. I went to shake their hands and had a long, heated discussion with them, but they remained firm and insisted that we turn away from the border, even though we were almost within a stone's throw of it. We had to go through the high Lumpiya Pass. Those were the Jong Pen's orders, and they, just like me, had to follow them. They wouldn't give us or sell us any animals or clothes, even though I had enough money to buy some; and they refused to provide us with any food at all. We strongly protested and said we preferred to die right there. We asked them to kill us then and there because we wouldn’t move an inch further west.

Lapsang and the Jong Pen's Private Secretary now cunningly suggested that I should give them in writing the [442] names of the Shokas who had accompanied me to Tibet, probably with the object of confiscating their land and goods. As I said I could not write Tibetan or Hindustani, they requested me to do it in English. This I did, but substituting for the names of my men and my signature sarcastic remarks, which must have caused the Tibetans some surprise when they had the document translated.

Lapsang and the Jong Pen's Private Secretary cleverly suggested that I should provide them in writing the [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] names of the Shokas who had accompanied me to Tibet, likely with the intention of seizing their land and belongings. Since I told them I couldn't write in Tibetan or Hindustani, they asked me to do it in English. I agreed, but instead of using the names of my men and signing my name, I filled it with sarcastic comments, which must have surprised the Tibetans when they had the document translated.

As, however, they refused to kill us there and then, and as Lapsang showed us great politeness and asked us to go by the Lumpiya Pass as a personal favour to him, I reluctantly decided to accept their terms rather than waste any more time, now that we were so near British soil.

As they wouldn't kill us right then and there, and since Lapsang was very polite and asked us to take the Lumpiya Pass as a personal favor to him, I reluctantly decided to accept their terms instead of wasting any more time, now that we were so close to British soil.

A Jumli Shed

A Jumli Shack


Escorted by this large force of men, we had nearly reached Kardam when, in the nick of time, a horseman came up at full gallop and hailed our party. We stopped, and the man overtook us and handed Lapsang a letter. It contained an order to bring us immediately into Taklakot.

Escorted by this large group of men, we were almost at Kardam when, just in time, a horseman approached us at full speed and called out to our party. We halted, and the man caught up with us and handed Lapsang a letter. It contained an order to bring us straight into Taklakot.

We retraced our steps along the undulating plateau above the Gakkon River, and late at night we reached the village of Dogmar, a peculiar settlement in a valley between two high cliffs of clay, the natives of which live in holes pierced in the cliff.

We backtracked along the rolling plateau above the Gakkon River, and late at night we arrived at the village of Dogmar, an unusual settlement in a valley between two steep clay cliffs, where the locals live in holes carved into the cliff.

[443]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

We Attacked our Guard with Stones

We threw stones at our guard.


[444]Lapsang, the Jong Pen's Private Secretary, and the greater portion of their soldiers, having changed their ponies, went on to Taklakot; but we were made to halt here, when yet another letter came from the Jong Pen saying he had changed his mind and we must, after all, go by the Lumpiya Pass!

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Lapsang, the Jong Pen's Private Secretary, and most of their soldiers, after switching their ponies, continued on to Taklakot; however, we were forced to stop here when yet another letter arrived from the Jong Pen saying he had changed his mind and we had to go through the Lumpiya Pass after all!

Lapsang and the Jong Pen's Private Secretary

Lapsang and the Jong Pen's Personal Assistant


[445]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XCVIII

A Commotion—The arrival of an army—Elected General-in-chief—How we were to slaughter the Jong Pen's soldiers—My men lay down their arms—Towards Taklakot—Delaling and Sibling—Taklakot at last.

During the night there was a great commotion in the place, the people running about and shouting, and a large number of ponies with their riders arriving.

During the night, there was a lot of chaos in the area, with people running around and yelling, and a bunch of ponies and their riders coming in.

Tibet is farmed out, so to speak, to officials who have become small feudal kings, and these are generally at logger-heads among themselves. To this regal jealousy, and to disputes over the rights of the road, was due the appearance of this new army. There were altogether some hundred and fifty men armed with matchlocks and swords. The chieftain of this band came to me with eight or ten other officers, and spoke so excitedly that I feared there was trouble in store for us. There was indeed. These new arrivals were officers and soldiers from Gyanema, Kardam, and Barca, and they had come with strict orders from the Barca Tarjum that we were on no account to traverse his province or to cross by the Lumpiya Pass. This was very amusing and tantalising, for we had now no way across the frontier open to us. Our guard and some of the Jong Pen's men who had remained behind, finding they were in the minority, thought it prudent to eclipse themselves; and I, anxious as I naturally was to get out of the country as quickly as possible, approved of all that the Gyanema men said, and urged them to fight in case the Jong Pen still insisted on my going through the Tarjum's province. All ways out of the country were barred to us, and unless we resorted to force, I felt we would never escape at all.

Tibet is essentially controlled by officials who have become like small feudal lords, and they are usually at odds with each other. This intense rivalry and conflicts over road rights led to the emergence of this new army. There were around one hundred fifty men armed with matchlocks and swords. The leader of this group approached me with eight or ten other officers, speaking so passionately that I worried there might be trouble ahead. And there was. These newcomers were officers and soldiers from Gyanema, Kardam, and Barca, and they arrived with strict orders from the Barca Tarjum that we were not to enter his territory or cross the Lumpiya Pass under any circumstances. This situation was both amusing and frustrating, as it left us with no options to cross the border. Our guard and some of the Jong Pen's men who stayed behind, realizing they were outnumbered, decided it was wise to keep a low profile; and I, eager to leave the country as soon as possible, supported everything the Gyanema troops said and encouraged them to fight if the Jong Pen insisted on forcing me through the Tarjum's territory. All routes out of the country were closed to us, and unless we resorted to force, I felt we might never get away at all.

The Gyanema men asked me whether I would lead them in case of a fight with the Jong Pen's soldiers; and I, though [446] not very confident of their courage, accepted the post of General-in-chief pro tem., Chanden Sing and Mansing being promoted there and then to be my aides-de-camp. We spent the greater part of the night in arranging our plan of attack on the Jong Pen's troops, and when all was properly settled, the Tibetans, to show their gratitude, brought me a leg of mutton, some tsamba, and two bricks of tea.

The Gyanema men asked me if I would lead them in a fight against the Jong Pen's soldiers, and even though I wasn't very sure about their bravery, I took the position of General-in-chief temporarily. Chanden Sing and Mansing were promoted on the spot to be my aides-de-camp. We spent most of the night organizing our plan of attack against the Jong Pen's troops, and once everything was in place, the Tibetans, wanting to show their appreciation, brought me a leg of mutton, some tsamba, and two bricks of tea.

Jumli Trader and His Wife in Tibet

Jumli Trader and His Wife in Tibet


The morning came, and I was given a fine pony to ride, as were also Chanden Sing and Mansing. Then, followed by my Tibetan troops—a grand cavalcade—we started gaily towards Taklakot. We had been informed that the Jong Pen was concentrating his men at a certain point on the road to bar our way: and it was this point that we must force. My Tibetans said that they hated the Jong Pen's men, and swore they would slaughter them all if they made any stand.

The morning arrived, and I received a great pony to ride, just like Chanden Sing and Mansing. Then, with my Tibetan troops—a magnificent procession—we cheerfully set off toward Taklakot. We had been told that the Jong Pen was gathering his men at a specific spot on the road to block our path: it was this spot that we needed to push through. My Tibetans expressed their hatred for the Jong Pen's soldiers and vowed to take them all out if they tried to resist.

"But they are such cowards," declared one of the Tibetan officers, "that they will run away."

"But they are such cowards," said one of the Tibetan officers, "that they will just run away."

All this talk stopped suddenly when we heard the distant tinkling of our enemies' horse-bells, and though I encouraged my men as best I could, a panic began to spread among them. The Jong Pen's men came in sight, and

All this conversation came to an abrupt halt when we heard the faint sound of our enemies' horse-bells. Even though I tried to motivate my men as much as possible, a sense of panic started to spread among them. The Jong Pen's men became visible, and

[447]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Cliff Habitations

Cliff Dwellings


[448] presently I witnessed the strange spectacle of two armies face to face, each in mortal terror of the other.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] right now I saw the bizarre sight of two armies staring each other down, both terrified to make a move.

Notwithstanding my remonstrances, matchlocks and swords were deposited on the ground with anxious eagerness by both parties, to show that only peaceful intentions prevailed. Then a conference was held, in which everybody seemed ready to oblige everybody else except me.

Notwithstanding my protests, matchlocks and swords were eagerly placed on the ground by both sides, to demonstrate that only peaceful intentions were present. Then a meeting took place, where everyone seemed willing to help everyone else except for me.

While this was still proceeding, a horseman arrived with a message from the Jong Pen, and at last, to everybody's satisfaction, permission was granted for us to proceed into Taklakot.

While this was still happening, a horseman arrived with a message from the Jong Pen, and finally, to everyone's satisfaction, permission was given for us to move into Taklakot.

Chokdens near Taklakot

Chokdens near Taklakot


My army retraced its steps towards the North-west, and, deposed from my high military post, which I had occupied only a few hours, I became again a private individual and a prisoner. With a large escort we were taken along the Gakkon, by barren cliffs and on a rocky road. We passed hundreds of Chokdens large and small, mostly painted red, and mani walls. Then, having descended by a precipitous track on whitish clay-soil, we reached a thickly inhabited district, where stone houses were scattered all over the landscape. We saw on our left the large monastery of Delaling and, a little way off, the Gomba of Sibling; then, describing a sweeping curve among stones and boulders, we rounded the high graceful cliff, on the top of which towered the fort and monasteries of Taklakot.

My army headed back northwest, and after being removed from my high military position, which I had only held for a few hours, I became just an ordinary person and a prisoner again. With a large escort, we were taken along the Gakkon, navigating barren cliffs and a rocky road. We passed hundreds of Chokdens, big and small, mostly painted red, as well as mani walls. Then, after descending a steep path on light-colored clay soil, we arrived in a densely populated area, where stone houses dotted the landscape. To our left, we saw the large Delaling monastery and, a little further away, the Gomba of Sibling; then, taking a sweeping curve among stones and boulders, we rounded the high, elegant cliff where the fort and monasteries of Taklakot stood tall.

[449]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Taklakot Fort

Taklakot Fort


[450]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER XCIX

Free at last—Among friends—Forgetting our past troubles—Confiscated baggage returned—A scene with Nerba—Suna's message delivered—How our release was brought about—Across the frontier—Photography at Gungi.
Pundit Gobaria
Pundit Gobaria

Such was our anxiety, when we reached this point, lest something should happen and we should be taken back again, that, as soon as we were across the wooden bridge over the Gakkon, Chanden Sing and I, on perceiving the large Shoka encampment at the foot of the hill, lashed our ponies and ran away from our guard. Thus, galloping our hardest along the high cliff, where hundreds of people live in holes in the clay, we found ourselves at last among friends again. The Shokas, who had come over to this market to exchange their goods with the Tibetans, were astounded when they saw us, recognising us at first with difficulty.

Such was our anxiety when we reached this point, worried that something might happen and we’d be taken back again, that as soon as we crossed the wooden bridge over the Gakkon, Chanden Sing and I, spotting the large Shoka encampment at the foot of the hill, urged our ponies and bolted from our guard. Thus, we galloped as fast as we could along the high cliff, where hundreds of people live in holes in the clay, and finally found ourselves among friends again. The Shokas, who had come to this market to trade their goods with the Tibetans, were shocked to see us, barely recognizing us at first.

We inquired at once, of course, for Dr. Wilson, and when we found him the good man could, himself, barely recognise us, so changed were we. He seemed deeply moved at seeing our condition.

We asked right away for Dr. Wilson, and when we found him, the good man could hardly recognize us himself, we had changed so much. He seemed really affected by seeing how we were doing.

When the news of our arrival spread in camp, we met with the greatest kindness at the hands of everybody. In a corner of Wilson's tent was a large quantity of candied [451] sugar—several pounds; and so famished was I that I quickly devoured the lot. Later, my Shoka friends brought in all kinds of presents in the shape of eatables, which Rubso, the Doctor's cook, was set to prepare.

When everyone in the camp heard we had arrived, they welcomed us with amazing kindness. In a corner of Wilson's tent, there was a large stash of candied sugar—several pounds worth; and I was so hungry that I quickly consumed it all. Later, my Shoka friends brought various gifts of food, which Rubso, the Doctor's cook, was busy preparing.

The Political Peshkar, Karak Sing, hurried to me with a change of clothes, and other garments were given me by Dr. Wilson. My own ragged attire was literally swarming with vermin; our guard had not allowed us a single change of raiment, nor would they even hear of our washing. It was by a very special favour and on account of its sanctity that we were allowed to plunge in the sacred Mansarowar Lake.

The Political Peshkar, Karak Sing, rushed to me with a change of clothes, and Dr. Wilson provided me with some additional garments. My own tattered outfit was crawling with bugs; our guards didn't let us have even one change of clothes, nor would they allow us to wash anything. It was only through a special favor and because of its sacredness that we were permitted to bathe in the holy Mansarowar Lake.

Later in the day my wounds and injuries were examined by Dr. Wilson, who sent his reports to the Government of India, to the Commissioner of Kumaon, and to the Deputy Commissioner at Almora.

Later in the day, Dr. Wilson examined my wounds and injuries and sent his reports to the Government of India, the Commissioner of Kumaon, and the Deputy Commissioner at Almora.

Dr. Wilson

Dr. Wilson


Tenderly nursed by Wilson and Karak Sing, and having partaken of plenty of good food, I found my spirits, which had fallen rather low, reviving as if by magic; and, strange to say, after a few hours of happiness, I was already beginning to forget the hardships and suffering I had endured. I remained three days at Taklakot, during which time part of my confiscated baggage was returned by the Tibetans, and, as can well be imagined, I was overjoyed to discover that among the things thus recovered were my diary, note-books, maps and sketches. My firearms, some money, the ring I have before referred to as having been a gift of my mother, several [452] mathematical instruments, collections, over 400 photographic negatives, and various other articles were still missing,[38] but I was glad to get back as much as I did.

Tenderly taken care of by Wilson and Karak Sing, and having enjoyed plenty of good food, I felt my spirits, which had been quite low, lifting as if by magic. Strangely, after just a few hours of happiness, I was starting to forget the hardships and suffering I had gone through. I stayed three days in Taklakot, during which some of my confiscated belongings were returned by the Tibetans. As you can imagine, I was thrilled to find that among the items I got back were my diary, notebooks, maps, and sketches. My firearms, some money, the ring I mentioned before that my mother gave me, several mathematical instruments, collections, over 400 photographic negatives, and various other items were still missing, but I was happy to recover as much as I did.

To Dr. Wilson's tent came the Tokchim Tarjum, his private secretary Nerba, whom the reader may remember as having played an important part in my tortures, the Jong Pen's secretary, and old Lapsang in a fine green velvet coat with ample sleeves. As can be seen by perusing the Government Enquiry and Report in the Appendix to this book, the above-mentioned Tibetan officers admitted before the Political Peshkar, Dr. Wilson, Pundit Gobaria, and many Shokas, that the account I gave of my tortures—identical with the one in these pages—was correct in every detail. They even professed to be proud of what they had done, and used expressions not at all flattering to the British Government, which they affected to treat with great contempt.

To Dr. Wilson's tent came the Tokchim Tarjum and his private secretary Nerba, whom you might remember for his key role in my suffering, along with the Jong Pen's secretary and old Lapsang wearing a nice green velvet coat with big sleeves. As you can see by looking at the Government Inquiry and Report in the Appendix of this book, the previously mentioned Tibetan officials admitted to the Political Peshkar, Dr. Wilson, Pundit Gobaria, and many Shokas that my account of the torture—exactly the same as what's written here—was accurate in every detail. They even claimed to be proud of what they did and made remarks that were far from flattering towards the British Government, which they seemed to look down upon.

Karak Sing Pal, the Political Peshkar

Karak Sing Pal, the Political Peshkar


I nearly got the Political Peshkar and the Doctor into a scrape; for my blood, the little I had left, was boiling with rage at hearing the Tibetan insults. The climax came when Nerba refused to give back my mother's ring, which he had upon him. In a passion I seized a knife that was lying by me, and leaped upon Nerba, the ruffian who, besides, had fired at me and had held me by the hair while my eyes were being burnt prior to my abortive execution. Wilson and[453] Karak Sing seized and disarmed me, but there was a general stampede of the Tibetan officers, and thus our interview and negotiations were brought to an abrupt end.

I almost got the Political Peshkar and the Doctor into trouble because my blood, what little I had left, was boiling with anger over the Tibetan insults. The breaking point came when Nerba refused to return my mother's ring that he had. In a fit of rage, I grabbed a knife that was beside me and jumped at Nerba, the scoundrel who had also shot at me and held me by the hair while my eyes were being burned before my failed execution. Wilson and[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Karak Sing grabbed me and took the knife away, but there was a mass panic among the Tibetan officers, which abruptly ended our meeting and negotiations.

Mansing Showing Cuts under his Feet

Mansing is showing cuts on his feet.


In further conversation I now learnt how my release had been brought about. Dr. Wilson and the Political Peshkar, having received the news that my servants and myself had been beheaded, proceeded across the frontier to make inquiries and try to recover my property. They heard then from the man Suna, whom I had sent from Mansarowar with my message, that I was still a prisoner, covered with wounds, in rags and starving. They had not men enough to force their way further into the country to come and meet me; besides, the Tibetans watched them carefully; but they, together with Pundit Gobaria, made strong representations to the Jong Pen of Taklakot, and, by threatening him that an army would be sent up if I were not set at liberty, they at last obtained from the reluctant Master of the fort[39] a permission that I should be brought into Taklakot. The permission was afterwards withdrawn, but was at last allowed to be carried into execution, and it is entirely due to the good offices and energy of these three gentlemen that I am to-day alive and safe—though not yet sound.

In further conversations, I learned how my release had come about. Dr. Wilson and the Political Peshkar, after hearing the news that my servants and I had been beheaded, crossed the border to inquire and try to recover my property. They then heard from Suna, the man I had sent from Mansarowar with my message, that I was still a prisoner, covered in wounds, in rags, and starving. They didn’t have enough men to push further into the country to come and meet me; besides, the Tibetans were watching them closely. However, along with Pundit Gobaria, they made strong pleas to the Jong Pen of Taklakot, threatening that an army would be sent if I wasn't set free. Eventually, they got reluctant permission from the Master of the fort[39] to bring me into Taklakot. While that permission was later rescinded, it was ultimately granted, and it is entirely thanks to the efforts and determination of these three gentlemen that I am alive and safe today—though not completely well yet.

Pundit Gobaria, who will be remembered as having been mentioned in my early chapters, is the most influential Shoka trader in Bhot, and on very friendly terms with the Tibetans. He was the intermediary through whom [454] negotiations were carried on for my immediate release, and it was largely owing to his advice to the Jong Pen that they resulted satisfactorily.

Pundit Gobaria, who I mentioned in my earlier chapters, is the most influential Shoka trader in Bhot and has a close relationship with the Tibetans. He was the go-between for negotiations aimed at my immediate release, and it was primarily due to his advice to the Jong Pen that they ended successfully.

A Glance at the Forbidden Land from the Lippu Pass

A Glimpse of the Forbidden Land from the Lippu Pass


After a brief rest to recover sufficient strength, I recommenced the journey towards India, and, having crossed the Lippu Pass (16,780 feet), found myself at last again on British soil. We descended by slow stages to Gungi, where, in Dr. Wilson's dispensary, I had to halt for a few days on account of my weak condition.

After a short break to regain enough strength, I continued my journey to India and, after crossing the Lippu Pass (16,780 feet), I finally found myself back on British soil. We made our way down slowly to Gungi, where, due to my weak condition, I had to stop for a few days at Dr. Wilson's dispensary.

Wilson had here a quantity of my baggage, instruments, cameras, plates, &c., which I had discarded at the beginning of my journey, and I immediately had photographs taken of my two servants and myself, showing our wounds and our shocking general condition. Photographs of my feet, taken more than a month after I had been untied from the rack, showed a considerable swelling, as well as the scars, round the ankle and on the foot where the ropes had cut into my flesh. In the full-face photograph here reproduced can be noticed the injuries to my left eye, as well as the marks of the hot iron on the skin of my forehead and nose. Chanden Sing's legs, which were photographed on the same occasion, though now practically healed, were

Wilson had a lot of my luggage here—equipment, cameras, plates, etc.—that I had left behind at the start of my journey. I quickly had photos taken of my two servants and me, showing our injuries and our terrible overall condition. The pictures of my feet, taken more than a month after I was freed from the rack, revealed significant swelling, along with the scars around my ankle and on my foot where the ropes had dug into my skin. In the full-face photo reproduced here, you can see the injuries to my left eye, as well as the burn marks from the hot iron on my forehead and nose. Chanden Sing's legs, which were photographed at the same time, although now mostly healed, were

[455]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

The Author—February 1897 The Author—October 1897

The Author—February 1897 The Author—October 1897


[456] still much swollen, and the marks can be seen in the illustration where big patches of skin and flesh had been torn away by the lashes, producing nasty wounds.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] still very swollen, and you can see the marks in the illustration where large patches of skin and flesh were ripped away by the lashes, resulting in painful wounds.

Chanden Sing's Legs, Showing Marks of Lashes and Wounds Healed

Chanden Sing's Legs, Showing Scars from Beatings and Healed Injuries


FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[38] Some of the articles missing were some months later recovered by the Government of India. See Appendix.

[38] Some of the missing items were recovered a few months later by the Government of India. See Appendix.

[39] Jong Pen = Master of the fort.

[39] Jong Pen = Master of the fort.


[457]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

CHAPTER C

Civilisation once more—Paralysis—The Tinker Pass in Nepal—Kindly natives—Mr. Larkin—Government Inquiry—Back to Tibet—Final good-bye to the Forbidden Land—The return journey—Farewell to Mansing—Home again.
Mr. J. Larkin
Mr. J. Larkin

It was really wonderful how soon we began to pick up again under the good care of Dr. Wilson and the influence of proper food and clothing. When I saw my face for the first time in a looking-glass, I nearly had a fit, so ghastly did it look; but I felt more like myself when I had shaved off my beard of several months' growth; and, after the ever-obliging Wilson, with a pair of blunt scissors, had spent a whole afternoon in performing the functions of hairdresser, I began to look almost civilised again. Clothes were a great nuisance at first, but I soon got into the way of wearing them.

It was amazing how quickly we started to recover with Dr. Wilson's excellent care and the right food and clothing. When I saw my face in the mirror for the first time, I was shocked at how awful it looked; but I felt more like myself after I shaved off my beard, which I had been growing for several months. And after the ever-helpful Wilson spent a whole afternoon using some blunt scissors to give me a haircut, I finally started to look somewhat civilized again. At first, wearing clothes was really annoying, but I soon got used to it.

The injuries to my spine were severe, and gave me much trouble. At times the whole of my left side became as if paralysed. Besides, I invariably experienced the greatest difficulty in sitting down when I had been standing, and in getting up when I had been sitting down. Through the great strain they had undergone, my joints continued stiff and swollen, and remained so for months. I could see comparatively well with my right eye, but was unable to use the left at all.

The injuries to my spine were serious and caused me a lot of problems. Sometimes my entire left side felt like it was paralyzed. Also, I always had a hard time sitting down after standing and getting up after sitting. Because of the intense strain they had been through, my joints stayed stiff and swollen for months. I could see fairly well with my right eye, but I was completely unable to use my left eye.

When slightly better I made an excursion to Tinker, in[458] Nepal, there being a pass in the neighbourhood I had not visited. Having crossed into Nepal at Chongur, I followed a course towards 86° (b.m.), until we came to the Zirri River, descending precipitously between high snowy ridges. Then I kept on the right bank of the Tinker River, first through forests of firs, then among barren rocks and along ravines, the track being extremely bad in some places. The general direction was 88° (b.m.) until the Tinker bridge was reached, by which the stream was crossed, from which point I travelled some three miles to 74° (b.m.), and arrived at the Tinker village, a few Shoka houses perched on the slope of the mountain, having for a background the magnificent snowy peaks dividing Nepal from Tibet. From the village the track to the pass is easy, first to 78° 30′ (b.m.), as far as the Zentim bridge, two miles off, where the Dongon River, descending from 106° (b.m.), meets the Zeyan Yangti,[40] and, following the latter stream for another four miles, one reaches the Tinker Pass, the distance between here and Taklakot being twelve miles. At 106° (b.m.) I observed a very high snowy peak, the Dongon.

When I felt a bit better, I took a trip to Tinker in Nepal because there was a pass nearby that I hadn't explored yet. After crossing into Nepal at Chongur, I headed towards 86° (b.m.) until I reached the Zirri River, which dropped sharply between tall snowy ridges. I then stayed on the right bank of the Tinker River, first going through fir forests, then moving among barren rocks and along ravines, with the path being really rough in some areas. My general direction was 88° (b.m.) until I got to the Tinker bridge, where I crossed the stream. From there, I traveled about three miles to 74° (b.m.) and arrived at the Tinker village, which consisted of a few Shoka houses set on the mountain slope, with stunning snowy peaks in the background separating Nepal from Tibet. The trail to the pass from the village is straightforward, first heading to 78° 30′ (b.m.), as far as the Zentim bridge, which is two miles away, where the Dongon River, coming from 106° (b.m.), joins the Zeyan Yangti, and after following that stream for another four miles, you reach the Tinker Pass, which is twelve miles from Taklakot. At 106° (b.m.), I noticed a very tall snowy peak called the Dongon.

Chanden Sing and Mansing enjoying their first Meal according to the Rules of their Castes

Chanden Sing and Mansing enjoying their first meal according to the rules of their castes.


Having seen all that I wanted to see here I made my way back to Garbyang with all speed, as I was anxious to return to Europe as soon as possible, and I travelled down to Askote in company of Peshkar Karak Sing. The Nerpani road had fallen in two or three places, and rough shaky bridges had been constructed across the deep precipices,

Having seen everything I needed to see, I hurried back to Garbyang because I wanted to return to Europe as soon as possible. I traveled down to Askote with Peshkar Karak Sing. The Nerpani road had collapsed in a couple of places, and unstable bridges had been built across the deep cliffs.

[459]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

A Tibetan Temporary Shed

A Tibetan temporary shelter


[460] one of which can be seen in the illustration below. We met with a hearty reception everywhere, and kindness after kindness was showered upon us by all alike.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] One of which can be seen in the illustration below. We were warmly welcomed everywhere, and everyone showed us kindness after kindness.

A Shaky Passage on the Nerpani Road

A Bumpy Journey on the Nerpani Road


At Askote I was the guest of the good old Rajiwar, in whose garden I encamped, and who bestowed upon me every conceivable care and attention. Mr. J. Larkin, hastily despatched by the Government of India to conduct an Inquiry into my case, met me there, and, though still suffering much pain, I insisted on turning back once more towards Tibet, to help him in his task. By quick marches we reached Garbyang, where a deputation of Shokas, who had returned from Tibet, came to me, Mr. Larkin having gone on ahead. Among them I noticed several of the men who had betrayed me, and as I was told that there was no way of punishing

At Askote, I was hosted by the kind old Rajiwar, where I set up camp in his garden, and he provided me with every possible care and attention. Mr. J. Larkin was quickly sent by the Government of India to look into my case; he met me there, and even though I was still in a lot of pain, I insisted on heading back towards Tibet to assist him with his task. We made good progress and arrived in Garbyang, where a group of Shokas who had returned from Tibet came to see me, as Mr. Larkin had gone ahead. Among them, I recognized several men who had betrayed me, and I was informed that there was no way to punish

[461]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

View of Askote—Showing Rajiwar's Palace

View of Askote—Featuring Rajiwar's Palace


Snapshot of Shoka Villagers being Routed

Snapshot of Shoka Villagers Being Pushed Out


[462] them for their treachery, I took justice into my own hands, proceeding with a stout stick to teach them some idea of faithfulness, whereupon the whole village ran up to get the fellows out of my clutches. Encouraged by the Tibetans, the Shokas made some insulting remarks about Englishmen; so the fight became general until, ill as I was, and alone against some hundred and fifty men, I succeeded in routing them. The thing might justly be doubted had I not been able to take a snap-shot of them as they fled helter-skelter.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] For their betrayal, I took matters into my own hands, grabbing a sturdy stick to teach them a lesson about loyalty. This caused the whole village to rush in to rescue the guys from me. Encouraged by the Tibetans, the Shokas made some disrespectful comments about Englishmen, which escalated into a full-blown fight. Even though I was feeling terrible and was up against about one hundred and fifty men, I managed to drive them off. It might have seemed unbelievable if I hadn't captured a photo of them running away in chaos.

Dr. Wilson, Myself, Mr. Larkin, the Political Peshkar, and Jagat Sing ready to ascend the Lippu Pass

Dr. Wilson, me, Mr. Larkin, the Political Peshkar, and Jagat Sing are ready to hike up the Lippu Pass.


Soon after leaving Garbyang, I overtook Mr. Larkin, and we climbed towards the snows. We intended crossing over the Lippu Pass into Tibet to give the Jong Pen an opportunity of being interviewed, but he refused to meet us.

Soon after leaving Garbyang, I caught up with Mr. Larkin, and we climbed toward the snow. We planned to cross over the Lippu Pass into Tibet to give the Jong Pen a chance to be interviewed, but he refused to meet with us.

All the same, to give the Tibetans every chance, we climbed over the Lippu Pass. It had been snowing heavily and it was very cold. A Shoka had only a few days previously been lost in the snow in trying to cross over, and had been frozen to death. There were some twelve feet of snow, and

All the same, to give the Tibetans every chance, we climbed over the Lippu Pass. It had been snowing heavily and it was really cold. A Shoka had only a few days earlier been lost in the snow while trying to cross over and had frozen to death. There was about twelve feet of snow, and

[463]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Tinker in Nepal

Tinker in Nepal


[464] the ascent was by no means easy. However, after toiling for some two hours we reached the summit of the pass, and I slipped once more across the boundary into Tibet. Dr. Wilson, the Political Peskhar, Jagat Sing, and two chaprassis were with us. The illustration in which Dr. Wilson appears holding an umbrella to shelter himself from the high wind, with Mr. Larkin and our ponies on his right, and showing also the pile of stones and flying prayers placed there by the Shokas and Tibetans, was taken by me on the pass. Having found a suitable spot where the wind did not cut quite so furiously into our faces, we halted for a considerable time and waited impatiently on the Tibetan side of the boundary for the Jong Pen or his deputies, to whom letters had been sent, to come and meet us; but they did not put in an appearance, so in the afternoon of October 12 I definitely turned my back on the Forbidden Land. I was still far from well, but was glad indeed at the prospect of seeing England and my friends again.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] The climb wasn’t easy at all. However, after about two hours of hard work, we reached the top of the pass, and I crossed back into Tibet. Dr. Wilson, the Political Peskhar, Jagat Sing, and two porters were with us. The picture of Dr. Wilson holding an umbrella to shield himself from the strong wind, with Mr. Larkin and our ponies on his right, along with the pile of stones and flying prayers left by the Shokas and Tibetans, was taken by me at the pass. We found a spot where the wind wasn’t blowing quite as harshly in our faces, so we stopped for a while, waiting impatiently on the Tibetan side of the border for the Jong Pen or his deputies, to whom letters had been sent, to come and meet us; but they never showed up, so in the afternoon of October 12, I finally turned my back on the Forbidden Land. I wasn’t fully recovered, but I was really looking forward to seeing England and my friends again.

On the Lippu Pass

At Lippu Pass


We returned to our camp, a few hundred feet lower than the pass, where we had left our baggage and our men, who had suffered much from mountain sickness.

We went back to our camp, a few hundred feet below the pass, where we had left our supplies and our team, who had endured a lot from altitude sickness.

[465]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Mr. Larkin's Party and Mine Halting near the Lippu Pass

Mr. Larkin's Party and Mine Stopping near the Lippu Pass


[466]It was at this camp that the accompanying photograph, which represents me bathing at 16,300 feet, was taken by Mr. Larkin. Chanden Sing, having broken the ice in a stream, poured water from a brass vessel over me, standing, with my feet on snow, in a high wind and with the temperature at 12° Fahr. I reproduce it to show that even in my reduced condition I was able to stand an unusual degree of cold. As a matter of fact, the water that had been taken from under the ice immediately froze on my shoulders, with the result that in a second I had icicles hanging on each side of my neck and a shawl of ice over my shoulders.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]It was at this camp that the accompanying photograph, which shows me bathing at 16,300 feet, was taken by Mr. Larkin. Chanden Sing, after breaking the ice in a stream, poured water from a brass vessel over me while I stood, with my feet on snow, in a strong wind and the temperature at 12° Fahrenheit. I’m sharing this image to demonstrate that even in my weakened state, I was able to tolerate an unusual level of cold. In fact, the water that had been taken from beneath the ice quickly froze on my shoulders, resulting in icicles hanging on each side of my neck and a shawl of ice over my shoulders.

Mr. Larkin looking out for the Jong Pen from the Lippu Pass

Mr. Larkin watching for the Jong Pen from the Lippu Pass


Having fulfilled our mission, Mr. Larkin and I returned by very quick marches to Almora; and it was a great satisfaction to me that in conducting the Government Inquiry in an open Court, Mr. Larkin was able to obtain ample testimony from Shokas and Tibetans as to my treatment, all of which was duly reported to the Government of India, and also to the Foreign Office and India Office in London. A copy of the Inquiry and Government Report will be found in the Appendix.

Having completed our mission, Mr. Larkin and I quickly made our way back to Almora. I was very pleased that during the Government Inquiry in an open Court, Mr. Larkin was able to gather plenty of testimony from Shokas and Tibetans regarding my treatment. All of this was properly reported to the Government of India, as well as to the Foreign Office and India Office in London. You'll find a copy of the Inquiry and Government Report in the Appendix.

Winter setting in, the Shokas, who had by now all returned

Winter setting in, the Shokas, who had by now all returned

[467]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Bathing at 16,300 Feet

Bathing at 16,300 feet


Dharchula. Deserted Habitations of Shokas

Dharchula. Abandoned Homes of Shokas


[468] from Tibet, were beginning to migrate to their winter homes at Dharchula, and when we passed the settlement many were already at work repairing the fallen-down roofs of their hibernal habitations. A large number of Tibetans with their sheep had also come over to winter in British territory, and their encampments could be seen all along the road wherever there was sufficient grass for their flocks. The Tibetans—Lamas and officials—maintained a high-handed

[a id="Pg_468">[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] from Tibet were starting to move to their winter homes in Dharchula, and as we passed the settlement, many were already busy fixing the roofs of their winter shelters. A significant number of Tibetans with their sheep had also crossed over to spend the winter in British territory, and their camps were visible all along the road wherever there was enough grass for their animals. The Tibetans—Lamas and officials—acted with considerable authority.

"I told you," exclaimed the old savage, "that whoever visits the home of the Raots will have misfortune"

"I told you," exclaimed the old savage, "that anyone who visits the home of the Raots will face bad luck."


and insolent demeanour as long as we were in Bhot, which they regarded as part of their own country; a fact observed not only by Dr. Wilson and the Political Peskhar, who travelled with us up to the frontier and back, as far as Askote, but also by Mr. Larkin, who more than once was astounded at the impudence of Tibetans when on British soil. It must, however, be said for them that the moment they had come out of Bhot, and had to deal with Hindoos instead of Shokas, their manner changed considerably. Hypocritical deference and servility replaced haughtiness and insolence. Near the frontier we encountered hundreds of yaks and ponies laden with wood which the Tibetans cut from our forests, and compel our natives to take across into Tibet for the consumption of those[469] Tibetans who do not come over to our side to spend the winter.

and rude behavior as long as we were in Bhot, which they considered part of their own country; this was noted not only by Dr. Wilson and the Political Peskhar, who traveled with us to the border and back, as far as Askote, but also by Mr. Larkin, who was repeatedly shocked by the arrogance of Tibetans when they were on British territory. However, it should be noted that once they left Bhot and had to interact with Hindoos instead of Shokas, their attitude changed significantly. Pretend respect and servility replaced their arrogance and rudeness. Near the border, we saw hundreds of yaks and ponies loaded with wood that the Tibetans cut down from our forests, and they forced our locals to take it across into Tibet for the use of those[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Tibetans who don't come over to our side to spend the winter.

At Askote the old Raot who had predicted ill-luck for me when I visited the Raots' dwelling, came to remind me of his prophecy. "I told you," exclaimed the old savage, "that whoever visits the home of the Raots will have misfortune," and I photographed the old scoundrel on the spot, together with his mates, who listened with satisfaction to the words that came from the lips of their prophet.

At Askote, the old Raot who had warned me about bad luck when I went to the Raots' home came to remind me of what he had said. "I told you," the old man exclaimed, "that anyone who visits the Raots' house will face misfortune." I took a photo of the old scoundrel right then, along with his friends, who nodded with satisfaction at the words of their prophet.

A Picturesque Bit of Almora

A Scenic Spot in Almora


We proceeded with no delay to Almora, and from there went straight on to Naini Tal, the summer seat of the Government of the North-West Provinces and Oudh, where a conference was held on my case by the Lieutenant-Governor.

We quickly went to Almora, and from there we headed straight to Naini Tal, the summer retreat of the Government of the North-West Provinces and Oudh, where the Lieutenant-Governor held a conference about my case.

Having there enjoyed the unbounded hospitality of that able and energetic officer, Colonel Grigg, Commissioner of Kumaon, I paid off my faithful coolie Mansing, giving him enough for a start in life. He accompanied me to Kathgodam, the terminus of the railway, and showed genuine grief when Chanden Sing and I stepped into the train. As we steamed away from the platform, he salaamed me affectionately, having previously begged that, if ever I should go back to Tibet, I would take him with me; only next time [470] he too must be provided with a rifle! That was the only condition.

After enjoying the incredible hospitality of the capable and energetic officer, Colonel Grigg, Commissioner of Kumaon, I settled up with my loyal porter, Mansing, giving him enough to start his new life. He accompanied me to Kathgodam, the end of the railway line, and showed real sadness when Chanden Sing and I got on the train. As we pulled away from the platform, he bowed to me affectionately, having previously asked that if I ever returned to Tibet, I would take him along; but next time, he insisted, he also needed to have a rifle! That was his only condition.

Chanden Sing, who remained as my servant, travelled with me to Bombay, and from there we went direct to Florence, the home of my parents, who had suffered in their anxiety at home almost as much as I did in the Forbidden Land.

Chanden Sing, who continued to be my servant, traveled with me to Bombay, and from there we went straight to Florence, where my parents lived. They had worried at home almost as much as I did in the Forbidden Land.

Raots Listening to the Account of My Misfortunes

Raots Listening to the Story of My Troubles


SOUTH-WESTERN TIBET

South-Western Tibet


FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[40] Yangti = River.

Yangti = River.


[471]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

APPENDIX

Letter from Sir William Lee Warner, C.S.I., Political and Secret Department, India Office, London.

"Honi soi. qui mal y pense."
"Honi soi.
qui mal y pense.
"

"Shame on him
who thinks badly of it.
"

 

 

 

 

India Office, Whitehall, S.W.

India Office, Whitehall, London

August 4, 1898.

August 4, 1898.

Dear Sir,

Dear Sir,

With reference to the request contained in your letter of the 27th, and to your interview with me of the same day I forward herewith for your use a copy of Mr. Larkin's "Inquiry and report" into your treatment by the Tibetans.

With regard to your request in your letter from the 27th, and our conversation on the same day, I’m sending you a copy of Mr. Larkin's "Inquiry and Report" about how you were treated by the Tibetans.

Yours faithfully,          

Sincerely,

(Signed)          W. Lee Warner.     

(Signed)          W. Lee Warner.

   A. Henry Savage Landor, Esq.

A. Henry Savage Landor, Esq.

GOVERNMENT REPORT BY J. LARKIN, Esquire, MAGISTRATE OF THE FIRST CLASS.

Mr. Arnold Henry Savage Landor having been reported to have been captured and tortured by the Tibetans, I was sent up to Garbyang in Byans to ascertain the facts.

Mr. Arnold Henry Savage Landor was reported to have been captured and tortured by the Tibetans, so I was sent up to Garbyang in Byans to find out the facts.

Mr. Landor arrived in India on the 10th of April last. He proceeded to Almora, where he arrived on the 27th idem. He stayed there until the 10th of May, to make arrangements for his travels in Tibet. At first he was advised to take some Gurkha soldiers with him, but this fell through, as the military did not accede to his request. He then, on the 27th May, arrived in Garbyang in Byans patti. It appears to have been his intention to have entered Tibet by the Lippu Lek Pass. This is the easiest, being about 16,780 feet [472] above sea level. It is the most frequented route taken by the traders of Byans and Chaudans, and is adjacent to Taklakot, a mart for wool, salt, borax, grain, &c. He was, however, frustrated in this, inasmuch as the Jong Pen of Taklakot came to know of Mr. Landor's intention and took steps to prevent it. He caused bridges to be destroyed and stationed guards along the route.

Mr. Landor arrived in India on April 10th. He went to Almora, reaching there on the 27th. He stayed until May 10th to set up his travels in Tibet. Initially, he was advised to take some Gurkha soldiers with him, but that plan fell through since the military didn’t approve his request. Then, on May 27th, he arrived in Garbyang in Byans patti. He intended to enter Tibet via the Lippu Lek Pass, which is the easiest route at about 16,780 feet [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] above sea level. This is the most commonly used route by traders from Byans and Chaudans and is near Taklakot, a market for wool, salt, borax, grain, etc. However, he faced setbacks when the Jong Pen of Taklakot learned about Mr. Landor's plans and took action to stop him. He had bridges destroyed and stationed guards along the route.

Moreover, he appears to have been kept fully cognisant of Mr. Landor's moves through the agency of his spies in Garbyang.

Moreover, he seems to have been kept fully aware of Mr. Landor's actions through his spies in Garbyang.

Under these circumstances Mr. Landor was compelled to resort to some other route, and selected the Lumpia Pass, which stands at an altitude of 18,150 feet.

Under these circumstances, Mr. Landor had to choose a different path and opted for the Lumpia Pass, which sits at an elevation of 18,150 feet.

On the 13th July last, Mr. Landor, with a following of thirty men, entered Tibet. He reached Gyanima, where he was stopped by the Barkha Tarjum. This personage, however, after some persuasion, consented to permit Mr. Landor and seven followers to go forward to the Mansarowar Lake.

On July 13th, Mr. Landor, accompanied by thirty men, entered Tibet. He arrived at Gyanima, where he was halted by the Barkha Tarjum. After some convincing, this individual agreed to allow Mr. Landor and seven of his companions to proceed to Mansarowar Lake.

Next day the accorded permission was withdrawn, and Mr. Landor and his party were turned back. The party returned three marches, when Mr. Savage Landor determined to go to Mansarowar by the unfrequented wilds.

Next day, the previously granted permission was taken back, and Mr. Landor and his group were sent back. They retraced three marches when Mr. Savage Landor decided to take the less traveled route to Mansarowar through the wilds.

On the 21st July, Mr. Landor, with nine followers, at midnight in a terrific snowstorm, climbed up the mountain and went off, the bulk of his party continuing their retreat to the Lumpia Lek. By this strategic move Mr. Landor baffled the Tibetan guards (Chaukidárs). He carefully avoided coming into contact with any of the inhabitants, and in order to do so was obliged to keep to the high mountains and unfrequented wilds.

On July 21st, Mr. Landor, along with nine followers, climbed up the mountain at midnight during a terrible snowstorm and set off, while most of his group continued their retreat to Lumpia Lek. With this strategic move, Mr. Landor outsmarted the Tibetan guards (Chaukidárs). He made sure to avoid any interactions with the locals, which meant he had to stick to the high mountains and remote wilderness.

Travelling thus, with the aid of his compass, sextant and sketch maps, he reached Mansarowar.

Traveling this way, with the help of his compass, sextant, and sketch maps, he arrived at Mansarowar.

Here five of his followers declined to accompany him any farther, so he paid and dismissed them. This was at Tucker. Thus Mr. Landor was reduced to a following of four men. He went on, however, and had accomplished but three marches more when two more of his followers deserted him at night. These went off with some of his supplies, all his servants' food, and ropes.

Here, five of his followers chose not to go any farther, so he paid them and let them go. This happened at Tucker. As a result, Mr. Landor was left with just four men. Nevertheless, he continued on, but after just three more marches, two more of his followers abandoned him at night. They took off with some of his supplies, all of his servants' food, and ropes.

Mr. Landor was now reduced to the following of a bearer (Chanden Sing) and a coolie (Mansing). Despite his misfortunes he determined to push on: his intention appears to have been to reach Lhassa.

Mr. Landor was now accompanied by a bearer (Chanden Sing) and a porter (Mansing). Despite his setbacks, he was determined to move forward: his goal seemed to be to get to Lhassa.

He went over the Mariam La Pass.[41] This attains an altitude of over 16,000 feet.

He crossed the Mariam La Pass.[41] This reaches an elevation of over 16,000 feet.

Meanwhile the deserters had bruited about the information of Mr. Landor's intention of getting to Lhassa.

Meanwhile, the deserters had spread the news about Mr. Landor's plan to reach Lhassa.

While crossing the Nio Tsambo River one of Mr. Landor's yaks went under. The yak was saved, but its valuable load, consisting of all the tinned provisions, Rs. 800 in cash, three pairs of shoes, one slaughtered sheep, wearing apparel, razors, skinning instruments, and some three hundred rifle cartridges, was lost.

While crossing the Nio Tsambo River, one of Mr. Landor's yaks went under. The yak was rescued, but its valuable load, which included all the canned food, Rs. 800 in cash, three pairs of shoes, one slaughtered sheep, clothing, razors, skinning tools, and around three hundred rifle cartridges, was lost.

[473]This accident was directly the cause of Mr. Landor's capture, as he and his two followers, who were footsore, starving, and disheartened, were driven to seek food and horses from the inhabitants of the country. On the 19th of August 1897 they went to a place called Toxem. The villagers received them well and promised to supply them with food and horses. Next morning, the 20th idem, a number of Tibetans came to Mr. Landor's tent bringing food and ponies.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]This accident directly led to Mr. Landor's capture, as he and his two companions, who were exhausted, starving, and discouraged, were forced to look for food and horses from the local people. On August 19, 1897, they went to a place called Toxem. The villagers welcomed them and promised to provide them with food and horses. The next morning, on the 20th, a group of Tibetans came to Mr. Landor's tent with food and ponies.

While Mr. Landor and his servants were engaged trying and selecting ponies, the crowd increased and came up behind its three victims.

While Mr. Landor and his servants were busy trying out and picking ponies, the crowd grew and gathered behind its three victims.

Suddenly, without any warning, the Tibetans rushed on Mr. Landor and his two servants, and overwhelming them by numbers, made prisoners of them. They cruelly bound their surprised victims. Then a number of soldiers (who had lain in ambush) arrived and took over the prisoners. The first person to be dealt with was the bearer Chanden Sing. He was accused of having taken his master into Tibet. He was questioned as to this, and also as to the maps and sketches found with Mr. Landor's things. I may mention that when the arrests were made the Tibetans took all of Mr. Landor's property, which they handled very roughly, damaging most of the things. Hearing the Tibetans accuse the bearer, Mr. Landor called out that his servant was in no way responsible for his having entered Tibet. Thereupon a Lama struck him (Mr. Landor) a blow on the head with the butt-end of his riding-whip. Chanden Sing was then tied down and flogged. He received two hundred lashes with whips, wielded by two Lamas. Then the prisoners were kept apart for the night, bound with cords. Next day Mr. Landor was placed on a horse, seated on a spiked pack-saddle. Mansing was put on a bare-backed horse. They still were bound. Mr. Landor's arms were secured behind his back. Thus they were taken off at a gallop towards Galshio. When the party were nearing that place they came up with a party of Lamas, awaiting them by the roadside. Here Mr. Landor's horse was whipped and urged to the front. A kneeling soldier, his musket resting on a prop, fired at Mr. Landor as he went past. The shot failed to take effect. Then they stopped the pony and fastened a long cord to Mr. Landor's handcuffs. The other end was held by a soldier on horseback. The party then continued their career, the Lamas having fallen in. While proceeding at full gallop, the horseman who held the cord attached to Mr. Landor's handcuffs, pulled hard at it to try and unhorse the latter. Had this occurred Mr. Landor must have been trampled to death under the troop of horsemen behind him. Thus they hurried onward till they neared Galshio,[42] when at a turn in the road a soldier was seen kneeling at the "ready," who fired a shot at Mr. Landor as he came abreast of him. This, like the previous shot, missed its object.

Suddenly, without any warning, the Tibetans charged at Mr. Landor and his two servants, overwhelming them with their numbers and taking them prisoner. They cruelly tied up their surprised victims. Then a group of soldiers, who had been lying in wait, arrived and took over the prisoners. The first to be interrogated was the bearer Chanden Sing. He was accused of having brought his master into Tibet. They questioned him about this and also about the maps and sketches found with Mr. Landor's belongings. I should mention that when the arrests were made, the Tibetans took all of Mr. Landor's possessions, handling them roughly and damaging most of them. Hearing the Tibetans blame the bearer, Mr. Landor shouted that his servant was not responsible for his entry into Tibet. At that moment, a Lama struck Mr. Landor on the head with the butt of his riding whip. Chanden Sing was then tied up and whipped. He received two hundred lashes administered by two Lamas. The prisoners were kept apart for the night, bound with ropes. The next day, Mr. Landor was placed on a horse, sitting on a spiked pack-saddle. Mansing was put on a bare-backed horse. They were still restrained. Mr. Landor's arms were tied behind his back. They were then taken off at a gallop towards Galshio. As the group neared that location, they encountered a party of Lamas waiting by the roadside. Here, Mr. Landor's horse was whipped and urged forward. A kneeling soldier, with his musket propped up, fired at Mr. Landor as he rode past. The shot missed. Then they stopped the pony and attached a long cord to Mr. Landor's handcuffs, with the other end held by a soldier on horseback. The group continued on, the Lamas having joined in. While moving at full speed, the horseman holding the cord attached to Mr. Landor's handcuffs pulled hard on it in an attempt to unhorse him. If that had happened, Mr. Landor would have been trampled to death by the group of horsemen behind him. They hurried onward until they approached Galshio,[42] when at a turn in the road, a soldier was seen kneeling with his weapon ready, who fired at Mr. Landor as he came alongside him. This shot, like the previous one, also missed.

Arriving at Galshio, Mr. Landor was torn off his pony. He was in a bleeding state, the spikes in the pack-saddle having severely [474] wounded his back. He asked for a few minutes' respite, but was jeeringly told by his guards that it was superfluous, as he was to be beheaded in a few minutes. He was then taken, his legs stretched as far as they could be forced apart, and then tied to the sharp edge of a log shaped like a prism. The cords were bound so tightly that they cut into the flesh.

Arriving at Galshio, Mr. Landor was yanked off his pony. He was in a bad way, with the spikes in the pack-saddle having seriously hurt his back. He asked for a few minutes to catch his breath, but his guards mockingly told him it was unnecessary, since he was going to be beheaded in a few moments. He was then taken, his legs stretched as far apart as they could be pulled, and tied to the sharp edge of a log shaped like a prism. The ropes were tied so tightly that they dug into his flesh.

Then a person named Nerba, the secretary of the Tokchim Tarjum, seized Mr. Landor by the hair of his head, and the chief official, termed the Pombo, came up with a red-hot iron, which he placed in very close proximity to Mr. Landor's eyes. The heat was so intense that for some moments Mr. Landor felt as if his eyes had been scorched out. It had been placed so close that it burned his nose. The Pombo next took a matchlock, which he rested on his victim's forehead and then discharged upwards.

Then a guy named Nerba, the secretary of the Tokchim Tarjum, grabbed Mr. Landor by his hair, and the chief official, called the Pombo, came over with a red-hot iron, holding it really close to Mr. Landor's eyes. The heat was so intense that for a few moments Mr. Landor felt like his eyes were going to burn out. It was positioned so close that it scorched his nose, too. The Pombo then took a matchlock, rested it on Mr. Landor's forehead, and fired it upward.

The shock was consequently very much felt. Handing the empty gun to an attendant soldier, the Pombo took a two-handed sword. He laid the sharp edge on the side of his victim's neck as if to measure the distance to make a true blow. Then wielding the sword aloft, he made it whiz past Mr. Landor's neck. This he repeated on the other side of the neck.

The shock was clearly felt. After handing the empty gun to a nearby soldier, the Pombo grabbed a two-handed sword. He pressed the sharp edge against the side of his victim's neck, almost as if he were gauging the right distance for a clean strike. Then, raising the sword high, he swung it past Mr. Landor's neck. He did this again on the other side of the neck.

After this tragic performance Mr. Landor was thrown to the ground and a cloth put over his head and face to prevent his seeing what was being done to his servant Mansing. This must have been done to make Mr. Landor believe that Mansing was being executed. After a short time the cloth was removed and Mr. Landor beheld his servant, with his legs stretched, tied to the same log. Mr. Landor was kept for twenty-four hours in this trying position, legs stretched as far as possible and arms bound to a pole, and Mansing for twelve hours. To add to their misery they were kept in the rain and were afterwards seated in a pool of water. The effect of this torture was to strain the muscles of the legs and arms and injure the spine.

After this tragic event, Mr. Landor was thrown to the ground and a cloth was placed over his head and face to stop him from seeing what was happening to his servant, Mansing. This was likely done to make Mr. Landor think that Mansing was being executed. After a little while, the cloth was taken off, and Mr. Landor saw his servant tied to the same log, legs stretched out. Mr. Landor was kept in this uncomfortable position for twenty-four hours, with his legs pulled as far as possible and his arms tied to a pole, while Mansing was restrained for twelve hours. To make things worse, they were left in the rain and then made to sit in a pool of water. This torture strained their leg and arm muscles and harmed the spine.

When Mr. Landor's legs were unloosed from their cords, they were so numbed and swollen that for sixteen hours he did not recover the use of them and feared they were mortifying. Mr. Landor's property was overhauled by the officials of Galshio and sealed up. On the afternoon of the third day at Galshio, the two prisoners were taken on foot to Toxem. It was a very trying march, inasmuch as several rivers had to be crossed.

When Mr. Landor's legs were freed from the ropes, they were so numb and swollen that it took him sixteen hours to regain their use, and he worried they were rotting. Mr. Landor's belongings were searched by the officials of Galshio and sealed up. On the afternoon of the third day in Galshio, the two prisoners were taken on foot to Toxem. It was a very difficult march since they had to cross several rivers.

On his arrival at Toxem, Mr. Landor saw his bearer Chanden Sing in a very precarious condition, as the latter had had no food for four days. During all this time the prisoners were firmly bound and carefully guarded. Next day, Mr. Landor and Chanden Sing were placed on yaks. Mansing had to walk. Thus they were taken in the direction of Mansarowar Lake. It was only on arrival at Mansarowar that his guards unbound Mr. Landor.

On his arrival at Toxem, Mr. Landor found his servant Chanden Sing in a really bad state since he hadn't eaten for four days. Throughout this entire time, the prisoners were tightly tied up and watched closely. The next day, Mr. Landor and Chanden Sing were put on yaks, while Mansing had to walk. They were then taken toward Mansarowar Lake. It wasn't until they reached Mansarowar that his guards finally untied Mr. Landor.

Arriving at Dogmar the party was stopped by the Jong Pen of Taklakot, who refused to give them passage through his district. This was a very serious affair, as it meant that the worn-out prisoners [475] would have to be taken by a long circuitous route viâ Gyanima and into India by the Lumpia Pass. This would probably have done for them. Owing to the intervention of the Rev. Harkua Wilson, of the Methodist Episcopal Mission, Peshkár Kharak Sing Pal and Pundit Gobaria, the most influential person among the Bhutias[43] of Byans, the Jong Pen was compelled to withdraw his prohibition and give his sanction to the prisoners being conveyed to Taklakot.

When the group arrived at Dogmar, they were stopped by the Jong Pen of Taklakot, who refused to let them pass through his territory. This was a serious issue, as it meant that the exhausted prisoners would have to take a long, roundabout route via Gyanima and into India through the Lumpia Pass. That would likely be the end for them. Thanks to the efforts of Rev. Harkua Wilson from the Methodist Episcopal Mission, Peshkár Kharak Sing Pal, and Pundit Gobaria, the most influential person among the Bhutias of Byans, the Jong Pen was forced to lift his ban and allow the prisoners to be taken to Taklakot.

Arriving at this place the prisoners were hospitably received by the Rev. Harkua Wilson, who is also a medical man. He examined their injuries and attended to them. His statement discloses the dreadful condition he found them in. The Tibetan guards made over some of Mr. Landor's property to him at Taklakot. It was then found that much property had not been restored. Mr. Landor had a list drawn up from memory of his unrestored property. This list (a copy) was handed to the Jong Pen of Taklakot.

Arriving at this place, the prisoners were warmly welcomed by Rev. Harkua Wilson, who is also a doctor. He looked over their injuries and took care of them. His account reveals the terrible condition he found them in. The Tibetan guards returned some of Mr. Landor's belongings to him at Taklakot. It was later discovered that a lot of property had not been returned. Mr. Landor made a list from memory of his missing belongings. A copy of this list was given to the Jong Pen of Taklakot.

I append the list. The Jong Pen has been called upon to restore the missing articles. He urges that the affair did not occur in his district, and that he is in no way responsible for the loss of the property.

I’m attaching the list. The Jong Pen has been asked to recover the missing items. He insists that the incident didn’t happen in his area and that he is not responsible for the loss of the property.

He has, however, promised to try to recover them, alleging that the affair has been reported to a superior authority at Gartok. From what I could gather here, it seems probable that all the missing property, save the money, will be restored. I tried to see the Jong Pen, but he pleaded illness, and the inutility of a meeting in which he had nothing new to disclose. This personage is notorious in these parts for his implacable hatred to English subjects.

He has, however, promised to try to get them back, claiming that the situation has been reported to a higher authority in Gartok. From what I could gather here, it seems likely that all the missing items, except the money, will be returned. I attempted to meet with the Jong Pen, but he said he was ill and there wasn't any point in a meeting since he had nothing new to share. This person is well-known around here for his relentless hatred of English people.

The account of the affair as given by Mr. Savage Landor is fully borne out by his two servants, and, moreover, the Tibetans who took part in it did not try to hide it.

The story of the incident as told by Mr. Savage Landor is completely supported by his two servants, and additionally, the Tibetans who were involved didn’t attempt to conceal it.

In the Rev. Harkua Wilson's tent at Taklakot, before Peshkár Kharak Sing, Gobaria and a large number of Bhutias, several Tibetan officials corroborated the whole account as related by Mr. Landor. The man Nerba, who had held Mr. Landor's hair when about to be beheaded and have his eyes burnt out, admitted he had taken such part in the affair. There can be no doubt that the above account is true and unexaggerated, for the whole of Byans and Chaudans are ringing with it. The Jong Pen of Taklakot was given ample opportunity to explain the affair, but he declined to do so.

In Rev. Harkua Wilson's tent at Taklakot, in front of Peshkár Kharak Sing, Gobaria, and many Bhutias, several Tibetan officials confirmed the whole story as told by Mr. Landor. The man Nerba, who held Mr. Landor's hair when he was about to be beheaded and have his eyes burned out, admitted he was involved in the incident. There’s no doubt that this account is true and not exaggerated, as the whole region of Byans and Chaudans is buzzing with it. The Jong Pen of Taklakot was given plenty of chances to explain the situation, but he chose not to.

Mr. Savage Landor held Chinese passports, and his conduct during his stay in that country did not warrant the officials to have treated him in the barbarous, cruel way they did. I satisfied myself, by careful inquiry from the people here, as to how Mr. Landor behaved.

Mr. Savage Landor had Chinese passports, and his behavior during his time in that country didn’t justify the officials treating him in such a brutal and cruel manner. I made sure to check with people here about how Mr. Landor acted.

He is said to have been most munificent in his dealings with all, and invariably affable and courteous. I had seen Mr. Landor just before his entry into Tibet, and when I met him I could scarcely recognise him, though he had then fairly recovered from the terrible treatment he had received. I saw the marks of the cords on his [476] hands and feet, and they are still visible after this lapse of time. He complains that he is still suffering from the injury done his spine, and fears that it may be of a permanent nature.

He was known for being incredibly generous in his interactions with everyone, always friendly and polite. I had seen Mr. Landor just before he entered Tibet, and when I met him, I could hardly recognize him, even though he had already mostly recovered from the awful treatment he had endured. I noticed the marks from the ropes on his hands and feet, and they are still visible even after all this time. He says he's still dealing with the damage to his spine and worries that it might be permanent.

J. LARKIN.    

J. Larkin.

    October 15, 1897.

October 15, 1897.

 

 

 

All communications to Government should give the No., date and subject of any previous correspondence, and should note the Department quoted.

645
———
No. N. 277 A. of 189 .

645
———
No. N. 277 A. of 189 .

From
  The Under-Secretary to Government, N.-W. Province and Oudh.

From
  The Under-Secretary of the Government, North-Western Province and Oudh.

To
  A. H. Savage Landor, Esq.,
    c/o Messrs. Grindlay, Groom & Co.,
      Bankers, Bombay.

To
  A. H. Savage Landor, Esq.,
    c/o Messrs. Grindlay, Groom & Co.
      Bankers, Bombay.

 

Dated Allahabad, November 13, 1897.

Dated Allahabad, November 13, 1897.

Political Department.

Sir,

Hello,

  In reply to your letter of November 5, I am desired to send you a printed copy of depositions recorded by Mr. Larkin as noted below:

In response to your letter from November 5, I’m instructed to send you a printed copy of the depositions recorded by Mr. Larkin as noted below:

1. Of yourself;2. Of Chanden Sing;
3. Of Man Sing;4. Of Rev. Harkua Wilson;
5. Of Pundit Gobaria;6. Of Kharak Sing;
7. Of Suna

I have the honour to be, Sir,      
Your most obedient Servant,  
H. N. Wright,    
Under-Secretary to Government, North-Western
Provinces and Oudh. N.M.

I have the privilege to be, Sir,      
Your most respectful servant,  
H.N. Wright,
Under-Secretary to the Government, North-Western
Provinces and Oudh. N.M.


[477]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

ALMORA DISTRICT.

IN THE COURT OF J. LARKIN, Esq., Magistrate of the 1st class.

In re The Matter of the Tortures, Robbery, &c., of A. HENRY SAVAGE LANDOR, Esq., and his servants, by the Thibetan Authorities.

In re The Matter of the Tortures, Robbery, etc., of A. HENRY SAVAGE LANDOR, Esq., and his staff, by the Thibetan Authorities.

Deposition of Mr. A. Henry Savage Landor; taken on the 4th day of October 1897. Oath administered by me.

Deposition of Mr. A. Henry Savage Landor; taken on October 4, 1897. Oath administered by me.

My name is Arnold Henry Savage Landor; my father's name is Charles Savage Landor; I am by caste European. British subject; by occupation artist and traveller; my home is at Empoli (Calappiano), police station Empoli, district Florence, Tuscany, Italy; I reside at London.

My name is Arnold Henry Savage Landor; my father's name is Charles Savage Landor; I am of European descent. I am a British citizen; I work as an artist and traveler; my home is in Empoli (Calappiano), Empoli police station, Florence district, Tuscany, Italy; I live in London.

Having made up my mind to travel in Turkistan and Tibet, for geographical and scientific purposes as well as to study the manners and customs of those people, I obtained a British passport from the Foreign Office and one from the Chinese Legation in London. I had already a passport granted me by the Chinese Government through the British Consul at Tientsin, China. I also possess letters from Lord Salisbury and the officials of the British Museum. I am prepared to submit all these for scrutiny. I arrived in India by the P. and O. ss. Peninsular about the beginning of April. I travelled rapidly up to Almora. I stayed there a short time to make arrangements for my travels in Tibet. I entered that country through the Lumpia Lek. I kept away from the road and paths, passing over several ranges of high mountains, camping at very high altitudes, for nearly three weeks. When I started I had thirty men with me. Twenty-one of them left me when I was only five days in. At Mansarowar Lake five Shokas declined to go any farther. I paid them up and they left. It was they who gave the Lamas of Tucker information of my intention to go to Lhassa. I had proceeded but three marches towards the Maium La Pass when my only two remaining Shokas deserted during the night. They carried off all my stock of provisions for my Hindu servants, ropes, straps, &c. My party had now dwindled down to Chanden Sing (bearer) and Man Sing (coolie). The latter was ill; I fear he is developing leprosy. His feet were in a very sore and cut condition, hence he could scarcely get along. I went over the Maium Pass and followed the course of the Brahmaputra River for many troublesome marches, until we reached the Neo Tsambo (river), in crossing which one of my yaks sank and its load went down and was lost.[478] I tried hard, by diving and swimming in this very cold and rapid river, to recover my goods, but failed to do so, owing to the depth and muddiness of the water. The load contained all my provisions, some clothes, and all my shoes, cash rupees eight hundred, my lantern, some ammunition, and sundry knives and razors. This misfortune drove me to Toxem, which place we reached in a state of starvation. It had taken us several days to get there. Owing to the weak, fatigued, and starved condition of my two followers, I had to seek to get them food and horses, as it was impossible for them to get on without horses. I would not desert them, as I might have, as I was still prepared to push on despite the many difficulties I had to encounter hourly. Toxem consisted of one mud house and an encampment of about eighty tents. The shepherds received us kindly and consented to sell me horses and provisions. I encamped for the night about two miles beyond the settlement. During the evening several persons visited my encampment, bringing me gifts of provisions. I invariably gave them money in return, certainly three or four times more than the value of the articles presented. During the night I was disturbed several times, and went out into the darkness, but failed to discover any one. This, however, was my nightly experience; hence I grew to attach little moment to these noises. In the morning (August 20), two or three Thibetans came offering to sell me provisions and ponies. While I and my two servants were engaged examining and selecting ponies, I noticed that numbers of villagers came up one by one, spinning their wool or carrying bags of tsamba (meal), while others arrived with more ponies. My servants, overjoyed at the hope of getting mounts, rode first one pony and then another to suit themselves, Chanden Sing, having selected one, called me to see it and try it. I walked to the spot, which was about a hundred yards from my tent. Naturally I was unarmed. The demeanour of these people had been so friendly that it gave me no cause to suspect that any treachery was anticipated. While I stood with my hands behind my back, enjoying the delight of my long-suffering servants, I was suddenly seized from the back by several persons. I was seized simultaneously by the neck, arms, wrists, and legs, and was thrown down in a prone position. I fought and struggled and managed to shake off some of my captors, so that I was able to regain my feet; but others rushed up and I was quickly surrounded and overpowered by twenty-five or thirty persons. Ropes were thrown round my neck, legs and body, and thus entangled, I was thrown three several times more to the ground. I fought with my head, teeth, legs, arms, and succeeded in regaining my legs four times. They overcame me at last by strangling me with the rope which they had thrown round my neck. Then they bound me hand, foot, and neck. When I had an opportunity to look round, I saw Chanden Sing struggling against some fifteen or twenty foes. He was quickly entangled, thrown, and secured by ropes. Even Man Sing, the weak and jaded coolie, was overcome by four stout powerful men, though he was not able to [479] offer any resistance. He, too, was bound. While we were struggling against our treacherous foes, some person gave a signal—a shrill whistle—which brought up an ambush of four hundred armed soldiers. These soldiers took up a position round us and covered us with their muskets. Then they searched us and rifled us of any things we had in our pockets. They next proceeded to my tent and took possession of everything I possessed. They sealed up my things in bags subsequent to having overhauled and examined them. Then with shouts and hisses they led us prisoners to Toxem. There we were separated, being placed in separate tents. Guards of many armed soldiers were placed to watch us. In the afternoon of the same day a Pombo (a man in authority), with several high Lamas and military officers, held a Court under a gaudy tent. I saw Chanden Sing led forward to this Court. I was led to the rear of the mud-house to preclude my witnessing the scene. I heard Chanden Sing being interrogated in a loud angry tone and accused of having been my guide. Next I heard Chanden Sing's moans and groans. Then a company of soldiers led me before this tribunal. I was ordered to kneel, and as I would not do so, they tried to compel me to do so by forcing me on my knees. I succeeded in maintaining a standing posture. Then I beheld my servant Chanden Sing lying down, stripped from the waist downwards, in the midst of a number of Lamas and soldiers. I saw two stalwart Lamas, one on each side of him, castigating him with knotted leather thongs. They were laying on him with vigorous arms from his waist to his feet. He was bleeding. As I could not be compelled to kneel, I was allowed to sit down before the Pombo's officer. Then my note-books and printed maps were produced, and I was interrogated, first as to the route I had taken, then as to why I had drawn my maps and sketches. I explained as best I could, partly through my servant Chanden Sing and partly through an interpreter (a person who styled himself a Gurkha and who knew a little Hindustani. He wore the garb of the Tibetan). I explained to the officers that Chanden Sing, my servant, did not know the route or anything about the maps and sketches; that I had brought him as my servant, and that I alone was responsible for the route taken by me, and for the maps and sketches; that my servant was not to be punished; that I should be if anybody was punishable. Thereupon one of the Lamas struck me a hard blow on the head with the butt-end of his riding-crop, and they continued to castigate my servant Chanden Sing. I was led away captive, but nevertheless heard the moans of my unfortunate servant. It began raining heavily, and I was taken to a tent, where I was cruelly bound. Soldiers were placed within and without the tent to guard me. I was thus kept the greater part of the night with my arms manacled behind my back and my legs bound. I was so bound that rest or sleep was impossible. The tent was swarming with vermin, which quickly covered me; and I may here remark that I suffered unspeakable tortures from this pest all the time I was in captivity, as I was never permitted to wash, bathe, or [480] change my clothes. In the tent my guard lighted a fire of yak's dung, and the tent was filled with a suffocating smoke, which well-nigh choked me. I was placed near a heap of this stinking fuel. I must say that it was a night full of indescribable misery for me. Though I was fasting all that day and night, yet my cruel jailers gave me no food. I was thus kept a prisoner the following day until about 3 or 4 p.m. Then a soldier entered the tent and informed me that I was to be flogged, my legs broken, my eyes burnt out, and then beheaded. I merely laughed at him; I could not but think that this was said merely to intimidate me. Half an hour later another person arrived and signalled to my guard to lead me out. Not considering me sufficiently secure already, they tightened my bonds and tied others round my body. In this fashion I was taken to the sole house (mud one) in the encampment. Here an enormous pair of heavy handcuffs were put on my hands, which were still kept behind my back. Even in this the treachery of my captors was shown, for they patted me on the back and called me a good man and told me I was to be taken back to Taklakot. This they said fearing I would resist. Then, after locking the handcuffs, they made the key over to one person, who rode away quickly with it lest I might possibly manage to get the key and unlock my handcuffs. For this reason I was never permitted to see or know who carried the key. Just then I heard the voice of my servant, Chanden Sing, calling to me in a very weak tone. He said: "Hazur! Hazur! Hum murjaiega!" I endeavoured to get to the poor wretch's assistance. Upon my trying to move towards him my several guards sprang upon me and ruthlessly grappled me and threw me on to the back of a horse. I could only call aloud to my poor servant that I was being taken to Taklakot that day, and that he would be brought after me the following day. I noticed that Chanden Sing was roughly seized and hurled back into one of the rooms of the house, so that we could hold no conversation. My other servant, Man Sing, had his arms pinioned, and he was put on a bare-backed pony. The saddle of the horse I had been thrown upon is worthy of description. It was merely the wooden frame of a very high-backed saddle. From this high projecting back or crupper four or five sharp iron spikes were sticking out. These caught me on the small of my back. My guard was then augmented by some twenty or thirty mounted soldiers with muskets and swords. My pony was held by a horseman, who rode before me. We set off at a furious gallop. Thus we travelled for miles until we arrived at a spot where the Pombo with a following of Lamas, banner-men, and soldiers, some two hundred in all, were drawn up. Here my pony was allowed to go on first, and the others reined up and drew aside. As I passed before the Pombo and his following a person named Nerba (the Private Secretary of the Tokchim Tarjum) deliberately knelt and fixed his musket on its rest and fired at me from a few paces. The bullet whizzed past me: I was still at a gallop, which no doubt saved my life, as the marksman could not take a steady aim. My pony took fright and reared and [481] plunged, but I maintained my seat, though I was being cruelly pricked by the spikes in the crupper. My pony was then seized and a long cord with a swivel at the end was fastened to my handcuffs. The cord was about fifty yards long. The other end was held by a horseman. In this way we all set off at a hard gallop, and in order to accelerate the speed, a horseman rode by my side and he lashed my pony furiously to make it go at its hardest; meanwhile the horseman who held the cord did his utmost to pull me out of the saddle, so that I would have of a certainty been trampled to death by the cohort behind me. While thus riding furiously with my arms extended backwards I had the flesh rubbed off my hands and knuckles, so much so that the bone was exposed in places, and as the horseman at the back tugged to get me off and I clung hard with my knees, every tug brought me into forcible contact with the spikes in the crupper and wounded me cruelly. The cord was one made of yak's hair. It was strong, but it eventually gave way. The shock unhorsed the soldier. I was all but thrown. This ludicrous incident provoked much mirth among my guards. They stopped my pony and the runaway steed of the dismounted cavalier. The cord was retied with sundry strong knots, and after an interruption of a few minutes we resumed our breakneck gallop, I being in front. When nearing Galshio, and as I was going round the curve of a sandhill, a soldier, who had been posted in ambush, fired a shot at me from a few paces distant. The shot did not strike me. This incident did not stop our headlong career, and we continued on until we arrived at Galshio about sunset. This was the 21st August last. At this place there is a large monastery on the crown of a low hill. At some distance from the base of the hill, and on the plain, was pitched the large white tent of the Pombo. Our cavalcade drew up there. I was then roughly torn out of my saddle by two or three men. I requested to stop for one moment. My captors refused me this and, roughly thrusting me forward, said that, as I was about to be beheaded in an instant, it was unnecessary. I was hustled to the left front of the tent, where, on the ground, lay a log of wood in the shape of a prism. Upon the sharp edge of it I was made to stand. I was held by the body by several persons, while others pulled my legs as wide apart as they could be stretched. Then my feet were very securely tied by cords of yak-hair. The cords were so tight that they cut into the flesh in numerous places, some of the cuts or wounds being about three inches long. When I was thus secured one ruffian (Nerba), whom I have alluded to above, came forward and seized me by the hair of my head. He pulled my hair as hard as he could. My hair was long, as I had not had it cut since the day preceding my departure from London about the middle of March. The others formed up in front of me in a semicircle. Then the Pombo arose and was handed a bar of iron, which had been made red hot in a brazier, the end grasped by the Pombo being bound round with red cloths. He strode up to me, urged on by the Lamas, and said jeeringly that as I had gone to see the country, my punishment [482] would be to have my eyes burnt out. This was in allusion to what I had said at Toxem, viz.—that I was a traveller and merely wished to see the country. He then placed the red-hot bar of iron parallel to and about an inch and a half or two inches from my eyeballs, and all but touching the nose. The heat was so intense that it seemed as if my eyes were desiccated and my nose scorched. There is still a mark of the burn on my nose. I was forced to shut my eyes instinctively. He seemed to me to have kept the bar of heated iron before my eyes for fully thirty seconds or so. After some moments I opened my eyes and beheld the hot iron on the ground. I saw him take a musket from the hands of one of the soldiers standing by. He placed this against my forehead and discharged it upwards, giving me a severe shock, though nothing worse. Handing back the discharged weapon to the soldier, the Pombo seized a long two-handed sword and came at me. He swung it from side to side, all the time foaming from his mouth. This foaming, I believe, was produced artificially. He then motioned to the man who all this time held me by the hair of my head to bend my neck. I resisted with all my might to keep my head erect. Then the Pombo touched my neck with the sharp blade of his sword as if to measure the distance for a clean, effective stroke. Then he raised the sword and made a blow at me with all his might. The sword passed disagreeably close to my neck, but did not touch me. I did not flinch; and my cool indifferent demeanour seemed to impress him, so much so that he seemed reluctant to continue his diabolical performance, but the posse of Lamas urged him on by gesticulations and vociferous shouts. Thereupon he went through the same performance on the other side of my neck. This time the blade passed so near that I felt that the blow had not been more than half an inch from my neck. This terminated the sword exercise, much to the disgust of the Lamas, who still continued to urge the swordsman on. Then they held an excited consultation. About this time my coolie, Man Sing, who had frequently fallen off his bare-backed pony, arrived. The person who held my hair then relinquished his hold, and another person came up and gave me a forcible push, which gave me a nasty fall on my back, straining all the tendons of my legs. Then my servant Man Sing was brought forward and tied by his legs to the same log of wood to which I was fastened. Then they made it appear that they were going to behead Man Sing. I was pushed up into a sitting posture and a cloth thrown over my head and face, so that I could not see what was being enacted. I heard Man Sing groan, and I concluded he had been despatched. I was left in this terrible suspense for about a quarter of an hour. Then the cloth was removed, and I beheld my servant lying before me bound to the log. We both asked for food. This seemed to amuse our torturers, for they laughed. In the meanwhile the day was beginning to wane, and our jailers made us understand that our execution was merely put off to the following day. After some time tsamba (meal) and tea, were brought in, and it was stuffed into our mouths by our captors. We were [483] kept out in the open without any shelter from the pouring rain. We were sitting in one or two inches of rain and were drenched and numbed with cold. I have already said my hands were manacled from the back; so also were Man Sing's. But at nightfall our captors increased our tortures by straining our manacled arms upwards as high as they could be forced, and then secured them to an upright pole at the back. This caused very severe pain, straining the spine in an incredible way. Then they tied a cord from Man Sing's neck to mine, the effect of which was to make us maintain a most painful position. A guard encircled us, and with them were two watch-dogs tied to pegs. The guard were apparently so confident of our not being able to escape, that they drew their heavy blankets over their heads and slept. One of them left his sword lying by his side. This made me conceive the plan to try to escape. Knowing the extremely supple nature of my hands, I succeeded in drawing the right hand out of my handcuffs. After an hour's anxious and stealthy work I managed to unloose Man Sing's bonds round his feet. In his joy at feeling partly free, Man Sing moved his legs rather clumsily, which the vigilant watch-dogs detected and gave the alarm by barking. The guard were aroused. They went and fetched lights and examined our fastenings. I had succeeded in replacing my hand inside the handcuff. They found Man Sing's bonds loose and, giving him a few cuts with a whip, warned him that if he undid them again they would decapitate him, and refastened them. Then they placed the light between us and put a shelter overhead to prevent the rain extinguishing the light. At about 6 or 7 a.m. the following day they undid Man Sing's feet. I was kept all that day until sunset in the same uncomfortable and painful posture. Thus I was kept fully twenty-four hours. During the day my property had been overhauled and sealed. One of the Lamas picked up my Martini-Henry rifle and put a cartridge in the breach, but failed to push it home firmly. He then discharged the gun. The muzzle of the barrel burst and the face of the Lama was much injured thereby. I laughed heartily at this, and this apparently amused the Pombo, for he, too, joined in. About half an hour after this incident my feet were untied. It was then sunset. I found I had lost the use of my feet. It took my right foot some two or three hours before the blood began to circulate freely, but my left foot remained like dead until the following day. That night my feet were secured by cords. A bowl of some boiling steaming liquid, which I was informed was tea, was presented to me to drink. The eagerness of the surrounding Lamas that I should partake of it aroused my suspicion. When it was pushed up to my lips I merely sipped it and declined it. After a short time I felt most sharp, excruciating, pains in my stomach, which continued for several days. I could not but conclude that the drink proffered had been poisoned. The following day Man Sing and I were led back on foot to Toxem, our jailers riding on horses. We had to go at a great speed despite our severely lacerated feet. We crossed several cold streams, sinking in mud and water to the waist. At [484] Toxem, to my great delight, I beheld Chanden Sing still alive. We were detained there for that night. On the following day we were placed on yaks' backs and hurried off towards Taklakot. Thus we journeyed at an unpleasantly fast pace for fifteen days, from before daybreak to nightfall. Our guards were bent on taking us viâ the Lumpiya Pass; but as this meant a long protracted journey of fifteen or sixteen days, over ice and snow, I knew that we would, in our starved, weakened state, succumb. We were all but naked. This was a day's journey on this side of Mansarowar, where our bonds had been unloosed. We rebelled, and it well-nigh ended in a fight, but our guards consented to halt at Dogmar, until they sent to inquire if the Jong Pen of Taklakot would give us passage through his jurisdiction. After much demur we were eventually taken to Taklakot. This arrangement, I subsequently learnt, was entirely due to the good offices and energy of the Political Peshkár Kharak Sing Pal, Rev. H. Wilson, and Pundit Gobaria. On arriving at Taklakot we hastened to Rev. Harkua Wilson's tent, where we were warmly received, attended to, fed, and clothed. My injuries were examined by the Rev. Harkua Wilson, who is a hospital assistant, and who will be able to depose to their nature and extent. In this gentleman's tent, and in the hearing of several persons, among whom were Peshkár Kharak Sing, Rev. H. Wilson, and Pundit Gobaria, the man Nerba, above mentioned, the Toxem Tarjum, and the Jong Pen's secretary, and also Lapsang, chief secretary to the Jong Pen, admitted that my account of the affair was perfectly true. Some of my property, more or less damaged, was then restored me by the Tokchim Tarjum. I then gave him two lists, one showing articles restored me, and the other the articles missing. The Peshkár, Kharak Sing, has copies of the lists. I was in a very weak state, very exhausted through what I had suffered and little food. It was due to the kind, liberal, and attentive care and treatment of the Rev. H. Wilson and Peshkár Kharak Sing Pal that I recovered. The few ragged clothes I had on were literally swarming with lice, as I had no change of raiment, nor was I ever allowed to wash. I contracted the vermin from the tents I was kept in and also from my guards who at first slept round me.

Having decided to travel through Turkistan and Tibet for geographic and scientific reasons, as well as to learn about the local customs of the people, I got a British passport from the Foreign Office and one from the Chinese Legation in London. I also had a passport issued by the Chinese Government through the British Consul in Tientsin, China. Additionally, I had letters from Lord Salisbury and officials at the British Museum, which I was ready to present for verification. I arrived in India on the P. and O. ss. Peninsular in early April and quickly made my way to Almora, where I stayed briefly to plan my travels in Tibet. I entered the country via the Lumpia Lek, avoiding roads and paths, moving over several high mountain ranges, and camping at extremely high altitudes for nearly three weeks. I started with thirty men, but twenty-one abandoned me just five days in. At Mansarowar Lake, five Shokas refused to continue, so I paid them off and they left. They informed the Lamas of Tucker about my plans to go to Lhassa. I had only traveled three marches toward the Maium La Pass when my last two Shokas deserted me during the night, taking all my supplies meant for my Hindu servants, including ropes and straps. My group was now down to Chanden Sing (my bearer) and Man Sing (my coolie), who was sick and possibly developing leprosy. His feet were severely sore and cut, making it hard for him to walk. I crossed the Maium Pass and followed the Brahmaputra River for several challenging marches until we reached the Neo Tsambo river, where one of my yaks sank and its load was lost. I tried desperately to recover my belongings by diving and swimming in the icy, swift river, but couldn't due to its depth and murkiness. The load contained all my provisions, some clothes, all my shoes, eight hundred rupees in cash, my lantern, some ammunition, and various knives and razors. This misfortune forced us into Toxem, where we arrived nearly starving after several days of travel. Given the weak and famished state of my two companions, I needed to find them food and horses, as they couldn’t continue without them. I refused to abandon them, even though I was determined to move forward despite the many challenges I faced. Toxem consisted of one mud house and around eighty tents. The shepherds welcomed us and agreed to sell me horses and supplies. I set up camp about two miles beyond the settlement. That evening, several people visited my camp, bringing gifts of food, for which I always offered money in return, usually giving three or four times the value of the items. During the night, I was disturbed multiple times and went out into the darkness but found no one. This became a regular experience, so I learned to pay little attention to the noises. The next morning (August 20), two or three Tibetans came offering to sell provisions and ponies. While my two servants and I were looking at and selecting ponies, I noticed numerous villagers arriving one by one, spinning wool or carrying bags of tsamba (meal), with others bringing more ponies. My servants, excited by the prospect of mounts, tested one pony after another. Chanden Sing selected one and called me over to try it. I walked over, about a hundred yards from my tent, completely unarmed, as the friendly demeanor of the locals left me with no indication of impending treachery. Suddenly, I was grabbed from behind by several people, wrestled down, and restrained. I fought back, managing to shake off some of my captors and get back on my feet, but others rushed in, quickly overpowering me with about twenty-five to thirty individuals. They bound my neck, legs, and body with ropes, throwing me down several more times. I struggled fiercely, using my head, teeth, legs, and arms and got back on my feet multiple times. Eventually, they managed to subdue me by choking me with the rope around my neck and then securing my arms and legs. When I looked around, I saw Chanden Sing battling against fifteen to twenty foes. He was soon captured and bound. Even Man Sing, who was weak and exhausted, was overpowered by four strong men, unable to resist. While we struggled against our treacherous captors, someone signaled a hidden ambush of four hundred armed soldiers. They surrounded us with their rifles drawn, searched us, and took everything we had in our pockets. Then they went into my tent and seized all my belongings, sealing them in bags after rummaging through them. With shouts and hisses, they led us as prisoners to Toxem, separating us into different tents with armed guards watching us. That afternoon, a Pombo (a person of authority), along with several high Lamas and military officers, held court under a fancy tent. I saw Chanden Sing being brought to the court, while I was taken behind the mud house to prevent me from witnessing what happened. I could hear Chanden Sing being questioned loudly and angrily accused of having been my guide. Then I heard his groans. Eventually, they brought me before this tribunal and ordered me to kneel. When I refused, they tried to force me onto my knees. I managed to stand my ground until I saw my servant Chanden Sing lying down, stripped from the waist down, surrounded by several Lamas and soldiers. I watched two strong Lamas whipping him with knotted leather thongs, beating him from his waist to his feet, making him bleed. Since I wouldn’t kneel, they allowed me to sit before the Pombo's officer. They produced my notebooks and maps, interrogating me about my route and the purpose of my sketches. I explained as clearly as possible, partly through Chanden Sing and partly through an interpreter—a man who identified himself as a Gurkha and spoke a little Hindustani, dressed in traditional Tibetan attire. I insisted that Chanden Sing had no knowledge of the route or maps; he was just my servant, and I alone was responsible for the journey and my drawings. If anyone was to be punished, it should be me. At that moment, one of the Lamas struck me hard on the head with the butt of his riding crop, and they continued to beat my servant Chanden Sing. I was taken away, but could still hear my unfortunate servant's moans. It started pouring rain, and I was taken to a tent where I was cruelly bound. Soldiers were stationed both inside and outside the tent to guard me, keeping me tied up for most of the night with my arms shackled behind my back and my legs restrained. The way I was tied made it impossible to rest or sleep. The tent was infested with vermin that quickly swarmed around me; I suffered terribly from these pests throughout my captivity, as I was never allowed to wash, bathe, or change my clothes. Inside the tent, my guards lit a fire with yak dung, filling the space with suffocating smoke that nearly choked me. I was placed near a pile of this foul fuel, and I must say it was a night filled with unbearable misery. Although I was starving that day and night, my cruel captors provided me with no food. They kept me a prisoner until around 3 or 4 p.m. the next day when a soldier entered the tent and ominously informed me I was to be flogged, have my legs broken, my eyes burned out, and then beheaded. I just laughed, thinking it was merely a tactic to intimidate me. About half an hour later, another person showed up and signaled for my guards to take me out. Not considering me secure enough, they tightened my bonds and added others around my body. I was taken to the only mud house in the camp, where they put huge handcuffs on my hands, which were still behind my back. This showed the treachery of my captors, as they patted me on the back, calling me a good man, and told me I was being taken back to Taklakot, saying this to prevent me from resisting. After locking the handcuffs, they handed the key over to someone who quickly rode away with it so that I couldn't possibly get free. At that moment, I heard Chanden Sing calling out to me weakly, saying: "Hazur! Hazur! Hum murjaiega!" I tried to move to help him, but my guards roughly tackled me and threw me on a horse. I shouted to my poor servant that I was being taken to Taklakot that day, and that he would follow the next day. I noticed Chanden Sing was roughly grabbed and pushed back into one of the rooms, preventing any further communication between us. My other servant, Man Sing, had his arms bound and was placed on a bare-backed pony. The saddle I was thrown onto was just a wooden frame of a very high-backed saddle, with several sharp iron spikes protruding from the back that jabbed into my lower back. My guard was soon joined by about twenty or thirty mounted soldiers with rifles and swords. A horseman held onto my pony and rode ahead of me. We set off at a wild gallop, racing for miles until we reached a spot where the Pombo along with a following of Lamas, banner-bearers, and soldiers—about two hundred in total—was waiting. As I passed in front of the Pombo and his entourage, a man named Nerba (the Private Secretary of the Tokchim Tarjum) knelt, took aim with his musket, and fired at me from just a few paces away. The bullet whizzed past me—it was my fast pace that likely saved my life, as the marksman couldn’t steady his aim. My pony reared and bolted, but I managed to hold on despite the spikes digging into me. They then took my pony and attached a long cord with a swivel to my handcuffs, which measured about fifty yards in length, held by a horseman. With that, we set off again at a hard gallop. To increase the speed, a horseman rode alongside me and whipped my pony to push it to go faster, while the horseman at my back pulled hard to try and drag me out of the saddle, putting me at serious risk of being trampled by the riders behind. With my arms stretched backward like this, the friction scraped my hands and knuckles raw, so much so that the bone was exposed in some places, and every tug from the soldier behind pulled me painfully against the spikes. The cord was made of yak hair—strong but eventually broke. The sudden jolt caused the soldier to fall off his horse. It was a comical moment that made my guards laugh. They stopped my pony and recaptured the runaway steed. The cord was retied, and after a brief pause, we continued our frenzied gallop with me leading. As we approached Galshio, a soldier hiding nearby fired a shot at me from close range, but again, I was not hit. This incident didn’t slow us down, and we pressed on until we arrived at Galshio at sunset on August 21. This place featured a large monastery perched atop a low hill, and at the base was the Pombo's spacious white tent. Our group came to a halt, and I was violently pulled off my pony by a few men. I asked to stop for just a moment, but my captors refused and shoved me forward roughly, saying that since I was about to be executed, there was no need for delay. They pushed me to the left front of the tent where a prism-shaped log lay on the ground. I was forced to stand on the sharp edge while several men held me by the body, and others stretched my legs as far apart as they could. Then they tightly bound my feet with cords made of yak hair, which bit into my skin, leaving several three-inch-long cuts. With me secured this way, Nerba, the man I had mentioned earlier, came forward and grabbed my hair, yanking it painfully. My hair was long since I hadn’t cut it since leaving London in mid-March. The others formed a semicircle in front of me. The Pombo was handed a red-hot iron bar, grasping it with a cloth wrapped around the end, and he approached me, egged on by the Lamas. He mockingly said that since I had traveled to see the country, my punishment would be to have my eyes burned out—referring to my claim in Toxem that I was just a traveler who wanted to explore. He brought the scorching iron bar very close to my eyes, just an inch or two away, nearly touching my nose. The heat was so intense that it felt like my eyes were drying out and my nose was burning. A burn mark still remains on my nose. My instinct was to shut my eyes tight as he held the bar there for what felt like thirty seconds. Eventually, when I opened my eyes, I saw the hot iron on the ground and the Pombo take a musket from a soldier standing nearby, pressing it against my forehead and firing it upward, giving me a jolt but no worse injury. He returned the discharged gun to its owner, then seized a long two-handed sword, swinging it wildly while foaming at the mouth—likely exaggerated. He then gestured to the man who had been holding my hair to force my neck down. I resisted fiercely to keep my head up, but the Pombo touched my neck with the sword to measure the distance for a clean slice. Then he raised the blade and swung it down with all his might, coming disturbingly close but ultimately not hurting me. I didn't flinch, and my calm reaction seemed to discourage him, but the Lamas urging him on pushed him to continue. He repeated the process on the other side of my neck, this time the blade swung so close that it felt like it was just half an inch away. This ended the sword display, much to the frustration of the Lamas who continued to call for more. They started a heated discussion. Around this time, my coolie, Man Sing, finally arrived, having frequently fallen off his bare-backed pony. The man holding my hair let go, and another guy shoved me forcefully, causing me to topple backward and strain my leg tendons. My servant Man Sing was then brought in and tied by his legs to the same log where I was bound. They pretended they were going to behead him, pushing me up into a sitting position and covering my head and face with a cloth so I couldn’t see what happened next. I heard Man Sing groan and thought he had been executed. I was left in that dreadful suspense for about fifteen minutes before they removed the cloth, revealing my servant still alive, tied to the log. We both asked for food, which made our tormentors laugh. Meanwhile, the day was fading, and our captors signaled that our execution would merely be postponed until the next day. After some time, tsamba (meal) and tea were brought to us, which our captors stuffed into our mouths. We were left out in the pouring rain without shelter, sitting in a few inches of water, growing numb from the cold. I had mentioned that my hands were shackled behind my back; Man Sing’s were too. But as night fell, my guards increased our suffering by forcefully pulling our shackled arms up as high as they could, attaching them to an upright pole behind us. This caused incredible pain, straining my spine severely. Then they tied a cord from Man Sing’s neck to mine, forcing us into an agonizing position. A guard surrounded us with two watch-dogs leashed to pegs. The guards were so confident that we wouldn't escape; they wrapped themselves in heavy blankets and slept, leaving one sword lying by their side. This encouraged me to come up with an escape plan. Knowing that my hands were highly flexible, I managed to pull my right hand out of the cuff. After an hour of careful work, I freed Man Sing’s bound feet. However, in his excitement at feeling freedom, he moved a bit too clumsily, catching the attention of the watch-dogs, who barked and alerted the guards. They woke up, brought lights, and checked our restraints. I quickly slipped my hand back into the cuff. They discovered Man Sing’s bonds were loose and, after giving him a few lashes with a whip, threatened him that if he did it again, they would execute him, then re-secured him. They placed the light between us and added a cover overhead to keep the rain from snuffing it out. The next morning, around 6 or 7 AM, they released Man Sing’s feet but kept me bound in the painful position throughout the day until sunset, making it a full twenty-four hours. During that time, they had gone through my belongings and sealed them. A Lama picked up my Martini-Henry rifle, loaded a cartridge into the breach, but mishandled it, leading to a burst in the muzzle and injuring his face. I couldn’t help but laugh, and the Pombo joined in too. About half an hour after that, they untied my feet as day turned to dusk. I noticed I had lost feeling in my feet; my right foot returned to normal after two to three hours, but my left remained numb until the next day. That night, my feet were tied again. A bowl of boiling tea was presented to me, and the surrounding Lamas eagerly encouraged me to drink it, raising my suspicions. When it was lifted to my lips, I just took a sip and refused it. A while later, I began experiencing sharp, excruciating stomach pains that lasted for days, leading me to suspect the drink might have been poisoned. The next day, both Man Sing and I were marched back on foot to Toxem while our captors rode horses. Despite our severely injured feet, we had to move quickly, crossing cold streams and getting stuck in mud and water up to our waists. At Toxem, to my great relief, I found Chanden Sing was still alive. We stayed there for the night, and the next day, we were loaded onto yaks for a hurried trip towards Taklakot. We traveled uncomfortably fast for fifteen days, moving from dawn to dusk. Our guards aimed to take us via the Lumpiya Pass, which would have been a long, arduous journey of fifteen or sixteen days over ice and snow. I was certain we would not survive in our weakened, starved condition as we were nearly naked. We had traveled one day from Mansarowar, where our bonds had been loosened, and after rebelling against our captors, nearly leading to a fight, they agreed to stop at Dogmar to check if the Jong Pen of Taklakot would allow us passage. Eventually, we were taken to Taklakot, an arrangement credited to the efforts of Political Peshkár Kharak Sing Pal, Rev. H. Wilson, and Pundit Gobaria. When we reached Taklakot, we rushed to Rev. Harkua Wilson's tent, where we were warmly welcomed, cared for, and fed. My injuries were examined by Rev. Harkua Wilson, a hospital assistant who could testify to their severity. In the presence of several witnesses, including Peshkár Kharak Sing, Rev. H. Wilson, Pundit Gobaria, the man Nerba, the Toxem Tarjum, and the Jong Pen's secretary, and Lapsang, secretary to the Jong Pen, acknowledged that my account of the ordeal was entirely true. Some of my damaged property was returned to me by the Tokchim Tarjum. I provided two lists—one for items returned and another for items missing. Peshkár Kharak Sing has copies of these lists. I was in a very weak and exhausted state due to my experiences and lack of food. Thanks to the kindness and attentive care of Rev. H. Wilson and Peshkár Kharak Sing Pal, I began to recover. The few ragged clothes I had were crawling with lice, as I had no fresh clothes and was never allowed to wash. I had contracted the vermin from the tents in which I was held and from my guards who initially slept around me.

  Read over to witness.

Check it out.

  A. HENRY SAVAGE LANDOR.

A. Henry Savage Landor.

J. LARKIN.  

J. LARKIN.


 

Deposition of Chanden Sing, taken on the 9th day of October 1897.

Chanden Sing's deposition, taken on October 9, 1897.

Solemn affirmation administered by me.

Solemn affirmation given by me.

My name is Chanden Sing; my father's name is Bije Singh; I am by caste Thatola; thirty-two years of age; by occupation kheti; my home is at That, police station Bisot, district Almora.

My name is Chanden Sing; my father's name is Bije Singh; I belong to the Thatola caste; I'm thirty-two years old; I work in farming; my home is in That, under the Bisot police station, in the Almora district.

[485]I took service as a bearer with Mr. Landor at Almora on the 27th or 28th April last. I accompanied him on his trip to Tibet. We went along through the wilds, encountering many hardships and reached Toxem. There I insisted on my master buying ponies to take us to Darjeeling. This resulted in our capture, for up to then we had vigilantly kept away from the people. The people who brought us ponies to buy played us false. They informed the authorities, who sent soldiers, who lay in ambush behind the sandhills until the crowd of horse dealers and lookers-on, whom we did not suspect of treachery, surrounded and seized us. We were bound with cords by the arms (at back) and legs. My master was more cruelly tied than we two servants. We were taken to the Rája,[44] who accused me of having brought my master into the country. I was then stretched out and two strong men with whips inflicted two hundred stripes on me. I was questioned as to the maps. My master called out that he, not I, alone understood them, and asked that I should not be beaten. Thereupon a Lama struck him across the head and removed him to a distance, so that I could not communicate with him. They took all our property. Then we were kept separate for the night. I was put in a room and my hands tied to a pole. I could not sleep with the pain I was in. Next day my master, with his hands tied behind his back, was put on a spiked saddle and tied by a long rope held by a horseman. He went at a gallop surrounded by about fifty horsemen armed with guns and swords. Man Sing, our coolie, was also taken with him. My guards informed me my master was to be decapitated at Galshio, and that I was to be beheaded where I was. On the fourth or fifth day my master returned. Meanwhile I was a close prisoner, bound up without food. When I saw my master he was in a pitiful state. He was handcuffed with enormous cuffs, clothes torn to rags, bleeding from his waist, feet and hands swollen. Next day a guard on horseback took us back, bound as we were, on yaks' backs, towards Mansarowar. There I had my cords unloosed. My master was kept bound until we got to Tangchim. We were eventually taken to Taklakot, where the Rev. Harkua Wilson met us and saw our condition. He attended to our wants. My master was well-nigh at death's door. The Tibetans returned some of my master's property, but they have kept about 475 rupees in cash, two rifles, revolver, two files, a lot of soap, medicine, a butterfly dodger, matches, a box of mathematical instruments, a quantity (400) cartridges, a large box of photographic plates and negatives, three bags. We did not molest any one, and paid more than four times the value for any food we bought.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]I started working as a bearer for Mr. Landor in Almora on April 27th or 28th. I traveled with him on his trip to Tibet. We went through the wilderness, facing many challenges, and eventually reached Toxem. There, I insisted that my master buy ponies to take us to Darjeeling. This led to our capture, as we had been careful to avoid people until then. The individuals who brought us the ponies deceived us. They informed the authorities, who sent soldiers to ambush us behind the sandhills. The crowd of horse dealers and onlookers, whom we thought were harmless, surrounded and seized us. We were tied up with ropes on our arms (behind our backs) and legs. My master was tied even more harshly than us two servants. We were taken to the Rája,[44] who accused me of bringing my master into the country. They then laid me out, and two strong men with whips gave me two hundred lashes. I was questioned about the maps. My master shouted that he alone understood them and asked that I not be beaten. A Lama then struck him on the head and moved him away so I couldn't communicate with him. They took all our belongings. That night, we were kept apart. I was locked in a room with my hands tied to a pole. I couldn’t sleep because of the pain I was in. The next day, my master, with his hands tied behind his back, was placed on a spiked saddle and led away by a horseman holding a long rope. He rode off at a gallop surrounded by about fifty horsemen armed with guns and swords. Man Sing, our coolie, was also taken with him. My guards informed me that my master was to be executed at Galshio, and that I would be beheaded where I was. On the fourth or fifth day, my master returned. Meanwhile, I remained a close prisoner, bound up without food. When I saw my master, he looked terrible. He was handcuffed with heavy cuffs, his clothes were in tatters, and he was bleeding from his waist, with swollen feet and hands. The next day, a guard on horseback took us back, still tied up, on the backs of yaks, toward Mansarowar. There, they untied me. My master remained bound until we reached Tangchim. Eventually, we arrived at Taklakot, where Rev. Harkua Wilson met us and helped with our needs. My master was nearly at death's door. The Tibetans returned some of my master's belongings, but they kept about 475 rupees in cash, two rifles, a revolver, two files, a lot of soap, medicine, a butterfly dodger, matches, a box of mathematical instruments, around 400 cartridges, a large box of photographic plates and negatives, and three bags. We didn’t harm anyone and paid more than four times the fair price for any food we bought.

  Read over to witness.

Check it out.

J. LARKIN.  

J. Larkin.


 

[486]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Deposition of Man Sing, taken on the 9th day of October 1897.

Deposition of Man Sing, taken on October 9, 1897.

Solemn affirmation administered by Pandit Krishnanand.

Solemn affirmation given by Pandit Krishnanand.

My name is Man Sing; my father's name is Sohan Sing; I am by caste Pharswal; twenty-five years of age; by occupation kheti; my home is at Sileri, police station Bichla Kattyur, district Almora.

My name is Man Sing; my father's name is Sohan Sing; I belong to the Pharswal community; I’m twenty-five years old; I work in farming; I live in Sileri, near the Bichla Kattyur police station, in Almora district.

I accompanied Mr. Savage Landor into Tibet. We were surrounded and arrested at Toxem while bargaining and selecting ponies. I was tied up hand and foot, and again tied to a log of wood with my master. When I begged for mercy, they threatened to behead me and struck me on the head with the handle of a kukri. We were taken to Galshio. There the Tibetans were on the point of beheading my master. They tried to burn out his eyes. They fired at him twice to kill him. They tried to pull him off his horse to have him trampled upon. He was subjected to many insults and hardships. We were kept bound and guarded until brought to Mansarowar. There our hands were untied. Chanden Sing was with us. He received about two to three hundred lashes at Toxem. I got off most lightly, as when the three of us were captured and examined, I said I was merely the yak driver and not responsible for anything. I lost nothing, but they took my master's property—three firearms, some money, and other things; I cannot enumerate them. We were brought back to Taklakot, where we met friends. My master was made to sit on a spiked saddle and taken from Toxem to Galshio.

I went with Mr. Savage Landor to Tibet. We were surrounded and arrested at Toxem while negotiating and picking ponies. I was tied up hand and foot, and then tied to a log with my master. When I pleaded for mercy, they threatened to behead me and hit me on the head with the handle of a kukri. We were taken to Galshio. There, the Tibetans were about to behead my master. They tried to burn his eyes out. They shot at him twice to kill him. They attempted to pull him off his horse to have him trampled. He faced many insults and hardships. We were kept bound and guarded until we were brought to Mansarowar. There, our hands were untied. Chanden Sing was with us. He received about two to three hundred lashes at Toxem. I got off the easiest because when the three of us were captured and questioned, I said I was just the yak driver and not responsible for anything. I lost nothing, but they took my master's belongings—three firearms, some money, and other items; I can't list them all. We were brought back to Taklakot, where we met friends. My master was forced to sit on a spiked saddle and taken from Toxem to Galshio.

  Read over to witness.

Check it out to see.

J. LARKIN.  

J. Larkin.


 

Deposition of the Rev. Harkua Wilson, taken on the 9th day of

Deposition of Rev. Harkua Wilson, taken on the 9th day of

October 1897. Oath administered by me.

October 1897. I administered the oath.

My name is Harkua Wilson. By caste Christian; forty-six years of age; by occupation missionary; my home is at Dwarahat, police station M. Dwara, district Almora. I reside at Gunji, Byans.

My name is Harkua Wilson. I'm a Christian; I'm forty-six years old; my job is a missionary; I live in Dwarahat, police station M. Dwara, district Almora. I stay at Gunji, Byans.

I am a missionary in the American Methodist Episcopal Society. My work is in the northern pattis or Bhot. I accompanied Mr. Savage Landor in July last as far as Gyanima in Tibet. We went through the Lumpiya Pass. It took us four days from Lumpiya to get to Gyanima. At this place the Barkha Tarjam declined to allow me to go on, but he allowed Mr. Landor (who was said to be my brother) with four porters and three servants to go on; but the following day he withdrew this permission. We then returned three marches. At midnight in a snowstorm Mr. Landor went up the mountains, determining to go through Tibet by the wilds. He had with him nine followers. He was then in perfect health and [487] strength, and so were his followers. At the end of August I heard that Mr. Landor had been arrested, and, fearing the Tibetans would kill him, I hastened to Taklakot to do my utmost to save him. There I learnt that Mr. Landor and his two servants were being brought back. Hearing that it was the intention of the Tibetans to take them viâ the Lumpiya, I, with Pandit Gobaria, Jai Mal, and Lata, induced the Jong Pen of Taklakot to allow Mr. Landor to be brought to Taklakot. On the evening of 7th September Peshkár Kharak Sing arrived there. At about 11 a.m. on the 8th September Mr. Landor, Chanden Sing, and Man Sing arrived. I took them to my tent and heard their account of what had happened. I could hardly recognise Mr. Landor; he looked very ill and seemed nearly exhausted. I examined his injuries and found that his forehead had the skin off and was covered with scabs. His cheeks and nose were in the same state. His hair had grown long. He was unshaven and unkempt. He was in rags and dirty, covered with swarms of lice. His hands, fingers, and wrists were swollen and wounded. On his spine at the waist he had an open sore, and the parts around were swollen and red. His seat was covered with marks of wounds caused by spikes. His feet were swollen, and so were his ankles. The flesh about the latter was much hurt and contused, showing marks of cords having been tightly bound round them. He was in a very low condition. I attended to him, having given him a bath and a change of clothes. I gave him food, but though he said he was famished, he could scarcely eat. I am confident, if he had been a few days longer in the hands of the Tibetans and had been taken viâ Lumpiya, he would have died. After half an hour the Tibetans brought some of Mr. Landor's things under seal. Some of the Tibetan officials on one side, Peshkár Kharak Sing and Gobaria and myself on the other, made out a list of the property, which we took over, and a list was prepared of the articles taken from Mr. Landor and which were missing. Mr. Landor dictated the list from memory. Copies of these lists were furnished to the Jong Pen. I kept Mr. Landor at Taklakot until the afternoon of the 11th September. Then I conveyed him by easy stages to Gunji, where I have a dispensary, and attended to him. I am a hospital assistant. I sent off reports to the Commissioner and Deputy Commissioner. Chanden Sing and Man Sing were also in a wretched state. The former had marks of recent flogging from his waist to above his ankles.

I’m a missionary with the American Methodist Episcopal Society. My work is in the northern pattis or Bhot. Last July, I traveled to Gyanima in Tibet with Mr. Savage Landor. We crossed the Lumpiya Pass, which took us four days to reach Gyanima. There, the Barkha Tarjam wouldn’t let me continue, but he allowed Mr. Landor (who was said to be my brother) along with four porters and three servants to proceed; however, the next day he revoked that permission. We then retraced three marches. At midnight during a snowstorm, Mr. Landor headed up the mountains, planning to go through Tibet via the wilderness. He had nine companions with him. He was in great health and so were his followers. By the end of August, I heard that Mr. Landor had been arrested, and worried that the Tibetans would kill him, I rushed to Taklakot to do everything I could to save him. There, I learned he and his two servants were being brought back. Knowing the Tibetans intended to take them via the Lumpiya, I, along with Pandit Gobaria, Jai Mal, and Lata, persuaded the Jong Pen of Taklakot to allow Mr. Landor to be brought to Taklakot. On the evening of September 7th, Peshkár Kharak Sing arrived there. Around 11 a.m. on September 8th, Mr. Landor, Chanden Sing, and Man Sing arrived. I brought them to my tent and listened to their account of what had happened. I could hardly recognize Mr. Landor; he looked very ill and nearly exhausted. I examined his injuries: the skin on his forehead was gone and covered in scabs, and his cheeks and nose were in a similar state. His hair was long, he was unshaven and scruffy, dressed in rags, dirty and infested with lice. His hands, fingers, and wrists were swollen and hurt. He had an open sore on his lower back and the surrounding areas were swollen and red. His backside was covered in wounds from spikes. His feet and ankles were swollen, with the flesh around them badly hurt and bruised, showing marks from tight bindings. He was in very poor condition. I took care of him, giving him a bath and clean clothes, as well as food, but even though he said he was starving, he could hardly eat. I’m sure if he had stayed a few more days in the hands of the Tibetans and had been taken via Lumpiya, he would have died. After half an hour, the Tibetans brought some of Mr. Landor’s belongings under seal. Some Tibetan officials on one side, along with Peshkár Kharak Sing, Gobaria, and me on the other, made a list of the items we took over, and we prepared a list of the items taken from Mr. Landor that were missing. Mr. Landor dictated the list from memory. Copies of these lists were given to the Jong Pen. I kept Mr. Landor in Taklakot until the afternoon of September 11th, then I carefully took him to Gunji, where I have a dispensary, and took care of him. I’m a hospital assistant. I sent reports to the Commissioner and Deputy Commissioner. Chanden Sing and Man Sing were also in terrible condition. The former had fresh marks of flogging from his waist to above his ankles.

  Read over to witness.

Check it out.

J. LARKIN.  

J. Larkin.


 

[488]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Deposition of Pandit Gobaria, taken on the 13th day of October

Testimony of Pandit Gobaria, taken on October 13th

1897. Solemn affirmation administered by Pandit Krishnanand.

1897. Solemn affirmation administered by Pandit Krishnanand.

My name is Gobaria; my father's name is Jaibania; I am by caste Garbial; forty-eight years of age; by occupation trader; my home is at Garbyang, police station Byans, district Almora.

My name is Gobaria; my father's name is Jaibania; I belong to the Garbial caste; I'm forty-eight years old; my job is a trader; I live in Garbyang, Byans police station, Almora district.

I heard that Mr. Landor had been arrested and brought down as far as Rungu, and saw that the Jong Pen of Taklakot was sending men to divert Mr. Landor by the long roundabout route viâ the Lumpia Pass. I went to the Jong Pen and succeeded in getting him to allow Mr. Landor to be brought to Taklakot. Next morning Mr. Landor and his two servants with two yaks arrived. Mr. Landor was in a very bad state—in a dying state. A list of Mr. Landor's property as received from the Tokchim Tarjum was made. Then Mr. Landor had a list of things taken from him and not returned made out. A Tibetan, named Nerba, who was present, admitted that he had taken part in Mr. Landor's torture and had held him by the hair. The official who had tortured Mr. Landor was the Galjo Changjo and a Lama.

I heard that Mr. Landor had been arrested and taken all the way to Rungu, and I saw that the Jong Pen of Taklakot was sending people to lead Mr. Landor on a long detour via the Lumpia Pass. I went to the Jong Pen and managed to get permission for Mr. Landor to be brought to Taklakot. The next morning, Mr. Landor and his two servants, along with two yaks, arrived. Mr. Landor was in very poor condition—close to death. A list of Mr. Landor's property, as received from the Tokchim Tarjum, was created. Then, Mr. Landor had a list made of items that had been taken from him and not returned. A Tibetan named Nerba, who was there, admitted that he had participated in torturing Mr. Landor and had held him by the hair. The official who had tortured Mr. Landor was the Galjo Changjo and a Lama.

  Read over to witness.

Check it out to see.

J. LARKIN.  

J. LARKIN.


 

Deposition of the Political Peshkar Kharak Sing, taken on the

Testimony of the Political Peshkar Kharak Sing, recorded on the

9th day of October 1897. Solemn affirmation administered by me.

October 9th 1897. Solemn affirmation given by me.

My name is Kharak Sing; my father's name is Gobind Sing; I am by caste Pal; twenty-six years of age; by occupation Peshkár; my home is at Askot, police station Askot, district Almora.

My name is Kharak Sing; my father's name is Gobind Sing; my caste is Pal; I am twenty-six years old; I work as a Peshkár; my home is in Askot, police station Askot, district Almora.

I am the Political Peshkár at Garbyang in Byans. I knew and reported that Mr. Henry Savage Landor had gone into Tibet. On the 5th September I learnt from Bhotias that he had been stopped at Toxem and reported it. I then proceeded to Taklakot in Tibet, to inquire into the matter. On the 7th September, at Taklakot, I learnt that Mr. Landor was a prisoner at Dogmar, and that the Jong Pen would not permit his being brought into Taklakot, as this meant that Mr. Landor would have to go to Gyanima and viâ the Lumpia Lek. I then insisted on the Jong Pen allowing Mr. Landor a passage to Taklakot, and warned him of the consequences if he declined. The Jong Pen consented, but gave orders that Mr. Landor should be conveyed hurriedly by night through Taklakot to the Lippu Lek. I protested against this, and eventually Mr. Landor, on 8th September, was conveyed into Taklakot. The Jong Pen had sent two sawárs to his guard to admit them. In the Rev. Harkua Wilson's tent Mr. Landor related how he had been tortured. There were several of the Tibetans present who had taken part in the tortures, [489] and they signified that all of Mr. Landor's story was true. Among them was Nerba, of Thokchim Tarjum, who admitted that he had held Mr. Landor by the hair when about to be beheaded, and had cut the nails of his fingers and toes. He admitted he had taken a gold ring from Mr. Landor, which a soldier had taken from him. I made a report of all this and sent (1) a list of Mr. Landor's property restored him by the Tibetans and (2) a list of articles missing. I know Mr. Landor had two rifles and a revolver when he went into Tibet and a considerable amount of money. Mr. Landor was in a very critical position; he was past recognition. He was wounded on the face, body, hands, and legs. I went to the Jong Pen and protested at the treatment given Mr. Landor. The former boldly admitted that Mr. Landor had been treated as alleged, and that it was their duty to act so. The Jong Pen promised to try and have Mr. Landor's missing property restored to him. I know he wrote off to the Garban of Gartok about orders issuing to the Toxem Tarjum. He has engaged to send me anything recovered.

I am the Political Peshkár at Garbyang in Byans. I found out and reported that Mr. Henry Savage Landor had entered Tibet. On September 5th, I was informed by Bhotias that he had been stopped at Toxem and reported it. I then traveled to Taklakot in Tibet to look into the situation. On September 7th, in Taklakot, I discovered that Mr. Landor was being held prisoner at Dogmar, and that the Jong Pen wouldn’t allow him to be brought to Taklakot since this would require Mr. Landor to go to Gyanima and viâ the Lumpia Lek. I insisted that the Jong Pen permit Mr. Landor to pass through Taklakot and warned him of the consequences if he refused. The Jong Pen agreed but ordered that Mr. Landor should be transported quickly at night through Taklakot to the Lippu Lek. I objected to this, and eventually, Mr. Landor was brought into Taklakot on September 8th. The Jong Pen had sent two sawárs to his guards to let them in. In the Rev. Harkua Wilson's tent, Mr. Landor shared how he had been tortured. Several Tibetans present had participated in the torture, and they confirmed that all of Mr. Landor’s story was true. Among them was Nerba, from Thokchim Tarjum, who admitted he had held Mr. Landor by the hair just before he was about to be beheaded, and had cut his fingernails and toenails. He also admitted to taking a gold ring from Mr. Landor, which a soldier had taken from him. I documented all of this and sent (1) a list of Mr. Landor’s property returned to him by the Tibetans and (2) a list of missing items. I know Mr. Landor had two rifles and a revolver when he entered Tibet, along with a substantial amount of cash. Mr. Landor was in a very serious condition; he was unrecognizable. He had injuries on his face, body, hands, and legs. I went to the Jong Pen and protested the treatment given to Mr. Landor. The Jong Pen openly acknowledged that Mr. Landor had indeed been treated as described and claimed it was their duty to do so. The Jong Pen promised to try to recover Mr. Landor’s missing property. I know he wrote to the Garban of Gartok regarding orders sent to the Toxem Tarjum. He committed to sending me anything that is recovered.

  Read over to witness.

Check it out to see.

J. LARKIN.  

J. Larkin.


 

Deposition of Suna, taken on the 14th day of October 1897.Solemn

Suna's deposition, taken on October 14, 1897.Serious

affirmation administered by me.

affirmation given by me.

My name is Suna; my father's name is Gandachiju; I am by caste Khumhar; forty-two years of age; by occupation trader; my home is at Gunji, police station Byans, district Almora.

My name is Suna, my father's name is Gandachiju, I'm a Khumhar by caste, I'm forty-two years old, I work as a trader, and I live in Gunji, which is in the Byans police station area of Almora district.

I saw Mr. Landor and his two servants as prisoners about one and a-half month ago, this side of the Mansarowar Lake. Mr. Landor and Chanden Sing were on yaks; Man Sing on foot. They were well guarded. Tunda and Amr Sing were with me. They went on ahead to Taklakot while I stayed back with the sheep. They went to inform the Rev. Harkua Wilson of the capture. I saw Mr. Landor detained at Dogmar.

I saw Mr. Landor and his two servants as prisoners about a month and a half ago, this side of Mansarowar Lake. Mr. Landor and Chanden Sing were on yaks; Man Sing was on foot. They were well guarded. Tunda and Amr Sing were with me. They went ahead to Taklakot while I stayed back with the sheep. They went to inform Rev. Harkua Wilson about the capture. I saw Mr. Landor being held at Dogmar.

  Read over to witness.

Check it out.

J. LARKIN.  

J. LARKIN.


 

[490]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Statement of property confiscated by the Tibetan authorities, and

Statement of property taken by the Tibetan authorities, and

recovered some months later by the Government of India.

was recovered a few months later by the Government of India.

 

 189 .
 DEPARTMENT
 ———————————————————
 From
  H. K. Gracie, Esq., C.S.,
 The Deputy Commissioner of
Almora,
 To
 A. H. Savage Landor, Esq.,
 c/o Grindlay, Groom & Co. Mumbai.
 Dated 10th December }    
  }  1897
 Received }    
Revolver, 1.897
————
No. XXII. of 1897.
Jewel ring, 1.———————————————————
Cash—68/12/—in eight-anna pieces.File No. .
 Serial No. .
Cartridges for rifles, 110.———————————————————
Rifles, 2 (1 damaged). 
Cartridges for pistol, 37. 
Cleaning-rods for rifles, 2.———————————————————
Cover for rifle, 1.File Heading.
  "  revolver, 1.Property of Mr. H. Savage
Leather strap, 1.Landor.
Net to catch butterflies, 1.———————————————————
 SUBJECT.
 Has the honour to inform him
that his marginally noted articles
have been received by the Political
Peshkar of Garbyang from
the Jong-pen of Taklakote.
 W. Smith, C.S., for
B. R. Regr. No. 27 } P. No. 2131H. K. Gracie, C.S.,
Dept. XXII. B.— }-11-9-96-Deputy Commissioner, Almora.
1,00,000 of 1896. } P. D.W. J. W.

 

[491]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Certificate from Dr. Wilson.

Certificate from Dr. Wilson.

Dharchula Byas, Bhot.

Dharchula, Byas, Bhot.

I herewith certify that I accompanied Mr. A. Henry Savage Landor in his ascent up the Mangshan mountain, and that Mr. Landor and a Rongba coolie reached an altitude of 22,000 (twenty-two thousand) feet. Owing to the rarefied air, I and the other men accompanying Mr. Landor were unable to go as far as he did. Mr. Landor was at the time carrying on him a weight of thirty seers (60 lbs.), consisting of silver rupees, two aneroids, cartridges, revolver, &c. During the whole time I travelled with Mr. Landor he always carried the above weight on him, and generally carried his rifle besides (7¼ lbs. extra). We all suffered very much during the ascent, as the incline was very steep, and there was deep snow and much troublesome débris.

I hereby certify that I accompanied Mr. A. Henry Savage Landor on his ascent up Mangshan Mountain, and that Mr. Landor and a Rongba coolie reached an altitude of 22,000 (twenty-two thousand) feet. Due to the thin air, I and the other men with Mr. Landor weren’t able to go as high as he did. At that time, Mr. Landor was carrying a weight of thirty seers (60 lbs.), which included silver rupees, two aneroids, cartridges, a revolver, etc. Throughout my time traveling with Mr. Landor, he always carried that weight, and usually carried his rifle as well (7¼ lbs. extra). We all struggled a lot during the ascent since the incline was really steep, and there was deep snow and a lot of annoying debris.

I also certify that I took many photographs[45] of Mr. Landor and his two servants after they were released, and Mr. Landor looked then very old and suffering, owing to starvation and the wounds that had been inflicted upon him by the Tibetans.

I also certify that I took a lot of photographs[45] of Mr. Landor and his two servants after they were released, and Mr. Landor looked very old and in pain because of starvation and the injuries caused by the Tibetans.

(Signed)             H. WILSON,     
In charge of Bhot Dispensaries,
American Methodist Episcopal Mission.

(Signed)             H. WILSON,     
In charge of Bhot Dispensaries,
American Methodist Episcopal Mission.


 

Dharchula, April 27, 1898. 

Dharchula, April 27, 1898.

Dear Mr. Landor,

Dear Mr. Landor,

Do you remember the night when we separated near Lama Chokden in Tibet, you to proceed towards Lhassa, and I to return to India?

Do you remember the night we parted near Lama Chokden in Tibet, you heading toward Lhasa, and I going back to India?

I have in my lifetime, seen few such fierce snowstorms. The storm had been raging the whole day and night, and the wind was blowing so hard that we could not hear each other speak. I can only recollect with horror at the dreadful anxiety I was in when you, with a handful of men, escaped from the Tibetan soldiers watching us, and in the dark fearful night proceeded to take your men up the mountain range, with no path, and among loose stones and boulders, a way, indeed, not even fit for goats.

I have seen very few snowstorms this intense in my life. The storm had been going all day and night, and the wind was howling so loudly that we couldn't hear each other talk. I can still remember with dread the terrible anxiety I felt when you, with a small group of men, managed to slip away from the Tibetan soldiers keeping an eye on us. In that dark, frightening night, you led your men up the mountain range, with no clear path, navigating through loose stones and boulders—certainly not a route fit even for goats.

That night, I well remember, you were carrying a weight much greater than the one you usually carried, thirty seers (60 lbs.), for when you left the tent you had in your hand a small bag with 200 extra silver rupees, and you carried your revolver, your rifle, and some [492] extra ammunition. I assure you that I look back with amazement at how you succeeded in pulling through the dangers and difficulties of that night alone.

That night, I remember clearly, you were carrying a burden much heavier than usual, thirty seers (60 lbs.), because when you stepped out of the tent, you had a small bag with 200 extra silver rupees in one hand, and you were also carrying your revolver, your rifle, and some [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] extra ammunition. I can honestly say that I look back in amazement at how you managed to get through the dangers and challenges of that night all by yourself.

Yours sincerely,

Best regards,

(Signed)                     H. WILSON,      
American Methodist Episcopal Mission.

(Signed)                     H. WILSON,      
American Methodist Episcopal Mission.


 

Dr. H. Wilson's Statement.

Dr. H. Wilson's Statement.

I herewith certify that, having heard at Gungi (Byas) that Mr. A. Henry Savage Landor, after losing all his provisions in a large river, had been captured by the Tibetans at Toxem and had there been tortured, I proceeded to Taklakot (Tibet) in the hope of obtaining further news. At Taklakot the news was confirmed, and I heard that Mr. Landor and two servants were brought back under a strong guard. Some uncertainty prevailed as to what route he would be made to follow, and efforts were made by the Tibetans to make him proceed by the long, cold, and dangerous route viâ the Lumpiya Pass, instead of by the shorter and easier route viâ Taklakot. We heard that Mr. Landor and his two men were in very poor health owing to the ill-treatment by the Tibetans, and no doubt the long journey over ice and snow by the Lumpiya Pass left but little chance of their reaching Gungi alive. At the request of Jaimal Bura, Latto Bura and myself, Pundit Gobaria despatched a man to the Jong Pen at Kujer to explain that we would be thankful and would consider it a great kindness if he would allow Mr. Landor to travel through Taklakot. At last, after much trouble, our request was granted. The officer who brought us the news informed us that Mr. Landor would be made to pass through Taklakot at night, and conveyed directly over the Lippu Pass. The Political Peshkar Kharak Sing Pal arrived in Taklakot that day from India, and we held a consultation. We agreed to keep a watchman in the road all night, but Mr. Landor did not go by. In the afternoon of the 8th, Mr. Landor and his two men arrived. They had been rifled of all they possessed and their clothes were torn and dirty. Mr. Landor and the two men looked very ill and suffering, Mr. Landor's face being hardly recognisable. He and his bearer Chanden Sing gave us an account of the tortures that had been inflicted upon them at Toxem and Galshio, and Mr. Landor showed the Peshkar Kharak Singh, Pundit Gobaria, myself and many Bhotiyas (Shokas) twenty-two wounds on his spine, feet and hands received from the Tibetans. Chanden Sing, who had been administered two hundred lashes, showed numerous black marks and open sores where the skin had been torn on both legs. From Lamas and soldiers who had been present at Mr. Landor's arrest and tortures I heard the following account.

I hereby confirm that, having heard at Gungi (Byas) that Mr. A. Henry Savage Landor had lost all his supplies in a large river and was captured by the Tibetans at Toxem where he was tortured, I went to Taklakot (Tibet) hoping to get more information. At Taklakot, the news was verified, and I learned that Mr. Landor and two of his servants were brought back under heavy guard. There was some confusion about the route he would be forced to take, and the Tibetans tried to make him go along the long, cold, and dangerous path via the Lumpiya Pass instead of the shorter and easier route through Taklakot. We heard that Mr. Landor and his two men were in very poor health due to the mistreatment by the Tibetans and it seemed likely that the long journey over ice and snow via the Lumpiya Pass would leave them with little chance of reaching Gungi alive. At the request of Jaimal Bura, Latto Bura, and myself, Pundit Gobaria sent someone to the Jong Pen at Kujer to explain that we would appreciate it and consider it a great kindness if he would allow Mr. Landor to travel through Taklakot. After much effort, our request was finally granted. The officer who brought us the news told us that Mr. Landor would be taken through Taklakot at night and directly over the Lippu Pass. The Political Peshkar Kharak Sing Pal arrived in Taklakot that day from India and we had a meeting. We agreed to keep a watchman on the road all night, but Mr. Landor did not pass through. In the afternoon of the 8th, Mr. Landor and his two men arrived. They had been stripped of everything they owned and their clothes were torn and filthy. Mr. Landor and the two men looked very ill and in distress, with Mr. Landor's face barely recognizable. He and his bearer Chanden Sing recounted the tortures they had endured at Toxem and Galshio, and Mr. Landor showed the Peshkar Kharak Singh, Pundit Gobaria, myself, and several Bhotiyas (Shokas) twenty-two wounds on his back, feet, and hands inflicted by the Tibetans. Chanden Sing, who had received two hundred lashes, displayed many black marks and open sores where his skin had been torn on both legs. From the Lamas and soldiers who had been present during Mr. Landor's arrest and torture, I heard the following account.

[493]An ambush had been laid, and Mr. Landor and his bearer were caught by treachery when some hundred and fifty yards away from their tent, inside which were the rifles and revolver. They made a desperate resistance and fought for over fifteen minutes, struggling to get at their weapons. Thirty men were on Mr. Landor and twelve or fifteen held Chanden Sing, while four hundred soldiers armed with matchlocks and swords, and who had kept hidden behind sandhills, quickly surrounded them. They were tightly bound with ropes round the neck, chest, and legs, and the arms were pinioned behind their backs. Chanden Sing received two hundred lashes that same day. Mr. Landor and Mansing were taken to Galshio three days later. Ponies were provided for them, Mansing riding bare-back, while the wooden frame of a saddle was provided for Mr. Landor, the frame having several iron spikes sticking out of it in the back part of it. During the long ride to Galshio these nails produced several wounds on Mr. Landor's spine and back. Efforts were made, by means of a rope attached to his handcuffs, to pull him off the saddle and have him trodden to death by the hundreds of ponies of the Lamas, soldiers and officers that came full gallop behind. Moreover, two shots were fired at Mr. Landor. Mansing, unable to use his hands that were bound, fell many times off his steed and remained some two miles behind. When Galshio was reached Mr. Landor was pulled off his saddle, and they told him that his head would be cut off immediately. Dragged mercilessly by soldiers, he was taken to a wooden log. Here they stretched his legs wide apart, and his feet were made fast on the cutting edge of the log by means of tightly bound ropes that cut into his flesh. Then while an officer held him in a standing position by the hair of his head, a hot iron was passed in front of his eyes and a matchlock laid on his forehead and fired. Lastly, the head Lama approached with a long sword and swung it right and left close to Mr. Landor's neck, as if about to cut off the head. Mr. Landor remained composed and spoke no words. After some twenty minutes Mansing arrived, and was tied to the same log in front of Mr. Landor, and pretence was made to behead Mansing, Mr. Landor's face having been covered with a cloth. The Lamas professed to have been very astonished when, after having tied the prisoners' hands high up to poles behind them, Mr. Landor asked for some tzamba (oatmeal), meat and rice, and Mansing for some butter.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]They had set an ambush, and Mr. Landor and his bearer were betrayed when they were just about one hundred fifty yards from their tent, which held their rifles and revolver. They fought back fiercely for over fifteen minutes, trying to reach their weapons. Thirty men attacked Mr. Landor, while twelve or fifteen held Chanden Sing, and four hundred soldiers hidden behind sandhills quickly surrounded them. They were tightly bound with ropes around their necks, chests, and legs, and their arms were pinned behind their backs. Chanden Sing received two hundred lashes that same day. Mr. Landor and Mansing were taken to Galshio three days later. They were given ponies to ride, with Mansing sitting bareback and Mr. Landor on a wooden saddle frame that had several iron spikes sticking out of the back. During the long ride to Galshio, these spikes caused several wounds on Mr. Landor's back and spine. Efforts were made to pull him off the saddle using a rope attached to his handcuffs, trying to have him trampled to death by the hundreds of ponies, soldiers, and officers galloping behind them. Additionally, two shots were fired at Mr. Landor. Mansing, unable to use his bound hands, fell off his horse multiple times and ended up about two miles behind. When they reached Galshio, Mr. Landor was pulled off his saddle and told that his head would be cut off immediately. He was dragged ruthlessly by soldiers to a wooden log. There, they stretched his legs wide apart, securing his feet tightly to the cutting edge of the log with ropes that cut into his flesh. While an officer held him standing by his hair, a hot iron was waved in front of his face, and a matchlock was placed on his forehead and fired. Finally, the head Lama approached with a long sword, swinging it near Mr. Landor's neck as if about to behead him. Mr. Landor stayed calm and didn’t say a word. About twenty minutes later, Mansing arrived and was tied to the same log in front of Mr. Landor, with a cloth over Mr. Landor's face as they pretended to behead Mansing. The Lamas claimed to be shocked when, after tying the prisoners' hands up to poles behind them, Mr. Landor asked for some tzamba (oatmeal), meat, and rice, while Mansing requested some butter.

The amazement of the Tibetans appears to have been even greater when food was brought and Mr. Landor and Mansing partook heartily of it and asked for more. Mr. Landor was kept chained to the log for twenty-four hours, Mansing twelve hours. When they were brought back to Toxem they found that Chanden Sing had been kept four days tied hands and feet to an upright post, and he had been given no food.

The surprise of the Tibetans seemed to grow even more when food was brought, and Mr. Landor and Mansing enjoyed it enthusiastically and asked for seconds. Mr. Landor was chained to the log for twenty-four hours, while Mansing was kept for twelve. When they returned to Toxem, they discovered that Chanden Sing had been tied up, hands and feet, to an upright post for four days without any food.

At Taklakot, an officer (called Nerba) confessed in my own tent, and before Pundit Gobaria and the Political Peshkar Kharak Sing, that he himself had held Mr. Landor by the hair when he was about [494] to be beheaded. He had also fired a shot at Mr. Landor, and had moreover been ordered by the Lamas to cut off Mr. Landor's toe and finger nails, as well as a lock of his hair. The Taklakot Lamas and the Tokchim Tarjum professed to be sorry at the Galshio Lamas having behaved in such a cruel manner.

At Taklakot, an officer named Nerba admitted in my own tent, and in front of Pundit Gobaria and the Political Peshkar Kharak Sing, that he had actually held Mr. Landor by the hair when he was about to be beheaded. He also fired a shot at Mr. Landor and was ordered by the Lamas to cut off Mr. Landor's toenails and fingernails, as well as a lock of his hair. The Taklakot Lamas and the Tokchim Tarjum claimed to be sorry that the Galshio Lamas had acted so cruelly.

At Taklakot we made a list of Mr. Landor's property that was still missing, and we gave a copy to the Jong Pen and one to the Tokchim Tarjum, that they may try to recover what they can.

At Taklakot, we created a list of Mr. Landor's missing property and provided a copy to the Jong Pen and one to the Tokchim Tarjum so they could try to recover what they can.

(Signed)                     HARUKA WILSON,      
Methodist Episcopal Mission.

(Signed)                     Haruka Wilson,      
Methodist Episcopal Mission.

Gungi Byas Bhot, Darma. Sept. 21, 1897.

Gungi Byas Bhot, Darma. Sept. 21, 1897.


 

Dr. H. Wilson's Certificate of A. Henry Savage Landor's injuries
and wounds

Dr. H. Wilson Certificate of A. Henry Savage Landor's injuries
and wounds

Taklakot, Tibet, Sept. 8, 1897. 

Taklakot, Tibet, Sept. 8, 1897.

I herewith certify that I have examined the wounds that Mr. A. Henry Savage Landor received during his imprisonment at Galshio in Tibet.

I hereby confirm that I have looked at the injuries that Mr. A. Henry Savage Landor sustained during his time in prison at Galshio in Tibet.

There are five large sores along the spinal column and the spine itself has sustained severe injuries. At the time they were inflicted these wounds must have caused profuse bleeding.

There are five large sores along the spine, and the spine itself has suffered serious injuries. When these wounds were made, they must have caused heavy bleeding.

The feet bear the marks of cruel treatment. On the right foot are still well visible to-day (nineteen days after wounds were inflicted) six wounds, viz.—

The feet show signs of harsh treatment. On the right foot, there are still clearly visible today (nineteen days after the wounds were inflicted) six wounds, namely—

  • On the heel one wound one inch long;
  • Outside ankle  "  half-inch long;
  • Front of ankle  "  one inch long;
  • Top of foot, three inches above the toes, one wound one and a-half inch long.
  • Two small wounds on the upper part of foot.

On the left foot the four wounds are of a very severe character, and were produced by ropes cutting into the flesh.

On the left foot, the four wounds are quite severe and were caused by ropes cutting into the flesh.

  • One nasty wound above heel, two and a-half inches long.
  • One wound below the ankle, one and one-fourth of an inch long.
  • One wound three inches above the toes, two inches long.
  • One wound on the heel, half an inch long.

These wounds have caused the feet to be much swollen, the left foot especially having been considerably injured. Its strained tendons give still intense pain when touched and the foot is very heavy, inflamed and swollen.

These injuries have made the feet very swollen, especially the left foot, which has been significantly hurt. The strained tendons still cause sharp pain when touched, and the foot feels very heavy, inflamed, and swollen.

On the left hand there are five wounds.

On the left hand, there are five wounds.

[495]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

  • On middle finger a wound one inch long and deep to the bone.
  • On root of middle finger, a wound half an inch long.
  • On small finger, a wound one-fourth of an inch long.
  • On third  "    "    "    "  
  • On first  "    "  half an inch long.
  • The four fingers are still very swollen.

On the right hand there are only two wounds.

On the right hand, there are only two wounds.

  • The first, one half-inch long, on the upper side of the hand.
  • The second, a quarter of an inch long on the second finger.

Both hands are aching and much swollen, and the wounds upon them were evidently produced by the heavy iron chain of the handcuffs.

Both hands are sore and very swollen, and the injuries on them clearly came from the heavy iron chain of the handcuffs.

On arrival at Taklakot (nineteen days after having been tortured) Mr. Landor is still suffering from strong fever caused by his wounds, and no doubt when they were fresh these must have given Mr. Landor intense pain. His health and strong constitution seem altogether shattered by the sufferings he has undergone.

On arriving at Taklakot (nineteen days after being tortured), Mr. Landor is still battling a severe fever caused by his wounds, and it's clear that when they were fresh, they must have caused him intense pain. His health and strong constitution seem completely shattered by everything he has gone through.

His face, hands and feet are very swollen, and he appears extremely weak; he himself attributed his great exhaustion to having been unable to sleep for nineteen consecutive nights on account of the bad sores on the spine and legs and because of the heavy iron chains with which he was laden.

His face, hands, and feet are really swollen, and he looks extremely weak; he said his huge exhaustion came from not being able to sleep for nineteen nights in a row because of the painful sores on his spine and legs and the heavy iron chains he was carrying.

H. WILSON,       
Hospital Assistant, Methodist Episcopal Mission.

H. WILSON,       
Hospital Assistant, Methodist Episcopal Mission.

Gungi Byas Bhot, Darma. Sept. 21, 1897.

Gungi Byas Bhot, Darma. Sept. 21, 1897.

N.B.—The numerous smaller wounds, burns, &c., on the face and body are not taken into account.

N.B.—The many minor wounds, burns, etc., on the face and body are not included.

A copy of this report was despatched from Dr. Wilson direct to the Deputy Commissioner, and was forwarded to the Government of India.

A copy of this report was sent directly from Dr. Wilson to the Deputy Commissioner and was forwarded to the Government of India.


 

Dr. H. Wilson's Certificate of Chanden Sing's injuries.

Dr. H. Wilson's Certificate of Chanden Sing's injuries.

Taklakot, Sept. 8, 1897. 

Taklakot, Sept. 8, 1897.

I herewith certify that I have examined Chanden Sing, Mr. A. Henry Savage Landor's servant who accompanied him to Tibet, where they were arrested and tortured. Chanden Sing has visible to this day on both his legs, and twenty-one days after they were inflicted, innumerable black marks produced by flogging. So severely appears the punishment to have been administered, that large patches of skin and flesh have been torn off by the lashing. Chanden Sing is now in very poor health, and it is evident by his appearance that he suffers greatly from the tortures and ill-treatment received at the hands of the Tibetans.

I certify that I have examined Chanden Sing, Mr. A. Henry Savage Landor's servant, who accompanied him to Tibet, where they were arrested and tortured. Chanden Sing still has visible marks on both legs, and twenty-one days after they were inflicted, there are numerous dark marks caused by flogging. The punishment appears to have been so severe that large patches of skin and flesh were torn off during the beating. Chanden Sing is now in very poor health, and it’s clear from his appearance that he suffers greatly from the torture and mistreatment he endured at the hands of the Tibetans.

H. WILSON,       
Hospital Assistant, Methodist Episcopal Mission.

H. WILSON,       
Hospital Assistant, Methodist Episcopal Mission.

Gungi Byas Bhot, Darma. Sept. 21, 1897.

Gungi Byas Bhot, Darma. Sept. 21, 1897.

A copy of this was sent by Dr. Wilson to the Deputy Commissioner at Almora, and was forwarded to the Government of India.

A copy of this was sent by Dr. Wilson to the Deputy Commissioner in Almora, and it was passed on to the Government of India.


 

[496]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Certificate by Miss M. A. Sheldon, M.D., of the Methodist Episcopal
Mission.

Certificate by Miss M.A. Sheldon, M.D., of the Methodist Episcopal
Mission.

M. E. Mission,

M.E. Mission,

  Khela P. O. Dist. Almora.

Khela, P.O. Dist. Almora.

 East Kumaon, Bhot.

East Kumaon, Bhot.

"All at it and always at it."—Wesley.

"Always busy and always doing something."—Wesley.

Sept. 28, 1897. 

Sept. 28, 1897.

This is to certify that I have seen the wounds inflicted upon Mr. Landor by the Tibetans. It is now about forty days since he was bound and tortured. The wounds are healing well. The scars upon his hands caused by being bound with chains behind his back are plainly visible.

This is to certify that I have seen the wounds inflicted on Mr. Landor by the Tibetans. It has been about forty days since he was tied up and tortured. The wounds are healing well. The scars on his hands from being chained behind his back are clearly visible.

The feet show even more clearly the results of inhuman binding and torture. The wounds have not yet entirely healed, and there is much discoloration. One foot is still swollen.

The feet reveal even more clearly the effects of brutal binding and torture. The wounds haven't fully healed yet, and there's a lot of discoloration. One foot is still swollen.

I have not seen the wounds upon his spine inflicted by a torturing saddle, but he complains of much pain and soreness in that region.

I haven't seen the injuries on his back caused by a torturous saddle, but he talks about a lot of pain and discomfort in that area.

(Signed)                    MARTHA A. SHELDON, M.D. 

(Signed)                    MARTHA A. SHELDON, M.D.


 

Certificate from Doctor Turchini, a Director of the Royal Hospital
of S.M. Nuova, Florence, Italy.

Certificate from Dr. Turchini, Director of the Royal Hospital
of S.M. Nuova, Florence, Italy.

          D. D.  Stamp
Stamp




R. Arcispedale di S.M. Nuova,
Gabinetto
Elettro-Terapico
Direzione,
Firenze.

Firenze, 12 Febbraio, 1898.

Florence, February 12, 1898.

Il sottoscritto Medico Primario Direttore del Turno e Gabinetto elettro-terapico del R° Arcispedale di S. Maria Nuova dichiara quanto appresso: nel mese di Dicembre appena giunto in questa Città visitò il Sigre Henry Savage Landor e lo trovô affetto=

Il sottoscritto Medico Primario Direttore del Turno e Gabinetto elettro-terapico del R° Arcispedale di S. Maria Nuova dichiara quanto appresso: nel mese di Dicembre appena giunto in questa Città visitò il Sigre Henry Savage Landor e lo trovô affetto=

Da retinite all' occhio sinistro con suffusione dei mezzi trasparenti, e da grave iperemia retinica all' occhio destro. La vista era abolita a sinistra, diminuita a destra=

Da retinite in the left eye with a blur of the transparent media, and severe retinal hyperemia in the right eye. Vision was abolished on the left, diminished on the right.

La colonna vertebrale era dolente, se leggermente compressa con un dito, o se appena percossa col martello da percussione il dolore si faceva intenso, acuto specialmente nelle regioni lombare e dorsale. La deambulazione non era libera ma incerta, la funzionalità degli sfinteri molto difettosa per cui difficolta della mizione e delle evacuazioni.

La colonna vertebrale era dolorante; se semplicemente compressa con un dito o colpita leggermente con un martello percussore, il dolore diventava intenso e acuto, specialmente nelle zone lombare e dorsale. La camminata non era libera ma incerta, e la funzionalità degli sfinteri era molto compromessa, causando difficoltà nella minzione e nelle evacuazioni.

[497]Presentava poi delle chiazze ecchimobili sopra-malleolari e sopra-carpiche. L'aspetto suo generale era di persona sofferente e molto anemica. Fatte le cure che il caso del Sigre Landor reclamava, oggi 12 Febbraio notiamo; all' occhio destro risoluta la iperemia retinica, aumentato il campo visivo, occhio che serve discretamente alla sua funzione; all' occhio sinistro è molto turbata la circolazione endoculare e quivi la funzione visiva non è ristabilita; non vede gli oggetti e tutto gli fa confusione. La colonna vertebrale presenta sempre dei punti dolenti in specie al rigonfiamento sacro lombare. La deambulazione è più corretta, ma gli sarebbe impossibile fare una passeggiata lunga. La mizione e megliorata, non cosi la defacazione che è sempre difettosa per impotenza dello sfintere.

[a id="Pg_497"] [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]He had then some reddish spots above the malleoli and above the carpals. His overall appearance was that of a very anemic and suffering person. After the treatments that Mr. Landor required, today, February 12th, we note: the retinal hyperemia in the right eye has resolved, the visual field has increased, and the eye is functioning reasonably well; in the left eye, however, the circulation is still quite disturbed, and visual function has not been restored; he cannot see objects clearly and everything seems confusing to him. The spine still has some painful points, particularly at the lumbar-sacral area. His walking has improved, but it would be impossible for him to take a long stroll. Urination has improved, but not so for defecation, which remains problematic due to sphincter weakness.

Le condizioni generali sono megliorate, ma occorre pero al Sigre Landor seguire la cura intrapresa, e specialmente la cura elettrica ed idroterapica.

Le condizioni generali sono migliorate, ma il Sig. Landor deve continuare con la cura intrapresa, in particolare con la terapia elettrica e idroterapica.

(Signed)                DOTT. TURCHINI. 

(Signed)                Dr. Turchini.

 Comune di Firenze.
 Officio d'Igiene.

City of Florence.
 Health Office.

Visto per la legalizzazione della
firma del Sig. Dott. Turchini.
Dal Municipio Firenze   

Seen for the legalization of the
signature of Mr. Dr. Turchini.
From the Municipality of Florence

   Lira Stamp.

Lira Stamp.

Li 12 Febbraio 1898.    
Il Sindaco.
P. I.        
A. Artimini.

February 12, 1898.    
The Mayor.
P. I.        
A. Artimini.


 

Letter from the Political Peshkar, Kharak Sing.

Letter from the Political Peshkar, Kharak Singh.

Private.

Private.

Garbyang, Bhot,    
November 13, 1897.

Garbyang, Bhot,    
November 13, 1897.

My dear Mr. Landor,

Dear Mr. Landor,

I hope that you have received my letter of some time ago and that you may be quite well now. Are you still at Almora? I have not yet got back your things from the Jong Pen, but I hear it is quite true that all your property reached Tokchim a long time ago. I have sent another letter to the Jong Pen, but cannot get an answer as the Lippu Pass is now closed owing to a heavy fall of snow yesterday. It is rumoured that a Tibetan officer is coming from Lhassa to Taklakot to inquire after your case, and probably he may have reached Taklakot yesterday, and after examining your things he will send them down to me. Now I have nearly finished my work at this place. I have collected the dues and paid them to the agents of the Jong Pen. I will go back to Chaudas the day after to-morrow—i.e., on the 15th of this month.

I hope you received my letter from a while ago and that you’re doing well now. Are you still in Almora? I haven’t gotten your things back from the Jong Pen yet, but I’ve heard it's true that all your belongings arrived in Tokchim a long time ago. I sent another letter to the Jong Pen, but I can’t get a response since the Lippu Pass is closed due to a heavy snowfall yesterday. There are rumors that a Tibetan officer is coming from Lhasa to Taklakot to check on your situation, and he may have reached Taklakot yesterday. After looking over your things, he will likely send them to me. I have almost finished my work here. I’ve collected the dues and paid them to the Jong Pen's agents. I’ll be returning to Chaudas the day after tomorrow—i.e., on the 15th of this month.

With kind regards and hoping to hear from you soon.

With best wishes and looking forward to hearing from you soon.

I remain,                    
Yours sincerely,          
KHARAK SING PAL.

I remain, Yours sincerely, KHARAK SING PAL.


 

[498]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Letter from the Political Peshkar, Kharak Sing Pal.

Letter from the Political Peshkar, Kharak Singh Pal.

Haldwani, January 11, 1898. 

Haldwani, January 11, 1898.

My dear Mr. Landor,

Dear Mr. Landor,

I hope that by this time you have reached safely home. I have been very anxious as I have not heard from you or of your safe arrival there. The dreadful day of the 8th of September is still vivid in my mind, when I first saw you at Taklakot (in Tibet) after you had been tortured by the Tibetans, and where I had come in search of you.

I hope that by now you’ve made it home safely. I’ve been really worried since I haven’t heard from you or know if you arrived there okay. The terrible day of September 8th is still fresh in my mind when I first saw you in Taklakot (in Tibet) after the Tibetans tortured you, and I came looking for you.

I cannot forget your fearful appearance, with long hair and beard, and your face, body and limbs covered with wounds and bruises. When you arrived at Taklakot, in a few miserable rags stained with blood, dirty and swarming with lice, and surrounded by the guard of Tibetans, I could hardly believe it possible that it was you who stood before me, so much you had changed since I had last seen you.

I can't forget how terrified you looked, with your long hair and beard, and your face, body, and limbs covered in wounds and bruises. When you got to Taklakot, in a few ragged clothes stained with blood, filthy and crawling with lice, and flanked by the Tibetan guards, I could hardly believe it was really you standing in front of me; you had changed so much since I last saw you.

I am still deeply pained when I think of the pitiable condition you were in, when you showed me 22 (twenty-two) fresh wounds on your hands, feet and spine, without counting the injuries to your face. And indescribable pain gave us too seeing your confiscated baggage under seal of the Tibetan authorities, and to find it, when we opened it, to be full of broken or damaged instruments and other articles of your property.

I still feel a lot of pain when I think about the terrible condition you were in when you showed me 22 fresh wounds on your hands, feet, and spine, not to mention the injuries to your face. It was heartbreaking for us to see your confiscated luggage sealed by the Tibetan authorities, and when we opened it, we found it full of broken or damaged instruments and other belongings of yours.

I think that you may remember my inquiry and consequent anger when the Tibetan officers and soldiers admitted their guilt of tying you by your limbs to the stretching log and of placing you on a spiked saddle; of removing forcibly your toe-nails and pulling you by the hair of your head. You know quite well that I had no power to do more than to report the matter to higher authorities, but I can assure you that it was to me quite unbearable to hear from the Tibetans that they had brought you to execution, and that they boasted of having swung the naked executioner's sword right and left of your neck, and that they had brought a red-hot iron close to your eyes to blind you.

I think you remember my frustration and anger when the Tibetan officers and soldiers confessed to tying you up with your limbs to a stretching log and putting you on a spiked saddle; to forcibly removing your toenails and pulling your hair. You know I had no power to do anything beyond reporting it to higher-ups, but I can tell you it was unbearable for me to hear from the Tibetans that they had taken you to execution, boasting about swinging the executioner's sword near your neck, and that they had brought a red-hot iron close to your eyes to blind you.

Your servants' condition, especially that of Chanden Sing, whom like yourself the Tibetans kept prisoner for twenty-four days, and who was given two hundred lashes, was pitiable beyond words.

Your servants' situation, especially Chanden Sing's, who, like you, was held captive by the Tibetans for twenty-four days and received two hundred lashes, was unbelievably tragic.

I am anxious to see the photographs taken by Dr. Wilson of you as you were when you arrived at Taklakot. I trust that by now you may feel better and that the pain in your spine may have altogether disappeared. I believe your rifles, revolver, ring, &c., which I succeeded in recovering from the Tibetans, must have reached you by now through the Deputy Commissioner at Almora. The cash and other articles have not been recovered, nor is there any probability of getting them back. Hoping to receive news of you soon and with best salaams,

I’m eager to see the photos that Dr. Wilson took of you when you first arrived in Taklakot. I hope you’re feeling better by now and that the pain in your back has completely gone away. I think your rifles, revolver, ring, etc., which I managed to get back from the Tibetans, should have reached you by now through the Deputy Commissioner in Almora. Unfortunately, the cash and other items have not been recovered, and it’s unlikely we’ll get them back. Looking forward to hearing from you soon, best wishes,

I am, yours most obediently,        
K. KHARAK SING PAL,
Political Peshkar,  
Garbyang Dharchula, Bhot.

I am, your most obedient servant,        
K. KHARAK SING PAL,
Political Peshkar,  
Garbyang Dharchula, Bhot.


 

[499]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Letter from Colonel Grigg, Commissioner of Kumaon.

Letter from Colonel Grigg, Kumaon Commissioner.

Commissionership of Kumaon.
Dated December 7, 1897.  

Commissionership of Kumaon.
Dated December 7, 1897.

My dear Landor,

Dear Landor,

Karak Sing reports that 2 guns (1 damaged), 1 revolver, 1 signet-ring, cash 68/12/-, cartridges (gun) 110, ditto revolver 37, cleaning-rods 2, gun-case 1, leather straps, 1 butterfly-catcher, &c., have been handed to him by the Jong Pen of Taklakot, and he has requested Deputy Commissioner's orders.

Karak Sing reports that 2 guns (1 damaged), 1 revolver, 1 signet ring, cash 68/12/-, 110 cartridges for the gun, 37 cartridges for the revolver, 2 cleaning rods, 1 gun case, leather straps, 1 butterfly net, etc., have been given to him by the Jong Pen of Taklakot, and he has requested orders from the Deputy Commissioner.

I am glad to hear your things are coming on. I hope you are getting stronger.

I’m happy to hear that things are progressing for you. I hope you’re getting stronger.

With our kindest regards,        
Yours very sincerely,    
E. E. Grigg.  

With our best wishes,        
Yours sincerely,    
E. E. Grigg.


 

[Note by the Author.This letter, as will be seen from the date,
reached me after the bulk of the book had gone to press
.]

[Author's Note.This letter, as you'll notice from the date,
got to me after most of the book had already gone to press
.]

A PRIVATE LETTER FROM J. LARKIN, ESQ., WHO, DEPUTED BY THE GOVERNMENT, PROCEEDED TO THE FRONTIER TO MAKE AN INQUIRY INTO MY CASE.

A PRIVATE LETTER FROM J. LARKIN, ESQ., WHO, APPOINTED BY THE GOVERNMENT, WENT TO THE FRONTIER TO INVESTIGATE MY CASE.

Almora, August 10, 1898. 

Almora, August 10, 1898.

My dear Landor,

Dear Landor,

Yours of the 21st ult. I am glad to hear that your book on your experiences in Tibet is nearly finished. I wish you may have every success with it, as it is only what you deserve after your trials and hardships in that difficult land of the ultra-conservative Lamas. I am not aware that the Indian papers are attacking you. However, they apparently do not get reliable information if they dispute the fact of your having entered Tibet. We who were in some way connected with your rescue and return have not been "interviewed," or we would give the authentic account of the affair.

Your letter from the 21st of last month was great to receive. I'm happy to hear that your book about your experiences in Tibet is almost done. I hope it brings you the success you deserve after everything you went through in that challenging place filled with ultra-conservative Lamas. I’m not aware of any Indian newspapers criticizing you. However, it seems they’re not getting accurate information if they’re disputing the fact that you entered Tibet. Those of us who were involved in your rescue and return haven’t been "interviewed," or we would share the real story about what happened.

I was on a few days' leave at Naini Tal when I heard of your capture, tortures and expulsion from Tibet. I was deputed by the Government to proceed at once to the borders and make an inquiry into the affair. I set off at once, and I met you at Askot, where you were being looked after by the Rajbar. What a change in your appearance! When I saw you standing among some of the Askot natives I could with difficulty identify you. You were bronzed and [500] weather-beaten to such an extent that you were not distinguishable from the natives. I do not think you can blame me for not recognising you readily. Your forehead, nose and the part of your face below your eyes were scarred, and helped to alter your appearance very greatly. You did surprise me when you told me that you would retrace your steps back to the borders on learning from me that I was hastening on to inquire into your case. I had then seen the twenty odd wounds you had on your face, wrists, feet and back. I strongly protested against your undertaking the fatiguing journey back across the perilous and arduous road, as I knew you needed rest and good nourishment, and thought it would be wisest for you to get back to Almora, and be under a good doctor.

I was on a few days' leave in Naini Tal when I heard about your capture, torture, and expulsion from Tibet. The Government sent me to the border right away to look into the situation. I left immediately and met you at Askot, where the Rajbar was taking care of you. What a change in your appearance! When I saw you standing among some of the locals, I could barely recognize you. You were so sunburned and weather-beaten that you looked like one of them. I don’t think you can blame me for not recognizing you at first. Your forehead, nose, and the area below your eyes were scarred, which altered your appearance significantly. I was surprised when you told me you would retrace your steps back to the border upon learning that I was rushing to investigate your case. By then, I had seen the twenty or so wounds you had on your face, wrists, feet, and back. I strongly advised against your undertaking the exhausting journey back along that dangerous and difficult road, as I knew you needed rest and good nutrition. I thought it would be best for you to return to Almora and be under a good doctor.

You, however, with your characteristic doggedness, meant to accompany me, and I must perforce let you. I was glad in the long run, for you enabled me to make a fuller inquiry than I would otherwise have been able.

You, with your usual persistence, insisted on coming with me, and I had to let you. In the end, I was glad, because you helped me do a more thorough investigation than I would have managed on my own.

As you know, and as I reported to Government, I found after an inquiry on the borders that you had with great difficulty and manœuvring succeeded in entering Tibet, evading the Jong Pen of Taklakot, and the Barca Tarjum at Gyanema, and crossing the Mariam La (Maium Pass) and getting as far as Tuksem (Toxem). You had been deserted by all the mountaineers who had started with you and who had promised to accompany you wherever you went. When you were left with the two Kumaonis, you were surrounded and captured by the Governor of that part of Tibet and his men. There, as a sequel to your innumerable fatigues, hardships, desertions, and privations, you and your two followers were ill-treated and tortured by the Governor. Have you not got a copy of my official report? I remember you told me you were applying for it. If you possess the copy, surely that will be sufficient to confound your traducers. I saw from the public papers that my report was to be laid on the table of the House of Commons by the Secretary of State for India.

As you know, and as I reported to the Government, I found after an inquiry on the borders that you had, with great difficulty and maneuvering, managed to enter Tibet, avoiding the Jong Pen of Taklakot, and the Barca Tarjum at Gyanema, and crossing the Mariam La (Maium Pass) to reach Tuksem (Toxem). You had been abandoned by all the mountaineers who started with you and promised to accompany you wherever you went. When you were left with the two Kumaonis, you were surrounded and captured by the Governor of that part of Tibet and his men. There, as a result of your countless fatigue, hardships, desertions, and privations, you and your two followers were mistreated and tortured by the Governor. Don't you have a copy of my official report? I remember you mentioned you were applying for it. If you have the copy, surely that will be enough to disprove your detractors. I saw in the public papers that my report was set to be presented to the House of Commons by the Secretary of State for India.

How did the photographs which we took up at the Lippu Pass turn out? I should particularly like to have the one of the group on the pass, and also the one where I am on horseback. I would also like to have the one I took of you having your matutinal bath when the water froze in your hair and on your body as it was thrown on you by Chanden Sing; and no wonder it did, as there were ten to twelve feet of snow lying about, and a hardy Bhotia (Shoka) mountaineer had only a few days prior to our arrival been lost in the snow on crossing the pass.

How did the photos we took at Lippu Pass turn out? I’d really like to have the group shot on the pass, and also the one where I'm on horseback. I’d also like the one I took of you taking your morning bath when the water froze in your hair and on your body as Chanden Sing threw it on you; and it’s no surprise, given that there were ten to twelve feet of snow around, and a tough Bhotia (Shoka) mountaineer had only a few days before we got there been lost in the snow while crossing the pass.

Doubtless it will afford you some pleasure to learn that you have earned quite a reputation among the natives, both Tibetan and Bhotias (Shokas), on account of your universal cordiality, generosity and pluck. They are constantly inquiring about you, and relating your many good traits. Should you ever think of returning here you have made many friends, and you would get a very warm welcome from the natives.

I'm sure you'll be pleased to hear that you've gained quite a reputation among the locals, both Tibetans and Bhotias (Shokas), because of your friendliness, generosity, and courage. They often ask about you and share stories of your many great qualities. If you ever consider coming back here, you'll find that you’ve made many friends, and the locals would give you a very warm welcome.

[501] Dr. H. Wilson tells me that, when he took you over from your captors, the officials of Tibet, you were in a dying state, and that he only just got you in the nick of time. How are your eyes and spine? I trust they are quite well again. I look back with pleasure to my tour up to the border with you, and our return journey after your journey into Tibet proper, where you were subjected to tortures by the Governor of the district thereof.

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__] Dr. H. Wilson tells me that when he rescued you from your captors, the officials of Tibet, you were about to die, and he barely saved you in time. How are your eyes and spine? I hope they’re fully recovered. I fondly remember our trip to the border together and the return journey after your time in Tibet, where you endured torture by the local Governor.

With every good wish,              
Yours very sincerely,          
(Signed)     J. Larkin.  

With all my best wishes,              
Sincerely yours,          
(Signed)     J. Larkin.

FOOTNOTES:

FOOTNOTES:

[41] Maium Pass.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Maium Pass.

[42] Galshio = Gyatsho.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Galshio = Gyatsho.

[43] Bhutias = Shokas.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Bhutias = Shokas.

[44] Raja = King.

Raja = King.

[45] N.B.—Reproductions of some of the photographs mentioned are given in this book.

[45] Note: Some of the photographs mentioned are reproduced in this book.

[502]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]


[503]

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

INDEX

  • Anomalies and Deformities, 263
  • Aconite, 262
  • Adultery, 333
  • Almora, 6
  • Altitude, greatest reached, 142
    • Difficulties of travelling at great, 141, 150
  • Aneroids, 5
  • Antelopes, 342
  • Anti Ram Sah (banker), 63, 90
  • Askote, 14, 460
  • Authorities (Tibetan), 474, 475
  • Dafia, 14
  • Dancing, 305
  • Daramsalla, 14
  • Darma Yangti, 150
  • Deafness, 263
  • Delaling Monastery, 448
  • Delang cake, 95
  • Dementia, 263
  • Dentistry, 259
  • Deolthal, 12
  • Deposition of witnesses, 477
  • Devil's Camp, 182, 184
  • Dharchula, 32, 33
  • Dholi River, 42
  • Diary, Notebooks, &c., 451
  • Diet, 421
  • Digestive powers, 258
  • Disposal of the dead
    • by Animals, 335
    • by Water, 335
  • Diving at great altitudes, 350
  • Divorce, 329
  • Dogmar, 442, 474
  • Dogpas, 200, 202
  • Dogs, 311, 410
  • Doktol Province, 306
  • Dola, 113
  • Dongbo, or tea churn, 318
  • Dongon River, 458
  • Dooti Mountain, 15
  • Drinking human blood, 256, 337
  • Dubart, 33
  • Dues paid by British subjects to Tibetans, 497
  • Photos, 246
  • India, 2
  • Indian newspapers, 499
  • India Office, 466, 471
  • Injuries and wounds, 484
  • Injuries to spine, 457
  • Inlaid metals, 277
  • Insanity, 263
  • Inscriptions, 253, 282, 305
  • Islands, 213
  • Shelf, 408, 474, 483, 493
  • Rakastal, or Rakstal, Lake, 211, 218, 233
  • Raksang, 318, 384
  • Rambang, 62, 92-97
  • Rankuti River, 33
  • Raots or Rajis, 17-26, 469
    • Features of, 23
    • Food of, 22
    • Habitations of, 22
    • Marriages of, 25
  • Release, 453
  • Relegar River, 33
  • Reports (Official), 487
  • Rheumatism, 258
  • Rhubarb, 213
  • Rifles, 5
  • Rites, religious, 247
  • Ronkan, 77
  • Rosary, 255
  • Royal Geographical Society, 2
  • Rupun, 377, 380, 383, 388
  • Russian Embassy in London, 1
    • Government, 1
  • Umbrella, importance of, 168
  • Under-Secretary to Government of N.W. Provinces and Oudh, 476
  • Urghin, 247
  • [__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]Ventriloquism, 429
  • Vessels and instruments of human bone, 256, 337
  • Vision, 422, 435

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

 

Heinemann Logo       21 BEDFORD STREET, W.C.
Telegraphic Address,
Sunlocks, London

A List of

Mr. William Heinemann's

Publications and

Announcements

 

 

 

 

March 1898.              The Books mentioned in this List can
 be obtained to order by any Bookseller
 if not in stock, or will be sent
 by the Publisher on receipt of the
 published price and postage.

 


[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

Index of Authors

About26    Dowson27    Keeling27    Rees26
Alexander27    Dubois11    Kennedy28    Rembrandt5
Allen11    Dudeney30    Kimball21    Renan7, 15
Allen30    Du Toit11    Kipling26    Ricci4
Anstey15    Eeden31    Knight16    Richter15
Arbuthnot20    Ellwanger16    Kraszewski29    Riddell28
Aston19    Ely14    Kroeker18    Rives28
Atherton28    Evans5, 21    Landor12    Roberts (A. von)29
Baddeley9, 18    Farrar15    Lawson5    Roberts (C. G. D.)12
Balestier23, 26, 28    Ferruggia29    Le Caron7    Robins7
Barnett22    Fitch20    Lee (Vernon)26    Robinson23
Barrett28    Fitzmaurice-Kelly19    Leland7    Saintsbury13
Battershall25    Fitz Patrick26    Le Querdec9    Salaman (J. S.)21
Behrs8    Fleming26    Leroy-Bealieu9    Salaman (M. C.)16
Bellamy22    Flammarion21    Lie29    Sarcey7
Bendall18    Forbes16    Linton23    Schulz11
Benedetti10    Fothergill28    Locke26, 30    Scidmore12
Benham22    Franzos29    Lowe7, 16    Scudamore16
Benson13    Frederic9, 23, 27    Lowry28    Sedgwick22
Beothy19    Furtwängler5    Lutzow (Count)19    Serao29
Beringer30    Garmo20    Lynch27    Sergeant24, 27
Björnson29, 31    Garner21    Maartens28    Somerset11
Blunt18    Garnett19    Macdonell19    Southey6
Bowen20    Gaulot8    McFall11    Steel25
Boyesen13    Golm29    Mackenzie10    Stephen21
Brailsford22    Gontcharoff29    Macnab25    Steuart22
Brandes13, 19    Gore21    Maeterlinck17    Stevenson17, 24, 25
Briscoe28    Gounod7    Mailing22    Sutcliffe22
Brooke24    Gosse8, 13, 17    Malot27    Tadema30
Brown10     18, 19, 26    Marey21    Tallentyre16
Brown & Griffiths21    Grand25    Marsh30    Tasma27
Buchanan14, 17    Granville26    Masson8    Thompson12
 28, 32    Gray (Maxwell)25    Maude16    Thomson11
Burgess9    Gras26    Maupassant29    Thomson (Basil)26
Byron3    Greard4    Maurice16    Thurston21
Cahan30    Griffiths21    Merriman16    Tirebuck23
Caine (Hall)10, 24, 27    Guerber20    Michel5    Tolstoy15, 17, 29
Caine (R.)18    Guyau15    Mitford28    Tree18
Calvert11    Hafiz18    Monk30    Turgenev31
Cambridge27    Hall20    Moore27    Tyler19
Capes22    Hamilton23, 30    Mûller10    Underhill16
Carr24    Hammar5    Murray (D. C.)16    Upward30
Chester16    Hanus20    Murray (G.)19    Valera2
Chevrillon11    Harland28    Napoleon6    Vandam9
Clarke32    Harris24    Nicholson4    Vazoff29
Coleridge6, 13    Hauptmann17    Nordau15, 23    Verrall19
Colmore28, 30    Heaton5    Norris25    Vincent12
Colomb16    Heine8, 14    Nugent6    Voynich22
Compayré20    Henderson32    Ogilvie17    Vuillier4
Compton30    Henley17    Oliphant16    Wagner16
Conrad22    Herford19    Osbourne25    Waliszewski6, 8
Cooper26    Hertwig21    Ouida27    Walker9
Coppée28    Heussey7    Paget6    Ward28
Couperus29    Hichens22, 30    Palacio-Valdés29    Warden32
Crackanthorpe24, 28    Hinsdale20    Pasolini7    Waugh8
Crackanthorpe Hirsch15    Patmore18    Weitemeyer10
(Mrs.)30    Holdsworth23, 30    Pearce22, 26    Wells23, 32
Crane18, 22, 30, 32    Howard26    Pendered23    West20
D'Annunzio22    Hughes20    Pennell9    Whibley7, 8, 18
Davidson20    Hungerford27    Perry9    Whistler14
Davis11, 22    Hyne25    Phelps28    White23
Dawson (C. A.)18    Ibsen17, 18    Philips32    Whitman10
Dawson (A. J.)22    Ingersoll12    Pinero15, 17    Wilken9
De Broglie10    Irving (H. B.)6    Praed22    Williams (G.)10
De Goncourt7    Irving (Sir H.)18    Pressensé6    Williams (E. E.)14
De Joinville8    Jacobsen29    Pritchard24    Williams5
De Leval21    Jæger7    Pugh26, 30    Wood27
De Quincey6, 13    James (Henry)24    Quine22    Wyckoff12
Dibbs26    James (Lionel)11    Raimond26, 30    Zangwill16, 25, 26
Dixon25    Keary (E. M.)5    Rawnsley12    Zola26, 27
Dowden19    Keary (C. F.)23    Raynor15    Z. Z.23

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

THE WORKS OF LORD BYRON.

Edited by WILLIAM ERNEST HENLEY.

TO BE COMPLETED IN TWELVE VOLUMES.

The Letters, Diaries, Controversies, Speeches, &c., in Four, and the Verse in Eight.

Small Crown 8vo, price 5s. net each.

Small Crown 8vo, priced at £5 each, net.

VOLUME I. IS NOW READY.

VOLUME I. IS READY NOW.

Vol. I.—LETTERS, 1804-1813. With a Portrait after Phillips.

Vol. I.—LETTERS, 1804-1813. With a Portrait after Phillips.

To be followed by

Coming up next

Vol. V.—VERSE VOLUME I. Containing "Hours of Idleness,"
 "English Bards and Scotch Reviewers," and "Childe Harold."
 With a Portrait by Holmes.              [In April.

Vol. V.—VERSE VOLUME I. Including "Hours of Idleness,"
 "English Bards and Scotch Reviewers," and "Childe Harold."
 Featuring a Portrait by Holmes.              [In April.

 

"Mr. W. E. Henley is not only steeped to the lips in Byronic poetry, but he has also a very familiar acquaintance with the remarkable characters who formed 'the Byronic set,' and he knows the manners and customs of the Regency epoch to an extent that gives him full mastery of his subject. There is originality in the very form of this edition.

"Mr. W. E. Henley is not only deeply immersed in Byronic poetry, but he also has a strong familiarity with the notable figures who made up 'the Byronic set,' and he understands the behaviors and customs of the Regency era well enough to fully master his topic. This edition's format also has a unique originality."

"He manages to give in a few vigorous sentences vivid sketches of the wide circle of Byron's friends and enemies."—Pall Mall Gazette.

"He manages to convey, in just a few energetic sentences, vibrant portraits of the broad range of Byron's friends and foes."—Pall Mall Gazette.

 

"The first volume is delightfully handy and the type excellent."

"The first volume is really convenient and the print is great."

Andrew Lang.

Andrew Lang.

 

"These Byron Letters (Vol. I.) Mr. Henley has annotated as never surely were letters annotated before. His notes provide simply a complete series of little biographies—miniature biographies with such vital selection, such concise completion without dry-as-dustness—such interest as no other writer but Mr. Henley could compass. It may fairly be said that he has discovered a new art, the art of biographic cameos.... It is safe to say that henceforth the typical edition of Byron can never be separated from these notes. In conclusion, if Byron has waited long for a heaven-sent editor, he has him at last."

"Mr. Henley has annotated these Byron Letters (Vol. I.) like never before. His notes are essentially a complete collection of mini biographies—concise and engaging without being dull—something no other writer but Mr. Henley could achieve. It's fair to say he has created a new art form, the art of biographic cameos.... It's safe to say that from now on, any typical edition of Byron will always be linked to these notes. In closing, if Byron has been waiting for the perfect editor, he finally has one."

Academy.

Academy.

 

"Mr. Henley, so far as elucidation and illustration are concerned; is fully equipped."—Athenæum.

"Mr. Henley, when it comes to explanation and examples, is completely prepared."—Athenæum.

 

There will also be an Edition, limited to 150 sets for sale
in Great Britain, printed on Van Gelder's hand-made
paper, price Six Guineas net, subscriptions
for which are now being received.

There will also be a limited edition of 150 sets available for sale
in Great Britain, printed on Van Gelder's handmade
paper, priced at six guineas net, with subscriptions
currently being accepted.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Art and Decoration.

AN ALMANAC OF TWELVE SPORTS FOR 1898. By William Nicholson. Twelve Coloured Plates, each illustrating a sport for the month. With accompanying Rhymes by Rudyard Kipling. 4to. In Three Editions. The Library Edition all sold.

AN ALMANAC OF TWELVE SPORTS FOR 1898. By William Nicholson. Twelve Color Plates, each showing a sport for the month. With accompanying Rhymes by Rudyard Kipling. 4to. In Three Editions. The Library Edition all sold.

The Popular Edition. Lithographed in Colours on stout Cartridge Paper. Price 2s. 6d.

The Popular Edition. Printed in Color on sturdy Cartridge Paper. Price 2s. 6d.

The Edition de Luxe (Limited). Printed from the Original Woodblocks. Hand-coloured, and signed by the Artist. In Vellum Portfolio. Price £12 12s. net.

The Limited Edition. Printed from the Original Woodblocks. Hand-colored and signed by the Artist. In Vellum Portfolio. Price £12 12s. net.

AN ALPHABET. By William Nicholson. 4to. In Three Editions. The Popular Edition all sold.

AN ALPHABET. By William Nicholson. 4to. In Three Editions. The Popular Edition is sold out.

The Library Edition (Limited). Lithographed in Colours on Dutch Handmade Paper, mounted on brown paper and bound in cloth, Gilt Edges. Price 12s. 6d. net.

The Library Edition (Limited). Printed in Color on Dutch Handmade Paper, mounted on brown paper and bound in cloth, with Gilt Edges. Price 12s. 6d. net.

The Edition de Luxe (Limited). Printed from the Original Woodblocks. Hand-coloured, and signed by the Artist. In Vellum Portfolio. Price £21 net.

The Deluxe Edition (Limited). Printed from the Original Woodblocks. Hand-colored and signed by the Artist. In Vellum Portfolio. Price £21 net.

PORTRAITS BY MR. NICHOLSON of Her Majesty the Queen, Madame Sarah Bernhardt, Lord Roberts, Mr. Whistler, Mr. Rudyard Kipling, Mr. Cecil Rhodes, and Prince Bismarck, are now supplied separately, mounted on card for framing, price 2s. 6d. net each.

PORTRAITS BY MR. NICHOLSON of Her Majesty the Queen, Madame Sarah Bernhardt, Lord Roberts, Mr. Whistler, Mr. Rudyard Kipling, Mr. Cecil Rhodes, and Bismarck are now available separately, mounted on card for framing, priced at 2s. 6d. each.

A few copies of each Portrait printed from the Original Woodblocks, Hand-coloured, and signed by the Artist, are still obtainable. Price £2 2s. each net.

A few copies of each Portrait printed from the Original Woodblocks, hand-colored, and signed by the Artist, are still available. Price £2 2s. each net.

A HISTORY OF DANCING: From the Earliest Ages to Our Own Times. From the French of Gaston Vuillier. With 24 Plates in Photogravure and 409 Illustrations in the Text. In One Volume, 4to. Price 36s. net.

A HISTORY OF DANCING: From the Earliest Ages to Our Own Times. Translated from the French by Gaston Vuillier. With 24 Photogravure Plates and 409 Illustrations in the Text. In One Volume, 4to. Price 36s. net.

Also 35 copies printed on Japanese vellum (containing 3 additional Plates), with a duplicate set of the Plates on India paper for framing. Each copy numbered and signed, price £12 12s. net.

There are also 35 copies printed on Japanese vellum (including 3 additional plates), along with a duplicate set of the plates on India paper for framing. Each copy is numbered and signed, priced at £12 12s. net.

MEISSONIER. His Life, and His Art. By Vallery C. O. Greard, de l'Académie Française. Translated from the French by Lady Mary Loyd and Florence Simmonds. With 38 full-page plates, 20 in Photogravure and 18 in Colour, and 200 Text Illustrations. Imperial 8vo, £1 16s. net.

MEISSONIER. His Life and His Art. By Vallery C.O. Greard, member of the Académie Française. Translated from French by Lady Mary Lloyd and Florence Simmonds. Features 38 full-page plates, 20 in Photogravure and 18 in Color, along with 200 text illustrations. Imperial 8vo, £1 16s. net.

ANTONIO ALLEGRI DA CORREGGIO: His Life, his Friends, and his Time. By Corrado Ricci, Director of the Royal Gallery, Parma. Translated by Florence Simmonds. With 16 Photogravure Plates, 21 full-page Plates in Tint, and 190 Illustrations in the Text. Imperial 8vo, £2 2s. net. Also in 14 parts, price 2s. 6d. each net.

ANTONIO ALLEGRI DA CORREGGIO: His Life, his Friends, and his Time. By Corrado Ricci, Director of the Royal Gallery, Parma. Translated by Florence Simmonds. With 16 Photogravure Plates, 21 full-page Plates in Color, and 190 Illustrations in the Text. Imperial 8vo, £2 2s. net. Also available in 14 parts, priced at 2s. 6d. each net.

Also a special edition printed on Japanese vellum, limited to 100 copies, with duplicate plates on India paper. Price £12 12s. net.

There's also a special edition printed on Japanese vellum, limited to 100 copies, with duplicate plates on India paper. Price £12 12s. net.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

REMBRANDT: His Life, his Work, and his Time. By Emile Michel, Member of the Institute of France. Translated by Florence Simmonds. Edited and Prefaced by Frederick Wedmore. Second Edition, Enlarged, with 76 full-page Plates, and 250 Illustrations in the Text. In One Volume, Gilt top, or in Two Volumes, imperial 8vo £2 2s. net.

REMBRANDT: His Life, His Work, and His Time. By Emile Michel, Member of the Institute of France. Translated by Florence Simmonds. Edited and Prefaced by Frederick Wedmore. Second Edition, Enlarged, with 76 full-page Plates and 250 Illustrations in the Text. Available in One Volume with a Gilt top, or in Two Volumes, imperial 8vo for £2 2s. net.

A few copies of the Edition de Luxe of the First Edition, printed on Japanese vellum with India proof duplicates of the photogravures, are still on sale, price £12 12s. net.

A few copies of the Deluxe Edition of the First Edition, printed on Japanese vellum with India proof duplicates of the photogravures, are still available for sale at £12.12.

REMBRANDT. Seventeen of his Masterpieces from the collection of his Pictures in the Cassel Gallery, Reproduced in Photogravure by the Berlin Photographic Company. With an Essay by Frederick Wedmore. In large portfolio 27½ inches × 20 inches.

REMBRANDT. Seventeen of his masterpieces from the collection of his paintings in the Cassel Gallery, reproduced in photogravure by the Berlin Photographic Company. With an essay by Frederick Wedmore. In a large portfolio measuring 27½ inches × 20 inches.

The first twenty-five impressions of each plate are numbered and signed, and of these only fourteen are for sale in England at the net price of Twenty Guineas the set. The price of the impressions after the first twenty-five is Twelve Guineas net, per set.

The first twenty-five prints of each plate are numbered and signed, and of these, only fourteen are available for sale in England at the net price of Twenty Guineas for the set. The price for the prints after the first twenty-five is Twelve Guineas net, per set.

MASTERPIECES OF GREEK SCULPTURE. A Series of Essays on the History of Art. By Adolf Furtwangler. Authorised Translation. Edited by Eugenie Sellers. With 19 full-page and 200 text Illustrations. Imperial 8vo, £3 3s. net.

MASTERPIECES OF GREEK SCULPTURE. A Series of Essays on the History of Art. By Adolf Furtwängler. Authorized Translation. Edited by Eugenie Sellers. With 19 full-page and 200 text Illustrations. Imperial 8vo, £3 3s. net.

Also an Edition de Luxe on Japanese vellum, limited to 50 numbered copies in Two Volumes, price £10 10s. net.

There's also an Deluxe Edition on Japanese vellum, limited to 50 numbered copies in Two Volumes, priced at £10 10s. net.

THE HOURS OF RAPHAEL, IN OUTLINE. Together with the Ceiling of the Hall where they were originally painted. By Mary E. Williams. Folio, cloth. £2 2s. net.

THE HOURS OF RAPHAEL, IN OUTLINE. Along with the Ceiling of the Hall where they were originally painted. By Mary E. Williams. Folio, cloth. £2 2s. net.

BEAUTY AND ART. By Aldam Heaton. Crown 8vo, cloth, 6s.

BEAUTY AND ART. By Aldam Heaton. Crown 8vo, cloth, 6s.

A CATALOGUE OF THE ACCADEMIA DELLE BELLE ARTI AT VENICE. With Biographical Notices of the Painters and Reproductions of some of their Works. Edited by E. M. Keary. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. 6d. net; paper, 2s. net.

A CATALOGUE OF THE ACCADEMIA DELLE BELLE ARTI AT VENICE. With Biographical Notices of the Painters and Reproductions of some of their Works. Edited by E.M. Keary. Crown 8vo, cloth, £2.50; paper, £2.00.

A CATALOGUE OF THE MUSEO DEL PRADO AT MADRID. Compiled by E. Lawson. Crown 8vo, cloth, 3s. net; paper, 2s. 6d. net.

A CATALOGUE OF THE MUSEO DEL PRADO AT MADRID. Compiled by E. Lawson. Crown 8vo, cloth, £3 net; paper, £2.50 net.

ANIMAL SYMBOLISM IN ECCLESIASTICAL ARCHITECTURE. By E. P. Evans. With a Bibliography and Seventy-eight Illustrations, crown 8vo, 9s.

ANIMAL SYMBOLISM IN ECCLESIASTICAL ARCHITECTURE. By E.P. Evans. With a Bibliography and Seventy-eight Illustrations, crown 8vo, 9s.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Biography, Correspondence, And History.

NEW LETTERS OF NAPOLEON I. Omitted from the Edition published under the auspices of Napoleon III. Translated from the French by Lady Mary Loyd. In One Volume, demy 8vo, with Frontispiece, price 15s. net.

NEW LETTERS OF NAPOLEON I. Omitted from the edition published with the support of Napoleon III. Translated from the French by Lady Mary Lloyd. In one volume, size demy 8vo, with a frontispiece, priced at 15s. net.

THE PAGET PAPERS. Diplomatic and other Correspondence of The Right Hon. SIR ARTHUR PAGET, G.C.B., 1794-1807. With two Appendices, 1808 and 1828-1829. Arranged and Edited by his son, The Right Hon. Sir Augustus B. Paget, G.C.B., late Her Majesty's Ambassador in Vienna. With Notes by Mrs. J. R. Green. New Edition with Index. In Two Volumes, demy 8vo, with Portraits, 32s. net.

THE PAGET PAPERS. Diplomatic and other Correspondence of The Honorable SIR ARTHUR PAGET, G.C.B., 1794-1807. With two Appendices, 1808 and 1828-1829. Arranged and Edited by his son, The Right Hon. Sir Augustus B. Paget, G.C.B., former Her Majesty's Ambassador in Vienna. With Notes by Mrs. J.R. Green. New Edition with Index. In Two Volumes, demy 8vo, with Portraits, 32s. net.

DE QUINCEY MEMORIALS. Being Letters and other Records here first Published, with Communications from Coleridge, the Wordsworths, Hannah More, Professor Wilson, and others. Edited with Introduction, Notes, and Narrative, by Alexander H. Japp, LL.D., F.R.S.E. In Two Volumes, demy 8vo, cloth, with Portraits, 30s. net.

DE QUINCEY MEMORIALS. This is a collection of letters and other records published for the first time, featuring contributions from Coleridge, the Wordsworths, Hannah More, Professor Wilson, and others. Edited with an introduction, notes, and narrative by Alexander H. Japp, LL.D., F.R.S.E. In two volumes, standard 8vo size, cloth-bound, including portraits, priced at 30s. net.

LETTERS OF SAMUEL TAYLOR COLERIDGE. Edited by Ernest Hartley Coleridge. With 16 Portraits and Illustrations. In Two Volumes, demy 8vo, £1 12s.

LETTERS OF SAMUEL TAYLOR COLERIDGE. Edited by Ernest Hartley Coleridge. With 16 Portraits and Illustrations. In Two Volumes, standard size, £1 12s.

THE LIFE OF NELSON. By Robert Southey. A New Edition. Edited by David Hannay, Crown 8vo, gilt, with Portraits of Lord Nelson after Hoppner and Lady Hamilton after Romney, price 6s.

THE LIFE OF NELSON. By Robert Southey. A New Edition. Edited by David Hannay, Crown 8vo, gilt, with Portraits of Lord Nelson after Hoppner and Lady Hamilton after Romney, price 6s.

ROBERT, EARL NUGENT. A Memoir. By Claud Nugent. Demy 8vo, with a number of Portraits and other Illustrations.

ROBERT, EARL NUGENT. A Memoir. By Claud Nugent. Demy 8vo, featuring several portraits and additional illustrations.

[In preparation.

[Coming soon.]

THE LIFE OF JUDGE JEFFREYS. By H. B. Irving, M.A. Oxon. Demy 8vo, with Three Portraits and a Facsimile, 12s. 6d. net.

THE LIFE OF JUDGE JEFFREYS. By H.B. Irving, M.A. Oxon. Demy 8vo, with Three Portraits and a Facsimile, 12s. 6d. net.

PETER THE GREAT. By K. Waliszewski, Author of "The Romance of an Empress," "The Story of a Throne." Translated from the French by Lady Mary Loyd. With a Portrait. 8vo, cloth, 6s.; or Library Edition, in Two Volumes, 8vo, 28s.

PETER THE GREAT. By K. Waliszewski, Author of "The Romance of an Empress," "The Story of a Throne." Translated from the French by Lady Mary Lloyd. With a Portrait. 8vo, cloth, £6; or Library Edition, in Two Volumes, 8vo, £28.

CARDINAL MANNING. From the French of Francis de Pressensé by E. Ingall. Crown 8vo, 5s.

CARDINAL MANNING. From the French of Francis de Pressensé by E. Ingall. Crown 8vo, 5s.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

THE PALMY DAYS OF NANCE OLDFIELD. By Edward Robins. With Twelve Illustrations, 8vo.

THE PALMY DAYS OF NANCE OLDFIELD. By Edward Robins. With Twelve Illustrations, 8vo.

AS OTHERS SAW HIM. A Retrospect, a.d. 54. Crown 8vo, gilt top 6s.

AS OTHERS SAW HIM. A Retrospect, AD 54. Crown 8vo, gilt top 6s.

BROTHER AND SISTER. A Memoir and the Letters of Ernest and Henriette Renan. Translated by Lady Mary Loyd. Demy 8vo, with Two Portraits in Photogravure, and Four Illustrations, 14s.

BROTHER AND SISTER. A Memoir and the Letters of Ernie and Henriette Renan. Translated by Lady Mary Loyd. Demy 8vo, with Two Portraits in Photogravure, and Four Illustrations, 14s.

CHARLES GOUNOD. Autobiographical Reminiscences with Family Letters and Notes on Music. Translated by the Hon. W. Hely Hutchinson. Demy 8vo, with Portrait, 10s. 6d.

CHARLES GOUNOD. Autobiographical Memories with Family Letters and Notes on Music. Translated by the Hon. W. Hely Hutchinson. Demy 8vo, with Portrait, 10s. 6d.

MEMOIRS. By Charles Godfrey Leland (Hans Breitmann). Second Edition. 8vo, with Portrait, price 7s. 6d.

MEMOIRS. By Charles Godfrey Leland (Hans Breitmann). Second Edition. 8vo, with Portrait, price £7.50.

EDMOND AND JULES DE GONCOURT. Letters and Leaves from their Journals. Selected. In Two Volumes, 8vo, with Eight Portraits, 32s.

EDMOND AND JULES DE GONCOURT. Letters and Leaves from their Journals. Selected. In Two Volumes, 8vo, with Eight Portraits, 32s.

ALEXANDER III. OF RUSSIA. By Charles Lowe, M.A., Author of "Prince Bismarck: an Historical Biography." Crown 8vo, with Portrait in Photogravure, 6s.

ALEXANDER III. OF RUSSIA. By Charles Lowe, M.A., Author of "Prince Bismarck: an Historical Biography." Crown 8vo, with Portrait in Photogravure, 6s.

PRINCE BISMARCK. An Historical Biography. By Charles Lowe, M.A. With Portraits. Crown 8vo, 6s.

PRINCE BISMARCK. An Historical Biography. By Charles Lowe, M.A. With Portraits. Crown 8vo, 6s.

CATHERINE SFORZA. A Study. By Count Pasolini. Adapted from the Italian by Paul Sylvester. Demy 8vo, with many Illustrations.

CATHERINE SFORZA. A Study. By Count Pasolini. Adapted from the Italian by Paul Sylvester. Demy 8vo, with many Illustrations.

[In preparation.

In progress.

VILLIERS DE L'ISLE ADAM: His Life and Works. From the French of Vicomte Robert du Pontavice de Heussey. By Lady Mary Loyd. With Portrait and Facsimile. Crown 8vo, cloth, 10s. 6d.

VILLIERS DE L'ISLE ADAM: His Life and Works. From the French of Viscount Robert du Pontavice de Heussey. By Lady Mary Lloyd. With Portrait and Facsimile. Crown 8vo, cloth, 10s. 6d.

THE LIFE OF HENRIK IBSEN. By Henrik Jæger. Translated by Clara Bell. With the Verse done into English from the Norwegian Original by Edmund Gosse. Crown 8vo, cloth, 6s.

THE LIFE OF HENRIK IBSEN. By Henrik Jæger. Translated by Clara Bell. With the Verse translated into English from the Norwegian Original by Edmund Gosse. Crown 8vo, cloth, 6s.

RECOLLECTIONS OF MIDDLE LIFE. By Francisque Sarcey. Translated by E. L. Carey. 8vo, with Portrait, 10s. 6d.

RECOLLECTIONS OF MIDDLE LIFE. By Francisque Sarcey. Translated by E.L. Carey. 8vo, with Portrait, 10s. 6d.

TWENTY-FIVE YEARS IN THE SECRET SERVICE. The Recollections of a Spy. By Major Henri Le Caron. With New Preface. 8vo, boards, price 2s. 6d., or cloth, 3s. 6d.

TWENTY-FIVE YEARS IN THE SECRET SERVICE. The Memories of a Spy. By Major Henri Le Caron. With New Preface. 8vo, boards, price £2.65, or cloth, £3.65

The Library Edition, with Portraits and Facsimiles, 8vo, 14s., is still on sale.

The Library Edition, featuring portraits and facsimiles, 8vo, £14, is still available for purchase.

STUDIES IN FRANKNESS. By Charles Whibley. Crown 8vo, with Frontispiece, price 7s. 6d.

STUDIES IN FRANKNESS. By Charles Whibley. Crown 8vo, with Frontispiece, price £7.50.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

A BOOK OF SCOUNDRELS. By Charles Whibley. Crown 8vo, with Frontispiece, price 7s. 6d.

A BOOK OF SCOUNDRELS. By Charles Whibley. Crown 8vo, with Frontispiece, price £7.50.

GREAT LIVES AND EVENTS.

Uniformly bound in cloth, 6s. each volume.

SIXTY YEARS OF EMPIRE: 1837-1897. A Review of the Period. With over 70 Portraits and Diagrams.

SIXTY YEARS OF EMPIRE: 1837-1897. A Review of the Period. With more than 70 Portraits and Diagrams.

RECOLLECTIONS OF COUNT LEO TOLSTOY. Together with a Letter to the Women of France on the "Kreutzer Sonata." By C. A. Behrs. Translated from the Russian by C. E. Turner, English Lecturer in the University of St. Petersburg. With Portrait.

RECOLLECTIONS OF COUNT LEO TOLSTOY. Together with a Letter to the Women of France on the "Kreutzer Sonata." By C.A. Behrs. Translated from the Russian by C.E. Turner, English Lecturer at the University of St. Petersburg. With Portrait.

THE FAMILY LIFE OF HEINRICH HEINE. Illustrated by one hundred and twenty-two hitherto unpublished letters addressed by him to different members of his family. Edited by his nephew, Baron Ludwig von Embden, and translated by Charles Godfrey Leland. With 4 Portraits.

THE FAMILY LIFE OF HEINRICH HEINE. Illustrated by one hundred and twenty-two previously unpublished letters he wrote to various family members. Edited by his nephew, Baron Ludwig von Embden, and translated by Charles Godfrey Leland. With 4 portraits.

THE NATURALIST OF THE SEA-SHORE. The Life of Philip Henry Gosse. By his son, Edmund Gosse, Hon. M.A., Trinity College, Cambridge. With a Portrait.

THE NATURALIST OF THE SEA-SHORE. The Life of Philip Henry Gosse. By his son, Edmund Gosse, Hon. M.A., Trinity College, Cambridge. With a Portrait.

MEMOIRS OF THE PRINCE DE JOINVILLE. Translated from the French by Lady Mary Loyd. With 78 Illustrations from drawings by the Author.

MEMOIRS OF THE PRINCE DE JOINVILLE. Translated from the French by Lady Mary Lloyd. With 78 Illustrations from drawings by the Author.

ALFRED, LORD TENNYSON. A Study of His Life and Work. By Arthur Waugh, B.A. Oxon. With Twenty Illustrations from Photographs specially taken for this Work. Five Portraits, and Facsimile of Tennyson's MS.

ALFRED, LORD TENNYSON. A Study of His Life and Work. By Arthur Waugh, B.A. Oxon. With Twenty Illustrations from Photographs specially taken for this Work. Five Portraits, and Facsimile of Tennyson's MS.

NAPOLEON AND THE FAIR SEX. From the French of Frédéric Masson. With a Portrait.

NAPOLEON AND THE FAIR SEX. From the French of Frédéric Masson. With a Portrait.

PETER THE GREAT. By K. Waliszewski. Translated from the French by Lady Mary Loyd. With a Portrait.

PETER THE GREAT. By K. Waliszewski. Translated from the French by Lady Mary Lloyd. With a Portrait.

THE STORY OF A THRONE. Catherine II. of Russia. From the French of K. Waliszewski. With a Portrait.

THE STORY OF A THRONE. Catherine II of Russia. From the French of K. Waliszewski. With a Portrait.

THE ROMANCE OF AN EMPRESS. Catherine II. of Russia. From the French of K. Waliszewski. With a Portrait.

THE ROMANCE OF AN EMPRESS. Catherine II of Russia. From the French of K. Waliszewski. With a Portrait.

A FRIEND OF THE QUEEN. Marie Antoinette and Count Fersen. From the French of Paul Gaulot. Two Portraits.

A FRIEND OF THE QUEEN. Marie Antoinette and Count Fersen. From the French of Paul Gaulot. Two Portraits.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

THE WOMEN OF HOMER. By Walter Copland Perry. With numerous Illustrations, large crown 8vo, 6s.

THE WOMEN OF HOMER. By Walter Copland Perry. With many illustrations, large crown 8vo, £6.

THE LOVE LETTERS OF MR. H. AND MISS R. 1775-1779. Edited by Gilbert Burgess. Square crown 8vo, 6s.

THE LOVE LETTERS OF MR. H. AND MISS R. 1775-1779. Edited by Gilbert Burgess. Square crown 8vo, 6s.

LETTERS OF A BARITONE. By Francis Walker. Square crown 8vo, 5s.

LETTERS OF A BARITONE. By Francis Walker. Square crown 8vo, 5£.

LETTERS OF A COUNTRY VICAR. Translated from the French of Yves le Querdec. By M. Gordon Holmes. Crown 8vo, 5s.

LETTERS OF A COUNTRY VICAR. Translated from the French of Yves Le Querdec. By M. Gordon Holmes. Crown 8vo, 5s.

ISRAEL AMONG THE NATIONS. Translated from the French of Anatole Leroy-beaulieu, Member of the Institute of France. Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.

ISRAEL AMONG THE NATIONS. Translated from the French of Anatole Leroy-Beaulieu, Member of the Institute of France. Crown 8vo, 7sh. 6d.

THE JEW AT HOME. Impressions of a Summer and Autumn Spent with Him in Austria and Russia. By Joseph Pennell. With Illustrations by the Author. 4to, cloth, 5s.

THE JEW AT HOME. Experiences of a Summer and Fall Spent with Him in Austria and Russia. By Joseph Pennell. Featuring Illustrations by the Author. 4to, cloth, 5s.

THE NEW EXODUS. A Study of Israel in Russia. By Harold Frederic. Demy 8vo, Illustrated, 16s.

THE NEW EXODUS. A Study of Israel in Russia. By Harold Frederic. Demy 8vo, Illustrated, 16sh.

SPANISH PROTESTANTS IN THE SIXTEENTH CENTURY, Compiled from Dr. Wilken's German Work. By Rachel Challice. With an Introduction by the Most Rev. Lord Plunket, late Archbishop of Dublin, and a Preface by the Rev. Canon Fleming. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d. net.

SPANISH PROTESTANTS IN THE SIXTEENTH CENTURY, Compiled from Dr. Wilken's German Work. By Rachel Challice. With an Introduction by the Most Rev. Lord Plunket, former Archbishop of Dublin, and a Preface by the Rev. Canon Fleming. Crown 8vo, £4.6 net.

QUEEN JOANNA I. OF NAPLES, SICILY, AND JERUSALEM; Countess of Provence, Forcalquier, and Piedmont. An Essay on her Times. By St. Clair Baddeley. Imperial 8vo, with numerous Illustrations, 16s.

QUEEN JOANNA I. OF NAPLES, SICILY, AND JERUSALEM; Countess of Provence, Forcalquier, and Piedmont. An Essay on her Times. By St. Clair Baddeley. Imperial 8vo, with numerous Illustrations, 16s.

CHARLES III. OF NAPLES AND URBAN VI.; also CECCO D'ASCOLI, Poet, Astrologer, Physican. Two Historical Essays. By St. Clair Baddeley. With Illustrations, 8vo, cloth, 10s. 6d.

CHARLES III. OF NAPLES AND URBAN VI.; also CECCO D'ASCOLI, Poet, Astrologer, Physician. Two Historical Essays. By St. Clair Baddeley. With Illustrations, 8vo, cloth, £10.6.

ROBERT THE WISE AND HIS HEIRS, 1278-1352. By St. Clair Baddeley. 8vo, 21s.

ROBERT THE WISE AND HIS HEIRS, 1278-1352. By St. Clair Baddeley. 8vo, £21.

MY PARIS NOTE-BOOK. By Albert D. Vandam, Author of "An Englishman in Paris." Demy 8vo, price 6s.

MY PARIS NOTEBOOK. By Albert D. Vandam, Author of "An Englishman in Paris." Demy 8vo, price 6s.

UNDERCURRENTS OF THE SECOND EMPIRE. By Albert D. Vandam. Demy 8vo, cloth, 7s. 6d. net.

UNDERCURRENTS OF THE SECOND EMPIRE. By Albert D. Vandam. Demy 8vo, cloth, 7£. 6d. net.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

STUDIES IN DIPLOMACY. By Count Benedetti, French Ambassador at the Court of Berlin. Demy 8vo, with a Portrait, 10s. 6d.

STUDIES IN DIPLOMACY. By Count Benedetti, French Ambassador at the Court of Berlin. Demy 8vo, with a Portrait, £10.6.

AN AMBASSADOR OF THE VANQUISHED. Viscount Elie De Gontaut-Biron's Mission to Berlin, 1871-1877. From his Diaries and Memoranda. By the Duke de Broglie. Translated with Notes by Albert D. Vandam. In One Volume, 8vo, 10s. 6d.

AN AMBASSADOR OF THE VANQUISHED. Viscount Elie De Gontaut-Biron's Mission to Berlin, 1871-1877. From his Diaries and Memoranda. By the Duke de Broglie. Translated with Notes by Albert D. Vandam. In One Volume, 8vo, 10s. 6d.

A HISTORY OF THE LIVERPOOL PRIVATEERS, and Letters of Marque; with an account of the Liverpool Slave Trade. By Gomer Williams. In One Volume, demy 8vo, price 12s. net.

A HISTORY OF THE LIVERPOOL PRIVATEERS, and Letters of Marque; with an account of the Liverpool Slave Trade. By Gomer Williams. In One Volume, demy 8vo, price 12s. net.

THE CASTLES OF ENGLAND: their Story and Structure, By Sir James D. Mackenzie, Bart. Dedicated by gracious permission to H.M. the Queen. In Two Volumes, Imperial 8vo, with 40 full-page Plates, and over 150 Illustrations in the Text and many Plans. Price £3 3s. net.

THE CASTLES OF ENGLAND: their Story and Structure, By Sir James D. Mackenzie, Bart. Dedicated with gracious permission to H.M. the Queen. In Two Volumes, Imperial 8vo, with 40 full-page Plates, over 150 Illustrations in the Text, and many Plans. Price £3 3s. net.

KRUPP'S STEEL WORKS. By Professor F. C. G. Müller. With 88 Illustrations. Authorised Translation. 4to, price 25s. net.

KRUPP'S STEEL WORKS. By Professor F.C.G. Müller. With 88 Illustrations. Authorized Translation. 4to, price 25s. net.

THE LITTLE MANX NATION. (Lectures delivered at the Royal Institution, 1891.) By Hall Caine, Author of "The Bondman," "The Scapegoat," &c. Crown 8vo, cloth, 3s. 6d.; paper, 2s. 6d.

THE LITTLE MANX NATION. (Lectures given at the Royal Institution, 1891.) By Hall Caine, Author of "The Bondman," "The Scapegoat," etc. Crown 8vo, cloth, £3.50; paper, £2.50.

DENMARK: its History, Topography, Language, Literature, Fine Arts, Social Life, and Finance. Edited by H. Weitemeyer. Demy 8vo, cloth, with Map, 12s. 6d.

DENMARK: its History, Geography, Language, Literature, Fine Arts, Social Life, and Finance. Edited by H. Weitemeyer. Demy 8vo, cloth, with Map, 12sh. 6d.

Dedicated, by permission, to H.R.H. the Princess of Wales.

Presented, with permission, to H.R.H. the Princess of Wales.

THE REALM OF THE HABSBURGS. By Sidney Whitman, Author of "Imperial Germany." Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.

THE REALM OF THE HABSBURGS. By Sidney Whitman, Author of "Imperial Germany." Crown 8vo, £7.50.

IMPERIAL GERMANY. A Critical Study of Fact and Character. By Sidney Whitman. New Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. 6d.; paper, 2s.

IMPERIAL GERMANY. A Critical Study of Fact and Character. By Sidney Whitman. New Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Crown 8vo, cloth, £2.6; paper, £2.

THE GENESIS OF THE UNITED STATES. A Narrative of the Movement in England, 1605-1616, which resulted in the Plantation of North America by Englishmen, disclosing the Contest between England and Spain for the Possession of the Soil now occupied by the United States of America; set forth through a series of Historical Manuscripts now first printed, together with a Re-issue of Rare Contemporaneous Tracts, accompanied by Bibliographical Memoranda, Notes, and Brief Biographies. Collected, Arranged, and Edited by Alexander Brown, F.R.H.S. With 100 Portraits, Maps, and Plans. In Two Volumes, royal 8vo, buckram, £3 13s. 6d. net.

THE GENESIS OF THE UNITED STATES. A Story of the Events in England, 1605-1616, that led to the Settlement of North America by the English, revealing the Conflict between England and Spain for Control of the Land now known as the United States of America; presented through a collection of Historical Manuscripts printed for the first time, along with a Reissue of Rare Contemporary Pamphlets, complete with Bibliographical Notes, Additional Information, and Short Biographies. Collected, Organized, and Edited by Alexander Brown, F.R.H.S. With 100 Portraits, Maps, and Plans. In Two Volumes, royal 8vo, buckram, £3 13s. 6d. net.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Travel and Adventure.

THE INDIAN FRONTIER WAR. Being an Account of the Mohmund and Tirah Expeditions, 1897. By Lionel James, Special Correspondent for Reuter's Agency and Artist for the Graphic. With 32 full-page Illustrations from Drawings by the Author, and Photographs, and 10 Plans and Maps. 8vo, price 7s. 6d.

THE INDIAN FRONTIER WAR. This is a Report on the Mohmund and Tirah Expeditions, 1897. By Lionel James, Special Correspondent for Reuter's Agency and Artist for the Graphic. Featuring 32 full-page Illustrations from Drawings by the Author, along with Photographs, and 10 Plans and Maps. 8vo, priced at 7s. 6d.

CUBA IN WARTIME. By Richard Harding Davis, Author of "Soldiers of Fortune." With numerous Illustrations by Frederic Remington. Crown 8vo, price 3s. 6d.

CUBA IN WARTIME. By Richard Harding Davis, Author of "Soldiers of Fortune." With many illustrations by Frederic Remington. Crown 8vo, price £3.50.

UNDER THE DRAGON FLAG. My Experiences in the Chino-Japanese War. By James Allan. Crown 8vo, 2s.

UNDER THE DRAGON FLAG. My Experiences in the Sino-Japanese War. By James Allen. Crown 8vo, £2.

MY FOURTH TOUR IN WESTERN AUSTRALIA. By Albert F. Calvert, F.R.G.S. 4to, with many Illustrations and Photographs, price 21s. net.

MY FOURTH TOUR IN WESTERN AUSTRALIA. By Albert F. Calvert, F.R.G.S. 4to, with many Illustrations and Photographs, price £21 net.

ROMANTIC INDIA. By André Chevrillon. Translated from the French by William Marchant. 8vo, 7s. 6d. net.

ROMANTIC INDIA. By André Chevrillon. Translated from the French by William Marchant. 8vo, £7.6 net.

THE OUTGOING TURK. Impressions of a Journey through the Western Balkans. By H. C. Thomson, Author of "The Chitral Campaign." Demy 8vo, with Illustrations from Original Photographs. Price 14s. net.

THE OUTGOING TURK. Impressions of a Journey through the Western Balkans. By H.C. Thomson, Author of "The Chitral Campaign." Demy 8vo, with Illustrations from Original Photographs. Price 14s. net.

THE CHITRAL CAMPAIGN. A Narrative of Events in Chitral, Swat, and Bajour. By H C. Thomson. With over 50 Illustrations reproduced from Photographs, and important Diagrams and Map. Second Edition, demy 8vo, 14s. net.

THE CHITRAL CAMPAIGN. A Narrative of Events in Chitral, Swat, and Bajour. By H.C. Thomson. With more than 50 illustrations taken from photographs, along with important diagrams and a map. Second Edition, demy 8vo, £14 net.

WITH THE ZHOB FIELD FORCE, 1890. By Captain Crawford McFall, K.O.Y.L.I. Demy 8vo, with Illustrations, 18s.

WITH THE ZHOB FIELD FORCE, 1890. By Captain Crawford McFall, K.O.Y.L.I. Demy 8vo, with Illustrations, 18s.

THE LAND OF THE MUSKEG. By H. Somers Somerset. Second Edition. Demy 8vo, with Maps and over 100 Illustrations, 280 pp., 14s. net.

THE LAND OF THE MUSKEG. By H. Somers Somerset. Second Edition. Demy 8vo, with Maps and over 100 Illustrations, 280 pp., 14£. net.

TIMBUCTOO THE MYSTERIOUS. By Felix Dubois. Translated from the French by Diana White. With 153 Illustrations from Photographs and Drawings made on the spot, and Eleven Maps and Plans. Demy 8vo, 12s. 6d.

TIMBUCTOO THE MYSTERIOUS. By Felix Dubois. Translated from the French by Diana White. With 153 Illustrations from Photos and Drawings taken on-site, and Eleven Maps and Plans. Demy 8vo, 12sh. 6d.

RHODESIA PAST AND PRESENT. By S. J. Du Toit. In One Volume, 8vo, with Sixteen full-page Illustrations, 7s. 6d.

RHODESIA PAST AND PRESENT. By S.J. Du Toit. In One Volume, 8vo, with Sixteen full-page Illustrations, 7shillings 6pence.

THE NEW AFRICA. A Journey up the Chobé and down the Okovanga Rivers. By Aurel Schulz, M.D., and August Hammar, C.E. In One Volume, Demy 8vo, with Illustrations, 28s.

THE NEW AFRICA. A Journey up the Chobé and down the Okavango Rivers. By Aurel Schulz, M.D., and August Hammar, C.E. In One Volume, Demy 8vo, with Illustrations, 28s.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

ACTUAL AFRICA; or, The Coming Continent. A Tour of Exploration. By Frank Vincent, Author of "The Land of the White Elephant." With Map and over 100 Illustrations, demy 8vo, cloth, price 24s.

ACTUAL AFRICA; or, The Coming Continent. An Exploration Tour. By Frank Vincent, Author of "The Land of the White Elephant." With Map and over 100 Illustrations, demy 8vo, cloth, price 24s.

COREA, OR CHO-SEN, THE LAND OF THE MORNING CALM. By A. Henry Savage-Landor. With 38 Illustrations from Drawings by the Author, and a Portrait, demy 8vo, 18s.

COREA, OR CHO-SEN, THE LAND OF THE MORNING CALM. By A. Henry Savage-Landor. With 38 Illustrations from Drawings by the Author, and a Portrait, demy 8vo, 18s.

NOTES FOR THE NILE. Together with a Metrical Rendering of the Hymns of Ancient Egypt and of the Precepts of Ptah-hotep (the oldest book in the world). By Hardwicke D. Rawnsley, M.A. Imperial 16mo, cloth, 5s.

NOTES FOR THE NILE. Along with a Poetic Interpretation of the Hymns of Ancient Egypt and the Teachings of Ptah-hotep (the oldest book in the world). By Hardwicke D. Rawnsley, M.A. Imperial 16mo, cloth, 5s.

IN THE TRACK OF THE SUN. Readings from the Diary of a Globe-Trotter. By Frederick Diodati Thompson. With many Illustrations by Mr. Harry Fenn and from Photographs. 4to, 25s.

IN THE TRACK OF THE SUN. Readings from the Diary of a Globe-Trotter. By Frederick Diodati Thompson. With many Illustrations by Mr. Harry Fenn and from Photographs. 4to, 25s.

THE WORKERS. An Experiment in Reality. The East. By Walter A. Wyckoff. Crown 8vo, price 3s. 6d.

THE WORKERS. An Experiment in Reality. The East. By Walter A. Wyckoff. Crown 8vo, price 3s. 6d.

THE CANADIAN GUIDE-BOOK. Part I. The Tourist's and Sportsman's Guide to Eastern Canada and Newfoundland, including full descriptions of Routes, Cities, Points of Interest, Summer Resorts, Fishing Places, &c., in Eastern Ontario, The Muskoka District, The St. Lawrence Region, The Lake St. John Country, The Maritime Provinces, Prince Edward Island, and Newfoundland. With an Appendix giving Fish and Game Laws, and Official Lists of Trout and Salmon Rivers and their Lessees. By Charles G. D. Roberts, Professor of English Literature in King's College, Windsor, N.S. With Maps and many Illustrations. Crown 8vo, limp cloth, 6s.

THE CANADIAN GUIDE-BOOK. Part I. The Tourist's and Sportsman's Guide to Eastern Canada and Newfoundland, featuring complete descriptions of Routes, Cities, Points of Interest, Summer Resorts, Fishing Locations, etc., in Eastern Ontario, The Muskoka District, The St. Lawrence Region, The Lake St. John Area, The Maritime Provinces, Prince Edward Island, and Newfoundland. Includes an Appendix with Fish and Game Laws, as well as Official Lists of Trout and Salmon Rivers and their Lessees. By Charles G. D. Roberts, Professor of English Literature at King's College, Windsor, N.S. With Maps and many Illustrations. Crown 8vo, soft cover, 6s.

THE CANADIAN GUIDE-BOOK. Part II. Western Canada. Including the Peninsula and Northern Regions of Ontario, the Canadian Shores of the Great Lakes, the Lake of the Woods Region, Manitoba and "The Great North-West," The Canadian Rocky Mountains and National Park, British Columbia, and Vancouver Island. By Ernest Ingersoll. With Maps and many Illustrations. Crown 8vo, limp cloth, 6s.

THE CANADIAN GUIDE-BOOK. Part II. Western Canada. This covers the Peninsula and Northern Regions of Ontario, the Canadian shores of the Great Lakes, the Lake of the Woods area, Manitoba and "The Great North-West," the Canadian Rocky Mountains and National Park, British Columbia, and Vancouver Island. By Ernest Ingersoll. With maps and many illustrations. Crown 8vo, softcover, 6s.

THE GUIDE-BOOK TO ALASKA AND THE NORTH-WEST COAST, including the Shores of Washington, British Columbia, South-Eastern Alaska, the Aleutian and the Sea Islands, the Behring and the Arctic Coasts. By E. R. Scidmore. With Maps and many Illustrations. Crown 8vo, limp cloth, 6s.

THE GUIDE-BOOK TO ALASKA AND THE NORTH-WEST COAST, including the Shores of Washington, British Columbia, Southeastern Alaska, the Aleutian Islands, and the Arctic Coasts. By E.R. Scidmore. With maps and many illustrations. Crown 8vo, softcover, 6£.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Essays and Belles Lettres, &c.

WILLIAM SHAKESPEARE. A Critical Study. By George Brandes, Ph.D. Translated from the Danish by William Archer, Diana White, and Mary Morison. In Two Volumes, roxburgh, gilt top, or buckram uncut, demy 8vo, 24s.

WILLIAM SHAKESPEARE. A Critical Study. By George Brandes, Ph.D. Translated from the Danish by William Archer, Diana White, and Mary Morison. In Two Volumes, roxburgh, gilt top, or buckram uncut, demy 8vo, 24s.

SEVENTEENTH-CENTURY STUDIES. A Contribution to the History of English Poetry. By Edmund Gosse, Clark Lecturer on English Literature at the University of Cambridge; Hon. M.A. of Trinity College, Cambridge. A New Edition. Crown 8vo, buckram, gilt top, 7s. 6d.

SEVENTEENTH-CENTURY STUDIES. A Contribution to the History of English Poetry. By Edmund Gosse, Clark Lecturer on English Literature at the University of Cambridge; Hon. M.A. of Trinity College, Cambridge. A New Edition. Crown 8vo, buckram, gilt top, 7shillings 6pence.

CRITICAL KIT-KATS. By Edmund Gosse. Crown 8vo, buckram, gilt top, 7s. 6d.

CRITICAL KIT-KATS. By Edmund Gosse. Crown 8vo, hardcover, gold top, 7£ 6p.

QUESTIONS AT ISSUE. Essays. By Edmund Gosse. Crown 8vo, buckram, gilt top, 7s. 6d.

QUESTIONS AT ISSUE. Essays. By Edmund Gosse. Crown 8vo, cloth cover, gold top, £7.6.

 ※ A Limited Edition on Large Paper, 25s. net.

A Limited Edition on Large Paper, £25.00. net.

GOSSIP IN A LIBRARY. By Edmund Gosse. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, buckram, gilt top, 7s. 6d.

GOSSIP IN A LIBRARY. By Edmund Gosse. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, gold top, 7sh. 6d.

 ※ A Limited Edition on Large Paper, 25s. net.

A Special Edition on Large Paper, $25.00.

CORRECTED IMPRESSIONS. Essays on Victorian Writers. By George Saintsbury. Crown 8vo, gilt top, 7s. 6d.

CORRECTED IMPRESSIONS. Essays on Victorian Writers. By George Saintsbury. Crown 8vo, gold-edged, £7.50.

ANIMA POETÆ. From the unpublished note-books of Samuel Taylor Coleridge. Edited by Ernest Hartley Coleridge. Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.

ANIMA POETÆ. From the unpublished notebooks of Samuel Taylor Coleridge. Edited by Ernest Hartley Coleridge. Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.

ESSAYS. By Arthur Christopher Benson, of Eton College. Crown 8vo, buckram, 7s. 6d.

ESSAYS. By Arthur Christopher Benson, of Eton College. Crown 8vo, tough cloth binding, £7.50.

A COMMENTARY ON THE WORKS OF HENRIK IBSEN. By Hjalmar Hjorth Boyesen. Crown 8vo, cloth, 7s. 6d. net.

A COMMENTARY ON THE WORKS OF HENRIK IBSEN. By Hjalmar Hjorth Boyesen. Crown 8vo, cloth, £7.50 net.

THE POSTHUMOUS WORKS OF THOMAS DE QUINCEY. Edited, with Introduction and Notes from the Author's Original MSS., by Alexander H. Japp, LL.D., F.R.S.E., &c. Crown 8vo, cloth, 6s. each.

THE POSTHUMOUS WORKS OF THOMAS DE QUINCEY. Edited, with Introduction and Notes from the Author's Original Manuscripts, by Alexander H. Japp, LL.D., F.R.S.E., etc. Crown 8vo, cloth, 6s. each.

 I. SUSPIRIA DE PROFUNDIS. With other Essays.

I. SUSPIRIA DE PROFUNDIS. With other Essays.

 II. CONVERSATION AND COLERIDGE. With other Essays.

II. CONVERSATION AND COLERIDGE. With other Essays.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

THE PROSE WORKS OF HEINRICH HEINE. Translated by Charles Godfrey Leland, M.A., F.R.L.S. (Hans Breitmann). In Eight Volumes.

THE PROSE WORKS OF HEINRICH HEINE. Translated by Charles Godfrey Leland, M.A., F.R.L.S. (Hans Breitmann). In Eight Volumes.

The Library Edition, in crown 8vo, cloth, at 5s. per Volume. Each Volume of this edition is sold separately. The Cabinet Edition, in special binding, boxed, price £2 10s. the set. The Large Paper Edition, limited to 50 Numbered Copies, price 15s. per Volume net, will only be supplied to subscribers for the Complete Work.

The Library Edition, in crown 8vo, cloth, at 5s. per volume. Each volume of this edition is sold separately. The Cabinet Edition, with special binding, boxed, is priced at £2 10s. for the set. The Large Paper Edition, limited to 50 numbered copies, is priced at 15s. per volume net and will only be provided to subscribers for the complete work.

 I. FLORENTINE NIGHTS, SCHNABELEWOPSKI, THE RABBI OF BACHARACH, and SHAKESPEARE'S MAIDENS AND WOMEN.

I. FLORENTINE NIGHTS, SCHNABELEWOPSKI, THE RABBI OF BACHARACH, and SHAKESPEARE'S MAIDENS AND WOMEN.

 II., III. PICTURES OF TRAVEL. 1823-1828.

II., III. Travel Photos. 1823-1828.

 IV. THE SALON. Letters on Art, Music, Popular Life, and Politics.

IV. THE SALON. Letters about Art, Music, Everyday Life, and Politics.

 V., VI. GERMANY.

Germany, Sections V and VI.

 VII., VIII. FRENCH AFFAIRS. Letters from Paris 1832, and Lutetia.

VII., VIII. FRENCH AFFAIRS. Letters from Paris 1832, and Lutetia.

THE COMING TERROR. And other Essays and Letters. By Robert Buchanan. Second Edition. Demy 8vo, cloth, 12s. 6d.

THE COMING TERROR. And other Essays and Letters. By Robert Buchanan. Second Edition. Demy 8vo, cloth, 12s. 6d.

THE GENTLE ART OF MAKING ENEMIES. As pleasingly exemplified in many instances, wherein the serious ones of this earth, carefully exasperated, have been prettily spurred on to indiscretions and unseemliness, while overcome by an undue sense of right. By J. M'Neill Whistler. A New Edition.

THE GENTLE ART OF MAKING ENEMIES. As clearly shown in many cases, where the serious people of this world, intentionally annoyed, have been amusingly pushed into irrational behavior and impropriety, all while being overwhelmed by an excessive sense of righteousness. By J. M. Whistler. A New Edition.

[In preparation.

In progress.

 ※ A few copies of the large paper issue of the first edition remain, price £1 11s. 6d. net.

※ A few copies of the large paper edition of the first issue are still available, priced at £1 11s. 6d. net.

AMERICA AND THE AMERICANS. From a French Point of View. In one volume. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.

AMERICA AND THE AMERICANS. From a French Perspective. In one volume. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.

"MADE IN GERMANY." Reprinted with Additions from The New Review. By Ernest E. Williams. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. 6d. Also Popular Edition, paper covers, 1s.

"MADE IN GERMANY." Reprinted with Additions from The New Review. By Ernest E. Williams. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. 6d. Also Popular Edition, paper covers, 1s.

THE FOREIGNER IN THE FARMYARD. By Ernest E. Williams, Author of "Made in Germany." Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.

THE FOREIGNER IN THE FARMYARD. By Ernest Williams, Author of "Made in Germany." Crown 8vo, £2.50.

THE LABOUR MOVEMENT IN AMERICA. By Richard T. Ely, Ph.D., Associate in Political Economy, Johns Hopkins University. Crown 8vo, cloth, 5s.

THE LABOR MOVEMENT IN AMERICA. By Richard T. Ely, Ph.D., Associate in Political Economy, Johns Hopkins University. Crown 8vo, cloth, 5s.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

PARADOXES. By Max Nordau, Author of "Degeneration," "Conventional Lies of our Civilisation," &c. Translated by J. R. McIlraith. With an Introduction by the Author written for this Edition. Demy 8vo, 17s. net.

PARADOXES. By Max Nordau, author of "Degeneration," "Conventional Lies of Our Civilization," etc. Translated by J.R. McIlraith. With an introduction by the author written for this edition. Demy 8vo, 17shillings net.

CONVENTIONAL LIES OF OUR CIVILIZATION. By Max Nordau, author of "Degeneration." Second English Edition. Demy 8vo, 17s. net.

CONVENTIONAL LIES OF OUR CIVILIZATION. By Max Nordau, author of "Degeneration." Second English Edition. Demy 8vo, 17s. net.

DEGENERATION. By Max Nordau. Ninth English Edition. Demy 8vo, 17s. net.

DEGENERATION. By Max Nordau. Ninth English Edition. Demy 8vo, 17s. net.

GENIUS AND DEGENERATION: A Psychological Study. By Dr. William Hirsch. Translated from the Second German Edition. Demy 8vo, 17s. net.

GENIUS AND DEGENERATION: A Psychological Study. By Dr. William Hirsch. Translated from the Second German Edition. Demy 8vo, 17s. net.

THE NON-RELIGION OF THE FUTURE. From the French of Marie Jean Guyau. In One Volume, demy 8vo, 17s. net.

THE NON-RELIGION OF THE FUTURE. From the French of Marie Jean Guyau. In One Volume, demy 8vo, 17s. net.

STUDIES OF RELIGIOUS HISTORY. By Ernest Renan, late of the French Academy. 8vo, 7s. 6d.

STUDIES OF RELIGIOUS HISTORY. By Ernest Renan, formerly of the French Academy. 8vo, 7s. 6d.

THE PASSION PLAY AT OBERAMMERGAU, 1890. By F. W. Farrar, D.D., F.R.S., Dean of Canterbury, &c. &c. 4to, cloth, 2s. 6d.

THE PASSION PLAY AT OBERAMMERGAU, 1890. By F. W. Farrar, D.D., F.R.S., Dean of Canterbury, etc. etc. 4to, cloth, 2s. 6d.

THE WORD OF THE LORD UPON THE WATERS. Sermons read by His Imperial Majesty the Emperor of Germany, while at Sea on his Voyages to the Land of the Midnight Sun. Composed by Dr. Richter, Army Chaplain, and Translated from the German by John R. McIlraith. 4to, cloth, 2s. 6d.

THE WORD OF THE LORD UPON THE WATERS. Sermons delivered by His Imperial Majesty the Emperor of Germany during his sea voyages to the Land of the Midnight Sun. Written by Dr. Richter scale, Army Chaplain, and translated from the German by John R. McIlraith. 4to, cloth, £2. 6d.

THE KINGDOM OF GOD IS WITHIN YOU. Christianity not as a Mystic Religion but as a New Theory of Life. By Count Leo Tolstoy. Translated from the Russian by Constance Garnett. Popular Edition cloth, 2s. 6d.

THE KINGDOM OF GOD IS WITHIN YOU. Christianity not as a Mystic Religion but as a New Theory of Life. By Count Leo Tolstoy. Translated from the Russian by Constance Garnett. Popular Edition cloth, 2s. 6d.

THE SPINSTER'S SCRIP. As Compiled by Cecil Raynor. Narrow crown 8vo, limp cloth, 2s. 6d.

THE SPINSTER'S SCRIP. Compiled by Cecil Raynor. Narrow crown 8vo, soft cover, 2s. 6d.

THE PINERO BIRTHDAY BOOK. Selected and arranged by Myra Hamilton. With a Portrait. 16mo, cloth, 2s. 6d.

THE PINERO BIRTHDAY BOOK. Compiled and organized by Myra Hamilton. Includes a portrait. 16mo, cloth, 2s. 6d.

THE POCKET IBSEN. A Collection of some of the Master's best known Dramas, condensed, revised, and slightly rearranged for the benefit of the Earnest Student. By F. Anstey, Author of "Vice Versa," "Voces Populi," &c. With Illustrations reproduced, by permission, from Punch, and a new Frontispiece by Bernard Partridge. New Edition. 16mo, cloth, 3s. 6d.; or paper, 2s. 6d.

THE POCKET IBSEN. A collection of some of the Master's most famous dramas, condensed, revised, and slightly rearranged for the benefit of the serious student. By F. Anstey, author of "Vice Versa," "Voces Populi," etc. With illustrations reproduced, by permission, from Punch, and a new frontispiece by Bernard Partridge. New edition. 16mo, cloth, 3s. 6d.; or paper, 2s. 6d.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

FROM WISDOM COURT. By Henry Seton Merriman and Stephen Graham Tallentyre. With 30 Illustrations by E. Courboin. Crown 8vo, cloth, 3s. 6d.; or picture boards, 2s.

FROM WISDOM COURT. By Henry Seton Merriman and Stephen Graham Tallentyre. With 30 Illustrations by E. Courboin. Crown 8vo, cloth, £3.60; or picture boards, £2.00.

THE OLD MAIDS' CLUB. By I. Zangwill, Author of "Children of the Ghetto," &c. Illustrated by F. H. Townsend. Crown 8vo, cloth, 3s. 6d.; or picture boards, 2s.

THE OLD MAIDS' CLUB. By I. Zangwill, Author of "Children of the Ghetto," etc. Illustrated by F. H. Townsend. Crown 8vo, cloth, £3.60; or picture boards, £2.00.

WOMAN—THROUGH A MAN'S EYEGLASS. By Malcolm C. Salaman. With Illustrations by Dudley Hardy. Crown 8vo, cloth, 3s. 6d.; or picture boards, 2s.

WOMAN—THROUGH A MAN'S EYEGLASS. By Malcolm C. Salaman. With Illustrations by Dudley Hardy. Crown 8vo, cloth, 3shillings 6pence; or picture boards, 2shillings

STORIES OF GOLF. Collected by William Knight and T. T. Oliphant. With Rhymes on Golf by various hands; also Shakespeare on Golf, &c. Enlarged Edition. Fcap. 8vo, cloth, 2s. 6d.

STORIES OF GOLF. Collected by Bill Knight and T.T. Oliphant. With poems about golf by various authors; also Shakespeare on golf, etc. Enlarged Edition. Fcap. 8vo, cloth, 2s. 6d.

THE ROSE: A Treatise on the Cultivation, History, Family Characteristics, &c., of the various Groups of Roses. With Accurate Description of the Varieties now Generally Grown. By H. B. Ellwanger. With an Introduction by George H. Ellwanger. 12mo, cloth, 5s.

THE ROSE: A Guide to Growing, History, Family Traits, etc., of Different Types of Roses. Includes Accurate Descriptions of the Varieties Commonly Grown. By H.B. Ellwanger. With an Introduction by George H. Ellwanger. 12mo, cloth, 5s.

THE GARDEN'S STORY; or, Pleasures and Trials of an Amateur Gardener. By G. H. Ellwanger. With an Introduction by the Rev. C. Wolley Dod. 12mo, cloth, with Illustrations, 5s.

THE GARDEN'S STORY; or, Pleasures and Trials of an Amateur Gardener. By G.H. Ellwanger. With an Introduction by the Rev. C. Wolley Dod. 12mo, cloth, with Illustrations, 5s.

GIRLS AND WOMEN. By E. Chester. Pot 8vo, cloth, 2s. 6d., or gilt extra, 3s. 6d.

GIRLS AND WOMEN. By E. Chester. Paperback 8vo, cloth, £2.50, or gold extra, £3.50.

DRIVING FOR PLEASURE; or, The Harness Stable and its Appointments. By Francis T. Underhill. Illustrated with One Hundred and Twenty-four full-page Plates. Imperial 8vo; buckram sides, leather back, price 28s. net.

DRIVING FOR PLEASURE; or, The Harness Stable and its Appointments. By Francis T. Underhill. Illustrated with One Hundred and Twenty-four full-page Plates. Imperial 8vo; buckram sides, leather back, price 28s. net.

Contents.—What Constitutes Good Form in Equipage—General Appointments—Coaching—Four-in-hand—Tandem—Horses—Coachmen—Harness and Harnessing—Driving—Liveries, Horse Clothing, etc.—The Stable—Suggestions to the Inexperienced—Bits and Bitting—The Use of Bearing Reins—Carriages.

Contents.—What Makes a Good Equipage—General Setups—Coaching—Four-in-hand—Tandem—Horses—Coachmen—Harness and Harnessing—Driving—Uniforms, Horse Gear, etc.—The Stable—Tips for Beginners—Bits and Bitting—The Use of Bearing Reins—Carriages.

MANNERS, CUSTOMS, AND OBSERVANCES: Their Origin and Signification. By Leopold Wagner. Crown 8vo, 6s.

MANNERS, CUSTOMS, AND OBSERVANCES: Their Origin and Significance. By Leopold Wagner. Crown 8vo, 6s.

THE GREAT WAR OF 189—. A Forecast. By Rear-Admiral Colomb, Col. Maurice, R.A., Captain Maude, Archibald Forbes, Charles Lowe, D. Christie Murray, and F. Scudamore. Second Edition. In One Volume, large 8vo, with numerous Illustrations, 6s.

THE GREAT WAR OF 189—. A Prediction. By Rear-Admiral Colombia, Col. Maurice, R.A., Captain Maude, Archibald Forbes, Charles Lowe, D. Christie Murray, and F. Scudamore. Second Edition. In One Volume, large 8vo, with numerous Illustrations, 6shillings.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Dramatic Literature.

THE PLAYS OF W. E. HENLEY AND R. L. STEVENSON. Crown 8vo, cloth. An Edition of 250 copies only, 10s. 6d. net, or separately, 16mo, cloth, 2s. 6d. each, or paper, 1s. 6d.

THE PLAYS OF W. E. HENLEY AND R. L. STEVENSON. Crown 8vo, cloth. An edition of only 250 copies, £10.6 net, or separately, 16mo, cloth, £2.6 each, or paper, £1.6.

  • DEACON BRODIE.
  • BEAU AUSTIN.
  • ADMIRAL GUINEA.
  • MACAIRE.

THE PLAYS OF ARTHUR W. PINERO. Paper covers, 1s. 6d.; or cloth, 2s. 6d. each.

THE PLAYS OF ARTHUR W. PINERO. Paper covers, 1shilling 6pence; or cloth, 2shillings 6pence each.

  • THE TIMES.
  • THE PROFLIGATE.
  • THE CABINET MINISTER.
  • THE HOBBY HORSE.
  • LADY BOUNTIFUL.
  • THE MAGISTRATE.
  • DANDY DICK.
  • SWEET LAVENDER.
  • THE SCHOOL-MISTRESS.
  • THE WEAKER SEX.
  • THE AMAZONS.
  • THE NOTORIOUS MRS. EBBSMITH.
  • THE BENEFIT OF THE DOUBT.
  • THE SECOND MRS. TANQUERAY.

 ※ This play can be had in Library form, 4to, cloth. With a Portrait of the Author. 5s.

※ This play is available in library format, 4to, cloth. With a portrait of the author. 5shillings.

The above 14 Volumes are now uniformly bound in Leather, in case, price on application.

The 14 volumes above are now all uniformly bound in leather, available by request, price upon application.

In preparation.

Getting ready.

THE PRINCESS AND THE BUTTERFLY.

THE PRINCESS AND THE BUTTERFLY.

THE PLAYS OF HENRIK IBSEN. Small 4to, cloth 5s. each, or paper covers, 1s. 6d. each.

THE PLAYS OF HENRIK IBSEN. Small 4to, cloth £5 each, or paper covers, £1.6 each.

  • JOHN GABRIEL BORKMAN.
  • LITTLE EYOLF.
  • *THE MASTER BUILDER.
  • *HEDDA GABLER.

* Also a Limited Large Paper Edition, 21s. net.

* Also, a Limited Large Paper Edition, £21.00 net.

BRAND: A Dramatic Poem in Five Acts. By Henrik Ibsen. Translated in the original metres, with an Introduction and Notes, by C. H. Herford. Small 4to, cloth, 7s. 6d.

BRAND: A Dramatic Poem in Five Acts. By Henrik Ibsen. Translated in the original meters, with an Introduction and Notes, by C.H. Herford. Small 4to, cloth, 7s. 6d.

THE PLAYS OF GERHART HAUPTMANN.

THE PLAYS OF GERHART HAUPTMANN.

HANNELE. Small 4to, with Portrait, 5s.

HANNELE. Small 4to, with portrait, 5s.

In preparation.

Getting ready.

  • LONELY LIVES.
  • THE WEAVERS.

THE PRINCESS MALEINE: A Drama in Five Acts (Translated by Gerard Harry), and THE INTRUDER: A Drama in One Act. By Maurice Maeterlinck. With an Introduction by Hall Caine, and a Portrait of the Author. Small 4to, cloth, 5s.

THE PRINCESS MALEINE: A Drama in Five Acts (Translated by Gerard Harry), and THE INTRUDER: A Drama in One Act. By Maurice Maeterlinck. With an Introduction by Hall Caine, and a Portrait of the Author. Small 4to, cloth, 5s.

THE FRUITS OF ENLIGHTENMENT: A Comedy in Four Acts. By Count Lyof Tolstoy. Translated from the Russian by E. J. Dillon. With Introduction by A. W. Pinero. Small 4to, with Portrait, 5s.

THE FRUITS OF ENLIGHTENMENT: A Comedy in Four Acts. By Count Leo Tolstoy. Translated from the Russian by E.J. Dillon. With an Introduction by A.W. Pinero. Small 4to, with Portrait, 5s.

KING ERIK: A Tragedy. By Edmund Gosse. A Re-issue, with a Critical Introduction by Mr. Theodore Watts. Fcap. 8vo, boards, 5s. net.

KING ERIK: A Tragedy. By Edmund Gosse. A Re-release, with a Critical Introduction by Mr. Theo Watts. Fcap. 8vo, paperback, £5 net.

THE PIPER OF HAMELIN: A Fantastic Opera in Two Acts. By Robert Buchanan. With Illustrations by Hugh Thomson. 4to, cloth, 2s. 6d. net.

THE PIPER OF HAMELIN: A Fantastic Opera in Two Acts. By Robert Buchanan. With Illustrations by Hugh Thomson. 4to, cloth, £2.50 net.

HYPATIA. A Play in Four Acts. Founded on Charles Kingsley's Novel. By G. Stuart Ogilvie. With Frontispiece by J. D. Batten. Crown 8vo, cloth, printed in Red and Black, 2s. 6d. net.

HYPATIA. A Play in Four Acts. Based on Charles Kingsley's Novel. By G. Stuart Ogilvie. Featuring a Frontispiece by J.D. Batten. Crown 8vo, cloth, printed in Red and Black, 2s. 6d. net.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

THE DRAMA: ADDRESSES. By Henry Irving. With Portrait by J. McN. Whistler. Second Edition. Fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d.

THE DRAMA: ADDRESSES. By Henry Irving. With Portrait by J. McN. Whistler. Second Edition. Fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d.

SOME INTERESTING FALLACIES OF THE MODERN STAGE. An Address delivered to the Playgoers' Club at St. James's Hall, on Sunday, 6th December, 1891. By Herbert Beerbohm Tree. Crown 8vo, sewed, 6d. net.

SOME INTERESTING FALLACIES OF THE MODERN STAGE. An Address delivered to the Playgoers' Club at St. James's Hall, on Sunday, December 6, 1891. By Herbert Beerbohm Tree. Crown 8vo, sewed, 6d. net.


Poetry.

POEMS FROM THE DIVAN OF HAFIZ. Translated from the Persian by Gertrude Lowthian Bell. Small crown 8vo price 6s.

POEMS FROM THE DIVAN OF HAFIZ. Translated from the Persian by Gertrude Lowthian Bell. Small crown 8vo price 6s.

A SELECTION FROM THE POEMS OF WILFRID SCAWEN BLUNT. With an Introduction by W. E. Henley. Crown 8vo, price 6s.

A SELECTION FROM THE POEMS OF WILFRID SCAWEN BLUNT. With an Introduction by W.E. Henley. Crown 8vo, price 6s.

ON VIOL AND FLUTE. By Edmund Gosse. Fcap. 8vo, with Frontispiece and Tailpiece, price 3s. 6d. net.

ON VIOL AND FLUTE. By Edmund Gosse. Fcap. 8vo, with Frontispiece and Tailpiece, price £3.50 net.

FIRDAUSI IN EXILE, and other Poems. By Edmund Gosse. Fcap. 8vo, with Frontispiece, price 3s. 6d. net.

FIRDAUSI IN EXILE, and other Poems. By Edmund Gosse. Fcap. 8vo, with Frontispiece, price £3.50 net.

IN RUSSET AND SILVER. POEMS. By Edmund Gosse. Author of "Gossip in a Library," etc. Fcap 8vo, price 3s. 6d. net.

IN RUSSET AND SILVER. POEMS. By Edmund Gosse. Author of "Gossip in a Library," etc. Fcap 8vo, price 3sh. 6d. net.

THE POETRY OF PATHOS AND DELIGHT. From the Works of Coventry Patmore. Passages selected by Alice Meynell. With a Photogravure Portrait from an Oil Painting by John Sargent, A.R.A. Fcap. 8vo, 5s.

THE POETRY OF PATHOS AND DELIGHT. From the Works of Coventry Patmore. Excerpts chosen by Alice Meynell. With a Photogravure Portrait from an Oil Painting by John Sargent, A.R.A. Fcap. 8vo, 5s.

A CENTURY OF GERMAN LYRICS. Translated from the German by Kate Freiligrath Kroeker. Fcap. 8vo, rough edges, 3s. 6d.

A CENTURY OF GERMAN LYRICS. Translated from the German by Kate Freiligrath Kroeker. Fcap. 8vo, rough edges, £3.60.

LOVE SONGS OF ENGLISH POETS, 1500-1800. With Notes by Ralph H. Caine. Fcap. 8vo, rough edges, 3s. 6d.

LOVE SONGS OF ENGLISH POETS, 1500-1800. With Notes by Ralph H. Caine. Fcap. 8vo, untrimmed edges, 3s. 6d.

 ※ Large Paper Edition, limited to 100 Copies, 10s. 6d. net.

Large Paper Edition, limited to 100 Copies, £10.30 net.

IN CAP AND GOWN. Three Centuries of Cambridge Wit. Edited by Charles Whibley. Third Edition, with a New Introduction, and a Frontispiece, crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. net.

IN CAP AND GOWN. Three Centuries of Cambridge Wit. Edited by Charles Whibley. Third Edition, with a New Introduction, and a Frontispiece, crown 8vo, £3.50 net.

IVY AND PASSION FLOWER: Poems. By Gerard Bendall, Author of "Estelle," &c. &c. 12mo, cloth, 3s. 6d.

IVY AND PASSION FLOWER: Poems. By Gerard Bendall, Author of "Estelle," etc. 12mo, cloth, £3.50.

VERSES. By Gertrude Hall. 12mo, cloth, 3s. 6d.

VERSES. By Gertrude Hall. 12mo, cloth, 3s. 6d.

IDYLLS OF WOMANHOOD. By C. Amy Dawson. Fcap. 8vo, gilt top, 5s.

IDYLLS OF WOMANHOOD. By C. Amy Dawson. Fcap. 8vo, gilt top, 5shillings.

TENNYSON'S GRAVE. By St. Clair Baddeley. 8vo paper, 1s.

TENNYSON'S GRAVE. By St. Clair Baddeley. 8vo paper, £1.

THE BLACK RIDERS. And Other Lines. By Stephen Crane, Author of "The Red Badge of Courage." 16mo, leather, gilt top, 3s. net.

THE BLACK RIDERS. And Other Lines. By Stephen Crane, Author of "The Red Badge of Courage." 16mo, leather, gilt top, 3s. net.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Education and Science:

LITERATURES OF THE WORLD.

A SERIES OF SHORT HISTORIES.

Edited by EDMUND GOSSE.

Each Volume Large Crown 8vo, Cloth 6s.

Each Volume Large Crown 8vo, Cloth £6.

A HISTORY OF ANCIENT GREEK LITERATURE. By Gilbert Murray, M.A., Professor of Greek in the University of Glasgow.

A HISTORY OF ANCIENT GREEK LITERATURE. By Gilbert Murray, M.A., Professor of Greek at the University of Glasgow.

A HISTORY OF FRENCH LITERATURE. BY Edward Dowden, D.C.L., LL.D., Professor of Oratory and English Literature in the University of Dublin.

A HISTORY OF FRENCH LITERATURE. BY Edward Dowden, D.C.L., LL.D., Professor of Oratory and English Literature at the University of Dublin.

A HISTORY OF MODERN ENGLISH LITERATURE. By the Editor, Hon. M.A. of Trinity College, Cambridge.

A HISTORY OF MODERN ENGLISH LITERATURE. By the Editor, Hon. M.A. of Trinity College, Cambridge.

A HISTORY OF ITALIAN LITERATURE. By Richard Garnett, C.B., LL.D., Keeper of Printed Books in the British Museum.

A HISTORY OF ITALIAN LITERATURE. By Richard Garnett, C.B., LL.D., Head of Printed Books at the British Museum.

The following are already arranged for:—

The following are already arranged for:—

A HISTORY OF SPANISH LITERATURE. By J. Fitzmaurice-Kelly, Corresponding Member of the Spanish Academy.

A HISTORY OF SPANISH LITERATURE. By J. Fitzmaurice-Kelly, Corresponding Member of the Spanish Academy.

A HISTORY OF JAPANESE LITERATURE. By William George Aston, C.M.G., M.A., late Acting Secretary at the British Legation at Tokio.

A HISTORY OF JAPANESE LITERATURE. By William George Aston, C.M.G., M.A., former Acting Secretary at the British Legation in Tokyo.

A HISTORY OF MODERN SCANDINAVIAN LITERATURE. By George Brandes, of Copenhagen.

A HISTORY OF MODERN SCANDINAVIAN LITERATURE. By George Brandes, from Copenhagen.

A HISTORY OF SANSKRIT LITERATURE. By A. A. Macdonell, M.A., Deputy Boden Professor of Sanskrit at the University of Oxford.

A HISTORY OF SANSKRIT LITERATURE. By A. A. Macdonell, M.A., Deputy Boden Professor of Sanskrit at the University of Oxford.

A HISTORY OF HUNGARIAN LITERATURE. By Dr. Zoltan Beöthy, Professor of Hungarian Literature at the University of Budapest, and Secretary of the Kisfaludy Society.

A HISTORY OF HUNGARIAN LITERATURE. By Dr. Zoltan Beöthy, Professor of Hungarian Literature at the University of Budapest, and Secretary of the Kisfaludy Society.

A HISTORY OF AMERICAN LITERATURE. By Professor Moses Coit Tyler.

A HISTORY OF AMERICAN LITERATURE. By Professor Moses Coit Tyler.

A HISTORY OF GERMAN LITERATURE. By Dr. C. H. Herford, Professor of English Literature in the University of Wales.

A HISTORY OF GERMAN LITERATURE. By Dr. C.H. Herford, Professor of English Literature at the University of Wales.

A HISTORY OF LATIN LITERATURE. By Dr. A. W. Verrall, Fellow and Senior Tutor of Trinity College, Cambridge.

A HISTORY OF LATIN LITERATURE. By Dr. A. W. Verrall, Fellow and Senior Tutor of Trinity College, Cambridge.

A HISTORY OF BOHEMIAN LITERATURE. By Francis Count Lutzow.

A HISTORY OF BOHEMIAN LITERATURE. By Francis Count Lutzow.

Volumes dealing with Russian, Arabic, Dutch, Modern Greek, and other Literatures will follow in due course.

Volumes covering Russian, Arabic, Dutch, Greek, and other literatures will be released soon.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

The Great Educators.

A Series of Volumes by Eminent Writers, presenting in their entirety "A Biographical History of Education."

A Series of Volumes by Notable Authors, featuring the complete text of "A Biographical History of Education."

Each subject will form a complete volume, crown 8vo, 5s.

Each topic will be a complete volume, crown 8vo, 5s.

Now ready.

All set.

ARISTOTLE, and the Ancient Educational Ideals. By Thomas Davidson, M.A., LL.D.

ARISTOTLE, and the Ancient Educational Ideals. By Thomas Davidson, M.A., LL.D.

The Times.—"A very readable sketch of a very interesting subject."

The Times.—"An engaging overview of a fascinating topic."

LOYOLA, and the Educational System of the Jesuits. By Rev. Thomas Hughes, S.J.

LOYOLA, and the Educational System of the Jesuits. By Rev. Thomas Hughes, S.J.

ALCUIN, and the Rise of the Christian Schools. By Professor Andrew F. West, Ph.D.

ALCUIN, and the Rise of the Christian Schools. By Professor Andrew F. West, Ph.D.

FROEBEL, and Education by Self-Activity. By H. Courthope Bowen, M.A.

FROEBEL, and Education through Self-Activity. By H. Courthope Bowen, M.A.

ABELARD, and the Origin and Early History of Universities. By Jules Gabriel Compayré, Professor in the Faculty of Toulouse.

ABELARD, and the Origin and Early History of Universities. By Jules Gabriel Compayré, Professor in the Faculty of Toulouse.

HERBART AND THE HERBARTIANS. By Prof. de Garmo.

HERBART AND THE HERBARTIANS. By Prof. de Garmo.

THOMAS AND MATTHEW ARNOLD, and their Influence on English Education. By Sir Joshua Fitch, M.A., LL.D., formerly Her Majesty's Inspector of Training Colleges.

THOMAS AND MATTHEW ARNOLD, and their Influence on English Education. By Sir Joshua Fitch, M.A., LL.D., formerly Her Majesty's Inspector of Training Colleges.

HORACE MANN, and the Common School Revival in the United States. By B. A. Hinsdale, Ph.D., LL.D.

HORACE MANN, and the Common School Revival in the United States. By B. A. Hinsdale, Ph.D., LL.D.

In preparation.

Getting ready.

ROUSSEAU; and, Education according to Nature. By Paul H. Hanus.

ROUSSEAU; and, Education according to Nature. By Paul H. Hanus.

PESTALOZZI; or, the Friend and Student of Children.

PESTALOZZI; or, the Friend and Student of Children.


THE STORY OF THE GREEKS. By H. A. Guerber. Crown 8vo, with Illustrations. 3s. 6d.

THE STORY OF THE GREEKS. By H.A. Guerber. Crown 8vo, with Illustrations. £3.60

THE STORY OF THE ROMANS. By H. A. Guerber. Crown 8vo.

THE STORY OF THE ROMANS. By H.A. Guerber. Crown 8vo.

ARABIC AUTHORS: A Manual of Arabian History and Literature. By F. F. Arbuthnot, M.R.A.S., Author of "Early Ideas," "Persian Portraits," &c. 8vo, cloth, 5s.

ARABIC AUTHORS: A Manual of Arabian History and Literature. By F. F. Arbuthnot, M.R.A.S., Author of "Early Ideas," "Persian Portraits," etc. 8vo, cloth, 5s.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

EVOLUTIONAL ETHICS AND ANIMAL PSYCHOLOGY By E. P. Evans. Crown 8vo, 9s.

EVOLUTIONARY ETHICS AND ANIMAL PSYCHOLOGY By E. P. Evans. Crown 8vo, 9s.

MOVEMENT. Translated from the French of E. Marey. By Eric Pritchard, M.A., M.B., Oxon. In One Volume, crown 8vo, with 170 Illustrations, 7s. 6d.

MOVEMENT. Translated from the French of E. Marey. By Eric Pritchard, M.A., M.B., Oxon. In One Volume, crown 8vo, with 170 Illustrations, 7£. 6d.

LUMEN. By Camille Flammarion. Authorised Translation from the French by A. A. M. and R. M. With portions of the last chapter written specially for this edition. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.

LUMEN. By Camille Flammarion. Authorized translation from the French by A. A. M. and R. M. With sections of the final chapter written specifically for this edition. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.

THE SPEECH OF MONKEYS. By Professor R. L. Garner. Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.

THE SPEECH OF MONKEYS. By Professor R. L. Garner. Crown 8vo, 7£ 6d.

HEINEMANN'S SCIENTIFIC HANDBOOKS.

THE BIOLOGICAL PROBLEM OF TO-DAY: Preformation or Epigenesis? Authorised Translation from the German of Prof. Dr. Oscar Hertwig, of the University of Berlin. By P. Chalmers Mitchell, M.A., Oxon. With a Preface by the Translator. Crown 8vo. 3s. 6d.

THE BIOLOGICAL PROBLEM OF TODAY: Preformation or Epigenesis? Authorized Translation from the German of Prof. Dr. Oscar Hertwig, University of Berlin. By P. Chalmers Mitchell, M.A., Oxon. With a Preface by the Translator. Crown 8vo. 3s. 6d.

MANUAL OF BACTERIOLOGY. By A. B. Griffiths, Ph.D., F.R.S. (Edin.), F.C.S. Crown 8vo, cloth, Illustrated. 7s. 6d. Pharmaceutical Journal.—"The subject is treated more thoroughly and completely than in any similar work published in this country."

MANUAL OF BACTERIOLOGY. By A. B. Griffiths, Ph.D., F.R.S. (Edin.), F.C.S. Crown 8vo, cloth, Illustrated. £7.50. Pharmaceutical Journal.—"The subject is covered more thoroughly and completely than in any similar work published in this country."

MANUAL OF ASSAYING GOLD, SILVER, COPPER, and Lead Ores. By Walter Lee Brown, B. Sc. Revised, Corrected, and considerably Enlarged, with a chapter on the Assaying of Fuel, &c. By A. B. Griffiths, Ph.D., F.R.S. (Edin.), F.C.S. Crown 8vo, cloth. Illustrated, 7s. 6d.

MANUAL OF ASSAYING GOLD, SILVER, COPPER, and Lead Ores. By Walter Lee Brown, B. Sc. Revised, corrected, and significantly expanded, with a chapter on the Assaying of Fuel, etc. By A. B. Griffiths, Ph.D., F.R.S. (Edin.), F.C.S. Crown 8vo, cloth. Illustrated, 7s. 6d.

GEODESY. By J. Howard Gore. Crown 8vo, cloth, Illustrated, 5s.

GEODESY. By J. Howard Gore. 8vo, hardcover, Illustrated, 5shillings.

THE PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF GASES. By Arthur L. Kimball, of the Johns Hopkins University. Crown 8vo, cloth, Illustrated, 5s.

THE PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF GASES. By Arthur L. Kimball, of Johns Hopkins University. Crown 8vo, cloth, Illustrated, 5s.

HEAT AS A FORM OF ENERGY. By Professor R. H. Thurston, of Cornell University. Crown 8vo, cloth, Illustrated, 5s.

HEAT AS A FORM OF ENERGY. By Professor R.H. Thurston, of Cornell University. Crown 8vo, cloth, Illustrated, 5s.


Law.

A SHORT TREATISE OF BELGIAN LAW AND Legal Procedure. From a Practical Standpoint, for the Guidance of British Traders, Patentees, and Bankers, and British Residents in Belgium. By Gaston De Leval. Fcap. 8vo, paper, 1s. 6d.

A SHORT TREATISE ON BELGIAN LAW AND Legal Procedure. From a Practical Perspective, for the Guidance of British Traders, Patentees, and Bankers, and British Residents in Belgium. By Gaston De Leval. Fcap. 8vo, paper, 1s. 6d.

PRISONERS ON OATH, PRESENT AND FUTURE. By Sir Herbert Stephen, Bart. 8vo, boards, 1s. net.

PRISONERS ON OATH, PRESENT AND FUTURE. By Sir Herbert Stephen, Bart. 8vo, boards, 1s. net.

THE ARBITRATOR'S MANUAL. Under the London Chamber of Arbitration. Being a Practical Treatise on the Power and Duties of an Arbitrator, with the Rules and Procedure of the Court of Arbitration, and the Forms. By Joseph Seymour Salaman, Author of "Trade Marks," &c. Fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d.

THE ARBITRATOR'S MANUAL. Under the London Chamber of Arbitration. A Practical Guide on the Authority and Responsibilities of an Arbitrator, including the Rules and Procedures of the Arbitration Court, and the Necessary Forms. By Joseph Seymour Salaman, Author of "Trade Marks," etc. Fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Fiction.—Popular 6s. Novels.

THE SCOURGE-STICK. By Mrs. Campbell Praed.

THE SCOURGE-STICK. By Mrs. Campbell Praed.

THE TRIUMPH OF DEATH. By Gabriele d'Annunzio.

THE TRIUMPH OF DEATH. By Gabriele d'Annunzio.

THE DULL MISS ARCHINARD. By Anne D. Sedgwick.

THE DULL MISS ARCHINARD. By Anne D. Sedgwick.

THE BROOM OF THE WAR-GOD. By H. N. Brailsford.

THE BROOM OF THE WAR-GOD. By H.N. Brailsford.

GOD'S FOUNDLING. By A. J. Dawson.

GOD'S FOUNDLING. By A. J. Dawson.

THE NIGGER OF THE "NARCISSUS." By Joseph Conrad.

THE NIGGER OF THE "NARCISSUS." By Joseph Conrad.

EQUALITY. By Edward Bellamy, Author of "Looking Backward."

EQUALITY. By Edward Bellamy, Author of "Looking Backward."

SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE. By Richard Harding Davis.

SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE. By Richard Harding Davis.

THE THIRD VIOLET. By Stephen Crane.

THE THIRD VIOLET. By Stephen Crane.

THE OPEN BOAT. By Stephen Crane.

THE OPEN BOAT. By Stephen Crane.

A ROMANCE OF THE FIRST CONSUL. By Matilda Malling.

A ROMANCE OF THE FIRST CONSUL. By Matilda Malling.

THE MINISTER OF STATE. By J. A. Steuart.

THE MINISTER OF STATE. By J.A. Steuart.

THE LAKE OF WINE. By Bernard Capes.

THE LAKE OF WINE. By Bernard Capes.

EZEKIEL'S SIN. By J. H. Pearce.

EZEKIEL'S SIN. By J.H. Pearce.

A CHAMPION IN THE SEVENTIES. By Edith A. Barnett.

A CHAMPION IN THE SEVENTIES. By Edith A. Barnett.

THE FOURTH NAPOLEON. By Charles Benham.

THE FOURTH NAPOLEON. By Charles Benham.

THE GADFLY. By E. L. Voynich.

THE GADFLY. By E. L. Voynich.

THE CAPTAIN OF THE PARISH. By John Quine.

THE CAPTAIN OF THE PARISH. By John Quine.

THE LONDONERS: An Absurdity. By Robert Hichens.

THE LONDONERS: An Absurdity. By Robert Hichens.

FLAMES. By Robert Hichens.

FLAMES. By Robert Hichens.

THE FOLLY OF EUSTACE. By Robert Hichens.

THE FOLLY OF EUSTACE. By Robert Hichens.

AN IMAGINATIVE MAN. By Robert Hichens.

A CREATIVE GUY. By Robert Hichens.

THE ELEVENTH COMMANDMENT. By Halliwell Sutcliffe.

THE 11TH COMMANDMENT. By Halliwell Sutcliffe.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Fiction.—Popular 6s. Novels.

GLORIA MUNDI. By Harold Frederic. [In preparation.

GLORIA MUNDI. By Harold Frederic. [Coming soon.

ILLUMINATION. By Harold Frederic.

ILLUMINATION. By Harold Frederic.

HERBERT VANLENNERT. By C. F. Keary.

HERBERT VANLENNERT. By C. F. Keary.

ANDREA. By Percy White.

ANDREA. By Percy White.

CORRUPTION. By Percy White.

CORRUPTION. By Percy White.

MR. BAILEY-MARTIN. By Percy White. With Portrait.

MR. BAILEY-MARTIN. By Percy White. With Portrait.

THE FREEDOM OF HENRY MEREDYTH. By M. Hamilton.

THE FREEDOM OF HENRY MEREDYTH. By M. Hamilton.

McLEOD OF THE CAMERONS. By M. Hamilton.

McLEOD OF THE CAMERONS. By M. Hamilton.

A SELF-DENYING ORDINANCE. By M. Hamilton.

A SELF-DENYING ORDINANCE. By M. Hamilton.

THE DRONES MUST DIE. By Max Nordau.

THE DRONES MUST DIE. By Max Nordau.

THE MALADY OF THE CENTURY. By Max Nordau.

THE MALADY OF THE CENTURY. By Max Nordau.

A COMEDY OF SENTIMENT. By Max Nordau.

A Comedy of Sentiment. By Max Nordau.

THE WAR OF THE WORLDS. By H. G. Wells.

THE WAR OF THE WORLDS. By H.G. Wells.

THE ISLAND OF DOCTOR MOREAU. By H. G. Wells.

THE ISLAND OF DOCTOR MOREAU. By H.G. Wells.

THE GODS ARRIVE. By Annie E. Holdsworth.

THE GODS HAVE ARRIVED. By Annie E. Holdsworth.

THE YEARS THAT THE LOCUST HATH EATEN. By Annie E. Holdsworth.

THE YEARS THAT THE LOCUST HATH EATEN. By Annie E. Holdsworth.

IN HASTE AND AT LEISURE. By Mrs. Lynn Linton, Author of "Joshua Davidson," &c.

IN HASTE AND AT LEISURE. By Mrs. Lynn Linton, Author of "Joshua Davidson," etc.

CLEO THE MAGNIFICENT. By Z. Z.

CLEO THE MAGNIFICENT. By Z. Z.

THE WORLD AND A MAN. By Z. Z.

THE WORLD AND A MAN. By Z. Z.

A DRAMA IN DUTCH. By Z. Z.

A DRAMA IN DUTCH. By Z. Z.

BENEFITS FORGOT. By Wolcott Balestier.

FORGOTTEN BENEFITS. By Wolcott Balestier.

A PASTORAL PLAYED OUT. By M. L. Pendered.

A PASTORAL PLAYED OUT. By M.L. Pendered.

CHIMÆRA. By F. Mabel Robinson.

CHIMERA. By F. Mabel Robinson.

MISS GRACE OF ALL SOULS'. By W. Edwards Tirebuck.

MISS GRACE OF ALL SOULS'. By W. Edwards T. Buck.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Fiction.—Popular 6s. Novels.

A SUPERFLUOUS WOMAN. By Emma Brooke.

A SUPERFLUOUS WOMAN. By Emma Brooke.

TRANSITION. By the Author of "A Superfluous Woman."

TRANSITION. By the Author of "A Superfluous Woman."

LIFE THE ACCUSER. The Author of "A Superfluous Woman."

LIFE THE ACCUSER. The author of "A Superfluous Woman."

COTTAGE FOLK. By Mrs. Comyns Carr.

Cottage Folk. By Mrs. Comyns Carr.

WITHOUT SIN. By Martin J. Pritchard.

WITHOUT SIN. By Martin J. Pritchard.

WHAT MAISIE KNEW. By Henry James.

What Maisie Knew. By Henry James.

THE OTHER HOUSE. By Henry James.

THE OTHER HOUSE. By Henry James.

THE SPOILS OF POYNTON. By Henry James.

THE SPOILS OF POYNTON. By Henry James.

EMBARRASSMENTS. By Henry James.

Embarrassments. By Henry James.

TERMINATIONS. By Henry James.

TERMINATIONS. By Henry James.

THE FAILURE OF SIBYL FLETCHER. By Adeline Sergeant.

THE FAILURE OF SIBYL FLETCHER. By Adeline Sergeant.

OUT OF DUE SEASON. By Adeline Sergeant.

OUT OF SEASON. By Adeline Sergeant.

LAST STUDIES. By Hubert Crackanthorpe. With an Introduction by Mr. Henry James, and a Portrait.

LAST STUDIES. By Hubert Crackanthorpe. With an Introduction by Mr. Henry James, and a Portrait.

SENTIMENTAL STUDIES. By Hubert Crackanthorpe.

SENTIMENTAL STUDIES. By Hubert Crackanthorpe.

SAINT IVES. By Robert Louis Stevenson.

Saint Ives. By Robert Louis Stevenson.

THE EBB-TIDE. By Robert Louis Stevenson and Lloyd Osbourne.

THE EBB-TIDE. By Robert Louis Stevenson and Lloyd Osbourne.

THE CHRISTIAN. By Hall Caine.

THE CHRISTIAN. By Hall Caine.

THE MANXMAN. By Hall Caine.

THE MANXMAN. By Hall Caine.

THE BONDMAN. A New Saga. By Hall Caine.

THE BONDMAN. A New Story. By Hall Caine.

THE SCAPEGOAT. By Hall Caine.

THE SCAPEGOAT. By Hall Caine.

ELDER CONKLIN; and other Stories. By Frank Harris.

ELDER CONKLIN; and Other Stories. By Frank Harris.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Fiction.—Popular 6s. Novels.

THE HOUSE OF HIDDEN TREASURE. By Maxwell Gray.

THE HOUSE OF HIDDEN TREASURE. By Maxwell Gray.

THE LAST SENTENCE. By Maxwell Gray, Author of "The Silence of Dean Maitland," &c.

THE LAST SENTENCE. By Maxwell Gray, author of "The Silence of Dean Maitland," etc.

THE BETH BOOK. By Sarah Grand.

THE BETH BOOK. By Sarah Grand.

THE HEAVENLY TWINS. By Sarah Grand.

THE HEAVENLY TWINS. By Sarah Grand.

IDEALA. By Sarah Grand.

IDEALA. By Sarah Grand.

OUR MANIFOLD NATURE. By Sarah Grand. With a Portrait of the Author.

OUR MANIFOLD NATURE. By Sarah Grand. Featuring a portrait of the author.

THE STORY OF A MODERN WOMAN. By Ella Hepworth Dixon.

THE STORY OF A MODERN WOMAN. By Ella Hepworth Dixon.

AT THE GATE OF SAMARIA. By W. J. Locke.

AT THE GATE OF SAMARIA. By W.J. Locke.

A DAUGHTER OF THIS WORLD. By F. Battershall.

A DAUGHTER OF THIS WORLD. By F. Battershall.

ON THE FACE OF THE WATERS. By Flora Annie Steel.

ON THE FACE OF THE WATERS. By Flora Annie Steele.

THE POTTER'S THUMB. By Flora Annie Steel.

THE POTTER'S THUMB. By Flora Annie Steel.

FROM THE FIVE RIVERS. By Flora Annie Steel.

FROM THE FIVE RIVERS. By Flora Annie Steel.

IN THE PERMANENT WAY. By Flora Annie Steel.

IN THE PERMANENT WAY. By Flora Annie Steel.

RELICS. Fragments of a Life. By Frances Macnab.

RELICS. Pieces of a Life. By Frances Macnab.

THE MASTER. By I. Zangwill. With Portrait.

THE MASTER. By I. Zangwill. With Portrait.

CHILDREN OF THE GHETTO. By I. Zangwill.

Kids of the Ghetto. By I. Zangwill.

THE PREMIER AND THE PAINTER. A Fantastic Romance. By I. Zangwill and Louis Cowen.

THE PREMIER AND THE PAINTER. A Fantastic Romance. By I. Zangwill and Louis Cowen.

DREAMERS OF THE GHETTO. By I. Zangwill.

DREAMERS OF THE GHETTO. By I. Zangwill.

THE KING OF SCHNORRERS, GROTESQUES AND FANTASIES. By I. Zangwill. With Ninety-eight Illustrations.

THE KING OF SCHNORRERS, GROTESQUES AND FANTASIES. By I. Zangwill. With 98 Illustrations.

THE CELIBATES' CLUB. By I. Zangwill. [In preparation

THE CELIBATES' CLUB. By I. Zangwill. [In preparation

THE RECIPE FOR DIAMONDS. By C. J. Cutcliffe Hyne.

THE RECIPE FOR DIAMONDS. By C.J. Cutcliffe Hyne.

MARIETTA'S MARRIAGE. By W. E. Norris.

MARIETTA'S MARRIAGE. By W. E. Norris.

THE DANCER IN YELLOW. By W. E. Norris.

THE DANCER IN YELLOW. By W. E. Norris.

A VICTIM OF GOOD LUCK. By W. E. Norris.

A VICTIM OF GOOD LUCK. By W.E. Norris.

THE COUNTESS RADNA. By W. E. Norris.

THE COUNTESS RADNA. By W. E. Norris.

THE WIDOWER. By W. E. Norris. [In the Autumn.

THE WIDOWER. By W.E. Norris. [In the Autumn.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Fiction.—Popular 6s. Novels.

THE NAULAHKA. A Tale of West and East. By Rudyard Kipling and Wolcott Balestier.

THE NAULAHKA. A Tale of West and East. By Rudyard Kipling and Wolcott Balestier.

A COURT INTRIGUE. By Basil Thomson.

A Court Intrigue. By Basil Thomson.

KING CIRCUMSTANCE. By Edwin Pugh.

KING CIRCUMSTANCE. By Edwin Pugh.

THE MAN OF STRAW. By Edwin Pugh.

THE MAN OF STRAW. By Edwin Pugh.

TONY DRUM. By Edwin Pugh.

TONY DRUM. By Edwin Pugh.

CHUN-TI-KUNG. By Claude Rees.

CHUN-TI-KUNG. By Claude Rees.

BELOW THE SALT. By C. E. Raimond.

BELOW THE SALT. By C. E. Raimond.

A BATTLE AND A BOY. By Blanche Willis Howard. With Thirty-nine Illustrations by A. Mac-niell-barbour.

A BATTLE AND A BOY. By Blanche Willis Howard. With Thirty-nine Illustrations by A. MacNiell-Barbour.


Popular 5s Novels.

THE SECRET OF NARCISSE. By Edmund Gosse. Crown 8vo, buckram, 5s.

THE SECRET OF NARCISSE. By Edmund Gosse. Crown 8vo, buckram, 5s.

VANITAS. By Vernon Lee, Author of "Hauntings," &c. Crown 8vo, cloth, 5s.

VANITAS. By Vernon Lee, author of "Hauntings," etc. Crown 8vo, cloth, £5.

THE ATTACK ON THE MILL. By Émile Zola. With Twenty-one Illustrations, and Five exquisitely printed Coloured Plates, from Original Drawings by E. Courboin. In One Volume, 4to, 5s.

THE ATTACK ON THE MILL. By Émile Zola. With Twenty-one Illustrations and Five beautifully printed Color Plates, from Original Drawings by E. Courboin. In One Volume, 4to, 5s.


Popular 3s. 6d. Novels.

THE KING OF THE MOUNTAINS. By Edmond About.

THE KING OF THE MOUNTAINS. By Edmond About.

MRS. JOHN FOSTER. By Charles Granville.

MRS. JOHN FOSTER. By Charles Granville.

IN SUMMER ISLES. By Burton Dibbs.

In Summer Isles. By Burton Dibbs.

MR. BLAKE OF NEWMARKET. By E. H. Cooper.

MR. BLAKE OF NEWMARKET. By E.H. Cooper.

A PINCHBECK GODDESS. By Mrs. Fleming (Alice M. Kipling).

A PINCHBECK GODDESS. By Mrs. Fleming (Alice M. Kipling).

THE OUTSPAN. Tales of South Africa. By J. Percy Fitzpatrick.

THE OUTSPAN. Stories of South Africa. By J. Percy FitzPatrick.

THE REDS OF THE MIDI, an Episode of the French Revolution. Translated from the Provencal of Felix Gras. By Mrs. Catherine A. Janvier.

THE REDS OF THE MIDI, an Episode of the French Revolution. Translated from the Provencal of Felix Gras. By Mrs. Catherine A. Janvier.

ELI'S DAUGHTER. By J. H. Pearce.

ELI'S DAUGHTER. By J. H. Pearce.

INCONSEQUENT LIVES. A Village Chronicle. By J. H. Pearce.

UNIMPORTANT LIVES. A Village Chronicle. By J.H. Pearce.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Popular 3s. 6d. Novels.

HER OWN FOLK. (En Famille.) By Hector Malot, Author of "No Relations." Translated by Lady Mary Loyd.

HER OWN FOLK. (En Famille.) By Hector Malot, Author of "No Relations." Translated by Lady Mary Lloyd.

CAPT'N DAVY'S HONEYMOON, The Blind Mother, and The Last Confession. By Hall Caine.

CAPT'N DAVY'S HONEYMOON, The Blind Mother, and The Last Confession. By Hall Caine.

A MARKED MAN: Some Episodes in his Life. By Ada Cambridge.

A MARKED MAN: Some Episodes in His Life. By Ada Cambridge.

THE THREE MISS KINGS. By Ada Cambridge.

THE THREE MISS KINGS. By Ada Cambridge.

A LITTLE MINX. By Ada Cambridge.

A LITTLE MINX. By Ada Cambridge.

NOT ALL IN VAIN. By Ada Cambridge.

NOT ALL IN VAIN. By Ada Cambridge.

A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE FEATHER. By Tasma.

A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE FEATHER. By Tasma.

UNCLE PIPER OF PIPER'S HILL. By Tasma.

UNCLE PIPER OF PIPER'S HILL. By Tasma.

THE PENANCE OF PORTIA JAMES. By Tasma.

THE PENANCE OF PORTIA JAMES. By Tasma.

THE COPPERHEAD; and other Stories of the North during the American War. By Harold Frederic.

THE COPPERHEAD; and other Stories of the North during the American War. By Harold Frederic.

THE RETURN OF THE O'MAHONY. By Harold Frederic. With Illustrations.

THE RETURN OF THE O'MAHONY. By Harold Frederic. With Illustrations.

IN THE VALLEY. By Harold Frederic. With Illustrations.

IN THE VALLEY. By Harold Frederic. With Illustrations.

THE SURRENDER OF MARGARET BELLARMINE. By Adeline Sergeant.

THE SURRENDER OF MARGARET BELLARMINE. By Adeline Sergeant.

THE STORY OF A PENITENT SOUL. Being the Private Papers of Mr. Stephen Dart, late Minister at Lynnbridge, in the County of Lincoln. By Adeline Sergeant.

THE STORY OF A PENITENT SOUL. The Private Papers of Mr. Stephen Dart, former Minister at Lynnbridge, in Lincoln County. By Adeline Sergeant.

THE O'CONNORS OF BALLINAHINCH. By Mrs. Hungerford.

THE O'CONNORS OF BALLINAHINCH. By Mrs. Hungerford.

NOR WIFE, NOR MAID. By Mrs. Hungerford.

NEITHER WIFE NOR MAID. By Mrs. Hungerford.

THE HOYDEN. By Mrs. Hungerford.

THE HOYDEN. By Mrs. Hungerford.

MAMMON. A Novel. By Mrs. Alexander.

MAMMON. A Novel. By Mrs. Alexander.

DAUGHTERS OF MEN. By Hannah Lynch.

**Daughters of Men.** By Hannah Lynch.

STORIES FOR NINON. By Émile Zola. With a Portrait by Will Rothenstein.

STORIES FOR NINON. By Émile Zola. With a Portrait by Will Rothenstein.

THE TOWER OF TADDEO. By Ouida.

THE TOWER OF TADDEO. By Ouida.

AVENGED ON SOCIETY. By H. F. Wood.

AVENGED ON SOCIETY. By H. F. Wood.

APPASSIONATA: A Musician's Story. By Elsa D'Esterre Keeling.

APPASSIONATA: A Musician's Story. By Elsa D'Esterre-Keeling.

A COMEDY OF MASKS. By Ernest Dowson and Arthur Moore.

A COMEDY OF MASKS. By Ernest Dowson and Arthur Moore.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Popular 3s. 6d. Novels.

A ROMANCE OF THE CAPE FRONTIER. By Bertram Mitford.

A ROMANCE OF THE CAPE FRONTIER. By Bertram Mitford.

'TWEEN SNOW AND FIRE. A Tale of the Kafir War of 1877. By Bertram Mitford.

'TWEEN SNOW AND FIRE. A Story from the Kafir War of 1877. By Bertram Mitford.

ORIOLE'S DAUGHTER. By Jessie Fothergill.

ORIOLE'S DAUGHTER. By Jessie Fothergill.

THE MASTER OF THE MAGICIANS. By Elizabeth Stuart Phelps and Herbert D. Ward.

THE MASTER OF THE MAGICIANS. By Elizabeth Stuart Phelps and Herbert D. Ward.

DONALD MARCY. By Elizabeth Stuart Phelps.

DONALD MARCY. By Elizabeth Stuart Phelps.

THE HEAD OF THE FIRM. By Mrs. Riddell.

THE HEAD OF THE FIRM. By Mrs. Riddell.

A CONSPIRACY OF SILENCE. By G. Colmore.

A CONSPIRACY OF SILENCE. By G. Colmore.

A DAUGHTER OF MUSIC. By G. Colmore.

A DAUGHTER OF MUSIC. By G. Colmore.

ACCORDING TO ST. JOHN. By Amélie Rives.

ACCORDING TO ST. JOHN. By Amélie Rives.

KITTY'S FATHER. By Frank Barrett.

KITTY'S DAD. By Frank Barrett.

THE JUSTIFICATION OF ANDREW LEBRUN. By F. Barrett.

THE JUSTIFICATION OF ANDREW LEBRUN. By F. Barrett.

A QUESTION OF TASTE. By Maarten Maartens.

A MATTER OF TASTE. By Maarten Maartens.

COME LIVE WITH ME AND BE MY LOVE. By Robert Buchanan.

Come live with me and be my love. By Robert Buchanan.

IN THE DWELLINGS OF SILENCE. A Romance of Russia. By Walker Kennedy.

IN THE DWELLINGS OF SILENCE. A Romance of Russia. By Walker Kennedy.

LOS CERRITOS. A Romance of the Modern Time. By Gertrude Franklin Atherton.

LOS CERRITOS. A Romance of Modern Times. By Gertrude Franklin Atherton.

WRECKAGE, and other Stories. By Hubert Crackanthorpe.

**WRECKAGE and Other Stories.** By Hubert Crackanthorpe.

MADEMOISELLE MISS, and other Stories. By Henry Harland.

**MISS, and other Stories.** By Henry Harland.

THE ATTACK ON THE MILL, and other Sketches of War. By Émile Zola. With an Essay on the short stories of M. Zola by Edmund Gosse.

THE ATTACK ON THE MILL, and other Sketches of War. By Émile Zola. With an Essay on the short stories of M. Zola by Edmund Gosse.

THE AVERAGE WOMAN. By Wolcott Balestier. With an Introduction by Henry James.

THE AVERAGE WOMAN. By Wolcott Balestier. With an Introduction by Henry James.

BLESSED ARE THE POOR. By François Coppée. With an Introduction by T. P. O'connor.

BLESSED ARE THE POOR. By François Coppée. With an Introduction by T.P. O'Connor.

PERCHANCE TO DREAM, and other Stories. By Margaret S. Briscoe.

PERCHANCE TO DREAM, and other Stories. By Margaret S. Briscoe.

WRECKERS AND METHODISTS. Cornish Stories. By H. D. Lowry

WRECKERS AND METHODISTS. Cornish Stories. By H.D. Lowry

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Fiction.—Heinemann's International Library.

New Review.—"If you have any pernicious remnants of literary chauvinism I hope it will not survive the series of foreign classics of which Mr. William Heinemann, aided by Mr. Edmund Gosse, is publishing translations to the great contentment of all lovers of literature."

New Review.—"If you have any harmful traces of literary elitism, I hope they won’t last through the series of foreign classics that Mr. William Heinemann, with the help of Mr. Edmund Gosse, is publishing translations of, much to the delight of all literature lovers."

Each Volume has an Introduction specially written by the Editor.

Each volume includes an introduction specifically written by the editor.

Mr EDMUND GOSSE.

Mr. Edmund Gosse.

Cloth, 3s. 6d.; Paper Covers, 2s. 6d.

Cloth, £3.6; Paper Covers, £2.6

IN GOD'S WAY. From the Norwegian of Björnstjerne Björnson.

IN GOD'S WAY. From the Norwegian of Bjørnstjerne Björnson.

PIERRE AND JEAN. From the French of Guy de Maupassant.

PIERRE AND JEAN. From the French of Guy de Maupassant.

THE CHIEF JUSTICE. From the German of Karl Emil Franzos, Author of "For the Right," &c.

THE CHIEF JUSTICE. From the German of Karl Emil Franzos, Author of "For the Right," etc.

WORK WHILE YE HAVE THE LIGHT. From the Russian of Count Leo Tolstoy.

WORK WHILE YOU HAVE THE LIGHT. From the Russian of Count Leo Tolstoy.

FANTASY. From the Italian of Matilde Serao.

FANTASY. From the Italian by Matilde Serao.

FROTH. From the Spanish of Don Armando Palacio-Valdés.

FROTH. From the Spanish of Don Armando Palacio-Valdés.

FOOTSTEPS OF FATE. From the Dutch of Louis Couperus.

FOOTSTEPS OF FATE. From the Dutch of Louis Couperus.

PEPITA JIMÉNEZ. From the Spanish of Juan Valera.

PEPITA JIMÉNEZ. From the Spanish of Juan Valera.

THE COMMODORE'S DAUGHTERS. From the Norwegian of Jonas Lie.

THE COMMODORE'S DAUGHTERS. From the Norwegian of Jonas Lie.

THE HERITAGE OF THE KURTS. From the Norwegian of Björnstjerne Björnson.

THE HERITAGE OF THE KURTS. From the Norwegian of Bjørnstjerne Björnson.

LOU. From the German of Baron Alexander Von Roberts.

LOU. Translated from the German by Baron Alexander von Roberts.

DOÑA LUZ. From the Spanish of Juan Valera.

DOÑA LUZ. From the Spanish of Juan Valera.

THE JEW. From the Polish of Joseph Ignatius Kraszewski.

THE JEW. From the Polish of Joseph Ignatius Kraszewski.

UNDER THE YOKE. From the Bulgarian of Ivan Vazoff.

UNDER THE YOKE. From the Bulgarian of Ivan Vazoff.

FAREWELL LOVE! From the Italian of Matilde Serao.

GOODBYE LOVE! From the Italian of Matilde Serao.

THE GRANDEE. From the Spanish of Don Armando Palacio-Valdés.

THE GRANDEE. From the Spanish of Don Armando Palacio-Valdés.

A COMMON STORY. From the Russian of Ivan Gontcharoff.

A COMMON STORY. From the Russian of Ivan Goncharov.

WOMAN'S FOLLY. From the Italian of Gemma Ferruggia.

WOMAN'S FOLLY. From the Italian of Gemma Ferruggia.

SIREN VOICES (NIELS LYHNE). From the Danish of J. P. Jacobsen.

SIREN VOICES (NIELS LYHNE). From the Danish of J.P. Jacobsen.

NIOBE. From the Norwegian of Jonas Lie.

NIOBE. From the Norwegian author Jonas Lie.

THE OLD ADAM AND THE NEW EVE. From the German of Rudolf Golm.

THE OLD ADAM AND THE NEW EVE. From the German of Rudolf Golm.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Fiction.—The Pioneer Series.

Cloth, 3s. net.; Paper Covers, 2s. 6d. net.

Cloth, £3 net; Paper Covers, £2.50 net.

The Athenæum.—"If this series keeps up to the present high level of interest, novel readers will have fresh cause for gratitude to Mr. Heinemann."

The Athenæum.—"If this series maintains its current high level of interest, novel readers will have new reasons to be grateful to Mr. Heinemann."

The Daily Telegraph.—"Mr. Heinemann's genial nursery of up-to-date romance."

The Daily Telegraph.—"Mr. Heinemann's friendly collection of modern romance."

The Observer.—"The smart Pioneer Series."

The Observer.—"The sleek Pioneer Series."

The Manchester Courier.—"The Pioneer Series promises to be as original as many other of Mr. Heinemann's ventures."

The Manchester Courier.—"The Pioneer Series looks like it will be just as original as many of Mr. Heinemann's other projects."

The Glasgow Herald.—"This very clever series."

The Glasgow Herald.—"This is a really smart series."

The Sheffield Telegraph.—"The refreshingly original Pioneer Series."

The Sheffield Telegraph.—"The uniquely original Pioneer Series."

Black and White.—"The brilliant Pioneer Series."

Black and White.—"The amazing Pioneer Series."

The Liverpool Mercury.—"Each succeeding issue of the Pioneer Series has a character of its own and a special attractiveness."

The Liverpool Mercury.—"Every new issue of the Pioneer Series has its own vibe and a unique appeal."

 

JOANNA TRAILL, SPINSTER. By Annie E. Holdsworth.

JOANNA TRAILL, SINGLE WOMAN. By Annie E. Holdsworth.

GEORGE MANDEVILLE'S HUSBAND. By C. E. Raimond.

GEORGE MANDEVILLE'S HUSBAND. By C. E. Raimond.

THE WINGS OF ICARUS. By Laurence Alma-Tadema.

THE WINGS OF ICARUS. By Laurence Alma-Tadema.

THE GREEN CARNATION. By Robert Hichens.

THE GREEN CARNATION. By Robert Hichens.

AN ALTAR OF EARTH. By Thymol Monk.

An Altar of Earth. By Thymol Monk.

A STREET IN SUBURBIA. By E. W. Pugh.

A STREET IN SUBURBIA. By E.W. Pugh.

THE NEW MOON. By C. E. Raimond.

THE NEW MOON. By C. E. Raimond.

MILLY'S STORY. By Mrs. Montague Crackanthorpe.

MILLY'S STORY. By Mrs. Montague Crackanthorpe.

MRS. MUSGRAVE—AND HER HUSBAND. By Richard Marsh.

MRS. MUSGRAVE—AND HER HUSBAND. By Richard Marsh.

THE RED BADGE OF COURAGE. By Stephen Crane.

THE RED BADGE OF COURAGE. By Stephen Crane.

THE DEMAGOGUE AND THE LADY PHAYRE. By William J. Locke.

THE DEMAGOGUE AND THE LADY PHAYRE. By William J. Locke.

HER OWN DEVICES. By C. G. Compton.

HER OWN DEVICES. By C.G. Compton.

PAPIER MACHE. By Charles Allen.

PAPER MACHE. By Charles Allen.

THE NEW VIRTUE. By Mrs. Oscar Berringer.

THE NEW VIRTUE. By Mrs. Oscar Berringer.

ACROSS AN ULSTER BOG. By M. Hamilton.

ACROSS AN ULSTER BOG. By M. Hamilton.

ONE OF GOD'S DILEMMAS. By Allen Upward.

ONE OF GOD'S DILEMMAS. By Allen Upward.

THE LITTLE REGIMENT. By Stephen Crane.

THE LITTLE REGIMENT. By Stephen Crane.

LOVE FOR A KEY. By G. Colmore.

LOVE FOR A KEY. By G. Colmore.

YEKL. A Tale of the New York Ghetto. By A. Cahan.

YEKL. A Tale of the New York Ghetto. By A. Cahan.

A MAN WITH A MAID. By Mrs. Henry Dudeney.

A MAN WITH A MAID. By Mrs. Henry Dudeney.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Fiction.—Price 3s. net.

LITTLE JOHANNES. By F. Van Eeden. Translated from the Dutch by Clara Bell. With an Introduction by Andrew Lang. 12mo, cloth, silver top, 3s. net.

LITTLE JOHANNES. By F. Van Eeden. Translated from the Dutch by Clara Bell. With an Introduction by Andrew Lang. 12mo, cloth, silver top, 3s. net.

THE NOVELS OF BJÖRNSTJERNE BJÖRNSON. Uniform Edition. Edited by Edmund Gosse. Fcap. 8vo, cloth, 3s. net. each volume.

THE NOVELS OF BJÖRNSTJERNE BJÖRNSON. Uniform Edition. Edited by Edmund Gosse. Fcap. 8vo, cloth, 3s. net. each volume.

Vol. I.—SYNNÖVÉ SOLBAKKEN.

Vol. I.—SYNNÖVÉ SOLBAKKEN.

With Introductory Essay by Edmund Gosse, and a Portrait of the Author.

With an Introductory Essay by Edmund Gosse and a Portrait of the Author.

Vol. II.—ARNE.

Vol. II—ARNE.

Vol. III.—A HAPPY BOY.

Vol. III.—A HAPPY KID.

Vol. IV.—THE FISHER LASS.

Vol. IV.—THE FISHING GIRL.

Vol. V.—THE BRIDAL MARCH AND A DAY.

Vol. V.—THE BRIDAL MARCH AND A DAY.

Vol. VI.—MAGNHILD AND DUST.

Vol. VI.—MAGNHILD AND DUST.

Vol. VII.—CAPTAIN MANSANA AND MOTHER'S HANDS.

Vol. VII.—CAPTAIN MANSANA AND MOM'S HANDS.

Vol. VIII.—ABSALOM'S HAIR, AND A PAINFUL MEMORY.

Vol. VIII.—ABSALOM'S HAIR, AND A PAINFUL MEMORY.

 

THE NOVELS OF IVAN TURGENEV. Uniform Edition. Edited by Constance Garnett. Fcap. 8vo, cloth, 3s. net. each volume.

THE NOVELS OF IVAN TURGENEV. Uniform Edition. Edited by Constance Garnett. Fcap. 8vo, cloth, 3s. net. each volume.

Vol. I.—RUDIN.

Vol. I.—RUDIN.

With a Portrait of the Author and an Introduction by Stepniak.

With a portrait of the author and an introduction by Stepniak.

Vol. II.—A HOUSE OF GENTLEFOLK.

Vol. II.—A HOME OF GENTLEFOLK.

Vol. III.—ON THE EVE.

Vol. III.—THE EVE.

Vol. IV.—FATHERS AND CHILDREN.

Vol. IV.—PARENTS AND KIDS.

Vol. V.—SMOKE.

Vol. V.—SMOKE.

Vol. VI., VII.—VIRGIN SOIL. (Two Volumes.)

Vol. VI, VII—Virgin Soil. (Two Volumes.)

Vol. VII.—CAPTAIN MANSANA AND MOTHER'S HANDS.

Vol. VII.—CAPTAIN MANSANA AND MOTHER'S HANDS.

Vol. VIII., IX.—A SPORTSMAN'S SKETCHES. (Two Volumes.)

Vol. VIII., IX.—A SPORTSMAN'S SKETCHES. (Two Volumes.)

Vol. X.—DREAM TALES AND OTHER FANTASIES.

Vol. X.—DREAM TALES AND OTHER FANTASIES.

Vol. XI.—THE TORRENTS OF SPRING.

Vol. XI.—THE SPRING FLOODS.

 

 


 

[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]

 

Fiction.—popular 2s. 6d. Novels.

THE TIME MACHINE. By H. G. Wells.

THE TIME MACHINE. By H. G. Wells.

 ※ Also in paper, 1s. 6d.

Also in print, 1s. 6d.

THE DOMINANT SEVENTH: A Musical Story. By Kate Elizabeth Clarke.

THE DOMINANT SEVENTH: A Musical Story. By Kate Clarke.


Price 2s.

MAGGIE. By Stephen Crane.

MAGGIE. By Stephen Crane.


Popular Shilling Books.

PRETTY MISS SMITH. By Florence Warden, Author of "The House on the Marsh," "A Witch of the Hills," &c.

Pretty Miss Smith. By Florence Warden, author of "The House on the Marsh," "A Witch of the Hills," etc.

THE MOMENT AFTER: A Tale of the Unseen. By Robert Buchanan.

THE MOMENT AFTER: A Tale of the Unseen. By Robert Buchanan.

CLUES; or, Leaves from a Chief Constable's Note-Book. By William Henderson, Chief Constable of Edinburgh.

CLUES; or, Leaves from a Chief Constable's Note-Book. By William Henderson, Chief Constable of Edinburgh.


THE NORTH AMERICAN REVIEW.

Edited by David A. Munro.

Edited by David A. Munro.

Published monthly. Price 2s. 6d.

Published monthly. Price 2s. 6d.


PAN.

A Quarterly Review of Art and Letters.

A Quarterly Review of Art and Letters.

Ordinary Edition, 25s. each Part net, or £4 4s. per annum net.

Ordinary Edition, £25 each Part net, or £4.04 per year net.

Edition de Luxe (70 Copies) on Japanese paper, by Subscription only; £8 8s. per annum net.

Edition de Luxe (70 Copies) on Japanese paper, available by subscription only; £8 8s. per year, net.


LONDON: WILLIAM HEINEMANN, 21 Bedford Street, W.C.

LONDON: WILLIAM HEINEMANN, 21 Bedford St., W.C.


Transcriber's Notes

Obvious punctuation errors repaired.

Punctuation errors fixed.

The remaining corrections made are indicated by dotted lines under the corrections. Scroll the mouse over the word and the original text will appear.

The remaining corrections are shown with dotted lines under them. Hover over the word, and the original text will appear.

Colour illustrations from the 2 volume 1898 edition have been added.

Colour illustrations from the 2-volume 1898 edition have been added.




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!